Skip to main content

Full text of "California Code of Regulations, (Vol. 10), Title 8, Industrial Relations (Part 3)"

See other formats


JSB^ 



Barclays Official 

California 

Code of 
Regulations 



Title 8. Industrial Relations 



Complete Title 

(continued) 



Vol. 10 



XHOIVIISOIM 

^ 

WEST 



Barclays Official California Code of Regulations 

425 Market Street • Fourth Floor • San Francisco, CA 94105 
800-888-3600 



Barclays Official California Code Of Regulations 

revised edition 

This edition of Barclays Official California Code of Regulations, revised on April 1 , 1990, has been 
published under the direction of the California Office of Administrative Law which is solely respon- 
sible for its contents. Comments or questions regarding regulations published in this edition should 
be addressed to the State of California, Office of Administrative Law, 300 Capitol Mall, Suite 1250, 
Sacramento, CA 95814, (916) 323-6225. Errors reported will be promptly corrected in subsequent 
supplements. 

OFFICIAL PUBLICATION 

Courts are required to take judicial notice of contents of regulations published in the Official Califor- 
nia Code of Regulations (Gov. Code, § 11344.6). Barclays Official California Code of Regulations, 
as revised April 1 , 1990, has been certified by the Office of Administrative Law as the official publi- 
cation of the State of California for this purpose pursuant to title 1 , California Code of Regulations, 
section 190. 

CODE SUPPLEMENTS 

Amendments to the official Code are certified weekly by the Office of Administrative Law for publi- 
cation by Barclays. These amendments, when certified and published, become part of the Official 
California Code of Regulations, beginning with Register 90, No. 14, dated April 7, 1990, and include 
all regulations filed with the Secretary of State on or after April 1, 1990. Amendment subscriptions 
to the entire revised Code, or to parts of it, are available from the publisher. For a descriptive bro- 
chure and order form, write Barclays Official California Code of Regulations, RO. Box 2008, San 
Francisco, CA 94126 or telephone 800-888-3600. 

CODE CITATION 

Cite all materials in the Official California Code of Regulations by title number and section number. 
Example: Title 3, California Code of Regulations, section 432 (Short form: Cal. Code Regs., tit. 3, 

§ 432). 

COPYRIGHT NOTICE 

© 2008, State of California. 

This material may not be commercially reproduced or sold in print or electronic forms without 

written permission of ThomsonAVest. 



TITLE 8. INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS 



NOMENCLATURE CROSS-REFERENCE 



(NOTE: Effective April 1 , 1 990, tiie Office of Administrative Law authorized tiie renaming of the 
hierarchical headings used within the Titles of the California Code of Regulations. Until the agen- 
cies implement these changes in their regulations, use the following Cross-Reference Table for 
the new organizational headings used in this Title.) 



OLD HIERARCHY REVISED HIERARCHY 

Part Division 

Division Subdivision 

Chapter Chapter 

Subchapter Subchapter 

Part Subchapter 

Group Group 

Article Article 

Section Section 



Title 8 



Industrial Relations 



Title Table of Contents 



Title 8. Industrial Relations 



Table of Contents 



Page 

Division 1 . Department of Industrial 

Relations 1 

Chapter 1 . Industrial Medical Council i 

Article 1 . General I 

Article 2. QME Eligibility 2 

Article 2.5. Time Periods for Processing 
Applications for QME 
Status 2.8(b) 

Article 3. Assignment of Qualified 
Medical Evaluators, 
Evaluation Procedure 2.9 

Article 4. Evaluation Procedures 2.18 

Article 4.5. Minimum Time 

Guidelines 2.24(z)(5] ) 

Article 5. QME Reappointment 2.24(z)(52) 

Article 6. QME Discipline 2.24(z)(54) 

Article 7. Practice Parameters for the 
Treatment of Common 
Industrial Injuries 2.24(z)(56)(e) 

Article 10. QME Application Forms 2.25 

Article 10.5. QME Process Forms 2.44(a) 

Article 15. Fraudulent or Misleading 

Advertising 2.67 

Chapter 2. California Apprenticeship 

Council 3 

Subchapter 1 . Apprenticeship 3 

Article A-1 . General Provisions 3 

Article 1 . Procedures for 

Investigating, Holding 

Hearings and Determining 

Disputes 3 

Article 2. Definitions 4 

Article 3. Standards for Minimum Wages, 
Maximum Hours and Working 
Conditions 5 

Article 4. Apprenticeship Standards 6 

Article 5. Selection Procedures 8.2 

Article 6. Apprenticeship Programs and 

Committees 8.2(a) 



Page 

Article 7. State Certificates of 
Completion of 
Apprenticeship 8.2(a) 

Article 8. Local Joint Apprenticeship 
Committee Certificate of 
Authorization 8.2(a) 

Article 9. Certificates of Meritorious 

Service 8.2(b) 

Article 10. Required Apprentices On 

Public Works Contract 8.2(b) 

Subarticle 1. General 8.2(d)(1) 

Subarticle 2. Determinations and 

Request for Review 8.2(h) 

Subarticle 3. Prehearing Procedures 8.2(j) 

Subarticle 4. Hearings 8.2(1) 

Subarticle 5. Decision of the 

Administrator 8.2(o) 

Subarticle 6. Limitations Period 8.2(p) 

Article 1 1 . Joint Regulations Regarding 
Excess Costs for Related 
and Supplemental 
Instruction of Apprentices 8.2(p) 

Apprenticeship Program Fees 8.3 

Other On-the-Job 

Training 8.4 

General Provisions 8.4 

Declaration of Policy and 

Purpose 8.4 

Training Standards 9 

Selection Procedures 10 

Procedures for 

Investigating, Holding 

Hearings and Determining 

Disputes I ] 

Article 5. Selection Procedures 12 

Article 6. Training Programs and 

Committees 1 3 

Article 7. State Certificates of 

Training 13 

Article 8. Local Joint Training 

Committee Certificate of 
Authorization 13 

Article 9. Certificates of Meritorious 

Service 13 



Article 12. 


Subchapter 2. 


Article A-1 


Article 1. 


Article 2. 


Article 3. 


Article 4. 



Page i 



(7 11 2I)(1S) 



Title Table of Contents 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE 



OF REGULATIONS Title 8 

Page 

Article 1.5. Employer's Declaration of 
Abatement and Other 
Documentation of Abatement — 
Employee Notification — 
Posting Requirements 33 

Article 1.6. Adjudicative Hearings — 
General Rules of Practice 
and Procedure — Denial, 
Suspension or Revocation of 
Permits, Licenses, 
Certifications, 
Registrations or Other 
Authorizations and Orders 
Prohibiting Use, Issued by 
the Division of 
Occupational Safety and 
Health 34.1 

Article 2. Permits — Excavations, 

Trenches, Construction and 

Demolition and the 

Underground Use of Diesel 

Engines in Work in Mines 

and Tunnels 34.4 

Article 2.5. Registration — Asbestos- 
Related Work 35 

Article 2.6. Asbestos Consultants and 
Site Surveillance 
Technicians 37 

Article 2.7. Approval of Courses and 

Course Providers 39 

Article 3. Reporting Work-Connected 

Injuries 40.12 

Article 4. Aerial Passenger Tramway 

Inspection Fee Schedule 40.12 

Article 5. Boiler and Tank Permit and 

Inspection Fee Schedule 40.12 

Article 6. Permanent Amusement Rides 41 

Article 6. 1 . Amusement Ride Inspection 

Fee Schedule 42.2(c) 

Article 7. Blaster's License 42.2(c) 

Article 8. Elevator Inspection Fee 

Schedule 42.2(c) 

Article 9. Correctional Industries 42.2(d) 

Article 10. Civil and Criminal 

Enforcement Policy of the 

Division of Occupational 

Safety and Health 42.2(e) 

Article 1 1 . License Requirements — Crane 

and Derrick Certification 42.2(f) 

Article 12. Tower Cranes — Operating 
Permit and Certification 
Requirements 42.2(h) 



Page 

Subchapter 3. Journeyman On-the-Job 

Training 13 

Subchapter 4. Electrician 

Certification 14 



Chapter 3. 

Subchapter 1. 
Subchapter 2. 

Article 1. 
Article 11. 
Subchapter 4. 

Chapter 3.2. 

Subchapter 1. 

Article 1. 

Article 2. 
Article 3. 



Article 4. 
Article 4.5. 
Article 5. 

Article 6. 



Subchapter 2. 



Article 1. 



Fair Employment and Housing 
Commission 15 

Administration 15 



Discrimination in 

Employment 15 

General Matters 15 

Age Discrimination 15 



Procedures of the 
Commission 



15 



California Occupational Safety 
and Health Regulations (CAL/ 
OSHA) 17 

Regulations of the 

Director of Industrial 

Relations 



17 



Definitions Under California 

Occupational Safety and 

Health Act of 1973 17 

Advance Notice of 

Inspections 17 

Citation, Notice, Special 

Order, Order to Take 

Special Action, Notice of 

No Violations After 

Investigation: Procedures 18 



Proposed Penalty Procedure 19 

Multi-Employer Worksites 22.1 

Hazardous Substances 

Information and Training 22.1 

Workers' Compensation Loss 
Control Consultation 
Services, Annual Health and 
Safety Loss Control Plan — 
Requirements and 
Procedures 



32.5 



Regulations of the 
Division of Occupational 
Safety and Health 



Employers' Obligation to 
Provide Information to 
Employees 



32.10 



32.10 



Page ii 



(7-11-2008) 



Title 8 



Industrial 
Page 

Certification Requirements 42.5 

Limitations on Division 

Eligibility for 

Certifications, Licenses, 

and Registrations for 

Aliens 42.7 

Occupational Safety and Health 

Appeals Board 43 

General 43 

Service of Documents and 

Duty to Notify Others of 

Appeal and Hearing 45 

Prehearing Procedure 

Discovery, and Motions 49 

Hearing 53 

Reconsideration 56.1 

Employers' Cost Recovery 56.3 

Occupational Safety and Health 
Standards Board 57 

Rules of Procedure for 

Permanent Variances and 

Appeals from Temporary 

Variances 57 

General 57 

Applications for Permanent 
Variances and Appeals from 
Temporary Variances 58 

Prehearing Proceedings 60 

Hearings and Decisions 61 

Division of Industrial Safety 65 

Unfired Pressure Vessel 

Safety Orders 65 

Scope of These Orders 65 

Design and Construction 68 

Air Tanks 70 

Pressure Vessels Other Than 

Air Tanks, LPG, NH3 and CNG 

or LNG Tanks 74 

LP-Gas Systems 74 

Anhydrous Ammonia 79 

Compressed and Liquefied 

Natural Gas System 103 

Safe Practices ill 

Boiler and Fired Pressure 

Vessel Safety Orders 115 

Scope of These Orders 115 

Definitions 115 



Relations 



Title Table of Contents 

Page 

Design and Construction 117 

Installation 117 

Inspection 120 

Operation 123 

Repairs 124 

Compressed Air Safety 

Orders (Governing Work 

in Compressed Air) 131 

Application 1 3 1 

Definitions 131 

General Provisions 131 

Compression 131 

Decompression 131 

Air Locks and Special 
Decompression Chamber 131 

Temperature, Illumination, 
Sanitation and Ventilation 131 

Compressor Plant, Air 
Supply, and Telephone 
Communication 131 

Bulkheads and Screens 132 

Fire Prevention 132 

Medical Attendance, 

Examination, and 

Regulations 132 

Suggestions for the Guidance 

of Compressed Air Workers 132 

Construction Safety 

Orders 153 

Introduction 153 

Definitions 153 

General 160 

Dusts, Fumes, Mists, Vapors, 

and Gases 164 

Rock Drilling 166.38 

Excavations 166.39 

Bins, Bunkers, Hoppers, and 
Material Storage 178.28 

Explosives 178.28 

Derricks, Cranes, Boom-Type 
Excavators 180 

Haulage and Earth Moving 186 

Vehicles, Traffic Control, 
Flaggers, Barricades, and 
Warning Signs 190 

Pile Driving 191 

Work Over or Near Water 192 

Construction Hoists 193 



Article 13. 
Article 14. 



Chapter 3.3. 

Article 1. 
Article 1.5. 

Article 3. 

Article 4. 
Article 5. 
Article 6. 

Chapter 3.5. 
Subchapter 1. 



Article 1. 


Article 2. 


Article 3. 


Article 4. 


Chapter 4. 


Subchapter 1 . 


Article 1. 


Article 2. 


Article 3. 


Article 4. 


Article 5. 


Article 6. 


Article 7. 


Article 10, 


Subchapter 2. 


Article 1. 


Article 2. 



Article 3. 
Article 4. 
Article 5. 
Article 6. 
Article 7. 
Subchapter 3. 

Article 1. 
Article 2. 
Article 3. 
Article 4. 
Article 5. 
Article 6. 

Article 7. 

Article 8. 



Article 9. 


Article 10. 


Article 11. 


Article 12. 


Subchapter 4. 


Article 1. 


Article 2. 


Article 3. 


Article 4. 


Article 5. 


Article 6. 


Article 7. 


Article 8. 


Article 9. 


Article 10. 


Article 11. 


Article 12. 


Article 13, 


Article 14. 



Page iii 



Title Table of Contents BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA COPE 

Page 

Article 15. Hoisting 214 

Article 16. Railings 214 

Article 17. Ramps, Runways, Stairwells, 

and Stairs 215 

Article 1 8. Access and Egress 216 

Article 19. Floor, Roof, and Wall 

Openings 218 

Article 20. Temporary Floors 218 

Article 2 1 . Scaffolds — General 

Requirements 218.1 

Article 22. Scaffolds— Various Types 220 

Article 23. Suspended Scaffolds 227 

Article 24. Fall Protection 231 

Article 25. Ladders 233 

Article 26. Saws — Power 235 

Article 27. Powder-Actuated Tools 235 

Article 28. Miscellaneous Construction 

Tools and Equipment 236 

Article 29. Erection and Construction 239 

Article 30. Roofing Operations and 

Equipment 246 

Article 31. Demolition 246.3 

Article 32. Oxygen, Acetylene, and Fuel 

Gas 246.5 

Ai'ticle 33. Electrical Requirements for 

Construction Work 246.6 

Article 34. Nonionizing Radiation 247 

Article 35. Helicopter Operations 248 

Article 36. Fire Protection and 

Prevention 249 

Subchapter 5. Electrical Safety Orders 301 

Group 1 . Low- Voltage Electrical Safety 

Orders 301 

Article 1 . Definitions 301 

Article 2. Administration 306 

Article 3. Work Procedures 307 

Article 4. Requirements for Electrical 

Installations 309 

Article 5. Use and Identification of 
Grounded and Grounding 
Conductors 312 

Article 6. Branch Circuits 313 

Article 7. Feeders 314 

Article 8. Outdoor Wiring 314 

Article 9. Services 315 

Article 10. Overcurrent Protection 316 



OF REGULATIONS Title 8 

Page 

Article 1 1 . Grounding 317 

Article 12. Wiring Methods, Components, 

and Equipment for General 

Use 322 

Article 13. Temporary Wiring 323 

Article 14. Conductors for General 

Wiring 324 

Article 15. Cable Trays 324 

Article 16. Open Wiring on Insulators 325 

Article 17. Concealed Knob-and-Tube 

Wiring 325 

Article 18. Mineral-Insulated Metal- 
Sheathed Cable 325 

Article 19. Aluminum-Sheathed Cable 326 

Article 20. Copper-Sheathed Cable 326 

Article 21 . Metal-Clad Cable 326 

Article 22. Nonmetallic-Sheathed Cable 326 

Article 23. Shielded Nonmetallic- 
Sheathed Cable 326 

Article 24. Service-Entrance Cable 326 

Article 25. Underground Feeder and 

Branch Circuit Cable 326 

Article 26. Power and Control Tray 

Cable 326 

Article 27. Nonmetallic Extensions 326 

Article 28. Underplaster Extensions 326 

Article 29. Intermediate Metal Conduit 326 

Article 30. Rigid Metal Conduit 326 

Article 31. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit 326 

Article 32. Electrical Metallic Tubing 326 

Article 33. Flexible Metal Conduit 326 

Article 34. Liquidtight Flexible Metal 

Conduit 326 

Article 35. Surface Raceways 326 

Article 36. Multi-Oudet Assembly 326 

Article 37. Underfloor Raceways 326 

Article 38. Cellular Metal Floor 

Raceways 327 

Article 39. Cellular Concrete Floor 

Raceways 327 

Article 40. Wireways 327 

Article 41 . Flat Cable Assemblies 327 

Article 42. Busways 327 

Article 43. Cablebus 327 

Article 44. Electrical Floor Assemblies 327 

Article 45. Cabinets, Boxes, and 

Fittings 327 



Page iv 



(7-11-2008) 



Title 8 



Industrial Relations 

Page 

Auxiliary Gutters 327 Article 73. 

Switches 327 

Switchboards and ^^^^^^^ ^^• 

Panelboards 328 Article 74. 1 . 

Enclosures for Damp or Wet 
Locations 329 

Flexible Cords and Cables 329 

Article 75. 
Fixture Wires 330 

Article 76. 
Lighting Fixtures, 

Lampholders, Lamps and . 

Receptacles 330 

Appliances 332 . . , ^^ , 

^^ Article 77.1. 

Fixed Electric Space Heating . . ^ 

Equipment 334 

Fixed Outdoor Electric De- * • i -,0 

X , , • Article 78. 

Icing and Snow Melting 

Equipment 334 

Fixed Electric Heating * _■ 1 nn 

^ ■ r ^- .- , Article 79. 

Equipment tor Pipelines and 

Vessels 334 

Article 80. 
Motors, Motor Circuits and 

Controllers 335 Article 81. 

Transformers and Transformer 

Vaults (Including Secondary Article 82. 

Ties) 336.1 Article 83. 

Capacitors 336.2 Article 84. 

Storage Batteries 336.2 

Hazardous (Classified) 

Locations 336.2 

Oil and Gas Wells 336.il 

Class II Locations 341 Article 86 

Class III Locations 341 Article 87. 

Hazardous (Classified) Article 88. 

Locations Specific 341 a ^- 1 or> 

^ Article 89. 

Commercial Garages, Repair 

and Storage 341 ^ ^ 

'^ Group 2. 

Aircraft Hangars 341 

Gasoline Dispensing and Article 1 . 

Service Stations 341 Article 2. 

Bulk Storage Plants 341 Article 3. 

Oil and Gas Wells 341 Article 4. 

Finishing Processes 341 

Places of Assembly 342 Article 5. 

Theaters and Similar Article 6. 

Locations 342 Article 7. 

Motion-Picture Studios and 

Similar Locations 344 Article 8. 

Motion Picture Projectors 346 Article 9. 



Title Table of Contents 

Page 

Electric Signs and Outline 

Lighting 348 

Cranes and Hoists 349 

Elevators, Dumbwaiters, 
Escalators, Moving Walks, 
Wheelchair Lifts, and 
Stairway Chair Lifts 35() 

Electric Welders 351 

Sound Recording and Similar 
Equipment 351 

Information Technology 

Equipment 351 

X-Ray Equipment 352 

Induction and Dielectric 

Heating Equipment 352 

Electrically Driven or 

Controlled Irrigation 

Machines 353 

Swimming Pools, Fountains 

and Similar Installations 353 

Emergency Power Systems 354.1 

Stand-By Power Generation 
Systems 354.1 

Electrolytic Systems 354.2 

Electrolytic Cells 354.2 

Carnivals, Circuses, Fairs, 

and Similar Events 354.3 

Class 1, Class 2, and Class 
3 Remote Control, 
Signaling, and Power- 
Limited Circuits 354.4 

Fire Alarm Systems 354.5 

Communications Systems 354.5 

Solar Photovoltaic Systems 354.6 

Integrated Electrical 

Systems 354.6 

High-Voltage Electrical Safety 

Orders 354.6 

Definitions 354.6 

Administration 359 

General 360 

Service and Service Entrance 
Equipment 361 

Feeders and Branch Circuits 362 

Grounding 363 

General Requirements — Wiring 
Methods 365 

Pull and Junction Boxes 366 

Open Wiring (Bare) 366 



Article 46. 
Article 47. 
Article 48. 

Article 48.1. 

Article 49. 
Article 50. 
Article 51. 

Article 52. 
Article 53. 

Article 54. 

Article 55. 

Article 56. 
Article 57. 

Article 58. 
Article 58.1. 
Article 59. 

Article 60. 
Article 61. 
Article 62. 
Article 63. 

Article 64. 

Article 65. 
Article 66. 

Article 67. 
Article 67.1. 
Article 68. 
Article 69. 
Article 70. 

Article 71. 

Article 72. 



Page V 



(7 II 2t)08) 



Title Table of Contents 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA 

Page 

Conduit 367 

Metal-Enclosed Bus 368 

Continuous Rigid Cable 

Supports 369 

Metal-Clad Cable 369 

Portable (Flexible) Cable 370 

Temporary Wiring 371 

Vertical Suspension of 

Cables 371 

Vaults and Enclosures 371 

Conductors 373 

Outdoor Wiring 373 

Switches 375 

Circuit Breakers 376 

Automatic Circuit Reclosers 377 

Power Fuses 377 

Distribution Cutouts and 

Fuse Links — Expulsion Type 378 

Oil-Filled Cutouts 378 

Metal-Enclosed Power 

Switchgear and Industrial 

Control Assemblies 379 

Transformers 380 

Rotating Machinery and Its 

Control Apparatus 381 

Capacitors 385 

Resistors and Reactors 386 

Lightning Arresters 386 

Mobile and Portable 

Equipment 386 

Mine and Tunnel 

Installations 387 

Hazardous (Classified) 

Locations 388 

Workspace and Guarding 388 

Work Procedures and 

Operating Procedures 389 

Provisions for Preventing 

Accidents Due to Proximity 

to Overhead Lines 399 

Line Clearance Tree Trimming 
Operations 400 

Signs and Outline Lighting — 
Exceeding 600 Volts 400 

Electronic News Gathering 400.1 



CODE OF REGULATIONS Title 8 

Page 

Subchapter 6. Elevator Safety Orders 401 

Group I. Administrative Regulations 401 

Article 1 . Application 401 

Article 2. Permit to Operate 402 

Article 3. Variances 403 

Article 4. Qualifications for Certified 

Inspectors 403 

Article 5. Standard Reference 

Documents 405 

Article 6. Definitions 405 

Group II. Elevator Installations for 
Which the Installation 
Contract Was Signed Before 
October 25, 1998 415 

Article 7. Hoistways, Hoistway 

Enclosures, and Related 
Construction for Power 
Cable-Driven Passenger and 
Freight Elevators 415 

Article 8. Machinery and Equipment for 
Power Cable-Driven 
Passenger and Freight 
Elevators 426 

Article 9. Hydrauhc Elevators 455 

Article 10. Hand and Power Sidewalk 

Elevators 458.3 

Article 1 1 . Hand Elevators 461 

Article 12. Hand and Power Dumbwaiters 

Scope 462 

Article 12.1. Material Lifts and 

Dumbwaiters with Automatic 
Transfer Devices 465 

Article 12.2. Incline Elevators 466 

Article 12.3. Special Purpose Personnel 

Elevators 466 

Article 12.5. Vertical or Inclined 

Reciprocating Conveyors 470 

Article 12.6. Screw Type Elevators 472 

Article 13. Escalators 473 

Article 14. Moving Walks 476 

Article 15. Special Access Elevators and 

Special Access Lifts 478 

Article 16. Hand Power Man Platforms 484.3 

Article 17. Manlifts 484.4 

Article 18. Design Data, Formulas, Tests 
on Approved Devices, and 
Electrical Regulations 490 



Article 10. 
Article 11. 
Article 12. 

Article 13. 
Article 14. 
Article 15. 
Article 16. 

Article 17. 
Article 18. 
Article 19. 
Article 20. 
Article 21. 
Article 22. 
Article 23. 
Article 24. 

Article 25. 
Article 26. 

Article 27. 
Article 28. 

Article 29. 
Article 30. 
Article 3 1 . 
Article 32. 

Article 33. 

Article 34. 

Article 35. 
Article 36. 

Article 37. 

Article 38. 
Article 39. 
Article 40. 



Page vi 



(7-11-2008) 



Title 8 



Industrial 

Page 

Installations Defined by 

Section 3000(f) of These 

Orders. Elevator 

Installations for Which the 

Installation Contract Was 

Signed on or After October 

25, 1998, but Before May 1, 

2008 505 

Hoistways, Hoistway 

Enclosures, and Related 

Construction for Electric 

Elevators 505 

Machinery and Equipment for 
Electric Elevators 506 

Hydraulic Elevators 508 

Power Sidewalk Elevators 508.1 

Hand Elevators 508.1 

Hand and Power Dumbwaiters . 508.1 

Escalators 508.1 

Moving Walks 508.2 

Periodic and Acceptance 

Inspections and Tests 508.2 

Engineering and Type Tests 508.2 

Design Date and Formulas 508.3 

Material Lifts and 
Dumbwaiters With Automatic 
Transfer Devices 508.3 

Special-Purpose Elevators 508.3 

Rack and Pinion Elevators 508.3 

Inclined Elevators 508.3 

Screw Column Elevators 508.3 

Special Access Elevators and 

Special Access Lifts 508.3 

Seismic Requirements 508.3 

Hand Power Man Platforms 508.4 

Manlifts 508.4 

Conveyance Installations for 

Which the Installation 

Contract Was Signed on or 

After May 1, 2008 508.4 

Apphcation 508.4 

Conveyances Covered by ASME 
A17.1-2004 508.4 

Conveyances Covered by ASME 
A18.1-2003 508.7 

Automated Guided Transit 
Vehicles with an Exclusive 
Right-of-Way 508.7 



Relations 



Title Table of Contents 

Page 

Hand Power Man Platforms, 
Manlifts, and Vertical and 
Inclined Reciprocating 
Conveyors 508.7 

Passenger Tramway Safety 

Orders 509 

Administrative Regulations 5(W 

Classifications and 

Definitions 510 

Reversible Aerial Tramways 512 

Detachable Grip Aerial 

Lifts 512 

Fixed Grip Aerial Lifts 513 

Surface Lifts 513 

Tows 513 

Wire Rope and Strand 

Requirements 513 

Pennanent Amusement Ride 

Safety Orders 515 

Application and Definitions 515 

Requirements, Other Than 

Recordkeeping and Transfer 

of Information, Applicable 

to All Permanent Amusement 

Rides 515 

Aquatic Devices 518 

Recordkeeping and 

Information Transfer 519 

General Industry Safety 

Orders 533 

General Physical Conditions 

and Structures 540 

Definitions 540 

Standard Specifications 543 

Special Design 

Requirements 554.2 

Access, Work Space, and Work 
Areas 556 

Window Cleaning 566.3 

Powered Platforms and 
Equipment for Building 
Maintenance 576 

Safe Practices and Personal 

Protection 578.18 

Miscellaneous Safe 

Practices 578.18 

Labor Camps 586 

Sanitation 586 

Personal Safety Devices and 
Safeguards 587 



Group III. 



Article 44. 



Article 20. 



Article 21. 

Article 22. 
Article 23. 
Article 24. 
Article 25. 
Article 26. 
Article 27. 
Article 28. 

Article 29. 
Article 30. 
Article 31. 

Article 32. 
Article 33. 
Article 34. 
Article 35. 
Article 36. 

Article 37. 
Article 38. 
Article 39. 
Group IV. 



Article 40. 
Article 41. 

Article 42. 

Article 43. 



Subchapter 6. 1 


Article 1. 


Article 2. 


Article 3. 


Article 4. 


Article 5. 


Article 6. 


Article 7. 


Article 8. 


Subchapter 6.2. 


Article 1. 


Article 2. 



Article 3. 


Article 4. 


Subchapter 7. 


Group 1. 


Article I. 


Article 2. 


Article 3. 


Article 4. 


Article 5. 


Article 6. 


Group 2. 


Article 7. 


Article 8. 


Article 9. 


Article 10. 



Page vii 



(7 II 2(K)«) 



Title Table of Contents BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA 

Page 

Article 10.1. Personal Protective Clothing 
and Equipment for Fire 
Fighters 590 

Article 1 1 . Outdoor Advertising 

Structures 595 

Group 3. General Plant Equipment and 

Special Operations 596 

Article 12. Tree Work, Maintenance or 

Removal 596 

Article 13. Agricultural Operations 599 

Article 14. Marine Terminal Operations 600.5 

Article 15. Vats, Pans, Bins, Bunkers, 
Hoppers, and Similar 
Containers and Vessels 608 

Article 17. Engines and Compressors 609 

Article 19. Automotive Lifts 610 

Article 20. Hand and Portable Powered 

Tools and Equipment 611 

Article 21 . Use, Care, and Protection of 

Abrasive Wheels 612 

Group 4. General Mobile Equipment and 

Auxiliaries 625 

Article 23. Mobile Ladder Stands and 

Scaffolds (Towers) 625 

Article 24. Elevating Work Platforms and 

Aerial Devices 627 

Article 25. Industrial Trucks, Tractors, 
Haulage Vehicles, and 
Earthmoving Equipment 631 

Article 26. Vehicle Mounted Elevating 
and Rotating Work 
Platforms 638 

Article 27. Transportation of Employees 

and Materials 638 

Article 29. Industrial Railroads 639 

Article 31. Gantry Trucks (Straddle 

Carriers) 642 

Article 32. Tiering Conveyors 643 

Article 35. Amusement Rides 643 

Group 6. Power Transmission Equipment, 
Prime Movers, Machines and 
Machine Parts 645 

Article 37. Purpose, Definitions and 

Standards 645 

Article 41. Prime Movers and Machinery 648 

Article 43. Shafting, Collars, Clutches, 
Cut-Off Couplings and 
Clutch Pulleys 649 

Article 44. Pulleys 650 



CODE OF REGULATIONS Title 8 

Page 

Article 45. Belt and Pulley Drives 650 

Article 46. Gears, Friction Drives, 

Sprockets, and Chains 651 

Article 47. Power Disconnecting Devices 651 

Group 8. Points of Operation and Other 

Hazardous Parts of Machinery 651 

Article 54. Scope and General 

Definitions 651 

Article 55. Power Operated Presses 654.2 

Article 56. Metal Working Machines 662.5 

Article 57. Die Casting Machines 663 

Article 59. Woodworking Machines and 

Equipment 664 

Article 60. Refuse and Trash Collection 

Equipment 669 

Article 61 . Compaction Equipment 670 

Article 64. Pulp, Paper and Paperboard 

Mills 672 

Article 65. Paper Converting and 

Printing Machines 676 

Article 66. Textiles 677 

Article 67. Laundry and Dry Cleaning 

Equipment 679 

Article 68. Leather and Composition 

Goods Machines 681 

Article 69. Food and Tobacco Machinery 682 

Article 70. Chemical Industry Machines 686 

Article 7 1 . Rubber and Composition 

Working Machines 686.1 

Article 72. Plastic Processing 

Machinery 689 

Article 73. Stone, Clay and Glass 

Working Machines 689 

Article 74. Cotton Gins and Seed Cotton 

Processing Machines 689 

Group 9. Compressed Gas and Air 

Equipment 691 

Article 75. Definitions 691 

Article 76. Compressed Gas and Air 

Cylinders 691 

Article 77. Cylinder Inspection 692 

Article 78. Safety Relief Devices for 

Compressed Gas Containers 692 

Article 79. Safety Relief Devices for 
Cargo and Portable Tanks 
Storing Compressed Gases 692 

Group 10. Gas Systems for Welding and 

Cutting 692 

Article 80. Purpose and Definitions 692 



Page viii 



(7-11-2008) 



Title 8 



Industrial 
Page 

General 692.1 

Stationary Automatic 

Acetylene Generators 693 

Portable Automatic Acetylene 
Generators 694 

Calcium Carbide 695 

Service Piping for All 

Gases 695 

Manifolding of Cylinders to 
Headers for Shop Pipe Line 
Supply Systems and Pressure 
Reducing Regulators and 
Hose 697 

operating Procedure 698 

Fire Prevention in Welding 

and Cutting Operations 699 

Electric Welding 699 

Electric Welding, Cutting 

and Heating 699 

Cranes and Other Hoisting 
Equipment 701 

Definitions 702 

Cranes (Except Boom-Type 

Mobile Cranes) 714 

Boom-Type Mobile Cranes 718 

Hydraulic Cranes and 

Excavators 722 

Derricks 723 

Tower Cranes 723 

Hoists, Auxihary Hoisting 

Equipment and Hoisting 

Operations 724.1 

Operating Rules 725 

Testing 734 

Inspection and Maintenance 736 

Slings 736.1 

Radiation and Radioactivity 756 

Standards for Protection 

Against Radiation 756 

Actinic Radiation 756 

Nonionizing Radiation 756 

Occupational Noise and 

Ergonomics 757 

Control of Noise Exposure 757 

Ergonomics 763 

Control of Hazardous 

Substances 763 



Relations 



Title Table of Contents 

Page 

Dusts, Fumes, Mists, Vapors 

and Gases 763 

Confined Spaces 8()4.2(a) 

Hazardous Substances and 
Processes «04.16 

Regulated Carcinogens 844.44 

Fumigation 953 

Labeling of Injurious 

Substances 954 

Explosive Materials 959 

Explosive Materials 959 

Storage of Explosive 

Materials 963 

Transportation of Explosive 
Materials 970 

Handling and Use of 

Explosive Materials in 

Blasting Operations 972 

Explosives for Well Service 

Industry 981 

Manufacturing and Processing 

of Explosive Materials 982 

Blasting Agents 984.1 

Snow Avalanche Blasting 984.3 

Ammonium Nitrate Storage .... 984.8 

Small Arms Ammunition, Small 
Arms Ammunition Primers, 
Smokeless Propellants, and 
Black Powder Propellants 984.9 

Flammable Liquids, Gases and 

Vapors 984.10 

Definitions 984.10 

General 985 

Dip Tanks 986 

Spray Coating Operations 989 

Hydrogen 995 

Oxygen 1000 

Electrical Equipment 1002 

Container and Portable Tank 

Storage 1003 

Industrial Plants 1007 

Processing Plants 1008 

Service Stations 1009 

Tank Storage 1012 

Piping, Valves and Fittings 1022 

Bulk Plants 1023 

Refineries, Chemical Plants, 
Wineries and Distilleries 1028 



Article 81. 
Article 82. 

Article 83. 

Article 84. 
Article 85. 

Article 86. 



Article 87. 
Article 88. 

Group 11. 
Article 90. 

Group 13. 

Article 91. 
Article 92. 

Article 93. 
Article 94. 

Article 95. 
Article 96. 
Article 97. 

Article 98. 
Article 99. 
Article 100. 
Article 101. 
Group 14. 
Article 102. 

Article 103. 
Article 104. 
Group 15. 

Article 105. 
Article 106. 
Group 16. 



Article 107. 

Article 108. 
Article 109. 

Article 110. 
Article 111. 
Article 112. 

Group 18. 
Article 113. 
Article 114. 

Article 115. 

Article 116. 

Article 118. 

Article 119. 

Article 120. 
Article 121. 
Article 122. 
Article 123. 



Group 20. 

Article 134. 
Article 135. 
Article 136. 
Article 137. 
Article 138. 
Article 139. 
Article 140. 
Article 141. 

Article 142. 
Article 143. 
Article 144. 
Article 145. 
Article 146. 
Article 147. 
Article 148. 



Page ix 



(7 n 20US) 



Title Table of Contents BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA 

Page 

Group 25. Federal Regulations 1028 

Article 150. Scope 1028 

Article 151. OSHA Standards 1028 

Group 26. Diving and Pressurized 

Worksite Operations 1028 

Article 152. Diving Operations 1028 

Article 153. Commercial Diving 

Operations 1034 

Article 154. Pressurized Worksite 

Operations 1036 

Group 27. Fire Protection 1038.16 

Article 156. Definitions 1038.16 

Article 157. Portable Fire Extinguishers 1039 

Article 158. Standpipe and Hose Systems 1041 

Article 159. Automatic Sprinkler 

Systems 1041 

Article 160. Fixed Extinguishing 

Systems 1042 

Article 161. Fixed Extinguishing Systems, 

Dry Chemical 1043 

Article 162. Fixed Extinguishing Systems, 

Gaseous Agents 1043 

Article 163. Fixed Fire Extinguishing 

Systems — Water-Spray, and 

Foam-Water Sprinkler 

Systems 1044 

Article 164. Fire Detection Systems 1044 

Article 165. Employee Alarm Systems 1044 

Subchapter 8. Safety Rules for Gold 

Dredges 1045 

Subchapter 9. Lamp Scaffold and 

Parallel Safety Orders 1045 

Subchapter 10. Liquefied Petroleum Gases 

Safety Orders 1045 

Subchapter 1 1 . Logging and Sawmill 

Safety Orders 1045 

Subchapter 12. Mine Safety Orders 1045 

Subchapter 13. Logging and Sawmill 

Safety Orders 1047 

Article 1. Introduction 1047 

Article 1.5. Accident Prevention and 

First Aid 1049 

Article 2. Logging Operations — 

General 1049 

Article 3. Logging Roads and Bridges 1050 

Article 4. Signals and Communication 

Systems 1051 

Article 5. Falling and Bucking 1052 



CODE OF REGULATIONS Title 8 

Page 

Article 6. Climbing and Preparation of 

Spar Trees 1053 

Article 7. Rigging 1054 

Article 8. Logging Machines 1056 

Article 9. Tractors (Including Rubber- 
Tired) 1056 

Article 10. Portable Metal Spars 1057 

Article 1 1 . Helicopter Yarding 

Operations 1058 

Article 12. Yarding, Swinging, and 

Loading 1060 

Article 13. Transportation 1060.1 

Article 14. Log Dumps, Ponds and Other 

Log Handling FaciUties 1062 

Article 15. Sawmills 1063 

Article 16. Veneer and Plywood Plants 1067 

Article 17. Lath, Shingle, and Shake 

Mills 1068 

Subchapter 1 4. Petroleum Safety Orders — 

Drilling and Production 1081 

Article 1. Application and Variances 1081 

Article 2. Definitions 1082 

Article 3. Injury and Illness 

Prevention Program 1084 

Article 4. First Aid and Medical 

Services 1084 

Article 5. Dangerous Exposure 1084 

Article 6. Fires and Explosions 1085 

Article 7. Confined Spaces 1086 

Article 8. Gas and Vapor Testing 1086 

Article 9. Pipe Lines, Fittings, and 

Valves 1086 

Article 10. Opening and Blinding Pipe 

Lines and Equipment 1087 

Article 1 1 . Drainage, Housekeeping and 

Leakage Control 1088 

Article 12. Hazardous Substances 1088 

Article 13. Agitation and Heating of 

Liquids in Tanks 1088 

Article 14. Reservoirs and Stationary 

Tanks 1088 

Article 15. Unfired Pressure Vessels, 
Boilers, and Fired Pressure 
Vessels and Pressure Relief 
Devices 1089 

Article 16. Gas Compressors and 

Engines 1092 

Article 17. Identification of Wells and 

Equipment 1092.1 



Page X 



(7-11-2008) 



Title 8 



Industrial Relations 
Page 

Standard Type Derricks 1092.1 Article 43. 

All DeiTicks, Masts and Article 44. 

Supporting Structures 1094 

Cellars and Shafts 1095 Article 45. 

Access and Exits, Derrick 

and Mast Floors 1096 Article 46. 

Safety Belts and Lanyards 1096 

Article 47. 
Erection ol Derricks and 

Masts 1096 . . , .„ 

Article 48. 

Guying Derricks and Masts 1097 . . , .p, 

•^ * Article 49. 

Crown Platforms and Article 50 

Railings 1097 

Article 51. 
Pipe and Sucker Rod 

Platforms for Derricks and . ■ , ^^ 

Article 52. 
Masts 1098 

^- ^ , • ^ r Article 53. 

Pipe Racking Supports tor 

Derricks and Masts 1098 

Article 54. 
Ladders and Ladderway 

Openings for Derricks and 

Masts 1098 Article 56. 

Tools, Equipment, and Subchapter 15. 

Materials in Derricks or 

Masts 1100 

Back-Up Posts, Kelly Pull- Article 1 . 

Back Posts, Back-Up and Article 2. 

Safety Lines for Pipe Article 3. 

Tongs 1100 

Handling Heavy Tools at Article 4. 

Drilling Wells 1 100 Article 5. 

Rotary and Circulating Hose Article 6. 

and Standpipe 1 100 Article 7 

Rotary Drilling Machinery 1100 Articles. 

Standard Tool-Drilling Article 9. 

Machinery 1100 Article 10. 

Drilling and Well-Servicing Article 1 1 

Machinery and Equipment llOl 

Oil Well Pumping Machinery Article 12. 

andEquipment 1102 Article 13. 

Pumps and Pump Pressure Article 14 

Relief Devices 1 103 

Guarding Sheaves for Article 1 5 

Telescoping, Jackknife, Gin 

Pole and Cantilever * ^- i i ^ 

r^ . , J ^ , Article 1 6. 

Derricks and Masts 1 103 

Traveling Blocks and Hooks Article 1 7 

or Similar Devices 1104 

Wire Rope Lines 1 104 Article 1 8 

Catheads for Well-Drilling 

and Well-Servicing 

Machinery 1104 



Title Table of Contents 
Page 

Lines Used on Catheads 1105 

Miscellaneous Tools and 

Equipment 1 105 

Pipe Handling and Storage 

Racks 1106 

Liquid Loading and Unloading 
Facilities and Operations 1106 

General Safety Provisions 

and Precautions ii()7 

Illumination 1 1 07 

Wharves and Piers il f)7 

Shafts at Oil Wells 1107 

Rig-Building Equipment and 
Operations 1108 

Prime Movers 1 108 

Line Spoolers and Dead Line 
Stabilizers 1109 

Weight Indicators 1109 

Blowout Prevention 1109 

Attractive Nuisance Guards l no 

Petroleum Safety Orders — 

Refining, Transportation 

and Handling iii3 

Application and Scope 1113 

Definitions 1113 

Injur}/ and Illness 

Prevention Program 1115 

First Aid 1115 

Fire and Explosions 1115 

Dangerous Exposure 1117 

Confined Spaces 1117 

Access and Egress 1 1 17 

Tanks and Reservoirs 1118 

Gas and Vapor Testing 1 1 1 9 

Opening and Blinding Pipe 

Lines and Equipment 1119 

Hazardous Substances 1120 

Drainage 1120 

Agitation and Heating of 

Liquids in Tanks 1 120 

Process Equipment - 

Maintenance 1 120 

Pumps, Pipe Lines. Fittings 

and Valves 1121 

Equipment Leakage and 

Breakage 1121 

Unfired Pressure Vessels, 
Boilers, and Fired Pressure 
Vessels and Pressure Relief 
Valves 1122 



• 



Article 18. 
Article 19. 

Article 20. 
Article 21. 

Article 22. 
Article 23. 

Article 24. 
Article 25. 

Article 26. 

Article 27. 
Article 28. 

Article 29. 

Article 30. 

Article 31. 

Article 32. 

Article 33. 
Article 34. 

Article 35. 

Article 37. 

Article 38. 

Article 39. 

Article 40. 

Article 41. 
Article 42. 



Page xi 



Title Table of Contents BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA 

Page 

Article 19. Identification of Equipment 1124 

Article 20. High-Pressure 

Hydrocarbons 1124 

Article 21. Gas Compressors and 

Engines 1124 

Article 22. Loading and Unloading 

Platforms and Operations 1125 

Article 23. Laboratories and Pilot 

Plants 1125 

Article 24. Wharves and Piers 1 126 

Article 25. Miscellaneous Safety 

Practices 1126 

Subchapter 17. Mine Safety Orders 1129 

Article 1. Definitions 1130 

Article 3. Reports to the Division 1130 

Article 4. Accident Prevention 

Program 1131 

Article 5. Care of Injured 1131 

Article 6. General Safety Precautions 1133 

Article 7. Drinking Water, Change 

Rooms, and Sanitation 1133 

Article 10. Personal Protection 1134 

Article 1 1 . Materials — Storage and 

Handling 1134 

Article 12. Ground Control 1 134 

Article 13. Illumination 1135 

Article 15. Mining Equipment and 

Practices 1135 

Article 16. Drilling Operations and 

Jumbos 1137 

Article 17. Loading, Hauling, and 

Dumping 1137 

Article 18. Conveyors and Tramways 1140 

Article 20. Transportation of Workers 1141 

Article 21 . Mine Ladders and 

Travelways 1 141 

Article 22. Fire Prevention and Control 1143 

Article 25. Engines-Internal 

Combustion 1145 

Article 26. Emergency Plan 1146 

Article 27. Escapeways and Refuge 

Stations 1146 

Article 30. Rescue Stations and 

Equipment Underground 1147 

Article 31. Air Quality, Radiation, and 

Ventilation 1148 

Article 32. Gases in Mines 1149 



CODE OF REGULATIONS Title 8 

Page 

Article 35. Mine Shafts 1150 

Article 36. Hoisting Equipment 1151 

Article 37. Hoisting Practices 1154 

Article 40. Inspections 1155 

Article 41 . Telephones 1 156 

Article 45. Protection Against Water 1156 

Article 46. Dangerous Excavations at 

Underground Mines 1156 

Article 47. Electrical Equipment and 

Practices 1156 

Article 50. Explosives 1158 

Article 51. Storage of Explosives 1159 

Article 52. Transportation of Explosives .... 1159 

Article 53. Handling and Use of 
Explosives — Blasting 
Operations 1 160 

Article 54. Mixing Blasting Agents 1161 

Article 55. Licensing of Blasters 1161 

Subchapter 18. Ship Building, Ship 
Repairing and Ship 
Breaking Safety Orders 1 173 

Article 1. Introduction 1173 

Article 2. Application 1173 

Article 3. Definitions 1173 

Article 4. Control of Hazardous Work 1176 

Article 5. Scaffold Construction 1176.57 

Article 6. Precautions 1 180 

Article 7. Welding, Cutting and 

Heating 1183 

Article 8. Miscellaneous Safe 

Practices 1184 

Article 9. Personal Protective 

Equipment 1186.3 

Subchapter 19. Trench Construction 

Safety Orders 1 186.5 

Subchapter 20. Tunnel Safety Orders 1187 

Article 1. Introduction 1187 

Article 2. Definitions 1 187 

Article 3. Injury and Illness 

Prevention Program 1189 

Article 4. Safety Precautions 1191 

Article 5. Personal Protective 

Equipment 1191 

Article 6. Illumination and Lasers 1192 

Article 7. First Aid 1192 

Article 8. Tunnel Classifications 1193 

Article 9. Emergency Plan and 

Precautions 1195 



• 



Page xii 



(7-11-2008) 



Title 8 



Industrial 

Page 

Emergency Rescue Procedures 

and Equipment 1 195 

Change Houses and 

Sanitation 1196 

Ventilation and Air Quality 1196 

Ground Control 1197 

Fire Prevention and Control 1197 

Drilling 1 198 

Mechanical Tunneling 

Methods, Machinery and 

Equipment 1 198 

Transportation and Haulage 1199 

Shafts and Hoisting Systems 1203 

Explosives 1208 

Storage of Explosives 1208 

Transportation of 

Explosives 1209 

Handling and Use of 

Explosives — Blasting 

Operations 1209 

Licensing of Blasters 1210 

Telecommunication Safety 

Orders 1217 

Telecommunications 1217 

Division of Workers' 

Compensation 1225 

Administrative Director — 
Administrative Rules 1225 

Payment and Conduct of 

Workers' Compensation 

Judges 1225 

Workers' Compensation 

Information System 1225 

Receipt of Salary by 

Workers' Compensation 

Administrative Law 

Judge 1226.2(b) 

Ethical Standards of 

Workers' Compensation 

Referees; Enforcement of 

Standards 1226.3 

Disabilities, Description 

of 1227 

Permanent Disability Ratings 

and Evaluations 1228 

Medical Provider Network 1229 

Independent Medical 

Review 1230.10(a) 



Relations 


Title Table of Contents 






Page 


Article 4. 


Certification Standards for 
Health Care Organizations . . . 


. 1230.22 


Article 5. 


Predesignation of Personal 
Physician; Request for 
Change of Physician; 
Reporting Duties of the 
Primary Treating Physician; 
Petition for Change of 
Primary Treating 
Physician 


. 1236.13 


Article 5.1. 


Spinal Surgery Second 
Opinion Procedure 


. 1240.10 


Article 5.3. 


Official Medical Fee 
Schedule 12 


4().l{)(d)(H) 


Article 5.5. 


Application of the Official 

Medical Fee Schedule 

(Treatment) l24().l()(/)(25) 


Article 5.5.1. 


Utilization Review 
Standards 


. 1240.24 


Article 5.5.2. 


Medical Treatment 
Utilization Schedule 


1240.28(g) 


Article 5.6. 


Medical-Legal Expenses and 
Comprehensive Medical-Leg 
Evaluations 


al 

, 1240.28(j) 


Article 5.7. 


Fees for Interpreter 
Services 


, . 1240.31 


Article 6. 


Consulting Physician, 
Certification of 


. . P40.33 


Article 7. 


Schedule for Rating 
Permanent Disabilities 


. . 1240.33 


Article 8. 


Benefit Notices; Claims 
Administrator's Duties and 
Responsibilities; Claim 
Form and Notice of 
Potential Eligibility for 
Benefits; Regulatory 
Authority of the 
Administrative Director 


, . 1240.34 


Articles.!. 


Workers' Compensation 
Advertising by Non- 
Attorneys and Non- 
Physicians; Prohibition of 
False or Misleading 
Advertising 


.. 1248.1 


Article 8.5. 


Employee Information 


.... 1250 


Article 9. 


Computation of Life 
Pensions, Tables for 


.. 1252.1 


Article 10. 


Employee Death, Notice of . . 


.. 1252.1 


Article 10.5. 


Operation of the Information 
and Assistance Program of 
the Division of Workers' 
Compensation 


. . . 1252.2 



• 



Article 10. 

Article 11. 

Article 12. 
Article 13. 
Article 14. 
Article 15. 
Article 16. 

Article 17. 
Article 19. 
Article 20. 
Article 21. 
Article 22. 

Article 23. 

Article 24. 
Subchapter 21. 

Article 1. 
Chapter 4.5. 

Subchapter 1. 

Article 1. 

Article 1.1. 
Article 1.5. 



Article 1.6. 

Article 2. 

Article 3. 

Article 3.5, 
Article 3.6. 



Page xiii 



|7 11 2(l(*) 



Title Table of Contents BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA 

Page 

Article 1 1 . Document Copy and Electronic 

Transaction Fees 1254 

Article 12. Return to Work 1255 

Subchapter 1.5. Injuries on or After 

January 1. 1990 1256.7 

Article 1. Audit, General Definitions 1256.7 

Article 2. Claims Administration and 

Recordkeeping 1260 

Article 3. Auditing 1262 

Article 4. Notices of Compensation 

Due 1264.8 

Article 5. Administrative Penalties 1264.8 

Article 5.5. Administrative Penalties 
Pursuant to Labor Code 
Section 5814.6 I264.8(m) 

Article 6. Civil Penalty 1264.10 

Article 7. Appeals 1264.12 

Article 6. Claim Form: Availability, 

Filing, Acknowledgement of 

Receipt, Dismissal 

[Renumbered] 1264.14 

Article 7. Vocational Rehabilitation 1264.15 

Article 7.5. Supplemental Job 

Displacement Benefit I288.6(w) 

Article 8. Attorney Fee Disclosure 

Statement 1288.7 

Article 9. Claim Form: Availability, 

Filing, Acknowledgement of 
Receipt, Dismissal 1288.9 

Subchapter 1 .6. Permanent Disability 

Rating Determination 1288.12(b) 

Subchapter 1 .7. 1288.14(b)(7) 

Subchapter 1.8. Collective Bargaining 

Agreements Under Labor 
Code Sections 3201.5 and 
3201.7 1288.14(d) 

Subchapter 1 .8. L Administrative Director — 
Other Administrative 
Penalties I288.l4(p) 

Article 1 . Administrative Penalties 
Pursuant to Labor Code 
Section 5814.6 I288.i4(p) 

Subchapter 1 .9. Rules of the Court 

Administrator 1288. 14(q) 

Subchapter 2. Workers' Compensation 

Appeals Board — Rules and 

Practice Procedure I288.i4(t) 

Article L General I288.l4(t) 



CODE OF REGULATIONS Title 8 

Page 

Article 2. Powers, Duties and 

Responsibilities 1288.15 

Article 3. Parties and Joinder 1288.17 

Article 4. Filing of Documents 1288.18 

Article 5. Pleadings 1288.19 

Article 6. Service 1288.24 

Article 7. Subpoenas 1288.25 

Article 8. Hearings 1288.25 

Article 9. Evidence and Reports 1288.28 

Article 10. Medical Examiners 1288.31 

Article 11. Transcript of Testimony 1288.32 

Article 12. Record of Proceedings 1288.32 

Article 13. Liens 1288.33 

Article 14. Attorneys and 

Representatives 1288.34 

Article 15. Findings, Awards and 

Orders 1288.35 

Article 16. Executions and Certified 

Copies 1288.35 

Article 17. Reconsideration 1288.35 

Article 18. Settlements 1288.38 

Article 19. Subsequent Injuries Fund 1288.39 

Article 20. Review of Administrative 

Orders 1288.40 

Article 2L General 1288.41 

Article 22. Arbitration 1288.43 

Chapter 5. Industrial Welfare Commission 1289 

Group 1 . General Minimum Wage 

Order 1289 

Article 1. Minimum Wage Order 1289 

Group 2. Industry and Occupation 

Orders 1289 

Article 1. Manufacturing Industry 1289 

Article 2. Personal Service Industry 1295 

Article 3. Canning, Freezing, and 

Preserving Industry 1301 

Article 4. Professional, Technical, 
Clerical, Mechanical, and 
Similar Occupations 1308 

Article 5. Public Housekeeping 

Industry 1315 

Article 6. Laundry, Linen Supply, Dry 
Cleaning, and Dyeing 
Industry 1316.6 

Article 7. Mercantile Industry 1316.12 Jfl^ 

Article 8. Industries Handling Products ^^ 

After Harvest 1316.18 

Article 9. Transportation Industry 1316.25 



Page xiv 



(7-11-2008) 



Title 8 



Industrial Relations 

Page 

Amusement and Recreation Article 1. 

Industry 1321 

Broadcasting Industry 1327 

., r.- T , Article 2. 

Motion Picture Industry 1334 

Industries Preparing 

Agricultural Products for Subchapter 4 

Market, on the Farm 1338.2 

Agricultural Occupations 1338.8 

Household Occupations 1338.12 

On-Site Occupations 1338.17 Subchapter 5 

Miscellaneous Employees 1340.2 

Regulations Governing Wage 

Boards 1340.5 Article 1. 

Regulations Governing Wage Article 2. 

Boards 1340.5 Article 3. 

Division of Labor Standards Subchapter 5.5. 

Enforcement 1341 

Child Labor Orders — 

Prohibited Occupations 1341 

Prohibited Occupations 1341 Article 1. 

Employment of Minors in 

the Entertainment 

Industry 1341 

Subchapter 6. 

Motion Picture Industries 1341 a ..• i i 

Article 1. 

Child Labor Law 

Violations 1344.1 Subchapter 6.5. 

Regulations Regarding 

Citation and Penalty 

Procedure for Violation of 

Child Labor Provisions 1344.1 

Employment Agencies 1346 

General Rules and 

Regulations 1346 Article 1 

Rules and Regulations 

Governing General Subchapter 7. 

Employment Agencies 1346 Article 1 

Rules and Regulations 

Governing Theatrical Article 2. 

Employment Agencies 1346 

Rules and Regulations 

Governing Labor Subchapter 8. 

Contractors 1346 Subchapter 9. 

Controversies and Requests 

for Certification That No Subchapter 10. 

Controversy Exists, 

Submitted Under Section 

1647 of the Labor Code As 

to Employment Agencies 1346 



Title Table of Contents 

Page 

General Rules and 
Regulations for Artists' 

Managers 1 346 

Controversies Submitted 

Under Section 1700.44, 

Labor Code I34y 

Rules and Regulations 

Governing Nonprofit 

Organizations Exempt 

from Licensing As 

Employment Agencies 1352 

Registration of Persons 

Who Unload Farm 

Products 1352 

Registration of Unloaders 1352 

Registration of Producers 1352 

Registration of Producer's 

Unloaders 1352 

Unloading of Farm 

Products in the Markets 

of San Mateo, Alameda, 

and San Francisco 1353 

Unloading of Farm Products 

in the Markets of San 

Mateo, Alameda, and San 

Francisco 1353 

Security for Wages 1354 

Logging and Sawmill 

Industry 1354 

Hearings on Actions to 

Recover Wages, 

Penalties, and Other 

Demands for Compensation 

and on Claims from 

Holders of Dishonored 

Payroll Checks or 

Drafts 1355 

Rules of Practice and 

Procedure 1355 

Industrial Homework 1359 

Enforcement of Industrial 
Homework Act 1359 

Prohibiting Industrial 
Homework in the Garment 
Manufacturing Industry 1360 

Garment Manufacturers 1361 

Labor Commissioner's Farm 

Labor Contractor Fund 1364.5 

Registration of 

Employers, Transporters, 

and Supervisors of 

Minors Engaged in Door- 

to-Door Sales 1364.6 



Article 10. 

Article 11. 
Article 12. 
Article 13. 

Article 14. 
Article 15. 
Article 16. 
Article 17. 
Group 3. 

Article 1. 

Chapter 6. 

Subchapter 1. 

Article 1. 
Subchapter 2. 

Article 1. 
Subchapter 2.5 

Article 1. 



Subchapter 3. 
Article 1. 

Article 2. 
Article 3. 
Article 4. 
Article 5. 



Page XV 



Title Table of Contents 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



Subchapter 11. 

Subchapter 12. 
Chapter 7. 

Subchapter 1. 

Article 1. 
Article 2. 

Article 3. 

Subchapter 2. 



Page 

Car Washing and 

Polishing 1364.14 

Collections 1364.19 

Division of Labor Statistics and 

Research 1365 

Occupational Injury or 

Illness Reports and 

Records 1365 

Reporting of Occupational 

Injury or Illness 1365 

Employer Records of 

Occupational Injury or 

Illness 1370 

Public Agency Records of 

Occupational Injury or 

Illness 1374.17 

Reports of Injury to Be 

Filed by the California 

Department of 

Corrections 1374.17 



Article 1. 


Prison Labor 


. 1374.17 




Article 2. 


Reports to Be Filed by 






Department of Corrections . . 


. 1374.17 


Article 7. 


Chapter 8. 


Office of the Director 


. ... 1375 




Subchapter 1. 


Unloading of Farm 




Article 8. 




Products 


. ... 1375 




Article 1 . 


Approval of Charges 


. ... 1375 


Article 9. 


Subchapter 2. 


Administration of Self- 




Article 10. 




Insurance Plans 


1375 


Article 11. 


Article 1. 


Definitions 


. . . . 1375 


Article 12. 


Article 2. 


Certificate to Self Insure .... 


1377 




Article 3. 


Security Deposit 
Requirements 


. ... 1381 


Article 14. 


Article 3.1. 


Alternative Composite 




Article 15. 




Deposits 


. . . . 1387 


Subchapter 2.06, 


Article 4. 


Assessments 


. . 1388.3 




Article 5. 


Self Insurer's Annual 








Report 


. . 1388.4 




Article 6. 


Estimating Work Injury 








Claims and Medical Reports . 


. . . . 1389 




Article 7. 


Injury and Illness 








Prevention Program 


. . . . 1390 




Article 8. 


Transfer of Liabilities 


. . . . 1391 




Article 9. 
Article 10. 


Recordkeeping and Audits . . . 
Revocation of a Certificate 


. ... 1391 


Article 1. 



to Self Insure or 

Certificate to Administer 

and Continuing 

Jurisdiction 1394 



Page 

Article 1 1 . Hearing and Appeal 

Procedures 1394.1 

Article 12. Claims Administration 1394.5 

Article 13. Group Self Insurance 1394.115 

Subchapter 2.05. Enforcement of Workers' 
Compensation Coverage, 
Penalty Assessment 
Orders, Stop Orders and 
Posting and Notice 
Requirements 1394.118 

Article 1 . Delegation of Enforcement 

Authority 1394.1 18 

Article 2. Definitions 1394.118 

Article 3. Investigation of Employer's 
Workers' Compensation 
Status 1395 

Article 4. Penalties 1395 

Article 5. Stop Order 1396 

Article 6. Contents of Orders, of 

Direction to File Verified 
Statement and of Verified 
Statement 1396 

Service of Stop Order and 

Penalty Assessment Order 1397 

Review of Proceedings and 
Withdrawal Proceedings 1397 

Appeal Procedures 1397 

Hearing 1397 

Writ of Review 1398 

Special Judgment Procedure 

As to Penalty Assessment 

Orders 1398 

Penalty Liens 1398 

Notice of Right to Benefits 1399 

Workers' Compensation- 
Administration Revolving 
Fund Assessment, 
Uninsured Employers 
Benefits Trust Fund 
Assessment, Subsequent 
Injuries Benefits Trust 
Fund Assessments, Fraud 
Surcharge and Cal-OSHA 
Targeted Inspection 
Assessment 1399 

Definitions 1399 

Article 2. Determination of Assessments 

and/or Surcharge 1400 

Article 3. Collection of Assessments 

and/or Surcharges 1400.2 



Page xvi 



(7-11-2008) 



Title 8 Industrial Relations 

Page 

Subchapter 2. 1 . Illegally Uninsured Subchapter 2.3. 

Employers. 
Determinations by the 

Director: Prima Facie Subchapter 3. 

Illegally Uninsured, 
Corporate Parent and 

Substantial Shareholder; ^^'^^'^ ^• 

Notice; Hearings; Article 2. 

Appeals 1400.6 

Article 3. 
Article 1 . General 1400.6 

Article 2. Determinations by Director .... 1400.6 Article 4. 

Article 5. 
Article 3. Hearings Under Code Section 

3720.1 1400.7 

Subchapter 2. 1 . 1 . Uninsured Employers Fund Article 6. 

and Subsequent Injuries 
Fund Benefits to Aliens 1401 

Article 7. 
Article 1. Limitations on Benefits 1401 

Subchapter 2.2. Procedure Under the Laws 

Pertaining to the Subchapter 4. 

Alameda-Contra Costa 

Transit District, the Article 1 . 

Fresno Metropolitan 

Transit District, the 

Greater Bakersfield 

Metropolitan Transit 

District, the Marin Article 2. 

County Transit District, 

the North San Diego 

County Transit 

Development Board, the 

Orange County Transit Article 3. 

District, the Sacramento Article 4. 

Regional Transit 

District, the San Diego 

County Transit District, Article 5 

the San Diego 

Metropolitan Transit Article 6. 

Development Board, the Article 8. 

San Francisco Bay Area Subchapter 4. 

Transit District, the 

San Mateo County Transit 

District, the Santa c k h 

Barbara Metropolitan 

Transit District, the 

Santa Clara County 

Transit District, the Subchapter 6. 

So. California Rapid Article 1. 

Transit District, the All? 

Stockton Metropohtan 

Transit District, and 

the West Bay Rapid Article 3. 

Transit Authority 1402.7 Article 4. 



Title Table of Contents 

Page 

Election Procedure Under 

San Francisco Bay Area 

Rapid Transit District Law 1406 

Payment of Prevailing 

Wages upon Public Works 1406 

Definitions 1406 

Work Subject to Prevailing 

Wages 1408 

Duties. Responsibilities, 

and Rights of Parties 1409 

Wage Determinations 1410 

Petitions to Review 

Prevailing Wage 

Determinations 1413 

Certified Payroll Records: 
Requests, Content, and 

Cost 1414 

Withholding of Funds from 

Contractor — Hearing 

Procedure 1414.1 

Awarding Body Labor 

Compliance Programs 1414.3 

Operation of Labor 

Compliance Program and 

Contracts Subject to Labor 

Compliance Program 

Jurisdiction 1414.3 

Approval and Revocation of 

Approval of Labor 

Compliance Programs by 

Director 1414.4 

Reports and Audits 1414.6 

Limited Exemption from the 

Requirement to Pay 

Prevailing Wages 1414.7 

Enforcement 1414.8 

Severability 1414.9 

Debarment 1414.10 

Employment of Aliens Not 

Entitled to Lawful 

Residence 1415 

Department of Industrial 

Relations — Conflict of 

Interest Code 1415 

Prevailing Wage Hearings 1416.2(a) 

General 1416.2(a) 

Assessment or Notice and 

Request for Review 1416.6 

Prehearing Procedures 1416.9 

Hearings 1416.10 



• 



Page xvii 



Title Table of Contents 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



Page 

Article 6. Decision of the Director 1416.14 

Article 7. Transitional Rule 1416.15 

Division 2. Agricultural Labor Relations 

Board 1417 

Chapter 1 . Definitions 1417 

Chapter 1 .5. General Rules of Pleading and 

Practice 1417 

Chapter 2. Unfair Labor Practice 

Regulations 1421 

Chapter 3. Procedure Under Chapter 5 of the 
Act for the Determination of 
Questions Concerning 
Representation of Employees 1435 

Chapter 4. Mandatory Mediation and 

Conciliation 1444. l 

Chapter 4.5. Submission of Collective 

Bargaining Agreements 1444.4 

Chapter 5. Certification and Signature of 

Documents 1444.4 

Chapter 6. Availabihty of Board Materials 

and Documents 1444.4 

Chapter 7. Prohibited Communications 1444.4 

Chapter 8. Practice Before the Board 1444.6 

Chapter 9. Solicitation by Non-Employee 

Organizers 1444.6 

Chapter 10. Symbols or Emblems 1444.9 

Chapter 12. Conflict of Interest Code 1444.9 

Division 3. Public Employment Relations 

Board 1445 

Chapter 1 . Public Employment Relations 

Board 1445 

Subchapter 1. Internal Procedures 1445 

Article 1. Public Meetings 1445 

Article 2. Conflict of Interest Code 1445 

Subchapter 2. Definitions and General 

Provisions 1446 

Article 1 . Definitions 1446 

Article 2. General Provisions 1451 

Subchapter 3. Hearings 1459 

Subchapter 4. Decisions of the Board 

Itself 1465 

Article 1. Ex Parte Communications 1465 



Article 2. 

Article 3. 
Article 4. 
Article 5. 

Article 6. 



Appeal of Board Agent 
Decision to the Board 
Itself 



Page 



1465 



Administrative Appeals 1467 

Reconsideration 1468 

Request for Injunctive 

Relief 1469 

Request for Judicial Review 1471 



Subchapter 5. Unfair Practice 

Proceedings 1471 

Subchapter 6. Representation 

Proceedings 1481 

Article 1. General Provisions 1481 

Article 2. Elections 1482 

Article 3. Request for Amendment of 

Certification 1487 

Article 4. Decertification Petition 1487 

Article 5. Petition for Unit 

Modification 1488 

Article 6. Impasse Procedures 1490 

Article 7. Arbitration Procedures 1491 

Article 8. Public Nodce Complaints 1491 

Subchapter 7. Compliance 1493 ^^^ 

Article 1. Compliance 1493 ^^ 

Subchapter 8. Agency Fee Regulations 1493 

Chapter 2. Educational Employment Relations 

Act 1496 

Subchapter 1. Representation 

Proceedings 1496 



Article 1. 
Article 2. 

Article 3. 

Article 4. 



General Provisions 1496 

Request for Recognition and 
Intervention 1497 

Petition for Representation 

Election 1499 



Employer Decision; Request 

for Board Investigation 1499 

Article 5. Representation Hearings 1501 

Article 6. Representation Elections 1502 

Article 7. Severance Request 1502.1 

Subchapter 2. Organizational Security 

Arrangements 1503 

Article 1 . Rescission of Organizational 

Security Arrangement 1503 

Article 2. Reinstatement of 

Organizational Security 
Arrangement 1504 

Subchapter 6. Impasse Procedures 1504 



Page xviii 



(7-11-2008) 



Title 8 



Industrial 

Page 

Public Notice 

Proceedings 1505 

Arbitration Procedures 1505 

Request for Injunctive 

Relief in Cases of Work 

Stoppages or Lockouts 1505 

State Employer-Employee 

Relations Act 1505 

Representation 

Procedures 1505 

General Provisions 1505 

Severance Petition 1507 

Representation Elections 1508 

Rescission of Fair Share Fee 
Provision 1508 

Higher Education Employer- 
Employee Relations Act 1509 

Representation 

Procedures 1509 

General Provisions 1509 

Request for Recognition and 
Intervention 1510 

Petition for Certification 1512 

Board Investigation 1513 

Representation Hearings 1514 

Representation Elections 1514 

Severance Petition 1515 

Decertification Petition 1515 

Fair Share Service Fee 

Provisions 1515 

Rescission Petition 1515 

Reinstatement Petition 1516 

Meyers-Milias-Brown Act 1517 

Enforcement and 

Application of Local 

Rules Concerning Unit 

Determinations, 

Recognition, 

Representation and 

Elections 1517 

General Provisions 1518 

Elections 1520 

Petition for Certification 1523 

Petition for Amendment of 
Certification 1524 

Decertification Petition 1524 



Relations 



Title Table of Contents 
Page 

Severance Petition 1525 

Petition for Unit 

Modification 1526 

Rescission of Agency Shop 
Agreement or Provision 1527 

Transit Employer-Employee 

Relations Act 1528 

Representation 

Procedures 1528 

General Provisions 1528 

Request for Recognition and 
Intervention 1528 

Petition for Certification 1531 

Board Investigation 1532 

Representation Hearings 1532 

Representation Elections 1533 

Severance Petition 1533 

Fair Share Service Fee 

Provisions 1534 

Rescission Petition 1534 

Reinstatement Petition 1535 

Trial Court Employment 

Protection and Governance Act 1535 

General Provisions 1535 

Elections 1538 

Petition for Certification 1541 

Petition for Amendment of 
Certification 1542 

Decertification Petition 1543 

Severance Petition 1544 

Petition for Unit 

Modification 1545 

Rescission of Agency Shop 
Agreement or Provision 1546 

Trial Court Interpreter 
Employment and Labor Relations 

Act 1547 

General Provisions 1547 

Elections 1549 

Petition for Certification 1553 

Petition for Amendment of 
Certification 1554 

Decertification Petition 1554 

Severance Petition 1555 

Petition for Unit 

Modification 1556 



Subchapter 7. 

Subchapter 8. 
Subchapter 9. 



Chapter 3. 

Subchapter 1. 

Article 1. 
Article 2. 
Article 3. 
Article 4. 

Chapter 4. 

Subchapter 1 . 

Article 1. 
Article 2. 

Article 3. 
Article 4. 
Article 5. 
Article 6. 
Article 7. 
Article 8. 
Subchapter 2. 

Article 1. 
Article 2. 

Chapter 5. 
Subchapter 1. 



Article 1 . 
Article 2. 
Article 3. 
Article 4. 

Article 5. 



Article 6. 
Article 7. 

Article 8. 

Chapter 6. 

Subchapter 1. 

Article 1. 
Article 2. 

Article 3. 
Article 4. 
Article 5. 
Article 6. 
Article 7. 
Subchapter 2. 

Article 1. 
Article 2. 

Chapter 7. 

Article 1. 
Article 2. 
Article 3. 
Article 4. 

Article 5. 
Article 6. 
Article 7. 

Article 8. 
Chapter 8. 

Article 1. 
Article 2. 
Article 3. 
Article 4. 

Article 5. 
Article 6. 
Article 7. 



Page xix 



Title Table of Contents BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS Title 8 

Page Page 

Articles. Rescission of Agency Shop 

Agreement or Provision 1557 



• 



Page XX (7-11-2008) 



• * 

Barclays Official 

California 

Code of 
Regulations 



Title 8. Industrial Relations 

Division 1. Department of Industrial Relations 
Chapter 4. Division of Industrial Safety 
Subchapter 7. General Industry Safety Orders 



Vol. 10 



XHOIVISOIM 

^ 

\A/EST 



Barclays Official California Code of Regulations 

425 Market Street • Fourth Floor • San Francisco, CA 94105 
800-888-3600 



Titles 



General Industry Safety Orders 



Table of Contents 



Subchapter 7. General Industry Safety Orders 



(7 11-2008) 



Table of Contents 



Page 



Page 



Subchapter 7. General Industry Safety 

Orders 533 

§ 3200. Purpose. 

§3201. Title. 

§ 3202. Application. 

§ 3203. Injury and Illness Prevention 

Program. 
§ 3204. Access to Employee Exposure and 

Medical Records. 

Appendix A 538 

Appendix B 538 

§ 3205. "Shall" and "Should." 

§ 3206. Approvals. 

Group 1 . General Physical Conditions 

and Structures 540 

Article 1 . Definitions 540 

§ 3207. Definitions. 

Article 2. Standard Specifications 543 

§ 3209. Standard Guardrails. 

§ 3210. Guardrails at Elevated Locations. 

§3211. Wall Openings. 

§ 3212. Floor Openings, Floor Holes, 

Skylights and Roofs. 
§ 321 3. Service Pits and Yard Surface 

Openings. 
§ 3214. Stair Railings and Handrails. 

§3215, Means of Egress. 

§ 3216. Exit Signs. 

§3217. Decorative Materials. 

§ 3218. Exits: Group E Occupancies. 

§ 3219. Maintenance of Fire Protection 

Equipment, Materials and 

Assemblies. 
§ 3220. Emergency Action Plan. 

§ 3221. Fire Prevention Plan. 

§ 3222. Arrangement and Distance to Exits. 

§ 3223. Changes in Elevation. 

§ 3224. Headroom. 

§ 3225. Maintenance and Access to Exits. 

§ 3226. Corridors and Exterior Exit 

Balconies. 
§ 3227. Discharge from Exits. 

§3228. Number of Exits. 

§ 3229. Exit Width. 

§3231. Stairways. 

§ 3232. Ramps. 

§ 3233. Industrial Ramps. 

§ 3234. Fixed Industrial Stairs. 

§ 3235. Doors. 

§ 3239. Reviewing Stands, Grandstands, and 

Bleachers. 

Article 3. Special Design Requirements . . . 554.2 

§ 3240. General Design Requirements. 

§3241. Live Loads. 

§ 324 1.1. Working Warehouses. 

§ 3242. Glass and Glazing. 

§ 3243. Spray Booths. 

§ 3244. Sanitation. 

§ 3245. Motion Picture Projection Rooms. 

§ 3246. Use of Nitrate Film. 

§ 3247. Lamp Scaffolds and Parallels. 

§ 3248. Mechanical Refrigeration. 

§ 3249. Cold Storage, Processing, and 
Manufacturing Rooms. 



§ 3250. Cold Storage, Processing and 

Manufacturing Room Fxits. 

§ 325 1 . Refrigerator Vehicles. 

§ 3260. Sanitation. 

§ 3261. Nonwater Carnage Disposal 

Systems. 

Article 4. Access, Work Space, and Work 

Areas 556 

§ 3270. Access General. 

§ 3270.1. Use of Rope Access Equipment. 

§ 3271. Openings. 

§ 3272. Aisles, Walkways, and Crawlways. 

§ 3273. Working Area. 

§ 3274. Valves and Controls. 

§ 3275. Scaffolds. 

§ 3276. Use of Ladders. 

§ 3277. Fixed Ladders. 

§ 3278. Portable Wood Ladders. 

§ 3279. Portable Metal Ladders. 

§ 3280. Portable Reinforced Plastic 
Ladders. 

Article 5. Window Cleaning 566.3 

§3281. Definitions. 

§ 3282. General Requirements for All 

Window Cleaning Operations. 
§ 3283. Anchors and Fittings. 

§ 3284. Window Cleaner's Belts, Personal 

Fall Arrest Systems, Personal Fall 

Restraint Systems and Positioning 

Devices. 
§ 3285. Suspended Scaffolds. 

§ 3286. Manual Boatswain's Chairs and 

Controlled Descent Apparatus 

(CDA). 
§ 3287. Ladders. 

§ 3288. Rolling Scaffolds. 

§ 3289. Tools. 

§ 3290. Prohibited Equipment. 

§3291. Special Design 

Considerations — Permanent Roof 

Top Installations. 
Appendix A Operating Procedures Outline Sheet 

(OPOS) 575 

Article 6. Powered Platforms and 

Equipment for Building 

Maintenance 576 

§ 3292. General. 

§ 3293. Definitions. 

§ 3294. Powered Platform 

Installations — Affected Parts of 

Buildings. 
§ 3295. Powered Platform 

Installations — Equipment. 
§ 3296. Inspection and Tests. 

§ 3297. Maintenance. 

§ 3298. Operations. 

§ 3299. Personal Fall Protection. 

Appendix A to Article 6 578.6 

Appendix B to Article 6 578.7 

Appendix C to Article 6 578.1 1 

Appendix D to Article 6 578.14 

Group 2. Safe Practices and Personal 

Protection 578.18 



Page i 



Table of Contents 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 





Page 






Page 


Article 7. 


Miscellaneous Safe 


§ 3370. 


Nonwater Carriage Disposal 






Practices 578.18 


§ 3371. 


Systems. 

Privy Specifications. 










§ 3300. 


Live Steam and Air Hoses. 


§ 3372. 


Chemical Toilet Specifications. 




§3301. 


Use of Compressed Air or Gases. 


§ 3373. 


Seepage Pit Construction. 




§ 3302. 


Gas Blowing of Hazardous 


§ 3374. 


Combustion Toilet. 






Substances. 


§ 3375. 


Recirculating Toilet Specifications. 




§ 3303. 


Flying Particles or Substances. 


§ 3376. 


Portable Toilet Construction. 




§ 3304. 


Miscellaneous Use of Compressed 
Cylinder Gas. 


Article 10. 


Personal Safety Devices and 




§ 3305. 


Misuse of Oxygen Prohibited. 




Safeguards 


, . . 587 


§ 3306. 


Salvaging Pressure Vessels. 


§ 3380. 


Personal Protective Devices. 




§ 3307. 


Reconditioning Closed Containers. 


§3381. 


Head Protection. 




§ 3308. 


Hot Pipes and Hot Surfaces. 


§ 3382. 


Eye and Face Protection. 




§ 3309. 


Drainage and Ventilation. 


§ 3383. 


Body Protection. 




§ 3310. 


Dischai^ge Location. 


§ 3384. 


Hand Protection. 




§3311. 


Harebacks. 


§ 3385. 


Foot Protection. 




§ 3312. 


Entering Combustion Chambers, 


§ 3386. 


Jewelry. 






Flues, Boilers or Unfired Steam 


§ 3387. 


Sanitation. 






Pressure Vessels. 


§ 3388. 


Safety Belts and Life Lines. 




§ 3313. 


Use of Solvents for Washing. 


§ 3389. 


Life Rings and Personal Flotation 




§3314. 


The Control of Hazardous Energy 




Devices. 






for the Cleaning, Repairing, 


§ 3390. 


Protection from Electric Shock. 






Servicing, Setting-Up, and 


§ 3395. 


Heat Illness Prevention in Outdoor 






Adjusting Operations of Prime 




Places of Employment. 






Movers, Machinery and Equipment, 


§ 3400. 


Medical Services and First Aid. 






Including Lockout/Tagout. 








§ 3315. 


Hand Trucks. 


Article 10.1. 


Personal Protective Clothing 




§ 3316. 


Hand Tools. 




and Equipment for Fire 




§3317. 
§ 3318. 


Illumination. 
Counterweights. 




Fighters 


. . . 590 


§ 3319. 


Fueling. 


§ 3401. 


Application. 




§ 3320. 


Warning Signs. 


§ 3402. 


Definiuons. 




§3321. 


Identification of Piping. 


§ 3403. 


Head Protection. 




§ 3322. 


Drilling. 


§ 3404. 


Eye and Face Protection. 




§ 3323. 


Cargo Doors. 


§ 3405. 


Ear and Neck Protection. 




§ 3324. 


Horizontal Sliding Gates. 


§ 3406. 


Body Protection. 




§ 3325. 


Tire Inflation. 


§ 3407. 


Hand and Wrist Protection. 




§ 3326. 


Servicing Single, Split and 


§ 3408. 


Foot Protection. 






Multi-Piece Rims or Wheels. 


§ 3409. 


Respiratory Protection. 




Appendix A 


582 


§ 3410. 


Wildland Fire Fighting 




§ 3327. 


Safe Practice for Mounting and 




Requirements. 






Inflating Tires with Split Rim and/or 


§3411. 


Private Fire Brigades. 






Retainer Rings. 


Article IL 


Outdoor Advertising 




§ 3328. 
§ 3329. 


Machinery and Equipment. 
Pipe Lines. 




Structures 


. . . 595 


§ 3330. 


Special Handtools. 


§ 3412. 


General. 




§3331. 


Curbs or Rails on Docks, Wharves, 


§ 3413. 


Ladders. 






or Piers. 


§ 3414. 


Poster Ladder Scaffolds. 




§ 3332. 


Railcar Movement. 


§3415. 


Suspended Scaffolds. 




§ 3333. 


Blue Stop Signs. 


§ 3416. 


Fall Protection. 




§ 3334. 


Working on or Around Railway 


Group 3. 


General Plant Equipment and 




§ 3335. 


Cars. 

Railroad Ramping and Deramping 




Special Operations 


. . . 596 




Yards. 


Article 12. 


Tree Work, Maintenance or 




§ 3336. 


Loading Dock Operations. 




Removal 


. . . 596 


§ 3337. 
§ 3338. 
§ 3339. 
§ 3340. 
§3341. 
Appendix A 


Dock Plates and Loading Ramps. 
Pallets. 

Cargo, Materials, or Equipment. 
Accident Prevention Signs. 
Accident Prevention Tags. 
586 


§ 3420. 
§ 3421. 
§ 3422. 
§ 3423. 
§ 3424. 
§ 3425. 


Scope and Definifion. 

General. 

Tree Workers' Saddles. 

Electrical Hazards, General. 

Mobile Equipment. 

Portable Power Hand Tools. 




Article 8. 


Labor Camps 586 


§ 3426. 


Hand Tools. 






§ 3427. 


Safe Work Procedures. 




§ 3350. 


Labor Camp Permits. 


§ 3428. 


Operating Rules. 




Article 9. 


Sanitation 586 


Appendix 


A 


. . . 599 


§ 3360. 


Scope and Apphcation. 


Article 13. 


Agricultural Operations 


. . . 599 


§3361. 


Definitions. 


§ 3436. 


Apphcation. 




§ 3362. 


General Requirements. 


§ 3437. 


Definidons. 




§ 3363. 


Water Supply. 


§ 3438. 


Communicafions. 




§ 3364. 


Sanitary Facilities. 


§ 3439. 


First-Aid Kit. 




§ 3365. 


Toilet Rooms. 


§3440. 


Agricultural Equipment. 




§ 3366. 


Washing Facilities. 


§3441. 


Operation of Agricultural 




§ 3367. 


Change Rooms. 




Equipment. 




§ 3368. 


Consumption of Food and 


§3442. 


Horizontal Rotary Spreaders. 






Beverages. 


§3443. 


Com Pickers. 




§ 3369. 


Public Health. 

Page 


§3444. 
ii 


Beet Trucks. 

(7 


-11-2008) 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



Table of Contents 



Page 



Page 



§3445. 
§ 3446. 
§ 3447. 
§ 3448. 
§ 3449. 
§ 3450. 

§3451. 

§ 3452. 

§ 3453. 



Choppers. 

Conveyors and Elevators. 

Vegetable-Trimming Saws. 

Water Hazards. 

Ladders. 

Formulation and Application of 

Restricted Materials. 

Decontamination of Equipment 

Used for Restricted Materials. 

Aircraft Crop Dusting and 

Spraying. 

Applicator Rigs, Tanks, and Vessels 

Used for Fertilizer, Insecticide, 

Pesticide, and Other Chemical 

Solutions of a Hazardous Nature. 



§ 3454. 


Sheepshearing. 


§ 3455. 


Overhead Electrical Hazards. 


§ 3456. 


Hand-Held Tools. 


§ 3457. 


Field Sanitation. 


§ 3458. 


Fall Protection for Date Palm 




Operations. 


§3458.1. 


Ladders Attached to Date Palms. 


Article 14. 


Marine Terminal Operations 600.5 


§ 3459. 


Scope. 


§ 3460. 


Definitions. 


§3461. 


General. 


§ 3462. 


Hazardous Cargo. 


§ 3463. 


Hazardous Atmospheres and 




Substances. 


§ 3464. 


Accident Prevention and First Aid. 


§ 3465. 


Terminal Facilities. 


§ 3466. 


Intermodal Containers. 


§ 3467. 


Log Handling. 


§ 3468. 


Pallets. 


§ 3469. 


Industrial Trucks. 


§ 3470. 


Longshoring Operations in the 




Vicinity of Repair and Maintenance 




Work. 


§ 3471. 


Chutes, Gravity Conveyors and 




Rollers. 


§ 3472. 


Cranes and Other Hoisting 




Equipment. 


§ 3473. 


Certification of Shore-Based 




Material Handling Devices. 


§ 3474. 


Hooks, Slings, Bridles and Fittings. 


§ 3475. 


Vehicles. 


Article 15. 


Vats, Pans, Bins, Bunkers, 




Hoppers, and Similar 




Containers and Vessels 608 


§ 3480. 


Vats, Pans and Tanks. 


§3481. 


Bins, Bunkers and Hoppers. 


§ 3482. 


Bulk Storage of Loose Material. 


Article 17. 


Engines and Compressors 609 


§3511. 


Governor. 


§3512. 


Valve Gears. 


§ 3513. 


Flywheel Speed. 


§3514. 


Tubular Gage Guard. 


§3515. 


Try Cock Discharge Receptacle. 


§ 3516. 


Try Cock Manipulation. 


§3517. 


Steam Gage and Water Gage Glass 




Location. 


§3518. 


Air Compressors. 


Article 19. 


Automotive Lifts 610 


§ 3540. 


Purpose. 


§3541. 


Automotive Lift — Definition. 


§ 3542. 


General. 


§ 3543. 


Marking Required. 


§ 3544. 


Control Mechanism for Automotive 




Lifts. 


§ 3545. 


Oil Measurement. 


§ 3546. 


Air, Oil Tank Working Pressure and 



§ 3547. 



Corrosion Protection. 
Working Area Under Lifts. 



§ 3548. Chassis and Axle Supports. 

§ 3549. Descent Speed. 

Article 20. Hand and Portable Powered 

Tools and Equipment 611 

§ 3555. Definitions. 

§ 3556. General. 

§ 3557. Switches and Controls for Portable 

Tools. 
§ 3558. Portable Power Driven Circular 

Saws (Class A). 
§ 3559. Pneumatic and Powder-Actuated 

Tools. 
§ 3559.1. Airless Spray Guns. 

§ 3560. Portable Grinders. 

§3561. Portable Sanders. 

§ 3562. Jacks. 

§ 3563. Power Lawn Mowers. 

§ 3564. Portable Winches. 

Article 21. Use, Care, and Protection of 

Abrasive Wheels 612 

§ 3575. Scope and Definitions. 

§ 3576. General Machine Requirements. 

§ 3577. Protection Devices. 

§ 3578. Permissible Wheel Exposure for 

Periphery Grinding. 
§ 3579. Flanges — General Requirement. 

§ 3580. Mounting. 

§3581. Speed. 

§ 3582. Storage. 

§ 3583. Portable Abrasive Wheels. 

Appendix A 620 

Appendix B 62 1 

Appendix C 622 

Appendix D 622 

Appendix E 623 

Appendix F 623 

Appendix G 624 

Group 4. General Mobile Equipment and 

Auxiliaries 625 

Article 23. Mobile Ladder Stands and 

Scaffolds (Towers) 625 

§ 3620. Scope. 

§ 3621. Definitions. 

§ 3622. General. 

§ 3623. Mobile Tubular Welded Frame 

Scaffolds. 
§ 3624. Mobile Tubular Welded Sectional 

Folding Scaffolds. 
§ 3625. Mobile Tube and Coupler Scaffolds. 

§ 3626. Mobile Work Platforms. 

§ 3627. Mobile Ladder Stands. 

Article 24. Elevating Work Platforms and 

Aerial Devices 627 

§ 3636. Application. 

§ 3637. Definitions. 

§ 3638. General Requirements. 

§ 3639. Factors of Safety in Design of Work 

Platform Assembly. 
§ 3640. Inspecfion, Maintenance and 

Repairs. 
§ 364L Orchard Man-Lifts (Pruning 

Tovv'er). 
§ 3642. Elevating Work Platform 

Equipment. 
§ 3643. Guarding of Moving Parts. 

§ 3644. Stability on Level Ground. 

§ 3645. Stability on Inclined Surfaces. 

§ 3646. OperaUng Instructions (Elevating 

Work Platforms). 
§ 3647. Pin-On Platforms. 

§ 3648. Operating Instructions (Aerial 

Devices). 



Page iii 



17 n 2()()X) 



Table of Contents 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



Page 



Page 



Article 25. 


Industrial Trucks, Tractors, 




Haulage Vehicles, and 




Earthmoving Equipment 631 


§ 3649. 


Definitions. 


§ 3650. 


Industrial Trucks. General. 


§3651. 


Agricultural and Industrial Tractors. 


§ 3652. 


Haulage Vehicles and Earthmoving 




Equipment. 


§ 3653. 


Seat Belts. 


§ 3654. 


Deflector Guards. 


§ 3655. 


Overhead Guards for High-Lift 




Rider Trucks. 


§ 3656. 


Order Pickers and Stock Pickers. 


§ 3657. 


Elevating Employees with Lift 




Trucks. 


§ 3658. 


Operator Platforms. 


§ 3659. 


Back Guards. 


§ 3660. 


Rated Capacity. 


§3661. 


Brakes and Warning Devices. 


§ 3662. 


Internal Combu.stion Engines. 


§ 3663. 


Maintenance of Industrial Trucks. 


§ 3664. 


Operating Rules. 


§ 3665. 


Wheel Guards. 


§ 3666. 


Haulage Vehicles and Earthmoving 




Equipment. 


§ 3668. 


Powered Industrial Truck Operator 




Training. 


§ 3669. 


Operating Rules. 


Article 26. 


Vehicle Mounted Elevating 



and Rotating Work 

Platforms 638 



§ 3807. 


Operating Rules. 




§ 3808. 


Lights. 




§ 3809. 


Brakes. 




§3810. 


Mechanical Condition. 




§3811. 


Material Racks. 




icle 32. 


Tiering Conveyors 


. . . 643 


§ 3820. 


Tiering Conveyors. 




icle 35. 


Amusement Rides 


. . . 643 


§ 3900. 


Purpose. 




§3901. 


Definitions. 




§ 3902. 


Manufacturer's Analyses. 




§ 3903. 


Required Testing. 




§ 3904. 


Emergency Brakes and 
Anti-Rollback Devices. 




§ 3905. 


Speed Limiting Devices. 




§ 3906. 


Signal Systems. 




§ 3907. 


Passenger-Carrying Rides. 




§ 3908. 


Passenger Restraining and 
Containing Safety Devices. 




§ 3909. 


Design and Construction of 
Supporting Structures. 




§3910. 


Daily Maintenance. 




§3911. 


Assembly and Disassembly. 




§ 3912. 


Control of Operation. 




§3913. 


Public Protection. 




§3914. 


Required Inspections. 




§3915. 


Issuing of Permits. 




§ 3916. 


Inspection Fees. 




§3917. 


Posting of Permit. 




§3918. 


Idenfification and Rating Plates. 




§3919. 


Rebuilt and Modified Devices. 




§ 3920. 


Accident Notification. 




Appendix 1 




. . . 645 



Article 27. 


Transportation of Employees 

and Materials 638 


Group 6. 


§ 3700. 


Definitions. 




§3701. 


Licensing of Drivers. 




§ 3702. 


Transporting Employees. 


Article 37. 


§ 3703. 


Riding Loads. 




§ 3704. 


Securing Loads. 


§ 3940. 
§3941. 
§ 3942. 
§ 3943. 


§ 3705. 


Cab Protection. 


§ 3706. 


Truck Warning Device. 


§ 3710. 


Helicopters. 


Article 29. 


Industrial Railroads 639 


§ 3944. 


§ 3730. 


Purpose. 


§ 3945. 


§3731. 


Definitions. 


Article 41. 


§ 3732. 


Railway Switches and Track. 


§ 3995. 


§ 3733. 


Couplers. 


§ 3996. 


§ 3734. 


Warning Device. 


§ 3997. 


§ 3735. 


Brakes. 




§ 3736. 


Overhead Clearances for Standard 


§ 3998. 




Gage Industrial Railroad Tracks. 


§ 3999. 


§ 3737. 


Side Clearance for Standard Gage 


§ 4000. 




Industrial Railroad Tracks. 


§ 4001. 


§ 3738. 


Overhead and Side Clearances. 


§ 4002. 


§ 3739. 


Clearance Between Parallel 






Standard Gage Tracks. 


§ 4003. 


§ 3740. 


Other Condidons and Obstructions 


Article 43. 




Adjacent to Standard Gage Tracks. 


§3741. 


Side Clearances for Narrow Gage 
Industrial Railroad Tracks. 




§ 3742. 


Blue Stop Signs. 


§ 4050. 


§ 3743. 


Derails or Blocks. 


§ 3744. 


Working on or Around Railway 
Cars. 


§4051. 
§ 4052. 


Article 31. 


Gantry Trucks (Straddle 

Carriers) 642 




§ 3800. 


Definitions. 


Article 44. 


§3801. 


Warning Devices. 


§4060 


§ 3802. 


Visibility. 




§ 3803. 


Accessibility. 


§4061 


§ 3804. 


Color 


§4062 


§ 3805. 


Guarding. 


§4063 


§ 3806. 


Speed. 





Power Transmission Equipment, 
Prime Movers, Machines and 
Machine Parts 



645 



Purpose, Definitions and 

Standards 645 

Purpose. 

Definitions. 

Type of Guarding Required. 

Guard Standards. 

Guard Clearances. 

Openings for Oiling. 

Prime Movers and Machinery 648 

Flywheels. 

Cranks and Connecting Rods. 

Tail Rods, Extension Piston Rods or 

Tail Crossheads. 

Belt Shifters. 

Conveyors. 

Process Machine Power Control. 

Machine Power Control. 

Moving Parts of Machinery or 

Equipment. 

Pinch Points and Shear Points. 

Shafting, Collars, Clutches, 

Cut-Off Couplings and 

Clutch Pulleys 649 

Shafting, Collars, Clutches, and 

Couplings. 

Projecfing Shaft Ends. 

Collars, Couphngs, Clutches, 

Cut-Off Couplings and Clutch 

Pulleys. 

Pulleys 650 

Location of Pulleys on Line Shaft 
and Countershaft. 
Composifion and Wood Pulleys. 
Pulleys Exposed to Corrosion. 
Composition or Wooden Pulleys out 
of Service. 



Page iv 



(7-11-2008) 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



Table of Contents 



Page 



Page 



Article 45. 


Belt and Pulley Drives 650 


§ 4070. 


Guarding. 


§4071. 


Belt Tighteners. 


§ 4072. 


Variable Speed Drives. 


Article 46. 


Gears, Friction Drives, 




Sprockets, and Chains 651 


§ 4075. 


Gears and Sprockets. 


§ 4076. 


Friction Drives. 


§ 4077. 


Sprocket Chains. 


Article 47. 


Power Disconnecting Devices .... 651 


§ 4085. 


Belt Shifters and Other 




Disconnecting Devices. 


§ 4086. 


Momentary Contact Devices. 


Group 8. 


Points of Operation and Other 




Hazardous Parts of Machinery 651 


Article 54. 


Scope and General 




Definitions 651 


§ 4184. 


Guarding Required. 


§4185. 


Foot-Operated Devices. 


§4186. 


Maintenance and Use of Point of 




Operation Tools and Guai'ds. 


§4187. 


Rolls. 


§4188. 


Definitions. 


Article 55. 


Power Operated Presses 654.2 


§4189. 


Scope. 


§ 4190. 


Control Identification. 


§4191. 


Power Presses and Foot and Hand 




Power Presses (Class A). 


§ 4192. 


Machines Using Full Revolution 




Positive Clutches. 


§ 4193. 


Machines Using Part Revolution 




Clutches. 


§ 4194. 


Slide Counter-Balance Systems. 


§ 4195. 


Air Controlling Equipment. 


§ 4196. 


Hydraulic Equipment. 


§ 4197. 


Design, Construction, Setting and 




Feeding of Dies. 


§ 4198. 


Tonnage, Stroke, and Weight 




Designation. 


§ 4199. 


Diesetting. 


§ 4200. 


Brakes. 


§4201. 


Pressure Vessels. 


§ 4202. 


Inspection, Maintenance and 




Modification of Power Operated 




Presses. 


§ 4203. 


Training. 


§ 4204. 


Electrical. 


§ 4205. 


Forward Drive Motor Interlocks. 


§ 4206. 


Safeguarding the Point of 




Operation. 


§ 4207. 


Point of Operation Guards. 


§ 4208. 


Point of Operation Devices. 


§ 4208.1. 


Presence Sensing Device Initiation 




(PSDI). 


Appendix 


A 662 


§ 4209. 


Additional Requirements for 




Safeguarding Presses with Part 




Revolution Clutches. 


§ 4210. 


Hand-Operated Levers. 


§4211. 


Two-Hand Trip. 


§4212. 


Control Reliability. 


§4213. 


Special Purpose Press Drive Motor 




Interlocks. 


§ 4214. 


Press Brakes Mechanically or 




Hydraulically Powered. 


§4215. 


Hydraulic Power Presses (Punch 




Presses). 


§ 4216. 


Rivet Setting Equipment. 


Article 56. 


Metal Working Machines 662.5 


§ 4225. 


Definitions. 


§ 4226. 


Definitions. 


§ 4227. 


Metal Shears. 



§ 4228. 



Metal Embossing Machines (Class 
B). 



§ 4229. 


Nonrepeat Device (Class A). 


§ 4230. 


Treadle Controls. 


§4231. 


Circular Metal-Cutting Saws (Class 

B). 

Rolls (Class B). 


§ 4232. 


§ 4233. 


Bar Stock Machine (Class A). 


§ 4234. 


Wire Drawing Machines (Class B). 


§ 4235. 


Pianers (Class A). 


§ 4236. 


Alligator Shears (Class B). 


§ 4237. 


Abrading, Buffing and PoHshing 




Machines (Class A). 


§ 4238. 


Tumbling Barrels (Class A). 


§ 4239. 


Forging Machines. 


§ 4240. 


Power-Driven and Air-Lift 




Hammers. 


§4241. 


Board Drophammers. 


§ 4242. 


Mechanical and Hydraulic Forging 




and Hot Trimming Pres.ses. 


§ 4243. 


Inspection and Maintenance. 


Article 57. 


Die Casting Machines 663 


§ 4260. 


Hot Chamber Machine Controls. 


§4261. 


Hot Chamber and Cold Chamber 




Machine Controls. 


§ 4262. 


Ladling Operations. 


§ 4263. 


Hot and Cold Chamber Machines. 




Helpers Protection. 


§ 4264. 


Plunger Control. 


§ 4265. 


Shields for Die Casting Machines. 


§ 4266. 


Holding Furnaces. 


Article 59. 


Woodworking Machines and 




Equipment 664 


§ 4296. 


General. 


§ 4297. 


Definitions. 


§ 4298. 


Hog Mills. 


§ 4299. 


Brush and Slash Chippers. 


§ 4300. 


Circular Ripsaws Manual Feed 




(Class B). 


§4300.1. 


Table Saws — Manual Feed (Class 




B). 


§4301. 


Self-Feed Circular Ripsaws. 


§ 4302. 


Circular Knives and Crosscut Saws 




(Class B). 


§ 4303. 


Cordwood and Similar Saws (Class 




B). 


§ 4304. 


Box Shook Cut-off Saws 




(California Cut-off Saws). 


§ 4305. 


Swing Cut-Off Saws and Sliding 




Cut-Off Saws Mounted Above the 




Table. 


§ 4306. 


Underhung Swing Cut-Off Saws, 




Inverted Swing Cut-Off Saws. Jump 




Saws, Underslung Saws. 


§ 4307. 


Portable Power Driven Circular 




Hand Saws. 


§4307.1. 


Miter Saws. 


§ 4308. 


Circular Knives. 


§ 4309. 


Horizontal Pull Saws (Radial Arm 




Saw). 


§4310. 


Band Knives and Band Saws. 


§4311. 


Jointers and Hand Fed Planers. 


§4312. 


Belt Sanders (Class B). 


§4313. 


Disc Sanders. 


§ 4314. 


Drum Sanders. 


§4315. 


Elbow Sanders. 


§4316. 


Boring and Mortising Machines. 


§4317. 


Tenoning Machines. 


§4318. 


Planing, Moulding, Sticking, and 




Matching Machines. 


§4318.1. 


Wood Shapers and Similar 




Equipment (Class B). 


§4319. 


Automatic Lathes (Shoe Last, Spoke 




and All Other Automatic Lathes of 




the Rotating Knife Type). 



Page V 



Table of Contents 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



Page 



Page 



§ 4320. 

§4321. 

§ 4322. 

§ 4323. 
§ 4324. 
§ 4325. 

Article 60. 

§ 4342. 
§ 4343. 
§4344. 

§ 4345. 



Combination Woodworking 

Machines (Class B). 

Cracked Saws. 

Speed of Circular Saw Blades or 

Knives. 

Wobble Saws. 

Dust Collection Systems. 

Heading Bolt Sawing Machine. 

Refuse and Trash Collection 
Equipment 

Scope. 

Definitions. 

Refuse and Trash Collection 

Equipment. 

Hoist and Tilt-Frame Refuse and 

Trash Collection Eiquipment. 



§ 4439. Paper Box Ending and Edge 

Attaching Machines. 
§ 4440. Cylinder and Rotai^ Presses (Class 

B). 



669 



Article 61. 


Compaction Equipment 670 


§ 4350. 


Scope. 


§4351. 


Definitions. 


§ 4352. 


Construction, Reconstruction, and 




Modification. 


§ 4353. 


Stationary Compaction Equipment 




and Balers. 


§ 4354. 


Mobile Compaction Equipment. 


§ 4355. 


Operating Rules for Compaction 




Equipment. 


Article 64. 


Pulp, Paper and Paperboard 




Mills 672 


§4401. 


Scope and Application. 


§ 4402. 


Employee Instruction. 


§ 4403. 


Work Areas. 


§ 4404. 


Controls and Safety Devices. 


§ 4405. 


Working Over Water. 


§ 4406. 


Guards and Guarding. 


§ 4407. 


Personal Protection. 


§ 4408. 


Illumination. 


§ 4409. 


Mobile Equipment. 


§ 4410. 


Offloading of Railcars and Trucks. 


§4411. 


Bridge and Dock Plates. 


§ 4412. 


Conveyers. 


§4413. 


De-Energizing and Lockout. 


§ 4414. 


Handling Liquid Sulfur. 


§4415. 


Stock Preparation and 




Reprocessing. 


§ 4416. 


Guillotine Type Roll Splitters. 


§ 4417. 


Broke Hole. 


§4418. 


Industrial Kiln Guns and 




Ammunition. 


§ 4419. 


Chlorine Dioxide and Sodium 




Chlorate. 


§ 4420. 


Pulp Storage. 


§4421. 


Recovery Furnace Area. 


§ 4422. 


Chocking Rolls and Machine 




Room. 


§ 4423. 


Paper Machines. 


§ 4424. 


Converting Operations. 


§ 4425. 


Sorting and Counting Tables. 


§ 4426. 


Corrugators. 


§ 4427. 


Automatically Fed Platen Cutters. 


§ 4428. 


Calenders and Similar Rolls. 


Article 65. 


Paper Converting and 



Printing Machines 

§ 4430. Calender and Similar Rolls (Class 

B). 
§4431. Comer Cutter. 

§ 4432. Comer Stayer. 

§ 4433. Cutter and Creasers. 

§ 4434. Rotary Scoring Machines. 

§ 4435. Dmm Winder on Paper Machine. 

§ 4436. Job Platen Press (Class B). 

§ 4437. Index Cutter (Class B). 

§ 4438. Guillotine Type Cutters. 



676 



§4441. 


Lithographic Presses. 


§4442. 


Embossing Machines. 


§4443. 


Paper Punches and Line Perforators 




(Class B). 


§4444. 


Slotters. 


§ 4445. 


Hand-Fed Engraving Presses. 


Article 66. 


Textiles 677 


§ 4456. 


General. 


§ 4457. 


Definitions. 


§ 4458. 


Warpers. 


§4459. 


Drawing Frames, Slubbers, Roving 




Parts, Cotton Combers, Ring 




Spinning Frames, Twisters. 


§4460. 


Shuttles. 


§4461. 


Cards. 


§4462. 


Carpet Frayer or Rag Shredder. 


§ 4463. 


Carpet Trimmer. 


§4464. 


Circular Knife. 


§ 4465. 


Cotton Picker, Opener and 




Willower. 


§4466. 


Picker Machines. 


§ 4467. 


Pile Cutter or Shearer. 


§4468. 


Napper. 


§4469. 


Sliver and Ribbon Lap Machines 




(Doubters). 


§4470. 


Gamett Machine. 


§4471. 


Dye .ligs. 


§4472. 


Drying Cans. 


§4473. 


Hand Bailing Machine. 


§4474. 


Cuttle or Swing Folder (Overhead 




Type). 


§ 4475. 


Commercial Sewing Machines. 


§ 4476. 


Cloth Cutters. 


Article 67. 


Laundry and Dry Cleaning 




Equipment 679 


§4479 


Definitions. 


§4480 


Marking Machine. 


§4481 


Washing Machines. 


§4482 


Extractors. 


§4483 


Power Wringer. 


§4484 


Starching Machine(Cylinder or Box 




Type) (Class A). 


§4485 


Drying Tumbler, End Loading. 


§4486 


Shaker (Clothes Tumbler, Batch 




Type). 


§4487 


Drying Box or Cabinets. 


§4488 


Dampening Machine (Class A). 


§4489 


Ironer (Flatwork Type). 


§4490 


Ironer (Body Type). 


§4491 


Ironer (Rotary-Body Type). 


§4492 


Ironer (Press Type). 


§4493 


Boilers and Pressure Vessels. 


§4494 


Operating Rules. 


Article 68. 


Leather and Composition 




Goods Machines 681 


§4510 


Dinking and Chcking Machines. 


§4511 


Embossing Machines (Power or 




Foot Driven). 


§4512 


Heel Compressing Machine. 


§4513 


Skiving Machines (Roll Feed). 


§ 4514 


Splitter (Stationary Knife). 


§4515 


Splitter (Band Knife). 


§4516 


Stripper (Class B). 


§4517 


Tanning Drums. 


§4518 


Roll Type Machines. 


§4519 


Unhairing Machines. 


§ 4520 


Fleshing Machines. 


§4521 


Fleshing and Unhairing 



§ 4522. 



Machines — Special Types. 
Whitening Machines. 



Page vi 



(7-11- 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



Table of Contents 



Page 



Page 



Article 69. 


Food and Tobacco Machinery 682 


§ 4530. 


Bakery Ovens. 


§4531. 


Dumpbins and Blenders. 


§ 4532. 


Storage Bins. 


§ 4533. 


Screw Conveyors. 


§ 4534. 


Enclosures of Flour Sifters. 


§ 4535. 


Trough Hoists. 


§ 4536. 


Air Conditioning Units, Bread 




Coolers, Fermentation Rooms, and 




Other Similar Locations. 


§ 4537. 


Locking Devices on Steam Kettles. 


§ 4538. 


Pan Washing Tanks. 


§ 4539. 


Pomace Pumps. 


§ 4540. 


Pressure Bottling Machine. 


§4541. 


Cake Cutter (Band Knife). 


§ 4542. 


Mixers. 


§ 4543. 


Guarding of Meat Cutting Band Saw 




Blades. 


§ 4544. 


Dough Brake. 


§ 4545. 


Dividers. 


§ 4546. 


Moulders. 


§ 4547. 


Rotary Dough Kneaders. 


§ 4548. 


Slicers and Wrappers. 


§ 4549. 


Candy Cutter (Roller Type). 


§ 4550. 


Caramel Slitter (Circular Knife 




Type). 


§4551. 


Nougat Cutter. 


§ 4552. 


Meat, Fish and Other Food 




Grinders. 


§ 4553. 


Meat Choppers (Class A). 


§ 4554. 


Hand-Fed Food Patty Machines. 


§ 4555. 


Ice Cubing and Ice Scoring 




Machines (Class A). 


§ 4556. 


Ice Breaker or Crusher. 


§ 4557. 


Tobacco Stem Crusher (Class A). 


§ 4558. 


Cigar Cutter 


§ 4559. 


Garbage Disposal I3quipment. 


Article 70. 


Chemical Industry Machines 686 


§ 4565. 


Extractors. 


§ 4566. 


Extractors (Screw Cover Type). 


§ 4567. 


Extractors (Automatically Fed and 




Discharged). 


§ 4568. 


Extractors (Open Top, Bottom 




Discharge). 


§ 4569. 


Rolls. 


§ 4570. 


Soap Presses. 


Article 71. 


Rubber and Composition 




Working Machines 686.1 


§ 4579. 


Definitions. 


§ 4580. 


Calender Rolls (Not Paper). 


§4581. 


Stopping Limits for Calenders. 


§ 4582. 


Rubber Mills. 


§ 4583. 


Stopping Limits. 


§ 4584. 


Stopping Limits — New Mills. 


§ 4585. 


Bale Cutters — Guillotine. 


§ 4586. 


Bevel Cutters — Circular 



§ 4587. 

§ 4588. 

§ 4589. 
§ 4590. 
§4591. 
§ 4592. 

Article 72. 



§ 4600. 
§ 4601. 

Article 73. 

§ 4625. 



§ 4626. 



Article 74. 



§ 4640. 
§4641. 

§ 4642. 

§ 4643. 
§ 4644. 
§ 4645. 
§ 4646. 
§ 4647. 



Group 9. 



Article 75. 



Knife — Nonautomatic. 

Cutter-Sheet Rubber (Horizontal 

Cutter Type). 

Power-Driven Rotary Saws and 

Slitters (Hand Fed). 

Tubing Machines. 

Tire Machine. 

Tube Splicer. 

Testing and Maintenance. 

Plastic Processing 
Machinery 

Injection Molding Machine. 

Thermo-Setting Plastic Molding 

Presses. 

Stone, Clay and Glass 
Working Machines 

Pug Mills. 



689 



689 



Article 76. 

§ 4649. 
§ 4650. 

Article 77. 

§4651. 
§ 4652. 
§ 4653. 
§ 4654. 

Article 78. 

§ 4657. 
§ 4658. 
§ 4659. 
§ 4660. 

Article 79. 



§ 4663. 
§ 4664. 
§ 4665. 

Group 10. 

Article 80. 

§ 4794. 
§ 4795. 

Article 81. 

§ 4797. 
§ 4798. 
§ 4799. 

Article 82. 

§ 4803. 

§ 4804. 
§ 4805. 

§ 4806. 
§ 4807. 

§ 4808. 
§ 4809. 
§ 4810. 
§4811. 
§4812. 



Wet and Dry Pans, Mullers, Chasers 
and Similar Mixing and Grinding 
Mills. 

Cotton Gins and Seed Cotton 
Processing Machines 689 

Saws. 

Gin Stands. Main Drive and 

Miscellaneous Drives. 

Elevated Platforms and 

Transmission Enclosures. 

Power Drives. 

Warning Device. 

Baler. 

Burr Machines. 

Screw Conveyors. 

Compressed Gas and Air 

Equipment 691 

Definitions 691 

Definitions. 

Compressed Gas and Air 

Cylinders 691 

Construction and Marking of 

Cylinders. 

Storage. Handling, and Use of 

Cylinders. 

Cylinder Inspection 692 

General. 

Low Pressure Cylinders. 
Hydrostafic Testing. 
High-Pressure Cylinders. 

Safety Relief Devices for 
Compressed Gas Containers 692 

General. 

Relief Devices. 

Handling and Storage. 

Refining. 

Safety Relief Devices for 
Cargo and Portable Tanks 
Storing Compressed Gases 692 

General. 
Relief Valves. 
Handling and Filling. 

Gas Systems for Welding and 

Cutting 692 

Purpose and Definitions 692 

Purpose. 
Definitions. 

General 692.1 

Approval and Marking. 
Rating and Pressure Limitations. 
Training of Operators and 
Instructions. 

Stationary Automatic 

Acetylene Generators 693 

Housing of Permanent Stationary 

Acetylene Generators. 

Outside Generator Houses. 

Inside Generator Rooms or 

Compartments. 

Exits. 

Ventiladon, Lighting and Heating of 

Generator Houses or Rooms. 

Protection Against Freezing. 

Water Supply Connection. 

Drain Connection. 

Generator Escape or Relief Pipes. 

Maintenance and Operation. 



Page vii 



(7 11 2nOS) 



Table of Contents 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



Page 



Page 



§4813. 
Article 83. 

§4815. 
§4816. 

Article 84. 

§4818. 
§4819. 

Article 85. 

§4821. 

§ 4822. 
§ 4823. 
§ 4824. 
§ 4825. 
§ 4826. 
§ 4827. 
§ 4828. 
§ 4829. 

Article 86. 



§ 4834. 
§ 4835. 



§ 4836. 
§ 4837. 
§ 4838. 
§ 4839. 
§ 4840. 



Article 87. 

§ 4845. 

Article 88. 

§ 4846. 
§ 4847. 
§ 4848. 

Group 11. 
Article 90. 

§ 4850. 
§4851. 
§ 4852. 
§ 4853. 

Group 13. 



Article 91. 

§ 4885. 

Article 92. 



§ 4887. 



§ 4889. 
§ 4890. 



Gas Holders. 
Portable Automatic Acetylene 
Generators 694 

General. 

Operation and Maintenance. 

Calcium Carbide 695 

Storage. 

Opening Containers. 

Service Piping for All 

Gases 695 

Gas Systems Piping for Welding and 

Cutting, Materials and Design. 

Oxygen Piping. 

Acetylene Piping. 

Piping Joints. 

Installation — General . 

Testing. 

Painting and Signs. 

Hydraulic Back-Pressure Valves. 

Storage and Use of Cylinders. 

Manifolding of Cylinders to 
Headers for Shop Pipe Line 
Supply Systems and Pressure 
Reducing Regulators and 
Hose 697 

Manifolds, General. 

Fuel Gas Manifolds. (Acetylene, 

Liquefied Fuel Gases, and 

Nonliquified Gases Other Than 

Acetylene.) 

Oxygen Manifolds. 

Liquid Oxygen. 

Pressure Regulators. 

Hose. 

Compressor or Booster 

Pumps — Fuel Gas and 

Acetylene-Oxygen Systems. 

Operating Procedure 698 

General Precautions. 

Fire Prevention in Welding 

and Cutting Operations 699 

Storage of Cylinders. 

Use of Cylinders. 

Fire Prevention and Suppression 

Procedure. 

Electric Welding 699 

Electric Welding, Cutting 

and Heating 699 

General. 

Arc Welding and Cutting. 

Resistance Welding. 

Inert-Gas Metal-Arc Welding. 

Cranes and Other Hoisting 

Equipment 701 

Scope. 

Definitions 702 

Definitions. 
Cranes (Except Boom-Type 
Mobile Cranes) 714 

Purpose. 

Access to the Cage, Cab, or 

Machine House Required. 

Outdoor Cages, Cabs, or Machine 

Houses. 

Warning Devices. 

Fire Extinguisher. 



§ 4895. 


Illumination. 


§ 4896. 


Controllers. 


§ 4897. 


Hoist Limit Device. 


§ 4898. 


Brakes for Hoists. 


§ 4899. 


Foot Brake Pedal. 


§ 4900. 


Locking Device. 


§4901. 


Brakes for Bridge and Swinging 




Motion. 


§ 4902. 


Boom Hoist Mechanisms. 


§ 4903. 


Runway Travel Limit Device. 


§ 4904. 


Trolley Bumpers. 


§ 4905. 


Bridge or Gantry Buffers. 


§ 4906. 


Truck Wheel Guards and 




Railsweeps. 


§ 4907. 


Capacity Marking and Load 




Indication. 


§ 4908. 


Hoisting Ropes. 


§ 4909. 


Runway Repair. 


§ 4910. 


Crane Runways. 


§4911. 


Rails. 


§ 4912. 


Clearances. 


§4913. 


Wind Indicators and Rail Clamps. 


Article 93. 


Boom-Type Mobile Cranes 


§ 4920. 


Purpose. 


§4921. 


Operating Controls. 


§ 4922. 


Crane Boomstops. 


§ 4923. 


Load Rating Chart. 


§ 4924. 


Load Safety Devices. 


§ 4925. 


Operator's Cab. 


§ 4926. 


Access to Operator's Position, 




Machine House and/or Boom 




Blocks. 


§ 4927. 


Couplers. 


§ 4928. 


Boom Hoist Mechanisms. 


§ 4929. 


Load Hoist Drums. 


§ 4930. 


Load Hoist Brakes. 


§4931. 


Power-Controlled Lowering. 


§ 4932. 


Adjustments. 


§ 4933. 


Swing Control. 


§ 4934. 


Swing Brake and Locking Device. 


§ 4935. 


Travel Brakes and Locks. 


§4935.1. 


Sheave Guards. 


§ 4936. 


Warning Device. 


§ 4937. 


Wheel Guards. 


§ 4938. 


Truck Wedges or Jacks. 


§ 4939. 


Fire Extinguisher. 


§ 4940. 


Lighting. 


§4941. 


Cranes Used in Demolition Work. 


§ 4942. 


Barge Mounted Cranes. 


§ 4943. 


Permanently Mounted Floating 




Cranes and Derricks. 


§ 4944. 


Life Buoys. 


Article 94. 


Hydraulic Cranes and 




Excavators 


§ 4945. 


Purpose. 


§ 4946. 


Hoist Mechanisms. 


§ 4947. 


Load Lowering. 


§ 4949. 


Boom Hoist and Supporting 




Mechanism. 


§ 495L 


Swing Lock and Swing Brake. 


§ 4952. 


Controls. 


§ 4953. 


Brakes. 


§ 4954. 


General Operating Requirements. 


§ 4955. 


Hydraulic Relief Valves. 


§ 4956. 


Hydraulic Hose, Fittings, and 




Tubing Inspection. 


Article 95. 


Derricks 


§ 4960. 


Construction. 


§ 4961. 


Rated Load Marking. 


§ 4962. 


Hoisting Ropes. 


§ 4963. 


Access to Sheaves, Bearings and 




Blocks. 


§ 4964. 


Derrick Signals. 


Article 96. 


Tower Cranes 


§ 4965. 


General. 



718 



722 



723 



723 



Page viii 



(7-11-2008) 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



Table of Contents 



Page 



Page 



§ 4966. 



• 



Krection, Dismantling and 
Operation. 



• 



§ 4967. 


Unattended Booms. 


§ 4968. 


Safety Devices. 


§ 4969. 


Electrical Grounding. 


Article 97. 


Hoists, Auxiliary Hoisting 




Equipment and Hoisting 




Operations 724. i 


§ 4970. 


Limit Device. 


§4971. 


Brakes. 


§ 4972. 


Hoist Trolley Frames. 


§ 4973. 


Capacity Marking. 


§ 4974. 


Stops. 


§ 4975. 


Control Equipment. 


§ 4976. 


Warning Device. 


§ 4977. 


Sheaves. 


§ 4980. 


Hoisting Chains and Ropes. 


§4981. 


End Attachments. 


§ 4982. 


Chain Splices. 


§ 4983. 


Defective Hoist or Sling Hooks, 




Rings, and Chain Links. 


§ 4984. 


Sheave Nip-Points. 


§ 4985. 


Hoisting Operations. 


§ 4986. 


Mobile Towers, Hoists and Similar 




Equipment. 


§ 4987. 


Tramways. 


Article 98. 


Operating Rules 725 


§ 4990. 


Scope. 


§4991. 


Travel. 


§ 4992. 


Booms. 


§ 4993. 


Swing. 


§ 4994. 


Hoisting. 


§ 4995. 


Riding Loads on Derricks, Hoists, or 




Cranes. 


§ 4996. 


Driver's Position. 


§ 4997. 


Fire Extinguisher. 


§ 4998. 


Refueling. 


§ 4999. 


Handling Loads. 


§ 5000. 


Limit Switches. 


§5001. 


Signals. 


§ 5002. 


Overhead Loads. 


§ 5003. 


Provisions for Preventing Accidents 




in the Area of High- Voltage Lines. 


§ 5004. 


Crane or Derrick Suspended 




Personnel Platforms. 


§ 5005. 


Notification to the Operators of 




High- Voltage Lines and 




Responsibility for Safeguards. 


§ 5006. 


Crane and Hoisting Equipment 




Operators — Qualifications. 


§5006.1. 


Mobile Crane and Tower 




Crane-Operator Qualifications and 




Certification. 


§ 5008. 


Operating Practices. 


§ 5009. 


Floor-Operated Cranes. 


Article 99. 


Testing 734 


§ 5020. 


Operational Testing. 


§5021. 


Equipment over Three Tons Rated 




Capacity. 


§ 5022. 


Proof Load Test and Examination of 




Cranes and Their Accessory Gear. 


§5022.1. 


Test Weights. 


§ 5023. 


Proof Load Test and Examination of 




Derricks and Their Accessory Gear. 


§ 5024. 


Examination of Bulk Cargo 




Handling Devices. 


§ 5025. 


Certificates. 


§ 5026. 


Determination of Crane or Derrick 




Safe Working Loads and Limitations 




in Absence of Manufacturer's Data. 


§ 5027. 


Safe Working Load Reduction. 


§ 5028. 


Safe Working Load Increase. 


Article 100. 


Inspection and Maintenance 736 


§ 5031. 


Inspection. 



§ 5032. 


Molten Metal Cranes. 




§ 5033. 


Maintenance. 




§ 5034. 


Adjustments and Repairs. 




§ 5035. 


Damaged Booms. 




Article 101. 


Slings 


7.36.1 


§ 5040. 


Scope. 




§5041. 


Definitions. 




§ 5042. 


Safe Operating Practices. 




§ 5043. 


Inspections. 




§ 5044. 


Alloy Steel Chain Slings. 




§ 5045. 


Wire Rope Slings. 




§ 5046. 


Metal Mesh Slines. 




§ 5047. 


Natural and Synthetic Fiber Rope 
Slings. 




§ 5048. 


Synthetic Web Slings. 




§ 5049. 


Defective Hoist or Sling Hooks and 
Rings. 




Group 14. 


Radiation and Radioactivity 


. . 756 


Article 102. 


Standards for Protection 






Against Radiation 


. . 756 


§ 5075. 


Authority. 




§ 5076. 


Administrative Procedure. 




Article 103. 


Actinic Radiation 


. . 756 


§ 5078. 


Piirpo.se. 




§ 5079. 


Ultra- Violet Radiation. 




Article 104. 


Nonionizing Radiation 


. . 756 


§ 5085. 


Radiofrequency and Microwave 





Group 15. 

Article 105. 

§ 5095. 
§ 5096. 
§ 5097. 
§ 5098. 
§ 5099. 
§ 5100. 
Appendix 
Appendix 
Appendix 
Appendix 
Appendix 
Appendix 

Article 106. 

§5110. 

Group 16. 

Article 107. 

§ 5139. 
§ 5140. 
§5141. 

§ 5142. 



§5143. 

§ 5144. 
Appendix A 

Appendix B 

Appendix B 

Appendix C 



Radiation. 

Occupational Noise and 

Ergonomics 757 

Control of Noise Exposure 757 

General. 

Exposure Limits for Noise. 
Hearing Conservation Program. 
Hearing Protectors. 
Training Program. 
Recordkeeping. 
A 760 



761 
761 
761 
762 
762 



Ergonomics 763 

Repetitive Motion Injuries. 

Control of Hazardous 

Substances 763 

Dusts, Fumes, Mists, Vapors 

and Gases 763 

Purpose. 

Definitions. 

Control of Harmful Exposure to 

Employees. 

Mechanically Driven Heating. 

Ventilating and Air Conditioning 

(HVAC) Systems to Provide 

Minimum Building Ventilation. 

General Requirements of 

Mechanical Ventilation Systems. 

Respiratory Protection, 
to Section 5144: Fit Testing Procedures 

(Mandatory) 768.4 

-1 to Section 5144: User Seal Cheek 

Procedures (Mandatory) 768.10 

-2 to Section 5144: Respirator Cleaning 

Procedures (Mandatory) 768.10 

to Section 5144: OSHA Respirator Medical 

Evaluation Questionnaire 

(Mandatory) 768.1 1 



Page ix 



(7 11 -201)S) 



Table of Contents 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



Page 



Page 



Appendix D to Section 5144: (Mandatory) Information 
for Employees Using Respirators 
When Not Required Under the 
Standai-d 768.13 

§ 5 145. Media for Allaying Dusts. Fumes, 

Mists, Vapors, and Gases. 

§ 5146. Internal Combustion Engine 

Exhaust Emission Control. 

§ 5147. Respiratory Protection for M. 

Tuberculosis. 

§ 5148. Prohibition of Smoking in the 

Workplace. 

§5149. Oxygen Deficiency. 

§ 5150. Ventilation and Personal Protective 

Equipment Requirements for 
Welding, Brazing and Cutting. 

§ 5151 . Ventilation and Personal Protective 

Equipment Requirements for 
Abrasive Blasting Operations. 

§ 5152. Ventilation and Personal Protective 

Equipment Requirements for 
Grinding, Pohshing, and Buffing 
Operations. 

§ 5153. Ventilation and Personal Protective 

Equipment Requirements for Spray 
Coating Operations. 

§ 5154. Ventilation and Personal Protective 

Equipment Requirements for 
Open-Surface Tank Operations. 

§ 5 1 54. 1 . Ventilation Requirements for 

Laboratory-Type Hood Operations. 

§ 5154.2. Ventilation Requirements for 

Biological Safety Cabinets. 

Appendix A - High Efficiency Particulate Air Filter 
Aerosol Test Protocol (Non- 
Mandatory) 782 

Appendix B Start Up and Shut down Procedure (Non- 
Mandatory) 782 

§ 5155. Airborne Contaminants. 

Appendix to Section 5155 783 

Article 108. Confined Spaces 804.2(a) 

§ 5156. Scope, Apphcation and Definitions. 

§ 5157. Permit-Required Confined Spaces. 

Appendix B — Procedures for Atmospheric Testing. . . . 804,8 
Appendix C — Examples of Permit-required Confined 

Space Programs 804.9 

Appendix E — Sewer System Entry 804.14 

§ 5158. Other Confined Space Operations. 

§5159. Confined Space Operations. 

Article 109. Hazardous Substances and 

Processes 804.16 

§5160. Scope and Apphcation. 

§5161. Definitions. 

§ 5162. Emergency Eyewash and Shower 

Equipment. 
§ 5163. Spill and Overflow Control. 

§ 5164. Storage of Hazardous Substances. 

§ 5165. Dispensing Devices for Hazardous 

Substances. 
§ 5166. Cleaning, Repairing, or Altering 

Containers. 
§ 5167. Equipment and Processes Involving 

Hazardous Substances. 
§5168. Static Electricity. 

§ 5169. Special Precautions for Cyanide in 

Open Surface Tanks. 
§ 5170. Open Tanks, Vats and Containers 

Containing Rammable Liquids. 
§5171. Carboys Containing Flammable 

Liquids. 
§ 5172. Drums Containing Flammable 

Liquids. 
§ 5173. Flammable Vapors. 

§ 5174. Combustible I)usts — General. 

§5175. Combustible Metals. 

§ 5176. Pyrophoric Substances. 



§ 5177. Spontaneously Combustible 

Material. 
§ 5178. Grain Handling Facilities. 

§ 5179. Oxidizing Agents: General. 

§ 51 80. Tank Cars Containing Hazardous 

Liquids. 
§5181. Entering Tank Cars. 

§5182. Confined Spaces. 

§5183. Fuming Substances. 

§5184. Hazardous Mixtures. 

§ 5185. Changing and Charging Storage 

Batteries. 
§5186. Pyroxyhn Plastic. 

§5187. Nitrocellulose. 

§5188. Molten Salt Baths. 

§ 5189. Process Safety Management of 

Acutely Hazardous Materials. 
Appendix A to Section 5189 — List of Acutely Hazardous 

Chemicals, Toxics and Reactives 

(Mandatory) 810.3 

§ 5190. Cotton Dust. 

Appendix A 814 

Appendix B-I 815 

Appendix B-II 821 

Appendix B-III 826 

Appendix D 832 

Appendix E 832 

§ 5191. Occupadonal Exposure to 

Hazardous Chemicals in 

Laboratories. 

Appendix A — National Research Council 834.2 

Appendix B 834.7 

§ 5192. Hazardous Waste Operations and 

Emergency Response. 

Appendix A 844.3 

Appendix B 844.5 

Appendix C 844.6 

Appendix D 844.9 

§ 5193. Bloodbome Pathogens. 

Appendix A — Hepatitis B Vaccine Dechnation ... 844.12(f) 

§ 5194. Hazard Communication. 

Appendix A to Section 5194 844.18 

Appendix B to Section 5194 844.19 

Appendix C to Section 5194 844.20 

Appendix D to Secuon 5194 844.21 

Appendix E to Section 5194 844.22 

§ 5 1 94. 1 . Retention of DOT Markings, 

Placards and Labels. 
§5195. Nitrous Oxide. 

§ 5196. Sulfur. 

§ 5197. Repair of Magnesium Dust 

Collecfing Units. 
§ 5198. Lead. 

Appendix A 844.33 

Appendix B 844.34 

Appendix C 844.39 

Appendix D 844.44 

§5199. Melting Operations. 

Article 110. Regulated Carcinogens 844.44 

§ 5200. Methylenedianihne. 

Appendix A to Section 5200 — Substance Data 
Sheet for4^'- 
Methylenedianiline 844.48(c) 

Appendix B to Section 5200 — Substance Technical 

Guidelines, MDA 844.48(d) 

Appendix C to Secdon 5200 — Medical Surveillance 

Guidelines for MDA 844.48(d) 

Appendix D to Secdon 5200 — Sampling and Analydcal 
Methods for MDA Monitoring and 
Measurement Procedures 844.48(e) 

Appendix E to Section 5200 — Qualitative and 
Quantitadve Fit Testing 
Procedures 844.48(f) 

§ 5201. 1,3-Butadiene. 

Appendix A. Substance Safety Data Sheet for 1,3- 
Butadiene (Non- 
Mandatory) 844.48(k) 



• 



• 



Page 



(7-11-2008) 



Titles 



General Industry Safety Orders 



Table of Contents 



Page 



Page 



Appendix B. Substance Technical Guidelines for 
1,3-Butadiene (Non- 
Mandatory) 844.48(k) 

Appendix C. Medical Screening and Surveillance 
for 1,3-Butadiene (Non- 
Mandatory) 844.48(k) 

Appendix D. Sampling and Analytical Method for 
1 .3-Butadiene (Non- 

Mandatoi7) 844.48(k) 

Appendix E. Respirator Fit Testing Procedures 

(Mandatory) 844.48(k) 

Appendix F. Medical Questionaires. (Non- 
mandatory) 844.48(k) 

§ 5202. Methylene Chloride. 

Appendix A to Section 5202 Substance Safety Data 
Sheet and Technical Guidelines 

for Methylene chloride 844.48(r) 

Appendix B to Section 5202 Medical Surveillance for 

Methylene chloride 844.50 

§ 5203. Carcinogen Report of Use 

Requirements. 
§ 5204. Hydrogen Peroxide. 

§ 5205. Perchloric Acid and Oxonium 

Perchlorate. 
§ 5206. Chromium (VI). 

§ 5207. Cadmium. 

Appendix A 844.64(b) 

Appendix A — Attachment 1 844.64(d) 

Appendix A— Table A 844.64(d) 

Appendix A— Table B 844.64(d) 

Appendix A — Attachment 2 844.64(e) 

Appendix A — Attachment 3 844.64(e) 

Appendix B 844.64(f) 

Appendix C 844.64(g) 

Appendix D 844.64(g) 

Appendix E 844.67 

Appendix E — Attachment A 844.77 

Appendix E— Attachment B 844.77 

Appendix F: Nonmandatory Protocol for Biological 

Monitoring 844.77 

§ 5208. Asbestos. 

Appendix A 850 

Appendix B 850.1 

SampHng and Analysis (Non-mandatory) 850.1 

Appendix C 850.7 

Appendix D 850.8 

Appendix E 850.18 

Appendix F 850.18 

Appendix G 850.19 

Appendix H 850.19 

Appendix I 850.20 

Appendix J 850.21 

§ 5208. 1 . Non Asbestiform Tremolite, 

Anthophyllite, and Actinolite. 
§ 5209. Carcinogens. 

§5210. Vinyl Chloride. 

Appendix A — Supplementary Medical Information 853 

§ 5211. Coke Oven Emissions. 

§ 5212. 1,2 Dibromo-3-Chloropropane 

(DBCP). 

Appendix A 862 

Appendix B 863 

Appendix C 864 

§ 5213. Acrylonitrile. 

Appendix A 870 

Appendix B 871 

Appendix C 872 

Appendix D 873 

§ 5214. Inorganic Arsenic. 

Appendix A 882 

Appendix B 882 

Appendix C 883 

Addendum to Section 5214 "Inorganic Arsenic" 884 

§ 5215. 4,4'-Methylenebis(2-Chloroaniline. 

Appendix A 887 

Appendix B 887 

Appendix C 887 



§ 5216. 

§5217. 

Appendix 

Appendix 

Appendix 

Appendix 

Appendix 

§5218. 

Appendix 

Appendix 

Appendix 

Appendix 

Appendix 

§ 5219. 

Appendix 

§ 5220. 

Appendix 

Appendix 

Appendix 

Appendix 

Article 111. 

§5221. 

§ 5222. 

§ 5223. 



Lead. 

Formaldehyde. 

A to Section 52 17 893 

B to Section 5217 916 

C to Section 5217 920 

D to Section 5217 923 

E to Section 52 1 7 928 

Benzene. 

A 932 



R 




.... 933 


r 




9.34 


n 




936 


F 




.... 939 




Ethylene Dibromide (EDB). 


942 


A 


Ethylene Oxide. 


.... 946 


B 




949 


r 




.... 950 


D 




.... 951 



Fumigation 953 

Fumigation: General. 

Fumigation in Vaults and 

Chambers. 

Fumigation in Buildings or Rooms 

Other Than Fumigation Vaults or 

Chambers. 



Article 112. 


Labeling of Injurious 




Substances 9.54 


§ 5225. 


Application of These Orders. 


§ 5226. 


Definitions. 


§ 5227. 


Labeling. 


§ 5228. 


Labels. 


§ 5229. 


Protection. 


§ 5230. 


Samples. 


Group 18. 


Explosive Materials 959 


Article 113. 


Explosive Materials 959 


§ 5236. 


Purpose. 


§ 5237. 


Definitions. 


§ 5238. 


Competency and Quahfications of 




Blasters. 


§ 5239. 


Training and Trainees. 


§ 5240. 


Disposal of Explosive Materials. 


§5241. 


Explosives for Blasting. 


§ 5242. 


Water Gels. 


§ 5243. 


Black Pov/der Blasting. 


§ 5244. 


Explosives for Underground Use. 


§ 5245. 


Blasting Operations During 




Lightning and Dust Storms. 


§ 5246. 


Smoking and Open Flames. 


§ 5247. 


Miscellaneous Provisions. 


§ 5248. 


Blasting Accident Reports and 




Procedures. 


Article 114. 


Storage of Explosive 




Materials 963 


§5251. 


Storage of Explosive Materials. 


§ 5252. 


Quantity and Distances Table for the 



§5252.1. 



§ 5253. 



§5253.1. 
§ 5254. 
§ 5255. 
§ 5256. 
§ 5257. 

§ 5258. 



Storage of Explosive Materials. 
Quantity and Distance Table for 
Storage of Explosives-Low 
Explosives Distances in Feet When 
Storage Is Unbarricaded. 
Quantity and Distance Table for 
Storage of Ammonium Nitrate and 
Blasting Agents. 

Construction and Use of Magazines. 
Magazine Heating. 
Second-Class Magazines. 
Storage Within Magazines. 
Makeup or Primer House for 
Underground Blasting Operations. 
Storage of Explosive Materials 
Underground. 



Page xi 



(7 11 2()(lSi 



Table of Contents 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



Article 115. 

§ 5262. 
§ 5263. 
§ 5264. 

§ 5265. 



§ 5266. 


§ 5267. 


§ 5268. 


§ 5269. 


§ 5270. 


Article 116. 


§ 5276. 
§ 5277. 
§ 5278. 


§ 5279. 


§ 5280. 


§5291. 


§ 5292. 
§ 5293. 
§ 5294. 
§ 5295. 
§ 5296. 
§ 5297. 
§ 5298. 
§ 5298.1 
§ 5299. 
§ 5300. 
§5301. 
§ 5302. 


§ 5304. 


§ 5305. 


§ 5306. 


§ 5307. 


§ 5308. 


Article 118. 


§5311. 
§5312. 


§5313. 


§ 5314. 


Article 119. 


§5319. 
§ 5320. 
§5321. 

§ 5322. 
§ 5323. 



Page 

Transportation of Explosive 
Materials 970 

General. 

Surface Transportation. 
Transportation of Explosive 
Materials — Underground — General. 
Transportation of Explosive 
Materials — Underground — Hoisting 
or Lowering, 

Rail Transportation of Explosive 
Materials — Underground. 
Transportation of Explosive 
Materials — Underground — Special 
Trackless Vehicles. 
Transportation of Explosive 
Materials — Manual. 
Transportation of Explosive 
Materials — Air and Water 
Explosive Materials at Railway and 
Truck Terminals. 

Handling and Use of 

Explosive Materials in 

Blasting Operations 972 

General. 

Tamping Poles or Devices. 

Loading of Explosive 

Materials — General. 

Loading and Blasting Near or Under 

Power Lines. 

Pneumatic Loading of Explosive 

Materials for Blasting. 

Firing of Explosive Materials 

(Blasting Operations). 

Secondary Blasting. 

Misfires. 

Coyote Hole Blasting. 

Use of Safety Fuse — General. 

Safety Fuse Storage. 

Making Capped Fuses and Primers. 

Non-Electric Blasting Systems. 

Use of Detonating Cord. 

Firing with Electricity — General. 

Firing Switches. 

Auxiliary Switches. 

Permanent and Temporary Leading 

Wires. 

Blasting Procedure with Power and 

Light Circuits. 

Electric Blasting Devices and 

Electric Blasting Machines. 

Electric Blasting in Proximity with 

Radio Transmitters. 

Blasting in Excavation Work Under 

Compressed Air. 

Underwater Blasting. 

Explosives for Well Service 

Industry 981 

Scope. 

Loading or Assembling of Industrial 

Explosives and Devices and/or 

Propellent Devices. 

Storage and Transportation of 

Industrial Explosive Materials. 

Firing with Electricity — Well Site. 



Manufacturing and Processing 
of Explosive Materials 

Scope. 

Reporting Requirements. 

Plans of Plant. 

Training and Instruction. 

Emergency Procedure. 



982 



Page 

§ 5324. Change Rooms and Washing 

Facilities. 
§ 5325. Food. 

§ 5326. Intraline Distance. 

§ 5327. Intraline Separation of Operating 

Buildings. 
§ 5328. Operating Buildings and 

Equipment. 
§ 5329. Explosives Operations. 

§ 5330. Testing of Explosive Materials. 

§ 533 1 . Disposal of Waste Explosives and 

Fireworks. 

Article 120. Blasting Agents 984.1 

§ 5340. General. 

§5341. Mixing of Blasting 

Agents — Location, 
§ 5342. Mixing Buildings. 

§ 5344. Mix Room Equipment. 

§ 5345. Composition. 

§ 5346. Blasting Agent Storage. 

§ 5347. Transportation of Blasting Agents. 

§ 5348. On-Site Mixed Water Gels, Slurries, 

Emulsions, and Blasting Agents. 

Article 121. Snow Avalanche Blasting 984.3 

§ 5349. Scope. 

§ 5350. Training. 

§ 5351. Snow Avalanche Blasting Crew. 

§ 5352. Explosives. 

§ 5353. Detonating Systems. 

§ 5354. Storage of Explosives and 

Handcharges. 

§ 5355. Arming Explosive Charges. 

§5355.1. Arming Room. 

§ 5356. Transporting Explosives and 

Handcharges. 

§ 5357. Snow Avalanche Control Blasting. 

§ 5358. Management of Misfires. 

Article 122. Ammonium Nitrate Storage 984.8 

§ 5359. Scope. 

§ 5360. Storage. 

§ 5361. Structures. 

§ 5362. Container Storage. 

§ 5363. Bulk Storage. 

Article 123. Small Arms Ammunition, Small 
Arms Ammunition Primers, 
Smokeless Propellants, and 
Black Powder Propellants 984.9 

§ 5370. Scope. 

§ 5371. Small Arms Aminunition. 

§ 5372. Smokeless Propellants. 

§ 5373. Black Powder Propellants. 

§ 5374. Small Arms Ammunition Primers. 

Group 20. Flammable Liquids, Gases and 

Vapors 984.10 

Article 134. Definitions 984.10 

§ 5415. Definitions. 

Article 135. General 985 

§ 5416. Flammable Vapors. 

§5417. Flammable Liquids — General. 

§ 5418. Carboys and Drums Containing 

Hammable Liquids. 
§ 5419. Drums Containing Flammable 

Liquids. 
§ 5420. Tanks, Vats and Containers 

Containing Flammable Liquids. 

Article 136. Dip Tanks 986 

§ 5426. Construction of Dip Tanks. 

§ 5427. Ventilation. 

§ 5428. Salvage Tanks. 

§ 5429. Conveyor Systems. 



Page xii 



(7-11-2008) 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



Table of Contents 



Page 



Page 



§ 5430. 


Heating Dip Tank Liquids. 


§5431. 


Liquids Used in Dip Tanks, Storage 




and Handling. 


§ 5432. 


Electrical and Other Sources of 




Ignition. 


§ 5433. 


Operations and Maintenance. 


§ 5434. 


Fire Protection. 


§ 5435. 


Dip Tank Covers. 


§ 5436. 


Hardening and Tempering Tanks. 


§ 5437. 


Flow Coat. 


§ 5438. 


Hlectrostatic Apparatus. 


§ 5439. 


Roll Coating. 


Article 137. 


Spray Coating Operations 


§ 5445. 


Scope. 


§ 5446. 


Spray Booths. 


§5447. 


Dry Type Overspray Collectors 




(Hxhaust Air Filters). 


§ 5448. 


Washing Chamber. 


§ 5449. 


Electrical and Other Sources of 




Ignition. 


§ 5450. 


Ventilation. 


§5451. 


Flammable and Combustible 




Liquids — Storage and Handling. 


§ 5452. 


Fire Protection. 


§ 5453. 


Operation and Maintenance. 


§ 5454. 


Fixed Electrostatic Apparatus. 


§ 5455. 


Electrostatic Hand Spraying 




Equipment. 


§ 5456. 


Drying, Curing or Fusion 




Apparatus. 


§ 5457. 


Electrical. 


§ 5458. 


Ventilation. 


§ 5459. 


Automobile Undercoating in 




Garages. 


§ 5460. 


Powder Coating. 


§5461. 


Organic Peroxides and Dual 




Component Coatings. 


Article 138. 


Hydrogen 


§ 5465. 


Gaseous Hydrogen at Consumer 




Sites. 


§ 5466. 


Design of Hydrogen Systems. 


§ 5467. 


Safety Relief Devices. 


§ 5468. 


Piping, Tubing and Fittings. 


§ 5469. 


Equipment Assembly. 


§ 5470. 


Marking. 


§5471. 


Testing. 


§ 5472. 


Location of Gaseous Hydrogen 




Systems. 


§ 5473. 


Specific Requirements. 


§ 5474. 


Design Considerations at Specific 




Locations. 


§ 5475. 


Separate Buildings. 


§ 5476. 


Special Rooms. 


§ 5477. 


Operating Instructions. 


§ 5478. 


Maintenance. 


§ 5480. 


Liquefied Hydrogen Systems at 




Consumer Sites. 


§5481. 


Design of Liquefied Hydrogen 




Systems. 


§ 5482. 


Supports. 


§ 5483. 


Marking. 


§ 5484. 


Safety Relief Devices. 


§ 5485. 


Piping, Tubing and Fittings. 


§ 5486. 


Equipment Assembly. 


§ 5487. 


Testing. 


§ 5488. 


Liquefied Hydrogen Vaporizers. 


§ 5489. 


Electrical Systems. 


§ 5490. 


Bonding and Grounding. 


§5491. 


Location of Liquefied Hydrogen 




Storage. 


§ 5492. 


Specific Requirements. 


§ 5493. 


Handling of Liquefied Hydrogen 



989 



§ 5494. 


Design Considerations at Specific 




Locations. 


§ 5495. 


Separate Buildings. 


§ 5496. 


Special Rooms. 


§ 5497. 


Operating Instructions. 


§ 5498. 


Maintenance. 


Article 139. 


Oxygen 


§ 5500. 


Bulk Oxygen Systems at Consumer 




Sites. 


§5501. 


Location of Bulk Oxygen Systems. 


§ 5502. 


Distance Between Bulk Oxygen 




Systems and Exposures. 


§ 5503. 


Bulk Oxygen Storage Containers. 


§ 5504. 


Piping, Tubing and Fittings. 


§ 5505. 


Safety Relief Devices. 


§ 5506. 


Liquid Oxygen Vaporizers. 


§ 5507. 


Equipment Assembly and 




Installation. 


§ 5508. 


Operating Instructions. 


§ 5509. 


Maintenance. 


Article 140. 


Electrical Equipment 


§ 5530. 


Scope. 


Article 141. 


Container and Portable Tank 




Storage 


§5531. 


Scope. 


§ 5532. 


Design, Construction, and Capacity 



995 



Inside Buildings Other Than 
Separate Buildings and Special 
Rooms. 



§ 5533. 

§ 5534. 

§ 5535. 
§ 5536. 
§ 5537. 



§ 5538. 

§ 5539. 

§ 5540. 

§5541. 

§ 5542. 
§ 5543. 

Article 142. 

§ 5545. 
§ 5546. 
§ 5547. 

§ 5548. 
§ 5549. 
§ 5550. 
§5551. 

Article 143. 

§ 5554. 
§ 5555. 
§ 5556. 
§ 5557. 
§ 5558. 

§ 5559. 
§ 5560. 
§5561. 
§ 5562. 

Article 144. 

§ 5565. 
§ 5566. 
§ 5567. 
§ 5568. 
§ 5569. 
§ 5570. 



I (){)() 



lOOj 



of Contai tiers. 

Design, Construction, and Capacity 

of Storage Cabinets. 

Design and Construction of Inside 

Storage Rooms. 

Storage in Inside Storage Rooms. 

Storage Inside Buildings. 

Assembly Occupancies, Buildings 

Containing More Than Three 

Dwelling Units and Hotels. 

Olfice, Educational and Institutional 

Occupancies. 

Mercantile Occupancies and Other 

Retail Stores. 

General Purpose or Industrial Plant 

Warehouses. 

Flammable and Combustible Liquid 

Warehouses or Storage Buildings. 

Storage Outside Buildings. 

Fire Control. 

Industrial Plants 1007 

General. 

General. 

Tank Vehicle and Tank Car Loading 

and Unloading. 

Fire Control. 

Sources of Ignition. 

Repairs to Equipment. 

Housekeeping. 

Processing Plants lOOS 

Scope. 

Location. 

Construction. 

Storage. 

Tank Vehicle and Tank Car Loading 

and Unloading. 

Fire Control. 

Sources of Ignition. 

Maintenance and Repair. 

Housekeeping. 

Service Stations 1009 

Scope. 

Storage. 

Special Enclosures. 

Inside Buildings. 

Piping, Valves and Fittings. 

Remote Pumping Systems. 



Page xiii 



Table of Contents 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



Page 



Page 



§5571. 


Fuel Dispensing System. 


§ 5572. 


Emergency Power Cutoff. 


§ 5573. 


Fuel Dispensing Units. 


§ 5574. 


Electrical Equipment. 


§ 5575. 


Heating Equipment. 


§ 5576. 


Fuel Delivery No/zles. 


§ 5577. 


Dispensing into Portable 




Containers. 


§ 5578. 


Attendance or Supervision of 




Dispensing. 


§ 5579. 


Drainage and Waste Disposal. 


§ 5580. 


Sources of Ignition. 


§5581. 


Fire Control. 


Article 145. 


Tank Storage 1012 


§ 5583. 


Materials. 


§ 5584. 


Fabrication. 


§ 5585. 


Atmospheric Tanks. 


§5585.1. 


Liquid Level Indicator, Temperature 




Regulator. Class IlIB. 


§ 5586. 


Low Pressure Tanks. 


§ 5587. 


Pressure Vessels. 


§ 5588. 


Provisions for Internal Corrosion. 


§ 5589. 


Installation of Outside Aboveground 




Tanks. 


§ 5590. 


Spacing (Shell-to-Shell) Between 




Aboveground Tanks. 


§5591. 


Location of Outside Aboveground 




Tanks with Respect to Important 




Buildings on Same Property. 


§ 5592. 


Normal Venting for Aboveground 




Tanks. 


§ 5593. 


Emergency Relief Venting for Fire 




Exposure for Aboveground Tanks. 


§ 5594. 


Vent Piping for Aboveground 




Tanks. 


§ 5595. 


Drainage, Dikes and Walls for 




Aboveground Tanks. 


§ 5596. 


Tank Openings Other Than Vents 




for Aboveground Tanks. 


§ 5597. 


Installation of Underground Tanks. 


§ 5598. 


Vents for Underground Tanks. 


§ 5599. 


Tank Openings Other Than Vents 




for Underground Tanks. 


§ 5600. 


Installation of Tanks Inside of 




Buildings. 


§5601. 


Tank Openings Other Than Vents 




for Tanks Inside Buildings. 


§ 5602. 


Supports, Foundations and 




Anchorage for All Tank Locations. 


§ 5603. 


Sources of Ignition. 


§ 5604. 


Testing. 


§ 5605. 


Protection of Tanks in Locations 




That May Be Flooded. 


Article 146. 


Piping, Valves and Fittings 1022 


§ 5606. 


General. 


§ 5607. 


Materials for Piping, Valves and 




Fittings. 


§ 5608. 


Pipe Joints. 


§ 5609. 


Supports. 


§ 5610. 


Protection Against Corrosion. 


§5611. 


Valves. 


§5612. 


Testing. 


Article 147. 


Bulk Plants 1023 


§5614. 


Scope. 


§ 5616. 


Storage. 


§5617. 


Buildings. 


§ 5618. 


Ventilation. 


§5619. 


Loading and Unloading Facilities. 


§ 5620. 


Wharves. 


§5621. 


Electrical Equipment. 


§ 5622. 


Sources of Ignition. 


§ 5623. 


Drainage and Waste Disposal. 


§ 5624. 


Fire Control. 



Article 148. Refineries, Chemical Plants, 

Wineries and Distilleries 1028 

§ 5629. Scope. 
Group 25. Federal Regulations 1028 

Article 150. Scope 1028 

§ 6000. Scope. 
Article 151. OSHA Standards 1028 

§6001. Nonionizing Radiation. 

§ 6002. Nitrous Oxide. 

§ 6003. Accident Prevention Signs. 

§ 6004. Accident Prevention Tags. 

Group 26. Diving and Pressurized 

Worksite Operations 1028 

Article 152. Diving Operations 1028 

§ 6050. General. 

§6051. Definitions. 

§ 6052. General Requirements. 

§ 6053. Medical Requirements of Dive 

Team. 
§ 6054. Manual for Diving Safety. 

§ 6055. Dive Planning. 

§ 6056. Basic Operation Procedures. 

§ 6057. F^uipment Procedures and 

Requirements. 
§ 6058. Recordkeeping Requirements. 

Article 153. Commercial Diving 

Operations 1034 

§ 6059. General. 

§ 6060. Procedures During Dive. 

§ 6061. Specific OperaUons Procedures. 

§ 6062. Post Dive Procedures. 

§ 6063. Equipment Requirements. 

Appendix A 1035 

Appendix B 1036 

Article 154. Pressurized Worksite 

Operations 1036 

§ 6070. Application. 

§ 6074. Definifions. 

§ 6075. General Provisions. 

§ 6080. Compression Rate. 

§ 6085. Decompression for Normal 

Conditions. 
§ 6087. Decompression After Repetitive 

Exposures. 
§ 6089. Decompression by Decanting. 

§ 6090. Air Locks. 

§ 6095. Special Decompression Chamber. 

§ 6100. Temperature, Illumination, 

Sanitation and Ventilation. 
§ 6105. Compressor Plant, Air Supply and 

Telephone Communication. 
§ 61 10. Bulkheads and Screens. 

§ 61 15. Fire Prevention. 

§6120. Medical Control. 

Appendix A 1038.2 

Appendix B 1038.14 

Group 27. Fire Protection 1038.16 

Article 156. Definitions 1038.16 

§6150. Definifions. 

Article 157. Portable Fire Extinguishers 1039 

§ 6151. Portable Fire ExUnguishers. 

Article 158. Standpipe and Hose Systems 1041 

§ 6165. Standpipe and Hose Systems. 

Article 159. Automatic Sprinkler 

Systems 1041 

§ 6170. Automafic Sprinkler Systems. 

Article 160. Fixed Extinguishing 

Systems 1042 



Page xiv 



(7-11-2008) 



Title 8 



General Industry 
Page 

Fixed Extinguishing Systems. 

Fixed Extinguishing Systems, 

Dry Chemical 1043 

Fixed Extinguishing Systems; Dry 
Chemical. 

Fixed Extinguishing Systems, 

Gaseous Agents 1043 

Gaseous Systems. 

Fixed Fire Extinguishing 

Systems — Water-Spray, and 

Foam- Water Sprinkler 

Systems 1044 

Water-Spray Fixed Systems, 

Foam-Water Sprinkler Systems. 



Safety Orders Table of Contents 

Page 

Article 164. Fire Detection Systems 1044 

§6183. Fire Detection Systems. 

Article 165. Employee Alarm Systems 1044 

§ 6184. Employee Alarm Systems. 

Subchapter 8. Safety Rules for Gold 

Dredges 1045 

Subchapter 9. Lamp Scaffold and 

Parallel Safety Orders 104.'^ 

Subchapter 10. Liquefied Petroleum Gases 

Safety Orders 1045 

Subchapter 11. Logging and Sawmill 

Safety Orders 1045 

Subchapter 12. Mine Safety Orders 1045 



§6175. 

Article 16 L 

§6180. 

Article 162. 

§6181. 
Article 163. 

§6182. 



Page XV 



(7 n 200X) 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3203 



Subchapter 7. General Industry Safety 
Orders 

INTRODUCTION 

§ 3200. Purpose. 

To fulfill the expressed social public policy of the State of California 
set forth in Article XX, Section 21 of the Constitution, to make full provi- 
sion for securing safety in places of employment, these General Industry 
Safety Orders are promulgated for the guidance of employers and em- 
ployees alike. Compliance with these orders may not in itself prevent oc- 
cupational injuries or diseases, but will, it is believed, provide a safe envi- 
ronment which is a fundamental prerequisite in controlling injuries. 
Every employer should provide their supervisory staff with a copy of 
these orders and assure that each supervisor is familiar with those sec- 
lions pertaining to the operations under their supervision. 
Note:: Authority cited for § 3200 to 4207, inclusive: Sections 631 2 and 6500, La- 
bor Code. Additional authority cited: Section 6502 and Section 142.3, Labor 
Code. 

History 

1. New §§ 3200 to 419 L inclusive (except as otherwise noted) filed, and §§ 4201 
to 4207, inclu.sive, refiled 12-19-49 (Register 18, No. 8). 

2. Repealer of Subchapter 7 (Groups 1-9, §§ 32 10 through 4207, not consecutive) 
and new Subchapter 7 (Groups 1-4, 6, 8, 10, 13-16. 18. §§ 3210through 5370, 
not con.secuti\e) filed 2-1-72 as an emergency; designated effecdve 2-1-72 
( Register 72, No. 6). For prior history, see Register 55. No. 2., Register 57, No. 
13, Register 60, No. 19,Reeister61,No.26,Register62,Nos. 1 and 21, Register 
66, Nos. 23 and 38, Register 67. Nos. 18 and 38, Reeister68, No. 47, Register 
69, No. 9, Regi.ster 70, Nos. 1 and 25. Register 71. No. 17, Register 72. No. 2. 

3. Certificate of Compliance filed 4-26-72 (Register 72, No.l9). 

4. Repealer of Subchapter 7 (Groups 1-9, §§ 32 10 through 4207, not consecutive) 
and new Subchapter 7 (Groups 1-4, 6. 8, 10, 13-16, 18, §§ 3210 thi-ough 5370, 
not consecutive) refiled 6-1-72 as an emergency: designated effective 6-1-72. 
Certificate of Compliance included (Register 72, No. 23). For prior history, see 
Register 72, No. 20. 

5. Amendment and renumbering of subsections (a)(15) through (a)(42) filed 
1-31-75 as an emergency; effective upon filing (Register 75, No. 5). 

6. These orders supersede the orders heretofore separately published in Title 8, 
Chapter 1 , Subchapter 4 entitled Dust, Fumes, Vapors and Gases Safety Orders, 
Engine Safety Orders, Gantry-Truck Safety Orders, General Safety Orders, 
Laundry Safety Orders, Mechanical Power Transmission Safety Orders, Steam 
Shovel and Locomotive Crane Safety Orders, Safety Orders for Women in In- 
dustry and Woodworking Safety Orders. 

7. Change without regulatory effect amending section and NoTii filed 6-27-2000 
pursuant to section 100, title 1, California Code of Regulations (Register 2000, 
No. 26). 

§3201. Title. 

These safety orders shall be known as General Industry Safety Orders. 

§ 3202. Application. 

(a) These orders establish minimum standards and apply to all employ- 
ments and places of employment in California as defined by Labor Code 
Section 6303; provided, however, that when the Occupational Safety and 
Health Standards Board has adopted or adopts safety orders applying to 
certain industries, occupations or employments exclusively, in which 
like conditions and hazards exist, those orders shall take precedence 
wherever they are inconsistent with the General Industry Safety Orders 
hereinafter set forth. 

Note; Unless otherwise designated in this subchapter, the phrase "division" re- 
fers to the current Division of Occupational Safety and Health or any of its prede- 
cessors including the former Division of Industrial Safety or the Division of Occu- 
pational Safety and Health Administration. Reference to the former Division of 
Industrial Safety or Division of Occupational Safety and Health Administration in 
these orders is meant to refer to their successor, the Division of Occupational Safe- 
ty and Health, or any subsequent successor agency. 

(b) After the date on which these Orders become effecdve, all installa- 
tions shall conform to these Orders. 

ExctiP riOX: ( 1 ) Existing installations which are in compliance with safety orders, 
or variations therefrom, in effect prior to the effective date of these safety orders, 
unless the hazard presented by the installation or equipment is, in the judgment of 
the Chief of the Division, of such severity as to warrant control by the application 
of the applicable sections of these orders. 



(2) Facsimiles, replicas, reproductions, or simulations when used for exhibition 
purposes when such compliance would be detrimental to their use for such pur- 
poses unless the hazard presented by the installation is, in the judgment of the 
Chief of the Division, of such severity as to v;arrant control by the application of 
the applicable sections of these Orders. 

(c) Regulations herein affecting building standards, apply lo any 
building, or building alteration, or building modification for which con- 
struction is cominenced after the effective date of the regulations. Date 
of cominencement of construction, for the purpose of this section, shall 
be: 

(1) The advertising date for invitation of bids for State and local gov- 
ernment projects. 

(2) The building permit issuance date for other projects. 
(Tide 24, Part 2, Section 2-109.) 

NOTI^: Identification of Building Regulations. The basic building regulations for 
employments and places of employment contained in Title 24, State Buildings 
Standards Code, California Administrative Code are part of these safct\ orders. 
Pursuant to Health and Safety Code Section 18943(c). such building regulations 
are identified in these safety orders by the addition of a reference to the appropriate 
section of the State Building Standards Code (Title 24), which is added to the end 
of the safety order section: 

(Title 24, Part X, Section XXXX.) 

(d) Nothing contained in these regulations shall be considered us abro- 
gating the provisions relating to public safety of any ordinance, rule or 
reguladon of any governmental agency, providing such local ordinance, 
rule or regulation is not less stringent than these miniinum standards. 
Note; The fihngdate 12-19-49 shown in the History Note of .Section 3200 is for 
the sections originally filed. The filing date of sections sub.sequcntly adopted or 
revised is shown in the History Note at the end of the section. Orders become effec- 
tive 30 days after filing. 

(Title 24, T8-3202) 
NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3. LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3. La- 
bor Code; and Section 18943(c), Health and Safety Code. 

History 

1. Repealer and new section filed 10-25 74; effective thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register 74, No. 43). 

2. Repealer and new section filed 1-31-75 as an emergency; effective upon filing 
(Register 75, No. 5). 

3. Certificate of Compliance filed 3-4-75 (Register 75, No. 10). 

4. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 

5. Amendment of subsection (a) filed 7-6-79 as procedural and organizational; 
effective upon filing (Register 79, No. 27). 

6. Amendment of subsection (c) and NOTE filed 5-25-83; effective thirtieth day 
thereafter (Register 83, No. 22). Approved by State Building Standards Com- 
mission 1-24-83. 

§ 3203. Injury and Illness Prevention Program. 

(a) Effective July 1, 1991, every employer shall establish, implement 
and maintain an effective Injury and Illness Prevention Program (Pro- 
gram). The Program shall be in v/riting and, shall, at a minimum: 

( 1 ) Identify the person or persons with authority and responsibility for 
implementing the Program. 

(2) Include a system for ensuring that employees comply with safe and 
healthy work pracdces. Substantial compliance with this pro\ ision in- 
cludes recognition of employees who follow safe and healthful work 
practices, training and retraining programs, disciplinary actions, or any 
other such means that ensures employee compliance with safe and 
healthful work practices. 

(3) Include a system for communicating with employees in a form 
readily understandable by all affected employees on matters relating to 
occupadonal safety and health, including provisions designed to encour- 
age employees to inform the employer of hazards at the worksite w ithout 
fear of reprisal. Substandal compliance with this provision includes 
meedngs, training programs, posting, written communications, a systein 
of anonymous nodficadon by employees about hazards, labor/manage- 
ment safety and health committees, or any other means that ensures com- 
munication with employees. 

EXCEPTION: Employers having fewer than 10 employees shall be permitted to 
communicate to and instruct employees orally in general safe work practices with 
specific instnictions with respect to hazards unique to the employees" job assign- 
ments as compliance with subsection (a)(3). 

(4) Include procedures for identifying and evaluating work place haz- 
ards including scheduled periodic inspecdons to identify unsafe condi- 



Page 533 



Register 2002, No. 46; 1 1 - 15 - 2002 



§ 3204 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



tions and work practices. Inspections sliall be made to identify and evalu- 
ate hazards: 

(A) When the Program is first established; 

EXCHPTION: Those employers having in place on July 1. 1991, a written Injury 
and Illness Prevention Program complying with previously existing section 3203. 

(B) Whenever new substances, processes, procedures, or equipment 
are introduced to the workplace that represent a new occupational safety 
and health hazard; and 

(C) Whenever the employer is made aware of a new or previously un- 
recognized hazard. 

(5) Include a procedure to investigate occupational injury or occupa- 
tional illness. 

(6) Include methods and/or procedures for correcting unsafe or un- 
healthy conditions, work practices and work procedures in a timely man- 
ner based on the severity of the hazard: 

(A) When observed or discovered; and, 

(B) When an imminent hazard exists which cannot be immediately 
abated without endangering employee(s) and/or property, remove all ex- 
posed personnel from the area except those necessary to correct the exist- 
ing condition. Employees necessary to correct the hazardous condition 
shall be provided the necessary safeguards. 

(7) Provide training and instruction: 

(A) When the program is first established; 

EXCEPTION: Employers having in place on July 1, 1991, a written Injury and Il- 
lness Prevention Program complying with the previously existing Accident Pre- 
vention Program in Section 3203. 

(B) To all new employees; 

(C) To all employees given new job assignments for which training 
has not previously been received; 

(D) Whenever new substances, processes, procedures or equipment 
are introduced to the workplace and represent a new hazard; 

(E) Whenever the employer is made aware of a new or previously un- 
recognized hazard; and, 

(F) For supervisors to familiarize themselves with the safety and 
health hazards to which employees under their immediate direction and 
control may be exposed. 

(b) Records of the steps taken to implement and maintain the Program 
shall include: 

( 1 ) Records of scheduled and periodic inspections required by subsec- 
tion (a)(4) to identify unsafe conditions and work practices, including 
person(s) conducting the inspection, the unsafe conditions and work 
practices that have been identified and action taken to correct the identi- 
fied unsafe conditions and work practices. These records shall be main- 
tained for at least one ( 1 ) year; and 

EXCEPTION: Employers with fewer than 10 employees may elect to maintain the 
inspection records only until the hazard is corrected. 

(2) Documentation of safety and health training required by subsec- 
tion (a)(7) for each employee, including employee name or other identifi- 
er, training dates, type(s) of training, and training providers. This docu- 
mentation shall be maintained for at least one (1) year. 

ExCHPTiON No. 1: Employers with fewer than 10 employees can substantially 
comply with the documentation provision by maintaining a log of instructions pro- 
vided to the employee with respect to the hazards unique to the employees' job 
assignment when first hired or assigned new duties. 

Exc[:ptic)n No. 2: Training records of employees who have worked for less than 
one ( 1 ) year for the employer need not be retained beyond the term of employment 
if they are provided to the employee upon termination of employment. 

ExcF'PTION No. 3: For Employers with fewer than 20 employees who are in indus- 
tries that are not on a designated list of high-hazard industries established by the 
Department of Industrial Relations (Department) and who have a Workers' Com- 
pensation Experience Modification Rate of 1 . 1 or less, and for any employers with 
fewer than 20 employees who are in industries on a designated list of low-hazard 
industries established by the Department, written documentation of the Program 
may be limited to the following requirements: 

A. Written documentation of the identity of the person or persons with authority 
and responsibility for implementing the program as required by subsection (a)( 1 ). 

B. Written documentation of scheduled periodic inspections to identify unsafe 
conditions and work practices as required by subsection (a)(4). 

C. Written documentation of training and instruction as required by subsection 

(a)(7). 



ExcE-PTioN No. 4: Local governmental entities (any county, city, city and county, 
or district, or any public or quasi-public corporation or public agency therein, in- 
cluding any public entity, other than a state agency, that is a member of, or created 
by. a joint powers agreement) are not required to keep records concerning the steps 
taken to implemenl and maintain the Program. 

NoTl-; 1: Employers determined by the Division to have historically utilized sea- 
sonal or intermittent employees shall be deemed in compliance with respect to the 
requirements for a written Program if the employer adopts the Model Program pre- 
pared by the Division and complies with the requirements set forth therein. 
NoTH 2: Employers in the construction industry who are required to be licensed 
under Chapter 9 (commencing with Section 7000) of Division 3 of the Business 
and Professions Code may use records relating to employee training provided to 
the employer in connection with an occupational safety and health training pro- 
gram approved by the Division, and shall only be required to keep records of those 
steps taken to implement and maintain the program with respect to hazards specific 
to the employee's job duties. 

(c) Employers who elect to use a labor/management safety and health 
committee to comply with the communication requirements of subsec- 
tion (a)(3) of this section shall be presumed to be in substantial com- 
pliance with subsection (a)(3) if the committee: 

( 1 ) Meets regulariy, but not less than quarteriy; 

(2) Prepares and makes available to the affected employees, written re- 
cords of the safety and health issues discussed at the committee meetings 
and, maintained for review by the Division upon request. The committee 
meeting records shall be maintained for at least one (1) year; 

(3) Reviews results of the periodic, scheduled worksite inspections; 

(4) Reviews investigations of occupational accidents and causes of in- 
cidents resulting in occupational injury, occupational illness, or exposure 
to hazardous substances and, where appropriate, submits suggestions to 
management for the prevention of future incidents; 

(5) Reviews investigations of alleged hazardous conditions brought to 
the attention of any committee member. When determined necessary by 
the committee, the committee may conduct its own inspection and inves- 
tigation to assist in remedial solutions; 

(6) Submits recommendations to assist in the evaluation of employee 
safety suggestions; and 

(7) Upon request from the Division, verifies abatement action taken 
by the employer to abate citations issued by the Division. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Sections 142.3 and 6401.7, Labor Code. Reference: Sec- 
tions 142.3 and 6401.7, Labor Code. 

History 

1. New section filed 4-1-77; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 77, No. 
14). For former history, see Register 74, No. 43. 

2. Editorial correction of subsection (a)(1) (Register 77, No. 41). 

3. Amendment ofsubsection (a)(2) filed 4-1 2-83; effective thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register 83, No. 16). 

4. Amendment filed 1-16-91; operative 2-15-91 (Register 91, No. 8). 

5. Editorial correction of subsections (a), (a)(2), (a)(4)(A) and (a)(7) (Register 91, 
No. 31). 

6. Change without regulatory effect amending subsection (a)(7)(F) filed 10-2-92; 
operative 1 1-2-92 (Register 92, No. 40). 

7. Amendment of subsection (b)(2). Exception No. 1, new Exception No. 3 
through Exception No. 4, Note 2, and amendment of subsecdon (c)(2) filed 
9-13-94; operative 9-13-94 pursuant to Government Code section 11346.2 
(Register 94, No. 37). 

8. Editorial correction of subsections (a)(6)(A) and (a)(7)(A) (Register 95, No. 22). 

9. Amendment of subsections (b)(l)-(2) and (c)(2) filed 6-1-95; operative 
7-3-95 (Register 95, No. 22). 

10. Editorial correction ofsubsection (a)(4) (Register 2002, No. 46). 

§ 3204. Access to Employee Exposure and Medical 
Records. 

(a) Purpose. The purpose of this section is to provide employees and 
their designated representatives and authorized representatives of the 
Chief of the Division of Occupational Safety and Health (DOSH) a right 
of access to relevant exposure and medical records. Access by em- 
ployees, their representatives, and representatives of DOSH is necessary 
to yield both direct and indirect improvements in the detection, treatment, 
and prevention of occupational disease. Each employer is responsible for 
assuring compliance with this section, but the activities involved in com- 
plying with the access to medical records provisions can be carried out. 



Page 534 



Register 2002, No. 46; 11-15-2002 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§ 3204 



on behalf of the employer, by the physician or other health care personnel 
in charge of employee medical records. Except as expressly provided, 
nothing in this section is intended to affect existing legal and ethical obli- 
gations concerning the maintenance and confidentiality of employee 
medical information, the duty to disclose information to a patient/em- 
ployee or any other aspect of the medical-care relationship, or affect ex- 
isting legal obhgations concerning the protection of trade secret informa- 
tion. 

(b) Scope and Application. 

( 1 ) This section applies to each employer who makes, maintains, con- 
tracts for, or has access to employee exposure or medical records, or anal- 
yses thereof, pertaining to employees exposed to toxic substances or 
harmful physical agents. 

(2) This section applies to all employee exposure and medical records, 
and analyses thereof, of employees exposed to toxic substances or harm- 
ful physical agents, whether or not the records are related to specific oc- 
cupational safety and health standards. 



(3) This section applies to all employee exposure and medical records, 
and analyses thereof, made or maintained in any manner by the employ- 
er, both on an in-house and on a contractual (e.g., fee-for-scrvice) basis. 
Each employer shall assure that the preservation and access requirements 
of this section are complied with regardless of the manner in which re- 
cords are made or maintained. 

(c) Definitions. 

(1) Access. The right and opportunity to examine and copy. 

(2) Analysis Using Exposure or Medical Records. Any compilation of 
data, or any research, statistical or other study based at least in part on in- 
formation collected from individual employee exposure or medical re- 
cords or information collected from health insurance claims records, pro- 
vided that either the analysis has been reported to the employer or no 
further work is currently being done by the person responsible for prepar- 
ing the analysis. 

(3) Designated Representative. Any individual or organization to 
whom an employee gives written authorization to exercise a right of ac- 



[The next page is 535. 



Page 534.1 



Register 2002, No. 45; 11-15-2002 



Titles 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§ 3204 



cess. A recognized or certified collective bargaining agent shall be 
treated automatically as a designated representative for the purpose of ac- 
cess to employee exposure records and analyses using exposure or medi- 
cal records, but access to an employee's medical records requires the em- 
ployee's written consent. 

(4) Employee. A current employee, a former employee, or an em- 
ployee being assigned or transferred to work where there will be expo- 
sure to toxic substances or harmful physical agents. For the purpose of 
this section, a deceased or legally incapacitated employee's legal repre- 
sentative may exercise all of the employee's rights under this section. 

(5) Employee Exposure Record. A record containing any of the fol- 
lowing kinds of information concerning employee exposure to toxic sub- 
stances or harmful physical agents: 

(A) Environmental (workplace) monitoring or measuring, including 
personal, area, grab, wipe, or other form of sampling, as well as related 
collection and analytical methodologies, calculations, and other back- 
ground data relevant to interpretation of the results obtained; 

(B) Biological monitoring results which directly assess the absorption 
of a toxic substance or harmful physical agent by body systems (e.g., the 
level of chemical in the blood, urine, breath, hair, fingernails, etc.) but not 
including results which assess the biological effect of a substance or 
agent or which assess an employee's use of alcohol or drugs; 

(C) Material safety data sheets indicating that the material may pose 
a hazard to human health; or 

(D) In the absence of (A), (B) or (C) above, a record, such as a chemical 
inventory or any other record, which reveals the identity (e.g., chemical, 
common, or trade name) of a toxic substance or harmful physical agent 
and where and when the toxic substance or harmful physical agent was 
used. 

(6) Employee Medical Record. A record concerning the health status 
of an employee which is made or maintained by a physician, nurse, or 
other health care personnel, or technician. 

(A) Employee medical record includes the following: 

1 . Medical and employment questionnaires or histories (including job 
description and occupational exposures); 

2. The results of medical examinations (pre-employment, pre-assign- 
ment, periodic, or episodic) and laboratory tests (including chest and oth- 
er X-ray examinations taken for the purposes of establishing a base-line 
or detecting occupational illness, and all biological monitoring not de- 
fined as an "employee exposure record"); 

3. Medical opinions, diagnoses, progress notes, and recommenda- 
tions; 

4. First-aid records; 

5. Descriptions of treatments and prescriptions; and 

6. Employee medical complaints. 

(B) Employee medical record does not include medical information in 
the form of: 

1. Physical specimens (e.g. blood or urine samples) which are routine- 
ly discarded as a part of normal medical practice; or 

2. Records concerning health insurance claims if maintained separate- 
ly from the employer's medical program and its records, and not accessi- 
ble to the employer by employee name or other direct personal identifier 
(e.g., social security number, payroll number, etc.); or 

3. Records created solely in preparation for litigation which are pro- 
tected from discovery under the applicable rules of procedure or evi- 
dence; or 

4. Records concerning voluntary employee assistance programs (alco- 
hol, drug abuse, or personal counseling programs) if maintained sepa- 
rately from the employer's medical program and its records. 

(7) Employer. A current employer, a former employer, or a successor 
employer. 

(8) Exposure or Exposed. Employee subjection to a toxic substance or 
harmful physical agent in the course of employment through any route 
of entry (inhalation, ingestion, skin contact or absorption, etc.), and in- 
cludes past exposure and potential (e.g., accidental or possible) expo- 



sure, but does not include situations where the employer can demonstrate 
that the toxic substance or harmful physical agent is not used, handled, 
stored, generated, or present in the workplace in any manner different 
from typical non-occupational situations. 

(9) Health Professional. A physician, occupational health nurse, in- 
dustrial hygienist, toxicologist, or epidemiologist providing medical or 
other occupational health services to exposed employees. 

(10) Record. Any item, collection, or grouping of information regard- 
less of the form or process by which it is maintained (e.g., paper docu- 
raent, microfiche, microfilm. X-ray film, or automated data processing). 

(11) Specific Chemical Identity. The chemical name. Chemical Ab- 
stracts Service (CAS) Registry Number, or any other information that re- 
veals the precise chemical designation of the substance. 

(12) Specific Written Consent. 

(A) A written authorization containing the following: 

1 . The name and signature of the employee authorizing the release of 
medical information; 

2. The date of the written authorization; 

3. The name of the individual or organization that is authorized to re- 
lease the medical information; 

4. The name of the designated representafive (individual or organiza- 
tion) that is authorized to receive the released information; 

5. A general description of the medical informafion that is authorized 
to be released; 

6. A general descripfion of the purpose for release of the medical infor- 
mafion; and 

7. A date or condidon upon which the written authorizafion will expire 
(if less than one year). 

(B) A written authorization does not operate to authorize the release 
of medical informafion not in existence on the date of written authoriza- 
fion, unless the release of future information is expressly authorized, and 
does not operate for more than one year from the date of written authori- 
zation. 

(C) A written authorizafion may be revoked in wrifing prospectively 
at any time. 

(13) Toxic Substance or Harmful Physical Agent. Any chemical sub- 
stance, biological agent (bacteria, virus, fungus, etc.), or physical stress 
(noise, heat, cold, vibration, repefifive motion, ionizing and non-ioniz- 
ing radiafion, hypo- or hyperbaric pressure, etc.) which: 

(A) Is regulated by any California or Federal law or rule due to a hazard 
to health; 

(B) Is listed in the latest printed edition of the National Institute for Oc- 
cupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) Registry of Toxic Effects of 
Chemical Substances (RTECS) (See Appendix B); 

(C) Has yielded positive evidence of an acute or chronic health hazard 
in human, animal, or other biological testing conducted by, or known to, 
the employer; or 

(D) Is the subject of a material safety data sheet kept by or known to 
the employer which indicates that the material may pose a hazard to hu- 
man health. 

(14) Trade Secret. Any confidential formula, pattern, process, device, 
or information or compilation of information that is used in an employ- 
er's business and that gives the employer an opportunity to obtain an ad- 
vantage over competitors who do not know or use it. 

(d) Preservation of Records. 

(1) Unless a specific occupational safety and health regulation pro- 
vides a different period of time, each employer shall assure the preserva- 
tion and retention of records as follows: 

(A) Employee Medical Records. The medical record for each em- 
ployee shall be preserved and maintained for at least the duration of em- 
ployment plus thirty (30) years, except that the following types of records 
need not be retained for any specific period: 

1 . Health insurance claims records maintained separately from the em- 
ployer's medical program and its records; 



Page 535 



Register 91, No. 8; 2-22-91 



§3204 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



2. First aid records (not including medical histories) of one-time treat- 
ment and subsequent observation of minor scratches, cuts, burns, splin- 
ters, and the like which do not involve medical treatment, loss of con- 
sciousness, restriction of work or motion, or transfer to another job, if 
made on-site by a non-physician and if maintained separately from the 
employer's medical program and its records; and 

3. The medical records of employees who have worked for less than 
( 1 ) year for the employer need not be retained beyond the term of em- 
ployment if they are provided to the employee upon the termination of 
employment. 

(B) Employee Exposure Records. Each employee exposure record 
shall be preserved and maintained for at least thirty (30) years, except 
that: 

1. Background data to environmental (workplace) monitoring or mea- 
suring, such as laboratory reports and worksheets, need only be retained 
for one ( 1 ) year so long as the sampling results, the collection methodolo- 
gy (sampling plan), a description of the analytical and mathematical 
methods used, and a summary of other background data relevant to inter- 
pretation of the results are retained for at least thirty (30) years; 

2. Material safety data sheets shall be retained as necessary to comply 
with the provisions of section 5 194. Where material safety data sheets are 
destroyed, a record of the identity (chemical name if known) of the sub- 
stance or agent, where it was used, and when it was used shall be retained 
for at least thirty years; and 

3. Section 3204(c)(5)(D) records concerning the identity of a sub- 
stance or agent need not be retained for any specified period as long as 
some record of the identity (chemical name if known) of the substance 
or agent, where it was used, and when it was used is retained for at least 
thirty years. 

4. Biological monitoring results designated as exposure records by 
specific occupational safety and health regulations shall be preserved and 
maintained as required by the specific regulation. 

(C) Analyses Using Exposure or Medical Records. Each analysis us- 
ing exposure or medical records shall be preserved and maintained for at 
least thirty (30) years. 

(2) Nothing in this section is intended to mandate the form, manner, 
or process by which an employer preserves a record so long as the infor- 
mation contained in the record is preserved and retrievable, except that 
chest X-ray films shall be preserved in their original state. 

(e) Access to Records. 

(1) General. 

(A) Whenever an employee or designated representative requests ac- 
cess to a record, the employer shall assure that access is provided in a rea- 
sonable time, place, and manner, but in no event later that fifteen (15) 
days after the request for access is made. Before the time for providing 
access has expired, an employer after notice to the employee or desig- 
nated representative may, by notification to be followed in writing, re- 
quest an extension of time from the Chief, Division of Occupational 
Safety and Health, which shall be granted upon a finding of good cause 
by the Chief. 

(B) The employer may require of the requester only such information 
as should be readily known to the requester and which may be necessary 
to locate or identify the records being requested (e.g., dates and locations 
where the employee worked during the time period in question). 

(C) Whenever an employee or designated representative requests a 
copy of a record, the employer shall assure that either: 

1 . A copy of the record is provided without cost to the employee or des- 
ignated representative; 

2. The necessary mechanical copying facilities (e.g. photocopying) 
are made available without cost to the employee or designated represen- 
tative for copying the record; or 

3. The record is loaned to the employee or designated representative 
for a reasonable time to enable a copy to be made. 



(D) In the case of an original X-ray, the employer may restrict access 
to on-site examination or make other suitable arrangements for the tem- 
porary loan of the X-ray. 

(E) Whenever a record has been provided previously without cost to 
an employee or designated representative, the employer may charge rea- 
sonable, non-discriminatory administrative costs (i.e., search and copy- 
ing expenses but not including overhead expenses) for additional copies 
of the record. 

EXCEPTIONS: 

1 . An employer shall not charge for an initial request for a copy of new information 
that has been added to a record which was previously provided. 

2. An employer shall not charge for an initial request by a recognized or certified 
collective bargaining agent for a copy of an employee exposure record or an 
analysis using exposure or medical records. 

(F) Nothing in this section is intended to preclude employees and col- 
lective bargaining agents from collectively bargaining to obtain access 
to information in addition to that available under this section. 

(G) Whenever an employee requests access to a specific written con- 
sent submitted to the employer, the employer shall comply pursuant to 
the provisions for affording employee access to records stipulated by sec- 
tions 3204(e)(l)(A)-(C). 

(2) Employee and Designated Representative Access. 

(A) Employee Exposure Records. 

1 . Except as limited by section 3204(f), each employer shall, upon re- 
quest, assure the access of each employee and designated representative 
to employee exposure records relevant to the employee. For the purpose 
of this section, exposure records relevant to the employee consist of: 

a. A record containing measurements or monitoring results of the 
amount of a toxic substance or harmful physical agent to which the em- 
ployee is or has been exposed; 

b. In the absence of such directly relevant records, such records of oth- 
er employees with past or present job duties or working conditions re- 
lated to or similar to those of the employee to the extent necessary to rea- 
sonably indicate the amount and nature of the toxic substances or harmful 
physical agents to which the employee is or has been subjected; and 

c. Exposure records to the extent necessary to reasonably indicate the 
amount and nature of the toxic substance or harmful physical agent at 
workplaces or working conditions to which the employee is being as- 
signed or transferred. 

2. Requests by designated representatives for unconsented access to 
employee exposure records shall be in writing and shall specify with rea- 
sonable particularity: 

a. The records requested to be disclosed; and 

b. The occupational health need for gaining access to these records. 

(B) Employee Medical Records. 

1. Each employer shall, upon request, assure the access of each em- 
ployee to employee medical records of which the employee is the subject, 
except as provided in section 3204(e)(2)(B)4. 

2. Each employer shall, upon request, assure the access of each desig- 
nated representative to the employee medical records of any employee 
who has given the designated representative specific written consent. 

NOTE: Appendix A to this section contains a sample form which may 
be used to establish specific written consent for access to employee medi- 
cal records. 

3. Whenever access to employee medical records is requested in ac- 
cordance with section 3204(e)(2)(B) 1 or 2, a physician representing the 
employer may recommend that the employee or designated representa- 
tive: consult with the physician for the purposes of reviewing and dis- 
cussing the records requested; accept a summary of material facts and 
opinions in lieu of the records requested; or accept release of the re- 
quested records only to a physician or other designated representative. 

4. Whenever an employee requests access to his or her employee medi- 
cal records and a physician representing the employer believes that direct 



Page 536 



Register 91, No. 8; 2-22-91 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3204 



employee access to information contained in the records regarding a spe- 
cific diagnosis of a terminal illness or a psychiatric condition could be 
detrimental to the employee's health, the employer may deny the em- 
ployee's request for direct access to this information only, and the em- 
ployer shall inform the employee that access will only be provided to a 
designated representative of the employee having specific written con- 
sent. 

5. Where a designated representative with specific written consent re- 
quests access to information withheld in accordance with section 
3204(e)(2)(B)4, the employer shall assure the access of the designated 
representative to this information even when it is known that the desig- 
nated representative will give the information to the employee. 

NOTE: Nothing in this section precludes a physician, nurse, or other 
responsible health care personnel maintaining employee medical records 
from deleting from requested medical records the identity of a family 
member, personal friend, or fellow employee who has provided confi- 
dential information concerning an employee's health status. 

(C) Analyses Using Exposure or Medical Records. 

1. Each employer shall, upon request, assure the access of each em- 
ployee and designated representative to each analysis using exposure or 
medical records concerning the employee's working conditions or work- 
place. 

2. Whenever access is requested to an analysis which reports the con- 
tents of employee medical records by either direct identifier (name, ad- 
dress, social security number, payroll number, etc.) or by information 
which could reasonably be used under the circumstances indirectly to 
identify specific employees (exact age, height, weight, race, sex, date of 
initial employment, job title, etc.), the employer shall assure that personal 
identifiers are removed before access is provided. If the employer can 
demonstrate that removal of personal identifiers from an analysis is not 
feasible, access to the personally identifiable porfions of the analysis 
need not be provided. 

(3) Division of OccupaUonal Safety and Health Access. 

(A) Each employer shall, upon request, and without derogation of any 
rights under the Consfitudon of the United States, the Constitution of the 
State of California or the California Occupational Safety and Health Act 
of 1973, Labor Code sections 6300 et seq., that the employer chooses to 
exercise, assure the prompt access of representatives of the Chief of the 
Division of OccupaUonal Safety and Health (DOSH) to employee expo- 
sure and medical records and to analyses using exposure or medical re- 
cords. 

(B) Whenever DOSH seeks access to personally identifiable em- 
ployee medical information by presenting to the employer a written ac- 
cess order, the employer shall prominently post a copy of the written ac- 
cess order and its accompanying cover letter for at least fifteen (15) 
working days. 

(f) Trade Secrets. 

(1) Except as provided in section 3204(f)(2), nothing in this section 
precludes an employer from deleting from records requested by a health 
professional, an employee or designated representative any trade secret 
data which discloses manufacturing processes, or discloses the percent- 
age of a chemical substance in a mixture, as long as the health profession- 
al, employee or designated representative is notified that such informa- 
tion has been deleted. Whenever deletion of trade secret information 
substantially impairs evaluation of the place where or the time when ex- 
posure to a toxic substance or harmful physical agent occurred, the em- 
ployer shall provide alternative information which is sufficient to permit 
the requesting party to identify where and when exposure occurred. 

(2) The employer may withhold the specific chemical identity, includ- 
ing the chemical name and other specific identification of a toxic sub- 
stance from a disclosable record provided that: 

(A) Evidence is included to support the claim that the information 
withheld is a trade secret; 

(B) All other available information on the properties and effects of the 
toxic substance is disclosed; 



(C) The employer informs the requesting party that the specific chemi- 
cal identity is being withheld as a trade secrete; and 

(D) The specific chemical identity is made available to health profes- 
sionals,employees and designated representatives in accordance with the 
specific applicable provisions of this subsection, section 3204(f). 

(3) Where a treating physician or nurse determines that a medical 
emergency exists and the specific chemical identity of a toxic substance 
is necessary for emergency or first-aid treatment, the employer shall im- 
mediately disclose the specific chemical identity of a trade secret chemi- 
cal to the treating physician or nurse, regardless of the existence of a w rit- 
ten statement of need or a confidentiality agreement. The employer may 
require a written statement of need and confidentiality agreement, in ac- 
cordance with the provisions of section 3204(0(4) and (f)(5). as soon as 
circumstances permit. 

(4) In non-emergency situations, an employer shall, upon request, dis- 
close a specific chemical identity, otherwise permitted to be withheld un- 
der section 3204(f)(2), to a health professional, employee, or designated 
representative if: 

(A) The request is in writing; 

(B) The request describes Vv'ith reasonable detail one or more of the fol- 
lowing occupational health needs for the information: 

1. To assess the hazards of the chemicals to which employees will be 
exposed; 

2. To conduct or assess samphng of the workplace atmosphere to de- 
termine employee exposure levds; 

3. To conduct pre-assignment or periodic medical surveillance of ex- 
posed employees; 

4. To provide medical treatment to exposed employees; 

5. To select or assess appropriate personal protective equipment for 
exposed employees; 

6. To design or assess engineering controls or other protective mea- 
sures for exposed employees; and 

7. To conduct studies to determine the health effects of exposure. 

(C) The request explains in detail why the disclosure of the specific 
chemical identity is essential and that in lieu thereof, the disclosure of the 
following information would not enable the health professional, em- 
ployee or designated representative to provide the occupational health 
services described in section 3204(0(4)(B): 

1 . The properties and effects of the chemical; 

2. Measures for controlling worker's exposure to the chemical; 

3. Methods of monitoring and analyzing worker's exposure to the 
chemical; and 

4. Methods of diagnosing and treating harmful exposures to the chemi- 
cal. 

(D) The request includes a description of the procedures to be used to 
maintain the confidentiality of the disclosed information; and 

(E) The health professional, employee or designated representative 
iind the employer or contractor of the services of the health professional 
or designated representative agree in a written confidentiality agreement 
that the health professional, employee or designated representative will 
not use the trade secret information for any purpose other than the health 
needs(s) asserted and agree not to release the information under any cir- 
cumstances other than to DOSH, as provided in section 3204(f)(9), ex- 
cept as authorized by the terms of the agreement or by the employer. 

(5) The confidentiality agreement authorized by sectitm 
3204(f)(4)(D): 

(A) May restrict the use of the information to the health purposes indi- 
cated in the written statement of need; 

(B) May provide for appropriate legal remedies in the event of a breach 
of the agreement, including stipulation of a reasonable pre-estimate of 
likely damages; and 

(C) May not include requirements for the posting of a penalty bond. 

(6) Nothing in this section is meant to preclude the parties from pursu- 
ing non-contractual remedies to the extent permitted by law. 



Page 537 



Register 91, No. 8; 2-22-91 



§ 3204 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



(7) If the health professional, employee or designated representative 
receiving the trade secret information decides that there is a need to dis- 
close it to DOSH, the employer who provided the information shall be 
informed by the health professional prior to. or at the same time as, such 
disclosure. 

(8) If the employer denies a written request for disclosure of a specific 
chemical identity, the denial must: 

(A) Be provided to the health professional, employee or designated 
representative within thirty days of the request: 

(B) Be in writing; 

(C) Include evidence to support the claim that the specific chemical 
identity is a trade secret; 

(D) State the specific reasons why the request is being denied; and 

(E) Explain in detail how alternative information may satisfy the spe- 
cific medical or occupational health need without revealing the specific 
chemical identity. 

(9) The health professional, employee or designated representative 
whose request for information is denied under section 3204(0(4) may re- 
fer the request and the written denial of the request to DOSH for consider- 
ation. 

(10) When a health professional, employee or designated representa- 
tive refers a denial to DOSH under section 3204(f)(9), DOSH shall con- 
sider the evidence to determine if: 

(A) The employer has supported the claim that the specific chemical 
identity is a trade secret; 

(B) The health professional, employee or designated representative 
has supported the claim that there is a medical or occupational health 
need for the information; and 

(C) The health professional, employee or designated representative 
has demonstrated adequate means to protect the confidentiality. 

( 11 ) ( A) If DOSH determines that the specific chemical identity re- 
quested under section 3204(f)(4) is not a bona fide trade secret, or that 
it is a trade secret but the requesting health professional, employee or des- 
ignated representative has a legitimate medical or occupational health 
need for the information and has executed a written confidentiality agree- 
ment with adequate means for complying with the terms of such agree- 
ment, the employer will be subject to citation by DOSH. 

(B) If an employer demonstrates to DOSH that the execution of a con- 
fidentiality agreement would not provide sufficient protection against 
the potential harm from the unauthorized disclosure of a specific chemi- 
cal identity trade secret, the Chief of DOSH may issue such orders or im- 
pose such additional limitations or conditions upon the disclosure of the 
requested chemical information as may be appropriate to assure that the 
occupational health needs are met without an undue risk of harm to the 
employer. 

(12) Notwithstanding the existence of a trade secret claim, and em- 
ployer shall, upon request, disclose to the Chief of DOSH any informa- 
tion which this section requires the employer to make available. Where 
there is a trade secret claim, such claim shall be made no later than at the 
time the information is provided to the Chief of DOSH so that dutiable 
determinations of trade secret status can be made and the necessary pro- 
tection can be implemented. 

(13) Nothing in this section shall be construed as requiring the disclo- 
sure under any circumstances of process or percentage of mixture infor- 
mation which is a trade secret. 

(g) Employee Information. 

(1) Upon an employee's first entering into employment, and at least 
annually thereafter, each employer shall inform current employees cov- 
ered by this section of the following: 

(A) The existence, location, and availability of any records covered by 
this section; 

(B) The person responsible for maintaining and providing access to re- 
cords; and 

(C) Each employee's rights of access to these records. 



(2) Each employer shall keep a copy of this section and its appendices 
and make copies readily available, upon request, to employees. The em- 
ployer shall also distribute to current employees any informational mate- 
rials concerning this section which are made available to the employer 
by the Chief of DOSH. 

(h) Transfer of Records. 

( 1 ) Whenever an employer is ceasing to do business, the employer 
shall transfer all records subject to this section to the successor employer. 
The successor employer shall receive and maintain these records. 

(2) Whenever an employer is ceasing to do business and there is no 
successor employer to receive and maintain the records subject to this 
standard, the employer shall notify affected employees of their rights of 
access to records at least three (3) months prior to the cessation of the em- 
ployer's business. 

(3) Whenever an employer either is ceasing to do business and there 
is no successor employer to receive and maintain the records, or intends 
to dispose of any records required to be preserved for at least thirty (30) 
years, the employer shall: 

(A) Transfer the records to the Director of the National Institute for 
Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) if so required by a specific oc- 
cupational safety and health standard; or 

(B) Notify the Director of NIOSH in writing of the impending disposal 
of records at least three (3) months prior to the disposal of the records. 

(4) Where an employer regularly disposes of records required to be 
preserved for at least thirty (30) years, the employer may, with at least 
three (3) month's notice, notify the Director of NIOSH on an annual basis 
of the records intended to be disposed of in the coming year. 

(i) Appendices. The information contained in the appendices to this 
section is not intended, by itself, to create any additional obligations not 
otherwise imposed by this section or to detract from any existing obliga- 
tion. 

Appendix A 

Sample Authorization Letter for the Release of Employee Medical Re- 
cord Information to a Designated Representative 

I, , (full name of 

worker/patient) hereby authorize (individual or or- 
ganization holding the medical records) to release to 

(individual or organization authorized to receive the medical informa- 
tion), the following medical information from my personal medical re- 
cords: 

(Describe generally the information desired to be released.) 

I give my permission for this medical information to be used for the 

following purpose: , but I do not give permission for 

any other use or re-disclosure of this information. 

(NOTE. — You may want to place additional restrictions on this autho- 
rization letter. For example, you may want to (1) specify a particular ex- 
piration date for this letter (if less than one year); (2) describe medical in- 
formation to be created in the future that you intend to be covered by this 
authorization letter;or (3) describe portions of the medical information 
in your records which you do not intend to be released as a result of this 
letter.) [Your right of access to a specific written consent form submitted 
to your employer is provided by section 3204(e)(1)(D).] 

Full name of Employee or Legal Representative 

Signature of Employee or Legal Representative 

Date of Signature 

Appendix B 

Availability of NIOSH Registry of Toxic Effects of Chemical Sub- 
stances (RTECS) 

Section 3204 applies to all employee exposure and medical records, 
and analyses thereof, of employees exposed to toxic substances or harm- 
ful physical agents [subsection (b)(2)]. The term"toxic substance or 
harmful physical agent" is defined by section 3204(c)(13) to encompass 
chemical substances, biological agents, and physical stresses for which 



• 



Page 538 



Register 91, No. 8; 2-22-91 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3206 



• 



there is evidence of harmful health effects. The regulation uses the latest 
printed edition of the National Institute for Occupational Safety and 
Health (NIOSH) Registry of Toxic Effects of Chemical Substances 
(RTECS) as one of the chief sources of information as to whether evi- 
dence of harmful health effects exists. If a substance is listed in the latest 
printed RTECS, the regulation applies to exposure and medical records 
(and analyses of these records) relevant to employees exposed to the sub- 
stance. 

It is appropriate to note that the regulation does not require that em- 
ployers purchase a copy of RTECS; and many employers need not con- 
sult RTECS to ascertain whether their employee exposure or medical re- 
cords are subject to the regulation. Employers who do not currently have 
the latest printed edition of the NIOSH RTECS, however, may desire to 
obtain a copy. The RTECS is issued in an annual printed edition as man- 
dated by section 20(a)(6) of the Occupational Safety and Health Act [29 
U.S.C. 669(a)(6)]. 

The Introduction to the 1980 printed edition describes the RTECS as 
follows: 

"The 1980 edition of the Registry of Toxic Effects of Chemical Sub- 
stances, formerly known as the Toxic Substances list, is the ninth revision 
prepared in compliance with the requirements of section 20(a)(6) of the 
Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (Public Law 91-596). The 
original list was completed on June 28, 1971 , and has been updated annu- 
ally in book format. Beginning in October 1977, quarterly revisions have 
been provided in microfiche. This edition of the Registry contains 
168,096 listings of chemical substances: 45,156 are names of different 
chemicals with their associated toxicity data and 1 22,940 are synonyms. 
This edition includes approximately 5,900 new chemical compounds 
that did not appear in the 1979 Registry." (p. xi) 

"The Registry's purposes are many, and it serves a variety of users. It 
is a single source document for basic toxicity information and for other 
data, such as chemical identifiers and information necessary for the prep- 
aration of safety directives and hazard evaluations for chemical sub- 
stances. The various types of toxic effects linked to literature citations 
provide researchers and occupational health scientists with an introduc- 
tion to the toxicological literature, making their own review of the toxic 
hazards of a given substance easier. By presenting data on the lowest re- 
ported doses that produce effects by several routes of entry in various 
species, the Registry furnishes valuable information to those responsible 
for preparing safety data sheets for chemical substances in the workplace. 
Chemical and production engineers can use the Registry to identify the 
hazards which may be associated with chemical intermediates in the de- 
velopment of final products, and thus can more readily select substitutes 
or alternate processes which may be less hazardous. Some organizations, 
including health agencies and chemical companies, have included the 
NIOSH Registry accession numbers with the listing of chemicals in their 
files to reference toxicity information associated with those chemicals. 
By including foreign language chemical names, a start has been made to- 
ward providing rapid identification of substances produced in other 
countries." (p. xi) 

"In this edition of the Registry, the editors intend to identify 'all known 
toxic substances' which may exist in the environment and to provide per- 
tinent data on the toxic effects from known doses entering an organism 
by any route described." (p. xi) 

"It must be reemphasized that the entry of a substance in the Registry 
does not automatically mean that it must be avoided. A listing does mean, 
however, that the substance has the documented potential of being harm- 
ful if misused, and care must be exercised to prevent tragic conse- 
quences. Thus, the Registry lists many substances that are common in ev- 
eryday life and are in nearly every household in the United States. One 
can name a variety of such dangerous substances: prescription and non- 
prescription drugs; food additives; pesticide concentrates, sprays, and 
dusts; fungicides; herbicides; paints; glazes, dyes; bleaches and other 



household cleaning agents; alkalies; and various solvents and diluents. 
llie list is extensive because chemicals have become an integral part of 
our existence." (p. xiv) 

The RTECS printed edition may be purchased from the Superinten- 
dent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office (GPO), Washing- 
ton, D.C. 20402 (202-783-3238). 

Some employers may also desire to subscribe to the quarteriy update 
to the RTECS which is published in a microfiche edition. An annual sub- 
scripfion to the quarterly microfiche may be purchased from the CjPO 
(Order the "Microfiche Edition, Registry of Toxic Effects of Chemical 
Substances"). Both the printed edition and the microfiche edition of 
RTECS are available for review at many university and public libraries 
throughout the country. The latest RTECS editions may also be ex- 
amined at the OSHA Technical Data Center. Room N2439— Rear. 
United States Department of Labor, 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W., 
Washington, D.C. 20210 (202-523-9700), or at any OSHA Regional or 
Area Office (See, major city telephone directories under United Stales 
Government — Labor Department). 

Note: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

L New section (including Appendices A and B) filed 3-20-81; effective thirtieth 
day thereafter (Register 81 , No. 12). For prior history, see Registers 74, No. 43; 
72, No. 23; 72, No. 19; and 72, No. 6. 

2. Amendment of subsection (d)(1)(B) fded 12-23-81; effective thirtieth day 
thereafter (Register 81, No. 52). 

3. Editorial correction of subsection (e)(3) filed 12-23-81; effective upon filing 
(Register 81, No. 52). 

4. Amendment filed 6-18-90; operative 7-18-90 (Register 90. No. 33). 

§ 3205. "Shall" and "Should." 

History 
1 . Repealer filed 1 0-25-74; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 74. No. 43). 

§ 3206. Approvals. 

(a) Approvals. 

(1 ) When the term "approved" is used in these orders, it shall refer to 
products, materials, devices, systems, or installations that have been ap- 
proved, listed, labeled, or cerfified as conforming to applicable govern- 
mental or other nadonally recognized standards, or applicable scientific 
principles. The approval, listing, labeling, or certificafion of conformity, 
shall be based upon an evaluafion performed by a person, firm, or entity 
vv'ith appropriate registered engineering competence or by a person, firm, 
or enfity, independent of the manufacturer or supplier of the product, with 
demonstrated competence in the field of such evaluafion. 
Exception: Where written approval by the Division is required in these orders. 

(2) The term "approved" shall also refer to products, materials, de- 
vices, systems, or installations that have been approved, listed, labeled, 
or certified by a Nadonally Recognized Tesfing Laboratory (NRTL). 

(b) The division may require proof in addifion to that under (a) that the 
products, materials, devices, systems, or installations will provide rea- 
sonable safety under the condifions of use. 

(c) When these orders require an approval of products, materials, de- 
vices, systems, or installafions and that approval is not available under 
(a), it will be necessary to submit to the division engineering calculations, 
stress analyses, and other data for each design, model, or make for which 
an approval is requested. The division will then approve or disapprove 
the product, material, device, system, or installaUon as submitted or un- 
der specified condifions. 

(Title 24, Part 2, Secfion 2-1 10.) 
Note: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3. La- 
bor Code; and Section 18943(c), Health and Safety Code. 

History 

1. Repealer and new section filed 10-25-74; effective thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register 74, No. 43). For history of former section, see Regi-ster 72, No. 23. 

2. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 



Page 539 



Register 2000, No. 31; 8-4-2000 



§3207 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



3. Repealer and new section filed 10-18-79; effective thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register79, No. 42). 

4. Amendment filed 5-25-83; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 83, No. 
22). Approved by State Building Standaids Commission 1-24-83. 

5. Amendment of subsection (a) filed 2-15-90; operative 3-17-90 (Register 90, 

No. 8). 



Group 1. 



General Physical Conditions and 
Structures 



Article 1. Definitions 

§ 3207. Definitions. 

(a) Tlie following terms are defined for general use in these regula- 
tions; specialized definitions appear in individual articles. (See Defini- 
tions in the Index) 

Access. A means of reaching a work space of a work area. 

Accessible. Within reach from a work space or work area. 

Accessible Location. A location which can be reached by an employee 
standing on the floor, platform, runway, or other permanent working 
area. 

(Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-402.) 

Adequate. Sufficient to reduce the risk to an acceptable minimum. 

Agricultural Building. A building located on agricultural property and 
used to shelter farm implements, hay, grain, poultry, livestock, or other 
farm produce, in which there is no human habitation, and which is not 
used by the public. 

Alternating Tread Stairs. A stair on which the treads are approximately 
one-half the width of the stair and alternate from right to left, consecu- 
Uvely, for the length of the stair. 

ANSI. American National Standards Institute. 

(Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-402.) 

Approvals. See Section 3206. 

Assembly Building. A building or portion of a building: 

(A) Used or intended to be used for the gathering together of 50 or 
more persons for such purposes of amusement, entertainment, instruc- 
tion, deliberation, worship, drinking, or dining, awaiting transportation 
or education, or; 

(Title 24, Part 2, Section 402.) 

(B) Any building or structure or portion thereof used or intended to be 
used for the showing of motion pictures when an admission fee is charged 
and when such buildings or structure is open to the public and has a ca- 
pacity of 10 or more persons. 

Attic Story. Any story immediately below the roof and wholly or part- 
ly within the roof framing, designed, arranged, or built for business or 
storage use. 

(Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-402.) 

Authorized (in reference to an employee's assignment). Selected by 
the employer for that purpose. 

Balcony, Exterior Exit. A landing or porch projecting from the wall of 
a building, and which serves as a required means of egress. The long side 
shall be at least 50 percent open, and the open area above the guardrail 
shall be so distributed as to prevent the accumulation of smoke or toxic 
gases. 

Basement. That portion of a building between floor and ceiling, which 
is partly below and partly above grade but so located that the vertical dis- 
tance from grade to the floor below is less than the vertical distance from 
grade to ceiling. (See "Story.") 

(Title 24, Part 2, Section 403.) 

Bite. The nip point between two in-running rolls. 

Boiler, High Pressure. A boiler furnishing steam at pressures in excess 
of 15 pounds per square inch or hot water at temperatures in excess of 
250° F, or at pressures in excess of 1 60 pounds per square inch. 

(Title 24, Part 2, Section 403.) 



Boiler, Low Pressure Hot Water. A boiler furnishing hot water at pres- 
sures not exceeding 160 pounds per square inch, or at temperatures of 
250 degrees and below. 

(Title 24. Part 2, Section 403.) 

Boiler, Low Pressure Steam. A boiler furnishing steam at or below 1 5 
pounds per square inch. 

(Title 24, Part 2, Section 403.) 

Boiler Room. Any room containing a steam or hot water boiler. 

(Title 24, Part 2, Section 403.) 

Bond. An electrical connection from one conductive element to anoth- 
er for the purpose of minimizing potential differences or providing suit- 
able conductivity for fault current or for mitigation of leakage current and 
electrolytic action. 

Building. Any structure as to which state agencies have regulatory 
power, built for support, shelter, housing or enclosure of persons, ani- 
mals, chattels, equipment, or property of any kind, and also includes 
structures wherein things may be grown, made, produced, kept, handled, 
stored, or disposed of All appendages, accessories, apparatus, 
appliances, and equipment installed as a part of a building or structure 
shall be deemed to be a part thereof, but "building" shall not include ma- 
chinery, equipment, or appliances installed for manufacture or process 
purposes only, nor shall it include any construction installations which 
are not a part of a building, any tunnel, mine shaft, highway, or bridge, 
or include any house trailer or vehicle which conforms to the Vehicle 
Code. 

Building, Existing. See Section 3202. 

CAC. California Administrative Code. 

Calendar. A machine equipped with two or more metal rolls revolving 
in opposite directions and used for continuously sheedng or plying up 
rubber and plastics compounds and for frictioning or coaUng materials 
with rubber and plastics compounds. 

Catwalk (Maintenance Runway). Narrow elevated level or inclined 
walkway not intended as a routine passageway, but normally used as ac- 
cess for special purposes such as light maintenance, adjustment, inspec- 
tion, or observation. 

(Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-3301 (c).) 

Cellar. That portion of a building between floor and ceiling which is 
wholly or partly below grade and so located that the vertical distance 
from grade to the floor below is equal to or greater than the vertical dis- 
tance from grade to ceiling. (See "Story.") 

Court. An open, uncovered and unoccupied space, unobstructed to the 
sky, bounded on three or more sides by exterior building walls. 

(Title 24, Part 2, Section 404.) 

Court (enclosed). A court bounded on all sides by the exterior walls 
of a building or exterior walls and lot lines on which walls are allowable. 

(Title 24, Part 2, Section 404.) 

Crossover. A means to allow employees to pass over or cross a hori- 
zontal belted or live roller conveyor without the employee' s feet coming 
into contact with moving or movable elements of the conveyor. Such 
means shall include, but are not limited to, catwalks as specified in Sec- 
tion 3273 of these Orders, non-continuous, slip resistant (e.g. raised dia- 
mond-studded) metal "stepping stones" (e.g. "walking pads"), or replac- 
ing conveyor rollers with continuous parallel metal strip walking 
surfaces ("crosswalks"). 

Dead Load. The dead load of a building shall include the weight of the 
walls, permanent partitions, framing, floors, roofs, and all other perma- 
nent stationary construction entering into and becoming a part of a build- 
ing. 

Division. The Division of Occupational Safety and Health. 

Dockboard (Dock Plate). A portable or fixed device for spanning the 
gap or compensating for difference in level between loading platforms 
and carriers. 

Doors. 

(A) Automatic-Closing Doors are those which are normally open but 
will close at the time of fire. A door may be made automatic closing by 
the installation of a closing device and a separate, labeled, fail-safe door- 



Page 540 



Register 2000, No. 31; 8-4-2000 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3207 



holder/release device or a hold-open mechanism which may be an inte- 
gral part of the basic closing device, provided the hold-open mechanism 
is released by one or a combination of automatic fire detectors acceptable 
to the authority having jurisdiction. 

(B) Power-Operated Fire Doors are those which are normally opened 
and closed by power. They shall be equipped with a releasing device 
which will automatically disconnect the power operator at the time of 
fire, allowing a self-closing or automatic device to close the door irre- 
spective of power failure or manual operation. 

(C) Self-Closing Doors are those which, when opened, return to the 
closed position. The door shall swing easily and freely and shall be 
equipped with a closing device to cause the door to close and latch each 
time it is opened. The closing mechanism shall not have a hold-open fea- 
ture. 

Emergency Action Plan. A plan for a workplace, or parts thereof, de- 
scribing what procedures the employer and employees must take to en- 
sure employee safety from fire or other emergencies. 

Emergency Escape Route. The route that employees are directed to 
follow in the event they are required to evacuate the workplace or seek 
a designated refuge area. 

Equivalent. An alternate design, feature, device, or protective action 
which provides an equal degree of safety. 

Exit. A continuous and unobstructed means of egress to a public way, 
and shall include intervening doors, doorways, corridors, exterior exit 
balconies, ramps, stairways, smokeproof enclosures, horizontal exits, 
exit passageways, exit courts, and yards. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 
3301(c).) 

Exit Passageway. An enclosed means of egress connecting a required 
exit or exit court with a public way. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 3301(c).) 

Fire Wall. A fire wall may be broadly defined as a wall erected to pre- 
vent the spread of fire. To be effective, fire walls must have sufficient fire 
resistance to withstand the effects of the most severe fire that may be ex- 
pected to occur in the building and must provide a complete barrier to the 
spread of fire. Any openings in a fire wall must be suitably protected. 

Floor Area. The area included within the surrounding exterior walls of 
a building or portion thereof, exclusive of vent shafts and courts. The 
floor area of a building, or portion thereof, not provided with surrounding 
exterior walls shall be the usable area under the horizontal projection of 
the roof or floor above. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 407.) 

Floor Hole. Any opening in a floor or platform which is smaller than 
a floor opening. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-407.) 

Roor Opening. An opening in any floor or platform, 1 2 inches or more 
in the least horizontal dimension. It includes stairway floor openings, 
ladderway floor openings, hatchways, and chute floor openings. (Title 
24, Part 2, Section 2-407.) 

Flume. An elevated artificial channel or trough for conducting water. 
Water flumes may be constructed of wood, metal or concrete or combina- 
tion of the preceding. They may be either open on top or partially covered 
by rigid members (caps) laid across the flume perpendicular to the water 
flow. 

Flume Patrol. The on-site assessment/inspection of a flume's physical 
condition, and/or structural integrity conducted by a qualified person. 
The qualified person may inspect the flume or portions thereof from 
ground level, and/or from an elevated catwalk/walkway located above or 
along the flume. 

Frequent. For the purpose of these orders frequent shall mean more 
than twelve times each year unless specifically stated otherwise in indi- 
vidual orders. 

Fumigant. A substance or mixture of substances, used to kill pests or 
prevent infestafion, which is a gas or is rapidly or progressively trans- 
formed to the gaseous state, even though some nongaseous or particulate 
matter may remain and be dispersed in the treatment space. 

Gantry Truck. An automotive vehicle so designed and constructed that 
it straddles the load to be transported, and by means of appropriate mech- 
anisms, picks up the load and supports it during transportation. 



Grade (Adjacent Ground Elevation). The lowest point of elevation of 
the finished surface of the ground, paving or sidewalk, within the area be- 
tween the building and the property line, or when the property line is 
more than 5 feet from the building, between the building and a line 5 feet 
from the building. (Title 24. Part 2, Section 408.) 

Grounded, Effectively. Intentionally connected to earth through a 
ground connection or connections of sufficiently low impedance and 
having sufficient current-carrying capacity to prevent the build-up of 
voltages which may result in undue hazard to connected equipment or 
persons. 

Guardrail. A verfical barrier erected along the open edges of a floor 
opening, wall opening, ramp, platform, runway, or other elevated area to 
prevent falls of persons. (Title 24, Part 2. Section 2-408.) 

Handrail. A device to be used as a handhold. (Title 24. Part 2. Section 
2-3301 (c).) 

Hazard, Extra. Areas where the amount of combustibles or flammable 
liquids present is such that fires of severe magnitude may be expected. 
These may include woodworking, auto repair, aircraft servicing, ware- 
houses with high-piled (over 15 feet in solid piles, over 12 feet in piles 
that contain horizontal channels) combustibles and processes such as 
flammable liquid handling, painting, dipping, etc. 

Hazard, High. Areas where the contents are classified as liable to bum 
with extreme rapidity or from which poisonous fumes or explosions are 
to be feared in the event of fire. 

Hazard, Light. Areas where the amount of combustibles or flammable 
liquids present is such that fires of small size may be expected. These may 
include offices, schoolrooms, churches, assembly halls, telephone ex- 
changes, etc. 

Hazard, Low. Areas where the contents are classified as being of such 
low combustibility that no self propagafing fire therein can occur and that 
consequently the only probable danger requiring the use of emergency 
exits will be from panic, fumes, or smoke, or fire from some external 
source. 

Hazard, Ordinary. Where the amount of combustibles or flammable 
liquids present is such that fires of moderate size may be expected. These 
may include mercantile storage and display, auto showrooms, parking 
garages, light manufacturing, warehouses not classified as extra hazard, 
school shop areas, etc. 

Hazardous Substance. One which by reason of being explosive, flam- 
mable, toxic, poisonous, corrosive, oxidizing, irritant, or otherwise 
harmful is likely to cause injury. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 2^09.) 

Horizontal Exit. A way of passage from one building to an area of ref- 
uge in another building on approximately the same level, or a way of pas- 
sage through or around a wall or partition to an area of refuge on approxi- 
mately the same level in the same building, which affords safety from fire 
or smoke from the area of escape and areas communicating therewith. 

Inaccessible Location. A location to v/hich access is provided only by 
portable ladders or other portable temporary means. 

Industrial Stairs. A series of steps leading from one level or floor to 
another, or leading to platforms, pits, boiler rooms, crossovers, or around 
machinery, tanks, and other equipment A series of steps and landings 
having three or more risers constitutes an industrial stair or stairway. 
(Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-330 1(c).) 

Installation. An entire plant with all its accessories or any machine, 
tool, equipment, process, apparatus, subject or item covered under these 
orders. 

Institutional Occupancy. The occupancy or use of a building or struc- 
ture or any portion thereof by persons harbored or detained to receive 
medical, charitable or other care or treatment, or by persons involuntarily 
detained. 

Landing. An extended step or platform breaking a continuous run of 
steps or ramps. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-3301.) 

Listed. See Section 3206, Approvals. 

Live Load. The live load includes all loads except dead and lateral 
loads. 



Page 541 



Register 2000, No. 31; 8-4-2000 



§3207 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



Loading Ramp. A readily moveable or portable surface of fixed or ad- 
justable slope designed to facilitate transfer of cargo or materials handl- 
ing equipment to bridge the space between a vehicle and a receiving level 
or area. 

Mercantile Occupancy. The occupancy or use of a building or struc- 
ture or any portion thereof for the displaying, selling or buying of goods, 
wares, or merchandise. 

Mezzanine or Mezzanine Floor. An intermediate floor placed in any 
story or room. When the total area of any such "Mezzanine Floor" ex- 
ceeds 33 1/3 percent of the total floor area in that room, it shall be consid- 
ered as constituting an additional "Story." The clear height above or be- 
low a "Mezzanine Floor" construction shall be not less than 7 feet. 

Mill. A machine consisting of two adjacent metal rolls, set horizontal- 
ly, which revolve in opposite directions (i.e., toward each other as viewed 
from above) used for the mechanical working of aibber and plastics com- 
pounds. 

Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). A laboratory 
which has been recognized by the Department of Labor. Occupational 
Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) as meeting the requirements 
of29CFR 1910.7. 

New Installation. 

(A) An installation made after these Orders become effective. 

(B) An existing fixed installation materially altered or otherwise mate- 
rially changed after the date these Orders become effective. Materially 
altered or materially changed as used above does not mean the replace- 
ment of parts, maintenance, or the installation of devices designed to de- 
crease the hazard of installation. 

Noncombustible as applied to building construction material means a 
material which, in the form in which it is used, is either one of the follow- 
ing: 

1 . Material of which no part will ignite and bum when subjected to fire. 
Any material conforming to U.B.C. Standard No. 4-1 shall be considered 
noncombustible within the meaning of this section. 

2. Material having a structural base of noncombustible material as de- 
fined in Item No. 1 above, with a surfacing material not over 1/8 inch 
thick which has a flame-spread rating of 50 or less. 

"Noncombustible" does not apply to surface finish materials. Material 
required to be noncombustible for reduced clearances to flues, heating 
appliances or other sources of high temperature shall refer to material 
conforming to Item No. 1. No material shall be classed as noncombus- 
tible which is subject to increase in combustibility or flame-spread rat- 
ing, beyond the limits herein established, through the effects of age, 
moisture or other atmospheric condition. 

Flame-spread rating as used herein refers to rating obtained according 
to tests conducted as specified in U.B.C. Standard No. 42-1. 

(Title 24, Part 2, Section 415.) 

Nose, Nosing. That portion of a tread projecting beyond the face of the 
riser immediately below. (Title 24, Part 2, Secfion 2-330 1(c).) 

Occupancy. The purpose for which a building is used or intended to 
be used. The term shall also include the building or room housing such 
use. Change of occupancy is not intended to include change of tenants or 
proprietors. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 416.) 

Office Occupancy. The occupancy or use of a building or structure or 
any portion thereof for the transacfion of business, or the rendering or re- 
ceiving of professional services. 

Occupant Load. The total number of persons that may occupy a build- 
ing or portion thereof at any one time. (Title 24, Part 2, Secfion 3301(c).) 

Open Riser. The air space between the treads of stairways without up- 
right members (risers). (Title 24, Part 2, Secfion 2-3301.) 

Panic Hardware. A bar which extends not less than one-half the width 
of each door leaf, not less than 30 nor more than 44 inches above the fl oor, 
which will unlatch the door when a force to the bar not to exceed 15 
poimds is applied in the direction of exit travel. (Tifie 24, Part 2, Secfion 
3301(c).) 

Personal Fall Arrest System. A system used to arrest an employee in 
a fall from a working level. It consists of an anchorage, connectors, body 



harness and may include a lanyard, decelerafion device, Hfeline, or suit- 
able combinations of the aforementioned components/devices. 

Personal Fall Protecfion System. A personal fall protecfion system in- 
cludes personal fall arrest systems, posifioning device systems, fall re- 
straint systems, safety nets and guardrails. 

Personal Fall Restraint System. A system used to prevent an employee 
from falling. It consists of an anchorage, connectors, and body belt/har- 
ness. It may include, lanyards, lifelines, and rope grabs designed for that 
purpose. 

Platform. An elevated working level for persons. Storage platforms, 
balconies and open-sided floors are considered platforms for the purpose 
of these orders. 

Posifioning Device System. A body belt or body harness system 
rigged to allow an employee to be supported on an elevated surface, such 
as a wall, and work with both hands free while leaning. 

Private Stairway. A stairway serving one tenant only. 

Public Way. Any parcel of land unobstructed from the ground to the 
sky, more than 10 feet in width, appropriated to the free passage of the 
general public. 

Pyroxylin Plastic. Any plastic substance, material, compound, other 
than nitro-cellulose film, having soluble cotton or similar nitro-cellulose 
as a base, including celluloid, fiber-loid, pyralin. viscoloid, zylonite and 
similar products, materials and compounds by whatever name known, 
when in the form of blocks, slabs, sheets, tubes or fabricated shapes. 
(Tifie 24, Part 2, Secfion 2-417.) 

Qualified Person, Attendant or Operator. A person designated by the 
employer who by reason of his training and experience has demonstrated 
his ability to safely perform his dufies and, where required, is properly 
licensed in accordance with federal, state, or local laws and regulations. 

Ramp. Inclined passageway connecfing two levels and usually used 
for pedestrian traffic; does not include catwalks or stairs. 

Ramp, Industrial. Permanenfiy installed inclined passageway con- 
necfing two levels and designed primarily for industrial trucks; does not 
include portable ramps, dockboards, dock levelers, or catwalks. (Tifie 
24, Part 2, Section 2-3301 (c).) 

Required Exit. A means of egress required by these orders. 

Rise. The verfical distance from the top of a tread to the top of the next 
higher tread. (Title 24, Part 2, Secfion 2-3 30 1(c).) 

Riser. The upright member of a step situated at the back of a lower 
tread and near the leading edge of the next higher tread. 

Rope Access. The use of rope access equipment where ropes are used 
as the primary means of support, as a means of protection or posifioning, 
and where an employee descends or ascends on a rope, or traverses along 
a rope. 

Rope Access Equipment. Specialized equipment approved for use 
with rope access techniques to suspend, support, posifion or protect an 
employee. 

Runway. An elevated passageway. Runways are somefimes referred 
to as catwalks, footwalks, elevated walkways, oilers' platforms or main- 
tenance runways. (Title 24, Part 2, Secfion 2-3301 (c).) 

Shall. A mandatory requirement. 

Shear Point. The immediate area where two or more machine elements 
pass in close contact, creating a shearing action hazardous to employees. 
The elements may be in any form of mofion, or one may be at rest. 

Ship Stair (Ships Ladder). A fixed ladder within the pitch range of 50 
to 75 degrees with the horizontal, equipped with treads and stair rails. 
(Tifie 24, Part 2, Section 2-3301 (c).) 

Should. A recommendation. 

Skirt Guard. In relation to vertical closing shear hazards a vertical 
member which prohibits entry of human body parts within the vertical 
plane of the shear zone. 

Spiral stairway (Circular Stairway.) One with closed circular form, 
uniform sector-shaped treads and a supporting column. 



Page 542 



Register 2000, No. 31; 8-4-2000 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3209 



• 



Stair Railing. A vertical barrier constructed along the open side or 
sides of stairways and as intermediate stair rails where required on wide 
stairways. (Title 24, Part 2. Section 2-3301 (c).) 

Stairway. Two or more risers shall constitute a stairway. (Title 24, Part 
2, Section 420.) 

Storage Access Aisle. An aisle, from which pedestrian traffic is ex- 
cluded during truck operation, designed for the passage of a single indus- 
trial truck. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-240.) 

Story. That portion of a building included between the upper surface 
of any floor and the upper surface of the floor next above, except that the 
topmost story shall be that portion of a building included between the up- 
per surface of the topmost floor and the ceiling or roof above. If the fin- 
ished floor level direcUy above a basement, cellar or unused underfloor 
space is more than 6 feet above grade as defined herein for more than 50 
percent of the total perimeter or is more than 12 feet above grade as de- 
fined herein at any point, such basement, cellar or unused underfloor 
space shall be considered as a story. (Tide 24, Part 2. Section 420.) 

Stmcture. That which is built or constructed, an edifice or building of 
any kind, or any piece of work artificially built up or composed of parts 
joined together in some definite manner. 

Suitable. Capable of performing with safety the parficular function 
specified in these regulafion. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-240.) 

Toeboard. A vertical barrier erected along the open edges of floor 
openings or floor holes, platforms, and runways. (Title 24, Part 2, Secfion 
2-241.) 

Toe Plate (deflector type). In relafion to vertical closing shear hazards 
a smooth metal plate not less than 8 inches wide and not less than 1 1 gauge 
thickness, attached flush with the verfical edge of the upper member of 
the shear, slanted downward and inward at an angle of approximately 30 
degrees from the vertical. 

Traffic Aisle. An aisle used by industrial vehicles and pedestrians dur- 
ing normal operations. (Tide 24, Part 2, Secfion 2-330 1(c).) 

Tread. The horizontal member of a step. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 
2-3301 (c).) 

Tread Depth. The horizontal distance from front to back of tread in- 
cluding nosing when used. (Title 24, Part 2, Secfion 2-3301(c).) 

Tread Run. The horizontal distance from the leading edge of a tread 
to the leading edge of an adjacent tread. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 
2-3301 (c).) 

Wall Opening. An opening in a wall or partition not provided with 
glazed sash, having a height of at least 30 inches and a width of at least 
1 8 inches, through which a person might fall to a level 30 inches or more 
below. 

Water Heater. An appliance intended to provide hot water for domes- 
tic purposes and complying with all of the following: 

(A) The heater does not have more than 120-gallon capacity. 

(B) The heater is used only for heating service water. 

(C) The operating control on all automatically controlled heaters is in- 
stalled by the manufacturer and is of a type that cannot be regulated to 
increase the water temperature at the top of the heater to more than 
200O F. 

(D) A non-adjustable control is installed on all automatically con- 
trolled heaters by the manufacturer and set to shut off the heat input when 
the temperature at the top of the heater is 210° F or less. This control and 
the necessary fuel valve, switch, etc., shall be separate from the operating 
mechanisms required in (C) above. 

(E) The heater is protected against over-pressure with an ASME or 
AGA rated relief valve set to open at not more than the maximum allow- 
able working pressure of the heater and having a relieving capacity in 
BTU/hr at least equal to the burner output. (Tide 24, Part 2, Section 424.) 

Working Level or Working Area. A platform, walkway, runway, floor 
or similar area fixed with reference to the hazard and used by employees 
in the course of their employment. This does not include ladders or porta- 
ble or temporary means used for access, repair or maintenance, provided 
such means are removed immediately upon completion of the work. 

(Tide 24, Part 2, Section 424.) 



Yard. An open, unoccupied space, other than a court, unobstructed 
from the ground to the sky. 

(Tide 24, Part 2, Section 426.) 

Yard Hole. An opening in a yard or pavement smaller than a yard 
opening. 

Yard Opening. An opening in a yard or pavement, 12 inches or more 
in the least horizontal dimension. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3. La- 
bor Code; and Section 18943(b), Health and Safety Code. 

History 

1. Amendment of subsection (a) filed 6-3-85; effective thirtieth da\ thereafter 
(Register 85, No. 23). For prior history, sec Register 84, No. .SO. 

2. Amendment filed 9-24-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Keeister 85. No. 
39). 

3. Amendment filed 4-25-86; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 86. No. 
17). 

4. Amendment filed 2-15-90; operative 3-17-90 (Register 90, No. 8). 

5. New definitions added in alphabetical order to subsection (a) for "Flume" and 
"Flume Patrol" and amendment of NoTi-: filed 6-7-96; operative 7-7-96 (Reg- 
ister 96, No. 23). 

6. Amendment adding new definitions for "Personal Fall Arrest System," "Per- 
sonal Fall Protection System," " 'Personal Fall Restraint Sy.stem" and " Position- 
ing Device System" filed 10-4-99; operative 1 1-3-99 (Register 99, No. 41 ). 

7. Amendment adding new definition for "Crossover" filed 2-17-2000; operative 
3-18-2000 (Register 2000, No. 7). 

8. New definitions of "Rope Access" and "Rope Access Kquipment" filed 
8^-2000; operative 9-3-2000 (Register 2000, No. 31). 



Article 2. Standard Specifications 

§ 3209. Standard Guardrails. 

Wherever guardrail protecfion is required, the following standards 
shall be adhered to except that other types and arrangements of guardrail 
construction will be acceptable where the height, surface and end projec- 
tion of the top rail complies with the standard specifications and the clo- 
sure of the vertical area between the top rail and floor, platform, runway, 
or ramp provides protection at least equivalent to that afforded by a mid- 
rail. 

(a) A standard guardrail shall consist of top rail, midrail or equivalent 
protection, and posts, and shall have a vertical height within the range of 
42 inches to 45 inches from the upper surface of the top rail to the floor, 
platform, runway, or ramp level. (Note: the permissible tolerance on 
height dimensions is one inch). The top rail shall be smooth-surfaced 
throughout the length of the railing. The midrail shall be approximately 
halfway between the top rail and the floor, platform, runway, or ramp. 
The ends of the rails shall not overhang the terminal posts, except where 
such overhang does not constitute a projection hazard. (Title 24, Part 2, 
Section 2-1 7 16(a).) 

Note: Local building regulations may require 9-inch spacing of midrails. 

(b) All guardrails and other permissible types, including their connec- 
tions and anchorage, shall be designed for a live load of 20 pounds per 
linear foot applied either horizontally or vertically downward at the top 
rail. Dimensional details of railing members of a few types of construc- 
tion which comply with this strength requirement are given hereinafter 
in subsection (c). 

Note: It is recognized that the minimum value of railing strength here specified 
is inadequate for safety under operating conditions where railings are liable to re- 
ceive heavy stresses from crowds, trucking, handling materials, etc. For such con- 
ditions, additional strength shall be provided by use of heavier stock, closer spac- 
ing of posts, bracing, or otherwise. 

Railing members shall be framed in such a position that they will af- 
ford the greatest support and protection, for example, top rails of structur- 
al steel angles shall have the outside face of vertical leg located on the 
side adjacent to the side of normal contact by the employee. (Title 24, Port 
2, Section 2-1 7 16(b).) 

(c) The following are some acceptable guardrail specifications: other 
combinations will be accepted as long as equivalent strength and protec- 
tion are maintained. 

( 1 ) In wooden construction, the posts to be of at least 2-inch by 4-inch 
nominal material spaced not to exceed 6 feet, the top rails to be smooth 
with comers rounded and not less than 2-inch by 4-inch nominal materi- 



Page 543 



Register 2004, No. 50; 12-10-2004 



§3210 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



al. The posts may be spaced on 8-foot centers if the top rails consist of 
double 1-inch by 4-inch nominal boards, provided that 1 board is fas- 
tened in a flat position on top of the posts and the other is fastened in an 
edge-up position to the inside of the posts and the side of the top board. 
Single midrails, where permitted, shall he not less than 2-inch by 4-inch 
nominal material and installed on the contact side of the guardrail. 

(2) If constRicted of standard metal pipe, the top rails and single mi- 
drail, where permitted, to be 1 1/2-inch outside diameter or larger. The 
posts to be 1 1/2-inch outside diameter or larger, the spacing not to ex- 
ceed 8 feet. 

(3) If constructed of structural metal, the top rails to be angle iron of 
at least 2-inch by 2-inch by 1/4-inch angles or other metal shapes of 
equivalent bending strength; and the single midrail, where permitted, to 
be iron or steel of at least 2-inch by 2-inch by 1/4-inch angles or other 
metal shapes of equivalent strength. The posts to be angle iron of at least 
2-inch by 2-inch by 1/4— inch stock, the spacing not to exceed 8 feet. 

Figure 
SOME ACCEPTABLE INDUSTRIAL 



(Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-1716(c).) 

(d) Where toeboards are required, they shall be constructed of wood, 
concrete, metal, or other suitable material. Where constnicted of metal 
grille, mesh shall not exceed 1-inch. The top of the toeboard shall be not 
less than 3 1/2 inches above the platform, walkway, or other working lev- 
el and the bottom clearance shall not exceed 1/4-inch. 

Note: Where materials are piled, higher toeboards, or paneling from floor to in- 
termediate rails or top rail shall be provided where neeessary for safety. (Title 24, 
Part 2, Section 2-1753.) 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code; and Section 18943(c), Health and Safety Code. 

History 

1 . Amendment of subsection (c)( I ) filed I-l 8-78; effective thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register 78. No. 3). For prior histoiy, see Register 77, No. 41 . 

2. Repealer of NOTE in subsection (c)(4) filed 1-23-81; effective thirtieth day 
thereafter (Register 81, No. 4). 

3. Amendment filed 5-25-83; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 83, No. 
22). Approved by Slate Building Standards Commission 1-24-83. 

SG-I 

GUARDRAILS AND TOEBOARDS 



WOOD 



42 to 45" 




Posts and Rails 

2" X 4" Dressed Material 

MIDRAIL 

POSTS AND RAILS 
1 1/2" OUTSIDE ~ 
>\ DIAMETER PIPE 

42 to 45 



PIPE 



between posts 




8 FT. MAXIMUM 
BETWEEN POSTS 



STRUCTURAL 
STEEL 



42 to 45" 




POSTS AND RAILS 

2" X 2 " X 1/4" angles 



8 FT. MAXIMUM 
BETWEEN POSTS 




Toeboard for all rails 

Not less than 3 1/2 inches high 



1/4" max. gap 



Note: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3,La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . Renumbered from Figure IG-1 and amendment filed 9-3-76; effective thirtieth 
day thereafter (Register 76, No. 36). 

2. Renumbered from Figure G-1 and amendment filed 1 0-5-77; effective thirtieth 
day thereafter (Register 77, No. 41). 

3. New NOTE filed 5-25-83; effecdve thirtieth day thereafter (Register 83, No. 
22). 

§ 3210. Guardrails at Elevated Locations. 

(a) Buildings. Guardrails shall be provided on all open sides of unen- 
closed elevated work locations, such as: roof openings, open and glazed 
sides of landings, balconies or porches, platforms, runways, ramps, or 
working levels more than 30 inches above the floor, ground, or other 
working areas of a building as defined in Section 3207 of the General In- 
dustry Safety Orders. Where overhead clearance prohibits installation of 
a 42-inch guardrail, a lower rail or rails shall be installed. The railing 
shall be provided with a toeboard where the platform, runway, or ramp 
is 6 feet or more above places where employees normally work or pass 
and the lack of a toeboard could create a hazard from falling tools, materi- 
al, or equipment. 

EXCEPTIONS: 

1. Runways used exclusively for oiling, adjusting or otherwise maintaining shaft- 
ing or other machinery may have the guardrail on the side adjacent to the machin- 
ery omitted provided that additional guarding as required by Group 6 Power Trans- 



mission Equipment, Prime Movers, Machines and Machine Parts is complied 
with. 

2. Stationary elevated platforms secured to buildings or structures used exclusive- 
ly for the service and maintenance of overhead bridge cranes and similar mobile 
equipment may be equipped with removable railings in lieu of guardrails on the 
side adjacent to the machinery provided such railings are secured against falling 
when they are not serving as a protective railing. In existing installations where 
clearance prohibits railings on the outside of the platform, railings will be per- 
mitted on the building side to serve as handholds. 

3. Portions of loading or storage platforms which are used primarily for loading 
or unloading railroad cars or trucks, or at waterside edges used for cargo handling. 

4. Open-sided platforms or floors used for storage of lumber or other materials 
may be guarded with movable single rails, sliding panels, gates or other barriers 
provided they are of strength and design equivalent to guardrails. 

5. Open sides of storage platforms less than four feet wide, or portions thereof 
which are loaded and unloaded exclusively by means of stackers or lift trucks han- 
dling pallet supported loads. 

6. Glazed sides that are in compliance with Section 3242. 

7. Open hearth and hot metal pouring platforms. 

8. Platforms, runways, ramps, or other working levels less than 4 feet above floor, 
ground, or other working level constructed prior to January 1, 1967. 

9. Theatre galleries, balconies, or other such elevated seating locations, where a 
42-inch railing would obstruct the sight lines, may be protected by a guardrail or 
other barrier of not less than 34 inches in height provided that a horizontal concave 
safety ledge not less than 6 inches in depth and not less than 36 inches in effective 



Page 544 



Register 2004, No. 50; 12-10-2004 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3212 



width is installed beyond the railing at the balcony floor level. The safety ledge 
shall be designed to carry a live load of 100 pounds per square foot. 

10. On outside plaza, patio, and garden areas, alternate means of protection are ac- 
ceptable if the same degree of safety is provided. 

1 1 . Elevated locations used infrequently by employees if the employees using 
them are protected by a fall restraint/fall aiTest system used in accordance with the 
requirements in Article 24 of the Construction Safety Orders. 

1 2. On fire hose drying towers, the top rail may be omitted on the inboard or work- 
ing side of the platform if the hose drying fingers or hangers are spaced not more 
than 6 inches apart and extend the full length of the platform along the open or 
working side to within 6 inches of the end rails. The ends of the fingers or hangers 
shall be positioned at the same height as prescribed for the top rail and within 5 
inches from the vertical projection of the platform edge. 

1 3. On the auditorium side of a stage, raised platforms and other raised floor areas 
such as runways, ramps and side stages used for entertainment or presentation. At 
vertical openings in the performance area of stages. 

(b) Other Elevated Locations. The unprotected sides of elevated work 
locations that are not buildings or building structures where an employee 
is exposed to a fall of 4 feet or more shall be provided with guardrails. 
Where overhead clearance prohibits installation of a 42-inch guardrail, 
a lower rail or rails shall be installed. The railing shall be provided with 
a toeboard where the platform, runway, or ramp is 6 feet or more above 
places where employees normally work or pass and the lack of a toeboard 
could create a hazard from falling tools, material, or equipment. 
Exceptions; 

1 . Runways used exclusively for oiling, adjusting or otherwise maintaining shaft- 
ing or other machinery may have the guardrail on the side adjacent to the machin- 
ery omitted provided that additional guarding as required by Group 6-Power 
Transmission Equipment, Prime Movers, Machines and Machine Parts is com- 
plied with. 

2. Portions of loading or storage platforms which are placed or located next to rail- 
road cars or trucks and used primarily for loading or unloading railroad cars or 
trucks, or at waterside edges used for cargo handling. 

3. Open sides of storage platforms less than four feet wide, or portions thereof 
which are loaded and unloaded exclusively by means of stackers or lift trucks han- 
dling pallet supported loads. 

4. Portable platforms, portable or fixed workstands, where used in close quarters 
which would make the installation of guardrails impracticable, may be provided 
with removable or hinged railings which can be either removed or swung out of 
the way during such work. Toeboards may not be required on portable or fixed 
platforms where the nature of the work requires the employees to sit on the edge 
of the platform. 

5. Elevated locations used infrequently by employees if the employees using them 
are protected by a fall restraint/fall arrest system used in accordance with the re- 
quirements in Article 24 of the Construction Safety Orders. 

6. Flumes when they are accessed by an employee for the purpose of conducting 
a flume patrol (as defined in Section 3207), and provided the employer implements 
either written administrative procedures or provides alternative means which will 
control the hazard of an employee fall off the flume. 

7. Belt loaders or conveyors designed and used for access/egress to aircraft shall 
be equipped with at least one handrail that will furnish a handhold for anyone 
grasping it to avoid falUng. 

8. Working on or in aircraft wheel wells when the wheel well design does not per- 
mit the use of guardrails or other fall protection equipment/devices. 

9. On mobile vehicles/equipment, where the design or work processes make 
guardrails impracticable, the use of sufficient steps and attached handholds or 
structural members which allow the user to have a secure hand grasp shall be per- 
mitted. Work from the decks, permanent/stationary platforms, runways, or walk- 
ways of mobile vehicles/equipment shall be excluded from the requirements of 
subsection (b) where it can be shown that guardrails or handholds are impractica- 
ble by the design or work processes. 

(c) Where the guardrail requirements of subsections (a) and (b) are im- 
practicable due to machinery requirements or work processes, an alter- 
nate means of protecting employees from falling, such as personal fall 
protection systems, shall be used. 

(d) Openings in guardrails for ladderway access shall be protected as 
required by Section 3212(a)(2) of the General Industry Safety Orders. 
NOTE: Authority cited: SecUon 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . Renumbering and amendment of former Section 3210 to Section 3207 and new 
Section 32 10 filed 6-20-75; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 75, No. 
25). For history of former Section 3210, see Register 75, No. 10. 



2. Amendment filed 7-16-76: effecdve thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76. No. 
29). 

3. New subsection (a)(12) filed 10-5-77; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Regis- 
ter 77. No. 41). 

4. Amendment of subsection (a)(1), (a)(ll), (a)(12) and new (a)(13) filed 
7-26-78; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 78, No. 30). 

5. Amendment filed 5-25-83; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 83. No. 
2). Approved by State Building Standards Commission 1-24-83. 

6. Amendment filed 12-12-84; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 84, No. 
50). 

7. New subsection (a) 14. and amendment of NoTl-: filed 6-7-96; operative 7 7 96 
(Register96, No. 23). 

8. New subsecfion (a) 14, and amendment of subsection (b) and NoTi . filed 3- 4 97: 
operative 4-3-97 (Register 97, No. 10). 

9. Change without regulatory effect renumbering duplicate sub.section (a)14. to 
new subsection (a)15. filed 3-7-97 pursuant to section 100. title 1. Calilornia 
Code of Regulations (Register 97. No. 10). 

10. Amendment of secfion heading and section filed 5-20-99; operative 6 1 9 -99 
(Register99, No. 21). 

11. Editorial correction of subsection (b) (Register 99, No. 25). 

12. Amendment of subsection (a), new subsecfion (d) and amendment of Non-; 
filed 12-8-2004; operative 1-7-2005 (Register 2004, No. 50). 

§3211. Wall Openings. 

An opening in a wall or partition not provided with a glazed sash, hav- 
ing a height of at least 30 inches and a width of at least 1 8 inches, through 
which a person might fall to a level 30 inches or more below, shall be 
guarded by a guardrail or other barrier of such construction and mounting 
that the guardrail or barrier is capable of withstanding a force of at least 
200 pounds applied horizontally at any point on the near side of the guar- 
drail or barrier. Barriers may be of solid construction, grillwork with 
openings not more than 8 inches long, or of slatwork with openings not 
tnore than 4 inches wide with unrestricted length. (Title 24. Part 2. Sec- 
tion 2-1716.) 

Note: Authority cited: Section 142.3. Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code; and SecUon 18943(c), Health and Safety Code. 

History 

1. New secfion filed 6-20-75; effecfive thirtieth day thereafter (Register 75, No. 
25). 

2. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effecfive thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76. No. 
29). 

3. Amendment filed 5-25-83; effecfive thirtieth day thereafter (Register 83, No. 
22). Approved by State Building Standards Commission 1-24-83. 

§ 3212. Floor Openings, Floor Holes, Skylights and Roofs. 

(a)( 1 ) Every floor and roof opening shall be guarded by a cover, a guar- 
drail, or equivalent on all open sides. While the cover is not in place, the 
openings shall be constantly attended by someone or shall be protected 
by guardrails. Toeboards shall be installed around the edges at openings 
where persons may pass below the opening. 
Exception: Stairway entrances. 

(2)(A) Every ladderway floor opening or platform with access pro- 
vided by ladderway, including ship stairs (ship ladders), shall be pro- 
tected by guardrails with toeboards meeting the requirements of General 
Industry Safety Orders. Section 3209, on all exposed sides except at en- 
trance to the opening. The opening through the railing shall have either 
a swinging gate or equivalent protection, or the passageway to the open- 
ing shall be so offset that a person cannot walk directly into the opening. 
Exception: Ladder openings for entrance/access at perimeter roof edges where 
guardrail protecfion is not required by subsection (d) of this section. 

(B)l. The uppermost surface or railing member of the swinging gate 
or other equivalent protection required by subsection (a)(2)( A ) shall ha\ e 
a vertical height from the platform or floor level of between 42 to 45 in- 
ches plus or minus one inch and; 

2. The swinging gate or other equivalent protection shall be capable 
of withstanding a force of at least 200 pounds applied vertically down- 
ward to the uppermost surface or railing member and horizontally out- 
ward at any point on the exit side of the ladder opening. 

(3) Hatchways and chute floor openings shall be guarded by guardrails 
or by hinged or removable covers or by removable railings provided such 
covers or railings will afford protection equivalent to that provided by a 
guardrail. 

This does not apply to chute openings which are effectively covered 
or protected by machine or equipment during operation. However, such 



Page 545 



Register 2007, No. 49; 12-7-2007 



§3213 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



chule shall be covered during repair or maintenance or when otherwise 
exposing employees to the hazards of unguarded floor openings. 

(4) Foundry pits and similar sunken locations in which employees are 
required to work may be left unprotected during such times as the neces- 
sary handling of materials or other work prohibits the use of guardrails 
or equivalent; but when such pits are not in use they shall be either cov- 
ered, filled in, or protected with guardrails or equivalent. 

(5) Floor holes through which materials or tools may fall and create a 
hazard or through which parts of a person's body may contact dangerous 
moving parts, shall be completely covered except when in use unless 
these floor holes are used to feed machines or receptacles containing hot, 
toxic or corrosive materials, then these openings shall be guarded by hop- 
pers, guardrails, or grates having openings not exceeding 1-inch by 5 in- 
ches. Floor holes through which transmission equipment passes may be 
guarded by toeboards. 

(b) Floor and roof opening covers shall be designed by a qualified per- 
son and be capable of safely supporting the greater of 400 pounds or 
twice the weight of the employees, equipment and materials that may be 
imposed on any one square foot area of the cover at any time. Covers shall 
be secured in place to prevent accidental removal or displacement, and 
shall bear a pressure sensitized, painted, or stenciled sign with legible let- 
ters not less than one inch high, stating: "Opening — Do Not Remove." 
Markings of chalk or keel shall not be used. 

(c) Covers shall not project more than one inch above the floor level 
and all edges shall be chamfered to an angle with the horizontal of not 
over 30 degrees. All hinges, handles, bolts, or other parts shall set flush 
with the floor or cover surface. (Title 24, part 2, section 2-1 721(c).) 

(d)( 1 ) Guardrails as specified in section 3209 shall be required at loca- 
tions where there is a routine need for any employee to approach within 
6 feet of the edge of the roof. When intermittent work is being done safety 
bells and lanyards, or an approved fall protection system may be pro- 
vided in lieu of guardrails. 

For the purpose of this requirement, routine need means more than 
four times a year and intermittent work means work not exceeding four 
times a year. 

(2) Guardrails required by subsection (d)(1) shall be provided along 
the roof edge extending at least 6 feet beyond the areas occupied by per- 
sons accessing, servicing or repairing permanently-mounted machinery 
and/or equipment. 

(3) Where fall protection systems are used, safety lines and/or lanyards 
shall be attached to roof tie-backs meeting the requirements of section 
3291 (f) or equivalent anchorage. A safe and unobstructed access shall be 
provided to all roof tie-back locations. (TiUe 24, part 2. section 171 1(h).) 

(e) Any employee approaching within 6 feet of any skylight shall be 
protected from falling through the skylight or skylight opening by any 
one of the following methods: 

(1) Skylight screens. The design, construction, and installation of sky- 
light screens shall meet the strength requirements equivalent to that of 
covers specified in subsection (b) above. They shall also be of such de- 
sign, construction and mounting that under design loads or impacts, they 
will not deflect downward sufficienfly to break the glass below them. The 
construction shall be of grillwork, with openings not more than 4 inches 
by 4 inches or of slatwork with openings not more than 2 inches wide with 
length unrestricted, or of other material of equal strength and similar con- 
figuration, or 

(2) Guardrails meeting the requirements of Section 3209, or 

(3) The use of a personal fall protection system meeting the require- 
ments of Section 1670 of the Construction Safety Orders, or 

(4) Covers meeting the requirements of subsection (b) installed over 
the skylights, or 

(5) A fall protection plan as prescribed in Section 1671.1 of the 
Constmction Safety Orders when it can be demonstrated that the use of 
fall protection methods as contained in subsections (e)(l-4) of this Sec- 
tion is impractical or creates a greater hazard. 

EXCEPTION: When the work is of short duration and limited exposure such as mea- 
suring, roof inspection, electrical/mechanical equipment inspection, etc., and the 



time involved in rigging and installing the safety devices required in subsections 
(e)(1) through (e)(4) equal or exceed the performance of the designated tasks of 
measuring, roof inspection, electrical/mechanical equipment inspection, etc.; 
these provisions may be temporarily suspended provided that adequate risk con- 
trol is recognized and maintained. 

(f) Access shall not be permitted on glazed surfaces such as roofs, 
vaults, canopies, or skylights glazed with transparent or translucent ma- 
terials unless an engineer currenfly registered in the State of California 
and experienced in the design of such glazed structures has certified that 
the surface will support all anticipated loads. Employees working on 
such surfaces shall be protected by a fall protection system meeting the 
requirements of Section 1670 of the Construction Safety Orders. 

(g) When glazed surfaces cannot be safely accessed for maintenance 

in accordance with subsection (f), scaffolds, catwalks, rolling ladders, 

platforms or other methods of safe access shall be provided. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . Repealer and new section filed 6-20-75 ; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Reg- 
ister 75, No. 25). 

2. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76. No. 
29). 

3. Amendment filed 5-25-83; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 83, No. 
22). Approved by State Building Standards Commission 1-24-83. 

4. Amendment filed 7-8-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
28). 

5. Amendment of subsection (d) filed 7-1-91: operative 7-31-91 (Register 91, 
No. 40). 

6. Change without regulatory effect amending subsection (d)(3) filed 4-19-93 
pursuant to secfion 1 00, title 1 , Cahfornia Code of Regulations (Register 93, No. 
16). 

7. Designation and amendment of subsection (e)(1) and new subsections 
(e)(2)-(2)(C) ExcKPTiON filed 10-7-93; operative 11-8-93 (Register 93, No. 
41). 

8. Amendment of section heading and section filed 7-7-2004; operative 
8-6-2004 (Register 2004, No. 28). 

9. Amendment of subsection (a)(1), new subsections (a)(2)(A)-(a)(2)(B)2., sub- 
section renumbering and amendment of newly designated subsections 
(a)(4)-(5) filed 12-8-2004; operadve 1-7-2005 (Register 2004, No. 50). 

§ 3213. Service Pits and Yard Surface Openings. 

(a) Unused portions of service pits and pits not in actual use shall be 
either covered or protected by guardrails, this may be accomplished by 
moveable posts or stanchions and chain rails or other guardrails which 
will provide equivalent protection. 

EXCEPTION: Inspection, transfer and service pits used exclusively for mainte- 
nance of rolling railroad stock where impracticable to install guardrails or equiva- 
lent. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-1 7 16(f).) 

(b) Permanent yard surface openings such as pits or sumps shall be 
guarded as required by 3212, Floor Openings, Floor Holes and Roofs. 
(Tifle 24, Part 2, Section 2-1 7 16(f).) 

(c) Trench or conduit covers and their supports, when located in plant 
roadways, shall be designed to carry a truck rear-axle load of at least 
20,000 pounds. 

(d) Manhole covers and their supports, when located in plant road- 
ways, shall comply with local standard highway requirements if any; 
otherwise, they shall be designed to carry a truck rear-axle load of at least 
20,000 pounds. 

Note: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . Repealer and new section filed 6-20-75; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Reg- 
ister 75, No. 25). 

2. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 

3. Amendment filed 5-25-83; effecfive thirtieth day thereafter (Register 83, No. 
22). Approved by State Building Standards Commission 1-24-83. 

4. New subsections (c) and (d) filed 7-8-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Reg- 
ister 85, No. 28). 

§ 3214. Stair Railings and Handrails. 

(a) Stairways shall have handrails or stair railings on each side, and ev- 
ery stairway required to be more than 88 inches in width shall be provided 
with not less than one intermediate stair railing for each 88 inches of re- 



Page 546 



Register 2007, No. 49; 12-7-2007 



Titles 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3216 



quired width. Intermediate stair railings shall be spaced approximately 

equally within the entire width of the stairway. 

NOTi;: Intermediate stair railings may be of single rail construction. 

Exceptions-. 

(1) Stairways less than 44 inches in width may have one handrail or stair railing 
except that such stairways open on one or both sides shall have stair railings pro- 
vided on the open side or sides. 

(2) Stairways having less than four risers need not have handrails or stair railings. 

(3) Stairways giving access to portable work stands less than 30 inches high. 

(4) Stairs that follow the contour of tanks or other cylindrical or spherical struc- 
tures where the construction requires the inside clearance between the inside stair 
stringer and wall or tank side to he 8 inches or less, shall not be considered an "open 
side." 

(3) Guardrails may be erected provided a handrail is attached. 

(b) A stair railing shall be of construction similar to a guardrail (see 
Section 3209) but the vertical height shall be in compliance with Section 
32 14(c). Stair railings on open sides that are 30 inches or more above the 
surface below shall be equipped with midrails approximately one half 
way between the steps and the top rail. 

Note: Local building standards may require 4-inch spacing of intermediate verti- 
cal members. 

(c) The top of stair railings, handrails and handrail extensions installed 
on or after April 3, 1997, shall be at a vertical height between 34 and 38 
inches above the nosing of treads and landings. For stairs installed before 
April 3, 1997. this height shall be between 30 and 38 inches. Stair railings 
and handrails shall be continuous the full length of the stairs and, except 
for private stairways, at least one handrail or stair railing shall extend in 
the direction of the stair run not less than 12 inches beyond the top riser 
nor less than 12 inches beyond the bottom riser. Ends shall be returned 
or shall terminate in newel posts or safety terminals, or otherwise ar- 
ranged so as not to constitute a projection hazard. 

Exception; Handrails and stair railings on flights of stairs serving basements or 
cellars that are covered by a trap door, removable floor or grating when not in use, 
shall stop at the floor level or entrance level so as not to interfere with the cover 
in the closed position. 

(d) A handrail shall consist of a lengthwise member mounted directly 
on a wall or partition by means of brackets attached to the lower side of 
the handrail so as to offer no obstruction to a smooth surface along the 
top and both sides of the handrail. The handrail shall be designed to pro- 
vide a grasping surface to avoid the person using it from falling. The 
spacing of brackets shall not exceed 8 feet. 

(e) Handrails projecting from a wall shall have a space of not less than 
I 1/2 inches between the wall and the handrail. 

(f) The mounting of handrails shall be such that the completed struc- 
ture is capable of withstanding a load of at least 200 pounds applied in 
any direction at any point on the rail. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code; and Section 18943(b), Health and Safety Code. 

History 

1 . Repealer and new section filed 6-20-75; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Reg- 
ister 75, No. 25). For history of former section, see Register 72, No. 34. 

2. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 

3. Amendment of subsections (b) and (d) filed 5-10-77; effective thirtieth day 
thereafter (Register 77, No. 20). 

4. Amendment filed 5-25-83; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 83, No. 
22). Approved by State Building Standards Commission 1-24-83. 

5. Amendment of section and Note filed 3^4-97; operative 4-3-97 (Register 97, 
No. 10). 

6. Amendment filed 12-4-2007; operative 1-3-2008 (Register 2007, No. 49). 



§3215. Means of Egress. 

(a) These regulations contain general fundamental requirements es- 
sential to providing a safe means of egress from buildings in the event of 
fire and other emergencies. Nothing in these regulations shall be con- 
strued to prohibit a better type of building construction, more exits, or 
otherwise safer conditions than the minimum requirements specified in 
these regulations. 



(b) Exits from vehicles, vessels, or other mobile structures are not cov- 
ered under these regulations except when in fixed locations and occupied 
as buildings. 

(c) In every building or structure of such size, arrangement, or occu- 
pancy that a fire may not itself provide adequate warning to occupants, 
fire alarm facilities or procedures, including an evacuation plan, shall be 
provided where necessary to warn occupants of the existence of fire so 
that they may escape or to facilitate the orderly conduct of fire exit drills. 

(d) Any device or alarm installed to restrict the u.se of an exit shall be 
so designed and installed that it cannot, even in cases of failure, impede 
or prevent emergency use of such exit. 

(Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-3301.) 

(e) Whenever the building is occupied, exit paths shall be lighted so 
that they may be easily recognized and all exit and directional signs shall 
be clearly visible. 

Artificial lighting sufficient to enable objects to be seen and egress 
made under emergency conditions shall be provided when natural light- 
ing is inadequate. 

(Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-33 12(a).) 

(f) No building or structure under construction shall be occupied in 
whole or in part until all exit facilities required for the part occupied are 
completed and ready for use. 

(g) No existing building shall he occupied during repairs or alterations 
unless all existing exits and any existing fire protection, or equivalent ex- 
its and fire protection is provided and maintained. 

NOTE; Authority cited: SecUon 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code; and Section 18943(c), Health and Safety Code. 

History 

1 . Repealer and new section filed 6-20-75; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Reg- 
ister 75, No. 25). 

2. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76. No. 
29). 

3. Amendment filed 5-25-83; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 83, No. 
22). Approved by State Building Standards Commission 1-24-83. 

§3216. Exit Signs. 

(a) Luminance. Exit and directional signs shall have a luminance on 
tlie face of such signs of not less than 50 lux. The words used on such signs 
shall be in block letters at least 6 inches in height with a stroke of not less 
than 3/4 inch. Exception: Existing signs may have the word "EXIT" in 
lettering not less than 5 inches high with principal strokes of letters of not 
less than 1/2 inch. Letters shall be of such color or design as to be in strong 
contrast to the background of the sign. Arrows or other directional sym- 
bols shall be of equal visibility to that stipulated herein for letters. 

(b) Location. Exit or directional signs, or both, shall be provided at ev- 
ery exit door, at the intersection of corridors, at exit stairways or ramps 
and at such other locations and intervals as are necessary to provide the 
occupants with knowledge of the various means of egress available. Exit 
or directional signs need not be provided for the following: 

(1) Any room or building having an occupant load of 50 or less; 

(2) Dwellings units in Group R, Division 1 Occupancies; 

(3) When approved, the main exterior exit doors obviously and clearly 
identifiable as exits. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-33 12(c)(3).) 

(c) Electrically Illuminated Signs. Exit and exit directional signs 
which are required to be electrically illuminated shall be lighted with two 
electric lamps, either one of which shall be sufficient to provide the re- 
quired luminance on the face of the sign. NOTE: Radioactiv e isotope self 
powered signs with a luminance of not less than 0.02 lamberts during its 
useful life will be acceptable. 

(Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-33 12(c)(2).) 

NOTE; Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code; and Section 18943(c), Health and Safety Code. 

History 

1 . Repealer and new section filed 6-20-75; effective thirtieth day thereafter ( Reg- 
ister 75, No. 25). 

2. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 

3. Amendment filed 5-25-83; effecfive thirtieth day thereafter (Register 83, No. 
22). Approved by State Building Standards Commission 1-24-83. 



Page 547 



Register 2007, No. 49; 12-7-2007 



§3217 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



§ 3217. Decorative Materials. 

(a) All drapes, hangings, curtains, drops, and all other similar material, 
including Christmas trees, located in corridors, stairways, lobbies, 
ramps, passageways and balconies used as required exits that would tend 
to increase the fire and panic hazard shall be made from a non-flammable 
material, or shall be treated and maintained in a flame-retardant condi- 
tion by means of a flame-retardant solution or process approved by the 
State Fire Marshal, as set forth in Subchapter 8, Chapter 1 . Title 19, CAC. 

(b) Exit lights, fire alarm sending stations, wet standpipe hose cabi- 
nets, and fire extinguisher locations shall not be concealed by any decora- 
tive material. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-3301(o).) 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code; and Section 18943(c), Health and Safety Code. 

History 

1 . Repealer and new section filed 6-20-73; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Reg- 
ister 75, No. 25). 

2. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Reaister 76, No. 
29). 

3. Amendment filed 5-25-83; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 83, No. 
22). Approved by State Building Standards Conunission 1-24-83. 

§ 3218. Exits: Group E Occupancies. 

History 

1 . Repealer filed 6-20-75; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 75, No. 25). 

§ 3219. Maintenance of Fire Protection Equipment, 
Materials and Assemblies. 

All fire protection equipment, materials and assemblies, where re- 
quired, shall be maintained in proper operating condition, and such peri- 
odic inspections and tests shall be made as are necessary to assure this. 
Note: For further guidance see Title 1 9, Article 6, Section 574. 1 et seq., Califor- 
nia Code of Regulations. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code; and Section 18943(c), Health and Safety Code. 

History 

1 . Repealer and new section filed 6-20-75; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Reg- 
ister 75, No. 25). 

2. Amendment filed 9-7-78; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 78, No. 
36). 

3. Amendment of section heading and section and new Note filed 8-1 7-98; opera- 
tive 9-16-98 (Register 98, No. 34). 

§ 3220. Emergency Action Plan. 

(a) Scope and Application. This section applies to all emergency ac- 
tion plans. The emergency action plan shall be in writing, except as pro- 
vided in the last sentence of subsection (e)(3) of this section, and shall 
cover those designated actions employers and employees must take to 
ensure employee safety from fire and other emergencies. 

(b) Elements. The following elements, at a minimum, shall be in- 
cluded in the plan: 

( 1 ) Emergency escape procedures and emergency escape route assign- 
ments; 

(2) Procedures to be followed by employees who remain to operate 
critical plant operations before they evacuate; 

(3) Procedures to account for all employees after emergency evacua- 
tion has been completed; 

(4) Rescue and medical duties for those employees who are to perform 
them; 

(5) The preferred means of reporting fires and other emergencies; and 

(6) Names or regular job titles of persons or departments who can be 
contacted for further information or explanation of duties under the plan. 

(c) Alarm System. 

(1) The employer shall establish an employee alarm system which 
complies with Article 165. 

(2) If the employee alarm system is used for alerting fire brigade mem- 
bers, or for other purposes, a distinctive signal for each purpose shall be 
used. 

(d) Evacuation. The employer shall establish in the emergency action 
plan the types of evacuation to be used in emergency circumstances. 

(e) Training. 



(1) Before implementing the emergency action plan, the employer 
shall designate and train a sufficient nuinber of persons to assist in the 
safe and orderly einergency evacuation of employees. 

(2) The employer shall advise each employee of his/her responsibility 
under the plan at the following times: 

(A) Initially when the plan is developed, 

(B) Whenever the employee's responsibilities or designated actions 
under the plan change, and 

(C) Whenever the plan is changed. 

(3) The employer shall review with each employee upon initial assign- 
ment those parts of the plan which the employee must know to protect the 
employee in the event of an emergency. The written plan shall be kept 
at the workplace and made available for employee review. For those em- 
ployers with 1 or fewer employees the plan may be communicated oral- 
ly to einployees and the employer need not maintain a written plan. 
NOTE: Authority and reference cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. 

History 

1. New section filed 9-8-81; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 81, No. 

37). 

§ 3221. Fire Prevention Plan. 

(a) Scope and Application. This section applies to all fire prevention 
plans. The fire prevention plan shall be in writing, except as provided in 
the last sentence of subsection (d)(2) of this section. 

(b) Elements. The following elements, at a minimum, shall be in- 
cluded in the fire prevention plan: 

(1 ) Potential fire hazards and their proper handling and storage proce- 
dures, potential ignition sources (such as welding, smoking and others) 
and their control procedures, and the type of fire protection equipment 
or systems which can control a fire involving them; 

(2) Names or regular job titles of those responsible for maintenance of 
equipment and systems installed to prevent or control ignitions or fires; 
and 

(3) Names or regular job titles of those responsible for the control of 
accumulation of flammable or combustible waste materials. 

(c) Housekeeping. The employer shall control accumulations of flam- 
mable and combustible waste materials and residues so that they do not 
contribute to a fire emergency. The housekeeping procedures shall be in- 
cluded in the written fire prevention plan. 

(d) Training. 

( 1 ) The employer shall apprise employees of the fire hazards of the ma- 
terials and processes to which they are exposed. 

(2) The employer shall review with each employee upon initial assign- 
ment those parts of the fire prevention plan which the employee must 
know to protect the employee in the event of an emergency. The written 
plan shall be kept in the workplace and made available for employee re- 
view. For those employers with 10 or fewer employees, the plan may be 
communicated orally to employees and the employer need not maintain 
a written plan. 

(e) Maintenance. The employer shall regularly and properly maintain, 
according to established procedures, equipment and systems installed in 
the workplace to prevent accidental ignition of combustible materials. 
NOTE: Authority and reference cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. 

History 

1. New section filed 9-8-81; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 81, No. 

37). For prior history, see Registers 77, No. 20; 76, No. 29; and 75, No. 25. 

§ 3222. Arrangement and Distance to Exits. 

(a) Arrangement of Exits. If only two exits are required, they shall be 
placed a distance apart equal to not less than one-half the length of the 
maximum overall diagonal dimension of the building or area to be served 
measured in a straight line between exits. 

Exception; Where exit enclosures are provided as the required means of egress 
and are interconnected by a corridor conforming to the requirements of Section 
3326, exit separations may be measured in a direct line of travel within the exit cor- 
ridor. Enclosure walls shall be not less than 30 feet apart at any point in a direct 
line of measurement. Where three or more exits are required, they shall be ar- 
ranged a reasonable distance apart so that if one becomes blocked the others will 
be available. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 3302(c).) 

(b) Distance to Exits. The maximum distance of travel from any point 
to an exterior exit door, horizontal exit, exit passageway or an enclosed 



• 



• 



Page 548 



Register 2007, No. 49; 12-7-2007 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§ 3226 



stairway in a building not equipped witii an automatic sprinkler system 
throughout shall not exceed 150 feet or 200 feet in a building equipped 
with an automatic sprinkler system throughout. These distances may be 
increased 100 feet when the last 150 feet is within a corridor complying 
with Section 3226. 

EXCEPTION: Every area used mainly for the storage of materials liable to bum, 
with extreme rapidity or from which poisonous fumes or explosions will result 
upon exposure to fire, shall have an exit within 75 feet of any point in the area 
where employees may be present. Where automatic sprinkler protection is pro- 
vided, distances may be increased to 100 feet. (Title 24, Pail 2, Section 2-3302(d) 
Exception 1.) 

In a one-story Group B, Division 4 Occupancy classified as a factory 
or warehouse and in one-story airplane hangers, the exit travel distances 
may be increased to 400 feet if the building is equipped with an automatic 
sprinkler system throughout and provided with smoke and heat ventila- 
tion as specified in Section 3206 of the 1979 Uniform Building Code. 

In an open parking garage, the exit travel distance may be increased 
to 250 feet. 

(Title 24, Part 2, Section 3302(d).) 
NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code; and Section 18943(c), Health and Safety Code. 

History 

1 . New section filed 6-20-75; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 75, No. 
25). 

2. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effecfive thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 

3. Amendment filed 5-25-83; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 83, No. 
22). Approved by State Building Standards Commission 1-24-83. 

4. Change without regulatory effect amending subsection (b) filed 3-4-92 pur- 
suant to section 100, fitle 1, Cahfornia Code of Regulations (Register 92, No. 
12). 

§ 3223. Changes in Elevation. 

Within a building, changes in elevation of less than 1 2 inches along 
any exit serving a tributary occupant load of 1 or more shall be by ramps. 
(Title 24, Part 2, Section 3301 (k).) 

NOTE: Authority cited: Secfion 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Secuon 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. New section filed 6-20-75; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 75, No. 
25). 

2. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 

3. Amendment filed 12-23-77; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 77, No. 
52). 

4. Amendment filed 5-26-83; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 83, No. 
22). Approved by State Building Standards Commission 1-24-83. 

§ 3224. Headroom. 

Exits shall be so designed and maintained as to provide adequate head- 
room, but in no case shall the ceiling height nor any projection from the 
ceiling be less than 7 feet from the floor, except doorways (See Section 
3235) and stairways (See Section 3231). (Title 24, Part 2, Section 
3304(c).) 

Note: Authority cited: Secfion 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. New section filed 6-20-75; effecfive thirtieth day thereafter (Register 75, No. 
25). 

2. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effecfive thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 

3. Amendment filed 5-26-83; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 83, No. 
22). Approved by State Building Standards Commission 1-24-83. 

§ 3225. Maintenance and Access to Exits. 

(a) Exits shall be so located and arranged that they are readily accessi- 
ble at all times. 

( 1 ) Every required exit shall be maintained free of all obstructions or 
impediments to full instant use in the case of fire or other emergency. 

(2) Where exits are not immediately accessible from an open floor 
area, safe and continuous passageways, aisles, or corridors leading di- 
rectly to every exit and so arranged as to provide convenient access for 
each occupant to at least two exits by separate ways of travel shall be 
maintained, except as a single exit or limited dead ends are permitted by 
other provisions of these regulations. 



(b) Exits from a room may open into an adjoining or intervening room 
or area, providing such adjoining room is accessory to the area served and 
provides a direct means of egress to an exit corridor, exit passageway, 
exit stairway, exterior exit, horizontal exit, or exterior exit balcony. 
Exception: Exits are not to pass through kitchens, storerooms, reslroonis, closets 
or spaces used for similar purposes. Foyers, lobbies, and reception rooms ct)n- 
structed as required for corridors shall not be construed as intervening rooms. 

(Title 24, Part 2, Section 3302(e).). 

Exits will not pass through any room subject to locking. (Title 24, Part 2. Sec- 
tion 2-3302(e).) 

(c) No hangings or draperies shall be placed over exit doors or other- 
wise so located as to conceal or obscure any exit. No mirrors shall be 
placed on exit doors. No mirrors shall be placed in or adjacent to any exit 
in such a manner as to confuse the direction of exit. (Title 24, Part 2, Sec- 
tion 2-3302(i).) 

(d) Exits shall be so arranged that it will not be necessary to travel to- 
ward any area of high hazard occupancy in order to reach the nearest exit, 
unless the path of travel is effectively shielded from the high hazard loca- 
tion by suitable partitions or other physical barriers. (Title 24, Part 2, Sec- 
tion 2-3302(d).) 

NOTE; Authority cited: Secfion 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code; and Secfion 18943(c), Health and Safety Code. 

History 

1. New secfion filed 6-20-75; effecfive thirtieth day thereafter (Register 75, No. 
25). 

2. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 

3. Amendment filed 5-25-83; effecfive thirtieth day thereafter (Register 83, No. 
22). Approved by State Building Standards Coinmission 1-24-83. 

4. Amendment of section heading and section filed 8-17-98; operative 9-16-98 
(Register 98, No. 34). 

§ 3226. Corridors and Exterior Exit Balconies. 

(a) General. This section shall apply to every corridor serving as a re- 
quired exit for an occupant load of 10 or more. For the purposes of the 
secUon. the term "corridor" shall include "exterior exit balconies" and 
any covered or enclosed exit passageway, including walkways, tunnels 
and malls. Partitions, rails, counters and similar space dividers not over 
5 feet, 9 inches in height above the floor shall not be construed to form 
corridors. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 3304(a).) 

(b) Exit corridors shall be continuous until egress is provided from the 
building and shall not be interrupted by intervening rooms. 
EXCEPTION: Foyers, lobbies or reception rooms constructed as required for corri- 
dors shall not be construed as intervening rooms. 

(Title 24, Part 2. Section 3304(a).) 

(c) Height. Corridors and exterior exit balconies shall have a clear 
height of not less than 7 feet measured to the lowest projection from the 
ceiling. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 3304(c).) 

(d) Projections. The required width of corridors shall be unobstructed. 
EXCEPTION: Handrails and doors, v/hen fully opened, shall not reduce the re- 
quired width by more than 7 inches. Doors in any position shall not reduce the re- 
quired width by more than one-half. Other nonstructural projecfions such as trim 
and similar decorafive features may project into required width 1 1/2 inches on 
each side. 

(Tide 24, Part 2, Section 3304(d).) 

(e) Access to Exits. Exits shall be so arranged that it is possible to go 
in either direction from any point in a corridor to a separate exit, except 
for dead ends not exceeding 20 feet in length. This subsection shall apply 
to all occupancies regardless of occupant load. 

(Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-3304(e).) 

(f) Changes in Elevation. When a corridor or exterior exit balcony is 
accessible to an elevator, changes in elevation of the floor shall be made 
by means of a ramp. 

(Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-3304(f).) 

(g) Where accumulation of snow or ice is likely because of the climate, 
the exterior way of exit shall be protected by a roof, unless it serves as 
the sole normal means of access to the rooms or spaces served, in which 
case it may be assumed that snow and ice will be regularly removed in 
the course of normal occupancy. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-3304(i).) 

(h) Exterior ways of exit shall have smooth, solid floors, substantially 
level, and shall have guardrails on the unenclosed sides. 



Page 549 



Itegister 2008, No. 10; 3-7-2008 



§3227 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



(i) A permanent, reasonably straight path of travel shall be maintained 
over the required exterior way of exit. There shall be no obstruction by 
railings, barriers, or gates that divide the open space into sections appur- 
tenant to individual rooms, or other uses. Where the Division finds the 
required path of travel to be obstructed by furniture or other movable ob- 
jects, the division may require that they be fastened out of the way or the 
division may require that railings or other permanent barriers be installed 
to protect the path of travel against encroachment. 
NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3. La- 
bor Code; and Section 18943(c). Health and Safety Code. 

History 

1 . New section filed 6-20-75; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 75, No. 
25). 

2. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 

3. Amendment filed 5-25-83; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 83. No. 
22). Approved by State Building Standards Commission 1-24-83. 

§ 3227. Discharge from Exits. 

(a) All exits shall discharge directly to the street, or to a yard, court, or 
other open space that gives safe access to a public way. The streets to 
which the exits discharge shall be of width adequate to accommodate all 
persons leaving the building. Yards, courts, or other open spaces to which 
exits discharge shall also be of adequate width and size to provide all per- 
sons leaving the building with ready access to the street. (Title 24, Part 
2, Section 2-3302(k).) 

( 1 ) Where any doorway, ramp, walkway, stairway or ladder landing 
exits directly into the path of vehicular traffic, an adequate barrier and 
warning shall be installed to prevent workmen stepping directly into such 
dangerous traffic. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-3302(k).) 

(b) Exit stairs that continue beyond the floor of discharge shall be inter- 
rupted at the floor of discharge by partitions, doors, or other physical bar- 
riers. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-3302(k)(2).) 

(c) Exit Obstruction. No obstructions shall be placed in the required 

width of an exit except projections permitted by these regulations. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code; and Section 18943(c), Health and Safety Code. 

History 

1. New section filed 6-20-75; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 75, No. 

25). 

2. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 

3. Amendment filed 5-25-83; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 83, No. 
22). Approved by State Building Standards Commission 1-24-83. 

§ 3228. Number of Exits. 

(a) Every building or usable portion thereof shall have at least two exits 
to permit prompt evacuation of employees and other building occupants 
during an emergency. The exits shall be located as far away as practicable 
from each other so that if one exit is inaccessible because of fire or smoke, 
employees can evacuate using the second exit. 

EXCEPTION: In accordance with Title 24, Part 2, California Code of Regulations, 
a single exit shall be permitted where the number of employees, the size of the 
building, its occupancy or the arrangement of the workplace is such that all em- 
ployees would be able to evacuate safely during an emergency. 

(b) More than two exits must be provided in a workplace if the number 
of employees, the size of the building, its occupancy, or the arrangement 
of the workplace is such that all employees would not be able to evacuate 
safely during an emergency if only two exits were provided. 

Note to subsections (a) and (b): For assistance in determining the number of work- 
place exits, and the necessary distance between exits, consult Title 24, Part 2, 
California Code of Regulafions, and your local jurisdiction fire department. 
NOTE; Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Secdon 142.3, La- 
bor Code; and Section 18943(c), Health and Safety Code. 

History 

1. New section filed 6-20-75; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 75, No. 

25). 

2. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 

3. Amendment of subsection (k) filed 12-23-77; effecdve thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register 77, No. 52). 



4. Amendment filed 5-25-83; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 83, No. 
22). Approved by State Building Standards Commission 1-24-83. 

5. Amendinent filed 5-26-83; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 83, No. 
22). Approved by State Building Standards Commission 1-24-83. 

6. Repealer and new section and repealer of Table E-1 filed 3-5-2008; operative 
4-4-2008 (Register 2008, No. 10). For prior history of Table E-1. see Register 

83, No. 22. 

§ 3229. Exit Width. 

(a) The total width of exits in feet shall be not less than the total occu- 
pant load served divided by 50. Such width of exits shall be divided ap- 
proximately equally among the separate exits. The total exit width re- 
quired from any story of a building shall be determined by using the 
occupant load of that story, plus the percentages of the occupant loads of 
floors which exit through the level under consideration as follows: 

( 1 ) Fifty percent of the occupant load in the first adjacent story above 
and the first adjacent story below, when a story below exits through the 
level under consideration. 

(2) Twenty-five percent of the occupant load in the story immediately 
beyond the first adjacent story. 

The maximum exit width required from any story of a building shall 
be maintained. 

(Tifle 24, Part 2, Section 3302(b).) 

(b) The minimum width of any way of exit shall in no case be less than 
28 inches. Where a single way of exit leads to an exit, its capacity in terms 
of width shall be at least equal to the required capacity of the exit to which 
it leads. Where more than one way of exit leads to an exit, each shall have 
a width adequate for the number of persons it must accommodate. (Title 
24, Part 2, Section 3302(h).) 

(c) Every portion of every building in which are installed seats, tables, 
merchandise, equipment or similar materials shall be provided with 
aisles leading to an exit. (Tifle 24, Part 2, Secdon 3313(a).) 

NOTE: Authority cited: Secdon 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Secdon 142.3. La- 
bor Code; and Secdon 18943(c). 

History 

1. New section filed 6-20-75; effecdve thirtieth day thereafter (Register 75, No. 
25). 

2. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effecdve thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 

3. Amendment of subsection (c) filed 12-23-77; effective thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register 77, No. 52). 

4. Amendment filed 5-25-83; effecdve thirtieth day thereafter (Register 83. No. 
22). Approved by State Building Standards Commission 1-24-83. 

§ 3231 . Stairways. 

(a) General. Every stairway serving any building or pordon thereof 
shall conform to the requirements of this Section. (See Section 3214 for 
stair rail and handrail specifications and Section 3234 for industrial stair- 
ways). (Tifle 24, Part 2, Secflon 3305(a).) 

(b) Width. 

(1) Stairways serving an occupant load of more than 50 shall be not 
less in width than 44 inches. 

Stairways serving an occupant load of 50 or less may be 36 inches 
wide. Private stairways serving an occupant load of less than 10 may be 
30 inches wide. 

(2) Trim shall not reduce the required width by more than 3 1/2 inches. 
Handrails may project from each side of a stairway a distance of 3 1/2 in- 
ches into the required width. Stringers may project I 1/2 inches. (Tifle 24, 
Part 2, Section 3305(b).) 

(c) Rise and Run. 

(1) The rise of every step in a stairway shall be not less than 4 inches 
nor greater than 7 1/2 inches. 

(2) The run shall not be less than 10 inches as measured horizontally 
between the vertical planes of the furthermost projection of adjacent 
treads. The largest tread run within any flight of stairs shall not exceed 
the smallest by more than 3/8 inch. The greatest riser height within any 
flight of stairs shall not exceed the smallest by more than 3/8 inch. 
EXCEPTION: Private Stairways serving an occupant load of less than 10 and stair- 
ways to unoccupied roofs may be constructed with an 8 inch maximum rise and 
a 9 inch minimum run. 



• 



Page 550 



Register 2008, No. 10; 3-7-2008 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3231 



(Title 24, Part 2, Section 3305(c).) 

(d) Surface. All treads shall be slip-resistant. Stairways shall be main- 
tained clear and in good repair. 

(Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-3305(s).) 

(e) Circular Stairways. Circular stairs may be used as an exit providing 
the minimum width of run is not less than 10 inches and the smaller radius 
is not less than twice the width of the stairway. All treads in any one flight 
between landings shall have identical dimensions within a three-eighths 
inch tolerance. 

(Title 24, Part 2, Section 3305(e).) 

(f) Landings. Every landing shall have a dimension measured in the 
direction of travel equal to the width of the stairway. Such dimension 
need not exceed 4 feet when the stair has a straight run. Landings, when 
provided, shall not reduce the width to less than one-half the required 
width at any position in the swing or by more than 7 inches by a door 
when fully open. There shall be not more than 12 feet vertically between 
landings. 

(Title 24, Part 2, Section 3305(g) and (i).) 

(g) Stairway to Roof. In every building four or more stories in height, 
one stairway shall extend to the roof surface, unless the roof has a slope 
greater than 4 in 12. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 3305(o).) 

(h) Headroom. Every required stairway shall have a headroom clear- 
ance of not less than 6 feet 6 inches. Such clearances shall be established 
by measuring vertically from a plane parallel and tangent to the stairway 
tread nosing to the soffit above at all points. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 
3305(p).) 



In existing installations where overhead clearance is less than 6 feet 
6 inches above stairways, the stairway shall be relocated, the obstruction 
shall be removed, or if both of these are impracticable a suitable warning 
shall be placed near the obstruction so as to notify employees of its pres- 
ence. Where the nature of the hazard is such that padding it will increase 
safety, this also shall be done. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-3305(p), Ex- 
ception.) 

(i) Enclosure Construction of Exit Stairways. When an exit stairway 
is required to be protected by separation from other parts of the building 
the separating construction shall be of not less than two-hour fire-resis- 
tive construction in buildings more than four stories in height and shall 
be of not less than one-hour fire-resistive construction elsewhere. 

( 1 ) Openings into Enclosures. There shall be no openings into exit en- 
closures except exit doorways and openings in exterior walls. All exit 
doors in an exit enclosure shall be protected by a fire assembly ha\ ing a 
fire-protection rating of not less than one hour where one-hour shaft 
construction is permitted and one and one-half hours where two-hour 
shaft construction is required. Doors shall be maintained self-closing or 
shall be automatic closing by actuation of a smoke detector as provided 
for in Section 4306(b). The maximum transmitted temperature end point 
shall not exceed 450° F above ambient at the end of 30 minutes of the fire 
exposure specified in U.B.C. Standard No. 43-2. 

(Title 24, Part 2, Section 3308(c).) 



• 



[The next page is 553.] 



Page 551 



Register 2008, No. 10; 3-7-2008 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3232 




Figure E-1 (for stairs installed on or after April 3, 1997) 



NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code; and Section 18943(c), Health and Safety Code. 

History 

1 . Amendment of subsection (h) and new subsection (i) and new Figure E-1 filed 
5- 10-77; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 77, No. 20). For prior histo- 
ry, see Register 76, No. 29. 

2. Amendment of subsection (i)(l)(B) filed 12-23-77; effective thutieth day 
thereafter (Register 77, No. 52). 

3. Amendment filed 5-25-83; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 83, No. 
22.) Approved by State Building Standards Commission 1-24-83. 

4. Amendment filed 5-26-83; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 83, No. 
22.) Approved by State Building Standards Commission 1-24-83. 

5. Amendment of Figure E-1 filed 12-4-2007; operative 1-3-2008 (Register 
2007, No. 49). 

§ 3232. Ramps. 

(a) General. Any path of travel shall be considered a ramp if its slope 
is greater than 1 foot rise in 20 feet of horizontal run. (Title 24. Part 2, 
Section 2-3306(a) without '"Note.") 

(b) Width. The width of ramps shall be as required for exits. 
EXCEPTION: Existing ramps may have width as required for stairways. 

(Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-3306(b)(l).) 

(c) Slope. The maximum slope of a ramp that serves any exitway, pro- 
vides handicap access or is in the path of travel shall be 1 foot rise in 12 
feet of horizontal run. 

EXCEPTION: The slope of an existing ramp shall not exceed 1 foot rise to 8 feet 
horizontal run. 

(d) Landings. Ramps having slopes greater than one vertical to 15 hor- 
izontal shall have landings at the top and bottom and at least one interme- 
diate landing shall be provided for each 5 feet of rise. Top landings and 
intermediate landings shall have a dimension measured in the direction 



of ramp run of not less than 5 feet. Landings at the bottom of ramps shall 
have a dimension in the direction of ramp run of not less than 6 feet. 
(Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-3306(c).) 

(e) Doors. Doors in any position shall not reduce the minimum dimen- 
sion of the landing to less than 42 inches and shall not reduce the required 
width by more than 3 1/2 inches when fully open. 

(Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-3306(d)(l)(C)(l).) 

(f) Handrails. Ramps having slopes exceeding one vertical to 15 hori- 
zontal shall have handrails or stair rails as required for stairways, except 
that intermediate stair rails shall not be required. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 
2-3306(e).) 

(g) Guardrails. Ramps more than 30 inches above the adjacent ground 
or floor shall be provided with guardrails as required in Section 32 1 and 
handrails as required in (f) above. Such guardrails shall be continuous 
from top of the ramp to the bottom of the ramp. (Title 24. Part 2, Section 
2-3306(i).) 

(h) Surface. The surface of ramps shall be roughened or shall be of 
nonslip materials. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-3306(g).) 

(i) Maintenance. Ramps shall be maintained reasonably clear and in 
good repair. 

Note: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code; and Section 18943(c), Health and Safety Code. 

History 

1. New section filed 6-20-75; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 75, No. 

25). 

2. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effecfive thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 

3. Amendment of subsection (g) filed 12-23-77; effective thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register 77, No. 52). 



Page 553 



Register 2007, No. 49; 12-7-2007 



§3233 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



4. Amendment filed 5-25-83; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 83, No. 
22). Approved by State Building Standai^ds Commission 1-24-83. 

§ 3233. Industrial Ramps. 

(a) Ramps used for industrial purposes only shall conform to the provi- 
sions of this section. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-3306(j)(l).) 

(b) Ramps shall be not less than two feet wider than the widest vehicle 
using the ramp. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-3306(i)(2).) 

(c) The slope of a ramp shall not exceed 1 vertical to 8 horizontal. 
Exception: The slope of ramps used by powered industrial trucks only shall not 
exceed 1 vertical to 3 horizontal. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-3306(j)(3).) 

(d) Ramps having slopes exceeding 1 vertical to 15 horizontal shall 
have handrails or stair rails as required for stairways, except that interme- 
diate stair rails shall not be required. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 
2-3306(j)(4).) 

(e) Ramps more than 30 inches above the adjacent ground or floor 
shall be provided with guardrails as required in Section 3210 and hand- 
rails as required in (d) above. Such guardrails shall be continuous from 
the top of the ramp to the bottom of the ramp. 

EXCEPTION: Guardrails or stair rails will not be required on ramps used only by 
powered industrial trucks. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-3306(j)(5).) 

(f) Industrial rainps shall have a curb or equivalent installed along the 
open side or sides, the curb shall not be less than 8 inches in height and 
shall be so designed as to prevent the truck wheel froin running off of the 
ramp. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-3306(j)(6).) 

(g) The surface of ramps shall be roughened or shall be of nonslip ma- 
terials. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-3306(j)(7).) 

(h) Ramps shall be maintained reasonably clear and in good repair. 
NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code; and Section 18943(c), Health and Safety Code. 

History 

1. New section filed 6-20-75; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 75, No. 
25). 

2. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 

3. Amendment filed 5-25-83; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 83, No. 
22). Approved by State Building Standards Commission 1-24-83. 

§ 3234. Fixed Industrial Stairs. 

(a) Scope. This Section contains specifications for the safe design and 
construction of fixed general industrial stairs. This classification in- 
cludes interior and exterior stairs around machinery, tanks, and other 
equipment, and stairs leading to or from floors, platforms, or pits. This 
Section does not apply to stairs used for required exit purposes, to con- 
struction operations, to private residences, or to articulated stairs, such 
as may be installed on floating roof tanks or on dock facilities, the angle 
of which changes with the rise and fall of the base support. (Title 24, Part 
2, Section 2-3326(a).) 

(b) Where Fixed Stairs Are Required. 

( 1 ) Fixed stairs shall be provided for access from one structure level 
to another where operations necessitate regular travel between levels, 
and for access to operating platforms at any equipment which requires 
attention routinely during operations. Fixed stairs shall also be provided 
where access to elevations is daily or at each shift for such purposes as 
gauging, inspection, regular maintenance, etc., where such work may ex- 
pose employees to acids, caustic, gases, or other harmful substances, or 
for which puiposes the carrying of tools or equipment by hand is normal- 
ly required. (It is not the intent of this Section to preclude the use of fixed 
ladders for access to elevated tanks, towers and similar structures, over- 
head traveling cranes, etc., where the use of fixed ladders is common 
practice.) 

(2) Spiral stairways shall not be permitted except for special limited 
usage and secondary access situations where it is not practical to provide 
a conventional stairway. 

(3) Winding stairways may be installed on tanks and similar round 
structures where the diameter of the structure is not less than 5 feet. 

(Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-3326(b).) 

(4) Alternating tread stairs, meeting the requirements of 3234(i) shall 
be permitted for: 



(A) Limited usage. 

(B) Secondary access. 

(c) Stair Strength. Fixed stairways shall be designed and constructed 
to carry a load of 5 times the normal live load anticipated but never of less 
strength than to carry safely a moving concentrated load of 1 ,000 pounds. 
(Title 24. Part 2, Section 2-3326().) 

(d) Stair Width. Fixed stairways shall have a minimum usable width 
of 22 inches. No chute or open conveyor shall be parallel to and adjoin 
a stairway unless the usable width of the stairway is at least 22 inches and 
the stairway is equipped with a stair railing separating the chutes and 
open conveyors from the stairway. 

Chutes shall not be hinged or otherwise constructed or used so as to 
cover stairways. (Title 24, Part 2. Section 2-3326(d).) 

(e) Angle of Stairway Rise. 

(1 ) Fixed stairs shall be installed at angles to the horizontal of between 
30 and 50 degrees. 

(2) Any uniform combination of rise-tread dimensions may be used 
that will result in a stairway at an angle to the horizontal within the per- 
missible range. 

(3) The following is a table of rise/tread dimensions which will pro- 
duce a stairway within the permissible range, stating the angle to the hori- 
zontal produced by each combination. However the rise/tread combina- 
tions are not limited to those given below. 

(4) Each tread and the top landing of a stairway, where risers are used, 
shall have a nose which extends one-half-inch to one-inch beyond the 
face of the lower riser. Noses shall have an even leading edge. 

(5) All treads shall be slip-resistant. 

Table IS- 1. 



Tread Run 
(in inches) 

11 

10 3/4 
10 1/2 
10 1/4 
10 

9 3/4 
9 1/2 
9 1/4 
9 

8 3/4 
8 1/2 
8 1/4 



Welded bar grating treads without nosings are acceptable providing 
the leading edge can be readily identified by personnel descending the 
stairway and provided the tread is serrated or is of definite non-slip de- 
sign. 

(6) Rise height and tread width shall be uniform throughout any flight 
of stairs including any foundation structure used as one or more treads 
of the stairs. 

The maximum variations in the height of risers or the width of treads 
in any one flight shall be one-fourth-inch. 

(7) Where the rise would exceed 9 1/2 inches and the run would be less 
than 8 inches, portable, fixed, or ships ladders shall be used. 

(Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-3326(e).) 

(f) Stairway platforms shall be no less than the width of a stairway and 
minimum of 30 inches in length measured in the direction of travel. (Title 
24, Part 2, Section 2-3326(f).) 

(g) Stair Railings and Handrails. 

(1) Stair raihngs shall be provided on the open sides of all exposed 
stairways. 

(2) Handrails shall be provided on at least one side of closed stairways, 
preferably on the right side descending. 



Angle to 
Horizontal 


Rise 
(in inches) 


30° 35' 


6 1/2 


32° 08' 


6 3/4 


33° 41' 


7 


35° 16' 


7 1/4 


36° 52' 


7 1/2 


38° 29' 


7 3/4 


40° 08' 


8 


41° 44' 


8 1/4 


43° 22' 


8 1/2 


45° 00' 


8 3/4 


46° 38' 


9 


48° 16' 


9 1/4 


49° 54' 


9 1/2 



Page 554 



Register 2007, No. 49; 12-7-2007 



Titles 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3235 



• 



(3) Stair railings and handrails shall be installed in accordance with the 
provisions of Section 3214. 

(4) Standard guardrails shall be installed on stairway platforms. See 
Section 3209. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-3326(g).) 

(h) Vertical Clearance. Vertical clearance above any stair tread to an 
overhead obstaiction shall be at least 6 feet 6 inches measured from the 
leading edge of the tread. 

In existing installations where the overhead clearance is less than 6 
feet 6 inches, the obstruction shall be removed, or if this is impracticable, 
a suitable warning shall be placed near the obstruction so as to notify em- 
ployees of its presence. Where the nature of the hazard is such that pad- 
ding it will increase safety, this also shall be done. (Title 24, Part 2, Sec- 
tion 2-3326(h).) 

(i) Alternating Tread Stairs. 

( 1 ) The stairs shall have a series of steps between 50 and 70 degrees 
from horizontal. 

(2) Stair rails, designed to provide employees an adequate handhold 
to avoid falling, shall be provided on both sides of the stair. 

(3) A minimum distance of 6 inches shall be provided between the stair 
rail and any fixed structure, machine or other object. 

(4) A minimum of 12 inches shall be provided between the stair rails 
of adjacent alternating tread type stairs. 

(5) The stair shall have: 

(A) A minimum of 17 and a maximum of 24 inches of width between 
the stair rails. 

(B) A minimum tread depth of 8 1/2 inches, a minimum tread width 
of 7 inches, a minimum tread run of 5 inches and a maximum rise to the 
next alternating tread surface of 9 1/2 inches. 

(C) A minimum usable width of 17 inches. 

(6) The initial tread of the stair shall begin at the same elevation as the 
platform or landing. 

(7) The stair shall meet all other requirements of Sections 3214 and 
3234. 

Exception: The installation of a midrail and toeboard is not required. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. New section filed 6-20-75; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 75, No. 
25). 

2. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 

3. Amendment of subsection (g) filed 10-5-77; effective thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register77, No. 41). 

4. Amendment of subsection (h) and repealer of subsection (i) and Figure IS-1 
filed 7-26-78; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 78, No. 30). 

5. Amendment filed 5-25-83; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 83, No. 
22). Approved by State Building Standards Commission 1-24-83. 

6. Amendment of subsection (b)(4) and new subsection (i) filed 6-3-85; effective 
thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 23). 

7. Amendment of subsections (e)(4) and (f) filed 7-8-85; effective thirtieth day 
thereafter (Register 85, No. 28). 

8. Editorial correction of subsection (f) filed 8-29-85; effective thirtieth day there- 
after (Register 85, No. 35). 

§ 3235. Doors. 

(a) General. 

(1) This section shall apply to every exit door. Buildings or structures 
used for human occupancy shall have at least one approved exit door. 

(Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-3303(a).) 

(2) Exit doors shall be of the side swinging type. 
Exception: As provided in Section 3235(g). 

(Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-3303(a).) 

(3 ) Every door required to serve as an exit shall be designed and con- 
structed so that the way of exit travel is obvious and direct. Windows 
which could be mistaken for doors shall be made inaccessible to occu- 
pants by means of barriers or railings. 

(b) Width and Height. Every required exit doorway shall be of a size 
that permits the installation of a door not less than 3 feet in width and not 
less than 6 feet 8 inches high. When installed in exit doorways, exit doors 



shall be capable of opening at least 90 degrees and shall be mounted so 
that the clear width of the exitway is no less than 32 inches. In computing 
the exit width required, the net dimension of the exitway shall be used. 
ExCEPriON: Existing buildings may be less than 3 feet in width if the clear width 
of the exitway is not less than 28 inches. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-3303(e).) 

(c) Door Leaf Width. No leaf of an exit door .shall exceed 4 feet in 
width. 

(Title 24, Part 2. Section 2-3303(f).) 

(d) Swing. Exit doors shall swing in the direction of exit travel when 
serving: 

( i ) Any assembly building; 

(2) Any hazardous area; 

(3) An occupant load of 50 or more. 
(Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-3303(b)( 1).) 

(e) Locking. Exit doors shall be openable from the direction of exit 
travel without the use of a key or any special knowledge or effort when- 
ever the building is occupied. 

EXCEPTIONS: 

( 1 ) Mental, penal, or corrective institutions where supervisor}' personnel is contin- 
ually on duty and effective provisions are made to remove occupants in case of fire 
or other emergency. 

(2) This requirement shall not apply to exterior exit doors in Group B occupancies, 
if such doors are unlocked during business hours and there is a readily visible, du- 
rable sisn on or adiacent to thedoor stating "THIS DOOR TO REMAIN UN- 
LOCKED DURING BUSINESS HOURS." The sign shall be in letters not less 
than one-inch high on a contrasting background. The locking device must be of 
a type that will be readily distinguishable as locked. 

(3) Exit doors in places of employment in Group B occupancies, may be locked 
whenever the locking device or mechanism is controlled by an effective mechani- 
cal/electrical or electronic system acceptable to the Division and approved for the 
purpose by the State Fire Marshal. 

Note: 1 : Pursuant to the provisions of Health and Safety Code Section 17950 ct 
seq., local enforcement officials may further restrict or prohibit the use of these de- 
vices. 

(Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-3303(e)(l).) 
Note: 2: Group B occupancies are those defined in Chapter 7 of the Uniform 
Building Code, 1979 Edition. 

(f) Change in Floor Level at Doors. Regardless of the occupant load, 
there shall be a floor or landing on each side of a door. The floor or land- 
ing shall be no more than 1 inch lower than the threshold of the doorway. 
Where a door opens over a landing, the landing shall be at least as wide 
as the door, and at least 5 feet long. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-3303(i)(l ) 
and (i)(2).) 

EXCEPTION; Where the door opens into the stairway of a smokeproof enclosure, 
the landing need not have a length of 5 feet. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-3303(i)(2) 
Exception 1). 

In existing installations where there is no landing, doors shall be conspicuously 
marked with a sign stating "Danger! Stairway — No Landing" or equivalent word- 
ing, and there shall be adequate illumination. 

(Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-3303(i)(2) Exception 5). 

(g) Special Doors. Revolving, sliding, and overhead doors shall not be 
used as required exits. 

EXCEPTIONS: 

( 1 ) Manually operated horizontal sliding doors may be used when serving an occu- 
pant load of 10 or less. 

(2) Power operated doors conforming to SFM 33.1, as shown in Chapter 2-60 of 
Part 2 of Title 24. 

(Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-3303(g)(l).). 
(h) Power-Operated Doors. 

(1) Where a required door is operated by power, such as a door with 
photo-electric actuated mechanism that opens the door upon the ap- 
proach of a person, or a door with power-assisted manual operation, the 
design shall be such that in event of power failure the door may be opened 
manually to permit exit travel or closed to safeguard means of egress. 

(2) No power-operated door shall be considered a required exit unless 
it also swings by manual means. 

(Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-3303(g)(2).) 

(i) Double Acting (Swinging) Doors. 

(1) Doors swinging both ways and located between rooms such as 
Idtchen and dining room, or storeroom and sales floor, shall be provided 
with view panels. One shall be provided for each door of swinging double 
doors. 



Page 554.1 



Register 2007, No. 49; 12-7-2007 



§3239 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



(2) Windows, if used, shall be kept free of dirt or other obstruction to 
vision. 

(3) The bottom of the view panel or window shall be no more than 48 
inches above the floor. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-3303(b)(2)(C).) 

(4) The size of the view panel or window shall be no less than 200 
square inches. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-3303(b)(2)(B).) 

(5) Guards shall be placed over windows which are not of the shatter- 
proof or wired glass type. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-3303(b)(2)(D).) 

(6) Glass in swinging doors shall conform to the provisions of Section 
3242(d). (Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-3303(b)(2)(E).) 

(7) Double acting doors shall not be used as exits serving a tributary 
occupant load or more than 100. nor shall they be used as part of a fire 
assembly, nor equipped with panic hardware. 

(Title 24, Part 2. Section 2-3303(b)(2)(A).) 

(j) Turnstiles. Turnstiles shall not be considered as providing any exit 
width. 

(Title 24, Part 2. Section 2-3303(n)(l).) 

(k) Doors in Folding Partitions. When permanently-mounted folding 
or movable partitions are used to divide a room into smaller spaces, exits 
from these enclosures shall be provided as required under Section 3228. 

(Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-3303(o).) 

(/) Bolts. Manually-operated edge bolts or surface-mounted flush 
bolts and surface bolts are prohibited on required exit doors. When exit 
doors are installed in pairs and automatic flush bolts are used, the door 
leaf with these bolts shall have no door knob or surface-mounted hard- 
ware. The unlatching of any leaf shall not require more than one opera- 
tion. 

(Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-3303(c)(2).) 

(m) Panic Hardware. 

( 1 ) Panic hardware shall cause the door latch to release when a force 
not exceeding 1 5 pounds is applied to the releasing device in the direction 
of exit traffic. 

(2) Hand activated door opening hardware shall be centered between 
30 inches and 44 inches above the floor. Latching and locking doors that 
are hand activated and which are in a path of travel, shall be operable with 
a single effort by lever type hardware, by panic bars, push-pull activating 
bars or other hardware designed to provide passage without requiring the 
ability to grasp the opening hardware. Locked exit doors shall operate as 
above in the egress direction. 

EXCEPTION: Doors to individual hotel or motel units shall operate similarly, ex- 
cept that when the bolt and unlatching operation is key operated from corridor or 
exterior side of the unit door, large bow keys (2 inch full bow or I 1/4 inch half 
bow) shall be provided in lieu of lever type haidware on the corridor side. Separate 
dead lock activation on room side of the corridor doors in hotels and motels shall 
have handle or large thumb turn in an easily reached location. 

(Tifle 24, Part 2, Section 2-3303(c)(3).) 

(3) Panic hardware shall not be equipped with any locking or dogging 
device, set screw, or other arrangement which can be used to prevent the 
release of the latch when pressure is applied to the bar. 

(4) No lock, padlock, hasp, bar, chain, or other device, or combination 
thereof, shall be installed or maintained at any time on or in connection 
with any door on which panic hardware is required, if such device pre- 
vents the free use of the door for exiting. 

(n) Latches. A latch or other fastening device on a door shall be pro- 
vided with a knob, handle, panic bar, or other simple type of releasing de- 
vice, the method of operation of which is obvious. (Tifle 24, Part 2, Sec- 
tion 2-3303(c).) 

NOTE: Authority and reference cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Sec- 
tion 142.3, Labor Code; and Section 18943(c), Health and Safety Code. 

History 

1. Amendment of subsection (a) filed 5-10-77; effective thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register 77, No. 20). For prior history, see Register 76, No. 29. 

2. Amendment filed 4-27-79; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 79, No. 
17). 

3. Amendment filed 5-25-83; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 83, No. 
22). Approved by State Building Standards Commission 1-24-83. 

4. Amendment of subsection (e) filed 10-13-83; effective thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register 83, No. 42). 



§ 3239. Reviewing Stands, Grandstands, and Bleachers. 

For design, use and construction of reviewing stands, grandstands and 
bleachers refer to Section 3321 of the Uniform Building Code (UBC), 
1979Ediflon. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . Renumbering from Section 3220 and amendment of subsections (a) and (g) filed 
6-20-75; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 75. No. 25). 

2. Amendment of subsection (h) filed 1 1-28-75; effective thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register 75, No. 48). 

3. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 

4. Amendment of subsecuon (1) filed 12-23-77; effective thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register77, No. 52). 

5. Repealer and new section filed 5-26-83; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Reg- 
ister 83, No. 22). 



Article 3. Special Design Requirements 

§ 3240. General Design Requirements. 

NOTE: Authority cited: SecUon 142.3, Labor Code. 

History 

1. Repealer of subsections (c), (d), and (e) and renumbering of subsection (f) to (c) 
filed 10-25-74; effective thiitieth day thereafter (Register 74, No. 43). 

2. Repealer filed 6-20-75: effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 75, No. 25). 

§3241. Live Loads. 

(a) The live loads for which each floor or portion thereof of a commer- 
cial or industrial building is or has been designed shall have such design 
live loads conspicuously posted by the owner in that part of each story 
in which they apply, using durable metal signs, and it shall be unlawful 
to remove or deface such noflces. The occupant of the building shall be 
responsible for keeping the actual load below the allowable limits. 

(Title 24, Part 2, SecUon 1607.3.5) 

(b) The maximum weight of materials stored on building floors or load 
carrying platforms, except those built direcfly on the ground, shall not ex- 
ceed their safe carrying capacity. 

(c) Material, wherever stored, shall not create a hazard. It shall be lim- 
ited in height and shall be piled, stacked, or racked in a manner designed 
to prevent it from tipping, failing, collapsing, rolling or spreading. Racks, 
bins, planks, sleepers, bars, strips, blocks, sheets, shall be used where 
necessary to make the piles stable. 

(d) The buildings, structures, foundations, and fastenings of all prime 
movers, machines, and equipment shall be maintained to support safely 
and without dangerous vibration the loads imposed upon them. 

(e) Storage racks shall be designed to safely support their intended 
loads and shall not be loaded in excess of their design capacity as recom- 
mended by the manufacturer. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . Repealer and new section filed 2-1 8-75 ; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Reg- 
ister 75, No. 7). 

2. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 

3. Repealer of subsection (1) and consecutive relettering of subsecfion (m) filed 
1-23-81; effecfive thirtieth day thereafter (Register 81, No. 4). 

4. Amendment filed 2-26-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
9). 

5. Repealer and new subsecfion (a), amendment of subsection (d) and new subsec- 
tion (e) filed 7-1 1-2002; operafive 8-10-2002 (Register 2002, No. 28). 

§ 3241 .1 . Working Warehouses. 

(a) Definitions. 

(1) "Sales floor" means any area where the public is invited to shop, 
whether indoors or outdoors. 

(2) "Working warehouse" means a wholesale or retail establishment 
in which heavy machinery, including, but not limited to, forklifts, is used 
in any area where the public shops while customers are on the premises, 
and merchandise is stored on shelves higher than 12 feet above the sales 
floor. 



Page 554.2 



Register 2007, No. 49; 12-7-2007 



Titles 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3247 



• 



(3) "Shelf means a support structure of rigid material such as wood, 
glass, metal or metal grating to hold or store merchandise. For the pur- 
poses of this section, shelves are fixed horizontally to a wall or other ver- 
tical surface including upright wood or metal frames and columns that 
contain structural support, such as shelves, racks, or cantilevered arms 
for storing merchandise including palletized items. 

(b) In addition to the requirements of subsections (c) and (e) of Section 
3241 , all merchandise on shelves higher than 1 2 feet above the sales floor 
of a working warehouse shall be secured. Methods of securing merchan- 
dise shall include rails, fencing, netting, security doors, gates, cables, or 
the binding of items on a pallet into one unit by shrink-wrapping, metal 
or plastic banding, or by tying items together with a cord. 

Note: The height of 12 feet specified in subsections (a)(2) and (b) is the distance 
measured from the floor to the top plane of the shelf on which merchandise is 
stored, and not the distance from the floor to the top of the merchandise. 

(c) When heavy machinery is used to place or retrieve merchandise on 
a shelf in a working warehouse, there shall be a safety zone established 
to temporarily block persons other than the operator from entering areas 
where merchandise could fall. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Sections 142.3, 
9101 and 9102, Labor Code. 

History 
1. New section filed 10-1-2004; operative 10-31-2004 (Register 2004, No. 40). 

§ 3242. Glass and Glazing. 

(a) General. Specifications and requirements for glass and glazing in- 
stalled before March 13, 1999, shall meet the requirements of Chapter 54 
of the 1982 Uniform Building Code. 

(b) Specifications and requirements for glass and glazing installed on 
or after March 1 3, 1999, shall meet the requirements of Chapter 24 of the 
1997 Uniform Building Code which is hereby incorporated by reference. 
NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. Amendment filed 9-19-75; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 75, No. 
38). 

2. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 

3. Repealer and new subsection (c) filed 9-3-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register 76, No. 36). 

4. Editorial correcfion of Tables GG-1 and GG-2 (Register 77, No. 10). 

5. Amendment of subsections (b), (c), (d), Table No. GG-1 and Table No. GG-2 
filed 7-26-78; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 78, No. 30). 

6. Amendment filed 2-26-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
9). 

7. Amendment of subsection (a) and new subsection (b) filed 2-1 1-99; operative 
3-13-99 (Register 99, No. 7). 

§ 3243. Spray Booths. 

History 
1 . Repealer filed 7-1 7-75; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 75, No. 29). 

§ 3244. Sanitation. 

History 
1. Repealer filed 2-13-75; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 75, No. 7). 

§ 3245. Motion Picture Projection Rooms. 

Motion picture projection rooms shall meet the requirements as set 
forth in Title 24, Part 2-40. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . Amendment of subsections (a) and (d) filed 3-2-76; effective thirtieth day 
thereafter (Register 76, No. 10). 

2. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 

3. Amendment filed 2-26-85; effecfive thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
9). 

§ 3246. Use of Nitrate Film. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 
1. Amendment of subsections (a) and (c) filed 3-2-76; effective thirtieth day 
thereafter (Register 76, No. 10). 



2. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 

3. Amendment of subsection (e)(1) filed 9-3-76; effective upon filing (Register 
76, No. 36). 

4. Amendment of subsection (k) filed 12-23-77; effective thinieth day thereafter 
(Register 77, No. 52). 

5. Repealer filed 2-26-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85. No. 9). 

§ 3247. Lamp Scaffolds and Parallels. 

(a) Definitions. 

(1) Lamp Scaffold means parallel as hereinafter defined. 

(2) Nonoperating Side. The side of a parallel or lamp scaffold on which 
lamps are not installed. 

(3) Operating Minimum. The side clearance necessary for the proper 
manipulation of a lamp. 

(4) Operating Side. The side of a parallel or lamp scaffold on which 
lamps are installed. 

(5) Parallel. An elevated staging used to support lamps and auxiliary 
equipment for the purpose of furnishing illumination. 

(6) Nonoperating Side Guardrailing. A 2-rail railing having a loprail 
the upper surface of which is from 42 inches to 45 inches above the upper 
surface of the staging, platform, or runway being protected, and a second 
or midrail located halfway between the toprail and the top surface of the 
staging, platform, or runway. 

(7) Operating Side Guardrailing. A single-rail railing the upper sur- 
face of which is from 42 inches to 45 inches above the upper surface of 
the staging, platform, runway, or scaffold being protected. 

(b) Guardrailings. 

(1) All lamp scaffolds and parallels while being used either to support 
lamps or serve as walkways shall be provided with nonoperating side 
guardrailings on the nonoperating side. 

(2) All lamp scaffolds and parallels while being used to support lamps 
shall be provided with an operating side guardrailing on the operating 
side. 

(3) Where the operating side guardrailing is more than 45 inches high 
and the clearance between adjacent lamps or between a lamp and a verti- 
cal support or structural member exceeds 1 8 inches, barriers such as addi- 
tional vertical supports shall be installed to effectively reduce the clear- 
ance to an operating minimum. When large lamps are used which require 
more than 18 inches side clearance for manipulation and handling, hori- 
zontal distances up to 24 inches may be left on each side of such lamps, 
but in all cases such openings shall be held to an operating minimum. 

When used to reduce side clearance, vertical supports shall have their 
lower ends securely attached to the lamp scaffold or parallel beds and 
shall extend upward and be securely attached to the overhead building 
structure, or to cross members extending from lamp scaffold upright to 
lamp scaffold upright, or some other equally effective method to give 
equal strength and rigidity. 

(4) Toprails, midrails, and uprights shall be structurally sound of at 
least 2-inch by 4— inch lumber of the following grades or of material of 
equivalent strength and rigidity: 

Western Wood Products West Coast Lumber hi- 
Association Standard spection Bureau Rules 
Grading Rules 1965 No. 15 



Grade 



Grade 



Posts and rails when 
2" X 4" lumber is used. 
(Minimum dressed size 
acceptable 15/8x3 5/8 
inches) 



1 22a- 1900f (bending 
stress). Select Struc- 
tural Douglas Fir 
Light Framing, 2" to 
4" thick, 4" wide. 



122a-190()f (bending 
stress). Select Stmc- 
tural Douglas Fir 
Light Framing, 2" to 
4" thick, 4" wide. 



Slope of Grain 1" in 12" Slope of Grain 1" in 12' 
in middle third of in middle third of 

length, balance of length, balance of 

piece 1" in 10" piece 1" in 10" 



(5) Guardrails shall be attached to the uprights in a manner to afford 
maximum protection. 

(6) Where the upper surface of a lamp scaffold or parallel bed presents 
no barriers along its outer edges which will tend to prevent objects from 



Page 554.3 



Register 2007, No. 49; 12-7-2007 



§3247 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



rolling or sliding from the bed, obstructions not less than I inch in height 
or greater than 2 inches in width shall be installed along such outer edges. 

(c) Housekeeping. 

(1) Any fixture, chair, or operating facility on the lamp scaffolds or 
parallels shall be effectively secured in place. 

(2) Lamp scaffolds and parallels shall be maintained free and clear of 
debris. 

(d) Obstructions. 

(1) Lamp scaffold and parallel beds shall be kept clear of all bracing, 
electrical wires, cables, and equipment, except for the wire and cable nec- 
essary to reach from each lamp to its respective plug-in box or bus con- 
nection and allow for lamp manipulation. All such necessary wire or 
cable shall be kept close to the operating side or sides of the bed leaving 
an unobstructed walkway. 

(2) The space immediately above hanging or temporary lamp scaffold 
and parallel beds shall be kept similarly free of obstructions to a height 



of not less than 6 feet 6 inches, when stage set and hanger construction 
permit. 

(3) The construction of hanging or temporary prefabricated lamp scaf- 
fold and parallel bed hangers shall have the month and year of manufac- 
ture stamped into the hanger clearly and legibly and shall be such that 
when installed and stage and set construction permit the center head 
clearance above the beds at the hangers will be not less than 6 feet 6 in- 
ches. Where diagonal or knee braces are used as a reinforcing means be- 
tween prefabricated hanger uprights and an overhead spreader or stait. 
the horizontal distance between the diagonal braces, measured parallel 
to the strut or spreader at a height of 6 feet 6 inches above the lamp scaf- 
fold or parallel bed, shall be not less than 12 inches. The lower ends of 
diagonal or knee braces shall not be attached to hanger uprights at points 
less than 4 feet 6 inches vertically above the upper surface of lamp scaf- 
fold or parallel beds. 



[The next page is 555.] 



Page 554.4 



Register 2007, No. 49; 12-7-2007 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3251 



• 



(4) Hanging or temporary lamp scaffold and parallel bed prefabricated 
hangers built before the effective date of these orders shall, when physi- 
cal conditions permit, be installed to give a bed head clearance at the 
hanger of not less than 6 feet 6 inches. 

(5 ) Hanging or temporary lamp scaffold and parallel bed prefabricated 
hangers when materially repaired or which undergo a major alteration 
shall give the same head clearance when installed as is required for pre- 
fabricated hangers built after the effective date of these orders. 

(6) Permanent catwalks and parallels installed on or before the effec- 
tive date of these orders and having a head clearance less than 6 feet 6 
inches need not be altered to obtain such head clearance. 

(e) Inspection and Maintenance. 

( 1 ) Lamp scaffolds and parallels shall be regularly inspected and main- 
tained in a safe condition. 

(2) No nail smaller than 8-penny common (or 8-penny box used in 
sufficient number to give the strength afforded by 8-penny common) 
shall be used in the construction of lamp scaffolds and parallels, and they 
shall be full driven or to the first head when double-headed nails are used. 
Double-headed nails shall not be used in the walking surface. 

(f) Lamp Beds. 

All beds used for lamping shall have a minimum width of 30 inches. 
Lamps shall be so installed that a continuous unobstructed walkway will 
be provided. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. Amendment and renumbering from Article 14.1 (Sections 3325, 
3325.1-3325.6) filed 2-1-72 as an emergency; designated effective 2-1-72 
(Register 72, No, 6). 

2. Certificate of Compliance filed 4-26-72 (Register 72, No. 19). 

3. Amendment and renumbering from Article 14.1 (Sections 3325, 
3325.1-3325.6) filed 6-1-72 as an emergency; designated effective 6-1-72 
(Register 72, No. 23). Certificate of Compliance included. 

4. Amendment filed 2-26-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
9). 

§ 3248. Mechanical Refrigeration. 

(a) Mechanical refrigeration systems placed in service before March 
13, 1999, shall be designed, installed, tested, and maintained in accor- 
dance with Chapters 4, 15, and 16 of the 1982 Uniform Mechanical Code 
(UMC). 

(b) Mechanical refrigeration systems placed in service on or after 
March 13, 1999, shall be designed, installed, tested, and maintained in 
accordance with Chapters 2 and 1 1 of the 1 997 Uniform Mechanical 
Code which is hereby incorporated by reference. 

Note: The provisions of Section 3248 are not intended to apply to the use of water 
or air as a refrigerant nor to refrigerating systems installed on railroad cars, motor 
vehicles, motor-drawn vehicles or on shipboard. 

NOTE; Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 

2. Amendment filed 9-3-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
36). 

3. Editorial correction in subsection (e) (Register 77, No. 41). 

4. Amendment of Table No. 15-1 -C filed 7-26-78; effective thirtieth day thereaf- 
ter (Register 78, No. 30). 

5. Amendment filed 2-26-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
9). 

6. Amendment of subsection (a), new subsection (b), and amendment of first Note 
filed 2-1 1-99; operative 3-13-99 (Register 99, No. 7). 

§ 3249. Cold Storage, Processing, and Manufacturing 
Rooms. 

(a) Every cold storage, processing and manufacturing room shall have 
at least one door which can be opened from the inside except as provided 
in (d) below, and 

(Title 24, Part 2, Section 440A) 

(b) Illumination shall be provided in the room. This may be either a 
constantly burning lamp without switch control or a lamp controlled by 
a switch to be located inside near the door. If a switch is used means shall 
be provided to indicate its location in the dark, and 

(Title 24, Part 2, Section 440A) 



(c) A firefighter' s-type axe shall be kept in the room near the door. 
Exceptions to Subsection (c): 

1 . Mental, penal, or corrective institutions where supervisory personnel are contin- 
ually on duty and effective provisions are made to remove occupants in case of fire 
or other emergency. 

2. Door(s) installed in a manner that will prevent the door from freezing shut. 

3. Cold storage, processing, and manufacturing rooms where temperatures arc 
maintained above 32 degrees F or degiees C. 

(d) Doors may be padlocked or otherwise securely locked from the 
outside if the room is equipped with an inside release mechanism which 
will release the latch and open the door when the latch is padlocked or 

( 1 ) There is posted on the outside of the doors a sign reading: ""Do Not 
Lock These Doors Until You Are Positive No One Is Inside," and 

(2) The room is equipped with an electrically operated audible and \ is- 
ible signal system which can be actuated from inside the room and be 
seen and heard outside the room. Both systems to be on a single control 
and tested daily. 

Note: a cold storage space or box is a room used for the preservation of sub- 
stances by controlled temperatures. A cold processing or manufacturing room is 
an enclosed space or room in which products are treated, processed or manufac- 
tured in temperatures at or less than 32 degrees F or degrees C. 
(Title 24, Part 2, Section 440A) 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. Amendment of subsection (c) filed 3-2-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register 76, No. 10). 

2. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 

3. Amendment of subsection (c) filed 10-18-79; effective thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register 79, No. 42). 

4. Amendment filed 2-26-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
9). 

5. Amendment of subsections (a), (c) and (d)(2) filed 3-9-87; effective thirtieth 
day thereafter (Register 87, No. 1 1 ). 

6. Amendment filed 12-17-97; operative 1-16-98 (Register 97, No. 51). 

§ 3250. Cold Storage, Processing and Manufacturing 
Room Exits. 

Two remotely located exits shall be provided for cold storage, process- 
ing and manufacturing rooms where the refrigerant coils are located in- 
side and carry carbon dioxide. Group 2 or Group 3 refrigerant and the 
coils are subject to collision damage; or where the refrigerant agent is lo- 
cated and/or dispersed inside the rooms. These exits may be through ven- 
tilated corridors or other ventilated areas which provide unobstructed and 
safe access to a place of safety. 

This order shall not apply to cold storage, processing and manufactur- 
ing rooms having a floor area of less than 200 square feet provided that 
;in employee would not be required to travel more than 1 2 feet to an interi- 
or operating exit door. 

(Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-713) 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . Repealer and new section filed 9-1 9-75; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Reg- 
ister 75, No. 38). 

2. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76. No. 
29). 

3. Amendment filed 2-26-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
9). 

4. Amendment filed 3-9-87; effective thulieth day thereafter (register 87. No. 1 1 ). 

§ 3251 . Refrigerator Vehicles. 

Every mobile refrigerated compartment shall have at least one door 
which can be opened from inside the compartment and such door shall 
be so located as to provide a safe raeans of egress. In addition to the above 
there shall also be provided and maintained in workable condition a suit- 
able axe, pinch bar or other tool which will enable a person to escape if 
the door should freeze tight. 

EXCEPTION: Provision and maintenance of an axe, pinch bar or other tool is not 
required in mental, penal or correctional facilities where supervisory personnel arc 
continually on duty and effective provisions are made to ensure that occupants are 
not closed or sealed inside the compartment. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 



Page 555 



Register 2008, No. 9; 2-29-2008 



§3260 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



History 

1 . New NoTi-; filed 2-26-85: effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 9). 

2. Amendment addins Excki'TION filed 3-5-2002; operative 4-4-2002 (Register 
2002. No. 10). 

§ 3260. Sanitation. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. 

History 

1 . Repealer filed 7-16-76: effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76. No. 29). 
For prior history, refer to Register 75, No. 32. 

§ 3261 . Nonwater Carriage Disposal Systems. 

Note: Authority cited: Secfion 142.3, Labor Code. 

History 

1. New section filed 2-13-75; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 75. No. 
7). 

2. Repealer filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76. No. 29). 

Article 4. Access, Work Space, and Work 
Areas 

§ 3270. Access General. 

(a) Access to every permanent elevated work location shall be by 
means of either fixed ladders or permanent ramps or stairways. 
NOTE: For ramp requirements see Section 3232 of these Orders. For stairway re- 
quirements see Section 3234 of these Orders. For fixed ladder requirements see 
Section 3277 of these Orders. 

(b) Every permanent elevated work location, where there is machin- 
ery, equipment, or material which is customarily operated or frequently 
repaired, serviced, adjusted, or otherwise handled and every other per- 
manent elevated work location, shall be provided with a safe platform or 
maintenance runway. 

(c) Access shall be provided to all equipment and appliances except 
those located on roofs of dwellings and their accessory buildings. 
Note: For mobile vehicles and equipment, see Secfion 3210(b), Excepfion No. 
9. 

EXCEPTIONS: 

(1) Access to elevator machinery rooms shall comply with the Elevator Safety Or- 
ders. 

(2) This Article does not apply to overhead electric and communication systems, 
overhead line shaft bearings and clutches, valves, or similar controls which are in- 
frequently serviced or operated from safely hooked or otherwise stable or fixed 
ladders or to cranes covered more specifically elsewhere in these Orders. 

(d) Every permanent pit, sump, or other sunken location 30 inches or 
more in depth in, or from which, machinery, equipment, or materials are 
customarily operated or frequently repaired, serviced, adjusted, or other- 
wise handled shall be provided with a safe means of access. Such means 
of access shall be provided by means of either portable or fixed ladders 
or permanent stairways. 

Note: Access to electrical equipment shall not be less than that required by the 
Electrical Safety Orders, Title 8, CCR. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Secfion 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 

2. Amendment of subsecUons (a) and (d) filed 9-3-76; effecfive thirtieth day 
thereafter (Register 76, No. 36). 

3. Amendment of subsecfion (c) and repealer of subsecdon (d) filed 3-3-77; effec- 
tive thirtieth day thereafter (Register 77, No. 10). 

4. Amendment filed 2-26-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
9). 

5. Change without regulatory effect adding Note for subsecfion (b) and amending 
Note for subsecdon (c) filed 7- 1 8-2006 pursuant to section 1 00, dtle 1 , Califor- 
nia Code of Reguladons (Register 2006, No. 29). 

6. Amendment of section and Note filed 2-29-2008; operative 3-30-2008 (Reg- 
ister 2008, No. 9). 

§ 3270.1 . Use of Rope Access Equipment. 

(a) Scope and Apphcation. This section establishes safety require- 
ments for rope access and the use, care and maintenance of rope access 
equipment as defined in Section 3207. Rope supported work shall be per- 
mitted only when other means of access are not feasible or would in- 
crease the risk of injury to the employee and/or the public. The require- 



ments of this section include, but are not limited to. the inspection of 
dams and spillways, access to interior or exterior stmctural and architec- 
tural components of buildings, highway/bridge inspection and inaintc- 
nance, and access to powerplant penstocks. 

Exception: ( l ) Window cleaning and exterior building maintenance as regulated 
by Articles 5 and 6 of these Orders; (2) Emergency search and rescue operations; 
(3) Entertainment performances and rehearsals. 

(b) Approval. Rope access equipment shall be approved for its in- 
tended use as defined in Section 3206 of these Orders. 

(c) Training. 

(1) The employer shall establish, implement and maintain a written 
Code of Safe Practices for rope access work. The written Code of Safe 
Practices shall include, but not be limited to the following eleinents: 

a. Methods of rope access and anchorage used by the einployer. 

b. Employee selection criteria. 

c. Equipment selection and inspection criteria. 

d. Roles and responsibilities of rope access team members. 

e. Communication systems. 

f. Employee training program. 

g. Rescue and emergency protocol. 

h. Identification of any unique site hazards that may affect the safety 
of employees using rope access methods. 

(2) Employees shall be trained in accordance with the Code of Safe 
Practices, including rescue techniques. The employer shall evaluate the 
competence of the einployee to perform rope access in accordance with 
the Code of Safe Practices including a hands-on demonstration by the 
employee of his/her rope access skills. 

(3) Employees who perform rope access shall receive annual refresher 
training. The training shall include a reevaluation (e.g., hands-on dem- 
onstration) of the employee's ability to perform rope access in accor- 
dance with the Code of Safe Practices. 

(4) Documentation of employee training shall be maintained as re- 
quired by Section 3203 of these Orders. 

(d) Equipment Inspection and Maintenance. 

( 1 ) The manufacturer' s recommendations for use, care, inspection and 
maintenance of rope access equipment shall be followed. 

(2) A qiiahfied person shall inspect rope access equipment each day 
before and after use to determine that the equipment is safe for its in- 
tended use. 

(3) Damaged or defective rope access equipment shall be immediately 
removed from service. 

(e) Anchorage. Anchorages shall be sufficient to safety support at least 
twice the maximum anticipated dynamic load imposed upon them as de- 
termined by a qualified person. 

(f) Personal Protective Equipment. Employees performing rope ac- 
cess work shall be provided personal protective equipment in accordance 
with Article 10 of these Orders. 

(g) There shall be at least two trained employees present when rope ac- 
cess equipment and techniques are used. 

(h) Trainer Qualifications. Employees who use rope access equipment 
and/or perform rope access shall be trained by persons with the qualifica- 
tions and experience necessary to effectively instruct the employee in the 
proper fundamentals of rope access, equipment, and techniques as de- 
scribed in subsection (c) of this section. 

(i) The employer shall provide for the prompt rescue of employees in 
case of equipment malfunction or a fall, or shall assure that employees 
are able to rescue themselves. 

(j) A safety, secondary, belay, or backup line, or other appropriate fall 
arrest device shall be used when the main line is the primary means of 
support, unless the employer can demonstrate that the second line or oth- 
er fall arrest device would create a greater hazard or would otherwise be 
infeasible. 

(1) When a safety line is used in conjunction with the main line, each 
line shall be provided with a separate anchor, and shall be separately 



• 



Page 556 



Register 2008, No. 9; 2-29-2008 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3273 



fixed to the employee's harness. This shall not prohibit both lines from 
being attached to a single harness attachment point. 

(k) Precautions (e.g., barricades, warning lines) shall be taken to con- 
trol vehicular traffic and/or prevent unauthorized persons from walking 
or working beneath employees performing rope access operations. 

(/) The employer shall conduct a pre-rope access briefing to discuss 
the objective(s) of the rope access work to be performed, any unusual 
site-specific hazards or environmental conditions that could affect the 
safety of the employee, and emergency procedures to be followed (e.g., 
employee rescue). 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

L New section filed 8-4-2000; operative 9-3-2000 (Register 2000, No. 31). 

§3271. Openings. 

(a) Openings to attics, furred ceiling spaces, and underfloor spaces 
shall not be less than 22 inches by 30 inches. 

(Title 24, Par 2, Section 2-3320(f)) 

EXCEPTIONS: 

1 . Where fixed ladders extend through such openings, the openings shall be not 
less than 30 inches by 30 inches. 

2. Floor furnaces located in underfloor spaces shall have openings of not less than 
18 inches by 24 inches. 

(b) When the opening is less than 4 feet in any dimension, the 
appliance or equipment shall not be located more than 20 feet from the 
opening. 

(Title 24, Part 2, Secfion 2-3320(g)) 

(c) Where for inspection or maintenance it is necessary to pass through 
roof and ceiling trapdoors which are of such size and weight that to open 
or close them subjects an employee to the risk of injury, they shall be con- 
structed and maintained so that they can be easily opened and closed from 
a safe working position. 

(Title 24, Part 4, Section 4-504) 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code; and Section 18493(c), Health and Safety Code. 

History 

1. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 

2. Amendment filed 2-26-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
9). 

§ 3272. Aisles, Walkways, and Crawiways. 

(a) Crawiways shall not be less than 24 inches in width and as high as 
the opening or 30 inches, whichever is greater. 

EXCEPTIONS; 

1 . Whenever any openings to such equipment are provided in weatherproof enclo- 
sures, such openings may be reduced to 15 inches in the least dimension if the 
equipment can be properly serviced, repaired, or replaced from these openings 
without removing any permanent construction. 

2. Underfloor crawiways shall be not less than 24 inches by 24 inches. 

(b) Where aisles or walkways are required, machinery equipment, 
parts, and stock shall be so arranged and spaced as to provide clear walk- 
ways or aisles of not less than 24 inches in width and 6 feet 8 inches clear 
headroom to a safe means of egress from the building. 

In existing installations, which do not comply with the minimum head- 
room clearance specified above, the obstrucfion shall be removed, or if 
this is impracficable, a suitable warning sign shall be placed near or on 
the obstruction so as to notify employees of its presence. When the nature 
of the hazard is such that padding it will increase safety, this also shall 
be done. In no case shall the clear headroom be less than 6 feet. 

(c) Permanent aisles, ladders, stairways, and walkways shall be kept 
reasonably clear and in good repair. Where, due to lack of proper defini- 
fion, such aisles or walkways become hazardous, they shall be clearly de- 
fined by painted lines, curbings, or other method of marking. 

(d) Whenever aisles, walkways, or crawiways become slippery, high- 
fricfion surfaces, cleats, coverings, or other equivalent protection against 
slipping will be required. 

(e) Where industrial vehicles are in customary use, traffic aisles de- 
signed for the passage of a single vehicle shall be at least 2 feet wider than 
the widest vehicle. Two-way traffic aisles shall be at least 3 feet wider 



than twice the width of the widest vehicle. The Division will permit the 
use of suitable turnouts adjacent to one-way traffic aisles for two-way 
traffic when the use of such turnouts will provide equivalent safety. 
Exception: Storage access aisles as defined in Section 3207. 

(f) Where normal clearances present a hazard with the use of industrial 
vehicles, clearance limit warning signs shall be provided. 

(Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-33 13(i)) 
Note: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Secfion 142.3, La- 
bor Code; and Section 18943(c), Health and Safety Code. 

History 

1. Amendment of subsections (b) and (f) filed 5-10-77; effective thirtieth da\ 
thereafter (Register 77. No. 20). For prior history, see Register 76, No. 29. 

2. Amendment of subsection (e) filed 10-5-77; effective thirtieth dav thereafter 
(Register 77, No. 41). 

3. Amendment of subsection (f) filed 12-23-77; effective thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register 77, No. 52). 

4. Amendment of subsection (f) filed 2-26-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register 85, No. 9). 

§ 3273. Working Area. 

(a) Permanent floors and platforms shall be free of dangerous projec- 
tions or obstructions, maintained in good repair, and reasonably free of 
oil, grease, or water. Where the type of operation necessitates working 
on slippery floors, such surfaces shall be protected against slipping by us- 
ing mats, grates, cleats, or other methods which provide equivalent pro- 
tection. Where wet processes are used drainage shall be maintained and 
false floors, platforms, mats, or other dry standing places provided. 

(Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-2304(f)) 

(b) Permanent roadways, walkways, and material storage areas in 
yards shall be maintained free of dangerous depressions, obstructions, 
and debris. 

(c) Platforms, runways, ramps, or other elevated working levels, ex- 
cept catwalks, that are 30 inches or more above the floor, ground, or other 
working area shall be no less than 2 feet wide and have no less than 6 1/2 
feet clear headroom. In existing installations where an overhead hazard 
exists due to clearances of less than 6 1/2 feet above ramps, runways, 
platforms, or other elevated work areas, such work area shall be relocated 
and the obstruction removed. If these procedures are impracticable, a 
suitable warning shall be placed near the obstruction to notify employees 
of its presence. Where the nature of the hazard is such that padding will 
increase safety, it shall be installed. 

(Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-3320(h)(l)) 

(d) Catwalks shall be no less than 18 inches wide and have 6 1/2 feet 
clear headroom. When installed along inclined conveyors, crane booms, 
etc., where because of structural or load conditions it is unreasonable to 
comply with basic ramp standards, catwalks may have a slope exceeding 
1 8 degrees. 

(Tide 24, Part 2, Section 2-3320(h)(2)) 
Exceptions: 

1 . When required location dictates, a catwalk may have less overhead clearance 
if a warning and padding are provided as in (c). 

2. In bowling alleys at pin-spotting and pin-setting machines, catwalks shall be 
no less than nominal 8 inches wide and provided with an adequate handrail if the 
sides are not protected by another structure. 

(e) Protection from falling objects: 

(1) Where there is employee exposure below an elevated work area, 
one or more of the following safeguards shall be implemented: 

(A) Provide toeboards, screens, or guardrail systems in accordance 
with Article 2 of these Orders to prevent objects from falling from higher 
levels; or, 

(B) Provide a canopy structure to protect employees from falling ob- 
jects; or, 

(C) Provide a physical barrier such as, but not limited to, fencing, bar- 
ricades or other equivalent means or methods, to prevent entry into the 
area to which objects could fall. 

(2) Where the type of process or operation, exclusive of repair and 
maintenance, is such that there are hazards to employees from materials 
falling through platform or runway openings, the openings shall be lim- 
ited to a size that prevents materials falling through the openings. 

(3) Where platform or runway gratings are used as work areas during 
repair or maintenance, there shall be provided at such areas suitable safe- 



Page 557 



Register 2008, No. 9; 2-29-2008 



§3274 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



guards to prevent tools or materials falling on employees below. Such 
safeguards may be netting suspended below the work area, canvas, 
planking on the surface of the grating, or barricaded or sheltered areas be- 
low the work area. 

(f) Lowering objects: 

( 1 ) Where there is employee exposure below an elevated work area, 
all objects, including materials, equipment and tools shall be lowered in 
a controlled manner, such as but not limited to using enclosed chutes, ma- 
terial handling equipment, or hand lines; or, 

(2) When controlled lowering is not practical, or would subject em- 
ployees to a greater risk of injury, protection from falling objects shall be 
provided by the use of effective physical barriers, such as but not limited 
to canopies, fencing, barricades, or barrier tape when the barrier tape is 
attended by a spotter who is authorized to effectively restrict entry into 
the area and who is on the same level as the area of the exposure, or other 
equivalent means or methods. 

(A) Signs in accordance with Section 3340 shall be posted at the pe- 
rimeter of the affected work area to warn employees of the hazard. 

(g) Where it is necessary to lubricate or adjust prime movers, ma- 
chines, or equipment, which extends below the floor line, sufficient work 
space shall be provided for the safe performance of the work. 

(h) Permanently installed prime movers, machines, and equipment 
shall be located and guarded so that transported material does not strike 
either the moving parts of machines or the employees at their operating 
positions. 

(i) Machines or equipment shall be located and guarded so that the 
product, waste stock, or material being worked or processed does not en- 
danger employees. 

(j) Where machinery or equipment is installed in a pit and there are 
shear hazards between the pit edges and parts of the machine or equip- 
ment, skirt guards shall be installed to remove such hazards, or such other 
device used to provide equivalent protection. 

(k) Every shop transfer car and equipment carriage operating on rails, 
together with their loads, shall clear stationary machines, equipment, 
structures, or piled or stacked material, by at least 24 inches. 

(/) Ditches, pits, excavations and surfaces in poor repair shall be 
guarded by readily visible barricades, rails or other equally effective 
means. 

(m) Existing installations having impaired clearances shall be well 
posted to indicate the hazards due to such impaired clearance, and shall 
be guarded by guardrails, barricades, or other means. 

EXCEPTIONS; 

1. Inaccessible monorails, conveyors, and similar equipment operating on rails. 

2. Transfer cars or cairiages where the process is such that a minimum of clearance 
is necessary for safe operations. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code; and Section 18943(c), Health and Safety Code. 

History 

1 . Amendment of subsections (a), (b) and (c) filed 2-1 8-75; effective thirtieth day 
thereafter (Register 75, No. 7). 

2. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effecfive thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 

3. Amendment filed 4-27-79; effecfive thirtieth day thereafter (Register 79, No. 
17). 

4. Amendment of subsection (j) filed 7-19-79; effective thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register 79, No. 29). 

5. New subsection (/) filed 12-12-84; effecfive thirtieth day thereafter (Register 
84, No. 50). 

6. Amendment filed 2-26-85; effecfive thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
9). 

7. New subsecfions (e)-(e)(l)(C) and (f)-(f)(2)(A) and redesignation of former 
subsecfions (e)-(f) as subsecfions (e)(2)-(3) filed 8-26-2003; operafive 
9-25-2003 (Register 2003, No. 35). 



§ 3274. Valves and Controls. 

(a) Where pipe valves require daily manipulation and are so located 
that they cannot be reached or operated from the floor, a permanent plat- 
form or other safe means of operation shall be provided. 

(Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-3328(a)) 



(b) Valves or other controls shall not be so located that their manipula- 
tion exposes the employee to hazards of dangerous moving parts of prime 
movers, machines, or transmission equipment. 

(Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-3328(b)) 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: SecUon 142.3, La- 
bor Code; and Section 18943(c), Health and Safety Code. 

History 

1. Amendment filed 7-16-76: effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 

2. Amendment filed 2-26-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85. No. 
9). 

§3275. Scaffolds. 

Scaffolds shall be of constaiction at least equivalent to that required 
by articles 21-23 of the Construction Safety Orders (sections 
1635.1-1667 of these regulations) and shall be suitable for the work to 
be performed thereon. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Secfion 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 
1 . Renumbering and amendment of former secfion 3276 to section 3275 filed 
12-1 1-90; operative 1-10-91 (Register 91 , No. 3). For prior history, see Regis- 
ter 84, No. 50). 

§ 3276. Use of Ladders. 

(a) Employees shall: 

( 1 ) be prohibited from carrying equipment or materials which prevent 
the safe use of ladders; 

(2) be required to face the ladder when ascending and descending; 

(3) always use both hands when climbing up or down the ladder; and 

(4) be prohibited from using single-rail ladders. 

(b) Employees shall not stand on the topcap or the step below the top- 
cap of a stepladder. 

NOTE: For the purposes of subsecfion (b) the topcap is not a step. 
NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Secfion 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . Renumbering and amendment of former secfion 3276 to section 3275 and new 
secfion 3276 filed 12-1 1-90; operative 1-10-91 (Register 91. No. 3). For prior 
history, see Register 85, No. 9). 

2. Amendment of subsecfion (a)(3) and new subsecfion (a)(4) filed 6-1-92; opera- 
five 7-1-92 (Register 92, No. 23). 

3. New subsection (b) and explanatory Note filed 6-16-98; operative 7-16-98 
(Register 98, No. 25). 

§ 3277. Fixed Ladders. 

(a) All fixed ladders shall be approved as defined in Section 3206 of 
the General Industry Safety Orders. 

(b) Definitions. 

Cage. A cage is a guard that may be referred to as a cage or basket 
guard, which is an enclosure that is fastened to the side rails of the fixed 
ladder or to the structure to encircle the climbing space of the ladder for 
the safety of the person who must climb the ladder. 

Cleats. Cleats are ladder crosspieces of rectangular cross section 
placed on edge on which a person may step in ascending or descending. 

Fastenings. A fastening is a device to attach a ladder to a structure, 
building, or equipment. Fixed, hinged, bearing, or slide-type fastenings 
may be used. 

Fixed Ladder. A fixed ladder is a ladder permanently attached to a 
structure, building, or equipment. Ladders referred to in this code shall 
be construed to be fixed ladders. 

Grab Bars. Grab bars are individual handholds placed adjacent to or 
as an extension above ladders for the purpose of providing access beyond 
the limits of the ladder. 

Individual-Rung Ladder. An individual-rung ladder is a fixed ladder 
each rung of which is individually attached to a structure, building, or 
equipment. 

Ladder. A ladder is an appliance usually consisting of two side rails 
joined at regular intervals by crosspieces called steps, rungs, or cleats, on 
which a person may step in ascending or descending. 

Ladder Safety Device. A ladder safety device is any device, other than 
a cage or well, designed to eliminate or reduce the possibility of acciden- 



Page 558 



Register 2008, No. 9; 2-29-2008 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§ 3277 



tal falls and which may incorporate such features as life belts, friction 
brakes, and sliding attachments. 

Pitch. Pitch is the included angle between the horizontal and the lad- 
der, measured on the opposite side of the ladder from the climbing side. 

Rail Ladder. A rail ladder is a fixed ladder consisting of side rails 
joined at regular intervals by rungs or cleats and fastened in full length 
or in sections to a building, structure, or equipment. 

Railings. Railings when referred to in this section shall be any one or 
a combination of those railings defined in Section 3210. 

Rungs. Rungs are ladder crosspieces on which a person may step in 
ascending or descending. 

Side-Step Ladder. A side-step ladder is one from which a person get- 
ting off at the top must step sideways from the ladder in order to reach 
the landing, such as shown in Fig. 3. 

Steps. Steps are the flat crosspieces of a ladder on which a person may 
step in ascending or descending. 

Through Ladder. A through ladder is one from which a person getting 
off at the top must step through the ladder in order to reach the landing, 
such as shown in Fig. 2. 

Well. A well is a permanent complete enclosure around a fixed ladder, 
which is attached to the walls of the well. Proper clearances for a well will 
give the person who must cHmb the ladder the same protection as a cage. 
(See (g)(6) and Fig. 1.) 

(c) Design Considerations. All ladders, appurtenances, and fastenings 
shall be designed to meet the following load requirements: 

( 1 ) The minimum design live load shall be a single concentrated load 
of 200 pounds. 

(2) The number and position of additional concentrated live-load units 
of 200 pounds each as determined from anticipated usage of the ladder 
shall be considered in the design. 

(3) The live loads imposed by persons occupying the ladder shall be 
considered to be concentrated at such point or points as will cause the 
maximum stress in the structural member being considered. 

(4) The weight of the ladder and attached appurtenances together with 
the Hve load shall be considered in the design of rails and fastenings. 

(5) All wood parts of fixed ladders shall meet the requirements of Sec- 
tion 3278. 

(6) For fixed ladders consisting of wood side rails and wood rungs or 
cleats, used at a pitch in the range 75 degrees to 90 degrees, and intended 
for use by no more than one person per section, single ladders or cleat lad- 
ders as described in Section 3278 are acceptable. 

(d) Specific Features. 

( 1 ) All rungs shall have a minimum diameter of 3/4 inch for metal lad- 
ders, except as covered in (e)(1) and a minimum diameter of 1 1/8 inches 
for wood ladders. Materials other than steel, aluminum, and wood are ac- 
ceptable provided the design, fabrication, and erection are in accordance 
with recognized design practice and meet the design requirements of 
Section 3277(c) and Section 3277(d)(ll) when applicable. 

(2) The distance between the top surfaces of rungs, cleats, and steps 
shall not exceed 12 inches and shall be uniform throughout the length of 
the ladder. 

Exceptions.- l. Manholes and Underground Vaults. Step spacing shall not ex- 
ceed 1 6 inches between the top surfaces of rungs and shall be uniform throughout 
the length of the ladder. 

2. The vertical distance of the first rung from ground level may be as high as 14 
inches. 

(3) The minimum clear length of rungs or cleats shall be 16 inches. 
Exception: Manholes and Underground Vaults. Clear length of rungs or cleats 
shall not be less than 14 inches. 



(4) Rungs, cleats, and steps shall be free of splinters, sharp edges, 
burrs, or projections which may be a hazard. 

(5) The rungs of an individual-rung ladder shall be so designed that 
the climber's foot cannot slide off the end of a rung. A suggested design 
for metal rungs is shown in Fig. 4. 

(6) Side Rails. Side rails which might be used as a climbing aid shall 
be of such cross secfions as to afford adequate gripping surface without 
sharp edges, splinters, or burrs. 

(7) Fastenings. Fastenings shall be an integral part of fixed ladder de- 
sign. 

(8) Splices. All splices made by whatever means shall meet design re- 
quirements as noted in (c). All splices and connections shall have smooth 
transition with original members and with no sharp or extensi\ c projec- 
tions. 

(9) Electrolytic Action. Adequate means shall be employed to protect 
dissimilar metals from electrolytic action when such metals arc joined. 

(10) Welding. All welding shall be in accordance with procedures of 
the American Welding Society, or equivalent. 

(11) Embedment. Individual rungs of ladders installed in manholes 
and underground vaults having a wall thickness which will not permit at 
least 6 inches of embedment shall have anchoring devices that will pro- 
vide the minimum design load requirements of Section 3277(c) in addi- 
tion to the following requirements: 

(A) The minimum design live load shall be a single concentrated load 
of 300 pounds. 

(B) Steps or rungs shall be embedded in the wall a minimum distance 
of 3 inches. 

(e) Protection from Deterioration. 

(1) Metal. Metal ladders and appurtenances shall be painted or other- 
wise treated to resist corrosion and rusting when location demands. Lad- 
ders formed by individual metal rungs imbedded in concrete, which serve 
as access to pits and to other areas under floors, are frequently located in 
an atmosphere that causes corrosion and rusfing. To increase rung life in 
such atmosphere, individual metal rungs shall have a minimum diameter 
of 1 inch or shall be painted or otherwise treated to resist corrosion and 
rusfing. 

(2) Wood. Wood ladders, when used under conditions where decay 
may occur, shall be treated with a nonirritating preservative, and the de- 
tails shall be such as to prevent or minimize the accumulation of water 
on wood parts. Wood ladders shall not be painted but may be coated with 
a clear sealant after inspection has assured that all requirements of 3278 
have been met. 

Note: Paint does not act as a wood preservative. 

(3) Combined Materials. When different types of materials are used in 
the construction of a ladder, the materials used shall be so treated as to 
have no deleterious effect, one upon the other. 

(f) Clearance. 

(1) On fixed ladders, the perpendicular distance from the center line 
of the rungs to the nearest permanent object on the climbing side of the 
ladder shall be 36 inches for a pitch of 76 degrees, and 30 inches for a 
pitch of 90 degrees (Fig. 5), with minimum clearances for intermediate 
pitches varying between these two limits in proportion to the slope, ex- 
cept as provided in (3) and (7). 

Exception: Manholes and Underground Vaults. 

(2) A clear width of at least 15 inches shall be provided each way from 
the center line of the ladder in the climbing space, except when cages or 
wells are necessary. (See (g)(2) and Fig. 5.) 

Exception: Manholes and Underground Vaults. 



[The next page is 559.] 



Page 558.1 



Register 2008, No. 9; 2-29-2008 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3277 



(3) Ladders equipped with cage or basket shall be excepted from the 
provisions of (1) and (2), but shall conform to the provisions of (g)(5). 
Fixed ladders in smooth-walled wells shall be excepted from the provi- 
sions of (1 ), but shall conform to the provisions of (g)(6). 

(4) The distance from the center line of rungs, cleats, or steps to the 
nearest permanent object in back of the ladder shall be not less than 7 in- 
ches (Fig. 5), except that when unavoidable obstructions are encoun- 
tered, minimum clearances as shown in Fig. 6 shall be provided. 

EXCEPTIONS: 

( 1 ) Manholes and Underground Vaults. The clearance from the center line of rungs 
or steps shall not be less than 5 inches. 

(2) Obstructions. At those locations where unavoidable obstructions are encoun- 
tered, minimum clearances shall be as shown in Figure 6. 

(5) The distance from the center line of the grab bar to the nearest per- 
manent object in back of the grab bars shall be not less than 4 inches. Grab 
bars shall not protrude on the climbing side beyond the rungs of the lad- 
der which they serve. 

(6) The step-across distance from the nearest edge of ladder to the 
nearest edge of equipment or structure shall be not more than 12 inches, 
or less than 2 1/2 inches (Fig. 7). 

(7) Counterweighted hatch covers shall open a minimum of 60 degrees 
from the horizontal. The distance from the center line of rungs or cleats 
to the edge of the hatch opening on the climbing side shall be not less than 
24 inches for offset wells or 30 inches for straight wells. There shall be 
no protruding potential hazards within 24 inches of the center line of 
rungs or cleats; any such hazards within 30 inches of the center line of 
the rungs or cleats shall be fitted with deflector plates placed at an angle 
of 60 degrees from the horizontal as indicated in Fig. 8. The relationship 
of a fixed ladder to an acceptable counterweighted hatch cover is illus- 
trated in Fig. 9. 

(g) Cages or Wells. 

( 1 ) Constmction. Cages or wells shall be built as shown on the applica- 
ble drawings, covered in detail in Figs. 1, 10, and 11, or of equivalent con- 
struction. 

EXCEPTION: Chimney ladders and manholes and underground vaults. 

(2) Dimensions and Maximum Length. Cages or wells (except as pro- 
vided under (5)) conforming to the dimensions shown in Figs. 1, 10, and 
1 1 shall be provided on ladders of more than 20 feet to a maximum unbro- 
ken length of 30 feet. 

EXCEPTIONS: 

( 1 ) Fixed ladders on fire hose drying towers are not required to have a cage, well, 
offset platform, or ladder safety device if they do not exceed 30 feet in length and 
provided their use is restricted to trained fire fighters or others equally trained in 
ladder use. 

(2) Fixed ladders on outdoor advertising structures, where employees wear and 
use approved safety belts and lanyards which can be utilized if a rest period is re- 
quired. 

(3) Top of Cage. Cages shall extend a minimum of 42 inches above the 
top of landing, unless other acceptable protection is provided. 

(4) Bottom of Cage. Cages shall extend down the ladder to a point not 
less than 7 feet nor more than 8 feet above the base of the ladder, with 
bottom flared not less than 4 inches, or portion of cage opposite ladder 
shall be carried to the base. 

(5) Size of Cage. Cages shall not extend less than 27 nor more than 30 
inches from the center line of the rungs of the ladder. Cage shall not be 
less than 27 inches in width. The inside shall be clear of projections. Ver- 
tical bars shall be located at a maximum spacing of 9 1/2 inches, center- 
to-center around the circumference. 

(6) Ladder Wells. Ladder wells shall have a clear width of at least 15 
inches measured each way from the center line of the ladder. (See Fig. 1 .) 
Smooth-walled wells shall be a minimum of 27 inches from the center 
line of rungs to the well wall on the climbing side of the ladder. Where 
other obstructions on the climbing side of the ladder exist, there shall be 
a minimum of 30 inches from the center line of the rungs. 

(h) Pitch. 

( 1 ) Preferred Pitch. The preferred pitch of fixed ladders shall be con- 
sidered to come in the range of 75 to 90 degrees with the horizontal. (See 



Fig. 12.) 

(2) Substandard Pitch. Fixed ladders shall be considered as substan- 
dard if they are installed within the substandard pitch range of 60 to 75 
degrees with the horizontal. Substandard fixed ladders shall be permitted 
only where it is found necessary to meet conditions of installation. (See 
Fig. 12.) This substandard pitch range shall be considered as a critical 
range to be avoided, if possible. 

(3) Scope of Coverage in This Code. This code covers only fixed lad- 
ders within the pitch range of 60 to 90 degrees with the horizontal. (See 
Fig. 12.) 

(4) Pitch Greater Than 90 Degrees. Ladders having a pitch in excess 
of 90 degrees with the horizontal shall not be permitted. 
EXCEPTION: Manholes and Underground Vaults. Individual rung ladders in- 
stalled in the walls of conical top seciions of manholes and underground vaults 
shall be allowed to exceed a pitch of 90 degrees for a distance of not more than 2 
rungs or steps in the conical top sections. The deviation from 90 degrees shall not 
exceed 6 inches. (See Figure 13.) 

(i) Maintenance. All ladders shall be maintained in a .safe condition. 
All ladders shall be inspected regularly, with the intervals between in- 
spections being determined by use and exposure. 

(j) Landing Platforms. 

(1) When ladders are used to ascend to heights exceeding 20 feet (ex- 
cept on chimneys), landing platforms shall be provided for each 30 feet 
of height or fraction thereof, except that, where no cage, well, or ladder 
safety device is provided, landing platforms shall be provided for each 
20 feet of height or fraction thereof. Each ladder section shall be offset 
from adjacent sections. Where installation conditions (even for a short, 
unbroken length) require that adjacent sections be offset, landing plat- 
forms shall be provided at each offset. [See Subsection (m)]. 

EXCEPTIONS: 

1. Ladders in underground mines, those used primarily in construction operations, 
fure escape ladders, and ladders equipped with treads. 

2. Ladders on high- voltage transmission towers, smoke stack ladders, water tower 
ladders and similar fixed ladders on permanent installations which are used either 
infrequently or for emergency only provided the employee who uses the ladder is 
supplied with and wears an approved belt, with safety straps attached, which can 
be utihzed if a rest period is required. 

(2) Where an employee has to step a distance greater than 1 2 inches 
from the center line of the rung of a ladder to the nearest edge of structure 
or equipment, a landing platform shall be provided. The minimum step- 
across distance shall be 2 1/2 inches (Figure 7). 

(3) All landing platforms shall be equipped with guardrails and toe- 
boards, so arranged as to give safe access to the ladder. Platforms shall 
be not less than 24 inches in width and 30 inches in length. 

(4) One rung of any section of ladder shall be located at the level of the 
landing laterally served by the ladder. Where access to the landing is 
through the ladder, the same rung spacing as used on the ladder shall be 
used from the landing platform to the first rung below the landing (Figure 
10). 

(k) Ladder Extensions. The side rails of through or side-step ladder ex- 
tensions shall extend 3 1/2 feet above parapets and landings. For through 
ladder extensions, the rungs shall be omitted from the extension and shall 
have not less than 18 nor more than 24 inches clearance between rails 
(Figure 2). For side-step or offset fixed ladder sections, at landings, the 
side rails and rungs shall be carried to the next regular rung beyond or 
above the 3 1/2 feet minimum (Figure 3). 

(/) Grab Bars. Grab bars shall be spaced by a continuation of the rung 
spacing when they are located in the horizontal position. Vertical grab 
bars shall have the same spacing as the ladder side rails. Grab bar diame- 
ters shall be the equivalent of the round-rung diameters. 

(m) Ladder Safety Devices. Ladder safety devices may be used on 
tower, water tank, and chimney ladders over 20 feet in unbroken length 
in lieu of cage protection. No landing platform shall be required in these 
cases. All ladder safety devices such as those that incorporate life belts, 
friction brakes, and sliding attachments shall meet the design require- 
ments of the ladders which they serve. [See subsection (c).] 

(Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-3305(r)) 



Page 559 



Register 99, No. 12; 3-19-99 



§3277 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



^//^/////V////r^/////////r^ 



r 

I 



7 "M»N TROM TREAD ^ 
I5"MJN 15"MIN k/ 



7T;*; 



TTZTTTTT: -7X7777777771:^^ other 




SMOOTH WALL 



OBSTRUCTIONS 



Fig. 1 
Clearancew Diagram for Fixed Ladder in Well 



i- tlA MMM 







!••«•■ 






MCTION A>A 




rLOoa 
Lini 




Ife^bte 



[ 



}>"pl* Hunts ON ^ 

I'-O" CCNTtRt 



lOOH 0* 
:t lOOr LfNK 



■7" MIN 



r 



•[VtMf CIM« 



Fig. 2 
Roof Ladder 



Page 560 



Register 99, No. 12; 3-19-99 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3277 



i% MiftI 



s. 






n 



IM ««*■ 






i 



^tg'MA* 



Fig. 3 
Offset Fixed Ladder Sections 




Fig. 4 
Suggested Design for Rungs on Individual-Rung Ladders 



Page 561 



Register 99, No. 12; 3-19-99 



§3277 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 




a-E- 



in 



16 MIN 



U=U, 



.^- 



i5"min cl 




RAIL LADDER WITH BAR STEEL RAILS 
AND ROUND STEEL RUNGS 

Fig. 5 
Minimum Ladder Clearance 



I 



1 I" 



-^4^MIN 




"T 



Fig. 6 

Clearance for Unaviodable Obstruction 

at Rear of Fixed Ladder 



Page 562 



Register 99, No. 12; 3-19-99 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3277 




24"MIN 



I? "MAX 






HiNQCO A 
SASH «> 




Fig. 7 
Ladder Far from Wall 



Fig. 8 
Deflector Plates for Head Hazards 




CATCH OR 
LOCKING OtVtCC' 

L alrJl 



SECTIOW A'A 




[.7'MIN 

J FROM RUNG I ^m 



SCCTtONAL ELEVATiON 



Fig. 9 
Relationship of Fixed Ladder to a Safe Access Hatch 



Page 563 



Register 99, No. 12; 3-19-99 



§3277 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



i>«oucm \.»aet» 




Access TO LANOINC 

PLATfORM THROUGH 

LADOCN 



\i"it)H , 2-i 




TOP AND BOTTOM 
HOOPS ALSO THIS &>H 



Access LATERALLY 
FROM LAODCR 




■AtKft b,*»0 




•AS«CT OUAMD HOOP 




•ASMCr GUAMO HOOP 

Adti.! MOM lAooca 



Fig. 10 
Cages for Ladders More Than 20 Feet High 



Page 564 



Register 99, No. 12; 3-19-99 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3277 



•fOuCt TO 2 i 





■NCL.WtP LADDCK 
*T £L£VATEO LOCATION 



SHOOT lAQOCWS *T 
UCV*TtO LOCATIONS 



Fig. 11 

Cages — Special Applications 




Fig. 12 
Pitch of Fixed Ladders 



Page 565 



Register 99, No. 12; 3-19-99 



§3277 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



6" Maximum /v. 
Deviation 7jS-!n' 



Eccentric 
Cone 




fifidiicer Ring 
Urade Ring(s) 



Conical Section 



Variable Shafts 



Fig. 13 
Manholes and Underground Vaults 



Page 566 



Register 99, No. 12; 3-19-99 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3278 



NOTEi: Authority cited: Section 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code; and Section 18943(b), Health and Safety Code. 

History 

1. Amendment of subsections (b)(14), (e)(2). (f)(1), (f)(2) and (g)(1) filed 
6-20-75; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 75. No. 25). 

2. Amendment of subsection (g)(5) filed 9-12-75 as an emergency ; effective upon 
filing (Register 75, No. 37). 

3. Ame'ndment of subsection (g)(5) filed 1-2-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register76, No. 1). 

4. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 

5. Amendment of subsection (g)(2) filed 7-26-78; effective thirtieth day thereaf- 
ter (Register 78, No. 30). 

6. Amendment of subsections (d), (f)(4) and (h)(4) filed 10-29-80; effective thir- 
tieth day thereafter (Register 80. No. 44). 

7. Amendment of Figure 4 filed 10-29-80; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Reg- 
ister 80, No. 44). 

8. New Figure 13 filed 10-29-80; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 80, 
No. 44). 

9. Editorial correction of subsection (d)(l 1) filed 1-23-81; effective thirtieth day 
thereafter (Register 81, No. 4). 

10. Repealer of subsecUons (g)(7)-(g)(13) and new subsections (j)-(m) filed 
1-23-8 1 ; effective thirfieth day thereafter (Register 8 1 , No. 4). 

11. Editorial coirection of subsection (j)(l) (Register 81, No. 46). 

12. Editorial correction of subsection (j) (Register 82, No. 11). 

13. Amendment filed 2-26-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
9). 

14. Amendment of Figure 1 3 filed 2-26-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Reg- 
ister 85, No. 9). 

15. Amendment of subsection (a) filed 6-1-92; operative 7-1-92 (Register 92, 
No. 23). 

16. Editorial correction renumbering second labeled figure 6 to 7 and third labeled 
figure 6 to 8 (Register 92, No. 33). 

17. Editorial conection repositioning History notes (Register 92, No. 33). 

18. Amendment of subsection (d)(2) Exception and Note filed 7-30-96; opera- 
tive 8-29-96 (Register 96, No. 31). 

19. Amendment of subsecfion (a) filed 3-19-99; operative 4-1 8-99 (Register 99, 
No. 12). 



§ 3278. Portable Wood Ladders. 

Safety requirements for portable wood ladders placed in service after 
April 18, 1999, shall meet the requirements ofANSIA14. 1-1994, which 
is hereby incorporated by reference. Safety requirements for portable 
wood ladders placed in service on or before April 1 8, 1 999, shall be based 
on the ANSI A 14.1 provisions in effect at the time such ladders were 
placed in service. 

(a) Scope. This section is intended to prescribe rules and establish 
minimum requirements for the construction, care, and use of the common 
types of portable wood ladders, in order to insure safety under normal 
conditions of usage. 

(b) Definitions. 

Extension Ladder. An extension ladder is a non-self-supporting por- 
table ladder adjustable in length. It consists of two or more sections trav- 
eling in guides or brackets so arranged as to permit length adjustment. Its 
size is designated by the sum of the lengths of the sections measured 
along the side rails. 

Extension Trestle Ladder. An extension trestle ladder is a self-sup- 
porting portable ladder, adjustable in length, consisting of a trestle ladder 
base and a vertically adjustable single ladder, with suitable means for 
locking the ladders together. The size is designated by the length of the 
trestle ladder base. 

Ladders. A ladder is an appliance usually consisting of two side rails 
joined at regular intervals by crosspieces called steps, rungs, or cleats, on 
which a person may step in ascending or descending. 

Sectional Ladder. A sectional ladder is a non-self-supporting portable 
ladder, nonadjustable in length, consisting of two or more sections of lad- 
der so constructed that the sections may be combined to function as a 
single ladder. Its size is designated by the overall length of the assembled 
sections. 

Side-Rolling Ladder. A side-rolling ladder is a semifixed ladder, non- 
adjustable in length, supported by attachments to a guide rail, which is 
generally fastened to shelving, the plane of the ladder being also its plane 
of motion. 



Single Ladder. A single ladder is a non-self-supporting portable lad- 
der, nonadjustable in length, consisting of but one section. Its size is des- 
ignated by the overall length of the side rail. 

Special-Purpose Ladder. A special-purpose ladder is a portable lad- 
der which represents either a modification or a combination of design or 
construction features in one of the general-purpose types of ladders pre- 
viously defined, in order to adapt the ladder to special or specific uses. 

Step Ladder. A step ladder is a self-supporting portable ladder, nonad- 
justable in length, having flat steps and a hinged back. Its si/e is desig- 
nated by the overall length of the ladder measured along the front edge 
of the side rails. 

Trestle Ladder. A trestle ladder is a self-supporting portable ladder, 
nonadjustable in length, consisting of two sections hinged at the top to 
form equal angles with the base. The size is designated by the length of 
the side rails measured along the front edge. 

Trolley Ladder. A trolley ladder is a semifixed ladder, nonadjustable 
in length, supported by attachments to an overhead track, the plane of the 
ladder being at right angles to the plane of motion. 

(c) Materials. General Requirements. All wood parts shall be free from 
sharp edges, splinters, irregularities and defects which affect the ladders 
structural integrity. 

(d) Construction Requirements. 

(1) Portable Step Ladders. 

(A) Step ladders longer than 20 feet shall not be used. Step ladders as 
hereinafter specified shall be of three types, as follows: 

Type I — Industrial step ladder, 3 to 20 feet for heavy duty, such as uti- 
lities, contractors, and industrial use 

Type II — Commercial step ladder, 3 to 12 feet for medium duty, such 
as painters, offices, and light industrial use 

Type III — Household step ladder, 3 to 6 feet for light duly, such as 
light household use. 

(B) Step Spacing. A uniform step spacing shall be employed which 
shall be not more than 12 inches. Steps shall be parallel and level when 
the ladder is in position for use. 

(C) Width and Spread. The minimum width between side rails at the 
top, inside to inside, shall be not less than 111/2 inches. From top to bot- 
tom, the side rails shall spread at least 1-inch for each foot of length of 
step ladder. Rungs shall be continuous members between rails. 

(D) Spreader. A metal spreader or locking device of sufficient size and 
strength to securely hold the front and back sections in open position shall 
be a component of each step ladder. The spreader shall have all sharp 
points covered or removed to protect the user. For Type III ladder, the pail 
shelf and spreader may be combined in one unit (the so-called shelf-lock 
ladder). 

(2) Single Ladder Length. Single ladders longer than 30 feet shall not 
be used. 

(3) Two-Section Ladder Length. Two-section extension ladders 
longer than 60 feet shall not be used. All ladders of this type shall consist 
of two sections, one to fit within the side rails of the other, and arranged 
in such a manner that the upper section can be raised and lowered. 

(4) Trestle and Extension Trestle Ladder Length. Trestle ladders, or 
extension sections or base sections of extension trestle ladders longer 
than 20 feet shall not be used. 

(5) Painter's Step Ladder. Painter's step ladders longer than 12 feet 
shall not be used. 

(6) Mason's Ladder. A mason's ladder is a special type of single ladder 
intended for use in heavy construction work. Mason's ladders longer than 
40 feet shall not be used. 

(7) Cleat Ladder. A cleat ladder is a special type of single ladder in- 
tended for general use in construction work. 

(A) Cleat ladders longer than 30 feet shall not be used. 

(B) Wood side rails of ladders having cleat steps shall not be less than 
1 1/2 inches thick and 3 1/2 inches deep (2 by 4 inches nominal). 

(C) Wood cleats shall be inset into side rails not less than 1/2-inch or 
shall be attached directly to the edge of the side rails, in which case filler 



Page 566.1 



Register 2003, No. 13; 3-28-2003 



§3279 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



blocks of the thickness of the cleats shall be securely attached to the edge 
of the rail for the full length between cleats, or equivalent construction. 
The cleats shall be fastened to each rail by three 10-d wire nails or the 
equivalent thereof. 

(8) Double Cleat Ladder. A double cleat ladder is similar to a single 
cleat ladder, but is wider, with an additional center rail which will allow 
for two-way traffic for workers in ascending and descending. The cleats 
shall extend the full width of the ladder. 

(9) Other Types of Special Ladders. Other types of special ladders 
such as three-section extension ladders, fruitpicker's ladders, combina- 
tion step and extension ladders, stockroom step ladders, aisle-way step 
ladders, shelf ladders, and library ladders are not specifically covered by 
this code. 

(10) Trolley and Side-Rolling Ladders. Trolley ladders and side-rol- 
ling ladders longer than 20 feet shall not be used. 

(e) Care and Use of Ladders. 

( 1 ) Ladders shall be maintained in good condition at all times, the joint 
between the steps and side rails shall be tight, all hardware and fittings 
securely attached, and the movable parts shall operate freely without 
binding or undue play. 

(2) Metal bearings of locks, wheels, pulleys, etc., shall be frequently 
lubricated. 

(3) Frayed or badly worn rope shall be replaced. 

(4) Safety feet and other auxiliary equipment shall be kept in good con- 
dition to insure proper performance. 

(5) Ladders shall be inspected frequently and those which have devel- 
oped defects shall be withdrawn from service for repair or destruction 
and tagged or marked as "Dangerous, Do Not Use." 

(6) Rungs shall be kept free of grease and oil. 

(7) Portable rung and cleat ladders shall, where possible, be used at 
such a pitch that the horizontal distance from the top support to the foot 
of the ladder is one-quarter of the working length of the ladder (the length 
along the ladder between the foot and the top support). The ladder shall 
be so placed as to prevent slipping, or it shall be lashed, or held in posi- 
tion. Ladders shall not be used in a horizontal position as platforms, run- 
ways, or scaffolds. 

(8) Ladders for which dimensions are specified herein should not be 
used by more than one man at a time nor with ladder jacks and scaffold 
planks where use by more than one man is anticipated. In such cases, spe- 
cially designed ladders with larger dimensions of the parts shall be pro- 
cured. 

(9) Portable ladders shall be so placed that the side rails have a secure 
footing. The top rest for portable rung and cleat ladders shall be reason- 
ably rigid and shall have ample strength to support the applied load. 

( 1 0) Ladders shall not be placed in front of doors opening toward the 
ladder unless the door is blocked open, locked, or guarded. 

(11) Ladders shall not be placed on boxes, barrels, or other unstable 
bases to obtain additional height. 

(12) Ladders with broken or missing steps, rungs, or cleats, broken 
side rails, or other faulty equipment shall not be used. 

(13) Short ladders shall not be spliced together to provide long sec- 
tions. 

(14) Ladders made by fastening cleats across a single rail shall not be 
used. 

(15) Ladders shall not be used as guys, braces, or skids, or for other 
than their intended purposes. 

(16) On two-section extension ladders the minimum overlap for the 
two sections in use shall be as follows: 

Size of Ladder Overlap 

(Feet) (Feet) 

Up to and including 36 3 

Over 36 up to and including 48 4 

Over 48 up to and including 60 5 



( 1 7) Portable rung ladders with reinforced rails shall be used only with 
the metal reinforcement on the under side. 

(18) No ladder shall be used to gain access to a roof unless the top of 
the ladder extends at least 3 feet above the point of support at eave, gutter, 
or roof line. 

( 1 9) The employer shall equip all portable rung ladders with non-slip 
bases when there is a hazard of slipping. Non-slip bases are not intended 
as a substitute for care in safely placing, lashing, or holding a ladder that 
is being used upon oily metal, concrete, or slippery surfaces. 

(20) Cross-bracing on the rear section of stepladders shall not be used 
for climbing unless the ladders are designed and provided with steps for 
climbing on both front and rear sections. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 
L Amendment filed 7-17-75; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 75, No. 
29). 

2. Amendment filed 1-17-80; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 80, No. 
3). 

3. Amendment filed 1 2-12-84; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 84, No. 
50). 

4. Amendment filed 2-26-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
9). 

5. Amendment ofsubsection(e)( 12) filed 7-8-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register 85, No. 28). 

6. Amendment of subsection (e) filed 12-11-90; operative 1-10-91 (Register 9L 
No. 3). 

7. New subsection (e)(21) filed 10-20-94; operative 1 1-21-94 (Register 94, No. 
42). 

8. Repealer of subsection (e)(16) and subsection renumbering filed 6-16-98; op- 
erative 7-16-98 (Register 98, No. 25). 

9. Amendment of first paragraph filed 3-19-99; operative 4-18-99 (Register 99, 
No. 12). 

§ 3279. Portable Metal Ladders. 

Safety requirements for portable metal ladders placed in service after 
April 18, 1999, shall meet the requirements of ANSI A14.2-1990 or 
ANSI A 14. 10-2000, which are hereby incorporated by reference. Safety 
requirements for portable metal ladders placed in service on or before 
April 18, 1999, shall be based on the ANSI A 14.2 provisions in effect at 
the time such ladders were placed in service. 

(a) Scope. This section is intended to prescribe rules and requirements 
for the construction, care, and use of the common types of portable metal 
ladders, in order to insure safety under normal conditions of usage. It 
does not cover special-purpose ladders which do not meet the general re- 
quirements of this code. 

(b) Definitions. For definitions of terms associated with metal ladders, 
see Section 3278(b). 

(c) Requirements. 

(1) General. Specific design and construction requirements are not a 
part of this section because of the wide variety of metals and design possi- 
bilities. However, the design shall be such as to produce a ladder without 
structural defects or accident hazards such as sharp edges, burrs, etc. The 
metal selected shall be of sufficient strength to meet the test require- 
ments, and shall be protected against corrosion unless inherently corro- 
sion-resistant. 

(A) Rung Spacing. The spacing of rungs or steps shall be on 1 2-inch 
centers. 

(B) Rungs and Steps. Rungs and steps shall be corrugated, knurled, 
dimpled, coated with skid-resistant material, or otherwise treated to 
minimize the possibility of slipping. 

(2) General Specifications — Straight and Extension Ladders. 

(A) Ladder Width. The minimum width between side rails of a straight 
ladder or any section of an extension ladder shall be 12 inches. 

(B) Ladder Length. The length of single ladders or individual sections 
of ladders shall not exceed 30 feet. Two section ladders shall not exceed 
48 feet in length and over two section ladders shall not exceed 60 feet in 
length. 



• 



Page 566.2 



Register 2003, No. 13; 3-28-2003 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3281 



(C) Overlap. Based on the nominal length of the ladder, each section 
of a multi-section ladder shall overlap the adjacent section by at least the 
number of feet stated in the following: 

Nominal Length of Ladder Overlap 

(Feet) ' ( Feet) 

Up to and including 36 3 

Over 36, up to and including 48 4 

Over 48, up to 60 5 

(D) Extension ladders shall be equipped with positive stops which will 
insure the overlaps specified in the table above. 

(3) General Specifications — Step Ladders. 

(A) Length. The length of a step ladder is measured by the length of 
the front rail. Step ladders shall not exceed 20 feet in length. 

(B) Feet. The bottoms of the four rails are to be supplied with insulat- 
ing nonslip material for the safety of the user. 

(C) Spreaders. A metal spreader or locking device of sufficient size 
and strength to securely hold the front and back sections in the open posi- 
tion shall be a component of each step ladder. The spreader shall have all 
sharp points or edges covered or removed to protect the user. 

(4) General Specifications Trestles and Extension Trestle Ladders. 
(A) Length. Trestle ladders or extension sections or base sections of 

extension trestle ladders shall be not more than 20 feet in length. 

(5) General Specifications — Platform Ladders. The length of a plat- 
form ladder shall not exceed 20 feet. The length of a platform ladder shall 
be measured along the front rail from the floor to the platform. 

(d) Care, Use and Maintenance of Ladders. 

(1) General. Every employer using ladders shall enforce a mainte- 
nance program which includes the appropriate requirements Hsted be- 
low. 

(2) Maintenance. Ladders shall be maintained in good usable condi- 
tion at all times. Hardware fittings and accessories shall be checked prior 
to use and kept in good working condition. 

(3) Deteriorating Agents. When ladders are to be subjected to deterio- 
rating agents, a protective coating shall be applied to the equipment. 

(4) Oil and Grease. Equipment shall be cleaned of oil, grease, or slip- 
pery materials. 

(5) Damaged Ladders. Ladders having defects are to be marked and 
taken out of service. 

(6) Loading. Portable ladders are designed as a one-man working lad- 
der based on a 200-pound load. 

(7) Footing Support. The ladder base section shall be placed with a se- 
cure footing. Safety shoes of good substantial design shall be installed on 
all ladders. 

(8) Top Support. The top of the ladder must be placed with the two rails 
supported, unless equipped with a single support attachment. 

(9) Fastening Together. Ladders must not be tied or fastened together 
to provide longer sections. They must be equipped with the hardware fit- 
tings necessary if the manufacturer endorses extended uses. 

(10) Improper Use. 

(A) Ladders shall not be used as a brace, skid, guy or gin pole, gang- 
way, or for other uses than that for which they were intended, unless spe- 
cifically recommended for use by the manufacturer. 

(B) Cross-bracing on the rear section of stepladders shall not be used 
for climbing unless the ladders are designed and provided with steps for 
climbing on both front and rear sections. 

(11) Electrical Hazards. Portable metal ladders shall not be used in the 
vicinity of electrical circuits in places where they may come in contact 
with them. Portable metal ladders shall be legibly marked with signs 
reading "CAUTION — Do Not Use Around Electrical Equipment," or 
equivalent wording. 

Note-. Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 



History 

1. Amendment of subsection (c), repealer of subsections (d), (e)(2He)(4) and re- 
numbering of subsections (e)(5)-(c)(16) filed 1-17-80; effective thirtieth day 
thereafter (Register 80, No. 3). 

2. New subsection (c)(5) filed 5-30-80; effective thirtieth day thereafter ( Register 
80, No. 22). 

3. Releltering of subsection (e) to subsection (d) filed 8-28-80; effective thirtieth 
day thereafter (Register 80, No. 35). 

4. Amendment filed 12-12-84; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 84. No. 
50). 

5. Amendment of subsections (b), (c)(3)(A), (d)(1), (d)(2), (d)(4). (d)(5) and 
(d)(10) filed 2-26-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85. No. y). 

6. Amendment of subsection (d) filed 7-8-85; effective thirtieth dav thcrcatler 
(Register 85, No. 28). 

7. Editorial correction of subsection (d) filed 8-29-85; effective thirtieth da\' 
thereafter (Register 85. No. 35). Ed. Note: No change in text. 

8. Amendment of subsection (d) filed 12-1 1-90; operadve 1-10-91 (Register 91, 
No. 3). 

9. Amendment of subsecfion (d), designation of subsection (d)( 10)( A) and new 
subsection (d)(10)(B) filed 10-20-94; operative 11-21-94 (Register 94, No. 
42). 

1 0. Amendment of first paragraph filed 3-1 9-99; operative 4-18-99 (Register 99, 
No. 12). 

1 1 . Amendment of first paragraph filed 3-26-2003; operative 4-25-2003 (Regis- 
ter 2003, No. 13). 

§ 3280. Portable Reinforced Plastic Ladders. 

Safety requirements for portable reinforced plastic ladders placed in 
service after April 18, 1999, shall meet the requirements of ANSI 
A 14.5- 1992 or ANSI A 14. 10-2000, which are hereby incorporated by 
reference. Safety requirements for portable reinforced plastic ladders 
placed in service on or before April 18, 1999, shall be based on the ANSI 
A 14.5 provisions in effect at the time such ladders were placed in service. 
NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Secfion 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . New section filed 12-12-84; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 84, No. 
50). 

2. Editorial correction of first sentence (Register 95, No. 24). 

3. Amendment of first paragraph filed 3-19-99; operative 4-18-99 (Register 99, 
No. 12). 

4. Amendment filed 3-26-2003; operative 4-25-2003 (Register 2003, No. 13). 



Article 5. Window Cleaning 

§ 3281 . Definitions. 

(a) For the purpose of Articles 5 and 6, certain terms are defined as fol- 
lows, except for Appendix D: 

Anchor. The fitting, fastened to the window frame or wall, to which 
the belt terminal is attached. 

Anchor, double head. An anchor having two heads. 

Anchor, single head. An anchor having one head. 

Anchorage. A secure point of attachment for safety lines, lanyards or 
deceleration devices, and which is independent of the means of support- 
ing or suspending the employee. 

Anemometer. An instmment for measuring wind velocity. 

Angulated Roping. A suspension method where the upper point of sus- 
pension is inboard from the attachments on the suspended unit, thus caus- 
ing the suspended unit to bear against the face of the building. 

Belt Terminal. That part of the window cleaner's safety belt which is 
fastened to the terminal strap to be attached to the anchor during the oper- 
ation of window cleaning. 

Belts, Window Cleaner's. The equipment meeting the requirements of 
Section 3284, attached to the body of the window cleaner while cleaning 
windows and shall include the terminal straps. 

Buckle. Any device for holding the body belt and body harness closed 
around the wearer's body. 



Page 566.3 



Register 2003, No. 13; 3-28-2003 



§3281 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



Buckle, Friction. Single Pass, Fixed Bar. A buckle which maintains its 
position on the webbing by means of a single pass of the webbing over 
the fixed center bar. 

Buckle. Friction. Single Pass, Sliding Bar. A buckle which maintains 
its position on the webbing by means of a single looping of the webbing 
over the sliding center bar. 

Buckle, Friction. Double Pass. A buckle which maintains its position 
on the webbing by friction and requires a double pass of the webbing over 
the center bar. 

Buckle, Tongue. A buckle which depends upon a tongue passed 
through holes in the webbing or strength member of the belt to maintain 
its position. 

Building. Any building or structure more than one story in height or 
having window sills more than 12 feet above grade, which is a place of 
employment. 

Building Engineer of Record. A civil or structural engineer that de- 
signed the building or structure or the referenced portion of the building 
or structure. 

Building Face Roller. A rotating cylindrical member designed to ride 
on the face of the building wall to prevent the platform from abrading the 
face of the building and to assist in stabilizing the platform. 

Building Maintenance. Operations such as window cleaning, caulk- 
ing, metal polishing, reglazing, and general maintenance on building sur- 
faces. 

Building Official. Any state, county, city or local building inspector. 

Cable. A conductor, or group of conductors, enclosed in a weather- 
proof sheath, that may be used to supply electrical power and/or control 
current for equipment or to provide voice communication circuits. 

Carriage. A wheeled vehicle used for the horizontal movement and 
support of other equipment. 

Certification. A written, signed and dated statement confirming the 
performance of a requirement of this orders. 

Combination Cable. A cable having both steel structural members ca- 
pable of supporting the platform, and copper or other electrical conduc- 
tors insulated from each other and the structural members by nonconduc- 
tive barriers. 

Competent Person. One who is capable of identifying existing and pre- 
dictable hazards in the surroundings or working conditions which are un- 
sanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to employees, and who has authoriza- 
tion to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate them. 

Connector. A device which is used to couple (connect) parts of the sys- 
tem together. It may be an independent component of the system (such 
as a carabineer), or an integral component of part of system (such as a 
buckle or dee-ring sewn into a body belt or body harness, or a snap-hook 
spliced or sewn to a lanyard or self-retracting lanyard). 

Continuous Pressure. The need for constant manual actuation for a 
control to function. 

Control. A mechanism used to regulate or guide the operation of the 
equipment. 

Controlled Descent Apparatus (CDA). A CDA is a device used by 
window cleaners to achieve a controlled descent during window cleaning 
operations. The descent control capability of the CDA is derived by fric- 
tional forces developed when a line(s) passes over and/or around and/or 
through fixed members of the friction device designed to be readily con- 
trolled by the window cleaner. 

Danger Zone. The "Danger Zone" is the area within six feet of the edge 
of a building's roof or protruding ledge. This area is only considered a 
"Danger Zone" if the roof or protruding ledge is not provided with a 
guardrail that stands 42 inches in height, a 42 inch high parapet, or a com- 
bination thereof. 

Davit. A device, used singularly or in pairs, for suspending a powered 
platform from work, storage and rigging locations on the building being 
serviced. Unlike outriggers, a davit reacts its operating load into a single 
roof socket or carriage attachment. 

Davit, Fixed. A davit designed to remain at a fixed location. 



Davit, Ground Rigged. A davit which cannot be used to raise a sus- 
pended working platform above the building face being serviced. 

Davit, Mobile. A davit designed to be used in association with a roof 
car. 

Davit, Portable. A davit designed and dedicated for a specific building 
or roof area, capable of being moved manually from work location to 
work location within the dedicated area. 

Davit. Roof Rigged. A davit used to raise the suspended working plat- 
form above the building face being serviced. This type of davit can also 
be used to raise a suspended working platform which has been ground- 
rigged. 

Davit Socket, Pivoted. An anchoring device that pivots inboard from 
the building face and transfers loads imposed by the davit to the roof 
stmcture or parapet. 

Davit, Transportable. A davit designed to be structurally compatible 
with and capable of being moved from building to building or worksite 
(geographical area) to worksite. 

Deceleration Device. A mechanism, such as a rope grab, ripstitch lan- 
yard, specially woven lanyard, tearing or deforming lanyard, or automat- 
ic self retracting-safety line/lanyard, which serves to dissipate a substan- 
tial amount of energy during a fall arrest, or otherwise limits the energy 
imposed on an employee during fall arrest. 

Deceleration Distance. The additional vertical distance a falling em- 
ployee travels, excluding safety line elongation and free fall distance, be- 
fore stopping, from the point at which the deceleration device begins to 
operate. It is measured as the distance between the location of an em- 
ployee's body belt or body harness attachment point at the moment of ac- 
tivation (at the onset of fall arrest forces) of the deceleration device dur- 
ing a fall, and the location of that attachment point after the employee 
comes to a full stop. 

Equivalent. Alternative design, material or method that is acceptable 
to the Division and which the employer can demonstrate will provide an 
equal or greater degree of safety for employees than the method, material 
or design specified in the standard. 

Extension Device. A hand tool used to perform window cleaning on 
surfaces beyond the normal reach of the window cleaner. 

Free Fall. The act of falling before the personal fall arrest system be- 
gins to apply force to arrest the fall. 

Free Fall Distance. The vertical displacement of the fall arrest attach- 
ment point on the employee's body belt or body harness between onset 
of the fall and just before the system begins to apply force to arrest the 
fall. This distance excludes deceleration distance, safety line and lanyard 
elongation but includes any deceleration device slide distance or self-re- 
tracting safety line/lanyard extension before they operate and fall arrest 
forces occur. 

From the Inside. From a position in which all of the window cleaner's 
body except one arm and shoulder shall be on the interior side of the Hne 
of the window frame and with both feet on the floor. 

From the Outside. From a position in which more of the window clean- 
er' s body than one arm and shoulder is outside of the line of the window 
frame. 

Grade. The ground, floor, sidewalk, roof, or any other approximately 
level solid surface of sufficient area and having sufficient structural 
strength to be considered as a safe place to work. 

Ground Rigging. A method of suspending a working platform starting 
from grade to a point of suspension above grade. 

Guide Button. A building face anchor designed to engage a guide track 
mounted on a platform. 

Guide Roller. A rotating cylindrical member, operating separately or 
as part of a guide assembly, designed to provide continuous engagement 
between the platform and the building guides or guideways. 

Guide Shoe. A device attached to the platform designed to provide a 
sliding contact between the platform and the building guides. 

Height of Suspension. Where the term height of suspension is used in 
Articles 5 and 6 of these Orders, it refers to the specific suspension height 



Page 566.4 



Register 2003, No. 13; 3-28-2003 



T itle 8 General Industry Safety Orders ^ §3281 

on buildings or structures to the level below. To determine the suspension pcnded from roof tie-backs, the highest point is measured from the top 

height, the distance is measured from the highest point of suspension for of the parapet or roofs edge. The lowest measurement point at the level 

the building maintenance equipment (outrigger beam, davit, or roof car- or ground below includes, but is not limited to. roofs, sidewalks, streets. 

riage) to the level below. If the building maintenance equipment is sus- parking garages, and driveways. 



[The next page is 567.] 



Page 566.5 Register 2003, No. 13; 3- 28-2003 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3281 



Hoisting Machine. A device intended to raise and lower a suspended 
or supported unit. 

Hoist Rated Load. The hoist manufacturer's maximum allowable op- 
erating load. 

Installation. All the equipment and affected parts of a building which 
are associated with the performance of building maintenance using pow- 
ered platforms. 

Interlock. A device designed to ensure that operations or motions oc- 
cur in proper sequence. 

Intermittent Stabilization. A method of platform stabilization in which 
the angulated suspension wire rope(s) are secured to regularly spaced 
building anchors to assure that the platform continuously bears against 
the building within predetermined limits. 

Lanyard. A flexible length of rope, wire rope, or strap which is used 
to secure the body belt or body harness to a deceleration device, lifeline, 
or anchorage. 

Lifeline. A flexible line for connection to an anchorage at one end to 
hang vertically (vertical lifeline), or for connection to anchorage at both 
ends to stretch horizontally (horizontal lifeline), and which serves as a 
means for connecting other components to a personal fall arrest system 
to the anchorage. 

Live Load. The total static weight of workers, tools, parts, and supplies 
that the equipment is designed to support. 

Machine Screw or Bolt. A screw or bolt used to install anchors on met- 
al window frames or sections. 

Manual Boatswain's Chair. A seat for one person, suspended by a 
single line or tackle, which is designed to be raised and lowered by the 
user. 

Obstruction Detector. A control that will stop the suspended or sup- 
ported unit in the direction of travel if an obstruction is encountered, and 
will allow the unit to move only in a direction away from the obstruction. 

Operating Control. A mechanism regulating or guiding the operation 
of equipment that ensures a specific operating mode. 

Operating Device. A device actuated manually to activate a control. 

Outrigger Beam. A device, used singularly or in pairs, for suspending 
a working platform from work, storage, and rigging locations on the 
building being serviced. Unlike davits, an outrigger reacts its operating 
moment load as at least two opposing vertical components acting into 
two or more distinct roof points and/or attachments. 

Outrigger Beam, Fixed. An outrigger beam designed to remain at a 
fixed location. 

Outrigger Beam, Mobile. An outrigger beam designed to be used in 
association with a roof car. 

Outrigger Beam, Portable. An outrigger beam designed and dedicated 
to a specific building or roof area, which is capable of being moved from 
work location to work location within the dedicated area. 

Outrigger Beam, Transportable. An outrigger beam designed to be 
moved manually from building to building or worksite (geographical 
area) to worksite. 

Personal Fall Arrest System. A system used to arrest an employee in 
a fall from a working level. It consists of: an anchorage, connectors, a 
body harness and may include a lanyard, deceleration device, safety line, 
or suitable combinations of these. 

Platform Rated Load. The combined weight of workers, tools, equip- 
ment and other material which is permitted to be carried by the working 
platform at the installation, as stated on the load rating plate. 

Poured Socket. The method of providing wire rope terminations in 
which the ends of the rope are held in a tapered socket by means of poured 
spelter or resins. 

Primary Brake. A brake designed to be applied automatically whenev- 
er power to the prime mover is interrupted or discontinued. 

Prime Mover. The source of mechanical power for as machine. 

Rated Load. The manufacturer's recommended maximum load. 



Rated Strength. The strength of wire rope, as designated by its man- 
ufacturer or vendor, based on standard testing procedures or acceptable 
engineering design practices. 

Rated Working Load. The combined static weight of workers, materi- 
als, and suspended or supported equipment. 

Roof Powered Platform. A working platform where the hoist(s) used 
to raise or lower the platform is located on the roof. 

Rope. The equipment used to suspend a component of an equipment 
installation, i.e., wire rope. 

Rope Grab. A deceleration device which travels on a safety line and 
automatically frictionally engages the safety line and locks so as to arrest 
the fall of an employee. A rope grab usually employs the principle of incr- 
tial locking, cam/lever locking, or both. 

Safe Manner. The term means the use of any of the following methods 
of window cleaning in which the window cleaner is protected in accor- 
dance with these orders when: 

Standing on the sill. 

Working from a ladder. 

Working from a scaffold work platform. 

Working from a boatswain's chair. 

Working from a safe surface. 

Safe Surface. A horizontal surface intended to be occupied by em- 
ployees, which is so protected by a fall protection system that it can be 
reasonably assured that said occupants will be protected against falls. 

Safety Belt or Harness. A device used specifically for securing a work- 
er from the hazard of falls from elevated work areas and include: 

Body Belt. A strap with means both for securing it about the waist and 
for attaching it to a lanyard, safety line, or deceleration device. 

Body Harness. A design of simple or compound straps which may be 
secured about the wearer in a manner to distribute the fall arrest forces 
over at least the thighs, pelvis, waist, chest and shoulders with means for 
attaching it to other components of a personal fall arrest system. 

Safety Device. (Approved). (See Section 3206 of the General Industry 
Safety Orders.) 

Safety Factor. The ratio of the nominal strength to the nominal design 
load. 

Safety Line. A component consisting of a flexible line for connection 
to an anchorage at one end to hang vertically (vertical safety line), or for 
connection to anchorages at both ends to stretch horizontally (horizontal 
safety line) and which serves as a means for connecting other compo- 
nents of a personal fall arrest system to the anchorage. 

Scaffold. The complete scaffold structure including the work platform 
and all supporting members. 

Scaffold, Rolling. A fixed-height or extensible self-supporting scaf- 
fold that can be manually moved into place. 

Scaffold, Suspended, Manually Operated (Swinging Stage). A scaf- 
fold suspended from above by wire or fiber ropes and rigged with manu- 
ally operated pulley blocks or hoists or equivalent means so that the work 
platform elevation is easily adjustable. Such scaffold is not designed for 
use on a specific structure or group of structures. 

Scaffold, Suspended, Permanent. A scaffold that is designed for a spe- 
cific building and is used on that building only. 

Scaffold, Suspended, Power Driven. Permanent or transportable sus- 
pended scaffolds equipped with one or more power units (not manually 
powered) for raising or lowering the scaffold platform. 

Scaffold, Suspended, Transportable. A powered or manually oper- 
ated work platform that is brought to a work site for the purpose of per- 
forming maintenance or other work that by nature is of short duration. 

Secondary Brake. A brake designed to arrest the descent of the sus- 
pended or supported equipment in the event of an overspeed condition. 

Self-Powered Platform. A working platform where the hoist(s) used 
to raise or lower the platform is mounted on the platform. 



Page 567 



Register 2000, No. 13; 3-31 -2000 



§3282 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



Self-Retracling Safety Line/Lanyard. A deceleration device which 
contains a dmm-wound line which may be slowly extracted from, or re- 
tracted onto, the drum under slight tension during normal employee 
movement, and which, after onset of a fall, automatically locks the drum 
and arrests the fall. 

Sill. A surface that is part of the building or structure, immediately be- 
low the window, and of sufficient width and design to safely support win- 
dow cleaners and their equipment. 

Snap-Hook. A connector comprised of a hookshaped member with a 
normally closed keeper, or similar arrangement, which may be opened 
to permit the hook to receive an object and, when released, automatically 
closes to retain the object. Snap-hooks are generally one of two types: 

1 . The locking type (double-acting) with a self-closing, self-locking 
keeper which remains closed and locked until unlocked and pressed open 
for connection or disconnection, or 

2. Tlie non-locking type with a self-closing keeper which remains 
closed until pressed open for connection or disconnection. 

Speed Reducer. A positive type speed reducing machine. 

Stability Factor. The ratio of the stabilizing moment to the overturning 
moment. 

Stabilizer Tie. A flexible line connecting the building anchor and the 
suspension wire rope supporting the platform. 

Supported Equipment. Building maintenance equipment that is held 
or moved to its working position by means of attachment directly to the 
building or extensions of the building being maintained. 

Suspended Equipment. Building maintenance equipment that is sus- 
pended and raised or lowered to its working position by means of ropes 
or combination cables attached to some anchorage above the equipment. 

Tail Line. The nonsupporting end of the wire rope used to suspend the 
platform. 

Terminal Strap (Runner). The portion of a window cleaner's belt that 
attaches the terminals to the belt's waist band. 

Tie-in Guides. The portion of a building that provides continuous pos- 
itive engagement between the building and a suspended or supported unit 
during its travel on the face of the building. 

Tie-off (Tieing-ofO- The act of an employee, wearing personal fall 
protection equipment, connecting directly or indirectly to an anchorage. 
It also means the condition of an employee being connected to an anchor- 
age. 

Traction Hoist. A type of hoisting machine that does not accumulate 
the suspension wire rope on the hoisting drum or sheave, and is designed 
to raise and lower a suspended load by the appHcation of friction forces 
between the suspension wire rope and the drum or sheave. 

Trolley Carriage. A carriage suspended from an overhead track struc- 
ture. 

Verified. Accepted by design, evaluation, or inspection by a profes- 
sional engineer currently registered in the State of California. 

Waist Band. That part of the window cleaner's belt which is attached 
to the body of the window cleaner. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-8501.) 

Weatherproof. So constructed that exposure to adverse weather condi- 
tions will not affect or interfere with the proper use or functions of the 
equipment or component. 

Winding Drum Hoist. A type of hoisting machine that accumulates the 
suspension wire rope on the hoisting drum. 

Working Platform. Suspended or supported equipment intended to 
provide access to the face of a building and occupied by persons engaged 
in building maintenance. 

Wrap. One complete turn of the suspension wire rope around the sur- 
face of a hoist drum. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-8501.) 
NOTE; Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. New Article 5 (Sections 3281-3292) filed 6-20-75; effective thirtieth day 
thereafter (Register 75, No. 25). Window Cleaning Safety Orders formerly in 
Subchapter 21 (Sections 8700-8722). See Registers 26, No. 6 and 55, No. 13. 

2. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 



3. Amendment of subsections (a)(19) and (a)(22) filed 10-29-80; effective thir- 
tieth day thereafter (Register 80, No. 44). 

4. Editorial correcdon filed 10-7-83; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Resister 
83, No. 41). 

5. Amendment filed 9-12-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Reeister 85, No. 
37). 

6. Amendment filed 3-9-93; operative 4-8-93 (Register 93, No. 11). 

7. Amendment of definition of "Lanyard" and new definition of "Lifeline" filed 
4^-96; operative 5-4-96 (Register 96, No. 14). 

8. New definitions of "Controlled Descent Apparatus (CDA)," "Danger Zone" and 
"Height of Suspension," and amendment of former definition of "Boatswain's 
Chair" to new definition of "Manual Boatswain's Chair" filed 7-23-98; opera- 
tive 8-22-98 (Register 98, No. 30). 

9. New definifions of "Competent Person" and "Terminal Strap (Runner)" and 
amendment of definition of "Personal Fall Arrest System" filed 3-31-2000; 
operative 4-30-2000 (Register 2000, No. 13). 

§ 3282. General Requirements for All Window Cleaning 
Operations. 

Scope. This Article establishes safety requirements for the cleaning of 
all windows of all buildings. Window cleaning includes operation(s) of 
washing, wiping or other inethods of cleaning windows, window frames, 
curtain wall components, building panels, etc. 

Note: It is recognized because of special site conditions that certain provisions 
in Article 6 may be applicable and can be used in conjunction with equipment and/ 
or practices in this article. 

(a) Windows shall not to be cleaned from the outside or inside unless 
rneans are provided to enable such work to be done in a safe manner as 
provided in these orders. 

(b) Provisions for preventing accidents due to overhead high voltage 
lines shall be in conformance with the High Voltage Electrical Safety Or- 
ders, Article 37. 

(c) Employers shall provide their window cleaning employees with 
safety equipment and devices conforming with the requirements of these 
orders, and shall maintain such equipment in safe condition at all times. 

(d) Employers shall instruct their window cleaning employees in the 
proper use of all equipment provided to them, and shall supervise the use 
of the equipment and safety devices to insure that safe working practices 
are observed. 

(e) All einployees cleaning windows shall use safety devices and 
equipment as required herein. 

(f) Only employees who have been properly trained to handle such 
equipment shall be assigned to work from scaffolds or boatswain's 
chairs. 

(g) ( 1 ) In every building where window cleaning operations are per- 
formed in such a manner that a person stands on the sill in order to clean 
the window or works froin the inside where the window opening is of 
such size that it would be possible to fall through the open window to the 
outside, there shall be installed window cleaning safety anchors or other 
anchorages approved by the Division. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 
2-8502(a).) 

(2) Any window which when fully opened has a clear opening with the 
lesser dimension exceeding 1 8 inches, or any window in which the height 
to width relationship presents a hazard, shall be considered as presenting 
the hazard of falling through as specified in Section 3282(g)(1) above. 
(Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-8502(a)2.) 

(3) In every building other than those described in Section 3282(g)( 1 ), 
provisions shall be made for window cleaning by use of elevating plat- 
forms, rolling scaffolds, suspended scaffolds, boatswain's chairs, or lad- 
ders, as specified in these orders. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-8502(a)l.) 

(h) Lag screws shall not be used in new or replacement installations. 
(Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-8502(b).) 

(i) All glass draft deflectors shall be free of sharp edges that could cut 
workers removing deflectors in connection with the window cleaning op- 
erations. 

(j) Safety equipment, scaffolds and their components shall not be used 
with acids or other corrosive substances, or in corrosive atmospheres ex- 
cept when adequate precautions are taken to protect the scaffold from 
damage in accordance with recommendations of the corrosive substance 
manufacturer and the scaffold manufacturer. 



Page 568 



Register 2000, No. 13; 3-31-2000 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3283 



(k) Special precautions shall be taken by the user to protect scaffold 
members, including any wire, fiber, or synthetic rope, when a heat-pro- 
ducing process is in use. Ropes that have been contacted by the heat-pro- 
ducing process shall be considered to be permanently damaged and shall 
not be used for scaffold support. 

(/) Window cleaners shall not pass from one window sill to another 
window sill on the outside of a building unless one belt terminal is con- 
nected at all times. 

(m) Window cleaners shall not be permitted to work from any sill on 
which there is any obstruction or a slippery substance that might impair 
their footing. 

(n) Washing from the sill shall not be permitted unless there is a certain 
minimum standing room on the sill in relation to its slope. Permissible 
sill width and slope combinations are shown in Fig. 1. 

Fig. 1 
Sill Width and Slope 



2 >* 




10 IS 



20 2S 30 ii 1,0 



SLOPE OF STILL OR SURFACE 
(DEGREES BELOW HORIZONTAL) 

The chart above shows the relationship between minimum permissible 
sill widths and various sill slopes for washing windows from a standing 
position on the sill. If the point of intersection of a vertical line from the 
slope value with a horizontal line from the sill width value falls in the un- 
shaded area, washing windows from a standing position on the sill is per- 
missible. It is not permissible if the intersection falls anywhere in the 
shaded area. 

(o) No employee shall be permitted to work from, stand or walk on any 
surface that is not rated for such live loading by the building's engineer 
of record and/or a building official. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-8502(c)) 

(p)(l)(A) Building owners shall provide the employer written assur- 
ance, before use, that all their building's safety devices and equipment 
meet the provisions of these orders. The written assurance shall consider, 
but not be limited to: window anchors and fittings; load sustaining capa- 
bilities of platforms, building components, hoisting and supporting 
equipment; stability factors for carriages, platforms and supporting 
equipment; maximum horizontal force for movement of carriages and 
davits; design of carriages, hoisting machines, wire rope and stabilization 
systems; and design criteria for electrical wiring and equipment. 

(B) All safety devices and equipment considered in the written assur- 
ance shall be inspected at least every 12 months. All safety devices and 
parts of such equipment, including related building support structures, 
shall be inspected and where necessary, tested to determine if they are 
safe to use or operate. All such tests shall be conducted as required in Sec- 
tion 3296(b). 

(C) 1 . Owners of buildings 36 feet or more in height shall have an Oper- 
ating Procedures Outline Sheet (OPOS) where one or more of the follow- 
ing conditions apply to such buildings: 



A. A building does not have established window cleaning system or 
procedures meeting the requirements specified in Articles 5 and 6, or 

B. A building's original window cleaning procedures prepared in ac- 
cordance with the requirements in Articles 5 and 6 have been changed 
because of building modifications, or 

C. A building has extreme architectural features, which require the use 
of complex rigging or equipment, or a building that uses rigging or equip- 
ment not covered by these Orders. 

2. An OPOS shall be developed by a person(s) with knowledge in the 
design, installation and use of building maintenance equipment ( i.e.. pos- 
sessing Scaffold Inspection Testing certification as specified in Section 
3296). The OPOS shall be written in a manner that can be readih under- 
stood by the employers. An OPOS that requires structural modifications 
to the building or existing building maintenance equipment shall have 
such modifications designed by a mechanical, structural or civil engineer 
currently registered in the State of California with experience in the de- 
sign and installation of such equipment. 

3. An OPOS shall be developed which at a minimum shall contain the 
elements of Appendix A of this Article. 

(2) Employers shall not permit their employees to use any building 
safety devices or equipment prior to receiving copies of the written assur- 
ance and, if required, an OPOS from the building owner as required by 
Section 3282(p)(l)(A) and (C) above. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3. Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code; and Section 18943(c), Health and Safety Code. 

History 
1- Amendment filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 

2. Editorial correction filed 10-7-83; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 
83, No. 41). 

3. Amendment filed 9-12-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
37). 

4. Amendment filed 3-9-93; operative 4-8-93 (Register 93, No. II). 

5. Redesignation of former subsection (p)(l) to new subsection (p)(l)(A), new 
subsections (p)(l)(B)-(p)(l)(C)3., and amendment of subsection (p)(2) filed 
7-23-98; operafive 8-22-98 (Register 98, No. 30). 

§ 3283. Anchors and Fittings. 

(a) General Requirements. 

( 1 ) An installed anchor shall not be used for any purpose other than at- 
tachment of window cleaner's belt terminals. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 
2-8503(a)l.) 

(2) Anchors shall be installed on the inside of a window which is to be 
washed from the inside but presents a hazard of falling through to the out- 
side, as defined in Section 3282(g)(2). (Title 24, Part 2, Section 
2-8503(a)2.) 

(3) A window to be cleaned from the sill shall be suited structurally to 
the installation of anchors and, when opened, shall not interfere with the 
attachment of window cleaner's belt terminals to the anchors. (Title 24, 
Part 2, Section 2-8503(a)3.) 

(4) Vertically pivoted or hinged windows to be cleaned from the sill 
shall have an unobstructed passage to the exterior sill that is at least 1 6 
inches wide by 40 inches high. Double-hung, single-hung or counterbal- 
anced windows shall have a minimum passage 2 1 inches wide and 30 in- 
ches high from the sill. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-8503(a)4.) 

(5) The maximum width of a double-hung or single-hung window to 
be washed while standing on sill or ledge, supported by an anchor on ei- 
ther side of the window is 6 feet. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-85{)3(a)5.) 

(6) The width of a stationary panel to be washed from the inside from 
an adjacent open casement window shall not be more than 2 1/2 feet. 
Note: Assuming that the window cleaner could work from the inside alternately 
from casement panels on each side of the stationary panel, this would mean that 
a 5 foot width of stafionary panel would be the maximum width that could be han- 
dled in this manner without anchors. (Title 24, Part 2. Section 2-85()3(a)6.) 

(7) Stationary panels up to 5 feet in width may be cleaned by standing 
on a sill or ledge (See Figure 1 for width and slope restrictions) while sup- 
ported by anchors on each side of the panels if access is provided via an 
openable panel adjacent to the stationary panel. For stationary panels 



Page 569 



Register 2000, No. 13; 3-31-20OO 



§3283 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



over 5 feet, but not exceeding 6 feet in width, the sill or ledge must be at 
least 1 inches wide with a slope not exceeding 5 degrees. (Title 24, Part 
2, Section 2-8503(a)7.) 

(8) A series of stationary panels without openable panels between shall 
require traveling methods utilizing a method, such as double-headed an- 
chors, overhead trolley system, or other equivalent means of providing 
a continuous means for window cleaners to tie off their safety belts. 
(Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-8503(a)8.) 

(9) Traveling on the outside of the building shall not be permitted 
where the sill or ledge is less than 6 feet wide unless it is possible to keep 
at least one window cleaner's belt terminal attached at all times. The dis- 
tance between anchors shall not exceed 4 feet horizontally unless the sill 
or ledge is at least 12 inches wide and the slope is less than 5 degrees in 
which case the distance between anchors may be as much as 6 feel. This 
method of traveling shall not be permitted, however, if the sill or ledge 
is not continuous with at least 6 inches in front of the mullions or if each 
window unit is not readily accessible. 

(10) When the roof level or ledge is 8 feet or more in width, as mea- 
sured from the face of the building to the danger point, no special protec- 
tion, such as parapet, railing or window anchors, is required. 

When the distance is from 6 feet to 8 feet wide, anchors are required 
unless there is a railing or parapet at least 2 feet high. 

When the distance is less than 6 feet, anchors or equivalent protection 
as required by Section 3212 shall be required. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 
2-8503(a)9.) 

(11) Traveling methods that comply with these regulations shall not 
be permitted on ledges or sills less than 6 feet in width unless double- 
headed anchors or 2 single-headed anchors with separate usable heads 
are provided on each side of all windows in the series, along with at least 
one openable panel to afford a safe, convenient means of access. (Title 
24. Part 2, Section 2-8503(a)10.) 

(12) Where double-headed anchors are installed, they shall be placed 
so that there is enough free room for belts to be attached to both terminals 
at one anchor location along with the capability for either belt to be re- 
moved independently. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-8503(a)ll.) 

(b) Anchor Design and Material Specifications. 

(1) All window anchors and fittings shall comply with the applicable 
portions of Section 4.5 of ANSI/ASME A39.1-1991, Safety Require- 
ments for Window Cleaning, which is herein incorporated by reference. 
Manufacturers of window anchors and fittings shall submit to the Divi- 
sion all pertinent test and other data called for by this Order. Only those 
anchors and fittings granted approval by the Division shall be used. 

(2) The manufacturer or authorized representative, of any window unit 
intended for installation in new construction or remodeling shall submit 
evidence satisfactory to the Division that the complete installation with 
approved anchors has successfully withstood the drop test specified in 
paragraph 4.5.3(d)(2) of ANSUASME A39.1-1991, Safety Require- 
ments for Window Cleaning, which is herein incorporated by reference, 
without failure of the frame at the point of attachment of the anchors and 
without detachment of the window unit from its attachments to the wall 
section. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-8503(b).) 

(c) Anchor Location. 

(1) Anchor Side Clearance. The center line of the anchor head shall be 
at least one inch away from obstructions at either side that would interfere 
with engagement of belt terminals. 

(2) Clearance Above and Below Anchors. Because many belt termi- 
nals slide onto the anchor from above and extend 4 or 5 inches below the 
anchor when attached, obstructions shall not be allowed within this dis- 
tance above or below the anchor head. 

(3) Minimum Bolt Edge Distance. The minimum distance from the 
face of the building for bolt installations when the bolt is placed in a re- 
veal shall be as follows: 

In Reinforced Concrete — 2 1/2 inches if secured to reinforcing steel. 
In Brick — At brick joint, not less than 8 inches from building face. 
(Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-8503(c).) 



(d) Anchor Installations. 

( 1 ) Locations. Anchors shall be attached to the side frames of the win- 
dow or to the building at a point no less than 42 inches nor more than 5 1 
inches above the window sill. 

Exception: Where the windows are less than 48 inches in height and of such de- 
sign that the window cleaner would normally work from the outside, anchors shall 
be located at a height above the sill that is approximately two-thirds the total height 
of the window. 

(2) Wood. When the anchor and bolt are forged as one piece, such an- 
chors may be used in single or double configurations when provided with 
a front collar to prohibit anchor rotation and a rear flat washer of at least 
twice the diameter of the bolt with a lock washer and nut. The bolts shall 
be a minimum of 3/8-inch in diameter and shall pass through a solid sec- 
tion of the window construction. The drilled hole shall be no more than 
1/16-inch larger than the bolt, and any excess bolt thread shall be cut off 
and the thread peened over or upset to prohibit the nut from loosening or 
being removed. 

When anchors are employed with separate bolt(s), the preceding con- 
ditions will apply, provided that either two machine or carriage bolts are 
employed, or certain special anchor types have one bolt with screws to 
prohibit anchor movement. All anchors and hardware shall be of Type 
303, 304, or 316 stainless and shall meet or exceed the material require- 
ments of these orders. Anchor nuts shall be tamper proof. 

(3) Concrete. Anchors attached to concrete poured-in-place in build- 
ings erected after October 3, 1955 shall be installed while the concrete 
is being placed. Such anchors shall extend not less than 5 inches into the 
concrete and shall have a cross-sectional area of not less than one-fourth 
of a square inch and shall be provided with a fluke at the end of the anchor 
not less than 1 inch in length. 

(4) Masonry. Anchors attached to masonry, other than concrete 
poured-in-place, in buildings erected after October 3, 1955, shall be in- 
stalled while the wall is under construction and shall be shaped to build 
into the joints between masonry units. Such anchors shall be not less than 
8 1/2 inches long and shall have a cross-sectional area of not less than 
one-fourth of a square inch at all unexposed points and shall have a fluke 
or flukes having holding surface of not less than 1 inch in length that shall 
be firmly imbedded in the masonry. 

(5) Masonry and Concrete. Anchors installed on buildings of masonry 
and concrete construction erected before October 3, 1955 shall be at- 
tached to the window frame as required in these orders, or by other meth- 
ods acceptable to the Division. 

(6) Hollow Metal. Anchors attached to hollow metal construction shall 
be installed by one of the following methods: 

(A) At least two machine screws or bolts of 3/8-inch diameter stain- 
less steel or equivalent passing through the frame and a steel reinforcing 
plate 3/8-inch thick that extends not less than 5 inches above the top bolt 
hole, placed on the inside of the frame and secured by means of nuts and 
lock washers. In cases where it is impracticable to provide nuts and lock 
washers, the reinforcing plate may be tapped to receive 3/8-inch diame- 
ter bolts, and the bolts shall extend through the plate. 

(B) Where the threaded bolt is an integral part of the anchor, it shall 
be at least I /2-inch in diameter and shall be secured by means of a nut 
and lock washer, or any other method acceptable to the Division. 

(C) Bolts used to attach anchor fastenings shall be secured by means 
of nuts tightened to the torque specified by the bolt manufacturer or other 
equivalent means. 

(7) Solid Metal. Anchors attached to solid metal construction shall be 
installed by one of the following methods: 

(A) At least two machine screws or bolts of 3/8-inch diameter stain- 
less steel or equivalent passing through the frame and secured by means 
of nuts and lock washers. In cases where it is impracticable to provide 
nuts and lock washers, the metal frame shall be reinforced with a 
3/8-inch thick plate, 6 inches long, tapped to receive both attaching bolts 
which shall extend through the reinforcing plate. 



Page 570 



Register 2000, No. 13; 3-31-2000 



Titles 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3285 



• 



(B) Where the threaded bolt is an integral part of the anchor, it shall 
be at least 1/2-inch in diameter and shall be secured by means of a nut 
and lock washer, or any other method acceptable to the Division. 

(C) Bolts used to attach anchor fastenings shall be secured by means 
of nuts tightened to the torque specified by the bolt manufacturer or other 
equivalent means. 

(8) Aluminum. 

(A) When anchors are attached to hollow or solid aluminum frames, 
the reinforcing plate shall be coated or protected so as to minimize elec- 
trolytic action between unlike metals. 

(B) All anchors and anchor fastenings shall be provided with means 
to prevent them from turning, backing off or becoming loose. 

(C) Bolts used to attach anchor fastenings shall be secured by means 
of nuts tightened to the torque specified by the bolt manufacturer or other 
equivalent means. 

(9) The use of expansion shield anchors is prohibited. (Title 24, Part 
2, Section 2-8503(d).) 

(e) Inspection of Anchors and Fittings. Inspection of window cleaning 
anchors and fittings on buildings shall be conducted at least every 12 
months. 

(f) Anchor Replacement. Anchors and fittings subject to impact load- 
ing or other possible structural damage shall be replaced. Replacement 
shall be as specified by the anchor manufacturer or other method accept- 
able to the Division. 

Note: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code; and Section 18943(c), Health and Safety Code. 

History 

1. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 

2. Editorial correction filed 10-7-83; effecdve thirtieth day thereafter (Register 
83, No. 41). 

3. Amendment of subsections (a)(8), (b)(1) and (2). (d)(2) and (5) filed 9-12-85; 
effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 37). 

4. Amendment filed 3-9-93; operative 4-8-93 (Register 93, No. 11). 

§ 3284. Window Cleaner's Belts, Personal Fall Arrest 

Systems, Personal Fall Restraint Systems and 
Positioning Devices. 

(a) Window Cleaner's Belts. 

(1) General Requirements. 

Window cleaner's belts shall be approved and kept in good repair and 
visually inspected for defects prior to each use. They shall be inspected 
at least twice a year by the employer and all parts showing defects or ex- 
cessive wear shall be promptly replaced. The use of natural fiber or can- 
vas terminal straps (runners) is prohibited. 

(A) Each belt shall be numbered or given an identifying mark, and a 
record kept showing date of purchase, dates when terminal rope straps 
were renewed, and dated when entire belt assembly was inspected. 

(B) Window cleaners using a window cleaner's belt shall attach one 
belt terminal to an anchor before stepping out onto the sill. During the op- 
eration of window cleaning, both belt terminals shall be attached to the 
anchors. 

(C) The fittings on the waistband through which the terminal strap or 
rope passes, shall be so constructed that it will be impossible for the safe- 
ty terminal to pass through them. 

(D) Metal thimbles, or equivalent, shall be provided where ropes or 
straps are secured to eyes or rings. 

(2) Belt Design. 

(A) All window cleaner's belts shall be designed, built and labeled to 
conform to ANSUASME A39.1-1995, Safety Requirements for Win- 
dow Cleaning which is hereby incorporated by reference. 

(B) In no case shall load carrying members be constructed of leather. 
Note: It is not the intent of this regulation to prohibit the use of window cleaner's 
belts that meet the requirements of ANSI A39. 1-1969, 1987, or 1991 and are so 
labeled. 

(b) Safety Belts and Harnesses. 

( 1 ) General Requirements. Lanyards shall be kept as short as reason- 
ably practicable to minimize the possibility and length of a free fall. The 



length of the lanyard shall be as short as practicable. Care shall be used 
to see that the lanyard is attached to a verified anchorage in such a manner 
that will develop its full strength. Lanyards with knots, hitches, or bends 
shall not be used. 

(A) Lanyards consisting of wire rope or rope covered wire shall not be 
used in window cleaning operations while standing on sills. 

(B) Chest harnesses shall not be used in window cleaning operations. 

(C) Body belts and their associated lanyards when subjected to a fall 
shall produce a stopping force of not more than 5 times gravit} . 

(D) Body harness and its associated lanyards when subjected to a fall 
shall produce a stopping force of not more than 8 times gravity. 

(E) Belts and harnesses and their lanyards which have been subjected 
to impact loading shall be removed from service and destroyed. 

(F) Belts and harnesses and their lanyard assemblies shall he \ isually 
inspected for defects prior to each use. They shall be inspected according 
to the manufacturer's recommendations by the employer at least twice 
each year. Tlie date of the most current semi-annual inspection shall be 
recorded on an inspection tag which shall be attached to the belt. In addi- 
tion, records shall be kept and maintained showing date of purchase, 
dates when attachments were renewed, and dates when the entire belt as- 
sembly was inspected and by whom. 

(G) The free ends of the lanyards of synthetic materials shall be lightly 
seared and, in the case of round rope, shall also be seized (whipped). 

(H) Belts havmg single pass, fixed or sliding bar, friction buckles shall 
not be used for window cleaning operations. 

(I) Safety lines shall be capable of supporting a dead weight of 5000 
pounds. 

(J) Double-acting Snap hooks shall be provided on all lanyards to 
minimize the possibility of accidental disengagement. The snap keeper 
shall be restrained by the snap nose to absorb side loads. 

(K) Rope lanyards shall be spliced directly to the belt through an inte- 
gral rope loop, spliced to a dee ring or spliced to a snap hook for attaching 
to the dee ring. Splices to hardware shall be over suitable thimbles. 

(L) Web lanyards used on belts without dee rings shall terminate in a 
sewn eye of sufficient size to accommodate the width of the belt, but no 
larger. To the free end shall be sewn a snap hook in accordance with the 
standard, which shall result in a finished lanyard capable of meeting the 
qualification tests indicated in Appendix (C). 

(M) Safety belts and harnesses ordered or purchased after July 1, 1 993 
shall have a durable label permanently affixed stating that the belt or har- 
ness meets the testing requirements of Article 6, Appendix C. The dura- 
ble label shall contain at least the following information: 

1 . Name or designation of manufacturer. 

2. Model designadon. 

3. Date manufactured. 

4. Serial number. 

5. Test Specifications. 

(c) All personal fall arrest systems, personal fall restraint systems and 

posifioning devices used in window cleaning operations shall comply 

with Section 1670 of the Construcfion Safety Orders. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. Editorial correction filed 10-7-83: effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 
83, No. 41). 

2. Amendment of subsections (a)(1) and (b)(2)(C) filed 9-12-85; effective thir- 
tieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 37). 

3. Amendment of heading and section filed 3-9-93; operative 4-8-93 (Register 
93, No. 11). 

4. Amendment of secdon heading and subsecrions (a)( 1 ), (a)(2)(A) and (a)(2)(B), 
repealer of subsections (a)(2)(A)l .-5., and new subsection (c) filed 3-3 1 -2000; 
operadve 4-30-2000 (Register 2000, No. 13). 

§ 3285. Suspended Scaffolds. 

Use and Applicadon. Suspended transportable scaffolds shall comply 
with the applicable provisions of Article 23 of the Construction Safety 
Orders, and permanent scaffolds shall be installed as required by Article 
6 of the General Industry Safety Orders. 



Page 571 



Register 2000, No. 13; 3-31-2000 



§3286 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



(a) No manually operated suspended scaffold for which the rigging 
must be suspended by hand shall be extensible to more than 1 30 feet from 
the work platform to the upper anchorage. 

( 1 ) No power operated suspended scaffold for which the rigging must 
be suspended by hand shall be extensible to more than 130 feet from the 
work platform to the upper anchorage, unless the rigging and suspended 
safety lines are raised and lowered by mechanical means. (Title 24, Part 
2, Section 2-8504 (a).) 

(b) When a suspended scaffold is suspended over an area traveled by 
workers, the public or vehicular traffic, the ground area directly under the 
work zone shall be effectively blocked by means of barricades, or an at- 
tendant shall be stationed so as to keep the area clear. Warning signs shall 
also be posted below. 

(c) When on a working platform, each window cleaner shall be pro- 
tected by a personal fall arrest system meeting the requirements of Article 
6, Appendix C, Section I of the General Industry Safety Orders, and as 
otherwise provided by these orders. 

( 1 ) Dog lines shall not be used in lieu of an independent safety line on 
two-line suspended, transportable scaffolds having only one suspension 
line at each end of the scaffold. 

(d) Permanent scaffolds shall be provided on all buildings exceeding 
1 30 feet in height. All permanent scaffold installations installed after July 
1, 1993, shall be installed and comply with the provisions of Article 6. 
All permanent scaffold installations installed prior to July 1, 1993, and 
after September 29, 1974 shall be installed and comply with all provi- 
sions of Article 6, Appendix D. Permanent scaffolds installed prior to 
September 29, 1974 shall be inspected, tested and maintained in accor- 
dance with the provisions of Article 6, Appendix D. 

NOTE: For the purpose of this section, a permanent suspended scaf- 
fold and a permanent suspended work platform shall be considered to be 
the same. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-8504 (b).) 

NOTE; Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 

2. Amendment filed 10-29-80; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 80, No. 
44). 

3. Editorial correction filed 10-7-83; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 
83, No. 41). 

4. Amendment filed 9-12-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
37). 

5. Amendment of first paragraph filed 5-1-90; operative 5-31-90 (Register 90, 
No. 23). 

6. Amendment of first paragraph and subsecfions (a)( 1 ), (c) and (d) filed 3-9-93; 
operative 4-8-93 (Register 93, No. 1 1). 

7. Amendment of subsection (c) filed 3-3 1-2000; operative 4-30-2000 (Register 
2000, No. 13). 

§ 3286. Manual Boatswain's Chairs and Controlled 
Descent Apparatus (CDA). 

(a) Use and Application. 

(1)(A) Boatswain's chairs and CDAs shall be used for window clean- 
ing operations only where the windows cannot be cleaned safely and 
practicably by other means. 

(B) When boatswain's chairs or CDAs are used for window cleaning 
operations, the following conditions shall be complied with: 

1 . Manual boatswain' s chairs shall not be used where the height of sus- 
pension exceeds 75 feet or unless otherwise accepted by the Division 
where the heights exceed 75 feet. 

2. CDAs shall not be used where the height of suspension exceeds 130 
feet or unless otherwise accepted by the Division in writing when the 
height exceeds 1 30 feet. 

3. Roof tie-backs or other approved independent anchorages shall be 
provided for each support line(s) and each safety line. 

4. Each support line(s) and each safety line shall be connected to ap- 
proved independent anchorages. 

5. An Operating Procedures Outline Sheet (OPOS) shall be developed 
as required in Section 3282(p)(l)(C). 



(2)(A) Employees shall be trained in the use of boatswain' s chairs and/ 
or CDAs before they shall be permitted to use such equipment. 

(B) Training shall include, but not be limited to, proper rigging of sup- 
port lines, inspection of primary support line(s) and safety lines and an- 
chorage, safe use of CDAs or boatswain's chairs, fall arrest systems, and 
self rescue methods. 

(3) When a boatswain's chair or CDA is suspended over an area tra- 
versed by workers, pedestrians or vehicular traffic, the ground area be- 
low and within the window cleaner's work zone shall be effectively 
blocked by barricades, or an attendant shall be stationed to keep the area 
clear. Warning signs shall also be posted below. 

(4) Employees using boatswain's chairs or CDAs shall be provided, 
and instaicted in the use of, a personal fall arrest system meeting the re- 
quirements of Article 6, Appendix C, Section I of the General Industry 
Safety Orders, and as otherwise provided by these orders. Each em- 
ployee's fall arrest system shall be secured to an independent safety line 
attached to an approved anchorage. 

(b) Rigging, Block and Tackle. 

( 1 ) Rope attachment to a block shall be by a thimble and splice. 

(2) A safety hook or shackle shall be used on the upper block to prevent 
accidental disengagement. 

(3) Each double block of luff (or watch) tackle shall be branded or 
otherwise clearly marked so as to indicate the fully extended length in 
feet from block to block. 

(4) Where the chair connects to the block and tackle, a safety hook 
shall be used to prevent accidental rope disengagement. 

(5) Tackle shall consist of rope equivalent in strength to 5,400 pounds. 
Blocks shall be compatible with the suspension rope diameter. 

(6) Parapet or cornice hooks shall be provided with tie-back rings. 
Each parapet or cornice hook shall be tied back with wire rope to a roof 
tie-back or equivalent anchorage. 

(c) Specifications. 

(1)(A) Boatswain's Chair. The chair shall be suspended from its four 
comers by means of rope slings. It shall have a seat not less than 24 inches 
long by 10 inches wide and, if of soft wood, 2 inches thick (1 1/8 inches 
if of oak or ash). It shall be reinforced across the full width by cleats se- 
curely fastened to each end. A rope or strap guard across the front and rear 
approximately 18 inches above the seat shall be provided. The seat may 
be constructed of material other than wood, provided the material is 
equivalent in strength to 2 inches of soft wood or 1 1/8 inches of oak or 
ash. If constructed of material of equivalent strength, cleats across the full 
width of the seat shall be provided unless structural analysis indicated 
they are not necessary. Other design and construction may be substituted 
if it can be shown to provide equal safety and strength. 

(B) Boatswain's chairs, their supports and all accessories shall be ca- 
pable of supporting, without failure, 4 times the maximum load that may 
be placed thereon. 

Note: See Section 3286(b)(1). 

(C) Buckets used in boatswain's chair work shall be attached in such 
a manner that the buckets will not fall. 

(2) CDA Seatboards. (A) Seatboards shall be made of wood or other 
suitable materials, and may be reinforced. Seatboards shall be capable of 
supporting a live load of at least 250 pounds. All rope and webbing used 
in suspending the seatboard to a CDA shall be of synthetic fiber, prefer- 
ably nylon or polyester, that has a rated minimum strength of 5000 
pounds. 

(B) Buckets used in seatboard work shall be attached in such a manner 
that they will not fall. 

(d) Controlled Descent Apparatus (CDA) 

(1)(A) CDA system shall include but not be limited to the following: 

1. Working line(s); 

2. Controlled descent device; 

3. Seatboard; 

4. Personal fall arrest system; 

5. Independent safety line (lifeline); 

6. Locking carbineer (D-ring). 



Page 572 



Register 2000, No. 13; 3-31-2000 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3287 



• 



Note: For the purpose of Section 3286 a full body harness is required as part of 
the personal fall airest system. 

(B ) The controlled descent device and seatboard shall be permanently 
marked with: 

1. Manufacturer's or Trade name, and 

2. Model number, and 

3. Identification (serial) number, and 

4. Date of manufacture. 

(C) Working lines and safety lines shall be permanently marked or 
tagged with: 

1. Manufacturer's name, and 

2. Length/size, and 

3. Date of manufacture, and 

4. Date placed in service. 

(D) Personal fall arrest systems shall comply with the requirements in 
Article 6, Appendix C of the General Industry Safety Orders. 

(2) The working line(s) shall be the proper size to pass over and/or 
around the fixed members of the controlled descent device body as rec- 
ommended by the device manufacturer. 

(3) Working lines, safety lines, and lanyards shall have spliced or 
swaged ends as per the rope manufacturer's specifications. 

(4) Lanyards shall not exceed 4 feet in length. 

(5) Knots shall not be permitted at ends or anywhere along the length 
of lanyards, working lines or safety lines. 

(6) Descent control devices shall be used in accordance with the man- 
ufacturer's instructions. Employees shall not be permitted to use descent 
control devices unless these devices are specifically designed for build- 
ing maintenance or window cleaning operations. 

(7) The entire CDA system shall be visually inspected before and dur- 
ing each use. If any part of the system shows excessive wear, damage or 
deformation, that part shall be removed from service and discarded. 

(8)(A) Safety lines and lanyards shall be removed from service as rec- 
ommended by the manufacturer or if one of the following conditions is 
evident or occurs: 

1 . Braids or webbing are cut, or 

2. Excessive abrasion or worn fibers, or 

3. There is hardness or stiffness, or 

4. Dirt or grit has clogged fibers, or 

5. Rust, tar or grease is present, or 

6. Line size has been reduced, or 

7. Safety lines and lanyards are subjected to a shock load, or 

8. Safety lines and lanyards are exposed to chemicals that affect their 
strength, or 

9. Safety lines and lanyards are exposed to excessive ultra violet deg- 
radation. 

(B) Working lines shall not be used longer than two (2) years from date 
first placed in service or three (3) years from date of manufacture. 

(9) All descent control devices shall be 1 00% proof load tested at 3600 
pounds without visual evidence of cracking, breaking or permanent de- 
formation. 

(10) Chemicals having adverse effects on the CDA system, as deter- 
mined by the chemical or equipment manufacturer, shall not be used for 
window cleaning. 

(11) Any working or safety line that passes over any edge of a building 
or structure or passes over any sharp object shall be protected from cut- 
ting and/or abrasion. 

(12) Working lines that have been used to stop a CDA' s free fall of four 
feet or more in distance shall be removed from service. 

(13) Working lines that have been subjected to a rapid descent by an 
employee using the CDA shall be removed from service. 

( 14) Prior to making a drop, the building exterior shall be visually in- 
spected and, where necessary, appropriate measures taken to ensure that 
building features, such as sharp edges of parapets and window frames 
cannot impair the structural integrity of the CDA system or associated 
fall protection rigging. 



(15) A safe means of access, which includes the use of a personal fall 
arrest system, shall be provided before employees gain access to and 
egress from CDA drop locations. 

Notf:: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. Editorial correction filed 10-7-83; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 
83. No. 41). 

2. Amendment of subsection (a)(4) and (b)( 1 ) and (5) filed Q-n-S.S; etTecti\ e tliir- 
lieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 37). 

3. Amendment of subsections (a)(3), (a)(4) and (c)(1) filed 3-9-^3; opcratixc 
4-8-93 (Register 93, No. ] 1 ). 

4. Amendment of section heading and section filed 7-2.3-98; operative 8 22 98 
(Register 98, No. 30). 

.5. Amendment of subsection (a)(4) filed 3-31-2000; operative 4-30-2000 ( Reg- 
ister 2000, No. L3). 

§ 3287. Ladders. 

(a) Use and Apphcation. 

(1) Ladders shall be used for window cleaning only where the win- 
dows cannot otherwise be cleaned safely and practicably by means of ap- 
proved anchors and window cleaning belts, but this method shall not be 
used to clean a window that requires the use of a fully extended extension 
ladder in excess of 40 feet. 

(2) At all times when a cleaner is working on a ladder over 1 8 feet 
working length, a person shall stand at the foot of it, face it, and hold it 
with both hands. 

(3) All ladders shall be used at such a pitch that the horizontal distance 
from the top support to the foot of the ladder is one-quarter the assembled 
length of the ladder (i.e., the length along the ladder between the foot and 
the top support). 

Note: Nonslip bases are not intended as a substitute for care in safely placing, 
lashing or holding a ladder that is being used on oily, metal, concrete or slippery 
surfaces. 

(4) Pointed ladders may be used for window cleaning. Rollers shall not 
be used at the point. 

(5) Portable metal ladders shall not be used in the vicinity of electrical 
circuits in places where they may come in contact with them. Portable 
metal ladders shall be legibly marked with signs reading "CAUTION — 
Do Not Use Around Electrical Equipment," or equivalent wording. 

(6) Each ladder shall be inspected daily and those which developed de- 
fects shall be withdrawn from service for repair or destruction and shall 
be tagged or marked "Danger, Do Not Use." Improvised repairs shall not 
be made. 

(7) Ladders shall be stored in such a manner as to provide ease of ac- 
cess or inspection, and to prevent danger of accident when withdrawing 
a ladder for use. Ladders, when not in use, shall be stored at a location 
where they will not be exposed to the elements, but where there is good 
ventilation. Wood ladders shall not be stored near radiators, stoves, steam 
pipes, or other places subjected to excessive heat or dampness. Rungs 
shall be kept free of grease and oil. 

(8) Sectional ladders shall not be used by more than one man at a time, 
or with ladder jacks and scaffold planks. 

(9) The top rest for the ladder shall be rigid and shall have ample 
strength to support the applied load. Ladders shall not be placed in front 
of doors unless the door is blocked open, locked or guarded. They shall 
not be placed on boxes, barrels or other unstable bases to obtain addition- 
al height. 

(10) When ascending, working upon or descending the ladder, the user 
shall face the ladder. 

(1 1) The use of ladders with hooks attached, to be hung on or over a 
parapet wall or other projection, shall not be permitted in window clean- 
ing. 

(12)(A) No employee shall be permitted to stand on or work from the 
top 3 rungs of a ladder unless there are structural members that provide 
a firm handhold or the employee is protected from falling by a personal 
fall protection system (e.g., positioning device or fall restraint system) in 



Page 573 



Register 2007, No. 13; 3-30-2007 



§3288 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



accordance with the requirements of Section 1670 of the Construction 
Safety Orders. 

(B) Stepladders. Employees shall not stand on the topcap or the step 
below the topcap of a stepladder. 
NOTt-: Tops of self supporting ladders shall not be considered as a rung. 

( 13) No ladder shall be used where the base of the ladder is above grade 
unless there is a safe means of access to the base and adequate fastenings 
to prevent the ladder from slipping or falling. 

(14) Ladders shall not be used on scaffolds to gain additional height, 
(b) Specifications. 

(1) Wood ladders shall comply with Section 3278, Portable Wood 
Ladders of the General Industry Safety Orders and they shall not be 
painted with other than a transparent material. 

Exception. Refer to Section 3287(a)(1) for maximum length. 

(2) Metal ladders shall meet the requirements of Section 3279, Porta- 
ble Metal Ladders of the General Industry Safety Order. 
EXCEPTION: Refer to Section 3287(a)( 1) for maximum length. 

(3) Plastic reinforced ladders shall meet the requirements of Section 
3280 of the General Industry Safety Orders. 

(4) All ladders shall be equipped with nonslip bases suitable to the 
bearing surface. Middle and lop sections shall not be used as bottom sec- 
tions unless the user equips them with nonslip bases. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. Editorial correction filed 10-7-83; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 
83, No. 41). 

2. Amendment of subsections (a)(5), (a)(n) and new subsection (a)(14) filed 
9-12-8.S; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 37). 

3. Amendment of subsections (b)( 1 ) and (b)(2), renumbering of subsection (b)(3) 
to subsection (b)(4), and new subsection (b)(3) filed 3-9-93; operative 4-8-93 
(Register 93, No. 11). 

4. Redesignation and amendment of former subsection (a)(12) to subsection 
(a)(12)(A) and new subsection (a)(12)(B) filed 3-31-2000; operative 
4-30-2000 (Register 2000, No. 13). 

§ 3288. Rolling Scaffolds. 

Scaffolds used for window cleaning shall be of construction at least 
equivalent to that required by Article 22 of the Construction Safety Or- 
ders and shall be used in accordance with those orders. 
NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. Editorial correction filed 10-7-83; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 
83, No. 41). 

2. Amendment of heading and section filed 3-9-93; operative 4-8-93 (Register 
93, No. 11). 

§3289. Tools. 

Extension tools over 6 feet long shall not be used to clean windows 
from a position above grade. Extension devices so used shall be secure 
to prevent inadvertent detachment of the brush or squeegee. 
Note: Operations in proximity to high-voltage lines are restricted by High-Vol- 
tage Electrical Safety Orders, Article 37. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Secfion 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. Editorial correction filed 10-7-83; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 
83, No. 41). 

2. Amendment filed 9-12-85; effecfive thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
37). 

3. Change without regulatory effect filed 9-23-88 (Register 88, No. 41). 

4. Repealer of section 3289 and renumbering of section 3291 to section 3289 filed 
3-9-93; operative 4-8-93 (Register 93, No. 11). 

§ 3290. Prohibited Equipment. 

Window jacks or portable sills shall not be used in window cleaning. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Secfion 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. Editorial correction filed 10-7-83; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 
83, No. 41). 



§ 3291. Special Design Considerations — Permanent Roof 
Top Installations. 

(a) General. A Civil or Mechanical Engineer registered in the State of 
California shall prepare calculations and/or plans substantiating the 
structural integrity of all facets of the complete installation, including the 
eyebrow sleeves, roof davit systems, roof outrigger beams, and roof tie- 
backs. Such plans shall be available to the Division at the installation site. 

(b) Projecting Ledges or "Eyebrows" at Roof Level. 

( 1 ) Those buildings so designed that projecting ledges or "eyebrows" 
at the roof or intervening levels prohibit the normal suspension of ropes 
supporting suspended scaffolds, shall be provided with sleeves that ex- 
tend through the ledge or eyebrow. The minimum inside diameter of the 
sleeve shall be 6 inches to permit the passage of shackles, sockets, clamps 
and other rigging devices. The center-on-center spacing of sleeves shall 
be consistent with the length of the suspended scaffold to be utilized, but 
in no case shall this spacing exceed 24 feet for transportable scaffolds. 
Sleeves shall not be used as a rigging point unless securely anchored to 
the structure and be capable of supporting the rated load with a minimum 
safety factor of four. 

Note: In lieu of the use of sleeves, other means of scaffold support, such as soffit 
monorail systems, etc., that offer equivalent safety and are acceptable to the Divi- 
sion, may be provided. 

(2) Each sleeve assembly or each scaffold support system shall be pro- 
vided with a securely affixed durable and readily visible metal plate bear- 
ing the rated load and installer's name in letters at least 1/4-inch in 
height. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-8505(b).) 

(c) Roof Davit Systems. 

Roof davit systems specifically shall comply with applicable provi- 
sions of Article 6 and the following: 

( 1 ) Each davit shall be provided with a securely affixed, durable and 
readily visible metal plate bearing the following information in letters at 
least 1/4-inch in height: 

(A) The davit's rated load, based upon a safety factor of 4. 

(B) Manufacturer's name. 

(C) Precautionary warning message prohibiting use of the davit within 
10 feet of high-voltage lines. 

(2) Provisions shall be made to easily rotate davits while on the scaf- 
fold platform or boatswain's chair unless the platform may be safely re- 
positioned inboard or outboard without the necessity for personnel to 
stand on unguarded roofs or ledges unless protected by a personal fall re- 
straint system complying with the requirements of Section 1 670 of the 
Construction Safety Orders. 

(3) Portable davit systems shall comply with the applicable provisions 
of Article 6. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-8505(c).) 

(d) Outrigger Beams. 

(1) Outrigger beams shall not be employed on buildings exceeding 
1 30 feet in height unless acceptable to the Division. All outrigger beams 
shall be designed to support the rated load imparted by the suspended 
scaffold or boatswain's chair with a safety factor of at least 4. Outrigger 
beams shall not extend more than 6 feet beyond the face of the building. 
Only steel or high strength alloy beams shall be used. The inboard end 
of outrigger beams, measured from the fulcrum point to the anchorage 
point, shall be not less than 1 1/2 times the outboard end in length. The 
fulcrum point of the beam shall rest on leg(s) or equivalent supports se- 
curely attached to the beam and so arranged as to prevent lateral overturn- 
ing of the beam. Bearing pads shall be securely affixed to each support 
and shall be of sufficient area to safely distribute imposed loads to the 
roof structure. The inboard ends of outrigger beams shall be securely an- 
chored by means of tension members (tie-down) affixed to the structural 
frame of the roof in such a manner that applied forces are resisted within 
allowable limits affording a safety factor of at least 4. All tie-down fit- 
tings at the inboard end of the beam shall be of a type that vibration effects 
shall not produce accidental disengagement. Safety hooks for beam tie- 
down purposes shall not be used. The use of counterweights at the in- 
board end of mobile and fixed outrigger beams are prohibited. 



• 



Page 574 



Register 2007, No. 13; 3-30-2007 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§ 3291 App. A 



• 



(2) The use of counterweights on the inboard end of portable or trans- 
portable outrigger beams shall be permitted only when the following 
conditions have been met: 

(A) The building on which the counterweight beam is to be used, was 
constmcted prior to July 23, 1990. 

(B) The building was not designed for other suspension systems. 

(C) An Operating Procedures Outline Sheet (OPOS) shall be devel- 
oped in accordance with Section 3282(p) of these orders. 

(D) The counterweights shall be secured to the inboard ends of beams 
and shall consist of non-flowable solid materials (e.g., concrete, steel, 
etc.). 

(E) The outrigger shall be secured with a tie-back to a verified anchor- 
age on the building during the entire time of use. The anchorage shall be 
designed to have a safety factor of not less than four based on the rated 
capacity of the outrigger. 

(F) The counterweight shall provide a stability factor of at least 4 
against overturning or upsetting of the outrigger. 

(G) Each outrigger shall be designed by a registered engineer to sup- 
port a load of 4 times the rated hoist capacity or the total load whichever 
is greater. Outrigger beams shall have a minimum rated capacity of 1 000 
pounds. 

(H) The outrigger beam shall be secured against horizontal movement 
when in use. 

(I) Portable outriggers weighing more than 80 pounds shall be pro- 
vided with a stable means for its transport (wheels or cart). 

(J) Each outrigger shall be so located that the suspension wire ropes, 
for two point suspended working platforms, are hung parallel. 

(K) The parts of sectional outrigger beam(s) (i.e. an outrigger beam(s) 
consisting of more than one piece) shall be identified (e.g. numbered, co- 
lor-coded). Parts shall not be interchanged or substituted except with the 
approval of the manufacturer. 

(3) Each outrigger beam shall be provided with a securely affixed, du- 
rable and readily visible metal plate bearing the following information in 
letters at least 1/4-inch in height: 

(A) The beam's rated load. 

(B) Manufacturer's name. 

(C) Precautionary warning message prohibiting use of the beam with- 
in 10 feet of high-voltage Hnes. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 3105A.4.2.) 

(e) Portable Outrigger Beams. The use of portable outrigger beams 
shall comply with the applicable provisions of Article 6. (Title 24, Part 
2, Section 2-8505(d).) 

(f) Roof Tie-Backs. 

( 1 ) Every building constructed 3 stories or 36 feet or more in height, 
shall have roof tie-backs or other permanent devices installed at the roof 
level for the purpose of securing or tying back suspended scaffold hooks 
or clamps and safety lines. 

Exceptions; 

1 . Roof tie-backs are not required on buildings employing other acceptable means 
of permanently installed rooftop maintenance systems specified in this Article or 
Article 6. 

2. Roof tie-backs are not required on buildings constructed up to 4 stories or 48 
feet in height when building maintenance can be accomplished using extension 
tools, ladders, approved ground equipment such as scaffolds, or aerial devices de- 
signed and used for positioning personnel. 

(2) Such devices should be spaced at approximately 12-foot intervals; 
however, the spacing shall depend primarily on the availability of roof 
structural framing members of sufficient strength to safely carry applied 
loads. Tie-backs may be installed in structural parapets that are of ade- 
quate strength to sustain applied loads, but, placement shall be as close 
to the roof level as practicable. Design criteria for tie-backs shall be as 
follows: 

(A) Roof tie-backs shall have at least a 2-inch inside diameter closed 
"eye." 

(B) Tie-back assembly shall be hot-dip galvanized or afforded equiv- 
alent corrosion resistance. 

(C) Assembly and anchorage provisions adequate to sustain a 5000 
pound load applied in any direction without permanent deformation. 



(3) Suspended scaffolds shall not be permitted unless roof tie-backs 
or equivalent anchorages are provided. 

(g) Parapets of Excessive Height. Where building parapet heights ex- 
ceed 42 inches, special provisions shall be employed to provide a safe 
means of access to the top of the parapet for rigging purposes if such ac- 
cess is necessary to the safe performance of the work. If such support sys- 
tems as davit/sockets, parapet hooks or clamps, etc., are utilized at the top 
of parapets, a catwalk platform meeting the applicable sections of these 
orders, or other equivalent means of affording access for the safe per- 
formance of the work shall be provided. (Title 24, Part 2. Section 
2-8505(f).) 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76. No. 
29). 

2. Amendment filed 7-26-78; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 7H. No. 
30). 

3. Editorial connection of subsection (c)(1) (Register 79, No. 17). 

4. Editorial correction filed 10-7-83; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 
83, No. 41). 

5. Amendment filed 9-12-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 

37). 

6. Renumbering of section 3291 to section 3289 and renumbering and amendment 
of section 3292 to section 3291 filed 3-9-93; operative 4-8-93 (Register 93. 
No. 11). 

7. Amendment of subsection (f)(1) and NOTI-. filed 4-22-96; operative 5-22-96 
(Register 96, No. 17). 

8. Change without regulatory effect redesignating former subsection (f")(3)(A) to 
new subsection (f)(4) filed 6-22-98 pursuant to section 100, title 1, California 
Code of Regulations (Register 98, No. 26). 

9. Amendment of subsections (d) and (d)(1), new subsections (d)(2)-(d)(2)(K), 
subsection renumbering and amendment of newly designated sub.section 
(d)(3)(C) filed 7-23-98; operative 8-22-98 (Register 98, No. 30). 

10. Amendment of subsections (c)(1) and (c)(2) filed 3-31-2000; operative 
4-30-2000 (Register 2000, No. U). 

1 1 . Amendment of subsections (a), (f)( 1) and (f)(2)(A)-(C), repealer of subsection 
(f)(3), subsecfion renumbering, amendment of newly designated sub.section 
(f)(3) and amendment of NoTi- filed 3-27-2007; operative 4-26-2007 (Regis- 
ter 2007, No. 13). 

Appendix A 

Operating Procedures Outline Sheet (OPOS) 

An OPOS establishes safe window cleaning and exterior maintenance 
procedures for buildings and structures. An OPOS shall include all of the 
necessary elements in pictorial and written form, to instruct employees 
in the safe use of roof supported building maintenance equipment or win- 
dow cleaning procedures not covered by these Orders. An OPOS shall 
contain at least the following elements: 

1. Isometric or plan view drawing (pictorial drawing) of the building's 
roof, including the building's name, address, and the date the OPOS was 
prepared; and 

a. The drawing shall be legible and kept with the building's written as- 
surance; and 

2. Identification of drop zones, recommended drop sequences, scaf- 
fold configurations, and specific building maintenance procedures in- 
cluding the equipment to be used, e.g. permanent roof rigging platform, 
ground rigged scaffolding, davits, outrigger beams, boatswain's chair or 
seatboard, etc.; and 

3. Identification of all anchorage points for personal fall arrest systems 
and building maintenance equipment; and 

4. Identification of personal fall protection requirements and, if appli- 
cable, procedures for securing equipment; and 

5. If applicable, identification of all dangerous areas on the roof by 
highlighting all of the "Danger Zone(s)'" on the pictorial drawing(s); and 

6. If applicable, description of the means and methods to be used to 
transfer equipment from drop location to drop location or between build- 
ing levels; and 

7. Identification of equipment limitations, load ratings, and special use 
conditions; and 



Page 575 



Register 2007, No. 13; 3-30-2007 



§3292 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



8. Provisions for pre-operational. operation and maintenance inspec- 
tions; and 

9. Identification of the access and egress to tlie work locations and the 
storage area(s) for the permanent or transportable building maintenance 
equipment; and 

10. If applicable, indication of the location and method of stabilization 
provided for the suspended equipment; and 

1 1 . Emergency and rescue procedures, and means of communications 
to be used during such procedures; and 

12. Method(s) to be used to control employee exposure to falls while 
they are in the "Danger Zone." 

Note: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 
1. New Appendix A filed 7-23-98: operative 8-22-98 (Register 98, No. 30). 



Article 6. Powered Platforms and 
Equipment for Building Maintenance 

§ 3292. General. 

(a) Scope. 

(1) This article covers powered platform installations permanently 
dedicated to interior or exterior building maintenance of a specific struc- 
ture or group of structures. This article does not apply to suspended scaf- 
folds used for construction work and covered under Article 23 of the 
Construction Safety Orders. Building maintenance includes, but is not 
limited to, such tasks as window cleaning, caulking, metal polishing and 
reglazing. 

Note: It is recognized because of special site conditions that certain provisions 
contained in Article 5 may be applicable and can be used in conjunction with 
equipment and/or practices in this article. 

(2) Effective date. This article is effective July 1, 1993. (Title 24, Part 
2, Section 2-8520(a).) 

(b) Application. 

(1) New Installations. This article applies to all permanent installa- 
tions completed after a July 1 , 1993. Major modifications to existing in- 
stallations completed after that date are also considered new installations 
under this article. 

(2) Existing Installations. 

(A) Permanent installations in existence and or completed before July 
1, 1993 shall comply with Sections 3296 through 3299 and Appendix C 
of this article. 

(B) In addition, permanent installations completed after September 

29, 1974 and in existence and/or completed before July 1, 1993, shall 

comply with Appendix D of this Article. 

Note: For permanent installations completed before September 29, 1 974, see Ap- 
pendix D, subparagraph (b). (Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-8520(b).) 

(c) Assurance. 

(1) Building owners of new installations shall inform the employer be- 
fore each use in writing that the installation meets the requirements of 
Sections 3294 and 3295 relating to; required load sustaining capabilities 
of platforms, building components, hoisting and supporting equipment; 
stability factors for carriages, platforms and supporting equipment; max- 
imum horizontal force for movement of carriages and davits; design of 
carriages, hoisting machines, wire rope and stabilization systems; and 
design criteria for electrical wiring and equipment. 

(2) Building owners shall base the information required in subsection 
(c)(1) of this section on the results of a field test of the installation before 
it is placed into service and following any major alteration to an existing 
installation as required in Section 3296. The assurance shall also be based 
on all other relevant available information, including, but not limited to, 
test data, equipment specifications and verification by a professional en- 
gineer currently registered in the State of California. 

(3) Building owners of all installations, new and existing, shall inform 
the employer in writing that the installation has been inspected, tested 
and maintained in compliance with the requirements of Sections 3296 



and 3297 and that all protection anchorages meet the requirements of 
Section I paragraph (c)( 1 0) in Appendix C of this article. 

(4) Building owners shall make available to employers the manufac- 
turer's instruction manual and all other written documents necessary for 
the operation and maintenance of the building's permanent powered plat- 
form installations. 

(5) The employer shall not permit employees to use the installation 
prior to receiving written assurance from the building owner that the in- 
stallation meets the requirements contained in subsections (c)(1), (c)(3) 
and (c)(4) of this section. 

(d)(1) Owners of buildings or structures shall develop an emergency 
procedures plan to assure both safe access to and egress from suspended 
permanent or transportable exterior and/or interior equipment. Where an 
Operating Procedures Outline Sheet (OPOS) has been developed for the 
building or structure in accordance with Appendix A of Article 5, the 
emergency procedures plan shall be incorporated into the OPOS. 

(A) The emergency procedures plan shall be developed on a contract 
plan sheet in written and/or pictorial form and be available for review at 
the site by affected employees. 

(B) Necessary features such as safety belt anchorages and adequate 
safe walkways required during emergencies shall be incorporated into 
the structure itself and delineated on the emergency procedure plan. 
NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . Amendment of article heading and new section filed 3-9-93; operative 4-8-93 
(Register 93, No. 11). For prior history, see Register 85, No. 37. 

2. Editorial correction of printing error in History 1. (Register 93, No. 28). 

3. Chanse without regulatory effect amending section heading and subsection (a) 
filed 7-6-93: operative 8-5-93 (Register 93, No. 28). 

4. Amendment of subsection (d)( 1 ) and amendment of Note filed 4-27-2000; op- 
erative 5-27-2000 (Register 2000, No. 17). 

5. Amendment of subsection (c)(5) and amendment of Note filed 3-27-2007; op- 
erauve 4-26-2007 (Register 2007, No. 13). 

§ 3293. Definitions. 

Definitions for certain terms used in Article 6 and Appendixes A 
through C are located in Article 1, Section 3207 and Article 5, Section 
3281. Definitions for the terms used in Appendix D are located in Appen- 
dix D and only apply to Appendix D. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 
2-8250(c).) 

NOTE; Authority cited: Section 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code; and Section 18943(c), Health and Safety Code. 

History 

1 . Repealer and and new secfion filed 3-9-93; operative 4-8-93 (Register 93, No. 
1 1 ). For prior history, see Register 85, No. 37. 

2. Amendment filed 3-31-2000; operafive 4-30-2000 (Register 2000, No. 13). 

§ 3294. Powered Platform Installations — Affected Parts of 
Buildings. 

(a) General Requirements. The following requirements apply to af- 
fected parts of buildings which utilize working platforms for building 
maintenance; 

(1) Structural supports, tie-downs, tie-in guides, anchoring devices 
and any affected parts of the building included in the installation shall be 
designed by or under the direction of a professional engineer currently 
registered in State of California and experienced in such design; 

(2) Exterior installations shall be capable of withstanding prevailing 
climatic conditions; 

(3) The building installation shall provide safe access to, and egress 
from, the equipment and sufficient space to conduct necessary mainte- 
nance of the equipment; 

(4) The affected parts of the buildings shall have the capability of sus- 
taining all the loads imposed by the equipment; and, 

(5) The affected parts of the buildings shall be designed so as to allow 
the equipment to be used without exposing employees to a hazardous 
condition. 

(b) Tie-in Guides. 

(1) The exterior of each building shall be provided with tie-in guides 
unless the conditions in subsection (b)(2) or (b)(3) of this section are met. 



Page 576 



Register 2007, No. 13; 3-30-2007 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3294 



• 



NoTi;: See Figure 1 in Appendix B of this Article for a description of a typical con- 
tinuous stabilization system utilizing tie-in guides. 

(2) If angulated roping is employed, tie-in guides required in subsec- 
tion (b)( 1 ) of this section may be eliminated for not more than 75 feet of 
the uppermost elevation of the building, if infeasible due to exterior 
building design, provided an angulation force of at least 10 pounds is 
maintained under all conditions of loading. 

(3) Tie-in guides required in subsection(b)(l) of this section may be 
eliminated if one of the guide systems in subsection (b)(3)(A), (b)(3)(B) 
or (b)(3)(C) of this section is provided, or an equivalent. 

(A) Intermittent Stabilization System. The system shall keep the 
equipment in continuous contact with the building facade, and shall pre- 
vent sudden horizontal movement of the platform. The system may be 
used together with continuous positive building guide systems using tie- 
in guides on the same building, provided the requirements for each sys- 
tem are met. 

1 . The maximum vertical interval between building anchors shall be 
three floors or 50 feet, whichever is less. 

2. Building anchors shall be located vertically so that attachment of the 
stabilizer ties will not cause the platform suspension ropes to angulate the 
platform horizontally across the face of the building. The anchors shall 
be positioned horizontally on the building face so as to be symmetrical 
about the platform suspension ropes. 

3. Building anchors shall be easily visible to employees and shall allow 
a stabilizer tie attachment for each of the platform suspension ropes at 
each vertical interval. If more than two suspension ropes are used on a 
platform, only the two building-side suspension ropes at the platform 
ends shall require a stabihzer attachment. 

4. Building anchors which extend beyond the face of the building shall 
be free of sharp edges or points. Where cables, suspension wire ropes and 
safety lines may be in contact with the building face, external building 
anchors shall not interfere with their handling or operation. 

5. The intermittent stabilization system building anchors and compo- 
nents shall be capable of sustaining without failure at least four times the 
maximum anticipated load applied or transmitted to the components and 
anchors. The design wind load for each anchor shall be 600 pounds. 

6. The building anchors and stabilizer ties shall be capable of sustain- 
ing anticipated horizontal and vertical loads from winds specified for 
roof storage design which may act on the platform and wire ropes if the 
platform is stranded on a building face. If the building anchors have dif- 
ferent spacing than the suspension wire ropes or if the building requires 
different suspension spacings on one platform, each building anchor and 
stabilizer tie shall be capable of sustaining the wind loads. 

Noth: See Figure 2 in Appendix B of this article for a description of a typical inter- 
mittent stabilization system. 

(B) Button Guide Stabilization System. 

1 . Guide buttons shall be coordinated with platform mounted equip- 
ment as specified in Section 3295(e)(6). 

2. Guide buttons shall be located horizontally on the building face so 
as to allow engagement of each of the guide tracks mounted on the plat- 
form. 

3. Guide buttons shall be located in vertical rows on the building face 
for proper engagement of the guide tracks mounted on the platform. 

4. Two guide buttons shall engage each guide track at all times except 
for the initial engagement. 

5. Guide buttons which extend beyond the face of the building shall 
be free of sharp edges or points. Where cables, ropes and safety lines may 
be in contact with the building face, guide buttons shall not interfere with 
their handling or operation. 

6. Guide buttons, connections and seals shall be capable of sustaining 
without damage at least the weight of the platform, or provision shall be 
made in the guide tracks or guide track cormectors to prevent the platform 
and its attachments from transmitting the weight of the platform to the 
guide buttons, connections and seals. In either case, the design load shall 
be 600 pounds per building anchor. 

Nim:: 1. See Section 3295(e)(6) for relevant equipment provisions. 



2. See Figure 3 in Appendix B of this article for a description of a typical button 
guide stabilization system. 

(C) System utilizing angulated roping and building face rollers. The 
system shall keep the equipment in continuous contact with the building 
facade, and shall prevent sudden horizontal movement of the platform. 
TTiis system is acceptable only where the suspended portion of the equip- 
ment in use does not exceed 1 30 feet above a safe surface or ground level. 
and where the platform maintains no less than 10 pounds angulation 
force on the building facade. 

(4) Tie-in guides for building interiors (atriums) may be eliminated 
when a professional engineer currently registered in the State of Califor- 
nia determines that an alternative stabilization system, including systems 
in Section 3294(b)(3)(A), (B) and (C) or a platform tie-off at each work 
station will provide equivalent safety. 

(c) Roof Guarding. 

(1) Buildings or structures shall be provided with a perimeter guard 
consisting of a parapet or guardrail system meeting the requirements of 
Section 3209 located above the adjacent horizontal surface on which por- 
table equipment such as davits and outriggers beams are used to support 
suspended equipment or which provides access to or from such equip- 
ment. 

(2) All parapet and guardrail systems installed on structures serviced 
by equipment meeting Article 6 requirements that is transported on a 
trackless-type roof car shall be designed and installed to withstand a 
minimum lateral force of 200 pounds per linear foot applied at 21 inches 
above the surface supporting the roof car. All other installations shall be 
designed and installed to withstand a minimum lateral force of 50 pounds 
per linear foot applied at the top of the standard height guardrail or para- 
pet. 

(3) The perimeter guard shall not be more than 6 inches inboard of the 
inside face of abarrier, i.e., the parapet wall or roof edge curb of the build- 
ing being serviced; however, the perimeter guard location shall not ex- 
ceed an 18-inch set-back from the building face. 

(4) Where building features such as parapets or guardrails are required 
to support workers' safety lines, they shall be designed to withstand the 
combined vector component loads imposed without causing damage to 
such building features. 

(5) Parapets exceeding 6 feet in height above the building area roof sur- 
face requiring roof-rigged transportable suspended scaffold or similar 
equipment shall have a suitable peripheral walkway located 42 inches be- 
low the parapet on all areas using the exterior maintenance system. Roll- 
ing scaffolds or ladders shall not be used unless they, the roof and exterior 
maintenance systems are designed to be compatible with their use. 

(6) A specifically designed fall protecdon system shall be provided 
and used on surfaces such as sloping roof areas where workers' duties re- 
quire that they gain access to or work from such areas. 

(A) The fall protection system shall support a 5,000 pound safety line 
loading and enable the worker to ascend and descend the sloping surface 
in a controlled manner using a primary and secondary support line se- 
cured to a fall protecdon system at the upper end and to the safety line at 
the lower end. 

(B) Access shall not be permitted on surfaces such as glazed roofs, 
vaults, or skylights unless an engineer currently registered in the State of 
Cahfomia has certified that the surface vrill support all anticipated loads. 

(d) Equipment Stops. Operational areas for trackless type equipment 
shall be provided with structural stops, such as curbs, to prevent equip- 
ment from traveling outside its intended travel areas and to prevent a 
crushing or shearing hazard. 

(e) Maintenance Access. Means shall be provided to traverse all car- 
liages and their suspended equipment to a safe area for maintenance and 
storage. 

(f) Elevated Track. 

(1) An elevated track system which is located four feet or more above 
a safe surface, and traversed by carriage supported equipment, shall be 
provided with a walkway and guardrail system; or 



Page 577 



Register 2007, No. 32; 8-10-2007 



§3295 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



(2) The working platform shall be capable of being lowered, as part of 
its normal operation, to the lower safe surface for access and egress of the 
personnel and shall be provided with a safe means of access and egress 
to the lower safe surface. 

(g) Tie-down Anchors. Imbedded tie-down anchors, fasteners, and 
affected structures shall be corrosion resistant. 

(h) Cable Stabilization. 

( 1 ) Hanging safety lines and all cables not in tension shall be stabilized 
at each 200 foot interval of vertical travel of the working platform beyond 
an initial 200 foot distance. 

(2) Hanging cables, other than suspended wire ropes, which are in con- 
stant tension shall be stabilized when the vertical travel exceeds an initial 
600 foot distance, and at further intervals of 600 feet or less. 

(i) Emergency Planning. A written emergency action plan shall be de- 
veloped and implemented for each kind of working platform operation 
in conjunction with the emergency procedures plan required of the build- 
ing owner by Section 3292(d)(1). This plan shall explain the emergency 
procedures which are to be followed in the event of a power failure, 
equipment failure or other emergencies which may be encountered. The 
plan shall also explain that employees inform themselves about the build- 
ing emergency escape routes, procedures and alarm systems before oper- 
ating a platform. Upon initial assignment and whenever the plan is 
changed, the employer shall review with each employee those parts of the 
plan which the employee must know to protect himself or herself in the 
event of an emergency. 

()) Building Maintenance. Repairs or major maintenance of those 
building portions that provide primary support for the suspended equip- 
ment shall not affect the capability of the building to meet the require- 
ments of this standard. 

(k) Electrical Requirements. The following electrical requirements 
apply to buildings which utilize working platforms for building mainte- 
nance: 

(1) General building electrical installations shall comply with the 
Electrical Safety Orders, unless otherwise specified in this article; 

(2) Building electrical wiring shall be of such capacity that when full 
load is applied to the equipment power circuit, not more than a five per- 
cent drop from building service-vault voltage shall occur at any power 
circuit outlet used by equipment regulated by this article; 

(3) The equipment power circuit shall be an independent electrical cir- 
cuit that shall remain separate from all other equipment within or on the 
building, other than power circuits used for hand tools that will be used 
in conjunction with the equipment. If the building is provided with an 
emergency power system, the equipment power circuit may also be con- 
nected to this system; 

(4) The power circuit shall be provided with a disconnect switch that 
can be locked in the "OFF" and "ON" positions. The switch shall be con- 
veniently located with respect to the primary operating area of the equip- 
ment to allow the operators of the equipment access to the switch; 

(5) The disconnect switch for the power circuit shall be locked in the 
"ON" position when the equipment is in use; and 

(6) An effective two-way voice communication system shall be pro- 
vided between the equipment operators and persons stationed within the 
building being serviced. The communications facility shall be operable 
and shall be manned at all times by persons stationed within the building 
whenever the platform is being used. (Title 24, Part 2, 2-8521) 
NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code; and Section 18943(b), Health and Safety Code 

History 

1 . Repealer and and new section filed 3-9-93; operative 4-8-93 (Register 93, No. 
1 1). For prior history, see Register 85, No. 40. 

2. Editorial correction of subsection (c)(6)(B) (Register 95, No. 24). 

3. Amendment of subsection (i) and amendment of Note filed 4-27-2000; opera- 
tive 5-27-2000 (Register 2000, No. 17). 

§ 3295. Powered Platform Installations— Equipment. 

(a) General Requirements. The following requirements apply to 
equipment which are part of a powered platform installation, such as plat- 



forms, stabilizing components, carriages, outriggers, davits, hoisting 
machines, wire ropes and electrical components: 

( 1 ) Equipment installations shall be designed by or under the direction 
of a professional engineer currently registered in the State of California 
and experienced in such design; 

(2) The design shall provide for a minimum live load of 250 pounds 
for each occupant of a suspended or supported platform; 

(3) Equipment that is exposed to wind when not in service shall be de- 
signed to withstand forces generated by winds of at least 100 miles per 
hour at 30 feet above grade; 

(4) Equipment that is exposed to wind when in service .shall be de- 
signed to withstand forces generated by winds of at least 50 miles per 
hour for all elevations; and 

(5) Equipment shall not be cascaded between structure levels using 
craning methods unless the procedures and equipment utilized have been 
previously approved by the Division. 

(b) Construction Requirements. Bolted connections shall be self- 
locking or shall otherwise be secured to prevent loss of the connections 
by vibration. 

(c) Suspension Methods. Elevated building maintenance equipment 
shall be suspended by a carriage, outriggers, davits or an equivalent 
method. 

(1) Carriages. Carriages used for suspension of elevated building 
maintenance equipment shall comply with the following: 

(A) The horizontal movement of a carriage shall be controlled so as to 
ensure its safe movement and allow accurate positioning of the platform 
for vertical travel or storage; 

(B) Powered carriages shall not exceed a traversing speed of 50 feet 
per minute; 

(C) The initiation of a traversing movement for a manually propelled 
carriage on a smooth level surface shall not require a person to exert a 
horizontal force greater than 40 pounds; 

(D) Structural stops and/or curbs shall be provided to prevent the tra- 
versing of the carriage beyond its designed limits of travel; 

(E) Traversing controls for a powered carriage shall be of continuous 
pressure weatherproof type. Multiple controls when provided shall be ar- 
ranged to permit operation from only one control station at a time. An 
emergency stop device shall be provided on each end of a powered car- 
riage for interrupting power to the carriage drive motors; 

(F) The operating control(s) shall be so connected that in the case of 
suspended equipment, traversing of a carriage is not possible until the 
suspended portion of the equipment is located at its uppermost designed 
position for traversing; and is free of contact with the face of the building 
or building guides. In addition, all protective devices and interlocks are 
to be in the proper position to allow traversing of the carriage; 

(G) Stability for underfoot supported carriages shall be obtained by 
gravity, by an attachment to a structural support, or by a combination of 
gravity and a structural support. The use of flowing counterweights, such 
as water or sand, to achieve stability is prohibited. 

1 . The stability factor against overturning shall not be less than two for 
horizontal traversing of the carriage, including the effects of impact and 
wind. 

2. The carriages and their anchorages shall be capable of resisting acci- 
dental over-tensioning of the wire ropes suspending the working plat- 
form, and this calculated value shall include the effect of one and one- 
half times the stall capacity of the hoist motor. All parts of the installation 
shall be capable of withstanding without damage to any part of the instal- 
lation the forces resulting from the stall load of the hoist and one half the 
wind load. 

3. Roof carriages which rely on having tie-down devices secured to 
the building to develop the required stability against overturning shall be 
provided with an interlock which will prevent vertical platform move- 
ment unless the tie-down is engaged. 

(H) An automatically applied braking or locking system, or equiva- 
lent, shall be provided that will prevent unintentional traversing of power 
traversed or power assisted carriages; 



Page 578 



Register 2007, No. 32; 8-10-2007 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3295 



(1) A manual or automatic braking or locking system or equivalent, 
shall be provided that will prevent unintentional traversing of manually 
propelled carriages; 

(J) A means to lock out the power supply for the carriage shall be pro- 
vided; 

(K) Safe access to and egress from the carriage shall be provided from 
a safe surface. If the carriage traverses an elevated area, any operating 
area on the carriage shall be protected by a guardrail system in com- 
pliance with the provisions of subsection (e)(1)(G) of this section. Any 
access gate shall be self-closing and self-latching, or provided with an 
interlock; 

(L) Each carriage work station position shall be identified by location 
markings and/or position indicators; and 

(M) The motors shall stall if the load on the hoist motors is at any time 
in excess of three times that necessary for lifting the working platform 
with its rated load. 

(2) Portable Outriggers. 

(A) Portable outriggers may be used as a method of suspension for 
ground rigged working platforms where the point of suspension does not 
exceed 130 feet above a safe surface unless acceptable to the Division. 

(B) Platform stabilization system(s) shall be provided which meet the 
requirements of Section 3294(b). 

(C) Portable outriggers shall be used only with self-powered, ground 
rigged working platforms. 

(D) Each portable outrigger shall be secured with a tie-down to a veri- 
fied anchorage on the building during the entire period of its use. The an- 
chorage shall be designed to have a stability factor of not less than four 
against overturning or upsetting of the outrigger. 

(E) Access to and egress from the working platform shall be from and 
to a safe surface below the point of suspension. 

(F) The working platform shall be provided with wheels, casters or a 
carriage for traversing horizontally. 

(G) Each portable outrigger shall be designed for lateral stability to 
prevent rollover in the event an accidental lateral load is applied to the 
outrigger. The accidental lateral load to be considered in this design shall 
be not less than 70 percent of the rated load of the hoist. 

(H) Each portable outrigger shall be designed to support an ultimate 
load of not less than four times the rated load of the hoist. 

(I) Each portable outrigger shall be so located that the suspension wire 
ropes for two point suspended working platforms are hung parallel. 

(J) A portable outrigger shall be tied-down to a verified anchorage on 
the building with a rope equivalent in strength to the suspension rope. 

(K) The tie-back rope shall be installed parallel to the centerline of the 
outrigger. 

(L) Where applicable, the forces or weights referenced in Section 
3295(c)(3)(D) and (D)l. and 2. shall apply to outriggers. 

(3) Davits. 

(A) Every davit installation, fixed or portable, rotatable or non-rotat- 
able shall be designed and installed to ensure that it has a stability factor 
against failure or overturning of not less than four. 

(B) The following requirements apply to roof rigged davit systems: 

1 . Access to and egress from the working platform shall be from a safe 
surface. Access or egress shall not require persons to climb over a build- 
ing' s parapet or guard railing; and 

2. The working platform shall be provided with wheels, casters or a 
carriage for traversing horizontally. 

(C) The following requirements apply to ground rigged davit systems: 

1 . The point of suspension shall not exceed 1 30 feet above a safe sur- 
face unless acceptable to the Division; 

2. Platform stabilization system(s) shall be provided which meet the 
requirements of Section 3294(b); and 

3. Access and egress to and from the working platform shall only be 
from a safe surface below the point of suspension. 

(D) A rotating davit shall not require a horizontal force in excess of 40 
pounds per person to initiate a rotating movement. 

(E) A davit or part of a davit weighing more than 80 pounds shall be 
provided with a means for its transport, which shall keep the center of 



gravity of the davit at or below 36 inches above the safe surface during 
transport. 

(F) Davits or davit components which weigh more than 140 pounds 
shall be provided with a mechanical means for hoisting them into posi- 
tion. 

(G) Portable davits shall have a maximum reach of 8 feet, 6 inches 
(2600 mm) and a maximum fully assembled weight of 300 pounds ( 135 

kg). 

(H) Roof-rigged davits shall be provided with pivoting sockets or with 
bases that will allow the insertion or removal of a davit at a position of 
not more than 35 degrees above the horizontal, with the complete davit 
inboard of the building face being serviced. 

(I) A means shall be provided to lock the davit to its socket or base be- 
fore it is used to suspend the platform. 

(J) Portable davit sockets, if used, shall be fitted with wheels to allow 
ready movement from pedestal to pedestal, shall not require lifting to 
mate with the pedestal and shall have a pedestal pin attachment connec- 
tion or positive locking pin connection to the pedestal. Socket/pedestal 
connections requiring bolts or other threaded fasteners shall not be used. 

(d) Hoisting Machines. 

(1) Raising and lowering of suspended or supported equipment shall 
be performed only by a hoisting machine. 

(2) Each hoisting machine shall be capable of arresting any overs peed 
descent of the load. 

(3) Each hosting machine shall be powered only by air, electric or hy- 
draulic sources. 

(4) Flammable liquids shall not be carried on the working platform. 

(5) Each hoisting machine shall be capable of raising or lowering 1 25 
percent of the rated load of the hoist. 

(6) Moving parts of a hoisting machine shall be enclosed or guarded 
in compliance with Section 4002 of the General Industry Safety Orders. 

(7) Winding drums, traction drums, sheaves and directional sheaves 
used in conjunction with hoisting machines shall be compatible with, and 
sized for, the wire rope used. 

(8) Each winding drum shall be provided with a positive means of at- 
taching the wire rope to the drum. The attachment shall be capable of de- 
veloping at least four times the rated load of the hoist. 

(9) Each hoisting machine shall be provided with a primary brake and 
at least one independent secondary bralce, each capable of stopping and 
holding not less than 125 percent of the lifting capacity of the hoist. 

(A) The primary brake shall be directly connected to the drive train of 
the hoisting machine, and shall not be connected through belts, chains, 
clutches, or set screw type devices. The brake shall automatically set 
when power to the prime mover is interrupted. 

(B) 1. The secondary brake shall be an automatic emergency type of 
brake that, if actuated during each stopping cycle, shall not engage before 
the hoist is stopped by the primary brake. 

2. When a secondary brake is actuated, it shall stop and hold the plat- 
form within a vertical distance of 24 inches. 

(10) Any component of a hoisting machine which requires lubrication 
for its protection and proper functioning shall be provided with a means 
for that lubrication to be applied. 

(e) Suspended Equipment. 
(1) General Requirements. 

(A) Each suspended unit component, except suspension ropes and 
guardrail systems, shall be capable of supporting, without failure, at least 
four times the maximum intended live load applied or transmitted to that 
component. 

(B) Each suspended unit component shall be constructed of materials 
that will withstand anticipated weather conditions. 

(C) Each suspended unit shall be provided with a load rating plate, 
conspicuously located, stating the unit weight and rated load of the sus- 
pended unit. 

(D) When the suspension points on a suspended unit are not at the unit 
ends, the unit shall be capable of remaining continuously stable under all 
conditions of use and position of the li\ e load, and shall maintain at least 
a 1.5 to 1 stability factor against unit upset. 



Page 578.1 



Register 2007, No. 32; 8-10-2007 



§3295 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



(E) Guide rollers, guide shoes or building face rollers shall be pro- 
vided, and shall compensate for variations in building dimensions and for 
minor horizontal out-of-level variations of each suspended unit. 

(F) Each working platform of a suspended unit shall be secured to the 
building facade by one or more of the following methods, or by an equiv- 
alent method: 

1. Continuous engagement to building anchors as provided in Section 
3294(b)(1); 

2. Intermittent engagement to building anchors as provided in Section 
3294(b)(3)(A); 

3. Button guide engagement as provided in Section 3294(b)(3)(B) ; or 

4. Angulated roping and building face rollers as provided in Section 
3294(b)('3)(C). 

(G) Each working platform of a suspended unit shall be provided with 
a guardrail system on all sides which shall meet the following require- 
ments: 

1 . The system shall consist of a top guardrail, midrail, and a toeboard; 

2. The system shall consist of a 42 inch high enclosure on the ends and 
outboard side. The inboard side shall be not less than 36 inches high; 

3. The top guardrail and midrail shall be able to withstand at least a 100 
pound force applied in any direction; 

4. The areas between the guardrail and toeboard on the ends and out- 
board side, and the area between the midrail and toeboard on the inboard 
side, shall be closed with a material that is capable of withstanding a load 
of 100 pounds applied horizontally over any area of one square foot. The 
material shall have all openings small enough to reject passage of a one 
inch steel ball and potential falling objects which may be hazardous to 
persons below; 

5. Toeboards shall be capable of withstanding, without failure, a force 
of at least 50 pounds applied in any downward or horizontal direction at 
any point along the toeboard; 

6. Toeboards shall be three and one-half inches minimum in height 
from their top edge to the level of the platform floor; 

7. Toeboards shall be securely fastened in place at the outermost edge 
of the platform and have no more than one-half inch clearance above the 
platform floor; and 

8. Toeboards shall be solid or with an opening not over one inch in the 
greatest dimension. 

(2) Two and Four-Point Suspended Working Platforms. 

(A) The working platform shall be not less than 24 inches wide and 
shall be provided with a minimum of a 12 inch wide passage at or past 
any obstruction on the platform. 

(B) The flooring shall be of slip-resistant type and shall contain no 
opening that would allow the passage of safety lines, cables and other po- 
tential falling objects. If a larger opening is provided, it shall be protected 
by placing a material under the opening which shall prevent the passage 
of a one inch steel ball and potential falling objects. 

(C) The working platform shall be provided with a means of suspen- 
sion that will restrict the platform's inboard to outboard roll about its lon- 
gitudinal axis to a maximum of 15 degrees from a horizontal plane when 
moving the live load from the inboard to the outboard side of the plat- 
form. 

(D) Any cable suspended from above the platform shall be provided 
with a means for storage to prevent accumulation of the cable on the floor 
of the platform. 

(E) All operating controls for the vertical travel of the platform shall 
be of the continuous-pressure type, and shall be located on the platform. 

(F) Each operating station of every working platform shall be provided 
with a means of interrupting the power supply to all hoist motors to stop 
any further powered ascent or descent of the platform. 

(G) The maximum rated speed of the platform shall not exceed 50 feet 
per minute with single speed hoists, nor 75 feet per minute with multi- 
speed hoists. 

(H) Provisions shall be made for securing all tools, water tanks, and 
other accessories to prevent their movement or accumulation on the floor 
of the platform. 

(I) Portable fire extinguishers conforming to the provisions of Section 
6151 shall be provided and securely attached on all working platforms. 



(J) Access to and egress from a working platform, except for those that 
land directly on a safe surface, shall be provided by stairs, ladders, plat- 
forms and runways conforming to the provisions of Article 4 of the Gen- 
eral Industry Safety Orders. Access gates shall be self-closing and self- 
latching. 

(K) Means of access to or egress from a working platform which is 48 
inches or more above a safe surface shall be provided with a guardrail 
system or ladder handrails that conform to the provisions of Article 2 of 
the General Industry Safely Orders. 

(L) The platform shall be provided with a secondary wire rope suspen- 
sion system if the platform contains overhead structures which restrict 
the emergency egress of employees. A horizontal safety line or a direct 
connection anchorage shall be provided, as part of a fall arrest system 
which meets the requirements of Appendix C. for each employee on such 
a platform. 

(M) A vertical safety line shall be provided as part of a fall arrest sys- 
tem which meets the requirements of Appendix C, for each employee on 
a working platform suspended by two or more wire ropes, if the failure 
of one wire rope or suspension attachment will cause the platform to up- 
set. If a secondary wire rope suspension is used, vertical safety lines are 
not required for the fall arrest system, provided that each employee is at- 
tached to a horizontal safety line anchored to the platform. 

(N) An emergency electric operating device shall be provided on roof 
powered platforms near the hoisting machine for use in the event of fail- 
ure of the normal operating device located on the working platform, or 
failure of the cable connected to the platform. The emergency electric op- 
erating device shall be mounted in a secured comparlment, and the com- 
partment shall be labeled with instructions for use. A means for opening 
the compartment shall be mounted in a break-glass receptacle located 
near the emergency electric operating device or in an equivalent secure 
and accessible location. 

(3) Single Point Suspended Working Platforms. 

(A) The requirements of Section 3295(e)(2)(A) through (K) shall also 
apply to a single point working platform. 

(B) Each single point suspended working platform shall be provided 
with a secondary wire rope suspension system, which will prevent the 
working platform from falling should there be a failure of the primary 
means of support, or if the platform contains overhead structures which 
restrict the egress of the employee. A horizontal safety line or a direct 
connection anchorage shall be provided, as part of a fall arrest system 
which meets the requirements of Appendix C. 

(4) Ground-Rigged Working Platforms. 

(A) Ground-rigged working platforms shall comply with all the re- 
quirements of Section 3295(e)(2)(A) through (M). 

(B) After each day's use, the power supply within the building shall 
be disconnected from a ground-rigged working platform, and the plat- 
form shall be either disengaged from its suspension points or secured and 
stored at grade. 

(5) Intermittently Stabilized Platforms. 

(A) The platform shall comply with Section 3295(e)(2)(A) through 
(M). 

(B) Each stabihzer tie shall be equipped with a "quick connect-quick 
disconnect" device which cannot be accidentally disengaged, for attach- 
ment to the building anchor, and shall be resistant to adverse environ- 
mental conditions. 

(C) The platform shall be provided with a stopping device that will in- 
terrupt the hoist power supply in the event the platform contacts a stabi- 
lizer tie during its ascent. 

(D) Building face rollers shall not be placed at the anchor setting if ex- 
terior anchors are used on the building face. 

(E) Stabilizer ties used on intermittently stabilized platforms shall al- 
low for the specific attachment length needed to effect the predetermined 
angulation of the suspended wire rope. The specific attachment length 
shall be maintained at all building anchor locations. 

(F) The platform shall be in continuous contact with the face of the 
building during ascent and descent. 

(G) This attachment and removal of stabilizer ties shall not require the 
horizontal movement of the platform. 



Page 578.2 



Register 2007, No. 32; 8-10-2007 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3295 



(H) The platform-mounted equipment and its suspension wire ropes 
shiall not be physically damaged by the loads from the stabilizer tie or its 
building anchor. The platform, platform mounted equipment and wire 
ropes shall be able to withstand a load that is at least twice the ultimate 
strength of the stabilizer tie. 

See Figure 2 in Appendix B of this article for a description of a typical 
intermittent stabilization system. 

(6) Button-Guide Stabilized Platforms. 

(A) The platform shall comply with Section 3295(e)(2)(A) through 
(M). 

(B) Two guide tracks shall be mounted on the platform and shall pro- 
vide continuous contact with the building face. 

(C) Each guide track on the platform shall engage a minimum of two 
guide buttons during any vertical travel of the platform following the ini- 
tial button engagement. 

(D) Each guide track on a platform that is part of a roof rigged system 
shall be provided with a storage position on the platform. 

(E) Each guide track on the platform shall be sufficiently maneuver- 
able by platform occupants to permit easy engagement of the guide but- 
tons, and easy movement into and out of its storage position on the plat- 
form. 

(F) The load carrying components of the button guide stabilization 
system which transmit the load into the platform shall be capable of sup- 
porting the weight of the platform, or provision shall be made in the guide 
track connectors or platform attachments to prevent the weight of the 
platform from being transmitted to the platform attachments. 

Note: See Figure 3 in Appendix B of this article for a description of a typical but- 
ton guide stabilization system. 

(f) Supported Equipment. 

( 1 ) Supported equipment shall maintain a vertical position in respect 
to the face of the building by means other than friction. 

(2) Cog wheels or equivalent means shall be incorporated to provide 
climbing traction between the supported equipment and the building 
guides. Additional guide wheels or shoes shall be incorporated as may 
be necessary to ensure that the drive wheels are continuously held in posi- 
tive engagement with the building guides. 

(3) Launch guide muUions indexed to the building guides and retained 
in alignment with the building guides shall be used to align drive wheels 
entering the building guides. 

(4) Occupied platforms used on supported equipment shall comply 
with the requirements of Section 3295(e)(2)(A), (e)(2)(B), and (e)(2)(D) 
through (K) covering suspended equipment. 

(g) Suspension Wire Ropes and Rope Connections. 

( 1 ) Each specific installation shall use suspension wire ropes or combi- 
nation cable and connections meeting the specification recommended by 
the manufacturer of the hoisting machine used. Connections shall be ca- 
pable of developing at least 80 percent of the rated breaking strength of 
the wire rope. 

(2) Each suspension rope shall have a "Design Factor" of at least 10. 
The "Design Factor" is the ratio of the rated strength of the suspension 
wire rope to the rated working load, and shall be calculated using the fol- 
lowing formula: 

F = S(N) 
W 

Where: 

F=Design factor 

S=Manufacturer's rated strength of one suspension rope 

N=Number of suspension ropes under load 

W=Rated working load on all ropes at any point of travel 

(3) Suspension wire rope grade shall be at least improved plow steel 
or equivalent. 

(4) Suspension wire ropes shall be sized to conform with the required 
design factor, but shall not be less than 5/16 inch in diameter. 

(5) No more than one reverse bend in six wire rope lays shall be per- 
mitted. 



(6) A corrosion-resistant tag shall be securely attached to one of the 
wire rope fastenings when a suspension wire rope is to be used at a specif- 
ic location and will remain in that location. This tag shall bear the follow- 
ing wire rope data: 

A. The diameter (inches); 

B. Construction classification; 

C. Whether non-preformed or preformed; 

D. The grade of material; 

E. The manufacturer's rated strength; 

F. The manufacturer's name; 

G. The month and year the ropes were installed; and 

H. The name of the person or company which installed the ropes. 

(7) A new tag shall be installed at each rope renewal. 

(8) The original tag shall be stamped with the date of the resocketing. 
or the original tag shall be retained and a supplemental tag shall be pro- 
vided when ropes are resocketed. The supplemental tag shall show the 
date of resocketing and the name of the person or company that resock- 
eted the rope. 

(9) Winding drum type hoists shall contain at least three wraps of the 
suspension wire rope on the drum when the suspended unit has reached 
the lowest possible point of its vertical travel. 

(10) Traction drum and sheave type hoists shall be provided with a 
wire rope of sufficient length to reach the lowest possible point of vertical 
travel of the suspended unit, and an additional length of the wire rope of 
at least four feet. 

(11) The lengthening or repairing of suspension wire ropes is prohib- 
ited. 

(12) Babbitted fastenings for suspension wire ropes are prohibited, 
(h) Control Circuits, Power Circuits and Their Components. 

(1) Electrical wiring and equipment shall comply with the Electrical 
Safety Orders, except as otherwise required by this section. 

(2) Electrical runway conductor systems shall be of a type designed for 
use in exterior locations, and shall be located so that they do not come into 
contact with accumulated snow or water. 

(3) Cables shall be protected against damage resulting from over-ten- 
sioning or from other causes. 

(4) Devices shall be included in the control system for the equipment 
which will provide protection against electrical overloads, three phase 
reversal and phase failure. The control system shall have a separate meth- 
od, independent of the direction control circuit, for breaking the power 
circuit in case of an emergency or malfunction. 

(5) Suspended or supported equipment shall have a control system 
which will require the operator of the equipment to follow predetermined 
procedures. 

(6) The following requirements shall apply to electrical protection de- 
vices: 

(A) On installations where the carriage does not have a stability factor 
of at least four against overturning, electrical contact(s) shall be provided 
and so connected that the operating devices for the suspended or sup- 
ported equipment shall be operative only when the carriage is located and 
mechanically retained at an established operating point. 

(B) Overload protection shall be provided in the hoisting or suspension 
system to protect against the equipment operating in the "up" direction 
with a load in excess of 125 percent of the rated load of the platform; and 

(C) An automatic detector shall be provided for each suspension point 
that will interrupt power to all hoisting motors for travel in the "down" 
direction, and apply the primary brakes if any suspension wire rope be- 
comes slack. A continuous-pressure rigging-bypass switch designed for 
use during rigging is permitted. This switch shall only be used during rig- 
ging. 

(7) Upper and lower directional switches designed to prevent the travel 
of suspended units beyond safe upward and downward levels shall be 
provided. 

(8) Emergency stop switches shall be provided on remote controlled, 
roof-powered platforms adjacent to each control station on the platform. 



Page 578.3 



Register 2007, No. 32; 8-10-2007 



§3296 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



(9) Cables which are in constant tension shall have overload devices 
which will prevent the tension in the cable from interfering with the load 
limiting device required in Section 3295(h)(6)(B) or with the platform 
roll limiting device required in Section 3295(e)(2)(C). The setting of 
these devices shall be coordinated with other overload settings at the time 
of design of the system, and shall be clearly indicated on or near the de- 
vice. The device shall intermpt the equipment travel in the "down" direc- 
tion. (Title 24. Part 2, 2-8522) 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . Repealer and and new section filed 3-9-93; operative 4-8-93 (Register 93, No. 
11). For prior history, see Register 85, No. 40. 

2. Change without regulatory effect amending subsection (c)(2)(A) filed 9-1 3-95 
pursuant to section 1 00, title 1 , California Code of Regulations (Register 95, No. 
37). 

3. Change without regulatory effect amending subsections (c)(2)(J) and (c)(2)(L) 
filed 10-23-95 pursuant to section 100, title 1, California Code of Regulations 
(Register 95, No. 43). 

4. Amendment of subsections (c)(3)(A), (c)(3)(B)2.. and (c)(3)(C)l.-2., rede- 
signalion and amendment of subsections (c)(3)(D)l.-5. as subsections 
(c)(3)(E)-(F) and (c)(3)(H)-(J), new subsection (c)(3)(G) and amendment of 
NoTK filed .3-27-2007; operative 4-26-2007 (Register 2007, No. 13). 

5. Editorial correction of subsection (d)(6) (Register 2007, No. 32). 

§ 3296. Inspection and Tests. 

(a) Installations and Alterations. All completed building maintenance 
equipment installations shall be inspected and tested in the field before 
being placed in initial service to determine that all parts of the installation 
conform to applicable requirements of this article, and that all safety and 
operating equipment is functioning as required. A similar inspection and 
test shall be made following any major alteration to an existing installa- 
tion. 

(1 ) No hoist in an installation shall be subjected to a load in excess of 
125 percent of its rated load. 

(2) The building owner shall keep a certification record of each inspec- 
tion and test required under subsection (a) of this section. The certifica- 
tion record shall include the date of the inspection, the signature of the 
person who performed the inspection, and the number, or other identifier, 
of the building support structure and equipment which was inspected. 
This certification record shall be kept readily available for review by the 
Division and by the employer. 

(b) Periodic Inspections and Tests. 

( 1 ) Each installation shall undergo a periodic inspection and test at 
least every 1 2 months by the equipment manufacturer, authorized repre- 
sentative, or other qualified person acceptable to the Division. All parts 
of the equipment, including related building support structures, shall be 
inspected, and where necessary, tested to determine that they are in safe 
operating condition. 

(2) The building owner shall keep a certification record of each inspec- 
tion and test required under subsection (b) of this section. The certifica- 
tion record shall include the date of the inspection, the signature of the 
person who performed the inspection, and the number, or other identifier, 
of the building support structure and equipment which was inspected. 
This certification record shall be kept readily available for review by the 
Division and by the employer. 

(3) Building safety devices and equipment as described in Section 
3282(p)(l)(A) shall be load tested if damage, corrosion or deterioration 
affecting the load bearing integrity of building safety devices and equip- 
ment is detected or suspected. 

(A) The safety device or equipment shall be removed from service un- 
til repaired or replaced if testing indicates that the load sustaining integri- 
ty of a safety device or equipment has been compromised. 

(B) A professional engineer experienced in the design of building safe- 
ty devices and equipment shall inspect and evaluate such equipment 
when any of the following occur: 

1 . The design documents are not available; 

2. The design is deficient; or 



3. Inspections or tests determine that the safety devices or equipment 
are not safe for use. 

(C) Damage to safety devices or equipment, or damage to the building 
structure from testing operations shall be reported to the building owner. 

(D) If safety deficiencies affecting the load bearing integrity of devices 
or equipment have not been corrected within 60 days from the date the 
building owner was notified, the deficiencies shall be reported to the Di- 
vision by the inspecting agency contracted to perform inspections and/or 
testing. 

(4)(A) Load suspension devices shall not be tested to more than 2 times 
the rated working load which the device is designed to lift and/or support. 

(B) Roof tie-backs shall be tested to no more than 50 percent of their 
rated capacity. For example, a roof tie-back with a rated capacity of 5000 
pounds shall not be tested in excess of 2500 pounds. 

(5) Test equipment shall be calibrated at least annually and calibration 
records shall be available to the Division. 

(6) The load testing methodology and load testing procedures for a 
building's safety devices and equipment shall be prescribed, in writing, 
by a professional engineer and load tests shall be performed by qualified 
persons under the direction of the engineer. 

(7) Working platforms and their components shall be inspected by the 
employer for visible defects before every use and after each occurrence 
which could affect the platform's structural integrity. 

(c) Maintenance Inspections and Tests. 

(1) A maintenance inspection and, where necessary a test shall be 
made of each platform installation prior to the start of a work cycle and 
where the work cycle is more than 30 days, such inspection and/or test 
shall be made at least every 30 days during the work cycle. This inspec- 
tion and test shall follow procedures recommended by the manufacturer, 
and shall be made by a qualified person. 

(2) The building owner shall keep a certification record of each inspec- 
tion and test performed under subsection (c)(1) of this section. The certi- 
fication record shall include the date of the inspection and test, the signa- 
ture of the person who performed the inspection and/or test, and an 
identifier for the platform installation which was inspected. The certifica- 
tion record shall be kept readily available for review by the Division and 
by the employer. 

(d) Special Inspection of Governors and Secondary Brakes. 

(1) Governors and secondary brakes shall be inspected and tested at 
intervals specified by the manufacturer/supplier but not to exceed every 
12 months. 

(2) The results of the inspection and test shall confirm that the initiat- 
ing device for the secondary braking system operates at the proper over- 
speed. 

(3) The results of the inspection and test shall confirm that the second- 
ary brake is functioning properly. 

(4) If any hoisting machine or initiating device for the secondary brake 
system is removed from the equipment for testing, all reinstalled and di- 
rectly related components shall be reinspected prior to returning the 
equipment installation to service. 

(5) Inspection of governors and secondary brakes shall be performed 
by a qualified person. 

(6) The secondary brake governor and actuation device shall be tested 
before each day's use. Where testing is not feasible, a visual inspection 
of the brake shall be made to ensure that it is free to operate. 

(e) Suspension Wire Rope Maintenance, Inspection and Replacement. 

(1) Suspension wire rope shall be maintained and used in accordance 
with procedures recommended by the wire rope manufacturer. 

(2) Suspension wire rope shall be inspected by a qualified person for 
visible defects and gross damage to the rope before every use and after 
each occurrence which might affect the wire rope's integrity. 

(3) A thorough inspection of suspension wire ropes in service shall be 
made once a month. Suspension wire ropes that have been inactive for 
30 days or longer shall have a thorough inspection before they are placed 
into service. These thorough inspections of suspension wire ropes shall 
be performed by a qualified person. 



Page 578.4 



Register 2007, No. 32; 8-10-2007 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3298 



• 



• 



(4) The need for replacement of a suspension wire rope shall be deter- 
mined by inspection and shall be based on the condition of the wire rope. 
Any of the following conditions or combination of conditions will be 
cause for removal of the wire rope: 

(A) Broken wires exceeding three wires in one strand or six wires in 
one rope lay; 

(B) Distortion of rope structure such as would result from crushing or 
kinking; 

(C) Evidence of heat damage; 

(D) Evidence of rope deterioration from corrosion; 

(E) A broken wire within 18 inches of the end attachments; 

(F) Noticeable rusting and/or pitting; 

(G) Evidence of core failure (a lengthening of rope lay, protrusion of 
the rope core and a reduction in rope diameter suggests core failure); or 

(H) More than one valley break (broken wire); 

(I) Outer wire wear exceeds one-third of the original outer wire diame- 
ter; 

(J) Any other condition which the qualified person determines has sig- 
nificantly affected the integrity of the rope. 

(5) The building owner shall keep a certification record of each month- 
ly inspection of a suspension wire rope as required in subsection (e)(3) 
of this section. The record shall include the date of the inspection, the sig- 
nature of the person who performed the inspection, and a number, or oth- 
er identifier of the wire rope which was inspected. This record of inspec- 
tion shall be made available for review by the Division and by the 
employer. 

(f) Hoist Inspection. Before lowering personnel below the top eleva- 
tion of the building, the hoist shall be tested each day in the lifting direc- 
tion with the intended load to make certain it has sufficient capacity to 
raise the personnel back to the boarding level. 

NOTE; Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . Repealer and and new section filed 3-9-93; operative 4-8-93 (Register 93, No. 
11). For prior history, see Register 85, No. 40. 

2. New subsections (a)(l)-(2), amendment of subsection (b)(2), new subsections 
(b)(3)-(b)(6), subsection renumbering and amendment of Note filed 
3-27-2007; operative 4-26-2007 (Register 2007, No. 13). 

§ 3297. Maintenance. 

(a) General Maintenance. All parts of the equipment affecting safe op- 
eration shall be maintained in proper working order so that they may per- 
form the functions for which they were intended. The equipment shall be 
taken out of service when any part is not in proper working order. 

(b) Cleaning. 

(1) Control or power contractors and relays shall be kept clean. 

(2) All other parts shall be kept clean if their proper functioning would 
be affected by the presence of dirt or other contaminants. 

(c) Periodic Resocketing of Wire Rope Fastenings. 

(1) Hoisting ropes utilizing poured socket fastenings shall be resock- 
eted at the non-drum ends at intervals not exceeding 24 months. In re- 
socketing the ropes, a sufficient length shall be cut from the end of the 
rope to remove damaged or fatigued portions. 

(2) Resocketed ropes shall conform to the requirements of Section 
3295(g). 

(3) Limit switches affected by the resocketed ropes shall be reset, if 
necessary. 

(d) Periodic Reshackling of Suspension Wire Ropes. The hoisting 
ropes shall be reshackled at the nondrum ends at intervals not exceeding 
24 months. When reshackling the ropes, a sufficient length shall be cut 
from the end of the rope to remove damaged or fatigued portions. 

(e) Roof Systems. Roof track systems, tie-downs, or similar equip- 
ment shall be maintained in proper working order so that they perform 
the function for which they were intended. 

(f) Building Face Guiding Members. T-rails, indented muUions, or 
equivalent guides located in the face of a building shall be maintained in 
proper working order so that they perform the functions for which they 



were intended. Brackets for cable stabilizers shall similarly be main- 
tained in proper working order. 

(g) Inoperative Safety Devices. No person shall render a required safe- 
ty device or electrical protective device inoperative, except as necessary 
for tests, inspections, and maintenance. Immediately upon completion of 
such tests, inspections and maintenance, the device shall be restored to 
its normal operating condition. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 
1 . Repealer and and new section filed 3-9-93; operative 4-8-93 (Register 93, No. 

11). For prior history, see Register 83, No. 41 . 

§ 3298. Operations. 

(a) Training. 

( 1 ) Working platforms shall be operated only by qualified persons who 
are proficient in the operation, safe use and inspection of the particular 
working platform to be operated. 

(2) All employees who operate working platforms shall be trained in 
the following: 

(A) Recognition of, and preventive measures for, the safety hazards 
associated with their individual work tasks. 

(B) General recognition and prevention of safety hazards associated 
with the use of working platforms, including the provisions in the article 
relating to the particular working platform to be operated. 

(C) Emergency action plan procedures required in Section 3294(i). 

(D) Work procedures required in subsection (a)(4) of this section. 

(E) Personal fall arrest system inspection care, use and system per- 
formance. 

(3) Training of employees in the operation and inspection of working 
platforms shall be done by a qualified person. 

(4) Written work procedures for the operation, safe use and inspection 
of working platforms shall be provided for employee training. Pictorial 
methods of instruction, may be used, in lieu of written work procedures, 
if employee communication is improved using this method. The operat- 
ing manuals supplied by manufacturers for platform system components 
can serve as the basis for these procedures. 

(5) The employer shall certify that employees have been trained in op- 
erating and inspecting a working platform by preparing a certification re- 
cord which includes the identity of the person trained, the signature of the 
employer or the person who conducted the training and the date that train- 
ing was completed. The certification record shall be prepared at the com- 
pletion of the training required in subsection (a)(2) of this section, and 
shall be maintained in a file for the duration of the employee's employ- 
ment. The certification record shall be kept readily available for review 
by the Division. 

(b) Use. 

(1) Working platforms shall not be loaded in excess of the rated load, 
as stated on the platform load rating plate. 

(2) Employees shall be prohibited from working on snow, ice. or other 
slippery material covering platforms, except for the removal of such ma- 
terials. 

(3) Adequate precautions shall be taken to protect the platform, wire 
ropes and safety lines from damage due to acids or other corrosive sub- 
stances, in accordance with the recommendations of the coirosive sub- 
stance producer, supplier, platform manufacturer or other equivalent in- 
formation sources. Platform members which have been exposed to acids 
or other corrosive substances shall be washed down with a neutralizing 
solution, at a frequency recommended by the corrosive substance pro- 
ducer or supplier. 

(4) Platform members, supporting members constructed of aluminum, 
wire ropes and safety lines shall be protected when using a heat produc- 
ing process. Wire ropes and safety lines which have been contacted by 
the heat producing process shall be considered to be permanently dam- 
aged and shall not be used. 

(5) The platform shall not be operated in winds in excess of 25 miles 
per hour except to move it from an operating to a storage position. Wind 



Page 578.5 



Register 2007, No. 32; 8-10-2007 



§3299 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



speed shall be determined based on the best available information, which 
includes on-site anemometer readings and local weather forecasts which 
predict wind velocities for the area. 

(6) On exterior installations, an anemometer shall be mounted on the 
platform to provide information of onsite wind velocities prior to and 
during the use of the platform. The anemometer may be a portable (hand 
held) unit which is temporarily mounted during platform use. 

(7) Tools, materials and debris not related to the work in progress shall 
not be allowed to accumulate on platforms. Stabilizer ties shall be located 
so as to allow unencumbered passage along the full length of the platform 
and shall be of such length so as not to become entangled in rollers, hoists 
or other machinery. 

NOTE; Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . Repealer and and new section filed 3-9-93; operative 4-8-93 (Register 93, No. 
1 1 ). For prior history, see Register 85, No. 40. 

§ 3299. Personal Fall Protection. 

Employees on working platforms shall be protected by a personal fall 
arrest system meeting the requirements of Appendix C, Section I of this 
article, and as otherwise provided by these orders. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . New section and Appendices A-E filed 3-9-93; operative 4-8-93 (Register 93, 
No. 11). 

2. Change without regulatory effect amending Appendices A and D filed 9-13-95 
pursuant to section 100, title 1 , CaHfomia Code of Regulations (Register 95, No. 
37). 

3. Change without regulatory effect amending first paragraph of Appendix D filed 
9-1 1-96 pursuant to section 100, title 1, California Code of Regulations (Regis- 
ter 96, No. 37). 

4. Amendment of appendix C filed 3-31-2000; operative 4-30-2000 (Register 
2000, No. 13). 

5. Change without regulatory effect providing more legible figures 1 , 2 and 3 with- 
in appendix B with no change therein filed 6-22-2000 pursuant to section 100, 
title 1, California Code of Regulations (Register 2000, No. 25). 

Appendix A to Article 6 

1. Use of the Appendix. Appendix A provides examples of equipment 
and methods to assist the employer in meeting the requirements of the in- 
dicated provision of the standard. Employers may use other equipment 
or procedures which conform to the requirements of the standard. This 
appendix neither adds to nor detracts from the mandatory requirements 
set forth in Article 6. 

2. Assurance. Section 3292(c) requires the building owner to inform 
the employer in writing that the powered platform installation complies 
with certain requirements of the article, since the employer may not have 
the necessary information to make these determinations. The employer, 
however, remains responsible for meeting these requirements which 
have not been set off in Section 3292(c)(1). 

3. Design Requirements. The design requirements for each installation 
should be based on the limitations (stresses, deflections, etc.), established 
by nationally recognized standards as promulgated by the following or- 
ganizations, or to equivalent standards: 

AA-The Aluminum Association 

818 Connecticut Avenue, N.W. 

Washington, DC 20006 

Aluminum Construction Manual 

Specifications For Aluminum Structures 

Aluminum Standards and Data 
AGMA-American Gear Manufacturers Association 

101 North Fort Meyer Dr., Suite 1000 

Arlington, VA 22209 
AISC-American Institute of Steel Construction 

400 North Michigan Avenue 

Chicago, IL 60611 
ANSI-American National Standards Institute, Inc. 

1 1 West 42nd Street 



New York City, NY 10036 
ASCE-American Society of Civil Engineers 
345 East 47th Street 

New York, NY 10017 
ASME-American Society of Mechanical Engineers 

345 East 47th Street 

New York, NY 10017 
ASTM-American Society for Testing and Materials 

1916 Race Street 

Philadelphia, PA 19103 
AWS-American Welding Society, Inc. 

Box 351040. 550 NW LeJeunne Road 

Miami, FL 33126 
JlC-Joint Industrial Council 

2139 Wisconsin Avenue, NW 

Washington, DC 20007 
NEMA-National Electric Manufacturers Association 

2101 L Street, NW 

Washington, DC 20037 

4. Tie-in Guides. Indented mullions, T-rails or other equivalent 
guides are acceptable as tie-in guides in a building face for a continuous 
stabilization system. Internal guides are embedded in other building 
members with only the opening exposed (see Figure 1 of Appendix B). 
External guides, however, are installed external to the other building 
members and so are fully exposed. The minimum opening for tie-in 
guides is three-quarters of an inch, and the minimum inside dimensions 
are one-inch deep and two inches wide. 

Employers should be aware of the hazards associated with tie-in 
guides in a continuous stabilization system which was not designed prop- 
erly. For example, joints in these track systems may become extended or 
discontinuous due to installation, building settlement or flexing. If this 
problem is not corrected, the system could lam when a guide roller shoe 
strikes a joint or distorted area and this would cause a hazardous situation. 
In another instance, faulty design will result in guide rollers being 
mounted in a line so they will jam in the track at the slightest misalign- 
ment. 

5. Building Anchors (Intermittent Stabilization System). In the selec- 
tion of the vertical distance between building anchors, certain factors 
should be given consideration. These factors include building height and 
architectural design, platform length and weight, wire rope angulation, 
and the wind velocities in the building area. Another factor to consider 
is the material of the building face, since this material may be adversely 
affected by the building rollers. 

External or indented type building anchors are acceptable. Recep- 
tacles in the building facade used for the indented type should be kept 
clear of extraneous materials which will hinder their use. During the in- 
spection or use of the platform system, evidence of a failure or abuse of 
the anchors should be brought to the attention of the employer. 

6. Stabilizer Tie Length. A stabilizer tie should be long enough to pro- 
vide for the plarmed angulation of the suspension cables. However, the 
length of the tie should not be excessive and become a problem by possi- 
bly becoming entangled in the building face rollers or parts of the plat- 
form machinery. 

The attachment length may vary due to material elongation and this 
should be considered when selecting the material to be used. Consider- 
ation should also be given to the use of ties which are easily installed by 
employees, since this will encourage their use. 

7. Intermittent Stabilization System. Intermittent stabilization systems 
may use different equipment, tie-in devices and methods to restrict the 
horizontal movement of a powered platform with respect to the face of 
the building. One acceptable method employs corrosion-resistant build- 
ing anchors secured in the face of the building in vertical rows every third 
floor or 50 feet, whichever is less. The anchors are spaced horizontally 
to allow a stabilization attachment (stabilizer tie) for each of the two plat- 
form suspension wire ropes. The stabilizer tie consists of two parts. One 
part is a quick connect-quick disconnect device which utilizes a corro- 



Page 578.6 



Register 2007, No. 32; 8-10-2007 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3299App. B 



sion-resistant yoke and retainer spring that is designed to fit over the 
building anchors. The second part of the stabihzer tie is a lanyard which 
is used to maintain a fixed distance between the suspension wire rope and 
the face of the building. 

In this method, as the suspended powered platform descends past the 
elevation of each anchor, the descent is halted and each of the platform 
occupants secures a stabilizer tie between a suspension wire rope and a 
building anchor. The procedure is repeated as each elevation of a build- 
ing anchor is reached during the descent of the powered platform. 

As the platform ascends, the procedure is reversed; that is, the stabiliz- 
er ties are removed as each elevation of a building anchor is reached. The 
removal of each stabilizer tie is assured since the platform is provided 
with stopping devices which will interrupt power to its hoist(s) in the 
event either stopping device contacts a stabilizer during the ascent of the 
platform. 

Figure 2 of Appendix B illustrates another type of acceptable intermit- 
tent stabilization system which utilizes retaining pins as the quick con- 
nect-quick disconnect device in the stabilizer tie. Intermittent stabiliza- 
tion anchors shall both be located outboard, in line with, or inboard of 
suspension ropes. A combination of locations at the same level shall not 
be allowed. 

8. Wire Rope Inspection. The inspection of the suspension wire rope 
is important since the rope gradually loses strength during its useful life. 
The purpose of the inspection is to determine whether the wire rope has 
sufficient integrity to support a platform with the required design factor. 

If there is any doubt concerning the condition of a wire rope or its abil- 
ity to perform the required work, the rope should be replaced. The cost 
of wire rope replacement is quite small if compared to the cost in terms 
of human injuries, equipment down time and replacement. 

No listing of critical inspection factors, which serve as a basis for wire 
rope replacement in the standard, can be a substitute for an experienced 
inspector of wire rope. The listing serves as a user" s guide to the accepted 
standards by which ropes must be judged. 

Rope life can be prolonged if preventive maintenance is performed 
regularly. Cutting off an appropriate length of rope at the end termination 
before the core degrades and valley breaks appear minimizes degrada- 
tion at these sections. 

9. General Maintenance. In meeting the general maintenance require- 
ment in Section 3297, the employer should undertake the prompt replace- 
ment of broken, worn and damaged parts, switch contacts, brushes, and 
short flexible conductors of electrical devices. The components of the 
electrical service system and traveling cables should be replaced when 
damaged or significantly abraded. In addition, gears, shafts, bearings, 
brakes and hoisting drums should be kept in proper alignment. For a sta- 
bilization system to be effective, the building face rollers cannot be dirty 
or greasy and shall be kept clean. 



1 0. Training. In meeting the training requirement of Section 3298, em- 
ployers should use both on the job training and formal classroom train- 
ing. The written work procedures used for this training should be ob- 
tained from the manufacturer, if possible, or prepared as necessary for the 
employee's information and use. 

Employees who will operate powered platforms with intermittent sta- 
bilization systems should receive instruction in the specific ascent and 
descent procedures involving the assembly and disassembly of the stabi- 
hzer ties. 

An acceptable training program should also include employee instruc- 
tion in basic inspection procedures for the purpose of determining the 
need for repair and replacement of platform equipment. In addition, the 
program should cover the inspection, care and use of the personal fall 
protection equipment required in Section 3299. 

In addition, the training program should also include an emergency ac- 
tion plan as specified in Section 3220 of the General Industry Safety Or- 
ders. 

Following the completion of a training program, the employee should 
be required to demonstrate competency in operating the equipment safe- 
ly. Supplemental training of the employee should be provided by the em- 
ployer, as necessary, if the equipment used or other working conditions 
should change. 

An employee who is required to work with chemical products on a 
platform should receive training in proper cleaning procedures, and in the 
hazards, care and handling of these products. In addition, the employee 
should be suppHed with the appropriate personal protective equipment, 
such as gloves and eye and face protection. 

11. Suspension and Securing of Powered Platforms (Equivalency). 
One acceptable method of demonstrating the equivalency of a method of 
suspending or securing a powered platform, as required in Sections 
3294(b)(3), 3295(c) and (e)(1)(F), is to provide an engineering analysis 
by a professional engineer currently registered in the State of California. 
ITie analysis should demonstrate that the proposed method will provide 
an equal or greater degree of safety for employees than any one of the 
methods specified in the standard. 

Note: Authority cited: Section 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code; and Section 18943(c), Health and Safety Code. 

Appendix B to Article 6 

Exhibits (Advisory). 
The three drawings in Appendix B illustrate typical platform stabiliza- 
tion systems which are addressed in the standard. The drawings are to be 
used for reference purposes only, and do not illustrate all the mandatory 
requirements for each system. 

Note; Authority cited: Section 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code; and Section 18943(c), Health and Safety Code. 



Page 578.7 



Register 2007, No. 32; 8-10-2007 



§3299App.B 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



Figure 1. Typical Self-Powered Platform — Continuous External or 
Indented MuUion Guide System 




Building Face 
Roller 



Guide Rollers Engaged 
to Indented Mullion Track 



Indented 
Mullion Guide 



Building Face_ 
Rollers 



Hoisting 
Machine 



Suspension 
Wire Ropes 




.Life 
Lines 



Page 578.8 



Register 2007, No. 32; 8-10-2007 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3299.App.B 



Figure 2. Typical Self-Powered Platform- 
Intermittent Tie-in System 



Stabilizer 
Insert 
Vertically 
Spaced Every 
Third Floor 




Retaining Pin 



Z" 

Stabilizer Tie 



Detail of Internal Tie-In shown. 

External Tie-In is similar to 

Button Guide System Guide Button, 




Suspensiofi 
Wire Rope 



Suspension 
Wire Ropes 



Stabilizer 

Tie 



Limit 

Sensor 

Switch 



Building Face 
Roller 



Hoisting 
Machine 



Life 
Lines 



Page 578.9 



Register 2000, No. 25; 6-23-2000 



§3299.App.B 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



Figure 3. Typical Self-Powered Platform — 
Button Guide System 




Guide Button on 
Face of Building 



Guide Track 
Attached to 
Platform 



Suspension 
Wire Rope 



Flared Out Ends- 

Guide 
Tracks' 



Hoisting 
Machine 



NOTE: 

Guide Track Engages 
Two Guide Buttons 
At All Times 



Guide Buttons on Face 
of Building- 
Located in Vertical Rows 




Life 
Lines 



Note: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code; and Section 18943(c), Health and Safety Code. 



Page 578.10 



Register 2000, No. 25; 6-23-2000 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§ 3299.App.C. 



Appendix C to Article 6 

Personal Fall Arrest System 
(Sections 1 and II-Mandatory); 
(Section III-Non-Mandatory). 

Use of the Appendix 

Section I of Appendix C sets out the criteria for personal fall arrest sys- 
tems used by all employees using powered platforms, as required by Sec- 
tion 3299. Section II sets out test procedures which shall be used to deter- 
mine compliance with applicable requirements contained in Section I of 
this Appendix. Section III provides non-mandatory guidelines which are 
intended to assist employers in complying with these provisions. 

I. Personal Fall Arrest Systems. 

(a) Scope and Application. This section establishes the application of, 
and performance criteria for, personal fall arrest systems which are re- 
quired for use by all employees using powered platforms under Article 
6. 

(b) Definitions. Definitions that apply to terms used in Appendix C are 
located in Article 1, Section 3207 and Article 5, Section 3281. 

(c) Design for System Components. 

( 1 ) Connectors shall be drop forged, pressed or formed steel, or made 
of equivalent materials. 

(2) Connectors shall have a corrosion-resistant finish, and all surfaces 
and edges shall be smooth to prevent damage to interfacing parts of the 
system. 

(3) Lanyards and vertical safety lines which tie-off one employee shall 
have a minimum breaking strength of 5,000 pounds. All ends shall be 
spliced or swaged as per the manufacturer's specifications. Knots shall 
not be permitted at ends or anywhere along the length of the lanyard or 
"safety line". 

(4) Self-retracting safety lines and lanyards which automatically Hmit 
free fall distance to two feet or less shall have components capable of sus- 
taining a minimum static tensile load of 3,000 pounds apphed to the de- 
vice with the safety line or lanyard in the fully extended position. 

(5) Self-retracting safety lines and lanyards which do not limit free fall 
distance to two feet or less, ripstitch lanyards, and tearing and deforming 
lanyards shall be capable of sustaining a minimum tensile load of 5,000 
pounds applied to the device with the safety line or lanyard in the fully 
extended position. 

(6) Dee-rings and snap-hooks shall be capable of sustaining a mini- 
mum tensile load of 5,000 pounds. 

(7) Dee-rings and snap-hooks shall be 100 percent proof-tested to a 
minimum tensile load of 3,600 pounds without cracking, breaking, or 
taking permanent deformation. 

(8) Snap-hooks shall be sized to be compatible with the member to 
which they are connected. Only double-acting snap-hooks designed to 
prevent accidental disengagement shall be used. 

(9) Horizontal safety lines, where used, shall be designed under the su- 
pervision of a professional engineer currently registered in the State of 
California and installed as part of a complete personal fall arrest system, 
which maintains a safety factor of at least two. 

(10) Anchorages to which personal fall arrest equipment is attached 
shall be capable of supporting at least 5000 pounds per employee at- 
tached, or shall be designed under the supervision of a professional engi- 
neer currently registered in the State of California and installed and used 
as part of a complete personal fall arrest system which maintains a safety 
factor of at least two. 

(11) Ropes and straps (webbing) used in lanyards, safety lines, and 
strength components of body harnesses, shall be made from synthetic fi- 
bers or wire rope. 

( 1 2) All body harnesses and lanyards manufactured on or before Janu- 
ary 1, 1998, shall be designed and built to conform to ANSI 
AlO.14-1975, Requirements for Safety Belts, Harnesses, Lanyards, 
Lifelines and Drop Lines for Construction and Industrial Use, which is 
hereby incorporated by reference. 



(13) All personal fall arrest, personal fall restraint and positioning de- 
vice systems manufactured after January 1, 1998, shall be designed and 
built to conform to either ANSI AlO. 14-1 991 American National Stan- 
dard for Construction and Demolition Use, or ANSI Z359. 1 -1 992 Amer- 
ican National Standard Safety Requirements for Personal Fall Arrest 
Systems. Subsystems and Components, which are hereby incorporated 
by reference. 

(d) System Performance Criteria. 

(1) Personal fall aiTCSt systems shall, when stopping a fall: 

(A) Limit maximum arresting force on an employee to 1 ,800 pounds 
v/hen used with a body harness; 

(B) Bring an employee to a complete stop and limit maximum deceler- 
ation distance an employee travels to 3.5 feet; and 

(C) Have sufficient strength to withstand twice the potential impact 
energy of an employee free falling a distance of six feet, or the free fall 
distance permitted by the system, whichever is less. 

(2)(A) When used by employees having a combined person and tool 
weight of less than 310 pounds, personal fall arrest systems which meet 
the criteria and protocols contained in paragraphs (b). (c) and (d) in Sec- 
tion II of this Appendix shall be considered as complying with the provi- 
sions of subparagraphs (d)(1)(A) through (d)(1)(C) above. 

(B) When used by employees having a combined tool and body weight 
of 3 10 pounds or more, personal fall arrest systems which meet the crite- 
ria and protocols contained in paragraphs (b), (c) and (d) in Section II 
may be considered as complying with the provisions of subparagraphs 
(d)(1)(A) through (d)(1)(C). provided that the criteria and protocols are 
modified appropriately to provide proper protection for such heavier 
weights. 

(e) Care and Use. 

( 1 ) Body belts shall not be used as part of a personal fall arrest system. 

(2) Devices used to connect to a horizontal safety line which may be- 
come a vertical safety line shall be capable of locking in either direction 
on the safety line. 

(3) Personal fall arrest systems shall be rigged such that an employee 
can neither free fall more than six feet, nor contact any lower level ob- 
stacle. 

(4) The attachment point of the body belt shall be located in the center 
of the wearer's back. The attachment point of the body harness shall be 
located in the center of the wearer' s back near shoulder level or above the 
wearer's head. 

(5) When vertical safety lines are used, each employee shall be pro- 
vided with a separate safety hne. 

(6) Personal fall arrest systems or components shall be used only for 
employee fall protection. 

(7) Personal fall arrest systems or components subjected to impact 
loading shall be immediately removed from service and shall not be used 
again for employee protection until repaired or replaced. Repaired or re- 
placed components or component parts shall meet the performance and 
testing requirements of this appendix. 

(8) The employer shall provide for prompt rescue of employees in the 
event of a fall or shall assure the self-rescue capability of employees. 

(9) Before using a personal fall arrest system, and after any component 
or system is changed, employees shall be trained in accordance with the 
requirements of Secton 3298 in the safe use of the system. 

(f) Inspections. 

(1) Personal fall arrest systems shall be inspected prior to each use for 
mildew, wear, damage and other deterioration, and defective compo- 
nents shall be removed from service if their strength or function may be 
adversely affected. 

(2) Each personal fall arrest system shall be inspected not less than 
twice annually by a competent person in accordance with the manufac- 
turer's recommendations. The date of each inspection shall be docu- 
mented. 

Note: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code; and Section 18943(c), Health and Safety Code. 
II. Test Methods for Personal Fall Aixest Systems. 



Page 578.11 



Register 2000, No. 13; 3-31-2000 



§ 3299.App.C. 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



(a) General. Paragraphs (b), (c). (d) and (e) of this Section II set forth 
test procedures which shall be used to determine compliance with re- 
quirements in subparagraphs (d)(1)(A) through (d)(1)(C) of Section I of 
this Appendix. 

(b) General conditions for all tests in Section II. 

( 1 ) Safety lines, lanyards and deceleration devices shall be attached to 
an anchorage and connected to the body harness in the same manner as 
they would be when used to protect employees. 

(2) The anchorage shall be rigid, and shall not have a deflection greater 
than .04 inches when a force of 2.250 pounds is applied. 

(3) The frequency response of the load measuring instrumentation 
shall be 120 Hz. 

(4) The test weight used in the strength and force tests shall be a rigid, 
metal, cylindrical or torso-shaped object with a girth of 38 inches plus 
or minus four inches. 

(5) The lanyard or safety line used to create the free fall distance shall 
be supplied with the system, or in its absence, the least elastic lanyard or 
safety line available to be used with the system. 

(6) The test weight for each test shall be hoisted to the required level 
and shall be quickly released without having any appreciable motion im- 
parted to it. 

(7) The system's performance shall be evaluated taking into account 
the range of environmental conditions for which it is designed to be used. 

(8) Following the test, the system need not be capable of further opera- 
tion. 

(c) Strength Test. 

( 1 ) During the testing of all systems, a test weight of 300 pounds plus 
or minus five pounds shall be used. (See subparagraph (b)(4), above.) 

(2) The test consists of dropping the test weight once. A new unused 
system shall be used for each test. 

(3) For lanyard systems, the lanyard length shall be six feet plus or mi- 
nus two inches as measured from the fixed anchorage to the attachment 
on the body harness. 

(4) For rope-grab-type deceleration systems, the length of the safety 
line above the centerline of the grabbing mechanism to the safety line's 
anchorage point shall not exceed two feet. 

(5) For lanyard systems, for systems with deceleration devices which 
do not automatically limit free fall distance to two feet or less, and for sys- 
tems with deceleration devices which have a connection distance in ex- 
cess of one foot (measured between the centerline of the safety line and 
the attachment point to the body belt or harness) the test weight shall be 
rigged to free fall a distance of 7.5 feet from a point that is 1 .5 feet above 
the anchorage point, to its hanging location (six feet below the anchor- 
age). The test weight shall fall without interference, obstruction, or hit- 
ting the floor or ground during the test. In some cases, a non-elastic wire 
lanyard of sufficient length may need to be added to the system (for test 
purposes) to create the necessary free fall distance. 

(6) For deceleration device systems with integral safety lines or lan- 
yards which automatically limit free fall distance to two feet or less, the 
test weight shall be rigged to free fall a distance of four feet. 

(7) Any weight which detaches from the belt or harness shall constitute 
failure for the strength test. 

(d) Force Test. 

(1) General. The test consists of dropping the respective test weight 
specified in subsection (d)(2)(A) or (d)(3)(A) once. A new, unused sys- 
tem shall be used for each test. 

(2) For lanyard systems. 

(A) A test weight of 220 pounds plus or minus three pounds shall be 
used. (See subparagraph (b)(4), above.) 

(B) Lanyard length shall be six feet plus or minus two inches as mea- 
sured from the fixed anchorage to the attachment on the body harness. 

(C) The test weight shall fall free from the anchorage level to its hang- 
ing location (a total of six feet free fall distance) without interference, ob- 
struction, or hitting the floor or ground during the test. 

(3) For all other systems. 



(A) A test weight of 220 pounds plus or minus three pounds shall be 
used. (See subparagraph (b)(4), above.) 

(B) The free fall distance to be used in the test shall be the maximum 
fall distance physically permitted by the system during normal use condi- 
tions, up to a maximum free fall distance for the test weight of six feet, 
except as follows: 

1. For deceleration systems which have a connection link or lanyard. 
the test weight shall free fall a distance equal to the connection distance 
(measured between the centerline of the safety line and the attachment 
point to the body harness). 

2. For deceleration device systems with integral safety lines or lan- 
yards which automatically limit free fall distance to two feet or less, the 
test weight shall free fall a distance equal to that permiUed by the system 
in normal use. (For example, to test a system with a self-retracting safety 
line or lanyard, the test weight shall be supported and the system allowed 
to retract the safety line or lanyard as it would in normal use. The test 
weight would then be released and the force and deceleration distance 
measured). 

(4) A system fails the force test if the recorded maximum arresting 
force exceeds 2,520 pounds when using a body harness. 

(5) The maximum elongation and deceleration distance shall be re- 
corded during the force test. 

(e) Deceleration Device Tests. 

( 1 ) General. The device shall be evaluated or tested under the environ- 
mental conditions, (such as rain, ice, grease, dirt, type of safety line, etc.), 
for which the device is designed. 

(2) Rope-grab-type deceleration devices. 

(A) Devices shall be moved on a safety line 1 ,000 times over the same 
length of hne a distance of not less than one foot, and the mechanism shall 
lock each time. 

(B) Unless the device is permanently marked to indicate the type(s) of 
safety line which must be used, several types (different diameters and dif- 
ferent materials) of safety lines shall be used to test the device. 

(3) Other self-activating-type deceleration devices. The locking 
mechanisms of other self-activating-type deceleration devices designed 
for more than one arrest shall lock each of 1 ,000 times as they would in 
normal service. 

Note: Authority cited: Section 142.3. Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code; and Section 18943(c). Health and Safety Code. 

III. Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Personal Fall Arrest Systems. The 
following information constitutes additional guidehnes for use in com- 
plying with requirements for a personal fall arrest system. 

(a) Selection and Use Considerations. The kind of personal fall arrest 
system selected should match the particular work situation, and any pos- 
sible free fall distance should be kept to a minimum. Consideration 
should be given to the particular work environment. For example, the 
presence of acids, dirt, moisture, oil, grease, etc., and their effect on the 
system should be evaluated. Hot or cold environments may also have an 
adverse affect on the system. Wire rope should not be used where an elec- 
trical hazard is anticipated. As required by the standard, the employer 
must plan to have means available to promptly rescue an employee 
should a fall occur, since the suspended employee may not be able to 
reach a work level independently. 

Where lanyards, connectors, and safety lines are subject to damage by 
work operations such as welding, chemical cleaning, and sandblasting, 
the component should be protected or other securing systems should be 
used. The employer should fully evaluate the work conditions and envi- 
ronment (including seasonal weather changes) before selecting the ap- 
propriate personal fall protection system. Once in use, the system's effec- 
tiveness should be monitored. In some cases, a program for cleaning and 
maintenance of the system may be necessary. 

(b) Testing Considerations. Before purchasing or putting into use a 
personal fall arrest system, an employer should obtain from the supplier 
information about the system based on its performance during testing so 



Page 578.12 



Register 2000, No. 13; 3-31-2000 



Titles 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§ 3299.App.C. 



that the employer can know if the system meets this standard. Testing 
should be done using recognized test methods. 

Section II of this Appendix C contains test methods recognized for 
evaluating the performance of fall arrest systems. Not all systems may 
need to be individually tested; the performance of some systems may be 
based on data and calculations derived from testing of similar systems, 
provided that enough information is available to demonstrate similarity 
of function and design. 

(c) Component Compatibility Considerations. Ideally, a personal fall 
arrest system is designed, tested, and supplied as a complete system. 
However, it is common practice for lanyards, connectors, safety lines, 
deceleration devices, and body harnesses to be interchanged since some 
components wear out before others. The employer and employee should 
realize that not all components are interchangeable. For instance, a lan- 
yard should not be connected between a body harness and a deceleration 
device of the self-retracting type since this can result in additional free 
fall for which the system was not designed. Any substitution or change 
to a personal fall arrest system should be fully evaluated or tested by a 
qualified person to determine that it meets the standard, before the modi- 
fied system is put in use. 

(d) Employee Training Considerations. 

Thorough employee training in the selection and use of personal fall 
arrest systems is imperative. As stated in the standard, before the equip- 
ment is used, employees must be trained in the safe use of the system. 
This should include the following: Application limits; proper anchoring 
and tie-off techniques; estimation of free fall distance, including deter- 
mination of deceleration distance, and total fall distance to prevent strik- 
ing a lower level; methods of use; and inspection and storage of the sys- 
tem. Careless or improper use of the equipment can result in serious 
injury or death. Employers and employees should become familiar with 
the material in this appendix, as well as manufacturer's recommenda- 
tions, before a system is used. Of uppermost importance is the reduction 
in strength caused by certain tie-offs (such as using knots, tying around 
sharp edges, etc.) and maximum permitted free fall distance. Also, to be 
stressed are the importance of inspections prior to use, the limitations of 
the equipment, and unique conditions at the worksite which may be im- 
portant in determining the type of system to use. 

(e) Instruction Considerations. Employers should obtain comprehen- 
sive instructions from the supplier as to the system's proper use and 
application, including, where applicable: 

( 1 ) The force measured during the sample force test; 

(2) The maximum elongation measured for lanyards during the force 
test; 

(3) The deceleration distance measured for deceleration devices dur- 
ing the force test; 

(4) Caution statements on critical use limitations; 

(5) Application limits; 

(6) Proper hook-up, anchoring and tie-off techniques, including the 
proper dee-ring or other attachment point to use on the body harness for 
fall arrest; 

(7) Proper climbing techniques; 

(8) Methods of inspection, use, cleaning, and storage; and 

(9) Specific safety lines which may be used. 

This information should be provided to employees during training. 

(f) Inspection Considerations. As stated in the standard (Section I, 
paragraph (f)), personal fall arrest systems must be regularly inspected. 
Any component with any significant defect, such as cuts, tears, abra- 
sions, mold, or undue stretching; alterations or additions which might af- 
fect its efficiency; damage due to deterioration; contact with fire, acids, 
or other corrosives; distorted hooks or faulty hook springs; tongues un- 
fitted to the shoulder of buckles; loose or damaged mountings; non-func- 
tioning parts; or wearing or internal deterioration in the ropes must be 
withdrawn from service immediately, and should be tagged or marked as 
unusable, or destroyed. 

(g) Rescue Considerations. As required by the standard (Section I, 
subparagraph (e)(8)), when personal fall arrest systems are used, the em- 



ployer must assure that employees can be promptly rescued or can rescue 
themselves should a fall occur. The availability of rescue personnel, lad- 
ders or other rescue equipment should be evaluated. In some situations, 
equipment which allows employees to rescue themselves after the fall 
has been arrested may be desirable, such as devices which have descent 
capability. 

(h) Tie-off Considerations. 

(1) One of the most important aspects of personal fall protection sys- 
tems is fully planning the system before it is put into use. Probably the 
most overiooked component is planning for suitable anchorage points. 
Such planning should ideally be done before the structure or building is 
constructed so that anchorage points can be incorporated during con- 
struction for use later for window cleaning or other building mainte- 
nance. If properly planned, these anchorage points may be used during 
construction, as well as afterwards. 

(2) Employers and employees should at all times be aware that the 
strength of a personal fall arrest system is based on its being attached to 
an anchoring system which does not significantly reduce the strength of 
the system (such as properiy dimensioned eye- boit/snap-hook anchor- 
age). Therefore, if a means of attachment is used that will reduce the 
strength of the system, that component should be replaced by a stronger 
one, but one that will also maintain the appropriate maximum arrest force 
characteristics. 

(3) Tie-off using a knot in a rope lanyard or safety line (at any location) 
can reduce the safety line or lanyard strength by 50 percent or more. 
ITierefore, a stronger lanyard or safety line should be used to compensate 
for the weakening effect of the knot, or the lanyard length should be re- 
duced (or the tie-off location raised) to minimize free fall distance, or the 
lanyard or safety line should be replaced by one which has an appropri- 
ately incorporated connector to eliminate the need for a knot. 

(4) Tie-off a rope lanyard or safety line around an "H" or "I" beam or 
similar support can reduce its strength as much as 70 percent due to the 
cutting action of the beam edges. Therefore, use should be made of a 
webbing lanyard or wire core safety lines around the beam; or the lanyard 
or safety line should be protected from the edge; or free fall distance 
should be greatly minimized. 

(5) Tie-off where the Une passes over or around rough or sharp sur- 
faces reduces strength drastically. Such a tie-off should be avoided or an 
alternative tie-off rigging should be used. Such alternatives may include 
use of a snaphook/dee ring connection, wire rope tie-off, an effective 
padding of the surfaces, or an abrasion-resistance strap around or over 
the problem surface. 

(6) Horizontal safety lines may, depending on their geometry and 
angle of sag, be subjected to greater loads than the impact load imposed 
by an attached component. When the angle of horizontal safety line sag 
is less than 30 degrees, the impact force imparted to the safety line by an 
attached lanyard is greatly amplified. For example, with a sag angle of 
15 degrees, the force amplification is about 2:1 and at 5 degrees sag, it 
is about 6: 1 . 

Depending on the angle of sag, and the line's elasdcity. the strength 
of the horizontal safety line and the anchorages to which it is attached 
should be increased a number of times over that of the lanyard. Extreme 
care should be taken in considering a horizontal safety line for multiple 
tie-offs. The reason for this is that in mulfiple tie-offs to a horizontal 
safety line, if one employee falls, the movement of the falling employee 
and the horizontal safety Une during arrest of the fall may cause other em- 
f)loyees to also fall. Horizontal safety line and anchorage strength should 
be increased for each additional employee to be tied-off. For these and 
other reasons, the design of systems using horizontal safety line.s must 
only be done by qualified persons. Testing of installed safety lines and 
anchors prior to use is recommended. 

(7) The strength of an eve-bolt is rated along the axis of the bolt and 
its strength is greatly reduced if the force is applied at an angle to this axis 
(in the direction of shear). Also, care should be exercised in selecting the 
proper diameter of the eye to avoid accidental disengagement of snap- 
hooks not designed to be compatible for the connection. 



Page 578.13 



Register 2000, No. 13; 3-31 -2000 



§ 3299. App. D 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



(8) Due to the significant reduction in the strength of the safety line/ 
lanyard (in some cases, as much as a 70 percent reduction), the sliding 
hitch knot should not be used for safety line/lanyard connections except 
in emergency situations where no other available system is practical. The 
"one-and-one" sliding hitch knot should never be used because it is un- 
reliable in stopping a fall. The "two-and-two" or "three-and-three" knot 
(preferable), may be used in emergency situations; however, care should 
be taken to limit free fall distance to a minimum because of reduced safe- 
ty line/lanyard strength. 

(i) Vertical Safety Line Considerations. As required by the standard, 
each employee must have a separate safety line when the safety line is 
vertical. The reason for this is that in multiple tie-offs to a single safety 
line, if one employee falls, the movement of the safety line during the ar- 
rest of the fall may pull other employees' lanyards, causing them to fall 
as well. 

(j) Free Fall Considerations. The employer and employee should at all 
times be aware that a system's maximum arresting force is evaluated un- 
der normal use conditions established by the manufacturer, and in no case 
using a free fall distance in excess of six feet. A few extra feet of free fall 
can significantly increase the arresting force on the employee, possibly 
to the point of causing injury. Because of this, the free fall distance should 
be kept at a minimum, and, as required by the standard, in no case greater 
than six feet. To help assure this, the tie-off attachment point to the safety 
line or anchor should be located at or above the connection point of the 
fall arrest equipment to the body harness. (Since otherwise additional 
free fall distance is added to the length of the connecting means (i.e. lan- 
yard)). Attaching to the working surface will often result in a free fall 
greater than six feet. For instance, if a six foot lanyard is used, the total 
free fall distance will be the distance from the working level to the body 
harness attachment point plus the six feet of lanyard length. Another im- 
portant consideration is that the arresting force which the fall system 
must withstand also goes up with greater distance of free fall, possibly 
exceeding the strength of the system. 

(k) Elongation and Deceleration Distance Considerations. Other fac- 
tors involved in a proper tie-off are elongation and deceleration distance. 
During the arresting of a fall, a lanyard will experience a length of stretch- 
ing or elongation, whereas activation of a deceleration device will result 
in a certain stopping distance. These distances should be available with 
the lanyard or device's instructions and must be added to the free fall dis- 
tance to arrive at the total fall distance before an employee is fully 
stopped. The additional stopping distance may be very significant if the 
lanyard or deceleration device is attached near or at the end of a long safe- 
ty line, which may itself add considerable distance due to its own elonga- 
tion. As required by the standard, sufficient distance to allow for all of 
these factors must also be maintained between the employee and obstruc- 
tions below, to prevent an injury due to impact before the system fully 
arrests the fall. In addition, a minimum of 12 feet of safety line should be 
allowed below the securing point of a rope grab type deceleration device, 
and the end terminated to prevent the device from sliding off the safety 
line should extend to the ground or the next working level below. These 
measures are suggested to prevent the worker from inadvertently moving 
past the end of the safety line and having the rope grab become disen- 
gaged from the safety line. 

(/) Obstruction Considerations. The location of the tie-off should also 
consider the hazard of obstructions in the potential fall path of the em- 
ployee. Tie-offs which minimize the possibilities of exaggerated swing- 
ing should be considered. 

(m) Other Considerations. Because of the design of some personal fall 
arrest systems, additional considerations may be required for proper tie- 
off. For example, heavy deceleration devices of the self-retracting type 
should be secured overhead in order to avoid the weight of the device 
having to be supported by the employee. Also, if self-retracting equip- 
ment is connected to a horizontal safety Une, the sag in the safety line 
should be minimized to prevent the device from sliding down the safety 



line to a position which creates a swing hazard during fall arrest. In all 

cases, manufacturer's instructions should be followed. 

Note: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code; and section 18943(c), Health and Safety Code. 

Appendix D to Article 6 

Existing Installations 
(Mandatory) 

Use of the Appendix 

Appendix D sets out the mandatory building and equipment require- 
ments for applicable permanent installations completed after September 
29, 1974, and no later than July 1, 1993 which are exempt from Sections 
3292(a), (b)( 1 ), (c), 3293, 3294, and 3295 of Article 6. The requirements 
in Appendix D are essentially the same as unrevised building and equip- 
ment provisions which previously were designated Article 6 and which 
were effective on July 16, 1976. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-8510(a).) 
Note: All existing installations subject to this appendix shall also comply with 
Sections 3296, 3297, 3298, 3299 and Appendix C of Article 6. 

(a) Definitions Applicable to this Appendix. 

Angulated Roping. A system of platform suspension in which the up- 
per wire rope sheaves or suspension points are closer to the plane of the 
building face than the corresponding attachment points on the platform, 
thus causing the platform to press against the face of the building during 
its vertical travel. 

ANSI. American National Standards Institute. 

Babbitted Fastenings. The method of providing wire rope attachments 
in which the ends of the wire strands are bent back and are held in a ta- 
pered socket by means of poured molten babbitt metal. 

Brake-Disc Type. A brake in which the holding effect is obtained by 
frictional resistance between one or more faces of discs keyed to the ro- 
tating member to be held and fixed discs keyed to the stationary or hous- 
ing member (pressure between the discs being applied axially). 

Brake-Self-Energizing Band Type. An essentially unidirectional 
brake in which the holding effect is obtained by the snubbing action of 
a flexible band wrapped about a cylindrical wheel or drum affixed to the 
rotating member to be held, the connections and linkages being so ar- 
ranged that the motion of the brake wheel or drum will act to increase the 
tension or holding force of the band. 

Brake-Shoe Type. A brake in which the holding effect is obtained by 
applying the direct pressure of two or more segmental friction elements 
held to a stationary member against a cylindrical wheel or drum affixed 
to the rotating member to be held. 

Building Face Rollers. A specialized form of guide roller designed to 
contact a portion of the outer face or wall structure of the building, and 
to assist in stabilizing the operators' platform during vertical travel. 

Continuous Pressure. Operation by means of buttons or switches, any 
one of which may be used to control the movement of the working plat- 
form or roof car, only as long as the button or switch is manually main- 
tained in the actuating position. 

Control. A system governing starting, stopping, direction, accelera- 
tion, speed, and retardation of moving members. 

Controller. A device or group of devices, usually contained in a single 
enclosure, which serves to control in some predetermined manner the ap- 
paratus to which it is connected. 

Electrical Ground. A conducting connection between an electrical cir- 
cuit or equipment and the earth, or some conducting body which serves 
in place of the earth. 

Guide Roller. A rotating, bearing-mounted, generally cylindrical 
member, operating separately or as part of a guide shoe assembly, at- 
tached to the platform, and providing rolling contact with building guide- 
ways, or other building contact members. 

Guide Shoe. An assembly of rollers, slide members, or the equivalent, 
attached as a unit to the operators' platform, and designed to engage with 
the building members provided for the vertical guidance of the operators' 
platform. 



Page 578.14 



Register 2000, No. 13; 3-31-2000 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3299.App.D 



Interlock. A device actuated by the operation of some other device 
with which it is directly associated, to govern succeeding operations of 
the same or allied devices. 

Operating Device. A pushbutton, lever, or other manual device used 
to actuate a control. 

Powered Platform. Equipment to provide access to the exterior of a 
building for maintenance, consisting of a suspended power-operated 
working platform, a roof car, or other suspension means, and the requisite 
operating and control devices. 

Rated Load. The combined weight of employees, tools, equipment, 
and other material which the working platform is designed and installed 
to lift. 

Relay, Direction. An electrically energized contactor responsive to an 
initiating control circuit, which in turn causes a moving member to travel 
in a particular direction. 

Relay, Potential for Vertical Travel. An electrically energized contac- 
tor responsive to initiating control circuit, which in turn controls the oper- 
ation of a moving member in both directions. This relay usually operates 
in conjunction with direction relays, as covered under the definition 
"relay, direction." 

Roof Car. A structure for the suspension of a working platform, pro- 
viding for its horizontal movement to working positions. 

Roof-Powered Platform. A powered platform having the raising and 
lowering mechanism located on a roof car. 

Self-Powered Platform. A powered platform having the raising and 
lowering mechanism located on the working platform. 

Traveling Cable. A cable made up of electrical or communication con- 
ductors or both, and providing electrical connection between the working 
platform and the roof car or other fixed point. 

Weatherproof. Equipment so constructed or protected that exposure 
to the weather will not interfere with its proper operation. 

Working Platform. The suspended stmcture arranged for vertical trav- 
el which provides access to the exterior of the building or structure. 

Yield Point. The stress at which the material exhibits a permanent set 
of 0.2 percent. 

Zinced Fastenings. The method of providing wire rope attachments in 
which the splayed or fanned wire ends are held in a tapered socket by 
means of poured molten zinc. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-85 10(b).) 

(b) General Requirements. 

( 1 ) Design requirements. All powered platform installations for exteri- 
or building maintenance completed as of September 29, 1 974, but no lat- 
er than July 1 , 1 993, shall meet all of the design, construction and installa- 
tion requirements of Part II and III of the "American National Standard 
Safety Requirements for Powered Platforms for Exterior Building Main- 
tenance. ANSI A 120. 1-1 970", which is hereby incorporated by refer- 
ence, and of this appendix. All powered platform installations installed 
prior to September 29, 1 974 shall be maintained as required by Appendix 
D. References shall be made to appropriate parts of ANSI A120.1-1970 
for detail specifications for equipment and special installations. (Title 24, 
Part 2, Section 2- 851 Kb).) 

(2) Limitation. The requirements of this appendix apply only to elec- 
tric powered platforms. It is not the intent of the appendix to prohibit the 
use of other types of power. Installation of powered platforms using other 
types of power is permitted, provided such platforms have adequate pro- 
tective devices for the type of power used, and otherwise provided for 
reasonable safety of life and limb to users of equipment and to others who 
may be exposed. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-851 1(c).) 

(3) Types of Powered Platforms. (A) For the purpose of applying this 
appendix, powered platforms are divided into two basic types. Type F 
and Type T. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-851 1(d) 1.) 

(B) Powered platforms designated as Type F shall meet all the require- 
ments in Part II of the ANSI A 120. 1-1970. American National Standard 
Safety Requirements for Powered Platforms for Exterior Building Main- 
tenance, which is hereby incorporated by reference. A basic requirement 
of Type F equipment is that the work platform is suspended by at least 



four wire ropes and designed so that failure of any one wire rope will not 
substantially alter the normal position of the working platform. Another 
basic requirement of Type F equipment is that only one layer of hoisting 
rope is permitted on winding drums. Type F powered platforms may be 
either roof-powered or seif-powered. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 
2-851 l(d)2.) 

(C) Powered platforms designated as Type T shall meet all the require- 
ments in Part III of ANSI A120.1-1970, American National Standard 
Safety Requirements for Powered Platforms for Exterior Building Main- 
tenance except for safety belts and safety lines, which are provided for 
in subparagraph (e) of this appendix. A basic requirement of Type T 
equipment is that the working platform is suspended by at least two wire 
ropes. Failure of one wire rope would not permit the working platform 
to fall to the ground, but would upset its normal position. The employer 
shall require employees working on Type T equipment to wear a safety 
belt or body harness as required by paragraph (e) of this appendix. Type 
T powered platforms may be either roof-lowered or self-powered. (Title 
24. Part 2. Section 2-851 l(d)3.) 

(D) The requirements of this section apply to powered platforms with 
winding drum type hoisting machines. It is not the intent of this section 
to prohibit powered platforms using other types of hoisting machines, 
traction drum hoisting machines, air powered machines, hydraulic pow- 
ered machines, and internal combustion machines. Installation of pow- 
ered platforms with other types of hoisting machines is permitted, pro- 
vided adequate protective devices are used, and provided reasonable 
safety of life and limb to users of the equipment and to others who may 
be exposed is assured. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-851 l-(c)2.) 

(E) Both Type F and Type T powered platforms shall comply with the 
requirements of Appendix C of this standard. 

(c) Type F Powered Platforms 

(1) Roof Car, General. 

(A) A roof car shall be provided whenever it is necessary to move the 
working platform horizontally to working or storage positions. 

(B) The maximum rated speed at which a power traversed roof car may 
be moved in a horizontal direction shall be 50 feet per minute. (Title 24. 
Fart 2. Section 2-85 12(a).) 

(2) Movement and Positioning of Roof Car. 

(A) Provisions shall be made to protect against having the roof car 
leave the roof or enter roof areas not designed for travel. 

(B) The horizontal motion of the roof cars shall be positively con- 
trolled so as to insure proper movement and positioning of the roof car. 

(C) Roof car positioning devices shall be provided to insure that the 
working platform is placed and retained in proper position for vertical 
travel and during storage. 

(D) Mechanical stops shall be provided to prevent the traversing of the 
roof car beyond its normal limits of travel. Such stops shall be capable 
of withstanding a force equal to 100 percent of the inertial effect of the 
roof car in motion with traversing power applied. 

(E)l . The operating device of a power-operated roof car for traversing 
shall be located on the roof car, the working platform, or both, and shall 
be of the continuous pressure weatherproof electric type. If more than 
one operating device is provided, they shall be so arranged that traversing 
is possible only for one operating device at a time. 

2. The operating device shall be so connected that it is not operating 
until: 

A. The working platform is located at its uppermost position of travel 
and is not in contact with the building face or fixed vertical guides in the 
face of the building; and 

B. All protective devices and interiocks are in a position for traversing. 
(Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-8512 (b).) 

(3) Roof Car Stability. Roof car stability shall be determined by either 
subparagraph (c)(3)(A) or (B) of this appendix, whichever is greater. 

(A) The roof car shall be continuously stable, considering overturning 
moment as determined by 125 percent rated load, plus maximum dead 
load and the prescribed wind loading. 



Page 578.15 



Register 2000, No. 13; 3-31-2000 



§ 3299. App. D 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



(B) The roof car and its anchorages shall be capable of resisting acci- 
dental over-tensioning of the wire ropes suspending the working plat- 
form and this calculated value shall include the effect of one and one-half 
times the value. For this calculation, the simultaneous effect of one-half 
wind load shall be included, and the design stresses shall not exceed those 
referred to in subparagraph (b)(1) of this appendix. 

(C) If the load on the motors is at any time in excess of three times that 
required for lifting the working platform with its rated load, the motor 
shall stall. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-85 12(c).) 

(4) Access to the Roof Car. Safe access to the roof car and from the roof 
car to the working platform shall be provided. If the access to the roof car 
at any point of its travel is not over the roof area or where otherwise neces- 
sary for safety self- closing, self-locking gates shall be provided. Stan- 
dard guardrails shall meet the provisions of Section 3209. (Title 24, Part 
2, Section 2-85 12(d).) 

(5) Means for Maintenance, Repair, and Storage. Means shall be pro- 
vided to run the roof car away from the roof perimeter, where necessary, 
and to provide a safe area for maintenance, repairs, and storage. Provi- 
sions shall be made to secure the machine in the stored position. For 
stored machines subject to wind forces, see special design and anchorage 
requirements for "wind forces" in Part II, Section 10.5.1.1 of ANSI 
Al 20-1-1970, American National Standard Safety Requirements for 
Powered Platforms for Exterior Building Maintenance, in which is here- 
by incorporated by reference. (Title 24. Part 2. Section 2-85 12(e).) 

(6) General Requirements for Working Platforms. The working plat- 
form shall be of girder or truss construction and shall be adequate to sup- 
port its rated load under any position of loading, and comply with the pro- 
visions set forth in Section 1 of ANSI A 1 20. 1 - 1 970, American National 
Standard Safety Requirements for Powered Platforms for Exterior Build- 
ing Maintenance, which is hereby incorporated by reference. 

(7) Load Rating Plate. Each working platform shall bear a manufactur- 
er' s load rating plate, conspicuously posted, stating the maximum per- 
missible rated load. Load rating plates shall be made of noncorrosive ma- 
terial and shall have letters and figures stamped, etched, or cast on the 
surface. The minimum height of the letters and figures shall be one- 
fourth inch. 

(8) Minimum Size. The working platform shall have a minimum net 
width of 24 inches. 

(9) Guardrails. Working platforms shall be furnished with permanent 
guard rails not less than 36 inches high, and not more than 42 inches high 
at the front (building side). At the rear, and on the sides, the rail shall not 
be less than 42 inches high. An intermediate guardrail shall be provided 
around the entire platform between the top guardrail and the toeboard. 

(10) Toeboards. A 3 1/2-inch toeboard shall be provided alone all 
sides of the working platform. 

(11) Open Spaces Between Guardrails and Toeboards. The spaces be- 
tween the intermediate guardrail and platform toeboard on the building 
side of the working platform, and between the lop guardrail and the toe- 
board on other sides of the platform, shall be filled with metallic mesh or 
similar material that will reject a ball one inch in diameter. The installed 
mesh shall be capable of withstanding a load of 1 00 pounds applied hori- 
zontally over any area of 144 square inches. If the space between the plat- 
form and the building face does not exceed eight inches, and the platform 
is restrained by guides, the mesh may be omitted on the front side. 

(12) Flooring. The platform flooring shall be of the nonskid type, and 
if of open construction, shall reject a 9/16-inch diameter ball or be pro- 
vided with a screen below the floor to reject a 9/16-inch diameter ball. 

(13) Access Gates. Where access gates are provided, they shall be 
self-closing and self-locking. 

(14) Operating Device for Vertical Movement of the Working Plat- 
form. 

(A) The normal operating device for the working platform shall be lo- 
cated on the working platform and shall be of the continuous pressure 
weatherproof electric type. 

(B) The operating device shall be operable only when all electrical 



protective devices and interlocks on the working platform are in position 
for normal service and, the roof car, if provided, is at an established oper- 
ating point. 

(15) Emergency Electric Operative Device. 

(A) In addition, on roof-powered platforms, an emergency electric op- 
erating device shall be provided near the hoisting machine for use in the 
event of failure of the normal operating device for the working platform, 
or failure of the traveling cable system. The emergency operating device 
shall be mounted in a locked compartment and shall have a legend 
mounted thereon reading: "For Emergency Operation Only. Establish 
Communication With Personnel on Working Platform Before Use." 

(B) A key for unlocking the compartment housing the emergency op- 
erating device shall be mounted in a break-glass receptacle located near 
the emergency operating device. 

(16) Manual Cranking for Emergency Operation. Emergency opera- 
tion of the main drive machine may be provided to allow manual crank- 
ing. This Provision for manual operation shall be designed so that not 
more than two persons will be required to perform this operation. The ac- 
cess to this provision shall include a means to automatically make the ma- 
chine inoperative electrically while under the emergency manual opera- 
tion. The design shall be such that the emergency brake is operative at or 
below governor tripping speed during manual operation. 

(17) Arrangement and Guarding of Hoisting Equipment. 

(A) Hoisting equipment shall consist of a power-driven drum or 
drums contained in the roof car (roof-lowered platforms) or contained 
on the working platform (self-powered platform). 

(B) The hoisting equipment shall be power-operated in both up and 
down directions. 

(C) Guard or other protective devices shall be installed wherever rotat- 
ing shafts or other mechanisms or gears may expose personnel to a haz- 
ard. 

(D) Friction devices or clutches shall not be used for connecting the 
main driving mechanism to the drum or drums. Belt or chain-driven ma- 
chines are prohibited. 

(18) Hoisting Motors. 

(A) Hoisting motors shall be electric and of weather-proof construc- 
tion. 

(B) Hoisting motors shall be in conformance with applicable provi- 
sions of subparagraph (c)(22) of this appendix. Electric Wiring and 
Equipment. 

(C) Hoisting motors shall be directly connected to the hoisting ma- 
chinery. Motor couplings, if used, shall be of steel construction. 

(19) Brakes. The hoisting machines(s) shall have two independent 
braking means, each designed to stop and hold the working platform with 
1 25 percent of rated load. 

(20) Hoisting Ropes and Rope Connections. 

(A) Working platforms shall be suspended by wire ropes of either 6 x 
19 or 6 X 37 classification, preformed or nonpreformed. 

(B) The minimum grade of the robe wire shall be improved plow steel. 
Ropes shall be fabricated of drawn galvanized or bright wire. Drawn gal- 
vanized wire rope shall be fabricated of individual wires on which the 
zinc coating has been applied at an intermediate size, and the wire then 
drawn to finished size and to the same tolerances and with the same me- 
chanical properties as for uncoated wire of equal grade. 

(C) The minimum factor of safety shall be 10, and shall be calculated 
by the following formula: 

F = S X N/W 
Where 

S = Manufacturer's rated breaking strength of one robe. 
N = Number of ropes under load. 

W = Maximum static load on all ropes with the platform and its rated 
load at any point of its travel. 

(D) Hoisting ropes shall be sized to conform with the required factor 
of safety, but in no case shall the size be less than 5/16 inch diameter. 



Page 578.16 



Register 2000, No. 13; 3-31-2000 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§ 3299. App. D 



(E) Winding drums shall have at least three turns of robe remaining 
when the platform has landed at the lowest possible point of its travel. 

(F) The lengthening or repairing of wire rope by the joining of two or 
move lengths is prohibited. 

(G) The nondrum ends of the hoisting ropes shall be provided with in- 
dividual shackle rods which will permit individual adjustment of rope 
lengths, if required. 

(H) More than two reverse bends in each rope is prohibited. 

(I) All cable connections used to support scaffold platforms shall be 
by means of factory attached swayed fittings or other method affording 
equivalent strength. Only safety type shackles shall be used. 

(J) Wire winders, cable winders, baskets, or the equivalent, when used 
on suspended scaffolds, shall be so constructed as to prevent kinking of 
the wire rope (cable). 

1. The frame work shall be rigid enough to prevent distortion when 
stepped upon, if it is mounted upon the top of the working platform. 

2. The cable feeding device, if tubular, shall be flared to permit smooth 
passage of the cable through it. 

A. The feeding device shall be placed at a proper angle both vertically 
and horizontally so as to direct the cable into the storage area, wherein 
the greatest portion of the cable will store. 

(21) Rope Tag Data. 

(A) A metal data tag shall be securely attached to one of the wire rope 
fastenings. This data tag shall bear the following wire-rope data: 

1. The diameter in inches. 

2. Construction classification. 

3. Whether nonpre formed or preformed. 

4. The grade of material used. 

5. The manufacturer's rated breaking-strength. 

6. Name of the manufacturer of the rope. 

7. The month and year the ropes were installed. 

(22) Electrical Wiring and Equipment. 

(A) All electrical equipment and wiring shall conform to the California 
Code of Regulations, Title 8, Electrical Safety Orders. 

(B) All motors and operation and control equipment shall be supplied 
from a single power source. 

(C) The power supply for the powered platform shall be an indepen- 
dent circuit supplied through a fused discormect switch. 

(D) Electrical conductor parts of the power supply system shall be pro- 
tected against accidental contact. 

(E) "Effective" electrical grounding shall be provided. 

1 . Provisions for electrical grounding shall be included with the pow- 
er-supply system. 

2. Controller cabinets, motor frames, hoisting machines, the working 
platform, roof car and roof car track system, and noncurrent carrying 
carts of electrical equipment, where provided, shall be grounded. 

3. The controller, where used, shall be so designed and installed that 
a single ground or short circuit will not prevent both the normal and final 
stopping device from stopping the working platform. 

4. Means shall be provided on the roof car and working platform for 
grounding portable electric tools. 

5. The working platform shall be grounded through a grounding con- 
nection in a traveling cable. Electrically powered tools utilized on the 
working platform shall be grounded. 

(F) Electrical receptacles located on the roof or other exterior location 
shall be of a weatherproof type and shall be located so as not to be subject 
to contact with water or accumulated snow. The receptacles shall be 
grounded and the electric cable shall include a grounding conductor. The 
receptacle and plug shall be a type designed to avoid hazard to persons 
inserting or withdrawing the plug. Provision shall be made to prevent 
application of cable strain directly to the plug and receptacle. 

(G) Electric runway conductor systems shall be of the type designed 
for use in exterior locations and shall be located so as not to be subject 
to contact with water or accumulated snow. The conductors, collectors, 
and disconnecting means shall conform to the requirements of the Cali- 
fornia Code of Regulations, Title 8, Electrical Safety Orders. A grounded 



conductor shall parallel the power conductors and be so connected that 
it cannot be opened by the disconnecting means. The system shall be de- 
signed to avoid hazard to persons in the area. 

(H) Electrical protective devices and interlocks of the weatherproof 
type shall be provided. 

(I) Where the installation includes a roof car, electric contact(s) shall 
be provided and so connected that the operating devices for the working 
platform shall be operative only when the roof car is located and mechan- 
ically retained at an established operating point. 

(J) Where the powered platform includes a power-operated roof car. 
the operating device for the roof car shall be inoperative when the roof 
car is mechanically retained at an established operating point. 

(K) An electric contact shall be provided and so connected that it will 
cause the down direction relay for vertical travel to open if the tension in 
the traveling cable exceeds safe limits. 

(L) An automatic overload device shall be provided to cut off the elec- 
trical power to the circuit in all hoisting motors for travel in the up direc- 
tion, should the load applied to the hoisting ropes at either end of the 
working platform exceed 125 percent of its normal tension with rated 
load, as shown on the manufacturer's data plate on the working platform. 

(M) An automatic device shall be provided for each hoisting rope 
which will cut off the electrical power to the hoisting motor or motors in 
the down direction and apply the brakes if any hoisting rope becomes 
slack. 

(N) Upper and lower directional limit devices shall be provided to pre- 
vent the travel of the working platform beyond the normal upper and low- 
er limits of travel. 

(Q) Operation of a directional limit device shall prevent further motion 
in the appropriate direction, if the normal limit of travel has been reached. 

(P) Directional limit devices, if driven from the hoisting machine by 
chains, tapes, or cables, shall incorporate a device to disconnect the elec- 
tric bower from the hoisting machine and apply both the primary and sec- 
ondary brakes in the event of failure of the driving means. 

(Q) Final terminal stopping devices of the working platform: 

1. Final terminal stopping devices for the working platform shall be 
provided as a secondary means of preventing the working platform from 
over-traveling at the terminals. 

2. The device shall be set to function as close to each terminal landing 
as practical, but in such a way that under normal operating conditions it 
will not function when the working platform is stopped by the normal ter- 
minal stopping device. 

3. Operation of the final terminal stopping device shall open the poten- 
tial relay for vertical travel, thereby disconnecting the electric power 
from the hoisting machine, and applying both the primary and secondary 
brakes. 

4. The final terminal stopping device for the upper limit of travel shall 
be mounted so that it is operated directly by the motion of the working 
platform itself. 

(R) Emergency stop switches shall be provided in or adjacent to each 
operating device. 

(S) Emergency stop switches shall: 

1. Have red operating buttons or handles. 

2. Be conspicuously and permanently marked "Stop." 

3. Be the manually opened and manually closed type. 

4. Be positively opened with the opening not solely dependent on 
springs. 

(T) The manual operation of an emergency stop switch associated with 
an operating device for the working platform shall open the potential 
relay for vertical travel, thereby disconnecting the electric power from 
tlie hoisting machine and applying both the primary and secondary 
brakes. 

(U) The manual operation of the emergency stop switch associated 
with the operating device for a power-driven roof car shall cause the elec- 



Page 578.17 



Register 2004, No. 28; 7-9-2004 



§3300 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



trical power to the traverse machine to be intermpted, and the traverse 
machine brake to apply. (Title 24, Part 2. Section 2-85 12(f).) 
(23) Requirements for Emergency Communications. 

(A) Communication equipment shall be provided for each powered 
platform for use in an emergency. 

(B) Two-way communication shall be established between personnel 
on the roof and personnel on the stalled working platform before any 
emergency operation of the working platform is undertaken by personnel 
on the roof. 

(C) The equipment shall permit two-way voice communication be- 
tween the working platform and 

1. Designated personnel continuously available while the powered 
platform is in use; and 

2. Designated personnel on roof-powered platforms, undertaking 
emergency operation of the working platform by means of the emergen- 
cy operating device located near the hoisting machine. 

(D) The emergency communication equipment shall be one of the fol- 
lowing types: 

1 . Telephone connected to the central telephone exchange system; or 

2. Telephones on a limited system or an approved two-way radio sys- 
tem, provided designated personnel are available to receive a message 
during the lime the powered platform is in use. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 
2-85 12(g).). 

(d) Type T Powered Platform ( 1 ) Roof Car. The requirements of sub- 
paragraphs (c)(1) through (c)(5) of this appendix shall apply to Type T 
powered platforms. 

(2) Working Platform. The requirements of subparagraphs (c)(6) 
through (c)(16) of this appendix apply to Type T powered platforms. 

(A) The working platform shall be suspended, by at least two wire 
ropes. 

(B) The maximum rated speed at which the working platform of self- 
powered platforms may be moved in a vertical direction shall not exceed 
35 feet per minute. 

(C) Each powered platform shall be provide with a horizontal safety 
line. 

(3) Hoisting Equipment. The requirements of subparagraphs (c)(17) 
and (18) of this appendix shall apply to Type T powered platforms. 

(4) Brakes. Brakes requirements of subparagraph (c)(19) of this ap- 
pendix shall apply. 

(5) Hoisting Ropes and Rope Connections. 

(A) Subparagraphs (c)(20)(A) through (F) and (H) of this appendix 
shall apply to Type T power platforms. 

(B) Adjustable shackle rods in subparagraph (c)(20)(G) of this appen- 
dix shall apply to Type T powered platforms, if the working platform is 
suspended by more than two wire ropes. 

(6) Electrical Wiring and Equipment. 

(A) The reguirements of subparagraphs (c)(22)(A) through (F) of this 
appendix shall apply to Type T powered platforms. "Circuit protection 
limitation," "powered platform electrical service system," all operating 
services and control eguipment shall comply with the specifications con- 
tained in the California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Electrical Safety 
Orders. 

(B) For electrical protective devices, the requirements of subpara- 
graphs (c)(22)(G) through (P) shall apply to Type T platforms. Require- 
ments for the "circuit potential limitation" shall be in accordance with the 
specifications contained in the California Code of Regulations, Title 8, 
Electrical Safety Orders. 

(7) Emergency Communications. All the requirements of subpara- 
graph (c)(23) of this appendix shall apply to Type T powered platforms. 
(Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-8513). 

(e) Safety Belts and Safety Lines. 

(1) Each employee on the working platform of Type T powered plat- 
forms shall be provided with and required to use a body harness or safety 
belt attached to a vertical or horizontal safety line. If a horizontal safety 
line (dog line) is used the length of the lanyard shall not exceed 5 feet and 
shall employ an energy absorbing device acceptable to the Division. 



(2) Body harnesses or safety belts, lines and other components, includ- 
ing fastening means and anchorages to the working platform shall con- 
form with applicable provisions of Appendix C. 

Note: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code; and Section 18943(c), Health and Safety Code. 



Group 2. 



Safe Practices and Personal 
Protection 



Article 7. Miscellaneous Safe Practices 

§ 3300. Live Steam and Air Hoses. 

(a) Live steam or air hoses used to agitate liquids in tanks and vats shall 
be securely fastened to prevent hose ends from whipping out of the tank 
or vat. This does not apply to hoses used with pipe lances which are man- 
ually held in position for agitation. 

(b) Steam and air hose connections shall be securely made and main- 
tained in safe working condition. 

(c) Hoses and connections shall be designed, manufactured and main- 
tained to withstand the pressures and service to which they are subjected. 

History 
L Amendment of subsection (a) and new subsection (c) filed 3-28-75: effective 
thirtieth day thereafter (Register 75, No. 13). 

§ 3301 . Use of Compressed Air or Gases. 

(a) Compressed air or other compressed gases in excess of 1 pounds 
per square inch gauge shall not be used to blow dirt, chips, or dust from 
clothing while it is being worn. 

(b) Compressed air or gases shall not be used to empty containers of 
liquids where the pressure can exceed the safe working pressure of the 
container. 

(c) The use of compressed air shall be so controlled, and proper per- 
sonal protective equipment or safeguards utilized, as to protect against 
the possibility of eye or body injury to the operator or other workers. 

(d) Abrasive blast cleaning nozzles shall be equipped with an operat- 
ing valve which must be held open manually. A support shall be provided 
on which the nozzle may be mounted when it is not in use. 

(e) Compressed gases shall not be used to elevate or otherwise transfer 
any substance from one container to another unless the containers are de- 
signed to withstand, with a factor of safety of at least four, the maximum 
possible pressure that may be applied. 

(f) Pressure testing of any object shall be in accordance with Section 
560(c) and (d) of the Unfired Pressure Vessel Safety Orders. 

Note: For further guidance in the utilization of compressed gases in cylinders see. 
Group 9; for portable tanks, rail tank cars, or motor vehicle cargo tanks, see Com- 
pressed Gas Association Pamphlet P-1-1965. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . Repealer of subsection (c) and new subsections (c) and (d) filed 3-28-75; effec- 
tive thirtieth day thereafter (Register 75, No. 13). 

2. New subsection (e) filed 7-17-75; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 75, 
No. 29). 

3. Amendment of Note in subsection (e) filed 12-19-78; effective thirtieth day 
thereafter (Register 79, No. 1). 

4. Amendment of subsection (e), new subsection (f) and amendment of Note filed 
7-7-2004; operative 8-6-2004 (Register 2004, No. 28). 

§ 3302. Gas Blowing of Hazardous Substances. 

History 
1. Repealer filed 7-17-75; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 75, No. 29). 

§ 3303. Flying Particles or Substances. 

Wherever there is danger of injury from flying particles or substances, 
adequate shields, screens, chip guards, or enclosures shall be provided 
and they shall be designed and constructed for the purpose of deflecting 
or confining said flying particles or substances in a manner that will pre- 
vent injury to employees. When it is not possible to provide such guards, 



Page 578.18 



Register 2004, No. 28; 7-9-2004 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3312 



• 



employees subject to such hazards shall be protected by the use of per- 
sonal protective equipment. 

History 
1 . Amendment filed 1 0-25-74; effective thirtieth day thereafter ( Register 74, No. 
43). 

§ 3304. Miscellaneous Use of Compressed Cylinder Gas. 

(a) Employers shall not permit the use of compressed cylinder gas for 
testing pressure vessels unless there is installed in the compressed gas 
supply line or on the vessel being tested a pressure relief device set to 
function at a pressure not to exceed the safe working pressure of the ves- 
sel. 

(b) Compressed gas shall never be used from a cylinder or cylinder 

manifold where pressures dangerous to employees may develop unless 

an accepted pressure regulating device is installed on the cylinder valve 

or manifold. The term "accepted" here means that the pressure regulating 

device is listed by Underwriters' Laboratories or some other recognized 

authority of equivalent standing. 

Note: Cylinder as used in this order means an Interstate Commerce Commission 
compressed gas cylinder. 

§ 3305. Misuse of Oxygen Prohibited. 

Compressed oxygen shall never be used: 

(a) To purge pipe lines, tanks, or any confined area. 

(b) To supply head pressure in a tank. 

(c) In pneumatic tools. 

(d) In oil preheating burners. 

(e) To start internal combustion engines. 

(f) For ventilation. 

(g) For "dusting" clothing. 

(h) In any other way as a substitute for compressed air. 

§ 3306. Salvaging Pressure Vessels. 

Pressure vessels or other containers shall not be crushed, sheared, 
baled or otherwise processed for salvage until the employer has made 
certain that such vessels or containers do not contain hazardous sub- 
stances or pressures in quantities which would render them unsafe for 
such salvaging operations. No attempt shall be made to open closed pres- 
sure vessels or containers of unknown contents until adequate precau- 
tionary measures have been taken to eliminate risk of injury to em- 
ployees. Such precautionary measures may include rupture or 
perforation of the vessels while they are protected by barricades, enclo- 
sures or isolation. 

Note: Certain cylinders and vessels, after passing their useful life, are destroyed 
by the owner of the vessel in such a manner that it can be resold for salvage pur- 
poses and can be crushed, sheared, melted or otherwise processed safely. (Some 
closed pressure vessels and containers may be safely disposed of by burying in the 
earth rather than by attempting to salvage them.) 

§ 3307. Reconditioning Closed Containers. 

Where internal fluid pressure is necessary to remove dents or depres- 
sions from a closed container, hydrostatic pressure only shall be used. 
The hydrostatic pressure used shall be developed only by static head or 
hydraulic pumps. 

§ 3308. Hot Pipes and Hot Surfaces. 

Pipes or other exposed surfaces having an external surface tempera- 
ture sufficient to bum human tissue on momentary contact and located 
within 7 feet measured vertically from floor or working level or within 
15 inches measured horizontally from stairways, ramps or fixed ladders 
shall be covered with a thermal insulating material or otherwise guarded 
against contact. This order does not apply to operations where the nature 
of the work or the size of the parts makes guarding or insulating impracti- 
cable. 
Note: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. 

History 
1 . Amendment filed 1 2-1 9-78; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 79, No. 

1). 



§ 3309. Drainage and Ventilation. 

(a) Trenches, tunnels and pits inside buildings shall have proper drain- 
age and ventilation, or other means of protecting employees who work 
in these areas shall be provided as required in Group 16 of these orders. 

(b) Sewage tanks and sewage sumps inside buildings shall be tightly 
covered and ventilated with a suitable vent to the outside atmosphere so 
located as not to endanger the safety of employees. 

§ 3310. Discharge Location. 

(a) The discharge opening from traps, drains, and blowoffs shall be lo- 
cated so as not to endanger the safety of employees. 

(b) Internal combustion engine exhaust pipe outlets shall be so located 
that the exhaust vapors or gases will not be drawn into the air inlets of air 
compressors or air conditioning systems. 

(c) Exhaust condensed steam shall not reduce the visibility around ma- 
chinery or on walkways, roads, and runways to the extent that hazards to 
employees are created by such reduction in visibility. 

(d) ReHef or vent discharges of tanks or other closed vessels in which 
there are toxic or flammable vapors or gases, fumes, dusts or other harm- 
ful substances shall be located so as not to endanger the safety of em- 
ployees. When it is impractical to divert dangerous concentrations of tox- 
ic or flammable vapors or gases, fumes, dusts or other harmful substances 
from such working areas, employees performing work of a transient na- 
ture in these areas shall be provided with, and shall wear, approved respi- 
ratory and personal protective equipment. 

§3311. Flarebacks. 

(a) To provide greater safety in lighting and relighting fixed fired 
equipment, the employer shall designate one or more employees who 
shall be trained in the safe lighting and relighting of the equipment. It 
shall be the responsibility of the employer to limit Hghting and relighting 
of the equipment to employees so designated. It shall be the responsibil- 
ity of the employees to follow the instructions given them. Copies of the 
instructions shall be prominently displayed at a location near the equip- 
ment. 

(b) In addition to the above fire boxes or combustion chambers shall 
be purged or allowed sufficient time to vent themselves before a source 
of ignition is introduced into them. 

(c) Provision shall be made, for the furnishing of extension lighting 
rods, where their use is indicated. Valves and other controls shall be so 
located as to avoid placing the employee in an unsafe posifion if a flare- 
back occurs. 

§ 3312. Entering Combustion Chambers, Flues, Boilers or 
Unfired Steam Pressure Vessels. 

(a) Before employees are allowed to enter, through a manhole, the 
shell or drum of a steam boiler or an unfired steam pressure vessel for 
maintenance or repair, where such a boiler or pressure vessel is one of a 
battery of two or more boilers or vessels or is connected to another source 
of steam, the valves connecting to the steam header or other source of 
steam shall be closed and effecfively blinded or two valves shall be in- 
stalled with a bleeder between them and the valves shall be closed and 
bleeder open. Blow down valves and other valves on lines through which 
harmful material might accidentally flow back to the boiler or vessel shall 
be either sealed or closed and locked and the key retained by the em- 
ployee or his supervisor while the employee is in the boiler or vessel. 
When lines are effectively blinded the valves need not be locked or 
sealed. 

(b) Employees shall not enter or be required to enter the fire boxes, 
flues or combustion chambers of fired apparatus until: 

( 1 ) The pilot Ught, fuel and steam lines to burners entering the fire box 
or combustion chamber have been blinded, disconnected or effectively 
closed by the use of two block valves with an open bleeder between them. 

(2) All probability of ignition of any solid combustibles in the fire box 
or combustion chamber has been removed. 



Page 578.19 



Register 2004, No. 50; 12-10-2004 



§3313 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



§ 331 3. Use of Solvents for Washing. 

NOTH: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. 

History 
1 . Repealer filed 12-19-78; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 79, No. 1 ). 

§ 3314. The Control of Hazardous Energy for the Cleaning, 
Repairing, Servicing, Setting-Up, and 
Adjusting Operations of Prime Movers, 
Machinery and Equipment, Including 
Lockout/Tagout. 

(a) Application. 

(1) This Section applies to the cleaning, repairing, servicing, setting- 
up and adjusting of machines and equipment in which the unexpected en- 
ergization or start up of the machines or equipment, or release of stored 
energy could cause injury to employees. 

(2) For the purposes of this Section, cleaning, repairing, servicing and 
adjusting activities shall include unjamming prime movers, machinery 
and equipment. 

(3) Requirements for working on energized electrical systems are pre- 
scribed in Sections 2320. 1 through 2320.9 or 2940 through 2945. 

(b) Definitions: 

Affected employee. For the purpose of this section, an employee 
whose job requires them to operate or use a machine or equipment on 
which cleaning, repairing, servicing, setting-up or adjusting operations 
are being performed under lockout or tagout, or whose job requires the 
employee to work in an area in which such activities are being performed 
under lockout or tagout. 

Authorized employee or person. For the purposes of this section, a 
qualified person who locks out or tags out specific machines or equip- 
ment in order to perform cleaning, repairing, servicing, setting-up, and 
adjusting operations on that machine or equipment. An affected em- 
ployee becomes an authorized employee when that employee's duties in- 
cluding performing cleaning, repairing, servicing, setting-up and adjust- 
ing operations covered under this section. 

Locked out. The use of devices, positive methods and procedures, 
which will result in the effective isolation or securing of prime movers, 
machinery and equipment from mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic, 
chemical, electrical, thermal or other hazardous energy sources. 

Normal Production Operations. The utilization of a machine or equip- 
ment to perform its intended production function. 

Prime Mover. The source of mechanical power for a machine. 

(c) Cleaning, Servicing and Adjusting Operations. 

Machinery or equipment capable of movement shall be stopped and 
the power source de-energized or disengaged, and, if necessary, the 
moveable parts shall be mechanically blocked or locked out to prevent 
inadvertent movement, or release of stored energy during cleaning, serv- 
icing and adjusting operations. Accident prevention signs or tags or both 
shall be placed on the controls of the power source of the machinery or 
equipment. 

( 1) If the machinery or equipment must be capable of movement dur- 
ing this period in order to perform the specific task, the employer shall 
minimize the hazard by providing and requiring the use of extension 
tools (eg., extended swabs, brushes, scrapers) or other methods or means 
to protect employees from injury due to such movement. Employees 
shall be made familiar with the safe use and maintenance of such tools, 
methods or means, by thorough training. 

(d) Repair Work and Setting-Up Operations. 

Prime movers, equipment, or power-driven machines equipped with 
lockable controls or readily adaptable to lockable controls shall be locked 
out or positively sealed in the "off position during repair work and set- 
ting-up operations. Machines, equipment, or prime movers not equipped 
with lockable controls or readily adaptable to lockable controls shall be 
considered in compliance with Section 3314 when positive means are 
taken, such as de-energizing or disconnecting the equipment from its 
source of power, or other action which will effectively prevent the equip- 
ment, prime mover or machine from inadvertent movement or release of 
stored energy. In all cases, accident prevention signs or tags or both shall 



be placed on the controls of the equipment, machines and prime movers 
duiing repair work and setting-up operations. 
Exceptions to subsections (c) and (d): 

1 . Minor tool changes and adjustments, and other minor servicing activities, which 
take place during normal production operations are not covered by the require- 
ments of Section 3314 if they are routine, repetitive, and integral to the use of the 
equipment or machinery for production, provided that the work is performed using 
alternative measures which provide effective protection. 

2. Work on cord and plug-connected electric equipment for which exposure to the 
hazards of unexpected energization or start up of the equipment is controlled by 
the unplugging of the equipment from the energy source and by the plug being un- 
der the exclusive control of the employee performing the work. 

3. Where an employer has a uniform system with unique and personally identifi- 
able locks designed' for lockout, that are placed on the source of energy, accident 
prevention signs or tags are not required. 

(e) Materials and Hardware. The employer shall provide accident pre- 
vention signs, tags, padlocks, seals or other similariy effective means 
which may be required for cleaning, servicing, adjusting, repair work or 
setting-up operations. Signs, tags, padlocks, and seals shall have means 
by which they can be readily secured to the controls. Tagout device at- 
tachment means shall be of a non-reusable type, attachable by hand, 
self-locking, and non-releasable with a minimum unlocking strength of 
no less than 50 pounds. 

(f) Repetitive Process Machines. On repetitive process machines, such 
as numerical control machines, which require power or current continu- 
ance to maintain indexing and where repair, adjustment, testing, or set- 
ting-up operations cannot be accomplished with the prime mover or haz- 
ardous energy source disconnected, such operations may be performed 
under the following conditions: 

( 1 ) The operating station where the machine may be activated must at 
all times be under the control of a qualified operator or craftsman. 

(2) All participants must be in clear view of the operator or in positive 
communication with each other. 

(3) All participants must be beyond the reach of machine elements 
which may move rapidly and present a hazard to them. 

(4) Where machine configuration or size requires that the operator 
leave his control station to install tools, and where machine elements ex- 
ist which may move rapidly if activated, such elements must be separate- 
ly locked out by positive means. 

(5) During repair procedures where mechanical components are being 
adjusted or replaced, the machine shall be de-energized or disconnected 
from its power source. 

Note: "Participant" shall mean any other person(s) engaged in the repair, adjust- 
ment, testing, or setting up operation in addition to the qualified operator or crafts- 
man having control of the machine operating station. 

(g) Hazardous Energy Control Procedures. A hazardous energy con- 
trol procedure shall be developed and utilized by the employer when em- 
ployees are engaged in the cleaning, repairing, servicing, setting-up or 
adjusting of prime movers, machinery and equipment. 

(1) The procedure shall clearly and specifically outline the scope, pur- 
pose, authorization, rules, and techniques to be utilized for the control of 
hazardous energy, and the means to enforce compliance, including but 
not limited to, the following: 

(A) A statement of the intended use of the procedure; 

(B) The procedural steps for shutting down, isolating, blocking and se- 
curing machines or equipment to control hazardous energy; 

(C) The procedural steps for the placement, removal and transfer of 
lockout devices and tagout devices and responsibilities; and, 

(D) The requirements for testing a machine or equipment, to determine 
and verify the effectiveness of lockout devices, tagout devices and other 
hazardous energy control devices. 

(2) The employer's hazardous energy control procedures shall be doc- 
umented in writing. 

(A) The employer' s hazardous energy control procedure shall include 
separate procedural steps for the safe lockout/tagout of each machine or 
piece of equipment affected by the hazardous energy control procedure. 

Exception to subsection (g)(2)(A): The procedural steps for the safe lock- 
out/tagout of prime movers, machinery or equipment may be used for a group or 
type of machinery or equipment, when either of the following two conditions exist: 



• 



Page 578.20 



Register 2004, No. 50; 12-10-2004 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§ 3314 



• 



(1) Condition 1: 

(A) The operational controls named in the procedural steps are config- 
ured in a similar manner, and 

(B) The locations of disconnect points (energy isolating devices) are 
identified, and 

(C) The sequence of steps to safely lockout or tagout the machinery or 
equipment are similar. 

(2) Condition 2: The machinery or equipment has a single energy sup- 
ply that is readily identified and isolated and has no stored or residual haz- 
ardous energy. 

(h) Periodic inspection. 

The employer shall conduct a periodic inspection of the energy control 
procedure(s) at least annually to evaluate their continued effectiveness 
and determine necessity for updating the written procedure(s). 

(1) The periodic inspection shall be performed by an authorized em- 
ployee or person other than the one(s) utilizing the hazardous energy con- 
trol procedures being inspected. 

(2) Where lockout and/or tagout is used for hazardous energy control, 
the periodic inspection shall include a review between the inspector and 
authorized employees of their responsibilities under the hazardous ener- 
gy control procedure being inspected. 

(3) The employer shall cerdfy that the periodic inspections have been 
performed. The certification shall idenfify the machine or equipment on 
which the hazardous energy control procedure was being utilized, the 
date of the inspection, the employees included in the inspection, and the 
person performing the inspection. 



(i) Whenever outside servicing personnel are to be engaged in activi- 
ties covered by this section, the on-site employer's lockout or tagout pro- 
cedures shall be followed. 

(j) Training. 

(1) Authorized employees shall be trained on hazardous energy con- 
trol procedures and on the hazards related to performing activities re- 
quired for cleaning, repairing, servicing, setting-up and adjusting prime 
movers, machinery and equipment. 

(2) Each affected employee shall be instructed in the purpose and use 
of the energy control procedure. 

(3) All other employees whose work operations may he in an area 
v/here energy control procedures may be utilized, shall be instructed 
about the prohibition relating to attempts to restart or reenergize ma- 
chines or equipment which are locked out or tagged out. 

(4) Such training shall be documented as required by Section 3203. 

NOTE; Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3. La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . Amendment filed 10-25-74; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 74. No. 
43). 

2. Repealer and new subsections (a), (b) and (c) and amendment of subsection (d) 
filed 5-12-77; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 77, No. 20). 

3. Amendment of subsection (c) and adoption of subsections (f)-(i) filed 
12-23-91; operative 1-22-92 (Register 92, No. 12). 

4. Amendment of subsections (a) and (b) filed 3-24-94; operative 4-25^94 (Reg- 
ister 94, No. 12). 

5. Amendment of section heading and section filed 12-7-2004; operative 
1-6-2005 (Register 2004, No. 50). 



[The next page is 579.] 



Page 578.21 



Register 2004, No. 50; 12-10-2004 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§ 3320 



§3315. Hand Trucks. 

Fland trucks shall be maintained in a safe condition. Handles shall be 
maintained free of hazardous burrs, splinters, cracks, or splits. 

§3316. Hand Tools. 

History 
1. Repealer filed 3-28-75; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 75, No. 13). 



§3317. Illumination. 

(a) Working areas, stairways, aisles, passageways, work benches and 
machines shall be provided with either natural or artificial illumination 
which is adequate and suitable to provide a reasonably safe place of em- 
ployment. Minimum illumination levels for safety alone are listed for 
various typical areas in Table IL-1 . (Title 24, Part 2, Section 5 1 2, Table 
5-C.) 



Hazards IkquiriDg 
Visual Dctectm 



TABLE IL-1 
MINIMUM LEVELS OF ILLUMINATION FOR SAFETY 



High 



Nvmal Activity 
Lewi 



Low 



High 



Low 



High 



Areas 



FootcaiK&s 



Storage Yards 
Offices 
Locker Rooms 



03 



Loading Areas 
Warehouses 
Corridors 
Washrooms 
^my Booths 
Inspection Areas 
LO 



Elevaton 
Stairways 
AssemUy Areas 
Layout Areas 



2.0 



Engine Rooms 
Procesang Areas 
Madtine Shops 
Sheet Metal Worb 
Woodworking Shops 

3i) 



Notes: 

(1) To assure these levels at all times, higher initial levels need to be provided to 
compensate for their depreciation due to the decrease of light output of lamps with 
age and to the accumulation of dirt on lamps and room surfaces. 

(2) For areas or operations not covered above, and for recommended illumination 
levels for efficient visual performance in varied tasks and areas, refer to ANSI/IES 
RP-7-1991, Practice for Industrial Lighting and ANSI/IES RP-1-1993, Practice 
for Office Lighting. (Title 24, Part 2, Section 512, Table 5-C.) 

(b) When adequate natural illumination or permanent artificial illumi- 
nation cannot be made available to secure the safety of employees, suit- 
able portable lights shall be provided. 

(c) Skylights, side windows, lamps, and other light accessories which 
provide necessary illumination shall be kept sufficiently clean, adjusted, 
and repaired so as not to impair the illumination required for the safety 
of employees. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code; and Section 18943(c), Health and Safety Code. 

History 

1. Amendment of subsection (a) filed 1 1-28-75; effective thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register 75, No. 48). 

2. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 

3. Editorial correction filed 10-7-83; effective thulieth day thereafter (Register 
83, No. 41). 

4. Amendment of subsection (a) and footnotes to Table filed 2-1 1-99; operative 
3-13-99 (Register 99, No. 7). 

§3318. Counterweights. 

All counterweights shall be enclosed with a guard which shall extend 
from the working level to at least the midpoint of the counterweight when 
it is in its highest position, or shall be otherwise guarded to afford at least 
equivalent protection unless they are so located that their falling would 
create no hazard or the area directly below the counterweight is effective- 
ly barricaded against passage. 

NoTE: In lieu of above, counterweights may be held with safety chains or cables 
or otherwise protected against falling. 

§3319. Fueling. 

(a) No internal combustion engine fuel tank shall be refilled with a 
flammable liquid while the engine is running. Fueling shall be done in 
such a manner that likehhood of spillage is minimal. If a spill occurs it 
shall be washed away completely, evaporated, or equivalent action taken 
to control vapors before restarting the engine. Fuel tank caps shall be re- 
placed before starting the engine. 

(b) A listed gasoline pump shall be provided to service the fuel tanks 
of all gasoline engine driven equipment, unless done in a safe manner by 



a gravity flow, with a metal-to-metal contact between the containers and 
the fuel tank. When a hose is used it shall be of a type which is designed 
to handle gasoline. No gasoline shall be handled in open containers. 
Gravity flow systems shall be fitted with self closing nozzles. 
EXCEPTION: Pumps which are an integral part of a gasoline vapor recovery sys- 
tem, certified by the State Air Resources Board and the State Fire Marshal pursuant 
to the provisions of Sections 41954 through 41961, inclusive, of the California 
Health and Safety Codes. 

(c) Open lights, open flames, or sparking or arcing equipment, except 
that which is an integral part of automotive equipment, shall not be used 
near fuel storage tanks or internal combustion engine equipment while 
being fueled with flammable liquids. 

(d) Every gas fueling system with line pressure in excess of 15 pounds 
per square inch, including traps, valves, and fittings shall be capable of 
withstanding the maximum working pressure with a factor of safety of 
at least four. 

In lieu of compliance with the above, existing installafions shall be 
provided with a relief valve installed between the regulator and the gas 
consuming device. Such relief valve shall be set to operate at a pressure 
less than the maximum safe working strength of the weakest part of the 
system. There shall be no block valve between the regulator and the relief 
valve nor in the discharge line from the relief. 

(e) Refueling with portable containers shall be done with approved 
safety type containers equipped with an automatic closing cap and flame 
arrester. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. Amendment of subsections (a) and (b) filed 2-18-75; effective thirtieth day 
thereafter (Register 75, No. 7). 

2. Amendment of subsection (b) filed 3-3-77; effective thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register 77, No. 10). 

3. Amendment of subsecfion (a) filed 7-6-79; effective thirtieth dav thereafter 
(Register 79, No. 27). 

4. New subsection (e) filed 2-15-90; operative 3-17-90 (Register 90, No. H). 

§ 3320. Warning Signs. 

There shall be conspicuously displayed at all machines driven by elec- 
tric motors that are controlled by fully automatic starters and which may 
injure employees, legible signs giving warning that the machines are au- 
tomatically controlled and may start at any time. 
NOTE: Authority cited: SecUon 142.3, Labor Code. 

History 
1 . Amendment filed 1 2-19-78; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 79, No. 
1). 



Page 579 



Register 2007, No. 43; 10-26-2007 



§3321 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



§ 3321 . Identification of Piping. 

(a) Where, in any one establishment, one or more hazardous sub- 
stances are transported through pipe lines, all above ground piping sys- 
tems used to transport gases, vapors, liquids, semi-liquids, or plastics 
shall be identified at points where confusion would introduce hazards to 
employees. 

(b) Methods of Identification. Where identification is required for pip- 
ing systems, one or more of the following methods shall be employed. 

(1) Complete color painting of all visible parts of the pipe; 

(2) Color bands, preferably 8 to 10 inches wide, at various intervals 
and at each outlet valve or connection. 

Where identification is provided by complete color painting or by col- 
or bands, a color code shall be posted at those locations where confusion 
would introduce hazards to employees. 

(3) The names of or abbreviations of the names of the materials trans- 
ported shall be lettered or stenciled on the pipe near the valves or outlets. 

(4) Tags of metal or other suitable material naming the material trans- 
ported shall be fastened securely to the system on or near the valve. Tag 
legibility shall be maintained. 

§ 3322. Drilling. 

Where petroleum drilling equipment is being used for drilling other 
than petroleum wells, applicable sections of the California Petroleum 
Safety Orders — Drilling and Production which pertain to the construc- 
tion, use, and maintenance of rigs and related drilling equipment shall ap- 
ply to such operations. 
Note: Authority and reference cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. 

History 
1 . New section filed 4-27-79; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 79, No. 

17). 

§ 3323. Cargo Doors. 

(a) Vertically operated doors shall be securely connected to their lift- 
ing tackle. 

(b) Approved devices shall be provided to hold overhead doors in the 
open position and to secure them when closed. 

(c) Horizontal sliding door rollers shall be constructed to prevent the 
door from jumping from overhead tracks. 

(d) Sliding doors shall be secured to prevent them from swinging. 
(Title 24, Part 2, Section 2-3303(p)) 

Note: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 
1 . New section filed 1 1-26-84; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 84, No. 
48). 

§ 3324. Horizontal Sliding Gates. 

(a) All horizontal sliding gates shall be equipped with positive stops 
or devices that limit the gate travel to the designed fully open and closed 
positions. 

(b) Positive stops or devices shall be constmcted, installed and main- 
tained by a qualified person to resist impact loads in order to safely con- 
tain sliding gate components within the designed slop limits. 

(c) Employees responsible for operating or inspecting horizontal slid- 
ing gates shall be instructed in the safe operation of such gates. 

(d) Repairs to gate hardware shall only be performed by a qualified 
person. 

Note: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 
1. New section filed 10-23-2007; operative 1 1-22-2007 (Register 2007, No. 43). 

§ 3325. Tire Inflation. 

(a) Tire inflation shall be accomplished by means of a clip-on chuck 
with a minimum 24-inch length hose to an in-line foot or hand valve and 
gauge. A clip-on chuck and an in-line regulator (factory preset at 40 psi 
maximum for passenger car tires) or a restraining device may be used as 
an equivalent. 



EXCEPTIONS: 

(1) Automatic tire inflation machines that inflate the tire in a pressurized chamber 
through the bead seat annulus. 

(2) Where passenger car or truck tires are serviced at the same facility, an adjust- 
able in-line regulator is allowed as long as the regulator pressure is properly set 
in each case. 

(b) Tire inflation control valves shall automatically shut off the air 
flow when the valve is released by the operator or be of the preset regula- 
tor type. 

(c) Specific employee in.struction shall be provided which will ensure 
the employee makes the correct tire to rim size match prior to inflating 
the tire. 

(d) Tires shall not be inflated to more than the inflation pressure rec- 
ommended by the manufacturer. 

(e) Unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer, tires shall not 
be inflated beyond a maximum of 40 psi to seat the beads. During infla- 
tion, tire beads shall be inspected for proper seating at intervals not to ex- 
ceed 20 psi. Tires not properly seated at 40 psi, or at the maximum psi 
recommended by the manufacturer, shall be completely deflated before 
making the adjustment of the tire, rim or wheel components. Except as 
permitted in Section 3326, tires shall be in a restraint device when seating 
the beads. 

NoTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. New section filed 6-21-72; effecfive thirtieth day thereafter (Register 72. No. 
26). 

2. New subsection (d) filed 4-16-80; effecfive thirtieth day thereafter (Resister 
80, No. 16). 

3. Amendment filed 1 1-28-80; effecfive thirtieth day thereafter (Register 80. No. 
48). 

4. Amendment filed 10-12-84; effecfive thirtieth day thereafter (Register 84. No. 
41). 

5. Amendment of section headins and new subsections (c)-(d) filed 8-27-93; op- 
erative 9-27-93 (Register 93.^No. 35). 

6. Amendment of secfion heading and subsection (a) and new subsection (e) filed 
8-27-97; operative 9-26-97 (Register 97, No. 35). 

7. Change without regulatory effect amending section heading filed 10-28-97 
pursuant to secfion 1 00, fitle 1 , Cahfornia Code of Regulations (Register 97, No. 
44). 

§ 3326. Servicing Single, Split and Multi-Piece Rims or 
Wheels. 

(a) Scope. This section applies to the servicing of single, spUt, and 
multi-piece rims or wheels used on vehicles such as forklifts, industrial 
tractors, trucks, tractors, trailers, busses, and off-road machines. 
Exception: Automobile or light truck tires ("LT") used on light pickups and vans 
utilizing single piece rims or wheels when a hold-down cone type tire inflation 
system is used in accordance with the recommendations of the tire manufacturer. 

(b) Definitions. 

Barrier. A fence, wall or other structure or object placed between a 
single, split or multi-piece rim or wheel and employee during tire infla- 
tion, to contain the rim wheel components in the event of a sudden release 
of the contained air from the single, split or multi-piece rim or wheel. 

Installing a rim wheel. The transfer and attachment of an assembled 
rim wheel onto a vehicle axle hub. Removing means the opposite of in- 
stalling. 

Mounting a Tire. The assembly or putting together the wheel and tire 
components to form a rim wheel, including inflation. Demounting means 
the opposite of mounting a tire. 

Multi-piece rim or wheel. A vehicle rim or wheel consisting of two or 
more parts, one of which is a side or locking ring designed to hold the tire 
on the rim or wheel by interlocking components when the tire is inflated. 

Restraining device. An apparatus such as a cage, rack, or assemblage 
of bars and other components that will constrain all rim wheel compo- 
nents during an explosive separation of a split rim wheel, multi-piece rim 
wheel or during the sudden release of the contained air of a single piece 
rim wheel. 

Rim manual. A publication or chart containing instructions, and safety 
precautions from the manufacturer or other qualified organization for 
correct mounting and demounting of tires and safety precautions for the 
type of rim or wheel being serviced. 



Page 580 



Register 2007, No. 43; 10-26-2007 



Title 8 General Industry Safety Orders § 3326 

Rim wheel. An assemblage of tire, tube and liner, where appropriate. Trajectory. Any potential path or route that a rim wheel component 

and wheel components. may travel during an explosive separation, or the sudden release of the 

Single piece rim or wheel. A vehicle rim or wheel consisting of one pressurized air. See Appendix A. 

part, designed to hold the tire on the rim or wheel when the tire is inflated. (c) Employee Training. The employer shall establish a training pro- 
Split rim (divided) wheel. A vehicle wheel or rim where the inner sec- gram which shall include, as a minimum, the following elements: 

tion and outer section are assembled back to back and secured by bolts (1 ) The Accident Prevention Program of Section 3203(a). 

and nuts or other fastening devices. The outer section has additional holes 

that align to the vehicle wheel studs and are secured to the wheel hub with 

nuts or other approved means of fastening the wheel to the vehicle hub. 



[The next page is 581. 



Page 580.1 Register 2007, No. 43; 10-26-2007 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3326 



• 



(2) The employer shall assure that each employee understands, dem- 
onstrates and maintains the ability to service single, split and multi-piece 
rims or wheels safely, including performance of the following tasks: 

(A) Demounting of tires (including deflation). 

(B) Inspection and identification of the rim wheel components. 

(C) Mounting of tire (including inflation with a restraining device or 
other safeguard required by this section). 

(D) Use of other equipment required by this section. 

(E) Inflation of the tire when a single piece rim wheel is installed on 
a vehicle. 

(F) An understanding of the necessity of standing outside the trajecto- 
ry both during inflation of the tire and during inspection of the rim wheel 
following inflation. 

(G) Installation and removal of rim wheels from the vehicle. 

(d) Restraining Devices. A safety tire rack, cage, or equivalent protec- 
tion shall be provided and used when inflating mounted tires installed on 
single piece, split rim or rims equipped with locking rings or similar de- 
vices. 

Exceptions: 

( 1 ) Single piece rims or wheels when installed on the vehicle with the lug nuts fully 
tightened. 

(2) If a tire on a vehicle is under-inflated but has more than 80% of the manufactur- 
er's recommended load chart pressure, the tire may be inflated while the wheel is 
on the vehicle provided remote control inflation equipment is used, and employees 
remain outside the trajectory path during the inflation process. 

(e) Restraining devices shall comply with the following requirements: 

( 1 ) Each restraining device or barrier shall have the capacity to with- 
stand the force that would be transferred to it during rim or wheel separa- 
tion occurring at 150 percent of the maximum tire specification pressure 
for the type of rim or wheel being serviced. 

(2) Restraining devices and barriers shall be capable of preventing the 
rim or wheel components from being thrown outside or beyond the de- 
vice or barrier for any rim or wheel positioned within or behind the de- 
vice. 

(f) Care and Maintenance of Restraining Devices. 

(1) Restraining devices and barriers shall be visually inspected prior 
to each day's use and after any separation of the rim wheel components. 
Any restraining device or barrier exhibiting damage such as the follow- 
ing defects shall be immediately removed from service: 

(A) Cracks at welds; 

(B) Cracked or broken components; 

(C) Bent or sprung components caused by mishandling, abuses, tire 
explosion or rim wheel separation; 

(D) Pitting of components due to corrosion; 

(E) Restraining devices or barriers requiring structural repair such as 
component replacement or rewelding shall be removed from service until 
they are repaired by either the manufacturer or a California certified 
welder in accordance with Section 3326(e). 

(g) Wheel Servicing and Mounting. 

( 1 ) There shall be available in the service area a current split and multi- 
piece Rim or Wheel Matching Chart, a Typical Rim Contours & Marking 
Location Chart, and current Rim Manual containing instructions for the 
proper tools recommended for the type of rim or wheel being serviced. 
Note: Other publications providing at least the same instructions, safety precau- 
tions and other information contained in the charts may be used provided the publi- 
cations are readily available for reference by employees. 

(2) The employer shall furnish and assure that only tools recom- 
mended in the rim manual for the type of rims or wheels being serviced 
are used. 

(3) Single, split and multi-piece rim or wheel components shall be in- 
spected prior to assembly. Any rim or wheel or rim or wheel component 
which has been rendered unfit by being bent out of shape, pitted from cor- 
rosion, broken, or cracked shall not be used and shall be marked or tagged 
unserviceable and removed from the service area. Damaged or leaky 
valves shall be replaced. 

(4) Before making any repairs or welds on rims or wheels, the tire shall 



be removed and remain off the rim or wheel until the repair is complete 
and any welds have returned to ambient temperature. Any repair involv- 
ing welding on the rim or wheel or any of its components shall only be 
done in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications, 
(h) Demounting Tires. 

(1 ) Split and multi-piece rim tires shall be completely deflated by re- 
moving the valve core. A wire or equivalent device shall be inserted into 
the center of the valve stem to ensure no obstruction exists that would pre- 
vent complete deflation, before removal of the wheel from the axle. 
Note: This does not apply to tires on rim wheel assemblies with no obvious or 
suspected damage to any rim wheel components or the tire. 

(2) No heat shall be applied to a single, split or multi-piece wheel or 
wheel component except that frozen or broken lug nuts may be cut off 
after the tire is completely deflated. 

Note: Subjecting wheels to excessive heat may result in structural dcliciencies. 
Therefore, care shall be exercised while cutting off lug nuts to avoid excessive 
heating of the wheel. Wheels subjected to prolonged heating shall be removed 
from service. 

(3) Tires shall be completely deflated by removal of the valve core be- 
fore demounting. 

(i) Mounting Tires and Inflation. 

(1 ) Mounting and demounting of the tire: 

(A) Shall be done only from the narrow ledge side of the wheel. 

(B) Care shall be taken to avoid damaging the tire beads while mount- 
ing tires on wheels. 

(C) Tires shall be mounted only on compatible wheels of matching 
bead diameter and width. 

(2) Rim flanges, rim gutters, rings, bead seating surfaces and the bead 
areas of tire shall be free of any dirt, surface rust, scale or loose or flaked 
rubber build-up prior to mounting and inflation. 

(3) Wheel component acceptability. Multi-piece wheel components 
shall not be interchanged except as provided in the charts or in the appli- 
cable rim manual. 

(4) Prior to assembly the size (bead diameter and tire and/or wheel 
widths) and type of both the tire and wheel shall be checked and incom- 
patible parts shall not be assembled. 

(5) Non-flammable rubber lubricant shall be applied to bead and rim 
mating surfaces before assembly of the rim or wheel unless the tire or 
wheel manufacturer recommends against it. 

(6) Tires shall be inflated in accordance with Section 3325. 

(7) If a bead expander is used, it shall be removed before the valve core 
is installed and as soon as the rim or wheel becomes airtight (the tire bead 
slips onto the bead seat). 

(8) Employees shall be instructed not to take a position over the tire 
during inflation and to remain outside the trajectory. 

(9) Except as permitted in Section 3326(i)(10), tires shall not be in- 
flated when any flat, solid surface is in the trajectory and within one foot 
of the sidewalk 

(10) Tires may be inflated outside a restraining device to a pressure 
that shall not exceed 5 pounds per square inch (psi) to force the tire bead 
onto the rim ledge and create an airtight seal and/or to assist the seating 
of the lock rings. 

EXCEFTION: Where higher pressures are recoitmiended by the tire manufacturer. 

(11) Whenever a single, split or multi-piece rim wheel is in a restrain- 
ing device, employees shall be instructed not to rest or lean any part of 
their body or equipment on or against the restraining device. 

(12) Except during the operation described in Section 3326(ij(]0) em- 
ployees shall be instructed not to attempt to correct the seating of side and 
lock rings by hammering, striking, or forcing the components while the 
tire is pressurized. 

(13) After tire inflation, the tire and rim or wheel components shall be 
inspected before removal from the restraining device to ensure that they 
are properiy seated and locked. If further adjustment is necessary, the tire 
shall be deflated by removal of the valve core before the adjustment is 
made. 



Page 581 



Register 97, No. 35; 8-29-97 



§3327 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



Appendix A 



APPENDIX A 

TRAJECTORY 

WARNING 

STAY OUT OF 

THI-: TRAJliCTORY AS 

INDICATED BY SHAI:)ED ARHA 

Note: Under some ciicumslances. 

the tr:ijectory may deviate 

from its expected path 




Note: Employees shall avoid taking a position over the tire except during the op- 
eration described in Section 3326(i)(10). 

(j) Installation/Removal of Rim Wheels from Vehicle Axles. 

Tires on unusable or damaged rim wheels shall be completely deflated 
by removal of the valve core. A wire or equivalent device shall be in- 
serted into the center of the valve stem to ensure no obstruction exists that 
would prevent complete deflation, before rims are removed from the 
axle. 

Note: Tires on rim wheels with no obvious or suspected damage to the rim wheel 
or tire are not required to be deflated prior to removal from the axle. 
NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. New section filed 6-21-72; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 72, No. 
26). 

2. Amendment filed 10-12-84; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 84, No. 
41). 

3. Amendment filed 10-16-86; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 86, No. 
42). 

4. Amendment filed 7-2-87; operative 8-1-87 (Register 87, No. 28). 

5. Repealer of subsection (h)(12) and subsection renumbering filed 8-27-93; op- 
erative 9-27-93 (Register 93, No. 35). 

6. Amendment filed 8-27-97; operarive 9-26-97 (Register 97, No. 35). 

§ 3327. Safe Practice for Mounting and Inflating Tires with 
Split Rim and/or Retainer Rings. 

NOTE: Authority cited: SecUon 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. New section filed 6-21-72; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 72, No. 
26). 

2. Amendment filed 1 1-28-80; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 80, No. 
48). 

3. Repealer filed 10-12-84; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 84, No. 41). 

§ 3328. Machinery and Equipment. 

(a) Machinery and equipment shall be of adequate design and shall not 
be used or operated under conditions of speeds, stresses, or loads which 
endanger employees. 

(b) Machinery and equipment in service shall be inspected and main- 
tained as recommended by the manufacturer where such recommenda- 
tions are available. 

(c) Machinery and equipment with defective parts which create a haz- 
ard shall not be used. 

(d) Machinery and equipment designed for a fixed location shall be re- 
strained so as to prevent walking or moving from its location. 



(e) Machinery and equipment components shall be designed, secured, 
or covered to minimize hazards caused by breakage, release of mechani- 
cal energy (e.g., broken springs), or loosening and falling. 

(f) Any modifications shall be in accordance with (a) and with good 
engineering practice. 

(g) Machinery and equipment in service shall be maintained in a safe 
operating condition. 

(h) Only qualified persons shall be permitted to maintain or repair ma- 
chinery and equipment. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . New section filed 10-25-74; effecfive thirtieth day thereafter (Register 74, No. 
43). 

2. Amendment filed 12-19-78; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 79, No. 
1, 1-6-79). 

3. Amendment of subsection (b) and new subsecdon (g) filed 4-16-80; effective 
thirtieth day thereafter (Register 80, No. 16). 

4. New subsection (h) filed 12-12-84; effecfive thirtieth day thereafter (Register 
84, No. 50). 



§ 3329. Pipe Lines. 

(a) Pipe lines containing hot, poisonous, corrosive or flammable sub- 
stances shall be supported and maintained so as to prevent dangerous vi- 
bration under normal operating conditions. 

(b) All pressure piping shall be designed, constructed, installed, and 
maintained in accordance with good engineering practice. Piping which 
meets the requirements of the applicable ANSI B31 standard shall be 
considered as providing reasonable safety. 

(c) Leaks from pipe lines, piping or from other equipment shall be 
stopped if employees are endangered by the liberated liquids, gases or va- 
pors. If hazardous leakage cannot be stopped during plant operation, di- 
version shields, or other effective means, shall be installed to protect the 
work area and employees involved. 

(d) When dismantling or opening closed pressurized or gravity fed 
systems, internal pressure shall be relieved or other methods utilized to 
prevent sudden release of pressure or spraying of liquid. 

Note: Extreme care shall be taken to prevent the build-up of excessive internal 
pressure if external heat is used to free solid blockages within liquid pipe lines. 
NOTE: Authority cited: Secfion 142.3, Labor Code. 

History 
1 . New section filed 1 0-25-74; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 74, No. 
43). 



Page 582 



Register 97, No. 35; 8-29-97 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3334 



• 



• 



2. Amendment of subsection (b) and new subsections (c) and (d) filed 12-19-78; 
effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 79, No. 1). 

§ 3330. Special Handtools. 

(a) Special handtools for placing and removing material shall be such 
as to permit easy handling of material without the operator placing a hand 
in the danger zone. Such tools shall not be in lieu of other guarding re- 
quired by these orders, but can only be used to supplement protection 
provided. 

(b) Only cutting tools shall be used to cut metal strapping or banding 
used to secure cargo. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3. La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . New section filed 10-25-74; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 74, No. 
43). 

2. Amendment filed 12-12-84; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Reaister 84, No. 
50). 

§ 3331. Curbs or Rails on Docks, Wharves, or Piers. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. 

History 

1. New section filed 2-18-75; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 75, No. 
7). 

2. Repealer filed 12-12-84; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 84, No. 50). 

§ 3332. Railcar Movement. 

(a) Derail and/or bumper blocks shall be provided on spur railroad 
tracks where a rolling car could contact other cars being worked, or enter 
a building, or work or traffic area. 

Note: Derails, if used, shall be placed where their use will not increase the danger 
to workers. 

(b) Controls to safeguard personnel during railcar movement shall be 
instituted. 

(c) If winches or capstans are employed for movement, employees 
shall stand clear of the hauling rope and shall not stand between the rope 
and the cars. 

(d) Warning signs shall be posted where doorways open onto tracks, 
at blind comers and at similar places where vision may be restricted. 

(e) Recessed railroad switches shall be enclosed to provide a level sur- 
face. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . New section filed 12-19-78; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 79, No. 
1). 

2. Amendment filed 12-12-84; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 84. No. 
50). 

3. Editorial correction of section heading printing error (Register 85, No. 19). 

§ 3333. Blue Stop Signs. 

(a) The employer shall provide blue stop signs for use by day, and in 
addition, blue Ughts for use if night work is necessary, and cause them 
to be displayed before employees are permitted to work in, upon, or under 
any standing railroad car or cars under conditions where unanticipated 
movement or disturbance of such car or cars might endanger employees 
or equipment. 

Exception: Railroad cars on portions of industrial tracks served by common car- 
rier railroad corporations shall be provided with protective signs and lights as re- 
quired by the operating railroad's rules filed with the Public Utilities Commission 
pursuant to their General Order 108. 

(b) The cars shall be adequately secured by positive mechanical 
brakes, blocking or chocking of wheels or other means that will prevent 
their movement. Blocks or chocks shall be stored out of the track area 
when not in use. 

(c) Required signs and signals shall be placed on the track at a height 
of 3 to 5 feet and not less than 10 feet from either or both ends of the cars 
as necessary to afford protection and in such position as to provide a clear 
and unobstructed view of the signs and signals from any approaching 
railroad equipment. 



(d) Required signs and signals shall be placed and reinoved by one of 
the employees working in and about the car. This employee shall be se- 
lected, instructed and directed by the employer in the safe procedures in- 
volved in placing and removing the signs and signals. 

(e) Blue stop signs shall be of substantial material not less than 12 in- 
ches by 15 inches in size and shall bear the word "STOP" in letters not 
less than 4 inches in height. Other words may be placed thereon in letters 
not less than 2 inches in height. The letters shall be white on a blue back- 
ground. 

(0 Signs shall be mounted suitably for proper display. 

(g) Signs shall be maintained so as to assure effective display and shall 
be available to enable compliance with this order. 

Note: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . New section filed 12-19-78; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 79, No. 
1). 

2. Repealer and new section filed 3-7-80; effective thirtieth day thereafter ( Regis- 
ter 80, No. 10). 

§ 3334. Working on or Around Railway Cars. 

(a) Before working on or around railway cars at loading docks or 
dumping facihties, or on sidings, the following items shall, where appro- 
priate, be checked and employees shall be advised of potential hazards. 

(1) Before opening or closing doors on freight cars or gondola type 
bottom dumping cars the doors shall be inspected to assure that the doors 
will not fall off the car and endanger employees. 

(2) Before being opened fully, doors shall be opened slightly to ensure 
that the load has not shifted during transit. Special precautions shall be 
taken if the doors being opened are visibly damaged. 

(3) Material or equipment being loaded on, or off-loaded from box 
cars or flat cars shall be secured from falling out of or off the car where 
employees may be endangered. 

(4) Before inverting gondola type cars in dumping mechanisms the 
coupling hinge pins shall be secured against falling out of the coupling. 

(5) Operators of railcar dumps shall have an unrestricted view of 
dumping operations and shall have emergency means of stopping move- 
ment. 

(6) Before loading or dumping multiple hopper gondola cars, the man- 
ufacturer's instructions shall be checked to see that the proper sequence 
in loading or dumping is followed. 

(7) Railcars shall be chocked or otherwise prevented from moving: 

(A) While dockboards or carplates are in position; or 

(B) While employees are working within, on or under the railcars or 
near the tracks at the ends of the cars. 

(8) Work shall be performed in railcars only if floors of the railcars are 
in visibly safe condition for the work activity being conducted and equip- 
ment being used. 

(9) The employer shall direct that no employees remain in railcars after 
work is concluded. 

(10) A route shall be established to allow employees to pass to and 
from places of employment without passing under, over or through rail- 
cars, or between cars less than 10 feet (3 meters) apart on the same track. 

(b) When repairing or disassembling railway cars, provision shall be 
made to prevent the car or its components from getting into an unstable 
condition where they might fall and endanger employees. 

(c) Entering Tank Cars: refer to Article 108. 

(d) Before cars are moved, unsecured and overhanging stakes, wire 
straps, banding and similar objects shall be removed or placed so as not 
to create hazards. 

(e) Employees shall not remain in or on gondolas or flat cars when 
drafts that create overhead, caught-in, caught-between or struck-by 
hazards are being landed in or on the railcars. End gates, if raised, shall 
be secured. 

Note: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. 

History 
1 . New section filed 12-19-78; effective thirtieth day thereafter ( Register 79. No. 
1). 



Page 583 



Register 2001, No. 45; 11-9-2001 



§3335 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



2. Amendment filed 12-12-84; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 84, No. 
50). 

§ 3335. Railroad Ramping and Deramping Yards. 

(a) Traffic patterns used for vehicle travel within railroad ramping and 
deramping yards shall be well-defined and the direction of traffic clearly 
indicated or controlled as necessary by one or more of the following 
methods as appropriate under the circumstances: a supervised program 
of traffic control, written and published (posted) administrative direc- 
Uves, signs, markers, site maps, etc. 

(b) During switching operafions in the ramping and deramping yard, 

signal devices, such as those listed in ( I ), (2), and (3) below, shall provide 

visual warning of the approach of railroad equipment. These signals shall 

be readily visible to persons working on or around railroad cars in the 

area of hazards created by train movement, to pedestrians, and to vehicle 

operators at track crossings. 

ExCIiPTION: Conventional circus ramp locations where the operation does not in- 
volve vehicular rail crossing. 

NOTI:: A signal device may be one of the following, or a device, system, or method 
which will provide equal assurance of warning: 

1 . A rotating (amber) warning light to be manually actuated by the person autho- 
rized to remove the blue flag. 

2. A fixed rotating (amber) warning light to be automatically actuated when the 
blue flag is taken down. 

3. In security yards where the gates are normally closed, a signal light which is in- 
terlocked with the gates and is automatically actuated when the gates are opened. 
NOTE TO SECTION 3335: This section applies as provided in Labor Code Sec- 
tions 6800, 6801 and 6802. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. 

History 
1. New section filed 7-25-78; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 78, No. 
30). 

§ 3336. Loading Dock Operations. 

Trucks or trailers shall be secured from movement during dock load- 
ing and unloading operations. 
Note: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. 

History 

1. New section filed 7-25-78; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 78, No. 
30). 

§ 3337. Dock Plates and Loading Ramps. 

(a) Every dock plate and loading ramp shall be constructed and main- 
tained with strength sufficient to support the load carried thereon. 

(b) Dock plates or loading ramps shall be secured in position when 
spanning the space between the dock or unloading area and the vehicle. 
The dock plate or loading ramp, together with its securing devices, where 
used over spans of different lengths, shall be of such construction as will 
readily obtain rigid security over such spans. 

(c) The dock plates or loading ramps shall be so constructed and main- 
tained that when they are secured in position the end edges of the plate 
or loading ramp shall be in substantial contact with the dock or loading 
area and with the vehicle bed in such a manner as to prevent rocking, or 
sliding. 

(d) Adequate and safe means shall be provided for moving dock plates 
and loading ramps. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3,La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. Renumbering from Section 3664 filed 7-26-78; effective thirtieth day thereaf- 
ter (Register 78, No. 30). 

2. Amendment filed 10-10-80; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 80, No. 

41). 

3. Editorial correction of History Note No. 1 (Register 81, No. 49). 

§ 3338. Pallets. 

(a) Pallets shall be constructed and maintained with strength adequate 
for the loads being handled. Unsafe and defective parts shall be repaired 
or replaced. Pallets upon which employees customarily walk in the 
course of the employment shall have no surface openings whose maxi- 
mum dimension exceeds 2 inches. 



History 

1. Amendment filed 2-13-75; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 75, No. 
7). 

2. Renumbering from Section 3665 filed 7-26-78; effective thirtieth day thereaf- 
ter (Register 78, No. 23). 

§ 3339. Cargo, Materials, or Equipment. 

(a) Cargo, materials or equipment found sufficiently broken or dam- 
aged as to afford a hazard shall be immediately repaired or shall be set 
aside at a safe distance away from the working area so that it can be re- 
paired. 

(b) Safe means of access to high piles of materials or equipment shall 
be provided. 

History 

1 . Renumbering from Section 3666 filed 7-26-78; effective thirtieth day thereaf- 
ter (Register 78, No. 23). 

§ 3340. Accident Prevention Signs. 

(a) Scope. 

( 1 ) These specifications apply to the design, application, and use of 
signs or symbols intended to indicate and, insofar as possible, to define 
specific hazards of a nature such that failure to designate them may lead 
to accidental injury to workers or the public, or both, or to property dam- 
age. These specifications are intended to cover all safety signs except 
those designed for streets, highways, railroads, and marine regulations. 
These specifications do not apply to plant bulletin boards or to safety 
posters. 

(2) All new signs and replacements of old signs shall be in accordance 
with these specifications. 

(3) All temporary construction signs and symbols required by this sec- 
tion shall be visible at all Umes when work is being performed and shall 
be removed or covered promptly when the hazards no longer exist. 

(b) Definitions. As used in this section, the word "sign" refers to a sur- 
face on which letters or other markings appear, prepared for the warning 
of, or safety instruction of, industrial workers or members of the public 
who may be exposed to hazards. Excluded from this definition, however, 
are news releases, displays commonly known as safety posters, and bul- 
letins used for employee education. 

(c) Classification of signs according to use. 

(1) Danger signs. 

(A) Danger signs shall be used only where an immediate hazard exists. 

(B) All employees shall be instructed that danger signs indicate imme- 
diate danger and that special precautions are necessary. 

(2) Warning signs. 

(A) Warning signs shall be used to indicate a potentially hazardous sit- 
uation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. 

(B) All employees shall be instructed that warning signs indicate a po- 
tentially hazardous situation that could result in death or serious injury. 

(3) Caution signs. 

(A) Caution signs shall be used only to warn against potential hazards 
or to caution against unsafe practices. 

(B) All employees shall be instructed that caution signs indicate a pos- 
sible hazard against which proper precaution should be taken. 

(4) General safety signs. General safety signs shall be used where there 
is a need for general instructions and suggestions relative to safety mea- 
sures. 

(5) Biological hazard signs. The biological hazard warning shall be 
used to signify the actual or potential presence of a biohazard and to iden- 
tify equipment, containers, rooms, material, experimental animals, or 
combinations thereof, which contain, or are contaminated with, viable 
hazardous agents. For the purpose of this subsection the term "biological 
hazard," or "biohazard," shall include only those infectious agents pres- 
enting a risk or potential risk to the well-being of employees. 

(d) Sign design. 

( 1 ) All signs shall be furnished with rounded or blunt comers and shall 
be free from sharp edges, burrs, splinters, or other sharp projections. The 
ends or heads of bolts or other fastening devices shall be located in such 
a way that they do not constitute a hazard. 



Page 584 



Register 2(X)1, No. 45; 11-9-2001 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3341 



(2) Danger signs shall consist of the colors red. black, and white only 
and shall be approved as defined in Section 3206 of these orders. 

(3) Warning signs. Warning signs shall comply with either one of the 
following: 

(A) They shall have the signal word "WARNING" in black letters on 
a rectangular orange background placed at the top of the sign. The safety 
alert symbol (a triangle with sides of equal length surrounding an ex- 
clamation mark) shall precede the signal word and it shall be on the same 
horizontal line as the base of the letters of the signal word; or 

(B) Tliey shall have the signal word "WARNING" in black letters 
within a safety orange truncated diamond on a black rectangular back- 
ground. 

(C) Warning signs shall be approved as defined in Section 3206 of 
these orders. 

(4) Caution signs. Standard color of the background shall be yellow; 
and the panel, black with yellow letters. Any letters used against the yel- 
low background shall be black. Caution signs shall be approved as de- 
fined in Section 3206 of these orders. 

(5) General safety signs. Standard color of the background shall be 



white; and the panel, green with white letters. Any letters used against the 
while background shall be black. General safety signs shall be approved 
as defined in Section 3206 of these orders. 

(6) Slow-moving vehicle emblem. This emblem consists of a fluores- 
cent yellow-orange triangle with a dark red reflective border. The yel- 
low-orange fluorescent triangle is a highly visible color for daylight ex- 
posure. The reflective border defines the shape of the fluorescent color 
in daylight and creates a hollow red triangle in the path of motor vehicle 
headlights at night. The emblem is intended as a unique identification for. 
and it shall be used only on, vehicles which by design move slowly (25 
m.p.h. or less) on the public roads. The emblem is not a clearance marker 
for wide machinery nor is it intended to replace required lighting or mark- 
ing of slow-moving vehicles. Neither the color film pattern and its di- 
mensions nor the backing shall be altered to permit use of advertising or 
other markings. The material, location, mounting, etc.. of the emblem 
shall be in accordance with the Society of Automotive Engineers. Inc., 
Standard. SAE J943-1993, Slow-Moving Vehicle Identification Em- 
blem. 



!-■-< 



• 



Daik red 
reflective 
border 

Fluorescent 

yellow-orange 

triangle 




NOTE: All dimensions are in inches 
Slow-Moving Vehicle Emblem 



(7) Biohazard symbol. The biohazard symbol design shall be fluores- 
cent orange or orange-red color. Background color is optional as long as 
there is sufficient contrast for the symbol to be clearly defined. Appropri- 
ate wording may be used in association with the symbol to indicate the 
nature or identity of the hazard, name of individual responsible for its 
control, precautionary information, etc., but this information shall not be 
superimposed on the symbol. 

(e) Sign wordings. The wording of any sign shall be easily read and 
concise. The sign shall contain sufficient information to be easily under- 
stood. The wording shall make a positive, rather than negafive suggestion 
and shall be accurate in fact. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . Renumbering of former section 6003 to new section 3340 and amendment of 
section filed 2-5-97; operative 3-7-97 (Register 97, No. 6). 

2. New subsections (c)(2)-(c)(2)(B) and (d)(3)-(d)(3)(C) and subsection renum- 
bering filed 1 1-8-2001; operative 12-8-2001 (Register 2001, No. 45). 

§3341. Accident Prevention Tags. 

(a) Scope and applicafion. This secfion applies to all accident preven- 
tion tags used to idenfify hazardous conditions and provide a message to 



employees with respect to hazardous conditions as set forth in subsection 

(c) of this section, or to meet the specific tagging requirements of other 

standards. 

EXCEPTION: This section does not apply to construction, maritime or agriculture. 

(b) Definitions. "Biological hazard" or "BIOHAZARD" means those 
infectious agents presenting a risk of death, injury or illness to em- 
ployees. 

"Major message" means that portion of a tag's inscription that is more 
specific than the signal word and that indicates the specific hazardous 
condition or the instruction to be communicated to the employee. Exam- 
ples include: "High Voltage," "Close Clearance," "Do Not Start." or "Do 
Not Use" or a corresponding pictograph used with a written text or alone. 

"Pictograph" means a pictorial representation used to identify a haz- 
ardous condition or to convey a safety instruction. 

"Signal word" means that portion of a tag' s inscription that contains 
the word or words that are intended to capture the employee's immediate 
attention. 

"Tag" means a device usually made of card, paper, pasteboard, plastic 
or other material used to identify a hazardous condition. 

(c) Use. Tags shall be used as a means to prevent accidental injury or 
illness to employees who are exposed to hazardous or potentially ha/ard- 



Page 585 



Register 2001, No. 45; 11-9-2001 



§3350 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



ous conditions, equipment or operations which are out of the ordinary, 
unexpected or not readily apparent. Tags shall be used until such time as 
the identified hazard is eliminated or the hazardous operation is com- 
pleted. Tags need not be used where signs, guarding or other positive 
means of protection are being used. 

(d) General Tag Criteria. All required tags shall meet the following cri- 
teria: 

(1) Tags shall contain a signal word and a major message. 

(A) The signal word shall be either "Danger." "Caution." or "Biologi- 
cal Hazard," "BIOHAZARD," or the biological hazard symbol. 

(B) The major message shall indicate the specific hazardous condition 
or the instruction to be communicated to the employee. 

(2) The signal word shall be readable at a minimum distance of five 
feet or such greater distance as warranted by the hazard. 

(3) The tag's major message shall be presented in either pictographs, 
written text or both. 

(4) The signal word and the major message shall be understandable to 
all employees who may be exposed to the identified hazard. 

(5) All employees shall be informed as to the meaning of the various 
tags used throughout the workplace and what special precautions are nec- 
essary. 

(6) Tags shall be affixed as close as safely possible to their respective 
hazards by a positive means such as string, wire, or adhesive that prevents 
their loss or unintentional removal. 

(e) Danger Tags. Danger tags shall only be used in major hazard situa- 
tions where an immediate hazard presents a threat of death or serious in- 
jury to employees. 

(f) Caution Tags. Caution tags shall only be used in minor hazard situa- 
tions where a non-immediate or potential hazard or unsafe practice pres- 
ents a lesser threat of employee injury. 

(g) Warning Tags. Warning tags may be used to represent a hazard lev- 
el between "Caution" and "Danger," instead of the required "Caution" 
tag, provided that they have a signal word of "Warning," an appropriate 
major message, and otherwise meet the general tag criteria of subsection 
(d) of this section. 

(h) Biological Hazard Tags. Biological hazard tags shall be used to 
identify the actual or potential presence of a biological hazard and to 
identify equipment, containers, rooms, experimental animals, or combi- 
nations thereof, that contain or are contaminated with hazardous biologi- 
cal agents. 

( 1 ) The symbol design for biological hazard tags shall conform to the 
design shown below: 




Appendix A 

Recommended Color Coding For 
Accident Prevention Tags 

While this appendix does not specifically mandate colors to be used 
on accident prevention tags, the following color scheme is recommended 
for meeting the requirements of Section 3441 : 

"DANGER" — Red, or predominantly red, with lettering or symbols 
in a contrasting color. 

"CAUTION" — Yellow, or predominantly yellow, with lettering or 
symbols in a contrasting color. 

"WARNING" — Orange, or predominantly orange, with lettering or 
symbols in a contrasting color. 

"BIOLOGICAL HAZARD" — Fluorescent orange or orange-red or 
predominantly so. with lettering or symbols in a contrasting color. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 
1 . Renumbering of former section 6004 and accompanying Appendix A to new 
section 3341 and Appendix A and amendment of Appendix A filed 2-5-97; op- 
erative 3-7-97 (Register 97. No. 6). 



Article 8. Labor Camps 

§ 3350. Labor Camp Permits. 

Every employer operating a labor camp under the provisions of the 
California Employee Housing Act shall obtain a valid permit issued by 
the Department of Housing and Community Development or by a local 
governmental agency authorized to issue such permits by the Depart- 
ment. The employer shall either post or have available a valid and current 
permit. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code; and Section 17030, Health and Safety Code. 

History 

1. New Article 8 (Section 3350) filed 3-25-77 as an emergency; effective upon 
filing (Register 77, No. 13). 

2. Certificate of Compliance filed 5-27-77 (Register 77, No. 22). 

3. Editorial correction of NOTE filed 7-15-83 (Register 83, No. 30). 



Biological Hazard Symbol Configuration 

(i) Other Tags. Other tags may be used in addition to those required by 
this section, or in other situations where this section does not require tags, 
provided that they do not detract from the impact or visibility of the signal 
word and major message of any required tag. 



Article 9. Sanitation 

§ 3360. Scope and Application. 

This article applies to all places of employment. 

EXCEPTION: 

Mobile crews or normally unattended work locations provided employees have 
readily available potable water for drinking, and readily available transportation 
or other effective arrangements to nearby toilet and washing facilities. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 
L New section filed 1-23-81; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 81, No. 
4). 

2. Amendment filed 1-17-86; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 86. No. 
3). 

3. Amendment filed 5-9-91; operafive 6-8-91 (Register 91, No. 25). 

4. Editorial correcdon of HISTORY 3. (Register 91, No. 45). 

§3361. Definitions. 

Lavatory. A plumbing fixture used for washing the hands, arms, face 
and head. (Title 24, Part 5, Section 5-113). 

Number of employees. The maximum number of employees present 
at any one time on a regular shift. (Title 24. Part 5, Section 5-1 15). 

Personal Service Room. A room which is not directly connected with 
the production or service function performed by the establishment. Such 
rooms may include, but are not limited to, first aid or medical rooms, toi- 
let rooms, change rooms, wash rooms, shower rooms, kitchens and lunch 
rooms. (Title 24, Part 5, Section 5-1 17). 

Potable Water. Potable water is water which is satisfactory for drink- 
ing, culinary and domestic purposes and meets the requirements of the 
health authority having jurisdiction. (Title 24, Part 5, Section 5-117) 



Page 586 



Register 2001, No. 45; 11-9-2001 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3364 



Toilet. A fixture, maintained within a toilet room, which may be used 
for defecation or urination, or both. (Title 24, Part 5, Section 5-121) 

Toilet Room. A room within or on the premises containing water clos- 
ets, urinals and other required facilities. (Title 24, Part 5, Section 5-121 ) 

Toxic Material. A material in concentration or amount which exceeds 
the applicable limit established by a standard, such as Section 5 155, 5208 
or 5209 of Title 8, CAC or, in the absence of an applicable standard, 
which has the capacity to produce personal injury or illness to persons 
through ingestion, inhalation, or absorption through any body surface. 
(Title^24, Part 5, Section 5-121) 

Urinal. A plumbing fixture which is used only for urination. (Title 24, 
Part 5, Section 5-122) 

Water Closet. A plumbing fixture (which may be used for both defeca- 
tion and urination) in which the waste matter is removed by flushing with 
water. (Title 24, Part 5, Section 5-124) 

Note; Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. New Article 9 (Sections 3361-3376) filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day 
thereafter (Register 76, No. 29). 

2. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 

3. Amendment of subsection (b) filed 9-19-80 as procedural and organizational; 
effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 80, No. 38). 

4. Repealer and new section filed 1-23-8 1 ; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Reg- 
ister 81, No. 4). 

5. Amendment filed 1-17-86; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 86, No. 
3). 

§ 3362. General Requirements. 

(a) To the extent that the nature of the work allows, workplaces, store- 
rooms, personal service rooms and passageways shall be kept clean, or- 
derly and in a sanitary condition. The interiors, exteriors and environs of 
buildings that contribute to a hazard to which these orders apply shall be 
cleaned and maintained in such conditions as will not give rise to harmful 
exposure, as defined in Section 5140. 

(b) Cleaning and sweeping shall be done in such a manner as to mini- 
mize the contamination of the air and, insofar as is practicable, shall be 
performed at such time and in such a manner that will avoid harmful ex- 
posures as defined in Section 5140. 

(c) To facilitate cleaning, every floor, workroom, personal service 
room and passageway shall be kept free from protruding nails, splinters, 
loose boards and unnecessary holes and openings. 

(d) All putrescible waste or refuse shall be stored in a receptacle so 
constructed that it does not leak and may be conveniently and thoroughly 
cleaned. Such a receptacle shall be maintained in a sanitary condition and 
shall be equipped with a tight fitting cover if it cannot be maintained in 
a sanitary condition without one. (This provision does not prohibit the 
use of receptacles which are designed to permit the maintenance of a san- 
itary condition without regard to the above requirements.) 

(e) All sweepings, putrescible wastes, refuse and garbage shall be re- 
moved in such a manner as to avoid creating a nuisance and shall be re- 
moved as often as necessary to avoid creating a menace to health through 
the development of unsanitary conditions. 

(f) Every enclosed workplace and personal service room shall be 
equipped and maintained, insofar as is practicable, to prevent the en- 
trance or harborage of insects, rodents or other vermin. An effective pro- 
gram of extermination and control shall be instituted whenever their 
presence is detected. 

(g) When exterior water intrusion, leakage from interior water 
sources, or other uncontrolled accumulation of water occurs, the intru- 
sion, leakage or accumulation shall be corrected because of the potential 
for these conditions to cause the growth of mold. 

NOTli; Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 
1. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 



2. Amendment of subsections (a) and (b) filed 10-2-81; effective thirtieth day 
thereafter (Register 81, No. 40). 

3. Amendment of subsection (f) filed 1-17-86; effective thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register 86, No 3). 

4. New subsection (s) filed 8-5-2002; operative 9-4-2002 (Register 2002, No. 

32). 

§ 3363. Water Supply. 

(a) Potable water in adequate supply shall be provided in all places of 
employment for drinking and washing and, where required by the em- 
ployer of these orders, for bathing, cooking, washing of food, washing 
of cooking and eating utensils, washing of food preparation or processing 
p)remises. and personal service rooms. (Title 24, Part 5, Section 5-i()()l; 
Exception No. 2: (b)) 

(b) All sources of drinking water shall be maintained in a clean and 
sanitary condition. Drinking fountains and portable drinking water dis- 
pensers shall not be located in toilet rooms. (Title 24, Part 5, Section 
5-1001; Exception No. 2: (c)) 

(c) Portable drinking water dispensers shall be equipped with a faucet 
or drinking fountain, shall be capable of being tightly closed and shall be 
otherwise designed, constmcted and serviced so that sanitary conditions 
are maintained. Such dispensers shall be clearly marked as to their con- 
tents. 

(d) The dipping or pouring of drinking water from containers, such as 
from barrels, pails or tanks, is prohibited regardless of whether or not the 
containers are fitted with covers. 

(e) The common use of a cup, glass or other vessel for drinking pur- 
poses is prohibited. 

(f) Nonpotable water shall not be used for drinking, washing, or bath- 
ing, washing of clothing, cooking, washing of food, washing of cooking 
or eating utensils, washing of food preparation or processing premises or 
other personal service rooms. (Title 24, Part 5, Section 5-1012 (a)) 

(g) Outlets for nonpotable water, such as water for industrial or fire- 
fighting purposes, shall be posted in a manner understandable to all em- 
ployees to indicate that the water is unsafe and shall not be used for drink- 
ing, washing, cooking or other personal service purposes. (Title 24, Part 

5. Section 5-1012 (c)) 

(h) Nonpotable water systems or systems carrying any other nonpot- 
able substance shall be installed so as to prevent backflow or back-sipho- 
nage into a potable water system. (Title 24, Part 5, SecUon 5-1012 (b)) 

NOTE: Authority cited: SecUon 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 

2. Repealer of subsections (c), (e), (h) and consecutive relettering of subsections 
(d)-(k); effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 81, No. 4). 

3. Amendment filed 1-17-86; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 86. No. 
3). 

§ 3364. Sanitary Facilities. 

(a) Separate toilet facilities shall be provided for each sex according 
to the following table: 

Minimum Number of 
Number of Employees Water Closets-'' 

1 to 15 . 1 

16 to 35 2 

36 to 55 3 

56 to 80 4 

81 to 110 5 

111 to 150 6 

over 150 1 additional for 

each additional 40 
employees or 

fraction hereof. 



*Urinals may be installed instead of water closets in toilet rooms to be used only 
by men provided that the number of water closets shall not be less than t\v o-thirds 
of the minimum number of toilet facilities specified. The length of trough urinals 
to equivalent number of individual urinals shall be based on the following: 



Page 586.1 



Register 2002, No. 32; 8-9-2002 



§3365 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



Equivalent Number of 
Leii^tli of Trouiili Urinal huliridual Urinals 

24" 1 

36" 2 

48" 2 

60" 3 

72" 4 

ExCt:PTIONS: 

( 1 ) When there are less than five employees, separate toilet rooms for each sex are 
not required provided toilet rooms can be locked from the inside and contain at 
least one water closet. (Title 24. Part 5, Section 3-910 (a)( 1 )) 

(2) Employees engaged in hand-labor operations at agricultural estab- 
lishments are subject to the sanitation provisions of Section 3457. 

(b) Toilet facilities shall be kept clean, maintained in good working or- 
der and be accessible to the employees at all times. Where practicable, 
toilet facilities should be within 200 feet of locations at which workers 
are regularly employed and should not be more than one floor-to-floor 
flight of stairs from working areas. (Title 24. part 5, section 5-9 10(a)(1)) 

(c) All water-carried sewage shall be disposed of by means of either 
a public sewage system or by a sewage disposal system in conformance 
with applicable State and local laws, ordinances, and regulations. The 
sewage disposal method shall not endanger the health of employees. 

(d) An adequate supply of toilet paper shall be provided for every wa- 
ter closet. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . Amendment filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 

2. Amendment filed 1-23-81 ; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 81, No. 
4). 

3. Amendment filed 10-2-81 ; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 81, No. 
40). 

4. Amendment filed 1-17-86; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 86, No. 
3). 

5. Repealer of Exception (2) and renumbering of Exception (3) to (2) filed 
3-9-91; operative 6-8-91 (Register 91, No. 25). 

6. Amendment of Exception (2) filed 12-23-91; operative 1-22-92 (Register 92, 
No. 12). 

7. Editorial correction of printing error in subsection (a) table (Register 92, No. 
33). 

8. Editorial con'ection restoring inadvertently omitted subsection (d) (Register 93, 
No. 39). 

9. Change without regulatory effect amending subsection (a)(2) filed 2-22-95 
pursuant to secfion 1 00, title 1 , California Code of Regulations (Register 95, No. 
8). 

§ 3365. Toilet Rooms. 

Each water closet shall occupy a separate compartment which shall be 
equipped with a door and door latch. The door and the walls or partitions 
between fixtures shall be sufficient to assure privacy. (Title 24, Part 5, 
Section 5-9 12(a)) 

Note: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 

2. Repealer and new section filed 1-23-81 ; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Reg- 
ister 81, No. 4). 

3. Amendment filed 1-17-86; effecfive thirtieth day thereafter (Register 86, No. 
3). 

§ 3366. Washing Facilities. 

(a) Washing facilities for maintaining personal cleanliness shall be 
provided in every place of employment. These facilities shall be reason- 
ably accessible to all employees. (Title 24, Part 5, Section 5-910(a)2(A)) 

(b) Washing facilities shall be maintained in good working order and 
in a sanitary condition. (Title 24, Part 5, Section 5- 910(a)2(B)) 

(c) Lavatories, including those associated with toilet rooms shall be 
made available according to the following table: 





Number of 


Minimum 


Number 


Type of Employment 


Employees 


of Lavatories 


Nonindustrial-office 


1 to 15 


1 




buildings, public 


16 to 33 


2 




buildings, and similar 


36 to 60 


3 




establishments 


61 to 90 


4 






91 to 123 


3 






over 123 


1 


additional 
for each addi- 
tional 45 em- 
ployees or frac- 
tion thereof. 


Industrial-factories 


1 to 100 


1 


for each 10 


warehouses, loft 






employees. 


buildings, and similar 








establishments 


over 100 


1 


additional for 
each additional 
1 5 employees 
or fracfion 
thereof. 



In a multiple-use lavatory, 24 lineal inches of sink or 1 8 inches of cir- 
cular basin, when provided with individual faucet, shall be considered 
equivalent to one lavatory. 
Exception: 

( 1 ) Employees engaged in hand-labor operafions at agricultural establishments 
are subject to the sanitation provisions of Section 3457. 

(d) Each lavatory shall be provided with running water and suitable 
cleansing agents. The water shall be available at temperatures of at least 
85° F in those instances where: 

(1) Substances regulated as carcinogens in these orders are used; or 

(2) Skin contact may occur with substances designated skin (S) in sec- 
tion 5155. 

Note: This section does not prevent local health departments from enforcing 
more stringent standards contained in the Health and Safety Code for food han- 
dlers. 

(e) Clean individual hand towels, or sections thereof, of cloth or paper 
or warm-air blowers convenient to the lavatories shall be provided. (Title 
24, part 5, section 5-910(a)2(E)) 

(f) Where showering is required by the employer or these orders: 

( 1 ) Separate shower rooms shall be provided for each sex. One shower 
facility with hot and cold water feeding a common discharge line shall 
be provided for each ten employees, or numerical fraction thereof, who 
are required to shower during the same shift. When there are less than five 
employees, the same shower room may be used by both sexes provided 
the shower room can be locked from the inside. (Title 24, part 5, section 
5-910(a)2(F)) 

(2) Body soap or other appropriate cleansing agents convenient to the 
shower shall be provided. 

(3) Employees who use showers shall be provided with individual 
clean towels. 

NOTE: Authority and reference cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. 

History 

1. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 

2. Amendment of subsecfion (e) filed 4-27-79; effecfive thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register 79, No. 17). 

3. Amendment filed 1-23-81; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 81, No. 
4). 

4. Amendment filed 10-2-81; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 81, No. 
40). 

5. Amendment filed 1-17-86; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 86, No. 
3). 

6. Repealer of Exception (2) and renumbering of Exception (2) to (1) filed 
5-9-91; operafive 6-8-91 (Register 91, No. 25). 

7. Amendment of Exception and editorial correction of History 6. filed 
12-23-91; operative 1-22-92 (Register 92, No. 12). 

8. Editorial correction of printing error restoring inadvertently omitted subsections 
(0(l)-(3) (Register 92, No. 26). 

9. Editorial correction of printing error in subsection (d) (Register 92, No. 33). 



• 



Page 586.2 



Register 2002, No. 32; 8-9-2002 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3368 



• 



§ 3367. Change Rooms. 

(a) Whenever employees are required to change from street clothes 
into protective clothing, change rooms equipped with storage facilities 
for street clothes and separate storage facilities for the protective clothing 
shall be provided. 

(b) Where working clothes are provided by the employer and become 
wet or are washed between shifts, provision shall be made to ensure that 
such clothing is dry before reuse. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 

2. Amendment filed 1-17-86; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 86, No. 
3). 



§ 3368. Consumption of Food and Beverages. 

(a) Application. This Section shall apply only where employees are 
permitted to consume food or beverages, or both, on the premises. 

(b) Prohibited Areas. Food and beverages shall not be stored or con- 
sumed in a toilet room or in an area where they may be contaminated by 
any toxic material. 

EXEMPTION: Penal institution gun posts containing a water closet and lavora- 
tory and only one occupant per shift. 

(c) Waste Disposal Containers. Receptacles constructed of smooth, 
corrosion-resistant, easily cleanable or disposable materials shall be pro- 
vided and used for the disposal of food waste. The number, size and loca- 
tion of such receptacles shall encourage their use and not result in over 
filling. Receptacles containing food waste shall be emptied not less than 
once each working day and shall be maintained in a clean and sanitary 



[The next page is 587.] 



Page 586.3 



Register 2002, No. 32; 8-9-2002 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§ 3381 



condition. They shall be provided with solid, tight-fitting covers unless 
sanitary conditions can be maintained without the use of covers. 

(d) Food Handling/Service. All facilities providing food or beverage 
service for employees shall be operated in accordance with sound hy- 
gienic principles. Food shall be processed, prepared, handled, served and 
stored in such a manner as to be protected against contamination and 
spoilage. 

NOTH; Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 
L Amendment filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 

29). 

2. Amendment of subsections (b) and (d) filed 9-19-80; effective thirtieth day 
thereafter (Register 80, No. 38). 

§ 3369. Public Health. 

NOTK: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

Hl.STORY 

1. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 

2. Repealer filed 1-17-86; effecfive thirtieth day thereafter (Register 86, No. 3). 
§ 3370. Nonwater Carriage Disposal Systems. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 

2. Repealer filed 1-23-81; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 81, No. 4). 

§ 3371 . Privy Specifications. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effecfive thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 

2. Repealer filed 1-23-81; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 81, No. 4). 

§ 3372. Chemical Toilet Specifications. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Secdon 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 

2. Repealer filed 1-23-81; effecfive thirtieth day thereafter (Register 81, No. 4). 

§ 3373. Seepage Pit Construction. 

NOTE: Authority cited: SecUon 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effecfive thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 

2. Repealer filed 1-23-81; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 81, No. 4). 

§ 3374. Combustion Toilet. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 

2. Repealer filed 1-23-81; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 81, No. 4). 

§ 3375. Recirculating Toilet Specifications. 

NOTE: Authority and reference cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. 

History 

1. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 

2. Amendment of subsection (a) filed 4-27-79; effective thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register 79, No. 17). 

3. Repealer filed 1-23-81; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 81, No. 4). 

§ 3376. Portable Toilet Construction. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 



History 

1, Amendment filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 

2. Repealer filed 1-23-81; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 81. No. 4). 



Article 10. 



Personal Safety Devices and 
Safeguards 



§ 3380. Personal Protective Devices. 

(a) Protection where modified by the words head, eye, body, hand, and 
foot, as required by the orders in this article means the safeguarding ob- 
tained by means of safety devices and safeguards of the proper type for 
the exposure and of such design, strength and quality as to eliminate, pre- 
clude or initigate the hazard. 

Note: In order that safety devices or safeguards, which may include personal pro- 
tective equipment, be acceptable as to proper type, design, strength and quality 
they shall be at least equivalent to those complying with the standards approved 
by The American National Standards Institute. Bureau of Standards, or other rec- 
ognized authorities, except that where no authoritative standard exists for a safety 
device or safeguard, the use of such safeguard or safety device shall be subject to 
inspection and acceptance or rejection by the Division. 

(b) Protective equipment shall be distinctly marked so as to facilitate 
identification of the manufacturer. 

EXCEPTION: Employer manufactured shields, barriers, etc. 

(c) The employer shall assure that the employee is instructed and uses 
protective equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's instruc- 
tions. 

(d) The employer shall assure that all personal protective equipment, 
whether employer-provided or employee-provided, complies with the 
applicable Title 8 standards for the equipment. The employer shall assure 
this equipment is maintained in a safe, sanitary condition. 

(e) Protectors shall be of such design, fit and durability as to provide 
adequate protection against the hazards for which they are designed. 
They shall be reasonably comfortable and shall not unduly encumber the 
employee's movements necessary to perform his work. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . Repealer and new section filed 7-1 1-74; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Reg- 
ister 74, No. 28). 

2. Amendment of subsection (c) filed 4-27-79; effective thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register 79, No. 17). 

3. Amendment of subsection (d) and amendment of Note filed 12-30-2004; op- 
erative 1-29-2005 (Register 2004, No. 53). 

§ 3381 . Head Protection. 

(a) Employees working in locations where there is a risk of receiving 
head injuries from flying or falling objects and/or electric shock and 
bums shall wear approved head protection in accordance with subsec- 
tions (b) and (c). 

(b) When head protection is required, the employer shall ensure that 
approved protective helmets are selected and used in accordance with 
their demonstrated resistance to impact and electrical hazards as speci- 
fied in subsections (b)(1) and (b)(2). 

(1) Protective helmets placed in service after October 30, 2004 shall 
comply with American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z89. 1-1 997 
Industrial Head Protection, which is hereby incorporated by reference. 
The employer shall ensure that the appropriate class of ANSI designated 
helmet is selected and used in accordance with the following: 

(A) When there is no risk of head injury from contact with electrical 
conductors, and protective helmets are only required to reduce the danger 
of injury from flying or falling objects, protective helmets shall be ANSI 
approved Class C, E, or G. 

(B) When there is a risk of head injury from contact with conductors 
less than 600 volts, protective helmets shall be ANSI approved Class E 
orG. 

(C) When there is a risk of head injury from contact with conductors 
greater than 600 volts, protective helmets shall be ANSI approved Class 
E. 



Page 587 



Register 2004, No. 53; 12-31-2004 



§3382 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



(2) Protective helmets placed in service on or before October 30, 2004 
shall comply with one of the following ANSI standards, which are hereby 
incorporated by reference: ANSI Z89. 1-1969 Safety Requirements for 
Industrial Head Protection; ANSI Z89.2-1971 Industrial Protective Hel- 
mets for Electrical Workers, Class B; ANSI Z89.1-1981 Requirements 
for Protective Headwear for Industrial Workers; ANSI Z89. 1-1986 Pro- 
tective Headwear for Industrial Workers — Requirements; or ANSI 
Z89.1-1997 Industrial Head Protection. The employer shall ensure that 
the appropriate class of ANSI designated helmet is selected and used in 
accordance with the following: 

(A) When there is no risk of head injury from contact with electrical 
conductors, and protective helmets are only required to reduce the danger 
of injury from flying or falling objects, protective helmets shall be ANSI 
approved Class A, B, C, D, E, or G. 

(B) When there is a risk of head injury from contact with conductors 
less than 600 volts, protective helmets shall be ANSI approved Class A, 
B, D, E, or G. 

(C) When there is a risk of head injury from contact with conductors 
greater than 600 volts, protective helmets shall be ANSI approved Class 
B or E. 

(c) Each approved protective helmet required by subsection (a) shall 
bear the original marking required by the ANSI standard under which it 
was approved. At a minimum, the marking shall identify the manufactur- 
er, ANSI designated standard number and date, and ANSI designated 
class of helmet. 

(d) Where there is a risk of injury from hair entanglements in moving 
parts of machinery, combustibles or toxic contaminants, employees shall 
confine their hair to eliminate the hazard. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . Repealer and new section filed 7-1 1-74; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Reg- 
ister 74, No. 28). 

2. Amendment of subsection (a) and newly designated subsection (b)(1), new sub- 
section (b)(2), repealer of subsection (c), subsection relettering, and new Note 
filed 12-13-94; operative 1-12-95 (Register 94, No. 50). 

3. Amendment filed 9-30-2004; operafive 10-30-2004 (Register 2004, No. 40). 

§ 3382. Eye and Face Protection. 

(a) Employees working in locations where there is a risk of receiving 
eye injuries such as punctures, abrasions, contusions, or bums as a result 
of contact with flying particles, hazardous substances, projections or in- 
jurious light rays which are inherent in the work or environment, shall be 
safeguarded by means of face or eye protection. Suitable screens or 
shields isolating the hazardous exposure may be considered adequate 
safeguarding for nearby employees. 

The employer shall provide and ensure that employees use protection 
suitable for the exposure. 

(b) Where exposed to injurious light rays, the shade of lens to use in 
any instance shall be selected in accordance with the following table. 

Protection against radiant energy — Selection of shade numbers for 
welding filter. Table EP-1 shall be used as a guide for the selection of the 
proper shade numbers of filter lenses or plates used in welding. Shade 
more dense than those listed may be used to suit the individual's needs. 

TABLE EP-1— FILTER LENS SHADE NUMBERS FOR PROTEC- 
TION AGAINST RADIANT ENERGY 

Shade 
Welding operation number 

Shielded metal-arc welding 1 1/16-, 3/32- 1/8. 5/32-inch 

diameter electrodes 10 

Gas-shielded arc welding (nonferrous) 1/16-, 3/32-, 1/8-, 

5/32-inch diameter electrodes 11 

Gas-shielded arc welding (ferrous) 1/16-, 3/32- 1/8-, 

5/32-inch diameter electrodes 12 

Shielded metal-arc welding 3/16-, 7/32-, 1/4-inch diameter electrodes ... 12 

5/16-, 3/8-inch diameter electrodes 14 

Atomic hydrogen welding 10-14 

Carbon-arc welding 14 

Soldering 2 



Shade 
Welding operation number 

Torch brazing 3 or 4 

Light cutting, up to 1 inch 3 or 4 

Medium cutting, 1 inch to 6 inches 4 or 5 

Heavy cutting, over 6 inches 5 or 6 

Gas welding (light), up to I/8-inch 4 or 5 

Gas welding (medium), 1/8-inch to 1/2-inch 5 or 6 

Gas welding (heavy), over 1/2-inch 6 or 8 

(c) Where eye protection is required and the employee requires vision 
correction, such eye protection shall be provided as follows: 

( 1 ) Safety spectacles with suitable corrected lenses, or 

(2) Safety goggles designed to fit over spectacles, or 

(3) Protective goggles with coirective lenses mounted behind the pro- 
tective lenses. 

Note: The wearing of contact lens is prohibited in working environments having 
harmful exposure to materials or light flashes, except when special precautionary 
procedures, which are medically approved, have been established for the protec- 
tion of the exposed employee. 

(d)(1) Design, construction, testing and use of devices for eye and face 
protection purchased after January 12, 1995 shall be in accordance with 
American National Standard, Practice for Occupational and Educational 
Eye and Face Protection, Z87.1-1989. which is hereby incorporated by 
reference, except that integral lens and frame design will be allowed if 
the lens frame combination provides unit strength, as well as impact, 
penetration, heat and flammability resistance, optical qualities and eye 
zone coverage equal to or greater than is required by ANSI Z87. 1-1 989. 

(2) Eye and face protection purchased on or before January 12, 1995 
shall be designed, constructed, and used in accordance with American 
National Standard (ANSI) Z87.1-1968, which is hereby incorporated by 
reference. 

(3) Side shield protection shall be used whenever the hazard of flying 
objects is angular as well as frontal. 

(e) Laser Protection. Employees whose occupation or assignment re- 
quires exposure to laser beams shall be furnished suitable laser safety 
goggles which will protect for the specific wavelength of the laser and be 
of optical density (O.D.) adequate for the energy involved. Table EP-2 
lists the maximum power or energy density for which adequate protec- 
tion is afforded by glasses of optical densities from 5 through 8. 

TABLE EP-2— SELECTING LASER SAFETY GLASS 



Intensity 




Attenuation 


CW maximum 

power density 

(watts/cm2) 


Optical 
densitv 
(O.D) 


Attenuation 
factor 


10-2 
10-1 
1.0 
10.0 


5 
6 
7 
8 


105 
106 
10^ 
108 



Output levels falling between lines in this table shall require the higher 
optical density. 

(1) All protective goggles shall bear a label identifying the following 
data: 

(A) The laser wavelengths for which use is intended; 

(B) The optical density of those wavelengths; 

(C) The visible light transmission. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Secfion 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . Repealer and new section filed 7-1 1-74; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Reg- 
ister 74, No. 28). 

2. Amendment of subsection (d) filed 10-5-77; effective thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register77, No. 41). 

3. Amendment of subsection (a) filed 4-16-80; effective thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register 80, No. 16). 

4. Amendment of subsection (a) filed 7-8-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register 85, No. 28). 

5. Amendment of newly designated subsection (d)(1) and new subsection (d)(2) 
filed 12-13-94; operative 1-12-95 (Register 94, No. 50). 

6. New subsection (d)(3) filed 9-30-96; operative 10-30-96 (Register 96, No. 
40). 



Page 588 



Register 2004, No. 53; 12-31-2004 



Titles 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§ 3387 



§ 3383. Body Protection. 

(a) Body protection may be required for employees whose work ex- 
poses parts of their body, not otherwise protected as required by other or- 
ders in this article, to hazardous or flying substances or objects. 

(b) Clothing appropriate for the work being done shall be worn. Loose 
sleeves, tails, ties, lapels, cuffs, or other loose clothing which can be en- 
tangled in moving machinery shall not be worn. 

(c) Clothing saturated or impregnated with flammable liquids, corro- 
sive substances, irritants or oxidizing agents shall be removed and shall 
not be worn until properly cleaned. 

§ 3384. Hand Protection. 

(a) Hand protection shall be required for employees whose work in- 
volves unusual and excessive exposure of hands to cuts, burns, harmful 
physical or chemical agents or radioactive materials which are encoun- 
tered and capable of causing injury or impairments. 

(b) Hand protection, such as gloves, shall not be worn where there is 
a danger of the hand protection becoming entangled in moving machin- 
ery or materials. 

EXCEPTION: Machinery or equipment provided with a momentary contact device 
as defined in Section 3941. 

NOTE: 1 . As used in subsection (b) the term entangled refers to 
hand protection (gloves) being caught and pulled into the danger zone of 
machinery/equipment. Use of hand protection around smooth surfaced 
rotating equipment does not constitute an entanglement hazard if it is un- 
likely that the hand protection will be drawn into the danger zone. 

NOTE: 2. Wrist watches, rings, or other jewelry should not be worn 
while working with or around machinery with moving parts in which 
such objects may be caught, or around electrically energized equipment. 
NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . Repealer and new section filed 9-6-79; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Regis- 
ter 79, No. 36). 

2. Amendment filed 1-14-88 operative 2-13-88 (Register 88, No.4) 

3. Amendment of subsection (b) filed 7-8-93; operative 8-9-93 (Register 93, No. 
28). 

4. Change without regulatory effect amending Exception and Note, including re- 
designation of section 3386 to Note 2, filed 1-12-94; operative 2-1 1-94 (Regis- 
ter 94, No. 2). 

§ 3385. Foot Protection. 

(a) Appropriate foot protection shall be required for employees who 
are exposed to foot injuries from electrical hazards, hot, corrosive, poi- 
sonous substances, falling objects, crushing or penetrating actions, 
which may cause injuries or who are required to work in abnormally wet 
locations. 



(b) Footwear which is defective or inappropriate to the extent that its 
ordinary use creates the possibility of foot injuries shall not be worn. 

(c)(i ) Protective footwear for employees purchased after January 26, 
2007 shall meet the requirements and specifications in American Society 
for Testing and Materials (ASTM) F 2412-05, Standard Test Methods 
for Foot Protection and ASTM F 2413-05, Standard Specification for 
Performance Requirements for Foot Protection which are hereby incor- 
porated by reference. 

(2) Protective footwear purchased on or before January 26, 2007 shall 
meet the requirements of either the American National Standard for 
Men's Safety-Toe Footwear, Z4 1.1-1999. or the American Society for 
Testing and Materials (ASTM) F24 12-05. Standard Test Methods for 
Foot Protection and ASTM F 2413-05. Standard Specification for Per- 
formance Requirements for Foot Protection which are hereby incorpo- 
rated by reference. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3. Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3. La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . Repealer and new section filed 7-1 1 -74: effecfive thirtieth day thereafter ( Reg- 
ister 74, No. 28). 

2. Amendment of newly designated subsection (c)( 1 ), new subsection (c)(2) and 
new Note filed 12-13-94; operative 1-12-93 (Register 94, No. 30). 

3. Amendment of subsection (a) filed 9-30-96; operative 10-30-96 (Register 96, 
No. 40). 

4. Amendment of subsecfions (c)(l )-(2) filed 12-27-2006; operative 1-26-2007 
(Register 2006, No. 52). For prior history, see Register 96, No. 40. 

§ 3386. Jewelry. 

Note: Authority and reference cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. 

History 

1. Amendment filed 4-27-79; effecfive thirtieth day thereafter (Reeister 79, No. 

17). 

2. Change without regulatory effect redesignafing secfion 3386 to NoTi-; 2 of sec- 
tion 3384 filed 1-12-94; operative 2-1 1-94 (Register 94, No. 2). 

§ 3387. Sanitation. 

Protectors shall be capable of being cleaned easily and disinfected. 
These protectors shall be kept clean and in good repair. Safety devices, 
including protective clothing worn by the employee, shall not be inter- 
changed among the employees until properly cleaned. Where the divi- 
sion has determined that ordinary cleaning will not remove risk of infec- 
tion, additional precautionary measures may be required. 
Exception: Safety devices worn over shoes or outer clothing, no part of which 
contacts the skin of the wearer, such as metal footguards. 

History 
1 . Repealer and new secrion filed 7-1 1-74; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Reg- 
ister 74, No. 28). 



[The next page is 589.] 



Page 588.1 



Register 2006, No. 52; 12-29-2006 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3395 



• 



§ 3388. Safety Belts and Life Lines. 

NOTE; Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. Repealer of section and new Note filed 5-20-99; operative 6-19-99 (Register 
99. No. 21). 

§ 3389. Life Rings and Personal Flotation Devices. 

(a) At least one U.S. Coast Guard approved 30-inch life ring with not 
less than 90 feet of 600 pound capacity line attached shall be kept in a 
conveniently accessible place where employees work exposes them to 
the hazard of drowning or each employee so exposed shall wear a U.S. 
Coast Guard approved personal flotation device. 

Exception: Flume Patrol. Flumes provided with caps as described in Section 
3207. 

(b) Any personal flotation device shall be approved by the United 
States Coast Guard as a Type I PFD, Type II PFD. Type III PFD, or their 
equivalent, pursuant to 46 CFR 1 60 (Coast Guard Lifesaving Equipment 
Specifications) and 33 CFR 175.23 (Coast Guard table of devices equiva- 
lent to personal flotation devices.) 

(c) Personal flotation devices shall be maintained in good condition. 
They shall be removed from service when damaged so as to affect their 
buoyant properties or capability of being fastened. 

NoTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . Amendment filed 1 1-28-75; effecfive thirtieth day thereafter (Register 75, No. 
48). 

2. Amendment of subsections (a) and (b) and new Note filed 6-7-96; operative 
7-7-96 (Register 96, No. 23). 

§ 3390. Protection from Electric Shock. 

Protection from electric shock shall be provided and used as required 
by the High- and Low-Voltage Electrical Safety Orders. 
NOTE; Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 1 42.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . New section filed 7-1 1-74; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 74, No. 
28). 

2. Repealer and new section filed 11-16-79; effective thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register 79, No. 46). 

§ 3395. Heat Illness Prevention in Outdoor Places of 
Employment. 

(a) Scope and Application. This section applies to the control of risk 
of occurrence of heat illness. This is not intended to exclude the applica- 
tion of other sections of Title 8, including, but not necessarily limited to, 
sections 1230(a), 1512, 1524,3203,3363,3400,3439,3457,6251,6512, 
6969, 6975, 8420 and 8602(e). This section applies to all outdoor places 
of employment. 

Note No. 1 : The measures required here may be integrated into the employer's 
Injury and Illness Program required by section 3203. 

Note No. 2: This standard is enforceable by the Division of Occupadonal Safety 
and Health pursuant to Labor Code sections 6308 and 63 1 7 and any other statutes 
conferring enforcement powers upon the Division. It is a violation of Labor Code 
sections 6310, 631 1, and 6312 to discharge or discriminate in any other manner 
against employees for exercising their rights under this or any other provision of- 
fering occupational safety and health protection to employees. 

(b) Definitions. 

"Acclimatization" means temporary adaptation of the body to work in 
the heat that occurs gradually when a person is exposed to it. Acclimati- 
zation peaks in most people within four to fourteen days of regular work 
for at least two hours per day in the heat. 

■'Heat Illness" means a serious medical condition resulting from the 
body's inability to cope with a particular heat load, and includes heat 
cramps, heat exhaustion, heat syncope and heat stroke. 

"Environmental risk factors for heat illness" means working condi- 
tion.s that create the possibihty that heat illness could occur, including air 
temperature, relative humidity, radiant heat from the sun and other 
sources, conductive heat sources such as the ground, air movement, 
workload severity and duration, protective clothing and personal protec- 
tive equipment worn by employees. 



"Personal risk factors for heat illness" means factors such as an indi- 
vidual's age, degree of acclimatization, health, water consumption, alco- 
hol consumption, caffeine consumption, and use of prescription medica- 
tions that affect the body's water retention or other physiological 
responses to heat. 

"Preventative recovery period" ineans a period of time to recover from 
the heat in order to prevent heat illness. 

"Shade" means blockage of direct sunlight. Canopies, umbrellas and 
other temporary structures or devices may be used to provide shade. One 
indicator that blockage is sufficient is when objects do not cast a shadow 
in the area of blocked sunlight. Shade is not adequate when heat in the 
area of shade defeats the purpose of shade, which is to allow the body to 
cool. For example, a car sitting in the sun does not provide acceptable 
shade to a person inside it, unless the car is running with air conditioning. 

(c) Provision of water. Employees shall have access to potable drink- 
ing water meeting the requireinents of Sections 1 524, 3363, and 3457. as 
applicable. Where it is not plumbed or otherwise continuously supplied, 
it shall be provided in sufficient quantity at the beginning of the work 
shift to provide one quart per employee per hour for drinking for the en- 
tire shift. Employers may begin the shift with smaller quantities of water 
if they have effective procedures for replenishment during the shift as 
needed to allow employees to drink one quart or more per hour. The fre- 
quent drinking of water, as described in (e), shall be encouraged. 

(d) Access to shade. Employees suffering from heat illness or believ- 
ing a preventative recovery period is needed, shall be provided access to 
an area with shade that is either open to the air or provided with ventila- 
tion or cooling for a period of no less than five minutes. Such access to 
shade shall be permitted at all times. Except for employers in the agricul- 
tural industry, cooUng measures other than shade (e.g., use of misting 
machines) may be provided in lieu of shade if the employer can demon- 
strate that these measures are at least as effective as shade in allowing em- 
ployees to cool. 

(e) Training. 

( 1 ) Employee training. Training in the following topics shall be pro- 
vided to all supervisory and non-supervisory employees. 

(A) The environmental and personal risk factors for heat illness: 

(B) The employer's procedures for complying with the requirements 
of this standard; 

(C) The importance of frequent consumption of small quantities of wa- 
ter, up to 4 cups per hour, when the work environment is hot and em- 
ployees are likely to be sweating more than usual in the performance of 
their duties; 

(D) The importance of acclimatization; 

(E) The different types of heat illness and the common signs and symp- 
toms of heat illness; 

(F) The importance to employees of immediately reporting to the em- 
ployer, directly or through the employee' s supervisor, symptoms or signs 
of heat illness in themselves, or in co-workers; 

(G) The employer's procedures for responding to symptoms of pos- 
sible heat illness, including how emergency medical services will be pro- 
vided should they become necessary; 

(H) The employer's procedures for contacting emergency medical ser- 
vices, and if necessary, for transporting employees to a point where they 
can be reached by an emergency medical service provider; 

(1) The employer's procedures for ensuring that, in the event of an 
emergency, clear and precise directions to the work site can and will be 
provided as needed to emergency responders. 

(2) Supervisor training. Prior to assignment to supervision of em- 
ployees working in the heat, training on the following topics shall be pro- 
vided: 

(A) The information required to be provided by section (e)( 1 ) above. 

(B) The procedures the supervisor is to follow to implement the appli- 
cable provisions in this section. 

(C) The procedures the supervisor is to follow when an employee ex- 
hibits symptoms consistent with possible heat illness, including emer- 
gency response procedures. 



Page 589 



Register 2006, No. 30; 7-28-2006 



§3400 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



(3) The employer's procedures required by subsections (e)(1)(B), (G), 

(H), and (I) shall be in writing and shall be made available to employees 

and to representatives of the Division upon request. 

Note: Authority cited: Section 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . New section filed 8-22-2005 as an emergency; operative 8-22-2005 (Register 
2005. No. 34). A Certificate of Compliance must be transinitted to OAL by 
12-20-2005 or emergency language will be repealed by operation of law on the 
following day. 

2. New section refiled 1 2-20-2005 as an emergency: operative 1 2-20-2005 ( Reg- 
ister 2005, No. 51). A Certificate of Compliance must be transmitted to OAL 
by 4-19-2006 or emergency language will be repealed by operation of law on 
the following day. 

3. New section refiled 4-19-2006 as an emergency; operative 4-19-2006 (Regis- 
ter 2006, No. 16). A Certificate of Compliance must be transmitted to OAL by 
8-1 7-2006 or emergency language will be repealed by operation of law on the 
following day. 

4. Certificate of Compliance as to 4-19-2006 order, including amendment of sec- 
tion headine and section, transmitted to OAL 6-16-2006 and filed 7-27-2006 
(Register2606, No. 30). 

§ 3400. Medical Services and First Aid. 

(a) Employer shall ensure the ready availability of medical personnel 
for advice and consultation on matters of industrial health or injury. 

(b) In the absence of an infirmary, clinic, or hospital, in near proximity 
to the workplace, which is used for the treatment of all injured em- 
ployees, a person or persons shall be adequately trained to render first aid. 
Training shall be equal to that of the American Red Cross or the Mining 
Enforcement and Safety Administration. 

(c) There shall be adequate first-aid materials, approved by the con- 
sulting physician, readily available for workmen on every job. Such ma- 
terials shall be kept in a sanitary and usable condition. A frequent inspec- 
tion shall be made of all first-aid materials, which shall be replenished 
as necessary. 

(d) Where the eyes or body of any person may be exposed to injurious 
corrosive materials, suitable facilities for quick drenching or flushing of 
the eyes and body shall be provided within the work area for immediate 
emergency use. 

(e) Stretchers and blankets, or other adequate warm covering, may be 
required by the Division, unless ambulance service is available within 30 
minutes under normal conditions. 

(f) At isolated locations, provisions must be made in advance for 
prompt medical attention in case of serious injuries. This may be accom- 
plished by on-the-site facilities or proper equipment for prompt trans- 
portation of the injured person to a physician or a telephone communica- 
tion system for contacting a doctor or combinations of these that will 
avoid unnecessary delay in treatment. 

History 

1. New section filed 1 1-1-73; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 73, No. 

2. Renumbering from Section 3390 filed 7-1 1-74; effective thirtieth day thereaf- 
ter (Register 74, No. 28). 

3. Editorial correction (Register 76, No. 16). 

4. Amendment of subsection (b) filed 10-8-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register76, No. 41). 

Article 10.1. Personal Protective Clothing 
and Equipment for Fire Fighters 

§3401. Application. 

(a) These Orders establish minimum requirements for personal protec- 
tive clothing and equipment for fire fighters when exposed to the hazards 
of fire fighting activity, and take precedence over any other Safety Order 
with which they are inconsistent. 

Sections 3403 through 3409, inclusive, apply to structural fire fighting 
as defined in Secfion 3402. 

(b) General Requirements. 

( 1 ) Personal protective clothing and equipment specified in these Or- 
ders shall be provided and used whenever such employees are required 



to work in a hazardous environment that may be encountered during fire 
fighfing activities or under similar conditions during training acUvities. 

(2) Tlie employer shall ensure the availability, maintenance, and use 
of all protective clothing and equipment in accordance with these Orders. 

(3) Employees shall be instructed to wear or ufilize appropriate per- 
sonal protective clothing and equipment when directed to work in a haz- 
ardous environment until such time as the officer in charge determines 
that such protection is no longer required. 

(4) Personal protective clothing and equipment that has become dam- 
aged or otherwise defective to the point of voiding its intended protection 
shall be removed from service. 

(5) Fire fighters and other employees engaged in emergency activities 
requiring special protective techniques and equipment shall be trained in 
the appropriate techniques and provided with the necessary protective 
equipment. 

(6) Employers shall develop and require use of a written plan covering 
the safe use, maintenance, utilization and replacement of the equipment 
required in these Orders, and all affected employees shall be trained in 
accordance with such plan. 

(7) Employers shall ensure that new protective clotliing and equip- 
ment provided be furnished with a statement of performance declaring 
that the product has been tested and meets the requirements of these Or- 
ders. 

(c) Personal Alarms. 

( 1 ) Every fire fighter engaged in interior structural fire fighting activi- 
ties requiring the use of self-contained breathing apparatus shall be pro- 
vided with a personal alarm device. Alarm devices ordered or purchased 
after January 1, 1986, shall meet the requirements of Section 
340 1 (c)(3)(B) and NFPA 1 982 ( 1 983). Each alarm device ordered or pur- 
chased prior to January 1, 1986 shall meet the following minimum re- 
quirements: 

(2) Operation. 

(A) Controls shall be incorporated in alarm devices for manual activa- 
fion and reset, and shall be protected against accidental deactivation. 
Such controls shall be designed to be operated by a gloved hand. 

(B) Alarm devices shall contain a motion detector which will activate 
the alarm if the fire fighter is motionless for not less than twenty (20) sec- 
onds nor more than forty (40) seconds. The alarm shall also include a pre- 
waming device to signal the fire fighter that the alarm is approaching the 
point of activation. 

(3) Performance. 

(A) Alarm devices shall emit a signal with a sound pressure level of 
not less than 85 dba measured at a distance of three (3) meters for not less 
than one (1) hour using an eighty percent (80%) charged battery. Signal 
frequency used shall not be less than 2000 Hz nor more than 4000 Hz. 

(B) The alarm shall operate in a temperature range of -10° C to 80° C 
and for a period of two minutes at 140° C. 

(C) Alarm devices shall be designed to withstand damage created by 
deterioration of the type of battery recommended by the manufacturer for 
use in such devices. 

(D) Alarm devices shall remain operable after being submerged in sea 
water for at least one hour at a depth of two meters. 

(E) Alarm devices shall be impact and shock resistant, and shall be de- 
signed to remain operable after being dropped six (6) successive times 
from random positions onto a concrete floor from a height of not less than 
two meters. 

(F) Alarm devices shall not weigh more than 350 grams, including bat- 
teries. 

(4) Safety. 

(A) Alarm devices shall be equipped with a visual or audible device 
to indicate when the battery has been discharged to not less than 80 per- 
cent of its rated capacity. 

(B) Alarm devices shall be equipped with an audible means to warn 
of the malfunction of the motion sensing circuitry. 

(C) Alarm devices shall be intrinsically safe for use in a flammable or 
explosive atmosphere. 



Page 590 



Register 2006, No. 30; 7-28-2006 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3402 



(5) Certification. 

Alarm devices shall be labeled or otherwise certified to indicate com- 
pliance with this section. 

NOTH; Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. New Article 10.1 (Sections 3401-3409) filed 5-3-78: effective thirtieth day 
thereafter (Register 78, No. 18). 

2. Amendment of subsection (a) filed 9-11-80: effective thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register80. No. 37). 

3. New subsection (c) filed 1-27-82: effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 82, 
No. 5). 

4. Editorial coiTection of subsection (c)(3)(A) (Register 82, No. 50). 

5. Amendment of subsection (c)(1) filed 2-9-83 as an emergency: effective upon 
filing (Register 83, No. 8). A Certificate of Compliance must be transmitted to 
OAL within 120 days or emergency language will be repealed on (j-9-83. 

6. Amendment of subsection (c)(3 KD) filed 4-12-83; effective thirtieth day there- 
after (Register 83, No. 16). 

7. Certificate of Compliance transmitted to OAL 5-13-83 and filed 6-13-83 
(Register83, No. 25). 

8. Amendment filed 4-29-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
18). 

§ 3402. Definitions. 

After-Flame. The time a test specimen continues to flame after the 
flame source has been removed. (When subjected to flame resistance 
test.) 

After-Glow. The time a test specimen continues to glow after it has 
ceased to flame. (When subjected to flame resistance test.) 

Break-away Device. A type of chin strap or chin strap connection de- 
signed so that excessive pressure exerted on the helmet in the form of up- 
ward force will cause the chin strap to open and release the helmet from 
the head. 

Buddy-Breathing Device. An accessory to self-contained breathing 
apparatus which permits a second person to share the same air supply as 
that of the wearer of the apparatus. 

Char-Length. The distance from the end of the specimen which was 
exposed to flame source, to the upper edge of the charred, burned, or void 
area. (When subjected to flame resistance test.) 

Education. The process of imparting knowledge or skill through sys- 
tematic instruction. It does not require formal classroom instruction. 

Emergency Pick-Up Labor. Personnel consisting of National Guard, 
military forces, forest product workers, farm workers, ranchers, and oth- 
er persons who may be recruited from time to time to help contain and 
control wildland fires. 

Enclosed Structure. A structure with a roof or ceiling and at least two 
walls which may present fire hazards to employees:such as, accumula- 
tions of smoke, toxic gases and heat, similar to those found in buildings. 

Energy, Absorption System. A material or suspension system, or com- 
bination thereof, placed inside the helmet between the exterior shell and 
the wearer's head to absorb and distribute impact energy. 

Face Shield. A heat and flame resistant device worn in front of the eyes 
and face, whose predominant function is protection of the eyes and face. 

Fire Fighter. An employee who is assigned to fire fighting activity, and 
is required to respond to alarms and perform emergency action at the lo- 
cation of a fire or fire related danger. Included are the employees of fire 
departments, fire protection districts, state fire agencies, organized fire 
companies, and private fire brigades when engaged in fire fighting activ- 
ity. The term does not apply to emergency pick-up labor or other persons 
who may perform first-aid fire extinguishment as collateral to their regu- 
lar duties. Fire FighUng Acfivity. Physical action taken in the direct act 



of fire suppression, and rescue or hazardous duties performed at the loca- 
tion of a fire emergency. 

Fire Fighting, Sti\ictural. The comprehensive physical fire suppres- 
sion activity of public fire departments as determined by Sections 
25210.5 and 25643 of the California Government Code. 

Flame Resistance. A property of materials which causes resistance to 
ignition or combustion, provided through the use of inherently flame re- 
sistant materials, or materials treated to be flaine resistant in a manner 
that the treatment will remain effective for the service life of the material 
under conditions anticipated for its use. 

HariTiful Exposure. An exposure to oxygen-deficient atmosphere, or 
to dusts, fumes, mists, vapors, chemicals or gases of such concentration 
and duration as to cause injury. 

Hazardous Environment. A place where a fire fighter is likely to re- 
ceive a harmful exposure to a hazardous substance, or be exposed to 
physical or mechanical hazards which are likely to cause injury . 

Hazardous Substance. One which by reason of being explosi\e, flam- 
mable, poisonous, corrosive, oxidizing, irritant or otherwise harmful, is 
likely to cause injury. 

Heat Resistance. The ability of a material to retain its original proper- 
ties such as shape, size, strength, hardness, resilience, non-conducfivity, 
or appearance when subjected to temperatures specified in heat resis- 
tance tests. 

Helmet. A device consisfing of a shell, energy absorption system, and 
retenuon system intended to be worn to provide protecdon for the head 
or portions thereof against impact, flying or falling objects, electric 
shock, penetrafion, heat and flame, or any combinafion thereof. 

Incipient Stage Fire. A fire which is in the initial or beginning stage and 
which can be controlled or extinguished by portable fire extinguishers. 
Class II standpipe, small hose systems or other methods without the need 
for protecfive clothing or breathing apparatus. 

Injury. Includes work related illness, disease, impairment, disfigure- 
ment, loss of function of any part of the body, as well as symptoms of sig- 
nificant adverse effects or damage. 

Interior Structural Fire Fighting Activities (Private Fire Brigades). 
The physical activity of fire suppression, rescue or both, inside of build- 
ings or enclosed structures which are involved in a fire situation beyond 
the incipient stage. 

Lining. A material attached to the inside of the outer shell of a garment 
for the purpose of thermal protection and padding. 

Long Duration Breathing Device. A self-contained respiratory pro- 
tective device designed to provide the user with a respirable atmosphere 
for a minimum service time of one hour. 

Outer Shell. The exterior layer of material on the fire coat and protec- 
tive trousers which forms the outermost barrier between the fire fighter 
and the environment. It is attached to the vapor barrier and liner and is 
usually constructed with a storm flap, suitable closures, and pockets. 

Private Fire Brigade. An organized group of private industry fire per- 
sonnel who may also be assigned to other functions, but who have prior- 
ity obligation to fire protection. Fire fighting responsibility may be inde- 
pendent, under mutual-aid agreement, or supported by regular fire 
service assistance. 

Protective Clothing. Outer garments other than turnout clothing con- 
sisting of trousers, jackets, or coveralls. 

Quick Disconnect Valve. A device which starts the flow of air by in- 
serting of the hose (which leads from the facepiece) into the regulator of 



[The next page is 591. 



Page 590.1 



Register 2006, No. 30; 7-28-2006 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3404 



self-contained breathing apparatus, and stops the flow of air by discon- 
nection of the hose from the regulator. 

Respiratory Protective Device (RPD). A breathing device designed to 
protect the wearer from oxygen-deficient, or hazardous atmosphere. 

(A) Self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA). A portable respirato- 
ry protective device, normally designed to be worn by the user by means 
of an incorporated harness assembly, with its own supply of air, oxygen 
or oxygen generating material. It is normally equipped with a full face- 
piece. Self-contained breathing apparatus is further described in 30 CFR 
Chapter I, Part 11, Subpart H. 

(B) Closed-Circuit Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus. A device in 
which exhaled breath is sciaibbed of CO2 and recycled. 

(C) Open-Circuit Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus. A device in 
which compressed air is released to the face piece from a storage cylin- 
der, and exhaled air is expelled to the atmosphere. (Oxygen supply is not 
permitted in open-circuit breathing apparatus used in fire fighting activi- 
ties.) 

(D) Demand-Type Breathing Apparatus. Equipment in which pres- 
sure inside the facepiece is slightly negative on inhalation, and positive 
on exhalation. 

(E) Positive-Pressure Type Breathing Apparatus. Equipment in which 
the pressure inside the facepiece is positive during both inhalation and 
exhalation. 

(F) Combination Breathing Apparatus-Respirator. A combination of 
compressed air self-contained breathing apparatus and National Institute 
of Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) Type C supplied-air respi- 
ratory protective device of the positive-pressure type. Combination res- 
pirator equipment is further described in 30 CFR, Chapter 1 , Part 1 1 , Sub- 
parts H and J. 

Retention System. The complete assembly by which the helmet is re- 
tained on the head. Included are a chin strap and adjustable or fitted liner 
for a proper fit. 

Self-Extinguishing. A term applied to a material which when sub- 
jected to flaming ignition, may ignite and propagate only until removal 
of the source of ignition. 

Service Time. The period of time that a respirator has been rated by 
NIOSH to provide protection to the wearer. 

Training. The process of making proficient through instruction and 
hands-on practice in the operation of equipment, including respiratory 
protection equipment, that is expected to be used and in the performance 
of assigned duties. 

Trousers. A garment worn to cover the lower part of the human body 
from the waist to the ankles. 

Turnout Clothing. Protective clothing consisting of a coat and trousers 
as specified in NFPA 1971 (1981) "Protective Clothing for Structural 
Fire Fighting" except as modified by Section 3406(b) of these Orders. 

Vapor Barrier. That material used to prevent or substantially inhibit 
the transfer of water, corrosive liquids and steam or other hot vapors from 
the outside of a garment to the wearer's body. 

Wildlands. Sparsely populated geographical areas covered primarily 
by grass, brush, trees, crops, or combination thereof. 

Winter Liner. A detachable extra lining worn inside turnout garments 
and head protection to give added protection to the wearer against the ef- 
fects of cold weather and wind. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . Amendment filed 9-1 1-80; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 80, No. 
37). 

2. Amendment filed 4-8-81; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 81, No. 
37). 

3. Amendment filed 4-29-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
18). 

§ 3403. Head Protection. 

(a) General. Head protection shall be provided for each fire fighter, 
and shall be maintained in a location of readiness for immediate response 



to fires and like emergencies. Head protection shall be worn by fire fight- 
ers whenever they are exposed to head injury hazard. Head protection is 
normally provided for fire fighters through the use of helmets, 
(b) Minimum Requirements, Staictural Fire Fighting. 

( 1 ) Helmets ordered or purchased after January 1 , 1 988, for use in 
structural fire fighting shall be labeled as meeting the requirements con- 
tained in NFPA- 1972 (1985) "Structural Fire Fighters' Helmets." While 
the helmets are in service: 

(A) Section 3-8 "Ear Covers" shall be optional when protection re- 
quired by Section 3405 is provided. 

(B) Secfion 3-9 "Faceshields'" shall be optional when protection re- 
quired by Section 3404 is provided. 

(C) Secfion 3-10 "Ruorescent Retro re fl ecu ve Markings" shall be op- 
fional. 

(2) Helmets ordered, purchased and/or placed in service prior to Janu- 
ary 1 , 1 988, for use in structural fire fighting shall meet the performance, 
construction, and testing requirements of the National Fire Safety and 
Research Office, National Fire Prevention and Control Administration, 
U. S. Department of Commerce contained in "Model Performance Crite- 
ria for Structural Fire Fighters' Helmets, dated August, 1977," with the 
following additional requirements: 

(A) The helmet shall be compatible with the breathing apparatus face 
piece. 

(B) Visibility and reflectivity shall be optional. 

(C) Earflaps shall be optional when protection required by Section 
3405 is provided. 

(D) A durable label shall be permanentiy attached and shall include the 
following information: 

1 . Name or designation of manufacturer; 

2. Month and year of manufacture; 

3. Lot Number; and 

4. Model designation. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. Amendment of subsection (b) filed 9-1 1-80; effective thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register 80, No. 37). 

2. Amendment filed 4-29-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
18). 

3. Amendment filed 11-5-87; operative 12-5-87 (Register 87, No. 46). 

§ 3404. Eye and Face Protection. 

(a) General. 

(1) Employees exposed to eye injury hazards shall be protected in ac- 
cordance with the provisions of Section 3382. 

(2) In addition to the requirements of Section 3382, and wherever eye 
and face protection is not provided by the breathing apparatus facepiece, 
the face of the fire fighter engaged in structural fire fighting activities 
shall be protected by one or more of the following means, or other equiva- 
lent methods when exposed to injurious heat or flame: 

(A) Face shield attached to the helmet; 

(B) Heat and flame resistant hood; 

(C) High collar and throat strap. 

(b) Face Shields. Face shields of plastic or glass shall meet the optical 
qualities, impact resistance and light transmission standards specified in 
either the ANSI Z87.I (1979) or ANSI Z87.1 (1989, and revision 
Z87. 1 a-1 989), "Practice for Occupational and Educational Eye and Face 
Protection", which are hereby incorporated by reference. Face shields 
constructed of other materials such as wire mesh, shall provide visibility 
not less than required by ANSI Z87.1. All face shields shall be capable 
of withstanding heat in accordance with the provisions of Section 
3403(b). 

(c) Hood and Coat Collars. Such devices shall be constructed and 
tested in accordance with the provisions of Section 3406, Body Protec- 
tion. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3. La- 
bor Code. 



Page 591 



Register 2000, No. 10; 3-10-2000 



§3405 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



History 

1. Amendment of subsection (b) filed 6-13-78; effective thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register 78. No. 18). 

2. Amendment of subsection (a)(2) filed 9-1 1-80; effective thirtieth dav thereafter 
(Register 80, No. 37). 

3. Amendment filed 4-29-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
18). 

4. Amendment of subsection (b) filed 3-6-2000; operative 4-5-2000 (Register 
2000, No. 10). 

§ 3405. Ear and Neck Protection. 

(a) Protection against burns or injury to the ears and neck shall be pro- 
vided by one or more of the following means, or other equivalent meth- 
ods: 

(1) Helmet configuration; 

(2) Ear flap attachment to helmet; 

(3) Flexible neck protector cape or winter liner worn with helmet; 

(4) Flared neck shield attached to brim of helmet; 

(5) Hood, shroud or snood; 

(6) High collar and throat strap. 

(b) Fabric specified in this section shall be constructed and tested in 
accordance with the provisions of Section 3406, Body Protection. 

(c) Non-fabric materials shall meet heat and flame resistance require- 
ments of Section 3403, Head Protection. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 
1. New NOTE filed 4-29-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
18). 

§ 3406. Body Protection. 

(a) Body protection shall be provided for each fire fighter when ex- 
posed to the hazards of structural fire fighting activity. Body protection 
shall consist of turnout clothing or an appropriate combination of a turn- 
out coat and protective clothing meeting the requirements of Section 
34()6(c). 

(b) Turnout Clothing. Performance, constaiction, testing and certifi- 
cation of fire fighter turnout clothing shall be at least equivalent to the re- 
quirements of National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) publication 
1971 ( 1 98 1 ), "Protective Clothing for Stmctural Fire Fighting," with the 
following permissible variations in those requirements: 

( 1 ) Liner may be detachable but the shell shall not be used as turnout 
clothing without the liner. 

(2) To achieve increased ventilation of trapped body heat, the protec- 
tive clothing outer shell and impermeable vapor barrier may be pene- 
trated by ventilation openings protected by nonmetallic flame resistant 
materials equal to this standard. Openings in the coat shall be restricted 
to the underside of the upper arm, and the upper portion of the front and 
back. Openings in the trousers shall be restricted to the areas of the groin 
and the outseam of the leg between the knee and the waist band. Water 
deflecting flaps shall be required for all openings except underarm and 
groin area openings. Openings in the liner are not permitted except un- 
derarm and groin area unless protected by an insulating flap. Vents shall 
be made of nonmetallic flame resistant materials equal to this standard. 

(3) Tearing strength of the outer shell shall be a minimum of eight 
pounds in any direction. 

(4) Flame resistance, including that of trim, shall not exceed: 

(A) 2.0 seconds after-flame (maximum) 

(B) 8.0 seconds after-glow (maximum). 

(5) The outer shell and lining may char or discolor but must retain heat 
resistance as specified in Section 3406(b)(4) and shall not separate or 
melt when placed in a forced air laboratory oven at a temperature of 500 
F (260° C) for a period of 5 minutes. 

(c) Protective Clothing. Protective clothing, other than turnout cloth- 
ing, shall meet the following minimum performance requirements: 

(1) Flame Resistance. When tested in accordance with Federal Test 
191, Method 5903.2, "Flame Resistance of Cloth, Vertical" (Standard 
small scale test), test results shall not exceed the following limits: 

(A) 2.0 seconds after-flame (maximum) 



(B) 8.0 seconds after-glow (maximum) 

(C) 6.0 inches average char-length. 

(2) Ignition of the material shall not produce any melting and dripping 
of molten or flaming material. It is specifically required that upon expo- 
sure to flaming ignition, or to heat sufficient to char the fabric, the materi- 
al will not adhere to the skin of the wearer so as to cause or contribute to 
the severity of burns. 

EXCEFTION: Outer gainients of 1007^ wool, with a weight of at least 14 ounces 
per lineal yard of 54-inch width shall be considered as sufficiently flame resistant 
for such use. 

(3) Certification. Garments shall be certified to meet the requirements 
of Section 3406(c)(1), flame resistance; and as defined in Section 3402. 

(4) A durable label shall be permanently attached and shall include the 
following information: 

(A) Lot Number; 

(B) Name and number of specified test; and 

(C) Date of specified test. 

(d) Turnout coats in combination with turnout trousers, or turnout 
coats and protective clothing meeting the requirements of Section 
3406(c) shall be worn on all structural fires. Body protection provided for 
other than structural fires shall be appropriate for the potential hazards. 
NOTE: Authority cited: Secfion 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . Amendment of Subsections (b)(4)(B) and (c)(1)(B) filed 9-6-79; effective thir- 
tieth day thereafter (Register 79. No. 36). 

2. Amendment of subsections (a), (b)(5) and (c)(2) filed 9-1 1-80; effecdve thir- 
fieth day thereafter (Register 80, No. 37). 

3. Amendment filed 4-29-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
18). 

4. Amendment of subsection (b)(4)(B) and repealer of subsection (b)(4)(C) filed 
8-28-96; operative 9-27-96 (Register 96, No. 35). 

§ 3407. Hand and Wrist Protection. 

(a) Protective gloves shall be provided for each fire fighter when ex- 
posed to the hazards of structural fire fighting activity. Such protective 
gloves shall be properly sized and suitable to the hazards encountered in 
fires and fire related emergencies. 

(b) Protective gloves for fire fighters shall be made of durable outer 
material designed to withstand the effects of flame, heat, vapor, liquids, 
sharp objects and other hazards that are encountered in fire fighting. 

(c) Thermal in.sulation for protective gloves shall be sufficient to limit 
the inside surface temperature of the glove material (in contact with the 
hand) to no more than 1 1 1° F (44° C) when subjected to the tests specified 
in subparagraphs 1, 2 and 3: 

(1) Gloves shall be preconditioned in accordance with Federal Test 
191, Method 5903.2. 

(2) The palm of the glove shall be exposed to a conductive heat load 
of 932° F (500° C) for a period of 5 seconds at 4 psi pressure using an 
object made of iron with 3. 14 in- surface area and sufficient mass to in- 
duce the pressure without assistance. 

(3) The back of the glove shall be exposed to a stable 1 .0 watt/cm- ra- 
diant heat load for a period of 1 minute. 

(d) Protective glove material and pattern shall allow the dexterity of 
hand and finger movement, a sense of feel for objects, when handling fire 
fighting equipment, and a satisfactory grip when handling halyards. 
Gloves shall have separate finger compartments and shall have an inte- 
gral wristiet not less than 4 inches in length unless other wrist protection 
is provided as permitted in Section 3407(e). 

(1 ) Dexterity. Dexterity shall be evaluated using a standardized proce- 
dure known as the Bennett Dexterity Test. No more than 130% of base- 
line time shall be accomplished. 

(2) Grip Test. Grip testing shall be evaluated with the use of a 3/8-inch 
diameter Manila halyard attached to a spring scale. Bare-handed lift ca- 
pability shall be baseline weight. Weight pulling capacity dry shall be no 
less than 80% of baseline. Weight pulling capacity wet shall be no less 
than 70% of baseline. Gloves and halyards shall be preconditioned dry 
and wet prior to test. 

(3) Preconditioning: 



Page 592 



Register 2000, No. 10; 3-10-2000 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§ 3410 



Dry — Gloves and halyards shall be preconditioned at 25° C. for a peri- 
od of 4 hours. 

Wet — Gloves and halyards shall be thoroughly soaked by immersing 
in water for a minimum of 30 minutes prior to testing. 

(4) Test Requirements. Gloves shall be tested dry. then water soaked 
as required and tested (without re-drying) within one minute after re- 
moval from the soak. 

(e) Protection against bums or injury to the wrist shall be provided by 
one or more of the following means or other equivalent methods: 

(1 ) A minimum 4-inch wristlet attached to the gloves. 

(2) An extended wristlet of sufficient length, attached to the sleeve of 
the turnout coat, to completely cover the wrist area under all conditions. 

(f) Fabric specified in this section shall be constmcted and tested in ac- 
cordance with the provisions of Section 3406, Body Protection. 

(g) A durable label shall be permanently attached to each glove. Label- 
ing may be accomplished by stamping, embossing, affixing, or other suit- 
able method and shall include the following information: 

( 1 ) Lot Number; 

(2) Reference to specified test; and 

(3) Date of successful test. 

NOTI:: Authority and reference cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. 

History 

1. Amendment of subsection (e) filed 4-27-79; effective thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register 79, No. 17). 

2. Amendment filed 9-1 1-80; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 80, No. 
37). 

3. Amendment of subsection (c)( 1 ) filed 7-30-8 1 ; effective thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register 81, No. 31). 

4. Amendment of subsections (c)(2) and (g) filed 4-29-85; effecdve thirtieth day 
thereafter (Register 85, No. 18). 

§ 3408. Foot Protection. 

(a) Foot protection shall be provided in accordance with Section 3385 
for fire fighters while engaged in structural fire fighting activity. 

(b) The use of foot protection shall be coordinated with the wearing of 
the protective clothing system to ensure full body protection. 

(c) Turnout Boots. Fire fighter turnout boots shall meet the require- 
ments of MIL-B-2885D (5-23-73) and amendment dated 12-31-75. 

(d) In addition to the requirements of Section 3408(a), protective foot- 
wear other than turnout boots shall also provide: 

( 1 ) Slip resistant outersoles. 

(2) Sole penetration as required in MIL-B2885D (1973) and amend- 
ment dated 1975 "Military Specifications for Firemen's Boots." 

(3) Permanently attached, corrosion resistant midsoles. 

(4) Firm ankle support in horizontal and vertical working loads. 

(5) If used, corrosion resistant, lockable fasteners. 

(6) Toe protection meeting the requirements of either the ANSI Z41 
(1983) or (1991), classification 75, which are hereby incorporated by ref- 
erence. 

(7) Corrosion resistant ladder shanks. 

(8) Durable outer shell materials withstanding the effects of flame, 
heat, sharp objects and other hazards encountered in fire fighting activi- 
ties. 

(e) Toe protection shall be optional for those fire fighters who are regu- 
larly engaged in structural and wildlands fire fighting activities. 
NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . Amendment filed 4-29-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
18). 

2. Amendment of subsection (d)(6) filed 3-6-2000; operadve 4-5-2000 (Register 
2000, No. 10). 

§ 3409. Respiratory Protection. 

(a) Approved Equipment. 

( 1 ) Approvals. Fire fighters exposed to harmful exposure in the course 
of their assigned activities shall be provided with, and shall use respirato- 
ry protective devices that are approved and certified in accordance with 
Section 5 144. and the methods and requirements specified by the Nation- 
al Institute of Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) under 42 CFR 
part 84. 

(2) Permissible Devices. 



(A) Respiratory protective devices provided for and used by fire fight- 
ers in stmctural fire fighdng activity shall be limited to those types classi- 
fied as self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA). and combination 
breathing apparatus of the supplied-air positive-pressure type. 

(B) Closed-circuit self-contained breathing apparatus shall not be 
used by fire fighters except where it has been demonstrated that long du- 
ration breathing apparatus is necessary. If such breathing dc\ices are 
used, quantitative fit tests providing a minimum protection factor of 
5,000 shall be performed on each individual using the long duration 
breathing apparatus. The quantitative fit test procedures shall be a\ ail- 
able for inspection by the Division. 

(b) General Requirements. 

( 1 ) Written Standard Procedures. The employer shall develop and im- 
plement comprehensive written standard operating procedures for the 
use, care, maintenance, and training relating to respiratory proiectixe 
equipment in accordance with Section 5144 and ANSI Z88.2 (19S()), 
"Practices for Respiratory Protection." and ANSI Z88.5 (1981 ). "Prac- 
tices for Respiratory Protection for the Fire Service." 

The operating procedures required by this subsection are exempt from 
the prohibiuon of the use of contact lenses specified in ANSI 
Z88.2(1980) and ANSI Z88.5(1981). 

(2) When emergency condifions require the urgent multi-person use 
of the same facepiece, requirements of Section 5144(h) pertaining to 
cleaning and sanitafion of the facepiece shall not apply. 

(3) Operafing Service Time. Respiratory protective devices provided 
for use by fire fighters shall have a rated service time of at least 30 min- 
utes in accordance with the methods and requirements specified by 
NIOSH 42 CFR part 84. 

Exception: Respiratory protective devices of less than 30 minutes rated .service 
fime shall only be used for escape, rescue and observation. 

(4) Automatic Warning Signal. Respiratory protective devices pro- 
vided for use by fire fighters shall be equipped with an automatic device 
that produces an audible signal to warn the user that the remaining service 
time of the unit has been reduced to 20^-25%. Means shall be designed 
and incorporated to indicate to the user that his alarm has been activated. 

(5) Buddy-Breathing. Approved self-contained breathing apparatus 
may be equipped with either a "buddy-breathing" device or a quick dis- 
connect valve, even if these devices are not certified by NIOSH. If these 
accessories are used, they shall not cause damage to the apparatus, or ob- 
struct the normal operation of the apparatus. 

(6) Air Cylinders. Approved self-contained compressed air breathing 
apparatus may be used with approved cylinders from other approved 
self-contained compressed air breathing apparatus provided that such 
cylinders are of the same capacity and pressure rating. All compressed 
air cylinders used with self-contained breathing apparatus shall meet 
United States Department of Transportation (DOT) and NIOSH criteria. 

(c) Posidve Pressure. Except as permitted in Section 3409(a)(2)(B), all 
compressed air self-contained breathing apparatus used in fire fighting 
activity shall be of positive pressure type. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . Amendment of subsecdon (c)(2) filed 9-1 1-80; effective thirtieth dav thereafter 
(Register 80, No. 37). 

2. Amendment filed 4-29-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85. No. 
18). 

3. Amendment of subsection (b)(1) filed 3-20-95: operative 4-19 -95 (Register 
95, No. 12). 

4. Amendment of subsecdons (a)(1) and (b)(3) filed 8-25-98; operative 1 1-23-98 
(Register 98, No. 35). 

5. Change without regulatory effect amending subsection (b)(2) filed 12-30-99 
pursuant to secdon 100, dde 1 , CaUfornia Code of Regulations (Register 99. No. 
53). 

§ 3410. Wildland Fire Fighting Requirements. 

(a) Head Protection. 

(1) Head protection shall be worn by fire fighters whenever they are 
exposed to head injury hazard. Head protection shall be provided for each 
fire fighter, and shall be maintained in a locadon of ready availability to 
the fire fighter. 



Page 593 



Register 2000, No. 10; 3-10-2000 



§3411 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



(2) Emergency Pick-up Labor. Head protection shall be provided for 
emergency pick-up labor in a hazardous environment on wildland fires 
and shall consist of structural fire fighting helmets or industrial hard hats 
or military helmet liners. Helmets and liners shall meet ANSI Z89.1 
(1969) standards, and may be either Type 1 or 2, any Class. 

(3) Minimum Helmet Requirements. Configuration. The helmet shall 
conform to ANSI Z89.1 (1969) full brim (Type 1 ) Class D. or brimless 
with peak (Type 2) Class A, or structural fire helmets as specified in Sec- 
tion 3403. Provision shall be incorporated for attachment of accessories 
without shell penetration. Retention shall be provided by chin strap, nape 
strap or other equivalent means. 

(4) Weight. Head protection, except the helmets specified in Section 
3403, complete with suspension and headband, but exclusive of accesso- 
ries, shall not weigh more than 20 ounces. 

(5) Heat Resistance. When placed in a forced-air laboratory oven at 
a temperature of 300° F ( 1 49" C) for a period of five minutes, the helmet 
shell shall not undergo softening, melting, shrinking or other visible dis- 
tortion. 

(6) Labeling. Each helmet shall be durably and legibly labeled in a 
manner such that the label can be easily read without removing padding 
or any other permanent part, and shall include the following information: 

Name or designation of manufacturer 
Month and year of manufacture 
Lot number 
Model designation 

(b) Eye Protection. Employees exposed to eye injury hazards shall be 
protected in accordance with the provisions of Section 3382. 

(c) Thermal Protection of the Ears and Neck. Protection against bums 
on the ear and neck shall be provided by one or more of the following 
means, or other equivalent methods, when fire fighters engaged in wild- 
land fire fighting are exposed to injurious heat and flame: flared neck 
shield attached to brim of helmet; hood, shroud or snood; high collar with 
throat strap. Fabric specified for this purpose shall be constructed and 
tested in accordance with the provisions of Section 3410(d) for body pro- 
tection. Similar protection shall be provided emergency pick-up labor 
when exposed to injurious heat and flame. 

(d) Body Protection. 

( 1 ) Clothing directly exposed to fire environment and subject to flame 
impingement shall meet the requirements of Section 3406(c). 

(2) Emergency Pick-up Labor. Flame resistant protective shirts shall 
be provided as soon as reasonably possible. Heavy-duty work trousers 
of 100 percent cotton or 100 percent wool shall be considered as suffi- 
ciently flame resistant for the type of fire exposure normally experienced 
by this class of fire fighter and may be worn in lieu of other flame-resis- 
tant type clothing. 

(e) Hand and Wrist Protection. 

(1) Protective gloves shall be provided for each wildland fire fighter, 
properly sized and suitable to the hazards encountered in wildland fire 
fighting activities. Fire fighters shall wear protective gloves whenever 
exposed to a hazardous environment that may cause injury to the hand 
or wrist. 

(A) Minimum Requirements. Protective gloves shall have a durable 
outer material of leather or treated fabric designed to withstand the ef- 
fects of heat, flame or other hazards encountered in wildland fire fighting. 
Glove material and pattern shall allow dexterity of hand movement and 
sense of feel for objects. The exterior of the gloves shall be designed to 
be free of potential snags. Gloves shall be of the gunn cut pattern. 

(2) Wrist protection fabric shall meet the requirements of Section 
3406(c) and shall consist of either: 

(A) Integral knit wristlets of not less than four inches in length, at- 
tached to the gloves and designed to protect the wrist area when the arms 
are extended upward and outward from the body; or 

(B) Wristlets, of sufficient length to completely cover the wrist area 
under all conditions, attached to the sleeves of the outer garment. 



(3) Emergency Pick-up Labor. Emergency pick-up labor exposed to 
hand injury hazard, and not equipped with gloves, shall be provided with 
gloves which meet these standards. 

(0 Foot Protection. 

(1) Protective footwear shall be worn by fire fighters while engaged 
in wildland fire fighting activities. 

(2) Minimum Requirements. Protective footwear for fire fighters and 
emergency pick-up labor engaged in wildland fire fighting shall consist 
of heavy duty lace-type work boots with non-slip soles and heels, and 
shall provide firm ankle support. Leather tops shall be at least six inches 
in height measured from the bottom of the shoe heel. 

(g) Fire Shelters. A fire shelter shall be provided and made immediate- 
ly available for every fire fighter when engaged in fire fighting activities 
in wildlands as defined in these orders. The fire shelter shall meet or ex- 
ceed U.S. Department of Agriculture, Forest Service Specificafion for 
Forest Fire Shelter, 5100-320D. 

NOTE; Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. New section filed 10-4-78; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 78, No. 
40). 

2. Amendment of subsection (d)(1)(A) filed 9-6-79; effective thirtieth day there- 
after (Register 79, No. 36). 

3. Amendment ofsubsection (a)(2) filed 6-1 3-80; effective thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register 80, No. 24). 

4. Amendment of subsections (c) and (f)(l)-(2) and repealer and new subsection 
td)( 1 )(B) filed 9-1 1-80; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 80, No. 37). 

5. New subsection (g) filed 1-27-82; effective thirtieth dav thereafter (Register 
82, No. 5). 

6. Amendment filed 4-29-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
18). 

7. Amendment of subsections (e) and (e)(1)(A), new subsections (e)(2)-(e)(2)(B) 
and subsection renumbering filed 3-5-97; operative 4-4-97 (Register 97, No. 
10). 

§ 341 1 . Private Fire Brigades. 

(a) Scope and Applicafion. 

(1) Scope. This section contains requirements for the organization, 
training, and personal protective equipment of fire brigades whenever 
they are established by an employer. 

(2) Applicafion. The requirements of this secfion apply to private fire 
brigades, such as industrial fire departments and private or contractual 
type fire departments. Personal protecrive equipment requirements apply 
only to members of fire brigades performing interior structural fire fight- 
ing acfivities. The requirements of this section do not apply to airport 
crash rescue or forest fire fighting operations. 

(b) Organization. 

( 1 ) Organizational Statement. The employer shall prepare and main- 
tain a statement or written policy which establishes the existence of a fire 
brigade; the basic organizational structure; the type, amount, and fre- 
quency of training to be provided to fire brigade members; the expected 
number of members in the fire brigade; and the functions that the fire bri- 
gade is to perform at the workplace. The organizational statement shall 
be available for inspection by the Division of Occupational Safety and 
Health and by employees or their designated representatives. 

(2) Personnel. The employer shall ensure that employees who are ex- 
pected to do interior structural fire fighting are physically capable of per- 
forming duties which may be assigned to them during emergencies. The 
employer shall not permit employees with known heart disease, epilepsy, 
or emphysema, to participate in fire brigade emergency activities unless 
a physician's certificate of the employees' fitness to participate in such 
activities is provided. This subsection shall become effective 60 days af- 
ter the effective date of this Article. 

(c) Training and Education. 

(1 ) The employer shall provide training and education for all fire bri- 
gade members commensurate with those duties and functions that fire 
brigade members are expected to perform. Such training and education 
shall be provided to fire brigade members before they perform fire bri- 



Page 594 



Register 2000, No. 10; 3-10-2000 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3414 



gade emergency activities. Fire brigade leaders and training instaictors 
shall be provided with training and education which is more comprehen- 
sive than that provided to the general membership of the fire brigade. 

(2) The employer shall ensure that training and education is conducted 
frequently enough to assure that each member of the fire brigade is able 
to perform the member's assigned duties and functions satisfactorily and 
in a safe manner so as not to endanger fire brigade members or other em- 
ployees. All fire brigade members shall be provided with training at least 
annually. In addition, fire brigade members who are expected to perform 
interior structural fire fighting activity shall be provided with an educa- 
tion session or training at least quarterly. 

(3) The quality of the training and education program for fire brigade 
members shall be similar to those conducted by such fire training schools 
as the Maryland Fire and Rescue Institute; Iowa Fire Service Extension: 
West Virginia Fire Service Extension; Georgia Fire Academy; New 
York State Department, Fire Prevention and Control; Louisiana Stale 
University Firemen Training Program, or Washington State's Fire Ser- 
vice Training Commission for Vocational Education. (For example, for 
the oil refinery industry, with its unique hazards, the training and educa- 
tion program for those fire brigade members shall be similar to those con- 
ducted by Texas A & M University, Lamar University, University of Ne- 
vada-Reno Fire Academy, or the Delaware State Fire School.) 

(4) The employer shall inform fire brigade members about special haz- 
ards such as storage and use of flammable liquids and gases, toxic chemi- 
cals, radioactive sources, and water reactive substances, to which they 
may be exposed during fire and other emergencies. The fire brigade 
members shall also be advised of any changes that occur in relation to the 
special hazards. The employer shall develop and make available for in- 
spection by fire brigade members, written procedures that describe the 
actions to be taken in situations involving the special hazards and shall 
include these in the training and education program. 

(d) Personal Protective Clothing and Equipment. Shall be provided by 
the employer at no cost to the employee in accordance with this article 
commensurate with the fire fighting activity involved. 

(e) Respiratory Protection Devices. The employer shall provide at no 
cost to the employee and assure that respiratory protective devices worn 
by fire brigade members meet the requirements contained in Section 
5144 and the requirements contained in this Article, and are certified un- 
der 42 CFR part 84. 

NOTE; Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. New section filed 9-8-81; effective thiitieth day thereafter (Register 81, No. 
37). 

2. Amendment filed 4-29-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85. No. 
18). 

3. Amendment of subsection (e) filed 8-25-98; operative 1 1-23-98 (Register 98, 
No. 35). 

Article 1 1 . Outdoor Advertising Structures 

§3412. General. 

(a) Scope. This Article applies to all elevated outdoor advertising 
structures, billboards, signboards or other such structures where em- 
ployees are required to work from platforms elevated more than 7-1/2 
feet above the ground or other surface, suspended scaffolds, or work 
from ladders that are not ground supported. Employees working on out- 
door advertising structures are subject to all applicable safety orders ex- 
cept where they are inconsistent with the requirements of this Article. 

(b) Definitions. 

Poster Ladder Scaffold. A scaffold platform supported by brackets at- 
tached to the rungs of a special purpose poster ladder. 

Special Purpose Poster Ladder. A Type 1 heavy-duty aluminum lad- 
der with a hook(s) at the top of the ladder specifically designed to hook 
over tlie top edge of billboards. 

NoTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 



History 

1 . New article 1 1 (section 3412) filed 1 1-12-75; effective thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register 75, No. 46). 

2. Repealer of subsection (h)(4) filed 2-20-80; effective thirtieth dav thereafter 
(Register 80, No. 8). 

3. Repealer of article ii (section 3412) filed 6-2-87; operative 7-2-87 (Register 
87, No. 24). 

4. Amendment of article and section headings and new section filed 1-7-93; op- 
erative 1-7-93 pursuant to Government Code section 1 1346.2(d) (Register 93, 
No. 2). 

§3413. Ladders. 

(a) All portable ladders shall be at least Type 1 heavy-duty ladders and 
shall be designed and constructed in accordance with Sections 3278 and 
3279 of the General Industry Safety Orders. 

(b) Portable ladders shall be tied, blocked or otherwise secured to pre- 
vent displacement. 

(c) All special purpose poster ladders ordered or purchased after Janu- 
ary 1, 1993, shall be approved, constructed of heavy duty aluminum, and 
equipped with a hook(s) at the top of the ladder that fits securely over the 
top edge of billboards. 

(d) All special purpose poster ladders ordered or purchased after Janu- 
ary 1, 1993, shall have a permanent and durable label containing the fol- 
lowing information: 

1. Manufacturer's Name; 

2. Date of Manufacturer; 

3. Type and/or Duty Rating; 

4. Approval Certification. 

(e) All special purpose poster ladders shall be inspected for defects 
prior to use. Defective ladders shall be repaired before use or removed 
from service. 

(f) All special purpose poster ladders placed in service prior to January 
1, 1993, shall be identified by the employer with a durable identification 
mark. 

(g) The hooks on the special purpose poster ladders shall be of such 
a size that they will not interfere v/ith the horizontal movement of the lad- 
der. 

(h) In addition to subsection (b) above, special purpose poster ladders, 
when used in conjunction with poster ladder scaffolds, shall be secured 
to prevent horizontal movement. 

(i) Special purpose poster ladders used to access the fixed ladder of the 
billboard platform shall not be attached to the bottom rung of the fixed 
ladder. If a special purpose poster ladder is posifioned against the plat- 
form to gain access, the ladder shall extend at least three feet above the 
horizontal edge of the platform. 

Note: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 
1. New section filed 1-7-93; operafive 1-7-93 pursuant to Government Code sec- 
tion 1 1346.2(d) (Register 93, No. 2). 

§ 341 4. Poster Ladder Scaffolds. 

(a) Poster ladder scaffolds shall only be used with special purpose 
poster ladders designed for such use. 

(b) No more than two employees at a time shall be allowed on the plat- 
form of a poster ladder scaffold. 

(c) The platform shall be at least 14 inches wide consisting of a struc- 
tural plank or equivalent, free from damage that could affect its strength. 

(d) The ladders that support the platform plank shall not be placed over 
1 6 feet from center to center, and where the platform consists of a single- 
dressed 2-inch by 14-inch plank, the spacing shall not be greater than 1 2 
feet. 

(e) Both metal and wood platform planks shall overlap the bearing sur- 
face of the supports by at least 12 inches but not more than 1 8 inches. 

(f) Platform plank supports shall be so designed and constructed that 
they will bear on the ladder's rungs. The bearing area shall be at least 8 
inches on each rung. 

(g) When working from a poster ladder scaffold, employees shall use 
safety belts or harnesses with lanyards attached to independently an- 
chored safety lines. 



Page 595 



Register 2(X)0, No. 10; 3-10-2(XX) 



§3415 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



NOTF'.: Authority cited: Section 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 
1 . New section filed 1-7-93; operative 1-7-93 pursuant to Government Code sec- 
tion 1 1346.2(d) (Register 93, No. 2). 

§3415. Suspended Scaffolds. 

Suspended scaffolds shall comply with the applicable provisions of 
Article 23 of the Construction Safety Orders. 

NOTI:: Authority cited: Section 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 
1 . New section filed 1-7-93; operative 1-7-93 pursuant to Government Code sec- 
tion 11346.2(d) (Register 93, No. 2). 

§3416. Fall Protection. 

(a) All outdoor advertising structure platforms, over 7-1/2 feet above 
ground or other surface, which are not provided with standard guardrails 
and where employees" work requires horizontal movement, shall be pro- 
vided with a horizontal safety line. 

ExctiPTION: When the employee's safety belt or harness lanyard is secured to the 
special purpose poster ladder. 

(b) The horizontal safety line shall be designed under the supervision 
of a professional engineer currently registered in the State of California 
and installed as part of a complete personal fall protection system, with 
a safety factor of at least two. 

(c) Outdoor advertising structures, where employees post billboards 
while working from special purpose poster ladders, shall be provided 
with one of the following: 

( 1 ) A removable horizontal safety line so located on the billboard that 
employees can attach their safety belt's or harness" lanyard when work- 
ing from the upper half of the ladder, or 

(2) A 1/4-inch improved plow steel cable 19 inches in length with 
4-inch swagged loops on each end. The steel cable shall be looped 
through the special purpose hooked ladder with the lanyard's snaphook 
attached to both loops of the cable. Other locking connectors of equiva- 
lent strength, such as caribiners, may be used in lieu of the 1/4-inch im- 
proved plow steel cable. 

(d) Lanyards shall not exceed 5 feet in length. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 
1 . New section filed 1-7-93; operative 1-7-93 pursuant to Government Code sec- 
tion 1 1346.2(d) (Register 93, No. 2). 



Group 3. 



General Plant Equipment and 
Special Operations 



Article 12. 



Tree Work, Maintenance or 
Removal 



§ 3420. Scope and Definition. 

(a) Scope. This standard appHes to work performed and equipment 

used in tree maintenance and removal. 

Note: Line clearance tree trimming operations shall be performed in accordance 
with the provisions of Article 38 of the High-Voltage Electrical Safety Orders, 
Title 8, California Code of Regulations.. 

(b) Definition. 

Qualified Tree Worker. An employee who, through related training 
and on-the-job experience, has demonstrated familiarity with the tech- 
niques and hazards of tree maintenance, removal, and the equipment 
used in the specific operations involved. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 
1. New article 12 (sections 3415-3418, not consecutive) filed 1 1-12-75; effecfive 

thirtieth day thereafter (Register 75, No. 46). 



2. Repealer of article 12 (sections 34 15-341 8, not consecutive) and new article 12 
(sections 3420-3428 and Appendix A) filed 4-16-80; effective thirtieth day 
thereafter (Register 80. No. 16). For prior history, see Register 76, No. 21. 

3. Amendment filed 8-8-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 

32). 

4. Change without regulatoi^ effect amending subsection (a) filed 4-2-92 pur- 
suant to section 100, title 1, California Code of Regulations (Reeister 92. No. 

14). 

§3421. General. 

(a) An accident prevention program shall be inaugurated and main- 
tained in accordance with Section 3203. 

(b) Each work location where tree trimming, tree repairing or removal 
is to be done, shall be under the direction of a qualified tree worker. 

(c) Employees shall be trained and instructed in the hazards involved 
in their job assigmnents, including the proper use of all equipment uti- 
lized in tree work, maintenance or removal operadons. Such training 
shall be documented by the employer to certify that the einployee has sat- 
isfactorily completed the training program prior to performing the job as- 
signment. 

(d) A job briefing shall be conducted by a qualified tree worker before 
each work assignment is begun. Such job briefing shall include the de- 
scription of the hazards unique to a specific job, appropriate work proce- 
dures to be followed, work assignment and other items to ensure that the 
work can be accomplished safely. 

(e) Prior to use, all equipment and safety devices shall be inspected and 
any found to be defective shall be immediately repaired or removed from 
service. 

(f) Employees shall be trained in the identification and preventive 
measures relating to common poisonous plants and harmful animals. 

(g) An adequate supply of potable water shall be provided in accor- 
dance with the requirements of Section 3363. 

(h) Where vehicular or pedestrian traffic may endanger employees, 
traffic control shall be provided that conforms to the applicable provi- 
sions of Article 1 1 of the Construction Safety Orders, Title 8, California 
Code of Regulations. 

(i) Internal combustion engine fuel tanks shall be refilled in accor- 
dance with Section 3319. 

(j) The employer shall establish rescue procedures and provide train- 
ing in first-aid, cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) and aerial rescue. 
First-aid and CPR training shall be performed by a certified instructor. 

(k) When employees are required to work in areas in which the noise 
levels exceed the allowable standards for occupational noise, the em- 
ployer shall provide hearing protection and training as required in Article 
105 of the General Industry Safety Orders. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. Amendment filed 8-8-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
32). 

2. Change without regulatory effect amending subsection (h) filed 4-2-92 pur- 
suant to section 100, title 1, CaUfomia Code of Regulations (Register 92, No. 
14). 

§ 3422. Tree Workers' Saddles. 

Tree workers' saddles shall be approved for their intended use as de- 
fined in Section 3206 of these orders. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. Amendment filed 8-8-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
32). 

2. Change without regulatory effect amending section filed 4-2-92 pursuant to 
section 100, title 1, California Code of Regulations (Register 92, No. 14). 

3. Repealer and new section filed 8-4-95; operative 9-3-95 (Register 95, No. 31). 

§ 3423. Electrical Hazards, General. 

(a) Employees engaged in tree maintenance and removal in proximity 
to electrical equipment and conductors, shall be instructed to consider all 
such equipment to be energized with potentially fatal voltages, never to 
be touched (contacted) either directly or indirectly. Except as permitted 



Page 596 



Register 2000, No. 10; 3-10-2000 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§ 3427 



in Section 3423(b), employees sliall not be permitted to work closer than 
6 feet to electrical equipment and conductors energized in excess of 600 
volts. 

(b) Work performed as described in Section 3423(a) shall be in accor- 
dance with Article 38 of the High-Voltage Electrical Safety Orders, Title 
8 of the California Code of Regulations. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. Amendment filed 8-8-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 

32). 

2. Change without regulatory effect amending subsection (b) filed 10-28-97 pur- 
suant to section 100, title 1, California Code of Regulations (Resister 97, No. 

44). 

§ 3424. Mobile Equipment. 

(a) General. 

( 1 ) All vehicles and equipment shall be equipped and operated in ac- 
cordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, applicable safety 
orders of Title 8, California Administrative Code, and these orders. 

(b) Aerial Devices. 

( 1 ) All aerial devices used for operations within the scope of tliis stan- 
dard shall be in accordance with Article 24 of the General Industry Safety 
Orders and as modified by these orders. 

(2) Placement of an employee in a tree with the aid of an aerial device 
shall be accomplished in the following manner: 

(A) Prior to leaving the basket for entry into the tree, employees shall 
be safety secured to the tree before removing the safety line attached to 
the basket. The procedure shall be reversed when entering the basket 
from a tree. 

(c) Brush Chippers. 

( 1 ) Each rotary drum tree or brush chipper or disk-type tree or brush 
chipper not equipped with a mechanical infeed system shall be equipped 
with an infeed hopper not less than 85 inches, measured from the blades 
or knives to ground level over the centerline of the hopper, and shall have 
sufficient height on its side members so as to prevent personnel from con- 
tacting the blades or knives of the machine during normal operations. 

(2) Each rotary drum tree or brush chipper or disk-type tree or brush 
chipper not equipped with a mechanical infeed system shall have a flex- 
ible anti-kickback device installed in the infeed hopper for the purpose 
of protecting the operator and other persons in the machine area from the 
hazards of flying chips and debris. 

(3) All brush chippers shall be equipped with a locking device on the 
ignition system to prevent unauthorized starting of the equipment. 

(4) Trailer chippers detached from trucks shall be chocked or other- 
wise secured. 

(5) Cutting bar and blades shall be kept sharp, properly adjusted and 
otherwise maintained in accordance with the manufacturer's recommen- 
dations. 

(6) Each disk-type tree or brush chipper equipped with a mechanical 
infeed system shall have a quick stop and reversing device on the infeed. 
The activating lever for the quick stop and reversing device shall be lo- 
cated across the top, along each side of, and as close to the feed end of 
the infeed hopper as practicable and within easy reach of the operator. 
NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 
1. Amendment of subsections (b)(1) and (c) filed 8-8-85; effective thirtieth day 
thereafter (Register 85, No. 32). 

§ 3425. Portable Power Hand Tools. 

(a) Gasoline Engine Power Saws. 

( 1 ) Power saws weighing more than twenty pounds (service weight) 
that are used in trees shall be supported by a separate line, except when 
working from an aerial-lift device or during topping or removing opera- 
tions. 

(2) All power saws shall be equipped with a constant pressure control 
that will return the saw to idling speed when released. 



(3) Power saws shall be so adjusted that the chain drive will not engage 
at idling speed. 

(b) Backpack Power Units (Pruning, Clearing, Etc.). 

(1) While the unit is ninning, no one shall be permitted within 10 feet 
of the cutting head of the brush saw, except the operator. 

(2) The power unit shall be equipped with a quick shutoff switch readi- 
ly accessible to the operator. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3. La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. Amendment of subsection (a) filed 8-8-85: effective thirtieth da\ thereafter 
(Register 85, No. 32). 

§ 3426. Hand Tools. 

(a) General. 

(1) Hand tools shall be in accordance with Section 3556. 

(b) Pruners and Saws. 

(1) Pole pruners, pole saws, and other similar tools shall be equipped 
with nonconducting poles and actuating cords. 

(c) Ropes. 

( 1 ) Climbing ropes shall be used when working aloft in trees. These 
ropes shall have a minimum diameter of 1/2-inch and shall be 3 or 4 
strand, first-grade manila, with a nominal breaking strength of 2,300 
pounds, or its equivalent in strength and durability. 

(2) Polypropylene or other synthetic ropes having similar low melting 
points shall not be used. 

(3) Climbing ropes shall not be used to lower limbs or other parts of 
trees. 

(d) Climber Spurs. 

(I) Climber spurs shall be of the tree-climbing type and shall have 
gaffs of the type and length suitable for the tree being climbed. 
NOTE: Authority cited: Secfion 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. Amendment filed 8-8-85; effecdve thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 

32). 

§ 3427. Safe Work Procedures. 

(a) Climbing and Access. 

(1) Prior to climbing the tree, the employer shall ensure that the tree 
is visually inspected by a qualified tree worker who shall determine and 
ensure a safe method of entry into the tree. The location of all electrical 
conductors and equipment within the work area shall be identified in rela- 
tion to the work being performed. 

(A) Only when a tree cannot be safely accessed by climbing or the use 
of aerial devices, a qualified tree worker may be hoisted into position by 
using an approved tree worker's saddle secured to a crane's hook that 
shall be closed with a positive locking device. The tree worker's saddle 
shall also be secured to an independent line attached above the crane 
hook, and the following criteria shall be met: 

1. All climbing equipment, lines and rigging shall have a minimum 
breaking strength of at least 5,000 pounds. 

2. The crane boom and load line shall be moved in a slow, controlled, 
cautious manner with no sudden movements when the qualified tree 
worker is attached to the crane. 

3. The requirements for hoisting employees by crane in a personnel 
platform contained in Sections 5004(d)(2), (4), (5). (6), and 5004(e) shall 
apply to the hoisting of a qualified tree v/orker suspended in an approved 
tree worker saddle. 

4. Cranes used for tree work shall be equipped with a functional load 
indicating device. 

5. The crane operator shall be familiar with the potential hazards and 
operational techniques encountered in tree work. 

6. The qualified tree worker being hoisted shall be in continuous com- 
munication with the crane operator, or signals shall be relayed by a quali- 
fied signal person as provided in Section 5001. 

7. The crane operator shall remain at the controls when the qualified 
tree worker is attached to the crane. 



Page 597 



Register 2005, No. 4; 1-28-2005 



§3428 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



8. The qualified tree worker shall be detached from the crane while the 
load is hoisted. 

9. The employer shall ensure that the crane operator and qualified tree 
worker determine the weight of the load being lifted to prevent the crane 
from being overloaded. 

10. The hoisting of a qualified tree worker shall be promptly discontin- 
ued upon indication of any dangerous weather conditions or other im- 
pending danger. 

Note: l . Other applicable provisions pertaining to crane operations are contained 

in the Genera! Industry Safety Orders, Group 13, Cranes and Other Hoisting 

Equipment. 

Note: 2. For line cleai-ance tree trimming operations, see Article 38 of the High 

Voltage Electrical Safety Orders. 

(B) Special Training Requirements. The employer shall ensure that 
every qualified tree worker involved in tree work utilizing a crane to posi- 
tion personnel into a tree under the provisions of Section 3427(a)( 1 )(A), 
receives instruction and training on such work and is competent in the 
following areas: 

1 . Safe work procedures and knowledge of the hazards applicable to 
tree work involving the use of cranes. 

2. The use of personal protective equipment required for tree work. 

3. The inspection and safe use of all climbing equipment, lines and rig- 
ging- 

4. Crane signals and communication requirements with the crane oper- 
ator as provided in Section 5001. 

5. Instructions regarding electrical hazards as described in Section 
3423. 

6. The safe use of chain saws in tree work. 

7. The conditions and criteria necessary to permit the use of a crane to 
provide access into a tree. 

8. The handling of loads as described in Section 4999 and rigging tech- 
niques for tree work. 

9. Effective means for controlling pedestrian and vehicular traffic. 

(C) Documentation of employee training required by Section 
3427(a)( 1 )(B) shall be maintained as prescribed by Section 3203 of these 
Orders. 

(2) The climbing line must be crotched as soon as practicable after the 
employee is aloft, and a taut line-hitch tied and checked. 

(3) The climbing rope shall be passed around the main leader or a ma- 
jor upright branch of the tree as high as necessary using branches with a 
wide crotch to prevent any binding of the safety rope. The crotch selected 
for tying-in shall be over the work area as nearly as possible, but located 
in such a way that a slip or fall would not permit the employee to come 
in contact with any electrical conductor, equipment or other hazard. The 
rope shall be passed around the main leader or an upright branch, using 
a limb as a stop. Feet, hands, and ropes should, where possible, be kept 
out of tight- V-shaped crotches. 

(4) When working aloft, employees shall be required to wear tree 
workers' saddles and tie-in with an approved safety strap or rope. 

(5) Employees shall remain tied in until the work is completed and they 
have returned to the ground, unless it is necessary to recrotch. 

(b) Pruning and Trimming. 

(i) Employees shall be instructed to give an audible warning before 
a limb is dropped. "Timber," "headache" or "heads up" can be used for 
this purpose. 

(2) A separate line shall be attached to limbs which cannot be dropped 
or are too heavy to be controlled by hand. The use of the same crotch for 
both safety rope and work rope shall be avoided. 

(3) Cut branches (hangers) shall be removed from the tree prior to leav- 
ing the job site. 

(4) With the exception of minor tree trimming, at operations involving 
tree maintenance or removal, a second employee shall be used at each 
work location to render immediate assistance. 

(c) Felling. 

(1) The work area shall be cleared to permit safe working conditions, 
and an escape route shall be planned before any cutting is started. 



(2) A notch and backcut shall be used in felling trees over 10 inches 
in diameter. 

(3) Just before the tree is ready to fall, an audible warning shall be giv- 
en to those in the area. All personnel in the vicinity shall be safely out of 
range. 

NOTE; Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. Amendment filed 8-8-85: effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 

32). 

2. Amendment of subsections (a)-(a)( 1), new subsection (a)(2) and subsection re- 
numbering filed 4-1-2004; operative 4-1-2004 pursuant to Government Code 
section 1 1343.4(c) (Register 2004, No. 14). 

3. Amendment of subsection (a)(1), new subsections (a)(l)(A)-(a)(l)(A)8., re- 
pealer of former subsection (a)(2) and subsection renumbering filed 4-29-2004 
as an emergency; operative 4-29-2004 (Register 2004, No. 18). A Certificate 
of Compliance must be transmitted to OAL by 8-27-2004 or emergency lan- 
guage will be repealed by operation of law on the following day. 

4. Amendment of subsection (a)(1), new subsections (a)(l)(A)-(a)(l)(A)8., re- 
pealer of former subsection (a)(2) and subsection renumbering refiled 
8-26-2004 as an emergency; operative 8-26-2004 (Register 2004, No, 35). A 
Certificate of Compliance must be transmitted to OAL by 1 2-24-2004 or emer- 
gency language will be repealed by operafion of law on the following day. 

5. Certificate of Compliance as to 8-26-2004 order, including further amendment 
of subsections (a)(l)-(a)(l)(A)l., new subsecdons (a)(l)(A)4.-5., subsection 
renumbering and new subsections (a)(l )(B)-(C), transmitted to OAL 
12-17-2004 and filed 1-24-2005 (Register 2005, No. 4). 

§ 3428. Operating Rules. 

(a) Every employer engaged in tree work shall have and employees 
shall be instructed in a set of operating rules, including but not limited to, 
the appropriate rules below: 

(1) All equipment shall be operated by qualified personnel. 

(2) No part of the body shall be used to locate or attempt to stop a hy- 
draulic leak. 

(3) Rotary drum or disk-type brush chippers shall be fed from the side 
of the center line, and the operator shall immediately turn away from the 
feed table when the brush is taken into the rotor. 

(4) Employees shall never place hands, arms, feet, legs, or any other 
part of the body on the feed table when the brush chipper is in operation 
or the rotor is turning. 

(5) The brush chipper chute shall not be raised while rotor is turning. 

(6) Material such as stones, nails, sweepings, etc., shall not be fed into 
the brush chipper. 

(7) Vehicles shall not be operated at speeds which will endanger the 
driver or workers. 

(8) Power saw engines shall be stopped when carrying for a distance 
greater than 1 00 feet, or in hazardous conditions such as slippery surfaces 
or heavy underbrush. Saw shall be at idle speed when carried short dis- 
tances. 

(9) The engine shall be stopped for all cleaning, refueling, adjust- 
ments, and repairs to the saw or engine where practical, except where 
manufacturer's procedures require otherwise. 

( 1 0) When using back power units for pruning or clearing, the operator 
shall heed the position of all personnel while the unit is running. 

(11) Tree workers shall not carry tools in their hands while climbing. 

( 1 2) Employees shall maintain a safe working distance from other em- 
ployees when using hand tools. 

(13) Employees shall not throw or drop tools from trees unless warn- 
ing has been given and the ground area is clear, and the act of dropping 
will not endanger personnel. 

(14) Pole pruners and pole saws shall be hung securely in a vertical po- 
sition to prevent dislodging. Pole pruners or pole saws shall not be hung 
on utility wires or cables, or left in the tree overnight. Pole saws shall be 
hung so that the sharp edge is away from the employee. 

( 1 5) Climbers shall inspect the ropes for cuts or abrasions before start- 
ing work. If any cuts or serious abrasions are found, the rope shall be im- 
mediately repaired or removed from service. 

( 1 6) Chopping tools shall be swung away from the feet, legs, and body. 



Page 598 



Register 2005, No. 4; 1-28-2005 



Titles 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3440 



(17) Chopping tools shall not be driven as wedges or used to drive met- 
al wedges. 

(18) The employee shall work from the uphill side whenever possible 
when doing limbing or bucking. 

(19) The employee shall block the log to prevent rolling, when neces- 
sary. 

(20) When bucking up trunks of trees, wedges shall be used so that the 
tree will not bind the guide bar or chain. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3. Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 
L Amendment filed 8-8-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
32). 

Appendix A 

Tree Workers' Saddles, Safety Belts, Safety Straps And Lanyards 

Note: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 
1 . Repealer of Appendix A filed 8-8-85; effecfive thirtieth day thereafter (Regis- 
ter 85, No. 32). 

Article 13. Agricultural Operations 

§ 3436. Application. 

The orders in this article shall apply to agricultural operations. Agri- 
cultural machinery and equipment are subject to all applicable Safety Or- 
ders except where they are inconsistent with the orders in this article. 
NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. Amendment filed 5-13-77; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 77, No. 
20). 

2. Amendment filed 5-15-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
20). 

§ 3437. Definitions. 

Agricultural Equipment. Tractors or implements, including self-pro- 
pelled implements, and stationary equipment which are used in agricul- 
tural operations. 

Agricultural Operations. All operations necessary to farming in all of 
its branches, including maintenance of machinery or other facilities, and 
the planting, cultivating or growing, keeping for sale, harvesting, trans- 
porting on the farm or to the place of first processing, any tree, plant, ani- 
mal, fowl, fish, insect or products thereof. 

Frond. As used in Section 3458, the large connected leaf of a date palm 
tree. 

Ground Driven Components. Components which are powered by the 
turning motion of a wheel driven by ground contact as the equipment 
travels over the ground. 

Guard or Shield. See Article 37, Section 394L 

Guarded by Location. See Article 37, Section 394L 

Long-handled hand tool. Any hand-held tool with a handle of four (4) 
feet or more in length. 

Nip Point. The mesh or pinch point of in-running surfaces such as 
gears, belts, sprockets, rolls, etc. 

Power Take-Off (PTO) Drivelines. The shafts and universal joints be- 
tween the tractor, or other power source, and the first gear set, pulley, or 
sprocket. Power Take-Off (PTO) Shaft. The power output shaft protmd- 
ing from the drive unit of the agricultural equipment. 

Self-Propelled Agricultural Equipment. Mobile equipment which is 
provided with locomotive power as an integral part of the unit. 

Short-handled hand tool. Any hand-held tool with a handle of less 
than four (4) feet in length. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 



History 

1 . Repealer and new secfion filed 5-13-77; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Reg- 
ister 77. No. 20). 

2. Amendment filed 5-15-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85. No. 
20). 

3. Amendment filed l-5-87;effectivethiitielhday thereafter (Register 87, No. 2). 

4. New definition of "frond" filed 8-4-2003; operative 9-3-2003 (Register 2003, 
No. 32). 

§ 3438. Communications. 

Where employees do not understand English, safety instructions and 
warnings shall be presented in a language the employees understand. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 
1. Amendment filed 5-15-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Reeistcr 85, No. 
20). 

§ 3439. First-Aid Kit. 

(a) There shall be adequate first-aid materials immediately available 
at the farm headquarters and/or on worker transportation buses. Such ina- 
terials shall be kept in a sanitary and usable condition. A frequent inspec- 
tion shall be made of all first-aid materials, which shall be replenished 
as necessary. In the case of employers whose workers are widely scat- 
tered in small crews that are contacted by a traveling foreman, adequate 
protection may be accompHshed by having a first-aid kit in the foreman' s 
car or vehicle. 

(b) At remote locations, provisions must be made in advance for 
prompt medical attention in case of serious injuries. This may be accom- 
plished by on-the-site facilities or proper equipment for prompt trans- 
portation of the injured person to a physician or communication system 
for contacting a doctor or combinations of these that will avoid unneces- 
sary delay in treatment. There shall be at least 1 employee for every 20 
employees at any remote location with training for the administering of 
emergency first aid. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 
1. Amendment filed 5-15-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
20). 

§ 3440. Agricultural Equipment. 

(a) All tractors shall be equipped with fenders or equivalent protection 
between the tractor operator and the tracks or rear wheels. On wheel trac- 
tors a minimum distance of 64 inches from the centerline of one driving 
wheel to the centerline of the opposite wheel will be considered equiva- 
lent protection. See Article 25 for ROPS and overhead protection. 

(b) Tractor brake-locking or parking device shall be of the positive 
type, designed and maintained in such a manner that tractor vibration will 
not release the device. 

(c) Power Take-Off Guarding. 

( 1 ) All PTO shafts shall be guarded. If the guard can be used as a step 
it shall be capable of supporting a 250 pound person. 

EXCEPTION: Where PTO driven equipment is of a design requiring removal of the 
PTO shaft guard, the driven equipment shall incorporate guarding of the PTO 
shaft. 

(2) PTO drivelines shall be guarded. 

(3) Signs, decals, etc., shall be placed at prominent locations on agri- 
cultural equipment specifying that power drive system guards shall be 
kept in place. 

(d) Other Power Transmission Components. 

(1) The mesh or nip-point of all power driven gears, belts, chains, 
sheaves, pulleys, sprockets, and idlers shall be guarded. 

(2) All revolving shafts, including projections such as bolts, keys or 
set screws, shall be guarded, except smooth shaft ends protruding less 
than one-half the outside diameter of the shaft and its locking means. 

(e) Ground driven components shall be guarded if any employee is ex- 
posed to those components while they are in motion. 

(f) Access to Moving Parts. 

( 1 ) Guards, shields, and access doors shall be in place when the equip- 
ment is in operation. 



Page 599 



Register 2005, No. 4; 1-28-2005 



§3441 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



(2) Where removal of a guard or access door will expose an employee 
to any component which continues to rotate after the power is disen- 
gaged, the employer shall provide, in the immediate area, the following: 

(A) A readily visible or audible warning of rotation (on all agricultural 
equipment manufactured after June 1, 1977). 

(B) A safety sign warning the employee to look and listen for evidence 
of rotation, and not to remove the guard or access door until all compo- 
nents have stopped. 

(g) Functional components of agricultural equipment not specifically 
addressed in this article, such as snapping or husking rolls, straw spread- 
ers, cutter bars, flail rotors, rotary beaters, mixing augers, feed rolls, 
rotary tillers, and similar units, which must be exposed for proper func- 
tion, shall be guarded so as not to interfere with normal functioning of the 
component. 

(h) Sweep arm material gathering mechanisms shall be guarded when 
used on the top surface of materials within silo structures. The lower or 
leading edge of the guard shall be located no more than 1 2 inches above 
the material surface and no less than six inches in front of the leading edge 
of the rotating member of the gathering mechanism. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . Repealer and new section filed 5-13-77; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Reg- 
ister 77, No. 20). 

2. Amendment of NOTE filed 5-15-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 

85, No. 20). 

3. New subsections (d)-(d)(2), subsection relettering, and amendment of newly 
designated subsection (g) filed 4-4-96; operative 5-4-96 (Register 96, No. 14). 

§ 3441. Operation of Agricultural Equipment. 

(a) Operating Instructions and Safe Work Practices. 

( 1) At the time of initial assignment and at least annually thereafter, the 
employer shall instruct every employee in the safe operation and servic- 
ing of all equipment with which the employee is, or will be involved in- 
cluding, instruction on the safe work practices and operating rules pro- 
vided in subsection (a)(2). 

(2) Agricultural equipment shall be operated in accordance with the 
following safe work practices and operating rules: 

(A) Keep all guards in place when the machine is in operation; 

(B) Permit no riders on agricultural equipment other than persons re- 
quired for instruction or assistance in machine operation; 

(C) Stop engine, disconnect the power source, and wait for all machine 
movement to stop before servicing, adjusting, cleaning, or unclogging 
the equipment, except where the machine must be running to be properly 
serviced or maintained, in which case all steps and procedures which are 
necessary to safely service or maintain the equipment shall be taken; 

(D) Make sure everyone is clear of machinery before starting the en- 
gine, engaging power, or operating the machine; 

(E) Lock out electrical power before performing maintenance or ser- 
vice on agricultural equipment. (See Article 3 of the Low-Voltage Elec- 
trical Safety Orders.) 

Note: For overhead electrical hazards see Section 3455 of this article. 

(b) AH self-propelled equipment shall, when under its own power and 
in motion, have an operator stationed at the vehicular controls. This shall 
not prohibit the operator occupying or being stationed at a location on the 
vehicle other than the normal driving position or cab if controls for start- 
ing, accelerating, decelerating and stopping are provided adjacent and 
convenient to the alternate position. If the machine requires steering oth- 
er than ground or furrow steering or operates at ground speeds in excess 
of two miles per hour, steering controls shall also be provided at the alter- 
nate location. Seedling planters and other similar equipment traveling at 
a speed of two miles an hour or less where a control that will immediately 
stop the machine is located at the operator's work station will satisfy this 
requirement. 

(1) Furrow guided self-propelled mobile equipment may be operated 
by an operator not on the equipment provided that all of the following are 
complied with: 



(A) The operator has a good view of the course of travel of the equip- 
ment and any employees in the immediate vicinity. 

(B) The steering controls, when provided, and the brake and throttle 
controls are extended within easy reach of the operator's station. 

(C) The operator is not over 10 feet away from such controls and does 
not have to climb over or onto the equipment or other obstacles to operate 
the controls. 

(D) The equipment is not traveling at over two miles per hour ground 
speed. 

(c) Safe access to a safe place for all personnel riding on mobile equip- 
ment shall be provided. 

(d) All self-propelled equipment shall be equipped with a braking de- 
vice controlled from the operator's station, capable of preventing the ve- 
hicle from moving while parked. 

(e) Where mobile farm equipment is towed by a tractor or taick and 
the tractor or truck driver carmot see the employees on the towed equip- 
ment, a positive signaling device shall be installed on the towed equip- 
ment, or there shall be a device on the towed equipment that can be actu- 
ated to stop the towing equipment in case of an emergency. 

(f) Engine exhaust systems shall not be piped into or through an en- 
closed cab on tractors or other equipment. 

(g) All tractors or self-propelled farm equipment used between an 
hour after sunset or an hour before sunrise shall be equipped with at least 
one headlight that will illuminate the area in front of the equipment at 
least 50 feet. There shall be at least one rear light to illuminate equipment 
at the rear. Additional lighting shall be provided where the operation re- 
quires field adjustment or the operator's attention. 

(h) Adequate means of access shall be provided so that employees can 
safely reach the top of the load for manual loading or unloading of high 
loads. 

NOTE; Authority cited: Section 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. Amendment of subsection (a) filed 1-9-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register 76, No. 2). 

2. Repealer and new section filed 5-1 3-77; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Reg- 
ister 77, No. 20). 

3. New subsection (a)(6) filed 5-15-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 
85, No. 20). 

4. Amendment of subsection (a)(5) and repealer of subsection (a)(6) filed 
9-19-2000; operafive 10-19-2000 (Register 2000, No. 38). 

5. Amendment filed 12-2-2002; operative 1-1-2003 (Register 2002, No. 49). 

§ 3442. Horizontal Rotary Spreaders. 

The spinner shall be guarded to prevent accidental contact. The guard 
shall consist of a bar, rail, or similar structure beyond the periphery of the 
spinner. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3 LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. New NOTE filed 5-15-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Reaister 85, No. 
20). 

§ 3443. Corn Pickers. 

History 
1 . Repealer filed 5-15-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 20). 

§ 3444. Beet Trucks. 

In no case shall the entire side door hinge from the bottom on manually 
operated beet truck sides. Split doors may be used, providing the bottom 
hinged portion does not exceed its practical value as a locking device or 
discharge lip and is not over 18 inches high. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 
1. New NOTE filed 5-15-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
20). 

§ 3445. Choppers. 

(a) Every power-driven cutter, chopper, or grinder shall be guarded to 
prevent accidental contact with revolving parts or access to hazardous 
parts of the machine. 



Page 600 



Register 2005, No. 4; 1-28-2005 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§ 3453 



• 



• 



Ac-cess doors or covers shall be identified by an appropriate warning 
sign. 

(b) Every manually fed power-driven cutter, chopper, or grinder shall 
be guarded to prevent accidental contact with the feed rolls or other haz- 
ardous processing parts of the machine. 

Note: Guarding may be accomplished by extending the feed chute or hopper to 
provide a minimum accessible distance o not less than 88 inches from the working 
level to the point of operation, or a distance of 36 inches from the edge of the chute 
or hopper to the point of operation, or other effective means. 

(c) Stationary machines which are equipped with feed rolls or other 
feed-assisting mechanisms shall be provided with a safety bar or trapeze 
bar which will stop the machine. 

(d) Rotary choppers with horizontal blades shall have side shields ex- 
tending below the plane of the lowest blade. Front and rear guards shall 
be provided to guard against accidental contact with the revolving blades. 
NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3. Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . Amendment of subsections (b) and (c) filed 9-6-79 as procedural and organiza- 
tional; effective upon filing (Register 79, No. 36). 

2. Amendment of subsections (a)-(c) filed 5-15-85; effective thirtieth day there- 
after (Register 85, No. 20). 

§ 3446. Conveyors and Elevators. 

(a) Portable screw conveyors located seven feet or less above the work 
level shall be covered or guarded to prevent accidental contact with any 
portion of the screw. Augers shall be guarded with either grating type 
guards or solid baffle style covers as follows: 

( 1 ) The largest dimensions or openings in grating type guards through 
which materials are required to flow shall be 4 3/4 inches. The area of 
each opening shall be no larger than 10 square inches. The opening shall 
be located no closer than 2 1/2 inches to the rotating flighting. 

(2) Slotted openings in solid baffle style covers shall be no wider than 
1 1/2 inches, or closer than 3 1/2 inches to the exposed flighting. 

ExciiPTlON: Portable material transfer augers which cannot be guarded as above 
due to the nature of the process or material being transferred shall not be permitted 
to rotate unless they are in contact with the material to be transfeixed. The top and 
rear of the rotadng auger shall be guarded. The leading edge of the guard shall ex- 
tend at least six inches beyond the leading edge of the auger flight. Employees shall 
not be required or permitted in front of an auger while it is rotating. 

(b) Portable sack loader, auger, elevator, or drag conveyor drive sys- 
tems shall contain only one starting control. The starting control shall be 
located within ready access of the operator. 

(c) Shear points created by portions of the conveyor passing structural 

or other fixed parts shall be guarded. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. Amendment of subsection (a) filed 5-13-77; effective thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register 77, No. 20). 

2. Amendment of subsection (a)(1) filed 9-6-79 as procedural and organizational; 
effecUve upon filing (Register 79, No. 36). 

3. Amendment filed 5-15-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
20). 

4. Amendment of subsection (a) filed 4-4-96; operative 5-4-96 (Register 96, No. 
14). 

§ 3447. Vegetable-Trimming Saws. 

(a) The unused portion of the saw blades shall be enclosed. 

(b) A barrier shall be installed to prevent employees from reaching the 
saw blades. 

Note; Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 
1. New NOTE filed 5-15-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
20). 

§ 3448. Water Hazards. 

Where and when employees are required to work in or about farm 
structures such as permanent pools, ponds, water tanks, or reservoirs 4 
feet or more in actual depth and where the slope and construction would 



make exit difficult, ladder, steps or other suitable climbing means ex- 
tending to the low water level shall be provided. 

Note: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 
1. Amendinent filed 5-15-85; effective thirtieth dav thereafter (Register 85, No. 
20). 

§ 3449. Ladders. 

History 
1 . Repealer filed 5-15-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85. No. 20). 

§ 3450. Formulation and Application of Restricted 
Materials. 

(Organophosphates and carbamates. Toxicity Categories I and II). 

Medical requirements relating to the formulation and application of 
restricted materials shall be as required by Title 3. Article 23 of the Cali- 
fornia Administrative Code. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. Amendment filed 5-15-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
20). 

§ 3451. Decontamination of Equipment Used for Restricted 
Materials. 

(a) Machines, aircraft, or applicators shall be decontaminated before 
they are overhauled or placed in storage. 

(b) Decontamination shall be done in a safe area by washing with wa- 
ter, neutralization, or by means recommended by the manufacturer of the 
restricted material. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 
1 . Amendment filed 5-15-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
20). 

§ 3452. Aircraft Crop Dusting and Spraying. 

(a) All hoppers on crop-dusting aircraft shall have dust-tight covers, 
and shall have lids so secured that they will not readily open in case of 
a flipover. 

(b) Safety precautions to be followed when using aircraft for crop dust- 
ing and spraying shall be as required by Title 3, Article 23 of the Califor- 
nia Administrative Code. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 
1. Amendment of subsection (b) filed 5-15-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register 85, No. 20). 

§ 3453. Applicator Rigs, Tanks, and Vessels Used for 
Fertilizer, Insecticide, Pesticide, and Other 
Chemical Solutions of a Hazardous Nature. 

(a) All closed tanks over 1 00 gallons in capacity shall have an effective 
means to indicate the liquid level. 

(b) Fittings, hose, and tubing connections of the proper strength for the 
maximum pressure encountered in the system shall be used. All hose 
connections shall be clamped or otherwise safely secured. 

Anhydrous ammonia (NH3) connections shall be in accordance with 
the Unfired Pressure Vessel Safety Orders. 

(c) All storage tanks shall have a legend attached, painted, or stenciled 
on them indicating the type of solution stored in them. The legend shall 
be in letters at least 2 inches high of a color contrasting with the color of 
the tank. A notice with precautionary instructions equivalent to the label 
prescribed by the labeling orders of the Division for the material being 
used shall also be attached to the tank. 

(d) When positive displacement pumps are used and a stop valve is lo- 
cated between the outlet side of the pump and the discharge end of the 
hose, pipe, or tubing, there shall be installed a relief device which will 
bypass the liquid back to the low-pressure side of the system to prevent 
rupturing of the discharge hose, pipe, tubing, or pump. 



Page 600.1 



Register 2005, No. 17; 4-29-2005 



§ 3454 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



(e) Controls for applicator tanks shall be placed in such a manner that 
the employee will receive the least possible exposure from ruptured or 
breaking lines at the controls. 

The distributing manifold (Christmas Tree) if in the immediate vicin- 
ity of the operator shall be located to the rear and below the seat level of 
the operator or completely shielded. 

(f) When two or more tanks under gas or liquid pressure are connected 
by means of a hose, tubing, or pipe blocked at both ends by stop valves, 
there shall be a device installed in the line to bleed off the pressure before 
the line is disconnected. 

(g) Where aqua ammonia operations are conducted, each bulk tank, 
mobile applicator, or nurse tank, shall have immediately available from 
a safe and accessible source, or shall be supplied with sufficient clean wa- 
ter (5 gallons) to enable an employee to wash his eyes in case of acciden- 
tal sprays or spillage. 

(h) All pressure vessels shall be designed and constructed in accor- 
dance with the Unfired Pressure Vessel Safety Orders. 
NOTH; Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . Amendment of subsections (a), (c) and (g) filed 5-15-85; effective thirtieth day 
thereafter (Register 85, No. 20). 

§ 3454. Sheepshearing. 

(a) Canvas or other fabric material used for floors shall be stretched 
tight and properly pegged at regular 4 foot intervals around the outer edge 
to prevent them from gathering or bunching. The floor shall be main- 
tained tight at all times. 

(b) Hobbles shall be installed one-third of the way down on each hang- 
er arm. These hobbles shall be secured to the main hanger, and the leather 
thongs passed through an eyelet on the turn-out side of the shearing floor. 
On each end of the thongs there shall be a weight adequate enough to pull 
the hanger arm back to a neutral position in case the clippers are dropped 
or kicked free. 

(c) The catch pen and turn-out pen shall be provided with proper gates 
or other barriers to prevent sheep from dashing across the shearing floor 
while shearers are at work. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. New NOTE filed 5-15-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 

20). 

§ 3455. Overhead Electrical Hazards. 

(a) Where high-voltage electrical lines pass over, through or along 
planted areas or orchards, the supervisor or person in charge of work 
crews shall inspect the work area to determine if the high-voltage lines 
are located in areas that may expose employees to electrical hazards. 

(b) Electrically conductive poles shall not be used for fruit picking or 
nut-knocking. Employees using other conductive tools or equipment to 
perform duties such as pruning, harvesting and the handling of irrigation 
pipe in areas where such tools or equipment could come into contact with 
overhead high-voltage electrical lines shall not be assigned such work 
until they are instructed in the hazards associated with working in prox- 
imity to energized high-voltage electrical lines (i.e., serious bodily inju- 
ry or death from accidental contact or near-contact with energized elec- 
trical lines). The instruction shall include the use of tools, equipment and 
work practices necessary to perform work safely and maintain the ap- 
propriate clearances specified in subsection (c). 

(c) The clearance distances contained in Article 37, Tables 1 and 2 of 
the High-Voltage Electrical Safety Orders shall be maintained when 
placing or moving irrigation piping, and when employees use tools, lad- 
ders, machinery, or other equipment and materials that could come into 
contact with high-voltage lines. 

Note: Article 37, Table 1 pertains to general clearances required from energized 
overhead conductors and Table 2 pertains to boom-type lifting or hoisting equip- 
ment clearances. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 



History 

1. New section filed 6-5-80; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Reeister 80, No. 

23). 

2. Amendment filed 7-2-80; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 80, No. 

27). 

3. Amendment filed 5-15-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
20). 

4. Repealer and new section filed 9-19-2000; operative 10-19-2000 (Register 
2000, No. 38). 

§3456. Hand-Held Tools. 

(a) Hand-held tools shall be kept in good condition and be safely 
stored. 

(b) The use of a short-handled hoe or any other short-handled hand 
tool is prohibited in agricultural operations, as that term is defined in Sec- 
tion 3437, for weeding, thinning or hot-capping when such hoe or short- 
handled hand tool is used in a stooped, kneeling or squatting position. A 
long-handled hand tool used for these operations shall not be used as a 
short-handled hand tool in a stooped, kneeling or squatting position. 

(c)(1) Hand weeding, hand thinning, and hand hot-capping in a 
stooped, kneeling or squatting position shall not be permitted in agricul- 
airal operations as defined in Section 3437, unless there is no readily 
available, reasonable alternative means of performing the work that is 
suitable and appropriate to the production of the agricultural or horticul- 
tural commodity. 

(2) Upon inquiry made by the Division of Occupational Safety and 
Health personnel, the employer shall bear the burden of justifying that the 
use of hand weeding, hand thinning, or hand hot-capping was required 
due to the unsuitability of the use of a long-handled tool or other alterna- 
tive means of performing the work. 

(3) Nothing in this subsection shall be construed as prohibiting occa- 
sional or intermittent hand weeding, hand thinning or hand hot-capping 
in a stooped, squatting, or kneeling position that is incidental to a non- 
hand weeding operation. For purposes of this subsection, occasional or 
intermittent means an employee is devoting 20 percent or less of his or 
her weekly work time to hand weeding, hand thinning and hand hot-cap- 
ping. 

(4) Every employer shall provide employees engaged in hand weed- 
ing, hand thinning and hand hot-capping, not determined to be occasion- 
al or intermittent as defined in subsection (3), an additional five (5) min- 
utes of rest period time, which insofar as practicable, shall be in the 
middle of each work period. The authorized rest period time shall be 
based on the total hours worked daily at the rate of fifteen (15) minutes 
net rest time per four (4) hours of work, or major fraction thereof. Autho- 
rized rest time shall be counted as hours worked for which there shall be 
no deduction from wages. 

(5) Employees engaging in hand weeding, hand thinning, or hand hot- 
capping shall be provided gloves and knee pads, as necessary, and train- 
ing required to perform the job in accordance with all guidelines of Sec- 
tion 3203, Injury and Illness Prevention Program. 

(6) The employer shall, in accordance with Title 8, Section 1 1 140, pro- 
vide any hand tool that may be used under subsection (c)(1). 

(d) The provisions of subsection (c)(1) and (c)(2) shall not apply to the 
following situations: 

(1) High density plants spaced less than 2 inches apart when planted; 

(2) Any agricultural or horticultural commodity grown in fields or 
greenhouses which have been registered with the County Agricultural 
Commissioner as organic; 

(3) All agricultural or horticultural commodities when they are seed- 
lings; and 

(4) Horticultural commodities grown in tubs or planter containers with 
an opening not to exceed fifteen (15) inches. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . New secfion filed 1-5-87; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 87, No.2). 

2. Amendment of subsection (b) and new subsections (c)-(d)(4) filed 10-7-2004 
as an emergency; operative 10-7-2004 (Register 2004, No. 41). A Certificate 



• 



Page 600.2 



Register 2005, No. 17; 4-29-2005 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§ 3457 



of Compliance must be transmitted to OAL by 2-4-2005 or emergency lan- 
guage will be repealed by operation of law on the following day. 

3. Amendment of subsection (b) and new subsections (c)-(d)(4) refiled 
1-26-2005 as an emergency; operative 2-4-2005 (Register 2005, No. 4). A 
Certificate of Compliance must be transmitted to OAL by 6-6-2005 or emer- 
gency language will be repealed by operation of law on the following day. 

4. Certificate of Compliance as to 1-26-2005 order, including amendment of sub- 
sections (c)(1), (d)(2) and (d)(4), transmitted to OAL 3-18-2005 and filed 
4-29-2005 (Register 2005. No. 17). 

§ 3457. Field Sanitation. 

(a) Scope: This section shall apply to all agricultural employers. 

(b) Definitions. 

"Agricultural employer" means any person, corporation, association, 
or other legal entity that: 

A. Owns or operates an agricultural establishment; 

B. Contracts with the owner or operator of an agricultural establish- 
ment in advance of production for the purchase of a crop and exercises 
substantial control over production: or 

C. Recaiits and supervises employees or is responsible for the man- 
agement and condition of an agricultural establishment. 

"Agricultural establishment" is a business operation that uses paid em- 
ployees in agricultural operations. 

"Agricultural operation" means any operation necessary to farming 
pursuant to Section 3437. 

"Hand-labor operations" means agricultural activities or agricultural 
operations performed by hand or with hand tools in the production of 
food, fiber, or other materials such as seed, seedlings, plants, or parts of 
plants. "Hand-labor operations" also include other acdvities or opera- 
tions performed in conjunction with hand-labor in the field. Some exam- 
ples of "hand-labor operations" are the hand-manipulation of irrigation 
pipes and other irrigation equipment by irrigators; the hand-cultivation, 
hand-weeding, hand-planting and hand-harvesting of vegetables, nuts, 
fruits, seedlings or other crops, including mushrooms; and the hand pack- 
ing of produce into containers, whether done on the ground, on a moving 
machine or in a temporary packing shed located in the field. "Hand-la- 
bor" does not include such activities as logging operations, the care or 
feeding of livestock, or hand-labor operations in permanent structures 
(e.g., canning facilities or packing houses). 

"Handwashing facility" means a facility providing either a basin, con- 
tainer, or outlet with an adequate supply of potable water, soap or other 
suitable cleansing agent and single-use towels. 

"Potable water" means water that meets the primary standards for 
drinking purposes found in Title 22, California Code of Regulations, Di- 
vision 4, Chapter 15. 

"Toilet facility" means a fixed or portable facility designed for the pur- 
pose of adequate collection and containment of the products of both defe- 
cation and urination which is supplied with toilet paper adequate to em- 
ployee needs. Toilet facility includes biological, chemical, flush and 
combustion toilets and sanitary privies, in portable or mixed form. 

(c) Requirements. 

Agricultural operations not involving hand-labor operations shall 
meet the requirements of Sections 3360-3368. 

All other agricultural operations shall meet the following require- 
ments: 

( 1 ) Potable drinking water. 

(A) Potable water shall be provided during working hours and placed 
in locations readily accessible to all employees. Access to such drinking 
water shall be permitted at all times. 

(B) The water shall be fresh and pure, suitably cool, and in sufficient 
amounts, taking into account the air temperature, humidity, and the na- 
ture of the work performed, to meet the needs of all employees. 

(C) The water shall be dispensed in single-use drinking cups or by 
fountains. The use of common drinking cups or dippers is prohibited. 
Notk: For the purposes of this section, the term "common use," when applied to 
a drinking receptacle, is defined as its use for drinking purposes by, or for, more 
than one person without its being thoroughly cleansed and sterilized between con- 
secutive uses thereof by methods prescribed by or acceptable to the State Depart- 
ment for Health Services. 



(D) Drinking water containers shall be constructed of materials that 
maintain water quality, and shall be provided with a faucet, fountain, or 
other suitable device for drawing the water. 

(2) Toilet and handwashing facilities. 

(A) Separate toilet facilities for each sex shall be provided for each 
twenty (20) employees or fraction thereof One handwashing facility 
shall be provided for each twenty (20) employees or fraction thereof 
Where there are less than five employees, separate toilet rooms for each 
sex are not required provided toilet rooms can be locked from the inside 
and contain at least one water closet. Urinals may be installed instead of 
water closets in toilet rooms to be used only by men provided that the 
number of water closets shall not be less than two-thirds the minimum 
number of toilet facilities. 

EXCEPTION: An employer may provide transportation to toilet and handwashing 
facilities, as an alternative means of compliance if: 1. employees perform field 
work for a period of less than two (2) hours (including transportation time to and 
from the field), 2. fewer than five (5) employees in any agricultural establishment 
are engaged in hand-labor operations on any given day, or 3. employees are not 
engaged in hand-labor operations. 

(B) Toilet and hand-washing facilities shall at all times meet the fol- 
lowing standards: 

1 . Toilet facilities shall be appropriately screened to keep flies and oth- 
er vermin away from the excreta. 

2. Units housing toilet and handwashing facilities shall be ventilated 
and provided with self-closing doors, lockable from the inside, and shall 
be otherwise constructed to ensure privacy. 

3. Toilet facilities shall provide a minimum area of eight (8) square 
feet, with a minimum width of two and one-half (2 1/2) feet for each toilet 
seat. A minimum area of ten (10) square feet, with a minimum width of 
two and one-half (2 1/2) feet, shall be required when a urinal is included. 
Sufficient additional space shall be included if handwashing facilities are 
within the facility. 

4. The wastewater tank on chemical toilets shall be constructed of du- 
rable, easily cleanable material and have a minimum tank capacity of for- 
ty (40) gallons. Construction shall be such as to prevent splashing on the 
occupant, field, or road. 

5. The handwashing water tank shall provide a minimum capacity of 
fifteen (15) gallons. 

6. Units housing toilet and handwashing facilifies shall be rigidly con- 
structed and their inside surfaces shall be of nonabsorbent material, 
smooth, readily cleanable. and finished in a light color. 

7. Water flush toilets and handwashing faciUties shall conform to Title 
24, California Code of Regulations, Part 5, California Plumbing Code. 

(C) Toilet and handwashing faciHfies shall be accessibly located and 
in close proximity to each other. 

(D) The facilities shall be located within a one-quarter (1/4) mile walk 
or within five (5) minutes, whichever is shorter. 

(E) Where due to terrain it is not feasible to locate facilities as required 
above, the facilifies shall be located at the point closest to vehicular ac- 
cess. 

(3) Maintenance standards: Potable drinking water facilities, toilet fa- 
cilifies, and handwashing facilities, which are under the control of the 
employer, shall be serviced and maintained by the employer at all times 
in accordance with appropriate public health sanitation practices, includ- 
ing the following: 

(A) Drinking water containers shall be regulariy cleaned, shall he re- 
filled daily or more often as necessary, and shall be kept covered and pro- 
tected to prevent persons from dipping the water by hand or otherwise 
contaminating it. 

(B) Toilet faciUties shall be, at all fimes. operational, maintained in a 
clean and sanitary condition, and kept in good repair. Written records of 
service and maintenance shall be maintained and retained lor two years. 

(C) Toilet paper shall be provided in a suitable holder in each toilet 
unit. 

(D) Effective odor control and solid-liquefying chemicals shall at all 
times be used in chemical toilet waste holding tanks. 



Page 600.3 



Register 2007, No. 40; 10-5-2007 



§3458 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



(E) Contents of chemical tanks shall be disposed of by draining or 
pumping into a sanitary sewer, an approved septic tank of sufficient ca- 
pacity to handle the wastes, a suitably sized and constructed holding tank 
approved by the local health department, or by any other method ap- 
proved by the local health department. 

(F) Privies shall be moved to a new site or taken out of service when 
the pit is filled to within two (2) feet of the adjacent ground surface. The 
pit contents shall be covered with at least two (2) feet of well-compacted 
dirt when the privy is moved. 

(G) Handwashing facilities shall at all times meet the following stan- 
dards: 

1. Pure, wholesome, and potable water shall be available for hand- 
washing. 

2. Handwashing facilities shall be refilled with potable water as neces- 
sary to ensure an adequate supply. 

3. Soap or other suitable cleansing agent and single-use towels shall 
be provided. 

4. Signs shall be posted, indicating that the water is only for handwash- 
ing purposes. 

5. Handwashing facilities shall be provided at the toilet unit or in the 
immediate vicinity. 

6. Handwashing facilities shall be maintained in a clean and sanitary 
condition. 

(H) The disposal of wastes from toilet or handwashing facilities shall 
not cause unsanitary conditions, nuisance, or contamination. 

(4) Reasonable use: The employer shall notify each employee of the 
location of the sanitation facilities and potable water and shall allow each 
employee reasonable opportunities during the workday to use these faci- 
lities. The employer shall ensure that employees use the sanitation facili- 
ties provided and shall inform each employee of the importance of each 
of the following good hygiene practices to minimize exposure to the haz- 
ards in the field of heat, communicable diseases, retention of urine, and 
agrichemical residues: 

(A) Use the water and facilities provided for drinking, handwashing, 
and elimination; 

(B) Drink water frequently, especially on hot days; 

(C) Urinate as frequently as necessary; 

(D) Wash hands both before and after using the toilet; and 

(E) Wash hands before eating and smoking. 

(d) Required Reports: Employers cited under this section shall provide 
to the Division annually for a period of five (5) years following the final 
order of a citation a written statement under penalty of perjury giving the 
following information: the estimated peak number of employees; the toi- 
lets, washing, and drinking water facilities to be provided by the employ- 
er; and any rental and maintenance agreements related to the require- 
ments of this subsection. 

Note-. Authority cited: Sections 142.3 and 6712, Labor Code. Reference: Sec- 
tions 142.3, 2441 and 6712, Labor Code. 

History 

1. New section filed 12-23-91; operative 1-22-92 (Register 92, No. 12). 

2. Change without regulatory effect amending subsection (b) "Potable water" 
filed 10-1-2002 pursuant to section 100, title 1, California Code of Regulations 
(Register 2002, No. 40). 

§ 3458. Fall Protection for Date Palm Operations. 

(a) Employees working in or on date palm trees shall be protected from 
falling at heights greater than 7 1/2 feet by the use of approved equip- 
ment/devices such as, but not limited to, elevating work platforms or aeri- 
al devices, or fall protection as provided in accordance with this Section. 

(1) Fall protection systems used to meet the requirements of subsec- 
tion (a) (i.e., approved personal fall arrest, fall restraint, or work position- 
ing device system) shall meet the requirements of Section 1670 of the 
Construction Safety Orders, except as modified by subsection (b), (c) and 
(d) of this section. 

(b) Lanyards used in a fall protection system shall be constructed of 
wire rope or chain when there is a hazard of cutting or damaging the lan- 
yard by the use of tools or knives. 



( 1 ) Wire rope lanyards shall meet the minimum strength requirements 
provided in Section 1670 of the Constmction Safety Orders. 

(2) Chains used in a fall protection system shall maintain a safety fac- 
tor of at least 10. 

Note: The term "safety factor" is defined as the ratio of the ultimate breaking 
strength of a member or piece of material or equipment to the actual working stress 
or safe load when in use. 

(c) Date palm saddles shall be designed by a competent person and 
shall be used in accordance with the following: 

( 1 ) Date palm saddles are permitted for use only as part of positioning 
device systems and must incorporate the use of an approved body belt; 

(2) Lanyard(s) shall be attached to at least two fronds; and 

(3) Dead, decayed, or damaged fronds shall not be used for anchorage. 

(d) Positioning device systems used in the crown of date palm trees are 
permitted for fall protection provided the following conditions are met: 

(1 ) Lanyard(s) shall be attached to at least two fronds; 

(2) Lanyard(s) shall have a maximum length of 8 feet and be rigged 
in such a manner that an employee cannot free fall more than 2 feet; 

(3) Dead, decayed, or damaged fronds shall not be used for anchorage; 
and 

(4) When changing work positions, at least one lanyard remains at- 
tached to provide fall protection at all times. 

(e) A job briefing shall be conducted by a qualified person before each 
work assignment begins. Such job briefing shall include the description 
of the hazards unique to a specific job, appropriate work procedures to 
be followed, and other items to ensure that the work can be accomplished 
safely. 

(f) Prior to each use, fall protecfion equipment shall be inspected by 
a qualified person and any found to be defective shall be immediately re- 
moved from service. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Secfion 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 
1. New section filed 8^-2003; operative 9-3-2003 (Register 2003, No. 32). 

§ 3458.1 . Ladders Attached to Date Palms. 

(a) Ladders permanently attached to the date palm for access and 
egress during cultivation and harvesting activities shall meet the follow- 
ing requirements: 

(1) Ladders shall be attached to the date palm trunk with a minimum 
of three 12-gauge galvanized wires fastened at the top, middle and bot- 
tom portion of the ladder. Ladders and fastenings shall be capable of sup- 
porting a minimum single concentrated live load of at least 250 pounds. 

(2) In addition to the requirements of subsection (a)( 1 ), a corrosion re- 
sistant steel safety chain shall be securely attached to the ladder rails be- 
low the top rung and around the crown of the palm tree. 

(3) When more than one ladder is attached to the tree (i.e. when the lad- 
ders are used in tandem), they shall be connected to each other by a safety 
chain securely attaching the ladder rails above the lowest rung of the up- 
per ladder to the ladder rails of the uppermost rung of the lower ladder 
and around the trunk. 

(4) Not more than two ladder secfions shall be permanently attached 
to a date palm. 

(5) There shall be not more than one worker on a ladder attached to the 
date palm at any one time. 

(6) Safety chains and related attachments shall maintain a safety factor 
of at least 10. 

(7) Ladder rungs shall be spaced no more than 1 2 inches apart and shall 
be at least 12 inches long. 

(8) The distance from the centerline of the ladder rung to the nearest 
permanent object shall be spaced to provide the user with a secure foot- 
hold on the rung. 

(9) Individual ladders shall be no more than 15 feet in length. 

(b) Use of date palm ladders shall be in accordance with the require- 
ments of Section 3276 of these Safety Orders. 

(c) Only metal ladders may be permanently attached to date palms. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 



• 



Page 600.4 



Register 2007, No. 40; 10-5-2007 



Title 8 



Genera! Industry Safety Orders 



5} 3460 



History 
1. New section filed 10-3-2007; operative 1 1-2-2007 (Register 2007, No. 40). 



• 



Article 14. Marine Terminal Operations 

§ 3459. Scope. 

This Arlicie applies to all marine terminal operations including long- 
shoring and stevedoring on land, pier, wharf and dock from the terminal 
gate(s) up to the pier, land, wharf or dock end of the gangway, and to all 
shore-based cranes or other shore-based devices used for loading of car- 
go on or off a vessel or ship on the navigable waters of the United States 
contiguous to the borders of the State of California. 



NOTE; Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. Repealer and new Article 14 (Sections 3459-3474) filed 1 1-28-75; effective 
thirtieth day thereafter (Register 75, No. 48). 

2. Amendment filed 12-12-84; effective thirtieth day thereafter ( Register 84. No. 
50). 



§ 3460. Definitions. 

Apron. That open portion of a marine terminal immediately adjacent 
to a vessel berth and used in the direct transfer of cargo between the termi- 
nal and vessel. 



• 



[The next page is 60L] 



Page 600.5 



Register 2007, No. 40; 10-5-2007 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3462 



Cargo Door (transit shed door). A door designed to permit transfer of 
cargo to and from a marine terminal structure. 

Cargo Packaging. Any method of containment for shipment, including 
cases, cartons, crates and sacks, but excluding large units such as inter- 
modal containers, vans or similar devices. 

Confined Space. See Section 5156(b). Examples of confined spaces 
are intermodal tank containers and portable tanks. 

Dock. A wharf or pier forming all or part of a waterfront facility, in- 
cluding marginal or quayside berthing facilities, not to be confused with 
"loading dock" as at a transit shed or container freight station, or with the 
body of water between piers or wharves. Enclosed Space. A space where 
the ready access or egress for the removal of a suddenly disabled em- 
ployee is difficult due to the location and/or size of the opening(s). 

Flammable Atmosphere. An atmosphere containing more than 10 per- 
cent of the lower flammable limit of a flammable or combustible vapor 
or dust mixed with air. 

Front-end Attachments. (As applied to cranes). Various attachments 
applied to the basic machine for the performance of functions such as lift- 
ing, clamshell or magnet services. 

Front-end Attachments. (As applied to power-operated industrial 
trucks). Various devices, such as roll clamps, rotating and sideshifting 
carriages, magnets, rams, crane arms or booms, load stabilizers, scoops, 
buckets and dumping bins, attached to the load end for handling lifts as 
single or multiple units. 

Gangway. Any ramp-like or stair-like means of access provided to 
enable personnel to board or leave a vessel, including accommodation 
ladders, gangplanks and brows. 

Hot Work. Riveting, welding, flame cutting or other fire or spark-pro- 
ducing operation. 

Intermodal Container. A reusable cargo container of rigid construc- 
tion and rectangular configuration, intended to contain one or more ar- 
ticles of cargo or bulk commodities for transportation by water and one 
or more other transport modes without intermediate cargo handling. The 
term includes completely enclosed units, open top units, fractional height 
units, units incorporating liquid or gas tanks and other variations fitting 
into the container system, demountable or with attached wheels. It does 
not include cylinders, drums, crates, cases, cartons, packages, sacks, 
unitized loads or any other form of packaging. 

Longshoring Operations. The loading, unloading, moving, or handl- 
ing of cargo, ships stores, gear, etc., within the scope of this Article. 

Loose Gear. Removable and replaceable components of equipment or 
devices which may be used with or as a part of assembled material handl- 
ing units for purposes such as making connections, changing line direc- 
tion and multiplying mechanical advantage. Examples are shackles and 
snatch blocks. 

Marine Terminal. Wharves, bulkheads, quays, piers, docks and other 
berthing locations and adjacent storage or contiguous areas and stmc- 
tures associated with the primary movements of cargo or materials from 
vessel to shore or shore to vessel including structures which are devoted 
to receiving, handling, holding, consolidation and loading or delivery of 
waterbome shipments and passengers, including areas devoted to the 
maintenance of the terminal or equipment. The term does not include 
production or manufacturing areas having their own docking facilities 
and located at a marine terminal nor does the term include storage facili- 
ties directly associated with those production or manufacturing areas. 

Stringpiece. A narrow walkway between the water edge of a berth and 
a shed or other structure. 

(See Sections 3207 and 4885 for additional definitions.) 
Note: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . Amendment filed 12-12-84; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 84, No. 
50). 



§3461. General. 

(a) All cargo handling gear and equipment provided by the employer 
shall be inspected by the employer or his authorized representative be- 
fore each use and, when necessary, at intervals during its use to insure 
that it is safe for its intended use. Any such gear which is found to be visi- 
bly unsafe shall not be used until it is made safe. 

(b) Drafts shall be safely slung before being hoisted. Loose dunnage 
or debris hanging or protruding from loads shall be removed. 

(c) Nails which are protruding from shoring or fencing in the immedi- 
ate work areas shall be bent over or otherwise rendered harmless. 

(Dunnage, lumber, or shoring material in which there are visibly pro- 
truding nails shall be removed from the immediate work area, or, if left 
in that area, the nails shall be bent over or otherwise rendered harmless. ) 

(d) Barges and railcars shall not be moved by cargo amners (running 
rigging) from vessel cargo booms, cranes or other equipment not suitable 
for the purpose. 

(e) Bales of cotton, wool, cork, wood pulp, burlap bags or similar ar- 
ticles shall be hoisted by straps or by other means strong enough to sup- 
port the weight of the bale. At least two hooks, each in a separate strap, 
shall be used. 

(f) Unitized loads bound by bands or straps may be hoisted by the 
banding or strapping only if the banding or strapping is suitable for hoist- 
ing and is strong enough to support the weight of the load. 

(g) No employee shall be hoisted by the load hoisting apparatus of a 
crane or derrick except on intermodal container spreaders equipped in ac- 
cordance with Section 3466(i). 

(h) When stringpiece or apron width is insufficient for safe footing, 
grab lines or rails shall be installed on the sides of permanent structures. 

(i) In order to provide safe access for handling lines while mooring and 
unmooring vessels, cargo or material shall not be stowed or vehicles 
placed where they obstruct the work surface to be used. 

(j) Hatch beams, covers and pontoons placed in terminal working 
areas shall be stowed in stable piles with beams secured against tipping 
or falling. Alternatively, beams may be laid on their sides. When beams 
and pontoons are stowed in tiers more than one high, dunnage or other 
suitable material shall be used under and between the tiers. 

(k) Cargo and material shall not obstmct access to vessels, cranes, ve- 
hicles or buildings. Means of access and egress within buildings shall be 
similarly unobstructed. 

(/) To prevent inadvertent employee entry into spaces that have been 
identified as having hazardous, flammable or oxygen deficient atmo- 
spheres, appropriate warning signs or equivalent means shall be posted 
at all means of access to those spaces. 

(m) Work shall not be carried on in the immediate vicinity of uncov- 
ered garbage or in the way of overboard discharges from sanitary lines 
unless employees are protected from the garbage or discharge by a baffle 
or splash boards. 

(n) Open fires and fires in drums or similar containers are prohibited. 

(o) Repair and reconditioning of damaged or leaking cargo packaging 
(coopering) shall be performed so as not to endanger employees. 
NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. Amendment filed 12-12-84; effecfive thirtieth day thereafter (Register 84, No. 
50). 

§ 3462. Hazardous Cargo. 

(a) Explosives and other hazardous cargo shall be loaded, unloaded. 
stored, transported or otherwise handled in accordance with the regula- 
tions of the U.S. Department of Transportation and the United States 
Coast Guard, (q.v., 33 CFR Part 126, 46 CFR Part 146. 49 CFR Part 172.) 

(b) Before cargo handling operations begin, the employer shall ascer- 
tain whether any hazardous cargo is to be handled and shall determine the 



Page 601 



(4-1-90) 



§3463 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



nature of the hazard. The employer shall inform employees of the nature 
of any hazard and any special precautions to be taken to prevent em- 
ployee exposure, and shall instruct employees to notify him of any leaks 
or spills. 

(c) All hazardous cargo shall be slung and secured so that neither the 
draft nor individual packages can fall as a result of tipping the draft or 
slacking of the supporting gear. 

(d) If hazardous cargo is spilled or if its packaging leaks, employees 
shall be removed from the affected area until the employer has ascer- 
tained the specific hazards, provided any equipment, clothing and venti- 
lation and fire protection equipment necessary to eliminate or protect 
against the hazard, and has instmcted cleanup employees in a safe meth- 
od of cleaning up and disposing of a spill and handling and disposing of 
leaking containers. Actual cleanup or disposal work shall be conducted 
under the supervision of a qualified person. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . Amendment filed 12-12-84; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 84, No. 

50). 



§ 3463. Hazardous Atmospheres and Substances. 

(a) Carbon Monoxide. 

(1) Exposure limits. The carbon monoxide content of the atmosphere 
in a room, building, vehicle, railcar or any enclosed space shall be main- 
tained at not more than 50 parts per million (0.005%) as an 8-hour time- 
weighted average and employees shall be removed from the enclosed 
space if the carbon monoxide concentration exceeds 1 00 parts per mil- 
lion (0.01%). 

(2) Testing. Tests to determine carbon monoxide concentration shall 
be made when necessary to ensure that employee exposure does not ex- 
ceed the limits specified in subsection (1). 

(3) Instrumentation. Tests for carbon monoxide concentration shall be 
made by qualified persons using gas detector tube units meeting the re- 
quirements of 30 CFR Part 1 1 or other equivalent methods. 

(4) Records. A record of the date, time, location and results of carbon 
monoxide tests shall be available for at least thirty (30) days. 

(b) Pesticides (Fumigants, Insecticides, Hazardous Preservatives). 

( 1 ) When the employer is aware that cargo in a space is or has been 
stowed, handled, or treated with a pesticide (fumigant, insecticide, or 
hazardous preservative), a determination shall be made as to whether a 
hazardous atmosphere is present in the space, and only employees pro- 
tected as required in subsection (5) of this section shall enter the space 
if it is hazardous. 

(2) Tests to determine the atmospheric concentration of chemicals 
used to treat cargo shall be: 

(A) Appropriate for the hazard involved; 

(B) Conducted by qualified persons; and 

(C) Performed at the intervals necessary to ensure that employee expo- 
sure does not exceed the permissible exposure limit for the chemical in- 
volved. 

(3) Results of any test shall be available for at least thirty (30) days. 

(4) Chemicals shall only be applied to cargoes by qualified persons. 

(5) Only qualified persons shall enter hazardous atmospheres, in 
which case the following provisions apply: 

(A) Persons entering a space containing a hazardous atmosphere shall 
be protected by respiratory and emergency protective equipment meet- 
ing the requirements of Article 10 and Section 5144 of the General Indus- 
try Safety Orders; and 

(B) Persons entering a space containing a hazardous atmosphere shall 
be instructed in the nature of the hazard, precautions to be taken, and the 
use of protective and emergency equipment. Standby observers, similar- 
ly equipped and instructed, shall continuously monitor the activity of em- 
ployees within such a space. 

(6) Signs shall be clearly posted where fumigants, pesticides or haz- 
ardous preservatives have created a hazardous atmosphere. These signs 



shall note the danger, identify specific chemical hazards, and give appro- 
priate information and precautions, including instructions for the emer- 
gency treatment of employees affected by any chemical in use. 

(c) Asbestos. When the packaging of asbestos cargo leaks, spillage 
shall be cleaned up by qualified employees protected from the harmful 
effects of asbestos as required by Section 5208. 

(d) Welding, Cutting and Heating on Preservative Coatings. 

( 1 ) Before hot work is commenced on surfaces covered by a preserva- 
tive coating of unknown flammability. a test shall be made by a qualified 
person to determine the coating's flammability. Preservative coatings 
shall be considered highly flammable when scrapings bum with extreme 
rapidity. 

(2) Appropriate precaution shall be taken to prevent ignition of highly 
flammable hardened preservative coatings. Highly flammable coatings 
shall be stripped from the area to be heated. An uncoiled fire hose with 
fog nozzle, underpressure, shall be immediately available in the hot work 
area. 

(3) Surfaces covered with preservative coatings shall be stripped for 

at least 4 inches ( 1 0.2 cm) from the area of heat application or employees 

shall be protected by supplied air respirators. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 
1 . New section tiled 1 2-1 2-84; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 84, No. 
50). For prior history, see Register 80, No. 27. 



§ 3464. Accident Prevention and First Aid. 

(a) Supervisory Accident Prevention Proficiency. 

(1) After the effective date of these orders immediate supervisors of 
cargo-handling operations of more than five (5) persons shall satisfacto- 
rily complete a course in accident prevention. Employees newly assigned 
to supervisory duties after that date shall be required to meet the provi- 
sions of this subsection within ninety (90) days of such assignment. 

(2) The course shall consist of instruction suited to the particular oper- 
ation involved. 

Note: The following are recommended topics: 

1. Safety responsibility and authority; 

2. elements of accident prevention; 

3. attitudes, leadership and motivation; 

4. hazards of longshoring, including peculiar local circumstances; 

5. hazard identification and elimination; 

6. applicable regulations; and 

7. accident investigations. 

(b) First Aid. 

( 1 ) Employers shall instruct employees to report every injury, regard- 
less of severity, to the employer. 

(2) A first aid kit shall be available at the terminal, and at least one per- 
son holding a valid first aid certificate shall be at the terminal when work 
is in progress. 

(3) First aid kits shall be weatherproof and contain individual sealed 
packages for each item that must be kept sterile. Each kit shall either be 
approved by a licensed physician or shall include at least the following 
items: 

(A) Gauze roller bandages, 1-inch and 2-inch (25.4 mm and 50.8 
mm); 

(B) Gauze compress bandages, 4-inch (101.6 mm); 

(C) Adhesive bandages, 1-inch (25.4 mm); 

(D) Triangular bandage, 40-inch (101.6 cm); 

(E) Eye dressing; 

(F) Wire or thin board splints; 

(G) Forceps; and 

(H) First aid dressing. 

(4) Stretchers permanently equipped with bridles for hoisting shall be 
readily accessible. A blanket or other suitable covering shall be available. 

(5) Telephone or equivalent means of communication shall be readily 
available. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 



Page 602 



(4-1-90) 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3466 



History 
1 . New section filed 12-12-84; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 84, No. 
50). For prior history, see Register 80, No. 27. 

§ 3465. Terminal Facilities. 

(a) The structural integrity of docks, piers, wharves, terminals and 
working surfaces shall be maintained. 

(1) Dockboards (car and bridge plates) shall be designed, constructed, 
and maintained to prevent vehicles from nimiing off the edge. 

(b)( 1 ) Vehicle curbs, bull rails, or other effective barriers at least 6 in- 
ches (13.74 cm) in height, shall be provided at the waterside edge of 
aprons and bulkheads, except where vehicles are prohibited. Curbs or 
bull rails installed after the effective date of this section shall be at least 
10 inches (22.9 cm) in height. 

(2) The provisions of Subsection (b)(1) also apply at the edge of any 
fixed level above the common floor area from which vehicles may fall, 
except at loading docks, where cargo is moved by vehicles. 

(c) Readily located ladders shall be provided on all docks, wharves or 
piers where employees' work exposes them to the hazard of drowning. 
The ladders shall reach from the floor of the structure to the lowest water 
elevation. Portable ladders shall be equipped with a substantial means to 
secure them readily to the structure. 

(d) Every marine terminal shall have conspicuously posted signs as 
follows: 

(1) Locations of first aid facilities; 

(2) Locations of telephones; 

(3) Telephone numbers of the closest ambulance service, hospital or 
other source of medical attention, police, fire department, and emergency 
squad (if any); and 

(4) Locations of fire fighting and emergency equipment and fire exits. 

(e) Signs shall be clearly worded and legible, and shall contain a key 
word or legend indicating the reason for the sign. 

( 1 ) Key words are such words as Danger, Warning, Caution. 

(2) Legends are more specific explanations such as High Voltage, 
Close Clearance, Pedestrian Crossing. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 143.2, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . New section filed 12-12-84; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 84, No. 
50). For prior history, see Register 80, No. 27. 

2. Editorial correcfion of subsection (e)(1) printing error (Register 85, No. 19). 

3. New subsection (a)(1) filed 3-6-2001 ; operative 3-6-2001. Submitted to OAL 
for prinfing only pursuant to Labor Code section 142.3(a)(3) (Register 2001, 
No. 10). 

§ 3466. Intermodal Containers. 

(a) Every intermodal container shall be legibly and permanently 
marked with: 

(1) The weight of the container when empty, in pounds; 

(2) The maximum cargo weight the container is designed to carry, in 
pounds; and 

(3) The sum of the weight of the container and the cargo, in pounds. 

(b) No container shall be hoisted by any crane or derrick unless the fol- 
lowing conditions have been met: 

(1) The employer shall ascertain from the carrier whether a container 
to be hoisted is loaded or empty. Empty containers shall be identified be- 
fore loading or discharge in such a manner as will inform every supervi- 
sor and foreman on the site and in charge of loading or discharging, or 
every crane or other hoisting equipment operator and signalman, if any, 
that such container is empty. Methods of identification may include car- 
go plans, manifests or markings on the container. 

(2) In the case of a loaded container: 

(A) The actual gross weight shall be plainly marked so as to be visible 
to the crane or other hoisting equipment operator or signalman, or to ev- 
ery supervisor and foreman on the site and in charge of the operation: or 

(B) The cargo stowage plan or equivalent permanently recorded dis- 
play serving the same purpose, containing the actual gross weight and the 
serial number or other positive identification of that specific container, 
shall be provided to the crane or other hoisting equipment operator and 



signalman, if any, and to every supervisor and foreman on the site and in 
charge of the operation. 

(3) Every outbound loaded container which is received at a marine ter- 
minal ready to load aboard a vessel without further consolidation or load- 
ing shall be weighed to obtain the actual gross weight, either at the termi- 
nal or elsewhere, before being hoisted. 

(4) (A) When container weighing scales are located at a marine termi- 
nal, any outbound container with a load consolidated at that terminal 
shall be weighed to obtain an actual weight before being hoisted. 

(B) If the terminal has no scales, the actual gross weight may he calcu- 
lated on the basis of the container's contents and the container's empty 
weight. The weights used in the calculation shall be posted conspicuous- 
ly on the container, with the name of the person making the calculation 
and the date. 

(5) Open type vehicle carrying containers and those built specifically 
and used solely for the carriage of compressed gases are excepted from 
Subsections (b)(3) and (b)(4) of this section. 

(6) The weight of loaded inbound containers from foreign ports shall 
be determined by weighing or by the method of calculation described in 
Subsection (b)(4)(B) or by shipping documents. 

(7) Any scale used within the United States to weigh containers for the 
purpose of the requirements of this section shall meet the accuracy stan- 
dards of the state or local public authority in which the scale is located. 

(c) No container or containers shall be hoisted if its actual gross weight 
exceeds the weight marked as required in Subsection (a)(3) of this section 
or it exceeds the capacity of the crane or other hoisting device intended 
to be used. 

(d) ( 1) Marked or designated areas shall be set aside within a container 
or roll-on roll-of terminal for passage of employees to and from active 
cargo transfer points, except where transportation to and from those 
points is provided by the employer. 

(2) The employer shall direct employees to stay clear of the area be- 
neath a suspended container. 

(e) Employees either working in the immediate area of container han- 
dling equipment such as cranes or industrial trucks or in the terminal's 
traffic lanes, shall wear high visibility vests, shirts, jackets or other ar- 
ticles of clothing marked with or made of reflectorized or high visibility 
material. 

(f) Containers shall be handled using lifting fittings or other arrange- 
ments suitable and intended for the purpose except when damage to an 
intermodal container makes special means of handling necessary. 

(1) Loaded intermodal containers of 20 feet (6.1 m) or more in length 
shall be hoisted as follows: 

(A) When hoisting by the top fitting, the lifting forces shall be applied 
vertically from at least four (4) such fittings or by means which will safety 
do so without damage to the container, and using the lifting fittings pro- 
vided. 

(B) If hoisted from bottom fittings, the hoisting connections shall bear 
on the fittings only, making no other contact with the container. The 
angles of the four bridle legs shall not be less than 30 to the horizontal in 
the case of 40-foot (12.2 m) containers; 37 in the case of 20-foot (6. 1 m) 
containers. 

(C) Lifting containers by fork lift trucks or by grappling arms from 
above or from one side may be done only if the container is designed for 
this type of handling. 

(D) Other means of hoisting may be used only if the containers and 
hoisting means are designed for such use. 

(2)(A) When using intermodal container spreaders that employ lan- 
yards for activation of load disengagement, all possible precautions shall 
be taken to prevent accidental release of the load. 

(B) Intermodal container spreader twistlock systems shall be designed 
and used so that a suspended load cannot accidently be released. 

(3) Flat bed trucks or container chassis used to move intermodal con- 
tainers shall be equipped with pins, flanges, or other means to prevent the 
container from shifting. 



Page 603 



Register 2001, No. 39; 9-28-2001 



§3467 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



(g) ( 1 ) Intermodal containers shall be inspected for defects in structur- 
al members or fittings before handling. 

(2) Any intermodal container found to be unsafe shall be identified as 
such, promptly removed from service and repaired before being returned 
to service. 

(h) Containers shall not be hoisted unless all engaged chassis twist 
locks are released. 

(i) When intermodal container spreaders are used to transfer em- 
ployees to or from the tops of containers, the spreaders shall be equipped 
with a personnel platform equipped with fixed standard railings, pro- 
vided that the railings have one or more openings for access. The open- 
ings shall be fitted with a means of closure, such as chains with hooks. 
Note. Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . New section filed 12-12-84; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 84, No. 
50). For prior history, see Register 80, No. 27. 

2. Editorial conection of subsection (b)(2)(B) printing enor (Register 85, No. 19). 

3. Amendment of subsection (e) and Notk filed 7-29-96; operative 8-28-96 
(Register96, No. 31). 

§ 3467. Log Handling. 

(a) The employer shall ensure that structures (bunks) used to contain 
logs have rounded comers and rounded structural parts to avoid sling 
datnage. 

(b) Two or more binders or equivalently safe means of containment 
shall reinain on logging trucks and railcars to secure logs during move- 
ment of the truck or car within the terminal. During unloading, logs shall 
be prevented froin moving while binders are being removed. 

(c) Logs shall be hoisted by two slings or by other gear designed for 
safe hoisting. 

(d) Logs placed adjacent to vehicle curbs on the dock shall not be over 
one tier high unless placed in bunks or so stacked as not to roll or other- 
wise create a hazard to employees. 

(e) Before logs are slung up from the dock, they shall be stably sup- 
ported to prevent spreading and to allow passage of slings beneath the 
load. When bunks or similar retaining devices are used, no log shall be 
higher than the stanchions or retaining members of the device. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . New section filed 12-1 2-84; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
19). 

2. Editorial correction printing text of Section 3467 which was inadvertently 
oinitted during production of Register 84, No. 50 (Register 85, No. 19). 

§ 3468. Pallets. 

(a) In addition to the requirements contained in Section 3338 the fol- 
lowing shall apply: 

(1) Wing or lip-type pallets hoisted by means of bar bridles shall have 
an overhanging wing or lip at least 3 inches long. Loaded pallets which 
on visual examination do not meet the requirements of this Section, shall 
be placed on pallets meeting the requirements before being hoisted. 

(2) Bridles used to handle flush end or box-type pallets shall be of such 
a design as to prevent them from becoming disengaged from the pallet 
under load. 

(b) Disposable pallets intended for only one use shall not be reused for 
hoisting. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Secfion 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 
1 . Amendment filed 12-12-84; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 84, No. 
50). 

§ 3469. Industrial Trucks. 

(a) All industrial trucks or tractors used for hauling, pushing, lifting or 
tiering materials shall comply with Article 25 of these Orders except as 
modified in subsection (b) of this section. 

(b) Powered Industrial Truck Operator Training. Marine terminal op- 
erations shall comply with the powered industrial truck operator training 



requirements contained in Article 25, Section 3668 except as permitted 
by federal OSHA Instruction CPL 2- 1.28 A, Enforcement Guidance for 
the Longshoring and Marine Terminal Industries, issued by the Director- 
ate of Compliance Programs. August 1 1 , 2000, revised by CPL 2-1 .28A, 
November 30, 2000, Section X, paragraphs A-G which are hereby incor- 
porated by reference. 

Note: References to federal OSHA regulations contained in CPL 2-1 .28A, Sec- 
tion X, paragraphs A-G coiTCspond to the italicized Section 3668 reeulations 
shown in brackets as follows: 1 9 1 7.27 and 1 9 1 8.98 [Article 14]. 1 9 1 0. 1 78(/) [Sec- 
tioii 3668], 1910.178(/)(4)(i) [Section 3668(d)(2)], 1910.]78(/)(6) [Section 
3668(f)]. 1910.178(/)(3) [Section 3668(c)], 1910(/)(4)(ii)(A), (C) [Section 
3668(d)(2)(A). (C)], 1910.178(/)(4)(ii)(B) [Section 3668(d)(1)(B)], 
1910.178(/)(3)(i) [Section 3668(c)(1)]. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

I. Amendment of secdon and new Noti-: filed 9-27-2001 ; operative 9-27-2001 
(Register 2001, No. 39). 

§ 3470. Longshoring Operations in the Vicinity of Repair 
and Maintenance Work. 

(a) Longshoring operations shall not be carried on: 
When noise-producing maintenance, construction or repair work in- 
terferes with communication of waiTiings or instructions. 

(2) Where einployees are exposed to injurious light rays, hot metal, or 
sparks, any of which result from welding or cutting. 

(3) Where employees are exposed to unsafe concentrations of dust or 
vapors from sandblasting or spray painting. 

(4) At any time that it is ascertained that the atmosphere in which em- 
ployees would be working is immediately dangerous to life, or if the at- 
mosphere becomes immediately dangerous to life during operations. 
NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . Amendment filed 12-12-84; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 84, No. 
50). 

§ 3471 . Chutes, Gravity Conveyors and Rollers. 

(a) Chutes used in the manual handling of cargo shall be of adequate 
length and strength for the use to which they are put and shall be kept free 
of splinters and sharp edges. 

(b) When necessary for the safety of employees, chutes shall be 
equipped with sideboards to afford protection from falling objects. 

(c) Chutes and gravity roller sections shall be firmly placed or secured 
to prevent displacement. 

(d) Gravity rollers shall be of sufficient strength for the weight of mate- 
rial which is placed upon them. Rollers shall be locked in position to pre- 
vent them from falling or jumping out of the frame. 

(e) Frames shall be kept free of burrs and sharp edges. 

(f) When necessary for the safety of einployees, provisions shall be 
made for braking objects other than bulk commodities at the deU very end 
of the roller or chute. 

(g) Chute and hopper openings which present a hazard shall be 
guarded to prevent employees from falling through them. 

(h) When employees are working on hoppers, the hopper shall be 
equipped with a safe walkway and means of access. 

(i) Direct communication shall be provided between the discharge or 
shipboard control end of loading spouts and chutes and the point in the 
terminal from which the flow of cargo is controlled. 

(j) Befbre an employee enters an empty bin: 

(1) Personnel controlling the flow of cargo into the bin shall have been 
notified of the entry; and 

(2) The power supply to the equipment carrying the cargo to the bin 
shall be turned off. locked out and tagged. 

(k) Before an employee enters a bin containing a bulk commodity such 
as coal or sugar, the employer shall ensure that: 

( 1 ) Persormel controlling the flow of cargo into the bin have been noti- 
fied of the entry; 

(2) The power supply to the equipment carrying the cargo to the bin 
is turned off, locked out and tagged. 



Page 604 



Register 2001, No. 39; 9-28-2001 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§ 3473 



• 



• 



(3) The employee entering the bin wears a hfehne and safety harness; 
and 

(4) A standby attendant equipped to perform a rescue is continuously 
stationed outside the bin until the employee has left the bin. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . Amendment filed 12-12-84; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 84, No. 
50). 

§ 3472. Cranes and Other Hoisting Equipment. 

(a) All cranes and other hoisting equipment and the operation thereof 
shall comply with Group 13 and this Article (14). 

(b) Every crane not part of a vessel's permanent equipment shall be 
equipped with a load indicating device, a load moment device, or a device 
that prevents an overload condition. Only approved devices as defined 
in the General Safety Industry Orders, Section 3206 shall be used. 
Exceptions: 

1 . Trolley equipped bridge-type cranes while handling containers known to be and 
identified as empty, or loaded, or while hoisting other lifts by means of a lifting 
beam supplied by the crane manufacturer for the purpose and in all cases within 
the crane rating; 

2. While handling bulk commodities or cargoes by means of clamshell bucket or 
magnet; 

3. While used to handle or hold hoses in connection with transfer of bulk liquids 
or other hose handled products; or 

4. While the crane is used exclusively to handle cargo or equipment the total actual 
gross weight of which is known by means of marking of the unit or units hoisted, 
when such total actual gross weight never exceeds 11,200 pounds, and when 
1 1 ,200 pounds is less than the rated capacity of the crane at the maximum outreach 
that is possible under the conditions of use at the lime. 

(c) Marking shall be conspicuously placed giving units of measure in 
pounds or both pounds and kilograms, capacity of the indicating system, 
accuracy of the indicating system, and operating instructions and precau- 
tions. In the case of systems utilizing indications other than actual 
weights, the marking shall include data on the means of measurement, 
capacity of the system, accuracy of the system, and operating instructions 
and precautions. If the system used provides no readout, but is such as to 
automatically cease crane operation when the rated load limit under any 
specific condition of use is reached, marking shall be provided giving the 
make and model of the device installed, a description of what it does, how 
it is operated, and any necessary precautions regarding the system. All 
weight indications, other types of loading indications, and other data re- 
quired shall be readily visible to the operator. 

(d) Wind-Indicating Devices. 

(1) After the effective date of these orders, each rail-mounted bridge 
and portal crane located outside of an enclosed structure shall be fitted 
with an operable wind-indicating device. 

(2) The wind-indicating device shall provide a visible measure of ve- 
locity or an audible warning to alert the operator of high wind conditions. 
That warning shall be transmitted whenever the following circumstances 
are present. 

(A) When the wind velocity reaches the warning speed, not exceeding 
the crane manufacturer's recommendations; and 

(B) When wind velocity reaches the shutdown speed, not exceeding 
the crane manufacturer's recommendations, at which work is to be 
stopped and the crane secured. 

(3) Instructions. The employer shall post operating instructions for 
high wind conditions in the operator's cab of each crane. Operators shall 
be directed to comply with these instructions. The instructions shall in- 
clude procedures for responding to high wind alerts and for any coordina- 
tion necessary with other cranes. 

(e) Securing of cranes in high winds. 

(1) When the wind reaches the crane's warning speed: 

(A) Gantry travel shall be stopped; and 

(B) The crane shall be readied for shutdown. 

(2) When the wind reaches the crane's shutdown speed: 

(A) Any portion of the crane spanning or partially spanning a vessel 
shall be moved clear of the vessel if safe to do so; and 



(B) The crane shall be secured against travel, using all available means 
of securing. 

(f) The employer shall monitor local weather conditions by subscrib- 
ing to a weather service or using equally effective means. 

(g) Communications. Means of communication shall be provided be- 
tween the operator's cab and the base of the gantry of all rail-mounted 
cranes. This requirement may be met by telephone, radio, sound-signal- 
ing system or other effective methods, but not solely by hand-signaling. 

(h) Qualifications of Machinery Operators. 

( 1 ) Only those employees determined by the employer to be compe- 
tent by reason of training or experience, and who understand the signs, 
notices and operating instructions and are familiar with the signal code 
in use shall be permitted to operate a crane, winch or other power oper- 
ated cargo handling apparatus, or any power operated vehicle, or give 
signals to the operator of any hoisting apparatus. 

EXCEPTION: Employees being trained and supervised by a designated person may 
operate such machinery and give signals to operators during training. 

(2) No employee known to have defective uncorrected eyesight or 
hearing, or to be suffering from heart disease, epilepsy, or similar ail- 
ments which may suddenly incapacitate him shall be permitted to operate 
a crane, winch or other power-operated cargo handling apparatus or a 
power-operated vehicle. 

(i) Operating Near Electric Power Lines 

( 1 ) Provisions for preventing accidents due to overhead high-voltage 
lines shall be in conformance with High-Voltage Electrical Safety Or- 
ders, Article 37. 

(2) Boom Guards. Cage-type boom guards, insulating links or prox- 
imity warning devices may be used on cranes, but they shall not be used 
in place of the required clearances. 

(j) Routine Inspection 

( 1 ) Qualified persons shall visually inspect each crane and derrick on 
each day of use for defects in functional operating components and shall 
report any defect found to the employer. The employer shall inform the 
operator of the findings. 

(2) A qualified person shall thoroughly inspect all functional compo- 
nents and accessible structural features of each crane or device at month- 
ly intervals. 

(3) Any defects found during such inspections which may create a 
safety hazard shall be corrected before further equipment use. Repairs 
shall be performed only by qualified persons. 

(4) A record of monthly inspections shall be maintained for six months 
in or on the crane or derrick or at the terminal. 

(k) A seat (lap) belt, meeting the requirements of 49 CFR 571 .208-210 
for a Type 1 seat belt assembly, shall be installed on the operator's seat 
of high speed container gantry cranes where the seat trolleys. 

NOTE: Authority cited; Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. Amendment filed 12-12-84; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 84, No. 
50). 

2. New subsection (k) filed 3-6-2001 ; operative 3-6-2001 . Submitted to OAL for 
printing only pursuant to Labor Code section 142.3(a)(3) (Register 2001, No. 
10). 

3. Amendment of subsection (b) filed 1-3-2002; operative 2-2-2002 (Register 
2002, No. 1 ). 

§ 3473. Certification of Shore-Based Material Handling 
Devices. 

(a) An employer shall not use any cargo handling crane, derrick, bulk 
cargo spout, or bulk cargo sucker, as defined in Section 488.5, which: 

(1) Is not part of a vessel's permanent equipment and is either located 
ashore or placed aboard a vessel only temporarily; and 

(2) Is used to transfer cargo or materials other than bulk liquids directly 
between the shore and a vessel; and 

(3) Is so located that its failure could cause injury to an employee until 
he has ascertained that the device has been certificated as evidenced by 
current and valid documents attesting to compliance with the require- 
ments specified in Article 99. 



Page 605 



Register 2002, No. t ; 1 -4-2002 



§ 3474 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



(b) Unless otherwise specifically required, the terms defined in this 
Subsection shall not include, and the provisions of 3474(a) shall not ap- 
ply to, the following equipment: 

( J ) Small industrial crane trucks as described and illustrated in Ameri- 
can National Standards Institute, B56. 1 , 1 969, "Safety Code for Powered 
Industrial Trucks." 

(2) Huletls. 

(3) Ore and taconite vessel loading facilities of such type that failure 
could not cause injury to an employee. 

(4) Bulk coal loading facilities. 

(5) Vertical pocket conveyors such as banana, sugar, or other similar 
marine legs. 

(6) Bridge cranes including steeple towers and dock-leg elevators. 

(7) Any gantry truck not capable of straddling two or more intermodal 
containers 16 feet (4.88m) in width. 

(c) Special Gear. 

( 1 ) Special stevedoring gear provided by the employer, the strength of 
which depends upon components other than commonly used stock items 
such as shackles, ropes or chains, shall be tested as a unit in accordance 
with the following table before initially being put into use. 

State Working Load Proof Load 

Up to 20 short tons 25 percent in excess 

Over 20 to 50 short tons 5 short tons in excess 

Over 50 short tons 10 percent in excess 

(2) Every spreader not a part of ship's gear and used for hoisting inter- 
modal containers shall be tested to a proof load equal to 25 percent in ex- 
cess of its rated capacity. Additionally, any spreader which suffers dam- 
age necessitating structural repair shall be retested after repair and before 
being returned to service. 

(3) Certificates attesting to the required tests shall be available for in- 
spection. 

(d) Wire rope and loose gear obtained after the effective date of this 
section, and used for material handling shall have been tested and certifi- 
cated before being placed into use. Certificates attesting to the required 
tests, inspections and examinations shall be available. 

Note; Authority cited: Section 142.3 Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3 La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . Amendment filed 12-12-84; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 84, No. 
50). 

§ 3474. Hooks, Slings, Bridles and Fittings. 

In addition to the following requirements, the provisions of Group 13 
shall apply. 

(a) All hooks, slings, bridles and other fittings shall be of correct size 
for the work to be done and shall have strength sufficient to sustain the 
loads imposed upon them. 

(b) Cargo handling bridles, such as pallet bridles, which are to remain 
attached to the hoisting gear while hoisting successive drafts, shall be at- 
tached by shackles, or other positive means shall be taken to prevent them 
from becoming accidentally disengaged from the cargo hook. 

(c) Crane hooks shall be latched or otherwise secured to prevent acci- 
dental load disengagement. 

(d) The manufacturer's recommended safe working loads for hooks 
shall not be exceeded. After the effective date of this section, hooks other 
than hand hooks shall be tested in accordance with Section 5022. 

(e)( 1 ) Jaws of patent clamp-type plate hooks shall be maintained in 
condition to grip plates securely. 

(2) Teeth of case hooks shall be maintained in safe condition. 

(3) Case hooks shall not be used for handling cases unless the cases are 
specifically designed to be handled by this means. 

(f) Loads shall be applied to the throat of the hook since loading the 
point overstresses and bends or springs the hook. 

(g) Eyes in wire rope bridles, slings, bull wires, or in single parts used 
for hoisting shall not be formed by wire rope clips or knots. 

(h) Except for eye splices in the ends of wires and for endless rope 



slings, each wire rope used in hoisting or lowering, or in bulling cargo, 
shall consist of one continuous piece without knot or splice. 

(i)(l) At the completion of each use, loose gear such as slings, chains, 
bridles, blocks and hooks shall be so placed as to avoid damage to the 
gear. Loose gear shall be inspected and any defects corrected before re- 
use. 

(2) All loose gear shall be inspected by the employer or his authorized 
representative before each use and when necessary, at intervals during its 
use, to ensure that it is safe. Any gear which is found upon such inspection 
to be visibly unsafe shall not be used until it is made safe. 

(3) Loose gear obtained after the effective date of this section shall 
bear a legible mark indicating that it has been tested. Single sheave blocks 
shall be marked with safe working loads and proof test loads. Marks relat- 
ing to testing shall be identifiable on the related certificates which shall 
be available. 

(4) Defective gear shall not be used. Distorted hooks, shackles or simi- 
lar gear shall be discarded. 

(j) Interlink wear, not accompanied by stretch in excess of 5 percent, 
shall be noted and the chain removed from service when maximum al- 
lowable wear at any point of link, as indicated in Table MT-2 has been 
reached. 

(k) Chain slings shall be removed from service when, due to stretch, 
the increase in length of a measured section exceeds 5 percent; when a 
link is bent, twisted or otherwise damaged; or when raised scarfs or de- 
fective welds appear. 

(/) Natural fiber rope. The employer shall ascertain the manufacturer' s 
ratings for the specific natural fiber rope used and have such ratings avail- 
able at the terminal. The manufacturer's rating shall be adhered to and a 
minimum design safety factor of five maintained. 

(m) Wire Rope and Wire Rope Slings. 

( 1 ) The employer shall ascertain and adhere to the manufacturer' s rec- 
ommended ratings for wire rope and wire rope slings and shall have such 
ratings available for inspection. When the manufacturer is unable to sup- 
ply such ratings, the employer shall use the tables for wire rope and wire 
rope slings found in American National Standard for Slings, 
ANSI/ASME B30.9-1996. A design safety factor of at least five shall be 
maintained for the common sizes of running wire in light load use. Wire 
rope with a safety factor of less than five may be used only: 

(A) In specialized equipment, such as but not limited to cranes, de- 
signed to be used with lesser wire rope safety factors; 

(B) In accordance with design factors in standing rigging applications; 
or 

(C) For heavy lifts or other purposes for which a safety factor of five 
is impracticable and for which the employer can demonstrate that equiva- 
lent safety is ensured. 

(n) Protruding ends of strands in splices on slings and bridles shall be 
covered or blunted. Coverings shall be removable so that splices can be 
examined. Means used to cover or blunt ends shall not damage the wire. 

(0) Loads requiring continuous manual guidance during handling 
shall be guided by guide ropes (tag lines) that are long enough to control 
the load. 

(p) Thimbles. Property fitting thimbles shall be used where any rope 
is secured permanently to a ring, shackle or attachment, where practica- 
ble. 

(q) Shackles. 

( 1 ) If available, the manufacturer's recommended safe working loads 
for shackles shall not be exceeded. In the absence of manufacturer's rec- 
ommendations. Table MT-3 shall apply. 

(2) Screw pin shackles used aloft in gear, except in cargo hook assem- 
blies, shall have their pins moused or otherwise effectively secured. 
NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3 Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3 La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . Amendment filed 12-12-84; effecdve thirtieth day thereafter (Register 84. No. 
50). 

2. Amendment of subsecfion (m)(l) filed 5-24-99; operative 6-23-99 (Register 
99, No. 22). 



• 



Page 606 



Register 2002, No. 1; 1-4-2002 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



^ 3475 



TABLE MT-1 
NUMBER AND SPACING OF U-BOLT WIRE ROPE CLIPS 



Improved plow 




Number of Clips 








steel, rope 










Minimum 




diameter 




Drop 


Other 


spacing 




inches cm 


forged 


material 


inches 


cm 


* 


1.3 


3 




4 


3~~ 


is 


% 


1.6 


3 




4 


Z% 


9.5 


% 


1.9 


4 




5 


4'/a 


11.4 


% 


2.2 


4 




5 


5% 


13.3 


1 


2.5 


4 




6 


6 


15.2 


1% 


2.9 


5 




6 


6% 


17.1 


1% 


3.2 


5 




7 


7«/, 


18.1 


1% 


3.5 


6 




7 


8% 


2L0 


I'/a 


3.8 


6 




8 


9 


22.9 



* Three clips shall be used on wire size less than Va-inch diameter. 

History 
1. Repealer of Tables MT-1 through MT-5, Mt-7, MT-8 and renumbering and 
amendment of Tables MT-6, MT-9. MT-10 to Tables MT-1 through MT-3 
filed 12-12-84; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 84, No. 50). 

TABLE MT-2 
MINIMUM ALLOWABLE CHAIN SEE AT ANY POINT OF LINK 



• 









Minimum 






Chain 




Allowable 






Size 




Chain size 




Inches 




cm 


Inches 


cm 


V. 




.6 


l%4 


.5 


% 




1.0 


'%. 


.8 


y» 




1.3 


»y64 


1.0 


% 




1.6 


'Vb4 


1.2 


% 




1.9 


•%a 


1.5 


Yb 




2.2 


«/84 


1.8 


1 




2.5 


"/.» 


2.1 


1% 




2.9 


»%a 


2.3 


VA 




3.2 


1 


2.5 


1% 




3.5 


1%, 


2.8 


1% 




3.8 


1%. 


3.0 


1% 




4.4 


1*%2 


3.5 



SAFE WORKING LOADS FOR SHACKLES 
(In tons of 2000 pounds) 











Pin 




Safe 




Material size 


cm 




diameter 




working 


inche 


inches 




cm 


load 


% 




1.3 


% 




1.6 


1.4 


% 




1.6 


% 




1.9 


2.2 


y< 




1.9 


% 




2.2 


3.2 


Vb 




2.2 


1 




2.5 


4.3 


1 




2.5 


I'/s 




2.9 


5.6 


1% 




2.9 


1% 




3.2 


6.7 


ly. 




3.2 


1% 




3.5 


8.2 


P/s 




3.5 


IVa 




3.8 


iO.O 


IVa 




3.8 


1% 




4.1 


11.9 


ly* 




4.4 


2 




5.0 


16.2 


2 




5.0 


2% 




5.7 


21.2 



§ 3475. VehlcJes. 

(a) Trailers shall not be disconnected from tractors at loading docks 
until the road wheels have been immobilized. The road wheels shall be 



immobilized from the time the brake system is disconnected until braking 
is again provided. Supplementary front and support shall be employed as 
necessary to prevent tipping when a trailer is entered by a material handl- 



Page 607 



Register 2001, No. 10; 3-9-2001 



§ 3480 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



ing vehicle. Rear end support shall be employed if rear wheels are so far 
forward as to allow tipping when the trailer is entered. 

(b) The employer shall direct motor vehicle operators to comply with 
any posted speed limits and other traffic control signs or signals, and writ- 
ten traffic instructions. 

(c) Stop signs shall be posted at main entrances and exits of structures 
where visibility is impaired, and at blind intersections, unless direct traf- 
fic control or warning mirror systems or other systems of equivalent safe- 
ty are provided. 

(d) Vehicular routes, traffic rules, and parking areas shall be estab- 
lished, idenfified, and used. 

(e) The employer shall direct vehicle drivers to warn employees in 
traffic lanes of the vehicle's approach. 

(f) Signs indicating pedestrian traffic shall be clearly posted at vehicu- 
lar check-in and check-out lines and similar locations where employees 
may be working. 

(g) A distance of not less than 20 feet (6. Im) shall be maintained be- 
tween the first two vehicles in a check-in, check-out, roadability, or ves- 
sel loading/discharging line. This distance shall be maintained between 
any subsequent vehicles behind which employees are required to work. 

(h) No unattended vehicle shall be left with its engine running unless 
secured against movement. 

(i) When the rear of a vehicle is elevated to facilitate loading or dis- 
charging, a ramp shall be provided and secured. The vehicle shall be se- 
cured against accidental movement during loading or discharging. 

(j) Only highway vehicle floors in safe condition shall be used. 

(k) When flatbed tmcks, platform containers or similar conveyances 
are loaded or discharged and the cargo consists of pipe or other products 
which could spread or roll to endanger employees, the cargo shall be con- 
tained to prevent movement. 

(/) Vehicles used to transport employees within a terminal shall be 
maintained in safe working order and safety devices shall not be removed 
or made inoperative. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . New section filed 12-12-84; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 84, No. 
50). 

2. Amendment of subsection (g) filed 3-6-2001; operative 3-6-2001. Submitted 
to OAL for printing only pursuant to Labor Code section 142.3(a)(3) (Register 
2001, No. 10). 



Article 15. Vats, Pans, Bins, Bunkers, 

Hoppers, and Similar Containers and 

Vessels 



§ 3480. Vats, Pans and Tanks. 

(a) Every open vat, pan, tank and similar container or vessel which 
contains hazardous substances into which employees can fall and the top 
of which is less than 36 inches above the floor or working level, shall be 
guarded on all sides by: 

(1) A substantial railing of height not less than 36 inches above floor 
or working level, or 

(2) The top height increased to 36 inches, or 

(3) A complete cover. 

(4) Where carts or dump trucks are used to load such vessels adequate 
stops to prevent the vehicle falling into the vessel shall be provided. 
Note: Covers or railings may be temporai-ily removed to provide necessary work- 
ing openings. 

(b) Such open vats, pans, tanks and similar containers and vessels 
whose top is less than four inches above the floor or working level shall 
be provided with a four-inch toeboard around the sides in addition to 
complying with the requirements (a) above. 

Note: Toeboards may be removed during actual loading operations where the 
vessels are loaded by pushing materials over the vessel's edge at floor level. 

(c) Where employees are required to work directly above such open 



vats, pans, tanks or similar containers and vessels, one of the following 
conditions shall be complied with: 

(1) The employee shall be provided with and shall wear an approved 
safety belt with life line. One end of the life line shall be attached to a trav- 
eling trolley on a monorail or to a fixed overhead anchorage or similar 
arrangement. The life line shall be so adjusted that the employee cannot 
fall into the vat, pan, tank or siirtilar container or vessel. Such safety belts 
and life lines shall be resistant to any deteriorafing effects of the dusts, 
fumes, mists, vapors or gases arising from the contents of the tank. 

(2) The vat, pan, tank or similar container or vessel top shall be covered 
with a grating or grille which has no opening whose least dimension ex- 
ceeds two inches. This grating or grille shall be of sufficient strength to 
withstand any load that is customarily imposed upon it. 

(3) The vat, pan, tank or similar container or vessel shall be provided 
with a platform or walkway above the vessel. This platform or walkway 
shall be equipped with standard railing and toeboard. 

(4) Safety rope nets designed for the specific purpose and capable of 
withstanding expected loads shall be properly suspended above the vat, 
pan, tank, or similar container or vessel during temporary or emergency 
work. 

(d) Any vat, pan, tank and similar container or vessel in which there 
is a power driven agitator, circulator, gyrator or any other power driven 
equipment shall have such powered equipment disconnected from its 
source of power and the disconnecting controls or switches shall be 
locked open before employees are required or permitted to work in such 
spaces. 

Note: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code; and Section 1 8943(c), Health and Safety Code. 

History 
1. Amendment filed 9-27-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 

42). 

§ 3481. Bins, Bunkers and Hoppers. 

(a) Every open bin, bunker and hopper whose upper edge is less than 
36 inches above floor or working level shall be equipped with a standard 
railing around its edges or a grating or grille shall cover the top. Where 
grille or grating is the only protection it shall have no opening whose least 
dimension exceeds the following: 2-inch maximum openings for essen- 
tially smooth surface material with one-half inch maximum particle 
length (such as but not limited to sand, powder, grains, seed and pea grav- 
el); 6 1/2-inch maximum openings for irregular surface material with 
one-half inch maximum particle length (such as but not limited to cot- 
tonseed); and 1 0-inch maximum openings for all other material with par- 
ticle length exceeding one-half inch (such as but not limited to crushed 
rock and ore). 

Note: Where railings are used they may be temporarily removed to provide nec- 
essary working openings. 

(b) The grating or grille shall be of strength sufficient to withstand any 
load that is customarily imposed upon it. 

(c) Where bins, bunkers or hoppers are loaded by automotive truck or 
other wheeled equipment, bumper stops presenting a vertical face not 
less than 1 inches high shall be installed at 1 edge in a manner to prevent 
the equipment from running onto or over the hopper. 

Exception: Dumping spots used exclusively by bottom dump vehicles or hop- 
pers designed for vehicle traffic load. 

(d) Curbs having a vertical face of not less than 8 inches high shall be 
securely fastened along the sides to prevent a vehicle from overrunning 
the side of the runway. 

(e) Where employees are permitted or required to work in or above 
open top bins over 8 feet in depth, an upper working area consisting of 
a platform or walkway shall be provided, and shall be guarded with a 
standard railing and toeboard. 

Note: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code; and Section 18943(c), Health and Safety Code. 

History 

1 . Amendment of subsection (c), new subsection (d) and renumbering of subsec- 
tion (d) to (e) filed 7-17-75; effecfive thirtieth day thereafter (Register 75, No. 
29). 

2. Amendment filed 9-27-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85 No. 
42). 



Page 608 



Register 2001, No. 10; 3-9-2001 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§ 3518 



• 



§ 3482. Bulk Storage of Loose Material. 

(a) No employees shall be permitted to work on or over loose material, 
or attend an employee working on or over loose material, until they have 
been instructed in the hazards involved and the precautions that must be 
taken to prevent employees from being caught in caved-in material. 
NoTl:: Work in grain handling facilities shall be in accordance with the provisions 
of section 5178, Grain Handling Facilities. 

(b) Fuel houses, silos, bins, bunkers, hoppers and similar structures 
shall be so constructed or equipped with tunnels, chains, mechanical dig- 
gers, vibrators or other effective means of removing material so that em- 
ployees are not required to work where there is a possibility of being en- 
gulfed or having their bodies entrapped by a cave-in; or platforms or 
walkways shall be provided and employees shall remain upon such plat- 
forms or walkways while working over loose material within such staic- 
tures unless protected as required in Section 3482(c) or (d). (Title 24, Part 
2, Section 441A.) 

(c) When construction as required in Section 3482(b) is impractical 
and in existing installations, when the design permits, a manually pow- 
ered hoist with an operator shall be provided. The hoist shall be capable 
of supporting and lifting an employee and tools and equipment. The sup- 
porting wire rope shall be not less than 5/16 inch in diameter. The hoist 
shall have a brake capable of stopping and holding any load which may 
reasonably be expected to be imposed on it including the impact of a fall. 
(Title 24. Part 2, Section 2-1 134(b).) 

( 1 ) No employee shall be required or permitted to stand, climb, or walk 
upon piles of sand, sawdust, chips, gravel, fuel, seed or similar granular 
or loose materials within bins, bunkers, hoppers, silos or other structures, 
unless a boatswain's chair or a Class III body harness with a line sus- 
pended from the hoist is used. 

(2) When an employee is required to move about on the piled material 
the hoist operator shall pay out and retrieve the excess line so that reason- 
able tautness in the line is maintained. 

(3) Inflowing and outflowing material shall be blocked unless such 
movement is necessary to the work which the employee is performing. 
In such case, the employee shall have the means to control or stop the 
flow of materials, or have direct communication with a standby person 
who has immediate control. 

(d) When the requirements of Section 3482(b) or (c) are not practical, 
the employee shall wear an approved safety belt or harness with a line 
attached. The line shall be snubbed overhead and attended by a standby 
person who shall keep the line reasonably taut at all times. The line shall 
be not less than 13/16-inch Manila rope or other suitable material of 
equivalent strength and diameter. 

(e) No employee shall be required or permitted to work or climb on 
piled, granular or free flowing (loose) material, such as but not limited 
to sand, sawdust, chips, gravel, fuel or seed piled on a level deck or on 
the ground, unless provision is made for safe access to and egress from 
the piled material and protection from engulfment/entrapment hazards is 
provided as described in Section 3482(b). Whenever possible, platforms 
or walkways shall be provided and employees shall be instructed to re- 
main upon such platforms or walkways while working over loose materi- 
al. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3,LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code; and Section 18943(b), Health and Safety Code. 

History 

1. Amendment of subsection (a) and new subsection (b) filed 2-13-75; effective 
thirtieth day thereafter (Register 75, No. 7). 

2. Amendment filed 12-3-75; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 75, No. 
49). 

3. Amendment filed 7-16-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
29). 

4. Editorial correction filed 10-7-83; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 
83, No. 41). 

5. Amendment filed 9-27-85; effecfive thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
42). 

6. Amendment of subsections (a) and (b), repealer of subsection (e), subsection re- 
lettering, amendment of newly designated subsection (e), and amendment of 
NOTH filed 2-8-2001; operative 3-10-2001 (Register 2001, No. 6). 

7. Amendment of subsecUons (a), (c)(1) and (e) filed 11-14-2006; operative 
12-14-2006 (Register 2006, No. 46). 



Article 17. Engines and Compressors 

§3511. Governor. 

Each engine which is not manually throttled shall be equipped with an 
effective governor which will automatically control the speed of the en- 
gine under varied loads, except where the load acts as an effective gover- 
nor or the engine is incapable of developing excessive speed. All belt. 
rope or chain driven governors shall be equipped with a safety device 
which will stop the engine in case the belt, rope or chain should break. 
NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3. LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3. La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . Amendment filed 12-16-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
51). 

§3512. Valve Gears. 

Valve gears on steam engines shall be so arranged, or other provisions 
made, that, in the event of the load being removed, the engine will stop 
if the governor fails to act. (A broken governor belt stop will be consid- 
ered sufficient for slide or four-valve engines.) 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . Amendment filed 12-16-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
51). 

§ 3513. Flywheel Speed. 

NoTE; Authority cited: Section 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3. La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . New NOTE filed 12-16-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
51). 

2. Repealer filed 7-28-98; operative 8-27-98 (Register 98, No. 31). 

§3514. Tubular Gage Guard. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3. LaborCode. 

History 
1 . Repealer filed 12-16-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 5 1 ). 

§ 3515. Try Cock Discharge Receptacle. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Secfion 142.3, Labor Code. 

History 
1 . Repealer filed 1 2-16-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 5 1 ). 

§3516. Try Cock Manipulation. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. 

History 
1 . Repealer filed 12-16-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 5 1 ). 

§ 3517. Steam Gage and Water Gage Glass Location. 

Note: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. 

History 

1 . Repealer filed 12-16-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 5 1 ). 

§ 351 8. Air Compressors. 

(a) Air compressor discharge lines having a block valve between the 
air receiver and compressor shall have a pressure relieving safety device 
installed in the line between the compressor and block valve. The pres- 
sure relieving safety device shall be set to open at a pressure not to exceed 
the rated working pressure of the cylinder. The relieving capacity of the 
pressure relieving safety device shall be such as to prevent a rise of pres- 
sure in the compressor cylinder of more than 1 percent above its maxi- 
mum allowable working pressure, and the dischiu-ge shall be to a safe 
place. 

(b) Air compressor intake lines shall not be located in toxic atmo- 
spheres or atmospheres containing explosive concentrations of flam- 
mable gases or vapors. 

Note: Authority cited: Section 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 
1 . Amendment filed 12-16-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
51). 



Page 609 



Register 2006, No. 46; 11-17-2006 



§3540 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



Article 19. Automotive Lifts 

§ 3540. Purpose. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . Repealer filed 10-15-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 44). 

§3541. Automotive Lift — Definition. 

"Automotive lift" ineans "automotive vehicle service lift," and is a 
lifting device specifically designed to raise and provide stable support for 
an automotive vehicle free of the ground by engaging structural elements 
of the vehicle such as wheels, body, frame inembers, axle housings, or 
wheel suspension components. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . Amendment filed 10-1 5-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
44). 

2. Amendment of section heading and section filed 6-28-2005; operative 
7-28-2005 (Register 2005, No. 26). 

§ 3542. General. 

(a) Automotive lifts shall be designed, constaicted and installed in ac- 
cordance with the provisions of ANSI B 153. 1-1 974, or shall have been 
approved by the Division of Occupational Safety and Health for lifts in- 
stalled prior to November 1976. In lieu of meeting the provisions of 
ANSI B 153. 1-1 974, automotive lifts installed through August 17, 1994, 
may be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with ANSI 
B 153. 1-1 981, hereby incorporated by reference. 

(b) Automotive lifts manufactured after August 17, 1994, through July 
28, 2005, shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with 
the provisions of ANSI/ALI B153.1-1990, which is hereby incorporated 
by reference, with the exception of Sections 7.2.2 and 8.2, or shall con- 
form to the requirements of subsection (c). 

(c) New automotive lifts manufactured after July 28, 2005, shall be 
installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and meet the 
design provisions of ANSI/ALI ALCTV-1998, Section 8, "Construc- 
tion" and Section 9.2 "Testing" requirements for automotive lifts, which 
are hereby incorporated by reference. 

NOTE: References to Tide 29, Code of Federal OSHA Regulations (CFR) con- 
tained in ANSI/ALI ALCTV-1998, Section 8, "Construction" correspond to the 
italicized regulations contained in the California Code of Reguladons, Title 8, 
General Industry Safety Orders (GISO) shown in brackets as follows: 
29 CFR 1 9 1 0. 1 44 [Title 8, Sections 3340 and 3341 ] , 29 CFR Subpart D, Walking- 
Working Surfaces. Sections 1910.21-1910.32 [Title 8. Sections 3207, 
3209-3214, 3224, 3241, 3272, 3273, 3275, 3277-3279, Title 8, GISO Article 23, 
Mobile Ladder Stands and Scaffolds (Towers)l29 CFR 1910.212and .219 [Title 
8, GISO Group 6, Power Transmission Equipment, Prime Movers, Machines and 
Machine Parts and Group 8, Points of Operation and Other Hazardous Parts of 
Machinery],and29CFR 1910.95 [Title8, GISO, Article 105, Control of Noise Ex- 
posure]. 

(d) The operation, inspection and maintenance of automotive lifts 
shall be performed by a qualified person in accordance with procedures 
recommended by the manufacturer. Maintenance shall include that pipe 
lines, fittings, valves, and packing glands are kept tight. 

NOTE: Guidelines for the operation, inspection, maintenance, installation and 
servicing of automotive lifts are available in ANSI/ALI ALOIM-2000, Safety Re- 
quirements for Operation, Inspecfion and Maintenance; and ANSI/ALI 
ALIS-2001, Safety Requirements for Installation and Service. 
NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . Repealer and new section filed 1 0-8-76; effecfi ve thirtieth day thereafter (Reg- 
ister 76, No. 41). 

2. Amendment filed 12-19-78; effecUve thirtieth day thereafter (Register 79, No. 
1). 

3. Amendment filed 10-15-85; effecUve thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 

44). 

4. Amendment of newly designated subsection (a) and new subsection (b) filed 
7-18-94; operative 8-17-94 (Register 94, No. 29). 



5. Amendment filed 6-28-2005; operative 7-28-2005 (Register 2005, No. 26). 

§ 3543. Marking Required. 

(a) Automotive lifts manufactured on or before August 17, 1994 shall 
be labeled with the following information: 

(1) Name of the manufacturer. 

(2) Either the Division approval number or statement of compliance 
with ANSI BI53.1-1974 or ANSI B153. 1-1981. 

(3) Capacity. 

(4) Date of installation or manufacture. 

(b ) Automotive lifts manufactured after August 17,1 994. through July 
28, 2005, shall be labeled with a statement of compliance indicating that 
the lift was manufactured to conform to the requirements of ANSI/ALI 
B 153. 1-1 990, or may conform to the requirements of subsection (c). 

(c) Automotive lifts manufactured after July 28, 2005, shall be labeled 
with a statement of coinpliance indicating that the lift was manufactured 
to conform to the requirements of ANSI/ALI ALCTV-1998, Section 8, 
"Construction" and Section 9.2 "Testing". 

(d) Labels shall be legibly stamped, etched, or embossed on a durable 
plate, which shall be permanently attached to the lift in a location where 
it can be conveniently inspected. Labels shall not be obscured, obliter- 
ated or changed. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . Repealer and new section filed 10-8-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Reg- 
ister 76, No. 41). 

2. Amendment filed 12-19-78; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 79, No. 
1). 

3. Amendment filed 10-15-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
44). 

4. Amendment of subsection (a), new subsection (b) and subsection relettering, 
and amendment of newly designated subsection (c) filed 7-18-94; operative 
8-17-94 (Register 94, No. 29). 

5. Amendment filed 6-28-2005; operative 7-28-2005 (Register 2005, No. 26). 

§ 3544. Control Mechanism for Automotive Lifts. 

Every automotive lift shall be equipped with a readily accessible direct 
control device which will automatically return to the neutral or "off po- 
sition upon release by the operator. Adapters or other alterations which 
will render the normal functions of the control device inoperative shall 
not be used. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . New NOTE filed 10-15-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
44). 

2. Amendment of section heading and section filed 6-28-2005; operative 
7-28-2005 (Register 2005, No. 26). 

§ 3545. Oil Measurement. 

(a) Every air-oil tank and oil storage tank on automotive lift installa- 
tions shall be provided with a graduated stick gage or other positive and 
easily accessible means by which the oil level in the reservoir, with 
plunger or plungers in the lowest position, can be determined. 

(b) The oil supply in every air-oil tank and oil storage tank shall be 
maintained at or above the prescribed safe minimum operating level 
which shall in no case be less than three inches in depth or ten percent of 
the total oil volume when the plunger or plungers are in the fully elevated 
position. 

Where a fill or gage hole is provided to measure oil levels, the fill or 
gage hole shall not be obstructed in any manner that requires removal of 
any parts of the lift except the fill or gage hole cover or plug to check the 
oil level. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142 .3 , Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. Amendment of subsection (c) filed 10-8-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register76, No. 41). 

2. Amendment of subsection (c) filed 10-15-85; effective tliirtieth day thereafter 
(Register 85, No. 44). 

3. Amendment filed 6-28-2005; operative 7-28-2005 (Register 2005, No. 26). 



Page 610 



Register 2006, No. 46; 11-17-2006 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3559 



§ 3546. Air, Oil Tank Working Pressure and Corrosion 
Protection. 

(a) Every oil tank used for liquid storage under pressure, not an integral 
part of the cylinder assembly, shall be constaicted for a working pressure 
of not less than 200 pounds per square inch, in accordance with the provi- 
sions of the ASME Code for Pressure Vessels, as required by the Unfired 
Pressure Vessel Safety Orders of the Division. 

(b) Every air, oil storage or surge tank which is to be completely buried 
in earth or concrete shall be protected from corrosion with an effective 
corrosion resistant coating or equivalent method of protection. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . Amendment filed 10-8-76; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 76, No. 
41). 

2. Amendment filed 10-L5-85: effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
44). 

3. Amendment of section heading and section filed 6-28-2005; operative 
7-28-2005 (Register 2005, No. 26). 

§ 3547. Working Area Under Lifts. 

(a) No slots or abrupt recesses in excess of 2 1/4 inches in width (unless 
closable by integral hinged flat covers) or raised floor obstructions for re- 
ceiving the lift frame and rails shall be permitted in the tloor under the 
lift. 

Note: The floor may be recessed to receive the rails providing the slope into the 
lowest part of the recess does not exceed 1 inch in 4 inches and provided also the 
inclined surfaces are constructed and surfaced so as to reduce slipping hazards. 

(b) Floor surfaces under the lift shall be kept reasonably free of oil or 
grease to minimize the slipping hazards. 

NOTIi: Authority cited: Section 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. Editorial correction (Register 76, No. 41). 

2. Amendment filed 10-15-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
44). 

§ 3548. Chassis and Axle Supports. 

(a) Chassis and axle supports shall be of such design as to safely trans- 
fer the load to the automotive lift. 

(b) Devices used for chassis, frame, wheel or axle supports shall be ap- 
proved. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. New NOTE filed 10-15-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
44). 

2. Amendment filed 6-28-2005; operative 7-28-2005 (Register 2005, No. 26). 
§ 3549. Descent Speed. 

All elements of any lift which control the speed of descent shall be 
maintained so that the average speed will not exceed 20 feet per minute. 
NOTE: Authority cited: Secfion 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. New NOTE filed 10-15-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
44). 

2. Repealer and new section heading and amendment of section filed 6-28-2005; 
operative 7-28-2005 (Register 2005, No. 26). 



Article 20. Hand and Portable Powered 
Tools and Equipment 

§ 3555. Definitions. 

Jack. A jack is an appliance for lifting and lowering or moving hori- 
zontally a load by application of a pushing force. 

Note: .lacks may be of the following types: Lever and ratchet, screw and hydrau- 
lic. 

Rating. The rating of a jack is the maximum working load for which 
it is designed to lift safely that load throughout its specified amount of 
travel. 

Note: To raise the rated load of a jack, the point of application of the load, the 
applied force, and the length of lever arm should be those designated by the man- 
ufacturer for the particular jack considered. 



NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. New Article 20 (Sections 3555-3563, Figures LM-la-LM-5) filed 3-28-75; 
effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 75, No. 13). 

2. Repealer of subsection (b) filed 2-20-80; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Reg- 
ister 80, No. 8). 

3. Amendment filed 1 1-22-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85. No. 
48). 

§ 3556. General. 

(a) Each employer shall be responsible for the safe condition of tools 
and equipment used by employees, including tools and equipment which 
may be furnished by employees. 

(b) AH tools shall be restricted to the use for which they are intended. 

(c) Unsafe hand tools shall not be used. 

Note: Authority cited: Section 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3. La- 
bor Code. 

History 
1 . Amendment filed 1 1-22-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, Nt). 
48). 

§ 3557. Switches and Controls for Portable Tools. 

(a) All hand-held powered circular saws having a blade diameter 
greater than 2 inches, electric, hydraulic or pneumatic chain saws, and 
percussion tools without positive accessory holding means shall be 
equipped with a constant pressure switch or control that will shut off the 
power when the pressure is released. All hand-held gasoline powered 
chain saws shall be equipped with a constant pressure throttle control that 
will shut off the power to the saw chain when the pressure is released. 

(b) All hand-held powered drills, tappers, fastener drivers, horizontal, 
vertical, and angle grinders with wheels greater than 2 inches in diameter, 
disc Sanders with discs greater than 2 inches in diameter, belt sanders, re- 
ciprocating saws, saber, scroll, and jig saws with blade shanks greater 
than a nominal one-fourth inch, and other similarly operating powered 
tools shall be equipped with a constant pressure switch or control, and 
may have a lock-on control provided that tumoff can be accomplished 
by a single motion of the same finger or fingers that turn it on. 

(c) All other hand-held powered tools, such as, but not limited to, plat- 
en sanders, grinders with wheels 2 inches in diameter or less, disc sanders 
with .discs 2 inches in diameter or less, routers, planers, laminate trim- 
mers, nibblers, shears, saber, scroll, and jig saws with blade shanks a 
nominal one-fourth of an inch wide or less, may be equipped with either 
a positive "on-off ' control, or other controls as described in this section. 
Note: "Nominal" in (b) and (c) means ±0.05 inch. 

(d) The operating control on hand-held power tools shall be so located 
as to minimize the possibility of its accidental operation, if such acciden- 
tal operation would constitute a hazard to employees. 

ExceitiON: This section does not apply to concrete vibrators, concrete breakers, 
powered tampers, jack hammers, rock drills, garden appliances, hou.sehold and 
kitchen appliances, personal care appliances, medical or dental equipment, or to 
fixed machinery. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 
1 . Amendment filed 1 1-22-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter ( Resistor 85, No. 
48). 

§ 3558. Portable Power Driven Circular Saws (Class A). 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 
1 . Repealer filed 1 1-22-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 48 ). 

§ 3559. Pneumatic and Powder-Actuated Tools. 

(a) Safety clips or retainers shall be installed on pneumatic impact 
tools to prevent dies and tools from being accidentally expelled from the 
barrel, or other effective means to prevent accidents from this source 
shall be used. 

(b) Powder-actuated tools used in industrial operations shall be de- 
signed, constructed, operated and maintained in compliance with Article 
27 of the Construction Safety Orders. 

(c) All hand-held pneumatically powered tools used for driving nails, 
staples and similar fasteners which operate at 100 psig or more line pres- 



Page 611 



Register 2006, No. 46; 11-17-2006 



§ 3559.1 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



sure shall have a safety device at the muzzle to prevent the tool from dis- 
charging until the muzzle is in contact with a solid surface. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . New subsection (c) filed 3-2-76; effective thirtieth dav thereafter (Register 76, 
No. 10). 

2. Amendment of subsection (b) filed 1 1-22-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register 85, No. 48). 

§ 3559.1 . Airless Spray Guns. 

(a) Airless spray guns of the type which atomize paints and fluids at 
high pressures ( 1 ,000 pounds or more per square inch) shall be equipped 
with automatic or visible manual safety devices which will prevent pull- 
ing of the trigger to prevent release of the paint or fluid until the safety 
device is manually released. 

(b) In lieu of (a) above, a diffuser nut which will prevent high pressure, 
high velocity release, while the nozzle tip is removed, plus a nozzle tip 
guard which will prevent the tip from coming into contact with the opera- 
tor, or other equivalent protection, shall be provided. 

NOTH: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. New section filed 12-19-78;effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 79, No. 
1). 

2. Amendment filed 1 1-22-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85. No. 
48). 

§ 3560. Portable Grinders. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 
1 . Repealer filed 1 1-22-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 48). 

§3561. Portable Sanders. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3. La- 
bor Code. 

History 
1 . Repealer filed 1 1 -22-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 48). 

§ 3562. Jacks. 

(a) The rated load shall be legibly and permanently marked on a promi- 
nent location on the jack by casting, stamping, or other suitable means. 

(b) All jacks shall be designed so that their maximum safe extension 
cannot be exceeded. 

(c) Hydraulic jacks exposed to freezing temperatures shall be supplied 
with an adequate antifreeze liquid. 

(d) In the absence of a firm foundation, the base of the jack shall be 
blocked. If there is a possibiHty of slippage of the cap, a block shall be 
placed in between the cap and the load. 

(e) Employees shall not be permitted to enter the zone beneath a jack 
supported load unless it has been effectively blocked or cribbed. 

(f) All jacks requiring periodic cleaning and lubrication, such as screw 
jacks, shall be properly cleaned and lubricated at regular intervals. 
NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. Amendment of subsection (f) filed 7-8-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register 85, No. 28). 

2. Amendment of subsections (e) and (f) filed 11-22-85; effective thirtieth day 
thereafter (Register 85, No. 48). 

§ 3563. Power Lawn Mowers. 

(a) Scope. These regulations apply to power lawn mowers of 20-brake 
horsepower or less and cover walk-behind reel and rotary power lawn 
mowers, riding reel and rotary power lawn mowers, lawn riding tractors, 
and lawn and garden riding tractors, and related mower attachments. 
They are intended to provide safety requirements and to help ensure uni- 
form operator environments. These regulations do not apply to sulky- 
type units, flail mowers, or sickle bar mowers. 



Note: For tractors of more than 20-brake horsepower see Article 25. 
(b) General. 

(1) Power mowers placed in service after March 29, 1975 through 
April 15, 1999, shall be designed, constructed, tested and labeled to meet 
the provisions of ANSI B71. 1-1972 and B71.1a-1974 or ANSI 
B7 1.1-1 980, Safety Specifications for Power Lawn Mowers, Lawn and 
Garden Tractors and Lawn Tractors. 

(2) Power mowers placed in service after April 15, 1999 shall be ap- 
proved as defined in Section 3206 of the General Industry Safety Orders. 
NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . Amendment filed 12-19-78; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 79, No. 
1). 

2. Amendment filed 1 1-22-85: effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
48). 

3. Amendment of subsections (b)(1) and (b)(2) filed 3-16-99; operative 4-15-99 
(Register 99, No. 12). 

§ 3564. Portable Winches. 

(a) Portable winches shall be secured against accidental shifting while 
in use. 

(b) Portable winches shall be fitted with limit switches if employees 
have access to areas from which it is possible to be drawn into the winch. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 
1 . New section filed 12-12-84; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 84, No. 
50). 

Article 21. Use, Care, and Protection of 
Abrasive Wheels 

§ 3575. Scope and Definitions. 

(a)(1) Scope. This Article establishes safety requirements for the use, 
care, and protection of abrasive wheels, safety guards, flanges, chucks, 
proper storage, handling and mounting. This Article does not apply to 
natural sandstone, pulpstone, coated abrasive products and surface con- 
ditioning wheels used for polishing, buffing, cleaning, finishing, blend- 
ing or light deburring, where the base material is not removed. 

(2) Abrasive wheels manufactured on or before July 1 , 1 998 shall meet 
the requirements of either ANSI B7. 1-1 978 or ANSI B7. 1-1 988, Safety 
Requirements for the Use, Care, and Protection of Abrasive Wheels. 
Abrasive wheels manufactured after July 1, 1998 shall be labeled as 
meeting the requirements of ANSI B7. 1-1988, Safety Requirements for 
the Use, Care and Protection of Abrasive Wheels. 

(b) Definitions. 

Abrasive Wheels. Power-driven wheels consisting of abrasive par- 
ticles held together by inorganic or organic bonds. Metal, wooden, cloth 
or paper wheels or discs having a layer or layers of abrasive on the surface 
and natural sandstones (quarried) are not included. 

(A) Cutting Off Wheels. Wheels having diameter thickness and hole 
size dimensions and are subject to all limitations of mounting and use 
listed for type 1 wheels. They may be steel centered, diamond abrasive 
or organic bonded abrasive of the plain or reinforced type. 

1 . Cutting off wheels are recommended only for use on specially de- 
signed and fully guarded machines and are subject to the following maxi- 
mum thickness and hole size limitations. 

Max. 

thickness 

Wheel diameter: (inch) 

6 inch and smaller 3/16 

Larger than 6 inches to 12 inches 1/4 

Larger than 1 2 inches to 23 inches 3/8 

Larger than 23 inches 1/2 

2. Maximum hole size for cuttit\g-off wheels should not be larger than 
1/4— wheel diameter. 



Page 612 



Register 2006, No. 46; 11-17-2006 



Title 8 General Industry Safety Orders $3575 

(B) Cylinder Wheels. Wheels having diameter, wheel thickness, and Limitation: Rim height, T dimension, is generally equal to or greater 

rim thickness dimensions. Grinding is performed on the rim face only, than rim thickness, W dimension, 
dimension W. Cylinder wheels may be plain, plate mounted, inserted nut, 
or of the projecting stud type. 



[The next page is 613.] 



Page 612.1 Register 2006, No. 46; 11-17-2006 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3575 



Limitation: Rim height, T dimension, is generally equal to or greater 
than rim thickness, W dimension. 

TYPE 2 CYLINDER WHEELS 




(F) Inorganic Wheels. Wheels which are bonded by means of inorgan- 
ic material such as clay, glass, porcelain, sodium silicate, magnesium ox- 
ychloride, or metal. Wheels bonded with clay, glass, porcelain or related 
ceramic materials are characterized as "vitrified bonded wheels." 

(G) Mandrel A steel shaft usually 3/8-inch diameter or smaller which 
is permanently secured to the abrasive section by cementing or other 
means. It is mounted in the machine and is the means by which the power 
is transmitted from the machine to the abrasive. 

(H) Modified Types 6 and 1 1 Wheels (terrazzo). Some type 6 and 1 1 
cup wheels used in the terrazzo trade having tapered K dimensions to 
match a special tapered flange furnished by the machine builder. 

Limitation: These wheels shall be mounted only with a special tapered 
flange. 



Type 2— Cylinder Wheel 

Side grinding wheel having a diameter, thickness 

and wall — wheel is mounted on the diameter. 

(C) Depressed Center Wheels. Have diameter, thickness and hole size 
dimensions. Both types are reinforced, organic bonded wheels having 
offset hubs which permit side and peripheral grinding operations without 
interference with the mounting. Type 27 wheels are manufactured with 
flat grinding rims permitting notching and cutting operations. Type 28 
wheels have saucer shaped grinding rims. 

1 . Special supporting, back adapter and inside flange nuts are required 
for the proper mounting of these types of wheels. 

2. Mounts which are affixed to the wheel by the manufacturer may not 
require an inside nut and shall not be reused. 

(D) Depressed Center. Cutting-off Wheels, Type 27A. Wheels having 
diameter, thickness, and hole size dimensions. They are reinforced, or- 
ganic bonded, offset hub type wheels, usually 16 inches diameter and 
larger, specially designed for use on cutting-off machines where mount- 
ing nut or outer flange interference cannot be tolerated. 

(E) Flaring Cup Wheels. Wheels having double diameter dimensions 
D and J, and in addition have thickness, hole size, rim and back thickness 
dimensions. Grinding is always performed on rim face, W dimension. 
Type 1 1 wheels are subject to all limitations of use and mounting listed 
for type 6 straight sided cup wheels definition. 

Limitation: Minimum back thickness, E dimension, should not be less 
than one-fourth T dimension. In addition when unthreaded hole wheels 
are specified the inside flat, K dimension, shall be large enough to accom- 
modate a suitable flange. 

TYPE 11 FLARING CUP WHEELS 



TAPERED "K" DIMENSION 



TAPERED "K" DIMENSION 




Type 11 — Flaring-cup Wheel 

Side grinding wheel having a wall flared or tapered 

outward from the back. Wall thickness at 

the back is normally greater than at 

the grinding face (W). 




TYPE 6 WHEEL CTERRA2Z0) 



TYPE II WHEEL CTERRAZ20) 



Typical examples of modified types 6 and 11 wheels 
(terrazzo) showing tapered K dimensions. 



(I) Mounted Wheels. Wheels which are usually 2 inches diameter or 
smaller, and of various shapes, and are permanently secured to a steel 
mandrel. 

(J) Organic Wheels. Wheels which are bonded by means of an organic 
material such as resin, rubber, shellac, or other similar bonding agent. 

(K) Straight Wheels. Wheels having diameter, thickness, and hole size 
dimensions, and they should be used only on the periphery. Type 1 
wheels shall be mounted between flanges. 

Limitation: Hole dimension (H) should not be greater than two-thirds 
of wheel diameter dimension (D) for precision, cylindrical, centerless, or 
surface grinding applications. Maximum hole size for all other applica- 
tions should not exceed one-half wheel diameter. 



TYPE 1 STRAIGHT WHEELS 

O 



GRINDING PACE 



W-H-A 



AS?'' 






Type I— Straight Wheel 

Peripheral grinding wheel having a diameter, 

thickness and hole. 



(L) Straight Cup Wheels. Wheels having diameter, thickness, hole 
size, rim thickness, and back thickness dimensions. Grinding is always 
performed on rim face, W dimension. 

Limitation: Minimum back thickness, = dimension, should not be less 
than one-fourth T dimension. In addition, when unthreaded hole wheels 
are specified, the inside flat, K dimension, must be large enough to ac- 
commodate a suitable flange. 



Page 613 



Register 98, No. 31; 7-31-98 



§3576 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



TYPE 6 STRAIGHT-CUP WHEELS 



GRINDING FACE 
I 




Type 6 — Straight-cup Wheel 
Side grinding wheel having a diameterjhickness and hole with one 
side straight or flat and the opposite is de recessed. This type, howev- 
er, 
differs from Type 5 in that the grinding is perfonned on the wall 
of the abrasive created by the difference between the diameter 

of the recess and the outside diameter of the wheel. 

Therefore, the wall dimension "W" takes precedence over the 

diameter of the recess as an essential intermediate dimension to 

describe this shape type. 

Flanges. Collars, discs or plates between which wheels are mounted 
and are referred to as adaptor, sleeve, or back up type. See Section 3579. 

Off-hand Grinding. The grinding of any material or part which is held 
in the operator's hand. 

Portable Grinding. A grinding operation where the grinding machine 
is designed to be hand held and may be easily moved from one location 
to another. 

Protection Hood. A protection hood is an enclosure for an abrasive 
wheel consisting of a peripheral and two side members. Its main function 
is to effectively retain the pieces of the wheel should the wheel break in 
operation. 

Reinforced Wheels. A class of organic wheels which contain strength- 
ening fabric or filament. The term "reinforced" does not cover wheels us- 
ing such mechanical additions as steel rings, steel cup backs or wire or 
tape winding. 

Safety Guard. An enclosure designed to restrain the pieces of the abra- 
sive wheel in the event that the wheel is broken while in operation. 

Snagging. Grinding which removes relatively large amounts of mate- 
rial without regard to close tolerances or surface finish requirements. 

Surface Feet per Minute (s.f.p.m.). The distance in feet any one abra- 
sive grain on the peripheral surface on a grinding wheel travels in 1 min- 
ute. 

Surface Feet Per Minute = 
3.1416 X diameter in inches x r.p.m. 
12 

or 
.262 X diameter in inches x r.p.m. 

Tuck Pointing. Removal of cement, mortar, or other non-metallic 
jointing material from masonry mortar joints and pointing up the tuck or 
joint. 

Tuck Pointing Wheels. Tuck pointing wheels, usually Type 1, rein- 
forced organic bonded wheels have diameter, thickness and hole size di- 
mension. They are subject to the same limitations of use and mounting 
as Type 1 wheels. 

Note: Wheels used for tuck pointing should be reinforced, organic 
bonded. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 
1. Repealer and new Article 21 (Sections 3575 through 3581 and Figures A-1 
through A-23 and Tables A-1 through A-6) filed 10-25-74; effective thirtieth 
day thereafter (Register 74, No. 43). 



2. Amendment filed 3-28-75; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Resister 75, No. 
13). 

3. Repealer and new section filed 7-26-78; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Res- 
ister 78, No. 30). 

4. Amendment filed 1 1-22-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
48). 

5. Amendment of subsection (a)( 1) filed 8-1-97; operadve 8-3 1-97 (Register 97, 
No. 31). 

6. Amendment of subsection (a)(2) filed 7-29-98; operative 8-28-98 (Register 
98, No. 31). 

§ 3576. General Machine Requirements. 

(a) Stationary grinding machines shall be sufficiently heavy and rigid 
so as to prevent dangerous vibration and shall be securely mounted on 
substantial floors, benches, foundations or other adequate and safe struc- 
tures. 

(b) Portable grinders shall not be used as bench grinders unless they 
are securely clamped in place, having ample clearance between the 
wheels and the bench, and are equipped with standard wheel and arbor 
end guards and tool rests. "C" clamps shall not be used to secure grinders 
to benches. Special band clamps or other equivalent means shall be used 
which encircle the machine and are secured by means of bolts. 
NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 
1. Amendment of subsection (b) filed 1 1-22-85; effecfive thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register 85, No. 48). 

§ 3577. Protection Devices. 

(a) Abrasive wheel machinery guards shall meet the design specifica- 
tions of the American National Standard Safety Requirements for the 
Use, Care, and Protection of Abrasive Wheels, ANSI B 7.1-1978. This 
requirement shall not apply to natural sandstone wheels or metal, wood- 
en, cloth, or paper discs having a layer of abrasive on the surface. 

(b) Abrasive wheels shall be provided with protection hoods or safety 
guards which shall be of such design and construction as to effectively 
protect the employee from flying fragments of a bursting wheel insofar 
as the operation will permit. 

EXCEPTIONS: This requirement does not apply to the following classes of wheels 
and conditions. 

1 . Wheels used for internal work while within the work being ground. 

2. Special precision tool room grinders under the supervision of expert mechanics. 

3. Type 1 wheels not larger than 2 inches in diameter and not more than 1/2-inch 
thick, operating at peripheral speeds less than 1800 SFPM when mounted on man- 
drels driven by portable drills. 

4. Type 1 Reinforced wheels not more than 3 inches in diameter and 1/4-inch in 
thickness, operating at peripheral speeds not exceeding 9,500 SFPM, provided 
that safety glasses and face shield protection are worn. 

5. Types 16, 17, 18, ISRand 1 9 cones and plugs and threaded hole pot balls where 
the work offers protection or where the size does not exceed 3 inches in diameter 
by 5 inches long. 

6. Metal centered diamond lapidary wheels either notched, segmented or continu- 
ous rim used with a coolant deflector, when operated at speeds up to 3,500 SFPM. 

7. Mounted wheels 2 inches and smaller in diameter used in portable operations. 

8. Valve seat grinding wheels. 

(c) The hood guard shall cover the spindle end, nut, and flange projec- 
tions. The safety guard shall be mounted so as to maintain proper align- 
ment with the wheel, and the strength of the fastenings shall exceed the 
strength of the guard. 

Exceptions: 

1 . Protection hoods on cylindrical grinding machines, in all operations where the 
work provides a suitable measure of protection to the operator, may be so con- 
structed that the spindle end, nut, and flanges are exposed; and where the nature 
of the work is such as to entirely cover the side of the wheel, the side covers of the 
guard may be omitted. 

2. The spindle end, nut, and outer flange may be exposed on machines designed 
as portable saws. 

(d) Cup wheels shall be protected by; 

(1) Band type guards of such design and construction as to effectively 
protect the employee. 

(2) Special "Revolving Cup Guards" which mount behind the wheel 
and turn with it. They shall be made of steel or other material of adequate 
strength and shall enclose the wheel sides upward from the back for one- 
third of the wheel thickness. The mounting features shall conform with 



Page 614 



Register 98, No. 31; 7-31-98 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3579 



• 



all requirements of this section. It is necessary to maintain clearance be- 
tween the wheel side and the guard. This clearance shall not exceed one- 
sixteenth inch. 

(See Figures A-26, A-27, A-28 of Appendix G.) 

(e) Work rests. On offhand grinding machines, work rests shall be used 
to support the work. They shall be of rigid construction and designed to 
be adjustable to compensate for wheel wear. Work rests shall be kept ad- 
justed closely to the wheel with a maximum opening of one-eighth inch. 
The work rest shall be secured after each adjustment. The adjustment 
shall not be made with the wheel in motion. 
Exceptions: 

1 . Where the shape of the work will not permit their use. 

2. Where the size of the material is such that it cannot wedge between the guard 
and the wheel. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. Repealer of subsections (a) and (b) and new subsections (a) and (b) filed 
7-26-78; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 78, No. 30). 

2. Amendment filed 1 1-22-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 

48). 

§ 3578. Permissible Wheel Exposure for Periphery 
Grinding. 

(a) Bench and Floor Stands. The angular exposure of the grinding 
wheel periphery and sides for safety guards used on machines known as 
bench and floor stands should not exceed 90 degrees or one-fourth of the 
periphery. This exposure shall begin at a point not more than 65 degrees 
above the horizontal plane of the wheel spindle. (See Figure A-1 of Ap- 
pendix A.) 

Whenever the nature of the work requires contact with the wheel be- 
low the horizontal plane of the spindle, the exposure shall not exceed 125 
degrees. (See Figure A-2 of Appendix A.) 

(b) Cylindrical Grinders. The maximum angular exposure of the 
grinding wheel periphery and sides for safety guards used on cylindrical 
grinding machines shall not exceed 180 degrees. This exposure shall be- 
gin at a point not more than 65 degrees above the horizontal plane of the 
wheel spindle. (See Figure A-3 of Appendix A.) 

(c) Surface Grinders and Cutting Machines. The maximum angular 
exposure of the grinding wheel periphery and sides for safety guards used 
on cutting machines and on surface grinding machines which employ the 
wheel periphery shall not exceed 150 degrees. This exposure shall begin 
at a point not less than 15 degrees below the horizontal plane of the wheel 
spindle. (See Figure A^ of Appendix A.) 

(d) Swing Frame and Automatic Snagging Machines. The maximum 
angular exposure of the grinding wheel periphery and sides for safety 
guards used on machines known as swing frame and automatic snagging 
machines shall not exceed 1 80 degrees, and the top half of the wheel shall 
be protected at all times. (See Figure A-5 of Appendix A.) 

(e) Top Grinding. In operations where the work is ground on the top 
of the wheel, the exposure of the grinding wheel periphery shall be as 
small as practical, with a maximum exposure of 60 degrees. (See Figure 
A-6 of Appendix A.) 

(f) Guard Exposure Angles. The maximum exposure angles specified 
above shall not be exceeded. Visors or other accessory equipment shall 
not be included as a part of the guard when measuring the guard opening, 
unless such equipment has strength equal to that of the guard. 

(g) Exposure Adjustment. Guards of the types described in subsec- 
tions (a) and (b) of this section where the operator stands in front of the 
opening, shall be constructed so that the peripheral protecting member 
can be adjusted to the constantly decreasing diameter of the wheel. The 
maximum angular exposure above the horizontal plane of the wheel 
spindle as specified in subsections (a) and (b) of this section shall never 
be exceeded, and the distance between the wheel periphery and the ad- 
justable tongue or the end of the peripheral member at the top shall never 
exceed one-fourth inch. (See Figures A-7, 8, 9, 10, 1 1, and 12 of Appen- 
dix B.) 



Note: Authority cited: Section 142.3. LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3. La- 
bor Code. 

History 
1 . Amendment filed 1 1-22-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
48). 

§ 3579. Flanges — General Requirement. 

(a) All abrasive wheels shall be mounted between flanges which shall 
not be less than one-third the diameter of the wheel. 
Exceptions: 

(1 ) Mounted wheels. 

(2) Portable wheels with threaded inserts or projecting studs. 

(3) Abrasive discs (inserted nut, inserted washer and projecting stud type). 

(4) Plate mounted wheels. 

(5) Cylinders, cups, or segmental wheels that are mounted in chucks. 

(6) Types 27 and 28 wheels. 

(7) Certain internal wheels. 

(8) Modified Types 6 and 11 wheels (terrazzo). 

(9) Cutting-off wheels, Types 1 and 27 A: 

(A) Type 1 cutting-off wheels are to be mounted between properly relieved 
flanges which have matching bearing surfaces. Such flanges shall be at least one- 
fourth the wheel diameter. 

(B) Type 27 A cutting-off wheels are designed to be mounted by means of flat, not 
relieved, flanges having matching bearing surfaces and which may be less than 
one-third but shall not be less than one- fourth the wheel diameter. (See Figure 
A-1 3 of Appendix C for one such type of mounting.) 

Note: There are three general types of flanges: 

1. Straight reheved flanges. (See Figure A-1 6 of Appendix D.) 

2. Straight unrelieved flanges. (See Figure A-1 7 of Appendix D.) 

3. Adaptor flanges. (See Figures A-18 and A-19 of Appendix D.) 

(b) Regardless of flange type used, the wheel shall always be guarded. 
Blotters shall be used in accordance with subsection (g) of this section. 

(c) Finish and Balance. Flanges shall be dimensionally accurate and 
in good balance. There shall be no rough surfaces or sharp edges. 

(d) Uniformity of Diameters. 

Both flanges, of any type, between which a wheel is mounted, shall be 
of the same diameter and have equal bearing surface. 

EXCEPTIONS: 

( 1 ) Type 27 and Type 28 wheels because of their shape and usage, require specially 
designed adaptors. 

(2) Modified Types 6 and 1 1 wheels (terrazzo) with tapered K Dimensions. 

(e) Mounts which are affixed to the wheel by the manufacturer shall 
not be reused. Type 27 and Type 28 wheels shall be used only with a safe- 
ty guard located between wheel and operator during use. (See Figure 
A- 14 and A- 15 of Appendix C.) 

(f) Recess and Undercut. 

(1 ) Straight relieved flanges made according to Table A-1 and Figure 
A- 1 6 shall be recessed at least one-sixteenth inch on the side next to the 
wheel for a distance as specified in Table A-1. 

(2) Straight flanges of the adaptor or sleeve type (Table A-4 and Fig- 
ures A-18 and A-19) shall be undercut so that there will be no bearing 
on the sides of the wheel within one-eighth inch of the arbor hole. (Fig- 
ures A-18 and A-19 are illustrated in Appendix D.) 

(g) Blotters. Blotters (compressible washers) shall always be used be- 
tween flanges and abrasive wheel surfaces to insure uniform distribution 
of flange pressure. [See Section 3480(e).] 

EXCEPTIONS: 

(1) Mounted wheels. 

(2) Abrasive discs (inserted nut, inserted washer, and projecting stud type). 

(3) Plate mounted wheels. 

(4) Cylinders, cups, or segmental wheels that are mounted in chucks. 

(5) Types 27 and 28 wheels. 

(6) Certain Type 1 and Type 27A cutting-off wheels. 

(7) Certain internal wheels. 

(8) Type 4 tapered wheels. 

(9) Diamond wheels, except certain vitrified diamond wheels. 

(10) Modified Types 6 and 11 wheels (ten-azzo) — blotters applied flat side of 
wheel only. 

(h) Driving Flange. The driving flange shall be securely fastened to the 
spindle and the bearing surface shall run true. When more than one wheel 
is mounted between a single set of flanges, wheels may be cemented to- 
gether or separated by specially designed spacers. Spacers shall be equal 
in diameter to the mounting flanges and have equal bearing surfaces. [See 
Section 3480(f).] 



Page 615 



Register 98, No. 31; 7-31 -98 



§3580 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



(i) Dimensions. 

( 1 ) Tables A-1 and A-2 and Figures A-1 6 and A- 17 of Appendix D 
show minimum dimensions for straight relieved and unrelieved flanges 
for use with wheels with small holes that fit directly on the machine 
spindle. Dimensions of such flanges shall never be less than indicated 
and should be greater where practicable. 

(2) Tables A-3 and A-4 and Figures A- 18 and A- 19 of Appendix D 
show minimum dimensions for straight adaptor flanges for use with 
wheels having holes larger than the spindle. Dimensions of such adaptor 
flanges shall never be less than indicated and should be greater where 
practicable. 

(3) Table A-5 and Figure A- 19 of Appendix D show minimum dimen- 
sions for straight flanges that are an integral part of wheel sleeves which 
are frequently used on precision grinding machines. Dimensions of such 
flanges shall never be less than indicated and should be greater where 
practicable. 

(j) Repairs and maintenance. All flanges shall be maintained in good 
condition. When the bearing surfaces become worn, warped, sprung, or 
damaged they should be tnied or refaced. When refacing or tniing, care 
shall be exercised to make sure that proper relief and rigidity is main- 
tained as specified in subsection (0 of this section and they shall be re- 
placed when they do not conform to this subsection and Table A-2, Fig- 
ure A-17, Table A-3, Figure A-18, Table A-1. Figure A-16, and Table 
A-5, Figure A-1 9. Failure to observe these rules might cause excessive 
flange pressure around the hole of the wheel. This is especially true of 
wheel-sleeve or adaptor flanges. (Figures A-16, A-17, A-18 and A-19 
are illustrated in Appendix D.) 

NOTE; Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. Amendment filed 7-26-78; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 78, No. 
30). 

2. Repealer of subsections (d), (e) and (f) and relettering of existing subsections 
filed 2-20-80; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 80, No. 8). 

3. Amendment of subsections (j), (k), (1) and (p) filed 7-8-85; effective thirtieth 
day thereafter (Register 85, No. 28). 

4. Repealer and new section filed 11-22-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register 85, No. 48). 

§ 3580. Mounting. 

(a) Inspection. Immediately before mounting, all wheels shall be 
closely inspected and sounded by the user (ring test) to make sure they 
have not been damaged in transit, storage, or otherwise. The spindle 
speed of the machine shall be checked before mounting of the wheel to 
be certain that it does not exceed the maximum operating speed marked 
on the wheel. Wheels should be tapped gently with a light nonmetallic 
implement, such as the handle of a screwdriver for light wheels, or a 
wooden mallet for heavier wheels. If they sound cracked (dead), they 
shall not be used. 

Note: This is known as the "Ring Test." Wheels must be dry and free from saw- 
dust when applying the ring test, otherwise the sound will be deadened. It should 
also be noted that organic bonded wheels do not emit the same clear metallic ring 
as do vitrified and silicate wheels. "Tap" wheels about 45 degrees each side of the 
vertical centerline and about 1 or 2 inches from the periphery as indicated by the 
spots in Figure A-20 and Figure A-21 of Appendix E. Then rotate the wheel 45 
degrees and repeat the test. A sound and undamaged wheel will give a clear metal- 
lic tone. If cracked, there will be a dead sound and not a clear "ring." 

(b) Arbor size. Grinding wheels shall fit freely on the spindle and re- 
main free under all grinding conditions. A controlled clearance between 
the wheel hole and the machine spindle (or wheel sleeves or adaptors) is 
essential to avoid excessive pressure from mounting and spindle expan- 
sion. To accomplish this, the machine spindle shall be made to nominal 
(standard) size plus zero minus .002 inch, and the wheel hole shall be 
made suitably oversize to assure safety clearance under the conditions of 
operating heat and pressure. 

(c) Surface condition. All contact surfaces of wheels, blotters and 
flanges shall be flat and free of foreign matter. 

(d) Bushing. When a bushing is used in the wheel hole it shall not ex- 
ceed the width of the wheel and shall not contact the flanges. 



(e) Blotters. When blotters or flange facings of compressible material 
are required, they shall cover entire contact area of wheel flanges. Highly 
compressible material such as blotting paper as normally used should not 
exceed. 025 inch in thickness. If material of lower compressibility is used, 
greater thickness may be necessary. Blotters need not be used with the 
following types of wheels: 

(1) Mounted wheels. 

(2) Abrasive discs (inserted nut, inserted washer, and projecting-stud 
type). 

(3) Plate mounted wheels. 

(4) Cylinders, cups, or segmental wheels that are mounted in chucks. 

(5) Types 27 and 28 wheels. 

(6) Certain Type 1 and Type 27A cutting-off wheels. 

(7) Certain internal wheels. 

(8) Type 4 tapered wheels. 

(9) Diamond wheels, except certain vitrified diamond wheels. 

(f) Multiple wheel mounting. When more than one wheel is mounted 
between a single set of flanges, wheels may be cemented together or sep- 
arated by specially designed spacers. Spacers shall be equal in diameter 
to the mounting flanges and have equal bearing surfaces. When mount- 
ing wheels which have not been cemented together, or ones which do not 
utilize separating spacers, wheels specially manufactured for that pur- 
pose shall be used. 

(g) Replacing safety guard. After mounting a wheel, safety guard shall 
be properly positioned before starting the wheel. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . Repealer and new section filed 7-26-78; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Reg- 
ister 78, No. 30). 

2. Repealer and new section filed 11-22-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter 
(Register 85, No. 48). 

§3581. Speed. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . Repealer and new section filed 7-26-78; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Reg- 
ister 78, No. 30). 

2. Amendment filed 1 1-22-85; effecfive thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
48). 

3. Repealer filed 7-29-98; operative 8-28-98 (Register 98, No. 31). 

§ 3582. Storage. 

Abrasive wheels shall not be stored where they would be subjected to 
exposure to high temperature or humidity, water or other liquids, freez- 
ing temperature or any temperature low enough to cause condensation on 
the wheels when moved from storage to an area of higher temperature, 
or where they would be subjected to physical damage from falling tools 
or materials. 

NOTE: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. New section filed 7-26-78; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 78, No. 
30). 

2. New NOTE filed 1 1-22-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
48). 

FIGURES A- 15 through A-22 

Note: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. Amendment to the title of Figure A-1 5, and new Figure A-22 filed 7-26-78; 
effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 78, No. 30). 

2. Repealer filed 1 1-22-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 48) 

§ 3583. Portable Abrasive Wheels. 

(a) General requirements. Abrasive wheels shall be used only on ma- 
chines provided with safety guards as required in Section 3577(b). 

(b) A safety guard shall cover the spindle end, nut and flange projec- 
tions. The safety guard shall be mounted so as to maintain proper align- 
ment with the wheel, and the strength of the fastenings shall exceed the 
strength of the guard. 



• 



Page 616 



Register 98, No. 31; 7-31- 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3583 



EXCEPTIONS: 

( 1 ) Safety guards on all operations where the work provides a suitable measure of 
protection to the operator may be so constructed that the spindle end, nut and outer 
flange are exposed. Where the nature of the work is such as to entirely cover the 
side of the wheel, the side covers of the guard may be omitted. 

(2) The spindle end, nut, and outer flange may be exposed on portable machines 
designed for, and used with. Types 6, 1 1, 27, and 28 abrasive wheels, ciitting-off 
wheels, and tuck pointing wheels. 

(c) Cup wheels. Cup wheels (Types 6 and 1 1 ) shall be protected by: 

( 1 ) Safety guards as specified in this section; or 

(2) Special "Revolving Cup Guards" which mount behind the wheel 
and turn with it. They shall be made of steel or other material with ade- 
quate strength and shall enclose the wheel sides upward from the back 
for one-third of the wheel thickness. The mounting features shall con- 
form with all regulations. (See Section 3580.) It is necessary to maintain 
clearance between the wheel side and the guard. The clearance shall not 
exceed one-sixteenth inch; or, 

(3) Some other form of guard that will insure as good protection as that 
which would be provided by the guards specified in subsections (a) and 
(b) of this section. 

(d) Vertical portable grinders. Safety guards used on machines known 
as right angle head or vertical portable grinders shall have a maximum 
exposure angle of 1 80 degrees, and the guard shall be so located so as to 
be between the operator and the wheel during use. Adjustment of guard 
shall be such that pieces of an accidentally broken wheel will be deflected 
away from the operator. (See Figure A-22 of Appendix E.) 

(e) Other portable grinders. The maximum angular exposure of the 



ble grinding machines shall not exceed 180 degrees and the top half of 
the wheel shall be enclosed at all times. (See Figure A-23 of Appendix 
E.) 

(f) Mounting and inspection of abrasive wheels. 

( 1 ) Immediately before mounting, all wheels shall be closely inspected 
and sounded by the user to make sure they have not been damaged in tran- 
sit, storage, or otherwise. The spindle speed of the machine shall he 
checked before mounting of the wheel to be certain that it does not exceed 
the maximum operating speed marked on the wheel. 

(2) Grinding wheels shall fit freely on the spindle and remain free un- 
der all grinding conditions. A controlled clearance between the w heel 
hole and the machine spindle (or wheel sleeves or adaptors) is essential 
to avoid excessive pressure from mounting and spindle expansion. To ac- 
complish this, the machine spindle shall be made to nominal (standard) 
size plus zero minus .002 inch, and the wheel hole shall be made suitably 
oversize to assure safety clearance under the conditions of operating heat 
and pressure. 

(3) All contact surfaces of wheels, blotters, and flanges shall be flat and 
Iree of foreign matter. 

(4) When a bushing is used in the wheel hole it shall not exceed the 
width of the wheel and shall not contact the flanges. 

NOTE; Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1 . New section filed 1 1-22-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
48). 



grinding wheel periphery and sides for safety guards used on other porta- 

TABLE A-1 
MINIMUM DIMENSIONS FOR STRAIGHT RELIEVED FLANGES 



A* 


B 


C 


D 


E 




Minimum 


Radial Width of 


Minimum 


Minimum 




Outside 


Bearing Surface 


Thickness 


Thicknessof 










of Flange 
at Bote 


Flange at Edge 
MBecess 


of Wheel 


Flanges 


Minimum 


Maximum 


Inches 


Inches 


Inches 


Inches 


Inches 


Inches 


1 


% 


'/.. 


'A 


y.. 


'/.. 


2 


% 


% 


y,. 


% 


y« 


3 


1 


% 


y,. 


y,. 


y« 


4 


\% 


% 


y.. 


y.. 


'/. 


S 


1% 


y,. 


'/, 


y. 


% 


6 


2 


'A 


'A 


% 


y.. 


7 


2'/, 


V, 


% 


% 


y.. 


8 


3 


'/4 


% 


y. 


y.. 


10 


3V4 


y.. 


y. 


V, 


'/, 


12 


4 


y.. 


y. 


% 


y.. 


14 


4'>4 


% 


y. 


'/. 


y.. 


16 


5'/, 


V4 


1 


% 


y.. 


18 


6 


% 


1 


% 


% 


20 


7 


% 


1'/, 


% 


y. 


22 


7'/. 


% 


1'/. 


y. 


v.. 


24 


8 


% 


IV, 


y. 


y,. 


26 


8'/, 


% 


l'/4 


y. 


'/a 


28 


10 


'/. 


1V4 


y. 


'/. 


30 


10 


% 


I'A 


y« 


% 


36 


12 


1 


2 


% 


y. 


42 


14 


1 


2 


y. 


y. 


48 


16 


ly. 


2 


1% 


1 


60 


20 


1% 


2 


r/. 


1'/. 


72 


24 


I'A 


2'/. 


ly. 


VA 



' Flanges for wheels under 2 inches diameter may be unrelieved and shall be maintained Oat and true. 



Note: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 



History 

1 . New NOTE filed 1 1-22-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85. No. 
48). 



Page 617 



(4-1-90) 



§3583 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



TABLE A-2 

MINIMUM DIMENSIONS FOR STRAIGHT UNRELIEVED FLANGES FOR 

WHEELS WITH THREADED INSERTS OR PROJECTING STUDS 



Diameter of Wheel 

Inches 

1 
2 
3 
4 
5 
6 



B* 


T 


Minimum Outside 


Minimum Thickness 


Diameter of Flange 


of Flange 


Inches 


Inches 


ys 


% 


1 


% 


1 


y.6 


1% 


y,6 


1% 


" % 


2 


% 



Note: *Must be lai-ge enough to extend beyond the bushing. Where prong anchor 
or cupback bushing are used, this footnote does not apply. 
Note: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 



History 
1. New NOTE filed 1 1-22-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No 
48). 



TABLE A-3 
MINIMUM DIMENSIONS FOR STRAIGHT ADAPTOR FLANGE 
—FOR ORGANIC BONDED WHEELS OVER 1 1/4 INCH THICK * 







B 


D 


E 
Minimum 


F» 


WYte^ Diameter 


Wheel 


Minimum 


Minimum 


Thickness of 


(D-E) 




Hole 


Flange 


Thickness of 


Flange at Edge 
of Undercut 


Minimum 




Diameter 


Diameter 


Flange at Bore 


Thickness 



Inches 


Inches 


Inches 


Inches 


Inches 


Inches 


12 


4 


6 


% 


y. 


'/. 


to 


5 


7 


y. 


% 


Vi 


14 


6 


8 


% 


% 


'/. 



Larger than 


4 


6 


% 


% 


'/. 


14 


5 


7 


% 


% 


y. 


to 


6 


8 


y. 


% 


'/, 


18 


7 


9 


y. 


y. 


% 




8 


10 


% 


% 


'/. 


Larger than 


6 


8 


1 


Va 


'/. 


18 


7 


9 


1 


'/» 


Va 


to 


8 


10 


1 


% 


'/a 


24 


10 


12 


1 


% 


•/a 




12 


14 


1 


'A 


'/a 



Larger than 24 to 30 


12 


15 


1 


Vi 


'/a 


Larger than 30 to 36 


12 


15 


1% 


y. 


Va 



* For wheels tinder IV4 inch thick F dimension shall not exceed 40% of wheel thickness. 

Note: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- HISTORY 

bor Code. 1 . New NOTE filed 11-22-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 

48). 

TABLE A-4 
MINIMUM DIMENSIONS FOR STRAIGHT FLANGES— FOR MECHANICAL 

GRINDERS 
12,500 S.F.P.M. to 16,500 S.F.P.M.l 



Wheel 
Diameter 





"B" Minimum 


Wheel Hole 


Flange 


Diameter 


Diameter 


6 


8 


8 


10 


12 


15 


12 


15 


12 


IS 



"D" Minimum 

Thickness of 

Flange at Bore 



"E" Minimum 
Thickness of 

Flange at Edge 
of Undercut 



F* (D-E) 
Minimum 
Thickness 



ao 

24 
30 
36 



1 

I'/s 

2 

2 

2 



' FLANGES shall be of steel, 'quality SAE 1040 or eauivalent, annealed plate, heat treated to P 25-30. 
'For wheels under i'A inch thick f" dimension shall not exceed 40% ot wheel thickness. 



Note: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 



History 
1 . New NOTE filed 1 1-22-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
48). 



Page 618 



(4-1-90) 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§ 3583 



TABLE A-5 

MINIMUM DIMENSIONS FOR STRAIGHT FLANGES USED AS 

WHEEL SLEEVES FOR PRECISION GRINDING ONLY 











E 






B 


D 


Miatmum 






Minimum Outside 


Minimum Thickness 


TUcknessof 




Wheel 


Diameter of 


of Flange 


FUnge at Edge 
of Undercut 


Wheel Dimeter 


Hole Diameter 


FUnge 


MtBore 


Incbe* 


Inches 


Inches 


Inches 


Inchei 


12 to 14 


5 


7 


'/. 


y.. 




5 


7 


% 


Vi. 




6 


8 


% 


v.. 


Larger thui 14 to 20 


8 


10 


% 


y.. 




10 


UV4 


% 


y,. 




12 


13'/, 


y. 


y.. 




a 


10 


% 


'/. 


Larger than 20 to 30 


10 


nV4 


% 


% 




12 


1314 


y. 


•A 




IS 


17% 


% 


% 




12 


13V4 


y. 


% 




16 


17% 


% 


V4 


Larger than 30 to 42 


la 


19% 


% 


V4 




20 


21% 


y. 


y. 




16 


20 


1 


y. 


Larger than 42 to 60 


20 


24 


1 


% 




24 


29 


1% 


% 



Able: These flanges nuy be clamped together by means of a central nut, or by a series of bolts or some other equivalent 
means of fastening. For hole sizes smaUer than shown in this table, use table A-1. 



Note: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 



History 
1. New NOTE filed 1 1-22-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 
48). 

TABLE A-6 
GUIDE FOR CONSTRUCTION OF BAND TYPE GUARDS 

Maximum Wheel Speed 7000 SFPM 



Mmimuin 

Material 

Specifications 


Diameter of 
Wheel 


Minimum 

Thickness 

of Band 

A 


Minimum 
Diameter 
of Rivets 


Maximum 

Distance 

between 

Centers of 

Rivets 




Inches 


Inches 


Inches 


Inches 




Under 8 


Yi. 


'A« 


% 


Hot Rolled Steel SAE 1008 


8 to 24 


% 


Vi 


I 




Over 24 to 30 


V< 


% 


1% 



Note: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- HISTORY 

bor Code. 1 • New Tables A-7 through A-1 8 filed 7-26-78; effective thirtieth day thereafter 

History (Register 78, No. 30). 

1 . New NOTE filed 1 1-22-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, No. 2. Repealer of Tables A-7 through A-18 filed 1 1-22-85; effective thirtieth day 

4g) thereafter (Register 85, No. 48). 

TABLES A-7 through A-18 



Page 619 



(4-1-90) 



§ App. A 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



Appendix A 




FIGURE A-1 



FIGURE A-2 




FIGURE A-3 








«tf.««tSfSu. 





FIGURE A-5 

Note: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 



HGURE A-6 

History 

1. New Appendix A filed 11-22-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 
85.No. 48). 



Page 620 



(4-1-90) 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§ App. B 



Appendix B 





HGURE A-7 FIGURE A-8 

CORRECT 

Showing adjustable tongue giving required angular protection for all sizes of wheel used. 





FIGURE A-9 



FIGURE A-10 



CORRECT 

Showing movable guard with opening small enough to give required protection for 
smallest size wheel used. 





FIGURE All 



FIGURE A-12 



INCORRECT 



Showing movable guard with size of opening correct for full size wheel but too large for 
smaller wheels. 

Note: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- HISTORY 

bor Code. 1 • New Appendix B filed 1 1-22-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85. 

No. 48). 



Page 621 



(4-1-90) 



§ App. C 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



Appendix C 



ruT ruNOa 




L MOUNTINO lOm 



The Type 27 A Wheel is mounted between flat unrelieved flanges of equal bearing sur- 
faces. 

FIGURE A-13 





IMCOkltCT 
IMnOTf IIT MOUNTW 

nn 7t wwti 
One type of adaptor for a Type 27 wheel 

FIGURE A-14 7' and 9' diameter types 27 and 28 wheels, 

because of their shape, require specially 
designed adaptors. 
FIGURE A-I5 



Note: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- HISTORY 

bor Code 1- New Appendix C filed 1 1-22-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Reeister 

85,No. 48). 

Appendix D 



^Wr-4 



r^//^/A I V///^ rrr/////A \ V//?2^ X 



— B 

Simitki reUtvtd. 

FIGURE A-16 



Straight unrelieved. 



FIGURE A-17 







Aiaptor, 

FIGURE A-18 



eT \ \lblottebs 
corner u'cut 



BLOTTERS 
CORNER U'CUT 



Slttvt adaptor. 

FIGURE A-19 



Note: Authority cited: Section 142.3, LaborCode. Reference: Section 142.3, La- HISTORY 

bor Code ^ • New Appendix D filed 1 1-22-85 ; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85, 

No. 48). 



Page 622 



(4-1-90) 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§ App. F 



Appendix E 




SHWart ••• itMM li*r* Saw 



FIGURE A-20 



FIGURE A-21 








'■''SeweifO^ 



FIGURE A-22 



nCURE A-23 



Note: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- HISTORY 

bor Code. 1 . New Appendix E filed 1 1-22-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Rceister 83, 

No. 48). 



Appendix F 




Rpmove this portion- 



FIGURE A-24 
Modified wheel guard for use with flat surface wheel 



Remove this portioti 



D 




If this portion is removed 

relocate as shown. 

nCURE A-25 

Modified wheel guards for use with saucer-shaped surface wheels 



Note: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- HISTORY 

bor Code. 1 . New Appendix F filed 1 1-22-85; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85. 

No. 48). 



Page 623 



(4-1-90J 



§ App. G 



BARCLAYS CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS 



Title 8 



Appendix G 




MAXIMUM 

CIEARANCE 

1/14" 



NOTE KEUEP 



FIGURE A-26 

An unthreaded hole cup wheel and revolving cup 

guard assembly. Note rehefin guard 

which acts as a flange. 




MAXIMUM 
CIEARANCE 

1/16** 



NOTE NO tEllCP 



FIGURE A-27 

Type II cup wheel showing threaded prong-anchor 

bushing molded into back, and revolving cup 

guard. Note there is no relief between 

guard and wheel bushing. 




^GuAWSLorreofVftADJUSTMeNr 

fORtl>H£:£Lll€Mt 

FIGURE A-28 
Type 6 cup wheel showing band type guard. 



Note: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 



History 

1 . New Appendix G filed 1 1-22-85 ; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 85 . 
No. 48). 



Page 624 



(4-1-90) 



Title 8 



General Industry Safety Orders 



§3622 



Group 4. 



General Mobile Equipment and 
Auxiliaries 



Article 23. Mobile Ladder Stands and 
Scaffolds (Towers) 

§ 3620. Scope. 

This standard prescribes mles and requirements for the design, con- 
staiction, and use of mobile work platforms (including ladder stands but 
not including aerial ladders) and rolling (mobile) scaffolds (towers). 
NOTH: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 

History 

1. New Article 23 (Sections 3620-3627) filed 11-12-75; effective thirtieth day 
thereafter (Register 75, No. 46). 

2. Amendment filed 10-12-84; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 84, No. 
41). 

§3621. Definitions. 

Brace. A tie that holds one scaffold member in a fixed position with 
respect to another member. 

Climbing Ladder. A separate ladder with equally spaced rungs usually 
attached to the scaffold structure for climbing and descending. 

Coupler. A device for locking together the components of a tubular 
metal scaffold which shall be designed and used to safely support the 
maximum intended loads. 

Design Working Load. The maximum intended load, that is, the total 
of all loads including the weight of the workers, materials, and equip- 
ment. 

Elevated Work Level. The elevated platform, used for supporting 
workers and their materials, comprising the necessary vertical, horizon- 
tal, and diagonal braces, guardrails and ladder for access to the work plat- 
form. 

Ladder Stand. A mobile fixed size self-supporting ladder consisting 
of a wide flat tread ladder in the form of stairs. The assembly may include 
handrails but does not include a platform. 

Ledger. A horizontal member of a scaffold upon which the platform 
rests and which may be supported by ribbons. 

Mobile. In connection with this Article, the term "mobile" shall mean 
"manually propelled." 

Mobile Scaffold (Tower). A light, medium, or heavy duty scaffold 
mounted on casters or wheels. 

Mobile Work Platform. A fixed work level on casters or wheels, with 
bracing diagonally from platform to vertical frame. 

Ribbon. A horizontal scaffold member which extends from post to 
post and which supports the ledger forming a tie between the posts. 

Scaffold. Any temporary elevated platform and its necessary vertical, 
diagonal, and horizontal members used to support workers and materials. 
(Also known as a scaffold tower.) 

Tube and Coupler Scaffold. An assembly consisting of tubing which 
serves as posts, ledgers, braces, ties, and ribbons, a base supporting the 
posts, and special couplers which serve to connect the uprights and to join 
the various members. 

Tubular Welded Frame Scaffold. A sectional, panel or frame metal 
scaffold substantially built up of prefabricated welded sections, which 
consist of posts and ledgers with intermediate connecting members and 
braced with diagonal or cross braces. 

Tubular Welded Sectional Folding Scaffold. A sectional, folding met- 
al scaffold either of ladder frame or inside stairway design, substantially 
built of prefabricated welded sections, which consist of end frames, plat- 
form frame, inside inclined stairway frame and braces, or hinge-con- 
nected diagonal and horizontal braces, capable of being folded into a flat 
package when the scaffold is not in use. 

NOTIi: Authority cited: Section 142.3, Labor Code. Reference: Section 142.3, La- 
bor Code. 



History 
1 , Amendment filed 10-1 2-84; effective thirtieth day thereafter (Register 84, No. 
41). 

§ 3622. General. 

(a) "All scaffolds shall be erected in accordance with the provisions 
of Article 21 of the Construction Safety Orders." 

(b) Load Rating. 

( 1 ) The design working load of ladder stands shall be calculated on the 
basis of one or more 200-pound persons together with 50 pounds of 
equipment each. 

(2) The design load of all scaffolds shall be calculated on the basis of: 

(A) Light — Designed and constructed to carry a working load of 25 
pounds per square foot. 

(B) Medium — Designed and constructed to carry a working load of 50 
pounds per square foot. 

(C) Heavy — Designed and constructed to carry a working load of 
75 pounds per square foot. 

(3) All ladder stands and scaffolds shall be capable of supporting at 
least 4 times the design working load. 

(c) Materials. The materials used in mobile ladder stands and scaffolds 
shall be selected to safely support the design working load and shall be 
maintained to protect against corrosion and deterioration. 

(d) Fasteners. Nails, bolts, or other fasteners used in the construction 
of ladders, scaffolds, and towers shall be of adequate size and in suffi- 
cient numbers at each connection to develop the designed strength of the 
unit. Nails shall be driven full length. (All nails shall be immediately 
withdrawn from dismantled lumber.) 

(e) Workmanship. All exposed surfaces shall be free from sharp edges, 
burrs, or other laceration hazards. 

(f) Work Lev